Department of Computer Science and Engineering

Curriculum and Syllabi

Regulations-2022

Dr. N.G.P. INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

(An Autonomous Institution)
(Approved by AICTE, New Delhi & Affiliated to Anna University,
Chennai),
Recognized by UGC, NewDelhi & Accredited by NAAC with ‘A+’ Grade and NBA
(BME, CSE, ECE, EEE & Mechanical)

Dr. N. G. P. NAGAR, KALAPATTI MAIN ROAD

 Dr. N.G.P. Institute of Technology, Coimbatore – 641048
(An Autonomous Institution)
Approved by AICTE, New Delhi & Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai
Recognized by UGC & Accredited by NAAC with A+ Grade and
NBA (BME, CSE, ECE, EEE and Mechanical)

Dr.N.G.P. Institute of Technology, established in the year 2007 by Dr. Nalla G Palaniswami, is
anAutonomousInstitutionaccreditedbyNAACwithA+Grade.TheInstitutionoffers9Undergraduate
Programmes and 4 Post Graduate Programmes in Engineering and Technologyin addition to MBA.
Undergraduate Programmes (BME, CSE, ECE, EEE &Mech) have been accredited and reaccredited by
the National Board of Accreditation, NewDelhi.

Distinct/Salient Features

1. Choice Based Credit System

2. Industry Driven curriculum
3. Project-based learning
4. Competency enhancement through one credit courses
5. International collaborations with Universities abroad

Vision and Mission of the Institute

Vision
To empower the students for succeeding in a changing world to become productive engineers and
responsible citizens.

Mission
The stated vision of the institution will be achieved by:
MI1: Producing graduates with sound technical knowledge and skills in diverse engineering
disciplines.
MI2: Adopting innovative teaching and experiential learning practices by competent faculty.
MI3: Enhancing knowledge and skills in cutting edge technologies through alliances with industry and
research organizations.
MI4: Creating conducive learning environment with state-of-art infrastructure and laboratories.
MI5: Inculcating ethical standards among students, both societal and personal through outreach
programs.
Department of Computer Science and Engineering

The Department of Computer Science and Engineering was established in year [Link] department
prepares engineers and researchers through an intensely personal engagement in a set of research
activities that span the development of fundamental knowledge about computational processes, the
design of new computing systems and methods, and the creation of novel applications that benefit
society at large. This program consists of a carefully designed computer science core, surrounded by
an extensive array of challenging technical elective courses. Over the years the department has
developed to become a centre of excellence providing in-depth technical knowledge and opportunities
for innovation and research with well equipped computer facilities and dedicated faculty. The
Department has various industry collaborative centers and MOU signed with ORACLE Workforce
Development Program Centre, CISCO Networking Academy, IBM Centre of Excellence, EMC² Academic
Alliance, AOSTA Technology Incubation Center, Lakhshya Cyber Security Center which aids the
students to meet the global challenges of the Engineering Industries.

Vision and Mission of the Department

Vision

To produce the technically competent Computer Science and Engineering professionals to meet the
technological needs of the society.

Mission

The stated vision of the Department of Computer Science and Engineering will be achieved by:

M1: Imparting technical skills in Computer Science and Engineering through innovative teaching-
learning methods.

M2: Collaborating with Corporate, Research Organizations and Professional Societies to enhance
Research activities.

M3: Establishing modern computing facilities and Industry supported centres for Skill Enrichment.

M4: Inculcating ethical values, social awareness and responsibility among staff and students to serve
the society.
Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)

The graduates of Computer Science and Engineering programme will

PEO1: Have successful career as Software Engineer, Technocrat, Network Administrator with
knowledge in emerging technologies of computer science and engineering.

PEO2: Formulate, analyse and provide innovative solutions to real world problems in computer
science and engineering.

PEO3: Exhibit lifelong learning, team work and ethical behaviour in their chosen profession.

Program Outcomes and Program Specific Outcomes (PO and PSO)

Program Outcomes as stated by NBA:
After the successful completion of B.E program in Computer Science and Engineering, students will be
able to:
PO1: Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
PO2: Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences and engineering sciences.
PO3: Design / Development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration
for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
PO4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the
information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5: Modern tool usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an
understanding of the limitations.
PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.
PO7: Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts and demonstrate the knowledge of and need for
sustainable development.
PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
PO9: Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in
diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO10: Communication: Communicate effectively in complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear
instructions.
PO11: Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one's own work, as a member and leader
in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

Program Specific Outcomes

After the successful completion of BE Programme in Computer Science and Engineering, the students
will be able to
PSO1: Design and develop hardware and software based systems, evaluate and recognize potential
risks and provide creative solutions
PSO2: Analyze and formulate solutions to real world and socially relevant problems over multi
disciplinary domains by using latest technologies.
PSO3: Be a technically competent employee, researcher, and entrepreneur, excel in competitive exams
and zest for higher studies.
 Category wise distribution of credits

S. No. Category Credits

Humanities and Social Science including

1. 13
Management Courses(HS)

2. Basic Science Courses(BS) 23

3. Engineering Sciences Courses (ES) 27

4. Professional Core Courses(PC) 60

5. Professional Elective Courses(PE) 18

6. Open Elective Courses(OE) 9

Project Work, Seminar and Internship in

7.
Industry(EEC) 15

8. Mandatory Courses(Non-Credit) Non-credit

Total 165
 R2022 – CURRICULUM
Humanities and Social Sciences (HS)

COURSE
COURSETITLE L T P C CA ES Total
CODE
22UEN101 Communicative English 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UEN201 Technical English 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UOC103 Heritage of Tamil 1 0 0 1 100 - 100

22UOC203 Tamils and Technology 1 0 0 1 100 - 100

22UOC204 Professional Ethics 1 0 0 1 100 - 100

Interpersonal Skills &
22UEN301 0 0 2 1 60 40 100
Personality Development
Project and Finance
Management/ Principles of
Management/ Business and 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Corporate Social
Responsibility

Basic Sciences (BS)

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C CA ES Total
CODE
22UMA101 Matrices and Calculus 3 1 0 4 40 60 100
22UPH101 Engineering Physics 2 0 0 2 40 60 100
22UCH101 Engineering Chemistry 2 0 0 2 40 60 100
22UOC101/
22UOC201/ Biology for Engineers 1 0 0 1 100 - 100
22UOC301
22UBS102 Basic Science Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100
Complex Variables and
22UMA201 3 1 0 4 40 60 100
Transforms
Physics for information
22UPH201 2 0 0 2 40 60 100
Science
Environmental Science and
22UBS201 2 0 0 0 100 - 100
Engineering
22UMA301 Discrete Structures 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
22UOC102/
22UOC202/ Design Thinking 1 0 0 1 100 - 100
22UOC302
22UMA402 Probability and Statistics 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Engineering Sciences(ES)

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C CA ES Total
CODE
22UCS101 Programming in C 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Basics of Electrical and
22UEE102 2 0 0 2 40 60 100
Electronics Engineering

PC Hardware and
22UCS103 0 0 2 1 60 40 100
Troubleshooting laboratory

Programming in C
22UCS102 0 0 2 1 60 40 100
Laboratory
Computer Organization And
22UCS201 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Architecture
22UIT201 Python Programming 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Digital Principles And
22UIT202 2 0 2 3 50 50 100
System Design
22UME203 Engineering Graphics 2 0 2 3 50 50 100
Python Programming
22UIT203 0 0 2 1 60 40 100
Laboratory
22UIT302 Java Programming 3 0 2 4 40 60 100
Microprocessor and
22UEE408 2 0 2 1 50 50 100
Microcontroller
Professional Core (PC)

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C CA ES Total
CODE

22UCS301 Data Structures Concepts 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Formal Languages And

22UCS302 3 1 0 4 40 60 100
Automata Theory

22UCS303 Data Science for Engineers 2 0 0 2 40 60 100

Data Structures Concepts

22UCS304 0 0 4 2 60 40 100
Laboratory
22UCS401 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Database Management
22UCS402 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
System
22UCS403 Compiler Design 3 1 0 4 40 60 100
Design And Analysis Of
22UCS404 2 0 2 3 50 50 100
Algorithms
Operating Systems
22UCS405 0 0 4 2 60 40 100
Laboratory
Database Management
22UCS406 0 0 4 2 60 40 100
Systems Laboratory
22UCS501 Computer Networks 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UCS502 Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UIT501 Web Programming 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Object Oriented Software
22UCS503 2 0 2 3 50 50 100
Engineering
22UIT506 Web Programming Lab 0 0 4 2 60 40 100

22UCS504 Computer Networks Lab 0 0 4 2 60 40 100

22UCS601 Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Cryptography And Network

22UCS602 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Security

22UCS603 Cloud Computing 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UCS604 Internet Of Things 2 0 2 3 50 50 100

Cloud Computing
22UCS605 0 0 4 2 60 40 100
Laboratory

22UCS606 Network Security Laboratory 0 0 4 2 60 40 100

Professional Electives (PE)

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C CA ES Total
CODE
Computational Statistics and
3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Inference Theory

Business Analytics 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Mining of Massive Datasets 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Web Mining 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Time Series Analysis and
3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Forecasting
Social Network Analytics 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Computer Vision 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Big data Analytics 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Web Technologies 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

App Development 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Cloud Services Management 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Software Testing and
3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Automation

Web Application Security 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Dev-Ops 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Principles of Programming
3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Languages

Virtualization 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Cloud Services Management 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Network Protocols and

3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Programming

Software Defined Networks 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Storage Area Networks 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Data Warehousing and Data

3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Mining

Stream Processing 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Digital Currency
3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Programming
Crypto currency and
3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Blockchain Technologies
Social Networking and
3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Security

Security and Privacy in Cloud 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Augmented Reality / Virtual

3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Reality

Multimedia and Animation 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Video creation and Editing 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

UI and UX Design 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Digital Marketing 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Visual Effects 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Game Development 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Multimedia Data
3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Compression and Storage

Knowledge Engineering 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Bayesian Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Neural Networks and Deep

3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Learning

Text and Speech Analysis 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Information Retrieval 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Cognitive Science 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Open Electives (OE)

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C CA ES Total
CODE
Hospital Waste
22OBM101 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Management

22OBM102 Holistic Nutrition 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Biometric and its

22OBM103 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Applications
Biotechnology in Health
22OBM104 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Care

22OCE101 Solid Waste Management 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22OCE102 Disaster Management 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Smart Materials And Smart

22OCE103 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Structures

22OEC101 Telemedicine 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22OEC102 Vehicle Infotronics 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Transducers and
22OEC103 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Instrumentation

22OEE101 Renewable Energy Systems 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22OEE102 E-Mobility 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22OEE103 Electronics In Automobiles 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Energy Conservation And

22OEE104 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Audit
Smart Sensors for Industrial
22OEE105 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Applications
Product Design And
22OME101 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Development

22OME102 3D Printing Technology 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22OME103 Robotics 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Fundamentals Of Drone
22OME104 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Technology
Nanomaterials And
22OPH101 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Applications
Laser Systems And
22OPH102 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Applications
Corrosion Science And
22OCH101 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Engineering

22OCH102 Green Technology 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

One Credit Courses

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C CA ES Total
CODE

22UOC007 UI/UX 1 0 0 1 100 - 100

22UOC008 Devops 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UOC009 React node JS 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UOC010 Kubernetes 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Machine Learning with

22UOC020 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Tensorflow
Full stack development and
22UOC021 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Server Handling

22UOC022 Drone Technologies 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

IT infrastructure and
22UOC023 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
operations
Business and E-Commerce
22UOC024 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Website
Business Communication
22UOC025 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
and Etiquette
22UOC026 Digital Marketing 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

Automation in Industry 4.0

22UOC027 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
using Python

22UOC028 Data Analytics using Python 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UOC029 JavaScript Fundamentals 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

22UOC030 React JS 3 0 0 3 40 60 100

 DEPARTMENTOFCOMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
R2022- CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS
Minimum Credits to be Earned:165

SEMESTER I

Maximum Marks
Hours/
CodeNo. Course L T P C Category
Week
CA ES Total

Theory

22UEN101 Communicative English 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 HS

22UMA101 Matrices And Calculus 3 1 0 4 4 40 60 100 BS

22UPH101 Engineering Physics 2 0 0 2 2 40 60 100 BS

22UCH101 Engineering Chemistry 2 0 0 2 2 40 60 100 BS

22UCS101 Programming In C 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 ES

Basics Of Electrical and

22UEE102 2 0 0 2 2 40 60 100 ES
Electronics Engineering

One credit courses

Liberal Arts- Heritage of

22UOC103 1 0 0 1 1 100 - 100 HS
Tamil**

22UOC204 Professional Ethics 1 0 0 0 1 - - - HS

Practicals

22UBS102 Basic Science Laboratory 0 0 2 1 2 60 40 100 BS

Programming In C
22UCS102 0 0 2 1 2 60 40 100 ES
Laboratory
PC Hardware and
22UCS103 Troubleshooting 0 0 2 1 2 60 40 100 ES
Laboratory
Total 17 1 6 20 24 -
 SEMESTER II

Maximum Marks
Hours
CodeNo. Course L T P C Category
/Week
CA ES Total

Theory
22UEN201 Technical English 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 HS
Complex Variables and
22UMA201 3 1 0 4 4 40 60 100 BS
Transforms
Physics For Information
22UPH201 2 0 0 2 2 40 60 100 BS
Science
Computer Organization
22UCS201 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 ES
and Architecture

22UIT201 Python Programming 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 ES

22UME203 Engineering Graphics 2 0 2 3 4 40 60 100 ES

Theory cum laboratory course

Digital Principles and

22UIT202 2 0 2 3 4 50 50 100 ES
System Design

Practicals

Python Programming
22UIT203 0 0 2 1 2 60 40 100 ES
Laboratory

22UOC205 STEM Project 0 0 2 1 2 100 - 100 EEC

One credit courses

Liberal Arts- Tamils and

22UOC203 1 0 0 1 1 100 - 100 HS
Technology**

22UOC204 Professional Ethics 1 0 0 1 1 50 - 50 HS

Non credit mandatory course

Environmental Science
22UBS201 2 0 0 0 2 100 - 100 BS
and Engineering

Total 22 1 6 25 31 -

** As per the guidelines of Center for Academic courses - Anna University-Chennai, Heritage of
Tamils & Tamils and Technology courses will be offered in II and III semesters respectively for the
students admitted in the academic year 2022-2023.
 SEMESTER III

Hours Maximum Marks

Code No. Course L T P C
/Week Category
CA ES Total
Theory
22UMA301 Discrete Structures 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 BS
Data Structures
22UCS301 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC
Concepts
Formal Languages and
22UCS302 3 1 0 4 4 40 60 100 PC
Automata Theory
22UCS303 Data Science Essentials 2 0 0 2 2 40 60 100 PC

Open Elective-I 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 OE

Theory cum laboratory course

Microprocessors and
22UEE408 2 0 2 3 4 50 50 100 ES
Micro Controllers

22UIT304 Java Programming 3 0 2 4 5 40 60 100 ES

Practicals

Data Structures
22UCS304 0 0 4 2 4 60 40 100 ES
Concepts Laboratory

22UCS305 Idea Sprint 0 0 2 0 2 - - - EEC

One credit courses

22UOC301/ Biology for Engineers/

1 0 0 1 1 100 - 100 BS
22UOC302 Design Thinking

Interpersonal Skills &

22UEN301 Personality 0 0 2 1 2 60 40 100 HS
Development
Total 20 1 12 26 33 -
 SEMESTER IV

Maximum Marks
Hours
Code No. Course L T P C Category
/Week
CA ES Total

Theory

22UMA402 Probability and Statistics 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 BS

22UCS401 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC

Database Management
22UCS402 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC
System
22UCS403 Compiler Design 3 1 0 4 4 40 60 100 PC

Open Elective II 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 OE

Theory cum laboratory course

Design And Analysis Of
22UCS404 2 0 2 3 4 50 50 100 PC
Algorithms
Practicals
Operating Systems
22UCS405 0 0 4 2 4 60 40 100 PC
Laboratory
Database Management
22UCS406 0 0 4 2 4 60 40 100 PC
System Laboratory
22UCS407 Design Sprint 0 0 2 2 2 60 40 100 EEC

One credit course

22UOC301/ Biology for Engineers/
1 0 0 1 1 100 - 100 BS
22UOC302 Design Thinking
Non credit mandatory course

Integrated Aptitude Skill I 2 0 0 0 2 100 - 100 EEC

Total 18 1 12 26 32 -
 SEMESTER V

Hours Maximum Marks

Code No. Course L T P C Category
/Week CA ES Total

Theory

22UCS501 Computer Networks 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC

22UCS502 Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC

22UIT501 Web Technology 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC

Professional Elective I 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PE

Open Elective – III 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 OE

Theory cum laboratory course

Object Oriented Software
22UCS503 2 0 2 3 4 50 50 100 ES
Engineering
Practicals

22UIT506 Web Technology Lab 0 0 4 2 2 60 40 100 PC

22UCS504 Computer Networks Lab 0 0 4 2 2 60 40 100 PC

22UCS505 Code Sprint 0 0 2 0 2 - - - EEC

Mandatory course
Internship/Industrial
0 0 0 1 0 60 40 100 EEC
Training
Non credit mandatory course

Integrated Aptitude Skill II 2 0 0 0 2 40 60 100 EEC

Total 19 0 12 23 27 -
 SEMESTER VI

Maximum Marks
Hours/
Code No. Course L T P C Category
Week
CA ES Total

Theory

22UCS601 Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC

Cryptography And Network
22UCS602 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC
Security
22UCS603 Cloud Computing 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PC
Project And Finance
Management/ Principles Of
Management/ Business And 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 HS
Corporate Social
Responsibility
Professional Elective II 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PE

Theory cum laboratory course

22UCS604 Internet Of Things 2 0 2 3 4 50 50 100 PC

Practicals

22UCS605 Cloud Computing Laboratory 0 0 4 2 2 60 40 100 PC

22UCS606 Network Security Laboratory 0 0 4 2 2 60 40 100 PC

22UCS607 Sprint Retrospective 0 0 2 2 2 60 40 100 EEC

Total 17 0 12 24 25 -
 SEMESTER VII

Hours Maximum Marks

Code No. Course L T P C Category
/Week CA ES Total

Theory

Professional Elective III 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PE

Professional Elective IV 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PE

Professional Elective V 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PE

Professional Elective VI 3 0 0 3 3 40 60 100 PE

Total 12 0 0 12 12 -

SEMESTER VIII

Hours Maximum Marks Categ

Code No. Course L T P C /Week CA ES Total ory

22UCS801 Project Work 0 0 18 9 18 40 60 100 EEC

Total 0 0 18 9 18 -
SEMESTER–I
 L T P C Hours
22UEN101 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
3 0 0 3 45
Common to All Branches of B. E/B. Tech.
Prerequisites: Basic Knowledge in Language usage
Course objectives: This Course aims to
❖ Enhance learners’ listening skills in general and technical contexts.
❖ Improve learners’ speaking skills and make them to be fluent in real time communicative
contexts.
❖ Develop learners’ basic reading abilities to comprehend information.
❖ Impart training on writing skills to make learners understand different styles of writing for
different contexts.
❖ Enrich learners’ vocabulary and to make them familiar with basic grammar.
UNIT I INTERPERSONAL EXCHANGE AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 9
Listening: Listening to short conversations or monologues – Speaking: Formal greetings and ways of
introducing oneself – Reading: Life and achievements of a famous personality– Writing: Autobiographical
Writing – Vocabulary: Prefixes and Suffixes, Different forms of words, Grammar: Nouns, Pronouns,
Adjectives, Verbs, Tenses.
UNIT II INFORMATION PROCESSING AND INFORMAL COMMUNICATION 9
Listening: Listening for specific information:providing information – Speaking: Making requests and
giving responses, Inviting, Accepting, Declining Invitations – Reading: Reading aloud to practice
Pronunciation and Intonation, Writing: Personal Letters and Emails – Vocabulary: Prefixes and Suffixes,
Different forms of words - Grammar: Prepositions, Adverbs and Conjunction.
UNIT III LANGUAGE USE IN PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION 9
Listening: Listening to TED, INK Talks, Podcasts and participating in discussions – Speaking: Real time
communication, Role Play (telephone calls to client, describing a product) – Reading: Reading
Comprehension and predicting the content – Writing: Business letters and Emails – Vocabulary:
Synonyms and Antonyms - Grammar : Tenses, Articles.
UNIT IV CONVERSATIONAL SKILLS ACQUISITION 9
Listening: Telephonic Conversations, Etiquette – Speaking: Narrating a Short Story/ Event/ Experience
and seeking suggestions– Reading: Reading a Short Story/ Incident - Writing- Describing Visuals –
Vocabulary: Single word substitutes and collocations - Grammar: Conditionals, Active Passive Voice.
LANGUAGE COGNIZANCE FOR SPECIFIC DOMAIN AND SOCIAL
UNIT V 9
CONTEXT
Listening: Listening to News, Domain Specific Information – Speaking: SWOC analysis – Reading: Sports,
travel experiences,– Writing: Writing etiquette for social media – Vocabulary: Idioms and Phrases -
Grammar: Yes or no Questions, Wh – Questions.
Course outcomes:
At the end of the course students will be able to:
CO 1: Use appropriate technical vocabulary in speaking and writing to express technical concepts
CO 2: Interpret written Discourse with greater felicity using register
CO 3: Construct effective professional correspondence
CO 4: Manipulate and prioritize the full repertoire of language skills
CO 5: Infer cognizance of effective professional environment
Text Book:
[1] Kumar Sanjay and PushpLata, “Communication Skills”, NewDelhi, Oxford University Press, 2018. CD
Supplement: Communication Skills: Oxford- Videos, Audios and Text Supplements.
Reference Books:
[1] Jack C Richards, “Interchange Level 2”, Cambridge University Press, 4th Edition, NewDelhi, 2012.
[2] Norman Lewis, “Word Power Made Easy”, W. R. Goyal Publishers, New Delhi, 2020.
[3] R. P Sinha, “Oxford Current English Grammar and Usage with Composition”, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi, 2005.
Web references:
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX
PROGRAM OUTCOMES
Course
Outcomes PO1 PO1
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO12
0 1
CO1 - - - - - 1 - 1 2 3 - 2
CO2 - - - - - 1 - 1 2 3 - 2
CO3 - - - - - 1 - 2 2 3 - 2
CO4 - - - - - 1 - 1 2 2 - 2
CO5 - - - - - 1 - 2 1 3 - 2
Average - - - - - 1 - 1.4 1.8 3 2
1. Slight (Low) 2. Moderate (Medium) 3. Substantial (High)
 L T P C Hours
22UMA101 MATRICES AND CALCULUS
3 1 0 4 60
Common to All Branches of B.E. / [Link].
Prerequisites :Knowledge in basic Calculus.
Course Objectives :The course aims to
❖ Understand the concept of Matrices to solve eigenvalue problems
❖ Understand the concept of Differential Calculus
❖ Study the Calculus techniques in several variables
❖ Know the single variable and multi-variable calculus of integration
❖ Develop the mathematical skills to solve the ordinary differential equations
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigen values and
Eigen vectors – Statement and applications of Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of matrices
(Orthogonal Transformation) – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal
transformation – Nature of quadratic forms.
UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12
Representation of functions – Limit of a function – Continuity – Derivatives – Differentiation rules:
Polynomials, exponential functions, product and quotient rules, Trigonometric functions, chain rule,
implicit functions, logarithmic functions – Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12
Definite and Indefinite integrals – Substitution rule – Techniques of Integration: Integration by parts,
Trigonometric substitutions – Integration of rational functions by partial fraction, Improper integrals
(test the convergence).
UNIT IV ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of variation of parameters
– Homogeneous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous linear differential
equations with constant coefficients.
UNIT V FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial differentiation –Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem –Total derivative –Jacobians –
Taylor’s series for functions of two variables – Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables –
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Apply the appropriate methods of transformation for finding eigen values and eigenvectors of
matrices
CO 2: Utilize the fundamentals of calculus in one variable
CO 3: Apply the calculus techniques in elementary problems for several variables
CO 4: Compute the definite and indefinite integrals
CO 5: Solve higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients
Text Books :
[1] Grewal BS, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,44th Edition,
2018.
[2] Joel Hass, Christopher Heil and Maurice DWeir, "Thomas' Calculus", Pearson, NewDelhi,14th Edition,
2018.
[3]James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015.
Reference Books:
[1] Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Limited, New
Delhi,10th Edition, 2016.
[2] Jain RK. and Iyengar SRK., "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", Narosa Publications, New Delhi,5th
Edition, 2017.
[3] Kandasamy P, Thilagavathy K and Gunavathy K, "Engineering Mathematics", SChandand Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2017.
Web References:
[1][Link]
[2][Link]
[3][Link]

COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes (POs/PSOs)

Course
PO1 PO1 PO1
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO4 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2
CO5 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2
Average 2.4 3 1.6 - - - - - - - - 2
 L T P C Hours
22UPH101 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
2 0 0 2 30
Common to All branches of B.E. / B. Tech.
Prerequisite: Higher Secondary Physics
Course objectives: The Course aims to
❖ Understand towards the applications of Laser.
❖ Acquire the basic knowledge of waves and optics.
❖ Gain knowledge of thermal properties of materials.
❖ Inculcate the fundamentals of mechanics.
❖ Understand basics of semiconductor and Nano materials.
UNIT I LASER 6
Introduction – Spontaneous and stimulated emission – Population inversion – Pumping methods –
Einstein’s A & B Coefficients – Types of Lasers –Nd-YAG Laser – Semiconductor diode Laser –
Applications: 3D Profiling, Material Processing.
UNIT II WAVES AND OPTICS 6
Simple harmonic motion – Displacement, amplitude, frequency, phase and resonance – Waves on a
string – Standing waves –Traveling waves – Energy transfer of a wave –Interference – Theory of air
wedge and experiment– Michelson Interferometer.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 6
Modes of heat transfer – Thermal expansion – Bimetallic strips –Thermal conductivity – Determination
of thermal conductivity of bad conductor: Lee’s disc method – Thermal insulation – Applications: Heat
exchangers, Refrigerators and Solar water heaters.
UNIT IV MECHANICS 6
Introduction – Center of mass (CM) – CM in one and two dimensions – Rotation of rigid bodies:
Rotational kinematics – Rotational kinetic energy – Moment, couple and torque –Conservation of
angular momentum – Rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule – Gyroscope.
UNIT V SEMICONDUCTORS AND NANOMATERIALS 6
Semiconductors: Definition – Properties – Energy band diagram – Direct and indirect band gap
semiconductors – Intrinsic Semiconductors – Extrinsic semiconductors and its types.
Nano materials: Introduction – Preparation: Pulsed Laser Deposition – Ball milling – Properties and
applications.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Understand the types of lasers for various industrial and medical applications.
CO2: Acquire the basic knowledge in waves and optics.
CO3: Understand the thermal properties of materials and apply to the field of engineering.
CO4: Infer the dynamics of the objects in motion.
CO5: Summarize the properties of semiconductors and nano materials.
Text Books:
[1] D. Kleppner and [Link], “An Introduction to Mechanics”, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi
(Indian Edition), 2017.
[2] Bhattacharya D K. and Poonam Tandon, “Engineering Physics”, Oxford HED, New Delhi,2017
[3] Kittel. C., “Introduction to Solid State Physics”,Wiley, New Delhi, 2019.
Reference Books:
[1] H C Verma, “Concepts of Physics”, Vol I & II, BharathiBhawan Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi,
2020.
[2] R K Gaur and S L Gupta, “Engineering Physics”, Dhanpat Rai Publications, 2012.
[3] Halliday and Resnick, “Fundamentals of Physics”, John Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2013.
Web references:
[1] [Link]
[2] [Link]
[3] [Link]
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX
Course Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes (POs/PSOs)
Outcome
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
s
CO1 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
CO2 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
CO3 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
CO4 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
CO5 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
Average 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
 L T P C Hours
22UCH101 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
2 0 0 2 30
Common to All Branches of B.E. / [Link].
Prerequisite: NIL
Course objectives: The course aims to
❖ Learn boiler feed water requirements, and water treatment techniques.
❖ Learn corrosion control and protective techniques.
❖ Acquire the knowledge about the fuels and properties of energy storage devices.
❖ Understand the basic concepts of engineering materials and its applications.
❖ Acquaint with the basics of nanoparticles, properties and applications.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 6
Water: Sources and impurities, hardness and its types. Municipal water treatment: primary treatment
and disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination). Desalination of brackish water: Reverse
Osmosis. Boiler troubles: Scale and sludge. Treatment of boiler feed water: Internal treatment -
phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning and External treatment – Ion exchange
demineralization and zeolite process.
UNIT II CORROSION AND CORROSION CONTROL 6
Chemical corrosion – Pilling – Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – different types – galvanic
corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors influencing corrosion – corrosion control –
sacrificial anode and impressed cathodic current methods – corrosion inhibitors – protective coatings –
paints – constituents and functions – metallic coatings – electroplating (Au) and electroless (Ni) plating.
UNIT III ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 6
Fuels: Calorific value - Gross and net calorific values - Classification of fuels -Petroleum and Diesel-
Manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process), Knocking - octane number, diesel oil - cetane
number - Solar energy conversion - Principle, working and applications of solar cells - Recent
developments in solar cell materials. Batteries - Types of batteries, Primary battery - Dry cell,
Secondary battery –lead-acid battery and lithium-ionbattery - Fuel cells - H2-O2 fuel cell.
UNIT IV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 6
Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness,
refractoriness under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina,
magnesite and zirconia bricks.
Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants, - properties – viscosity index, flash and fire
points, cloud and pour points, oiliness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum sulphide.
UNIT V NANO CHEMISTRY 6
Basics: Distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials - Size-dependent properties
(optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic) - Types of nanomaterials - Definition and uses of
nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation of nanomaterials - sol-gel,
electrodeposition and chemical vapour deposition. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine,
agriculture, energy, electronics and catalysis.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1:Outline water treatment methods for domestic and industrial purposes.
CO2: Outline different types of corrosion and its treatment methods.
CO3: Categorize the effective utilization of various energy sources and storage devices.
CO4: Infer the role of engineering materials for engineering requirements.
CO5: Synthesize nanomaterials using the basic concepts of Nanoscience and technology for engineering
applications.
Text Books:
[1] Jain P C and Monica Jain, “EngineeringChemistry”,17thEdition, DhanpatRaiPublishing Co.,2018.
[2] Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi,
2017.
[3] S.S. Dara, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand Publishing, 12th Edition, 2018.
Reference Books:
[1] B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Textbook of nanoscience and
nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and Materials Science, 2018.
[2] O.G. Palanna, “Engineering Chemistry” McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2 nd Edition,
2017.
[3] Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International Pvt, Ltd, New Delhi, 2017.
[4] Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge University
Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
Web References:
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]
5. [Link]
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX
Course Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes (POs/PSOs)
Outcome
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
s
CO1 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 1
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 1
CO3 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 1
CO4 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 1
CO5 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 1
Average 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 1
 L T P C Hours
22UCS101 PROGRAMMING IN C
3 0 0 3 45
Pre-requisite: -
Course Objectives : The students will be able to
● Understand various algorithmic techniques for solving problems.
● Understand the various constructs of a programming language viz. conditional and iteration
● Understand arrays and strings, and functions
● Understand pointers and structures
● Understand File concept
Unit 1 PROBLEM SOLVING USING ALGORITHMS 9
Algorithm Implementation - Top down design - Simple strategies for developing algorithms - Iteration -
Recursion - Fundamental algorithms - Anticipating and Dealing with Errors–Scratch tool.
Unit 2 BASICS OF C PROGRAMMING 8
Introduction to C programming - C Program Structure - Program Compilation & Execution -Character Set
- Keywords - Data Types - Library functions - Control Statements: Branching and Looping.
Unit 3 ARRAYS AND FUNCTIONS 11
One dimensional array –Two dimensional arrays –Multidimensional Array-Strings: Defining, initializing
of strings, Processing strings, Array of Strings- Introduction to functions- Storage Classes - Scope Rules -
Built-in and user defined functions –Passing Arrays to Function - Call by value – Call by reference -
Recursion
Unit 4 POINTERS AND STRUCTURES 11
Pointer Declaration - Operations on Pointer - - Pointers and One-Dimensional, two-dimensional Array -
Array of Pointers -Structure – Nested structures - Array of structures - Pointer and Structures - Self-
referential structures - Union- Dynamic memory allocation – typedef
Unit 5 FILE PROCESSING 6
Files — Basic file handling functions - Types of file processing: Sequential access file - Random access file
– Transaction processing using random access files — Command line arguments – Macros and Pre-
processor directives.
Course Outcome:
CO1: Recollect various programming constructs and to develop C programs
CO2:Develop simple applications in C using basic constructs, decision making and looping
CO3:Implement different Operations on arrays, strings and functions
CO4:Implement Programs with Structures and pointers
CO5:Demonstrate the use of sequential and random access file processing with thehelp of programs
Text Books :
[1] ReemaThareja, ―Programming in C, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2016.
[2] R.G. Dromey, “How to solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, 2008
[3] Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie,D.M, ―The C Programming language, Second Edition, Pearson Education,
2006
Reference Books :
[1] H. M. Deitel, P. J. Deitel "C How to Program", Pearson Education., New Delhi, 2013, 7th edition.
[2] Byron S. Gottfried, Jitendar Kumar Chhabra “Programming with C”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company., New Delhi,2018, fourth edition
[3] Herbert Schildt“C – The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company., New Delhi,
2010, fourth edition.
[4] Yashavant P. Kanetkar "Let Us C", BPB Publications., 2017 , 16th edition
Web references:
● [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
P
PO/ PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO O PO PO PSO PSO PSO
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 1 2 3
0
CO1 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO2 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO3 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO5 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
Avg 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS L T P C Hours
22UEE102 ENGINEERING
(For CSE, AIDS, CSBS & IT) 2 0 0 2 30
Prerequisite: -
Course Objectives:This course aims to
● Introduce the basic concepts of electrical circuits
● Impart knowledge on electronic circuit and its applications
● Introduce the functional elements and working of measuring instruments
● Educate on the fundamental working of sensors and transducers
● Introduce the basics of UPS, SMP Sand drives
Unit1 Basics of Electrical Circuits 6
Review of circuit elements-Ohm’sLaw-Resistors in series and parallel circuits–Kirchoffs laws –current and
voltage division rule-source transformation-Mesh and nodal analysis.
Unit2 Basics of Electronic Circuits 6
Types of semiconductor devices-PN junction and Zenerdiodes–structure, operation and V-I
characteristics- Avalanche and Zener break down–Applications of PN junction and Zener diodes.
Unit3 Measurements and instrumentation 6
Functional elements of an instrument-Standards and calibration-Operating Principle-types - Moving Coil
and Moving Iron instruments–induction type watt meter and Energy Meter.
Unit4 Sensors and Transducers 6
Transducers: Strain Gauge-LVDT-RTD-Thermistor
Sensors: Ultrasonic Sensors-Temperature sensors-Pressure sensors-Image sensors-Infrared (IR)sensors-
Application of the sensors in IoT(Qualitative analysis only)
Unit5 Basics of power converters and Drives 6
Power converters for Uninterruptable Power Supply(UPS)-Block diagram of Switched Mode Power
Supply(SMPS)-Stepper Motor and Servo motor(Construction and Operation)-Applications

Course Outcome: After the completion course, students will be able to

CO1: Understand the basic concepts of electrical circuits.

CO2: Illustrate the structure and characteristics of various electronic circuits.
CO3: Describe the operating principles of measuring instruments.
CO4: Explain the structure and operation of different Sensors and Transducers.
CO5: Outline the Construction and working principle of UPS, SMPS, stepper motor and servo motor.

Text Books:

[1].KothariDP and [Link], “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”,Second Edition, Mc Graw
Hill Education, 2020
[2].SedhaR.S.,“A text book of Applied Electronics”,[Link]&Co.,2008
 Reference books:
[1].[Link],PuneetSawhney‘ A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation’,
Dhanpat Raiand Co,2015
[2].Albert Malvino,David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education;7th edition,
2017
[3].Oliver and Cage,“Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation”, TMH, 2009.
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
P
P
PO/ PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO O PO PO PSO PSO PSO
O
CO 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 1 2 3
3
0
CO1 2 2 3 3 1 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 1 1
CO3 2 2 3 3 1 1
CO4 2 2 3 3 1 1
CO5 2 2 3 3 1 1
Avg 2 2 3 3 1 1
 L T P C Hours
22UOC204 Professional Ethics
1 0 0 0 15
Prerequisite: -
Course Objectives:This course aims
● To enable the students to imbibe and internalize the importance of values in one’s personal life
Unit1 Personal Values 3
Understanding self – Managing individual differences – power of perception and attitude; personality –
definition and types; character – Etiquette and Manners
Unit2 Family Values 3
Value of family system – power of family relationships; love compassion and respect towards family
members – impact of family values on society – behaviour modification.
Unit3 Social Values 3
Citizenship behaviour – role of values and ethics in society. Education and its impact on society
development. Religious tolerance and its merits. Science and society.
Unit4 National Values 3
Indian culture and its significance; impact of youth on national development. Basic duties and
responsibilities of a citizen; Science and Environment. Our role in protecting our global planet.

Unit5 Human Values 3

Moral values and ethics; Technology and Human values; understanding values in human relationships;
Characteristics of Values. Role of Emotional Intelligence and Social Intelligence.

Total Hours: 15
Course Outcome: After the completion course, students will be able to
CO1:Understand the importance of values and ethics in their personal lives
Reference Books:
1. R. S. Naagarazan, A text book on professional Ethics and Human Values, New Aage International
(p) Limited Publishers 2006
2. Engineering Ethics, Concepts cases: Charles E Harris Jr., Michael S Pritchard, Michael J Rabis, 4e,
Cenage learning, 2015
3. Business Ethics Concepts & Cases: Manuel G Velasquez, 6e, PHI, 2008
4. Lester Parrott: Values and Ethics in Social Work Practice, 2nd edition, Learning Matters Ltd. 2010
5. JosepTàpies and John L. Ward: Family Values and Value Creation, 1st Edition, Palgrave Macmillan,
2010
 L T P C Hours
22UBS102 BASIC SCIENCE LABORATORY
0 0 2 1 30
Common to All Branches of B.E. / [Link].
Prerequisite: Nil
Course objectives: The course aims to
❖ To acquaint the students with practical knowledge of physics principles in various fields such as
optics, thermal physics and properties of matter for developing basic experimental skills.
❖ To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality parameters
through volumetric analysis and to determine the amount of metal ion and strength of acids by
instrumental analysis.

PHYSICS - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 5 Experiments)

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum.

2. Determination of Young’s modulus by Non-Uniform bending method.
3. Determination of wavelength and particle size using Laser.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid– Ultrasonic Interferometer
6. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method.
7. Determination of bandgap of a semiconductor diode.
CHEMISTRY- LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of alkalinity in water sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Estimation of corrosion in mild steel by weight loss method.
4. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
5. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
6. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
7. Conductometric precipitation titration of BaCl2vs Na2SO4.

Total Hours 30
Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1:Interpret the physical properties of materials like elasticity, compressibility and optical
properties ofmaterials such as diffraction, interference.
CO2:Estimate the thermal and electrical properties such as conductivity and bandgap.
CO3:Characterize the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, and hardness.
CO4:Estimate the strength of acids using pH and conductivity meter, the amount of iron using calomel
electrode for the given solution.
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Course Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes (POs/PSOs)

Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
Average 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
 L T P C Hours
22UCS102 PROGRAMMING IN C LABORATORY
0 0 2 1 30
Prerequisite :
Course Objectives : The students will be able
● Understand the logic for a given problem
● Understand the syntax and construction of C programming code.
● Understand the different data-structures like arrays, pointers, structures and files.
● Understand proper use of user defined functions
● Identify the alternative ways of providing solution to a given problem.
List Of Experiments :
1. Program comprising of I/O statements, operators and expressions.
2. Program to demonstrate Conditional statements.
3. Program to demonstrate Looping constructs.
4. Program to demonstrate different types of Arrays
5. Program using strings.
6. Program using functions
7. Program using recursive functions
8. Program using pointers.
9. Program using structures.
10. Program to demonstrate the different operations in file handling.
Course Outcome:
CO1: Illustrate and explain the basic computer concepts and programming principles of C language
CO2: Develop programs to solve simple engineering problems using branching and looping constructs
CO3:Develop programs to demonstrate the applications of derived data types such as arrays, pointers,
strings and functions.
CO4:Develop programs to demonstrate the applications structures and pointers
CO5 :Implement programs to demonstrate the difference operations in file handling
Software Requirements :
● Windows: 7 or newer
● MAC: OS X v10.7 or higher
● Linux: Ubuntu
Hardware Requirements:
● Processor: Minimum 1 GHz; Recommended 2GHz or more
● Ethernet connection (LAN) OR a wireless adapter (Wi-Fi)
● Hard Drive: Minimum 32 GB; Recommended 64 GB or more
● Memory (RAM): Minimum 1 GB; Recommended 4 GB or above
● Sound card w/speakers
● Some classes require a camera and microphone
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping

P
PO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO O PO PO PSO PSO
/ PSO2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 1 3
CO
0
CO
2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
1
CO
2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
2
CO
2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
3
CO
2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
4
CO
2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
5
Av
2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
g
 L T P C Hours
22UCS103 PC Hardware and Trouble Shooting
0 0 2 1 15
Pre-requisite :
Course Objectives : The students will be able to
● know the basic hardware components and its interfaces
● Understand the installation of components and its maintenance activities.
● Gain knowledge about the troubleshooting process
List of experiments
1. Install and configure computer drivers and system components
2. Disk formatting, partitioning and Disk operating system commands
3. Install, upgrade and configure Windows/Linux operating systems
4. Installation of Antivirus and configure the antivirus, printer and scanner software.
5. Assembly and Disassembly of hardware.
6. Troubleshooting and Managing Systems
7. Recovering the root file system after corruption
8. Remote desktop connections and file sharing.
9. Establish network connections, Configure IP address and Domain name system
10. Install two different kinds of network cards and connect two computers to campus LAN and
download a file from a computer on the LAN
Course Outcome:
CO1: Describe the components of a computer system
CO2: Install and configure hardware and software packages with drivers
CO3: Apply various methods for troubleshooting the system related problems
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping

P P P P
PO/ PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
O O O O
CO 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3
1 10 11 12
CO1 2 2 3 3 1 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 1 1
CO3 2 2 3 3 1 1
Avg 2 2 3 3 1 1
Course Code Course Title L T P C Hours

தநிமர் நபபு 1 0 0 1 15

Common to அனைத்து இளநினை பட்டப் படிப்புகள்

அ஬கு I மநொமிநற்றும்இ஬க்கினம் 3
இந்தின மநொமிக்குடும்஧ங்கள் – திபொயிட மநொமிகள் – தநிழ் ஑ரு மெம்மநொமி – தநிழ்
மெவ்யி஬க்கினங்கள் – ெங்க இ஬க்கினத்தின் ெநனச்ெொர் ஧ற்஫ தன்மந ெங்க இ஬க்கினத்தில் ஧கிர்தல்
அ஫ம் – திருக்கு஫஭ில் மந஬ொண்மநக்கருத்துக்கள் தநிழ்க்கொப்஧ினங்கள், தநிமகத்தில் ெநண ம஧ௌத்த
ெநனங்க஭ின் தொக்கம்- பக்தி இ஬க்கினம், ஆழ்யொர்கள் நற்றும் ஥ொனன்நொர்கள் ெிற்஫ி஬க்கினங்கள் –
தநிமில் ஥வீ஦ இ஬க்கினத்தின் ய஭ர்ச்ெி – தநிழ் இ஬க்கின ய஭ர்ச்ெினில் ஧ொபதினொர் நற்றும்
஧ொபதிதொென் ஆகிமனொொின் ஧ங்க஭ிப்பு.
நபபு – ஧ொம஫ ஒயினங்கள் முதல் ஥வீ஦ ஒயினங்கள் யமப-
அ஬கு || 3
ெிற்஧க்கம஬
஥டுகல் முதல் ஥வீ஦ ெிற்஧ங்கள் யமப – ஐம்ம஧ொன் ெிம஬கள் – ஧மங்குடினி஦ர் நற்றும் அயர்கள்
தனொொிக்கும் மகயிம஦ப்ம஧ொருட்கள், ம஧ொம்மநகள்-மதர் மெய்ம௄ம் கம஬சுடுநண் ெிற்஧ங்கள்
஥ொட்டுப்பு஫த்மதய்யங்கள் குநொி மும஦னில் திருயள்ளுயர்ெிம஬ – இமெக்கருயிகள் நிருதங்கம், ஧ம஫,
வீமண, னொழ், ஥ொதஸ்யபம் –தநிமர்க஭ின் ெமூக ம஧ொரு஭ொதொப யொழ்யில் மகொயில்க஭ின் ஧ங்கு.
அ஬கு III ஥ொட்டுப்பு஫க்கம஬கள் நற்றும் வீப யிம஭னொட்டுகள் 3
மதருக்கூத்து, கபகொட்டம், யில்லுப்஧ொட்டு, கணினொன்கூத்து, ஑னி஬ொட்டம், மதொல்஧ொமயக்கூத்து,
ெி஬ம்஧ொட்டம், ய஭ொி, புலினொட்டம், தநிமர்க஭ின் யிம஭னொட்டுகள்,

அ஬கு IV தநிமர்க஭ின் திமணக்மகொட்஧ொடுகள் 3

தநிமகத்தின் தொயபங்களும், யி஬ங்குகளும் – மதொல்கொப்஧ினம் நற்றும் ெங்க இ஬க்கினத்தில் அகம்
நற்றும் பு஫க்மகொட்஧ொடுகள் –தநிமர்கள் ம஧ொற்஫ின அ஫க்மகொட்஧ொடு – ெங்ககொ஬த்தில் தநிமகத்தில்
எழுத்த஫ிவும், கல்யிம௄ம் ெங்ககொ஬ ஥கபங்களும் தும஫முகங்களும் –ெங்ககொ஬த்தில் ஏற்றுநதி நற்றும்
இருக்குநதி – கடல் கடந்த ஥ொடுக஭ில் மெொமர்க஭ின் மயற்஫ி.
இந்தின மதெின இனக்கம் நற்றும் இந்தின
அ஬கு V 3
஧ண்஧ொட்டிற்குத்தநிமர்க஭ின் ஧ங்க஭ிப்பு
இந்தின யிடுதம஬ப்ம஧ொொில் தநிமர்க஭ின் ஧ங்கு இந்தினொயின் – ஧ி஫ப்஧குதிக஭ில்
தநிழ்ப்஧ண்஧ொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுனநொினொமத இனக்கம் இந்தின நருத்துயத்தில், ெித்த நருத்துயத்தின்
஧ங்கு -கல்மயட்டுகள், மகமனழுத்துப்஧டிகள் – தநிழ்ப்புத்தகங்க஭ின் அச்சு யப஬ொறு.
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தநிமகயப஬ொறு – நக்களும் ஧ண்஧ொடும் - மக.மக. ஧ிள்ம஭ (மய஭ிம௃டு:தநிழ்஥ொடு ஧ொடத௄ல்
நற்றும் கல்யினினல் ஧ணிகள்கமகம்).
2. கணி஦ித்தநிழ் - மும஦யர்இ஬. சுந்தபம். (யிகடன்஧ிபசுபம்).
3. கீமடி – மயமக ஥திக்கமபனில் ெங்ககொ஬ ஥கப ஥ொகொிகம் (மதொல்லினல் தும஫மய஭ிம௃டு)
4. ம஧ொரும஥ – ஆற்஫ங்கமப ஥ொகொிகம். (மதொல்லினல் தும஫ மய஭ிம௃டு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL - (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published International
 Institute of Tamil Studies
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published
by:International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - 'Sangam City Civilization on the banks of river Vaigai" (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link])
(Publishedby. The Author)
11. Porunal Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Bookand Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) –
Reference Book.
SEMESTER – II
 L T P C Hours
22UEN201 TECHNICAL ENGLISH
3 0 0 3 45
Commonto All Branches of B. E/B. Tech.
Prerequisites: Basic Knowledge in Language usage
Course objectives: This Course aims to
❖ Enhance learners’ listening skills in technical and professional contexts.
❖ Develop learners’ confidence in speaking at formal situations.
❖ Cultivate reading strategies and skills to enhance their ability in scientific/technical reading.
❖ Improve learners’ technical and professional writing skills.
❖ Impart appropriate technical vocabulary and advanced grammatical understanding.
UNIT I TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION 9
Listening and Speaking: Developing effective listening skills in public - Reading: Scientific Reading for
Comprehension– Writing: Process Description, Interpretation of Info and graphics – Vocabulary:
Connotations and Misspelt words - Grammar: Sequence words and Discourse markers.
UNIT II LANGUAGE FOR COMMUNICATIVE PERFORMANCE 9
Listening and Speaking: Listening for clear pronunciation, different accents, Common Errors in
Pronunciation and practice – Reading: Reading Technical documents - Writing: Checklists, Invitation,
Acceptance, Declining, Feedback and complaint letters – Vocabulary: Homonyms and Homophones -
Grammar:Forming questions using auxiliary and modal verbs.
UNIT III INTERPERSONAL SKILLS 9
Listening and Speaking: Listening to formal and informal conversations, product advertisements and
product description – Reading: Reading advertisements, reading company profile for industrial visit –
Writing: Content writing, Recommendations, and Instructions – Vocabulary: Compound words and
numerical adjectives - Grammar: Impersonal passive voice and Direct and Indirect Speech.
UNIT IV EFFECTIVE BUSINESS COMMUNICATION 9
Listening and Speaking: Listening to formal speeches, welcome address and vote of thanks – Reading:
Reading and analyzing annual reports of organizations and memos - Writing- Proposals, Report writing,
Minutes of Meeting – Vocabulary: Fixed and semi fixed expressions, Verbal analogies -Grammar –
Purpose statements.
UNIT V LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT FOR EMPLOYMENT 9
Listening and Speaking: Listening to online discussions on current issues and role play activities –
Reading: Reading and analyzing job advertisements, business environment and ethics – Writing: Job
application and Resume – Vocabulary: Jargon and Register, Definitions - Grammar: Cause and effect
expressions and Common Errors.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course students will be able to
CO 1: Understand vocabulary and syntax with accuracy and clarity.
CO 2: Use appropriate grammar and technical parlance in a range of academic scenarios.
CO 3: Interpret and evaluate discourses related to functional English
CO 4: Infer critical text leading to academic articulation.
CO 5: Associate professional information through appropriate means of communication.
Text Book:
[1] Kumar Sanjay and PushpLata, “Communication Skills”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2018.
CD Supplement: Communication Skills: Oxford- Videos, Audios and Text Supplements
Reference Books:
[1] Jack C Richards, “Interchange Level 3”, Cambridge University Press. 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
[2] Rizvi M. Ashraf, “Effective Technical Communication”, Tata Mac Graw Hill Publishing Compan
Limited, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2010.
[3] Gerson Sharon. J, Steven M Gerson, “Technical Writing- Process and Product”, Pearson Education Pvt.
Ltd. 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2009.
[4] KiranmaiDutt. P and GeethaRajeevan, “Basic Communication Skills”, Cambridge University Press,
New Delhi, 2007.
Web references:
● [Link]
● [Link]

COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Course PROGRAM OUTCOMES
Outcome PO1 PO1
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO12
s 0 1
CO1 - - - - - 1 - 1 2 3 - 2
CO2 - - - - - 1 - 1 1 3 - 2
CO3 - - - - - 1 - 1 1 3 - 2
CO4 - - - - - 1 - 1 1 3 - 2
CO5 - - - - - 1 - 1 1 3 - 2
Average - - - - - 1 - 1 1.2 3 - 2
 L T P C Hours
22UMA201 COMPLEX VARIABLES AND TRANSFORMS
3 1 0 4 60
Common to AI&DS,CSE,IT,ECE,BME,EEE,CIVIL and MECH
Prerequisite : Knowledge in Complex variables, Differential equations and Integration.
Course objectives: This Course aims to
❖ Understand the concept of analytic functions and its properties
❖ Study the techniques of residues and Contour integration
❖ Know the basics of vector calculus and its applications
❖ Understand the procedure to solve partial differential equations
❖ Solve ordinary differential equations using Laplace Transform
UNIT I ANALYTIC FUNCTION 12
Functions of a complex variable – Analytic functions: Necessary conditions – Cauchy – Riemann
equations and sufficient conditions (excluding proofs) – Harmonic and orthogonal properties of analytic
function (excluding proofs) – Harmonic conjugate – Construction of analytic functions – Conformal
1
mapping: 𝑤 = 𝑧 + 𝑘 , 𝑘𝑧 , 𝑧 and bilinear transformation.
UNIT II COMPLEXINTEGRATION 12
Cauchy’s integral theorem (Statement) and Cauchy’s integral formula – Laurent’s series expansions –
Singular points – Residues – Cauchy’s residue theorem – Evaluation of real definite integrals as contour
integrals around unit circle.
UNIT III VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient, divergence and curl –Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields (Definition only) –Vector
integration – Green’s theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stoke’s theorem (excluding
proofs) – Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular parallelepipeds.
UNIT IV PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of partial differential equations by eliminating arbitrary constants – Singular integrals –
Solutions of standard types of first order partial differential equations (Type I and Type II) – Lagrange’s
linear equation – Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant
coefficients of homogeneous type.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 12
Laplace transform – Sufficient condition for existence – Transform of elementary functions – Basic
properties – Transforms of derivatives and integrals of functions – Derivatives and integrals of
transforms – Transforms of unit-step function and impulse function – Transform of periodic functions.
Inverse Laplace transform – Statement of Convolution theorem – Initial and final value theorems –
Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients using Laplace transformation
techniques.
Course outcomes:At the end of the course students will be able to
CO1:Examine the standard techniques of complex variable, analytic function andconformal mapping
CO2:Illustrate a contour integral with an integrand which has singularities in the closed region
CO3: Interpret the line, surface and volume integral
CO4: Compute the solutions of first and higher order partial differential equations
CO5:Apply the concept of Laplace transform to find the solution of linear ordinarydifferential
equationswith constant coefficients
Text Books:
[1] Grewal B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Khanna Publishers, NewDelhi, 44th Edition, 2018.
[2] Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, NewDelhi, 10th Edition,
2016.
Reference Books:
[1] Ramana B.V, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Tata McGraw Hill CompanyLimited,
NewDelhi, 11th Reprint 2018.
[2] Bali N, Goyal M and Watkins C, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", FirewallMedia(An
imprint of Lakshmi Publications Private Limited),NewDelhi, 7th Edition, 2015.
[3] O’Neil P.V, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", Cengage Learning India Private Limited,New
Delhi, 7thEdition, 2012.
[4] Sastry S.S, "Engineering Mathematics :Volume I", PHI Learning Private Limited, NewDelhi, 4th
Edition, 2014.
Web References:
[1] [Link]
[2] [Link]
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX
Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes (POs/PSOs)
Course
PO1 PO1 PO1
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2
CO4 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO5 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2
Average 2 3 1.4 - - - - - - - - 2
 L T P C Hours
22UPH201 PHYSICS FOR INFORMATION SCIENCE
2 0 0 2 30
Common to AIDS, CSE, CSBS & IT
Prerequisite: Engineering Physics
Course Objectives: The Course aims to
❖ Understand the essential principles of optical fiber.
❖ Become proficient in photonic materials and devices.
❖ Study the properties and applications of magnetic materials.
❖ Understand the concept of quantum structures.
❖ Understand the principles of data storage devices.
UNIT I FIBER OPTICS 6
Principle, Numerical aperture and acceptance angle – Types of optical fiber (material, refractive index
and mode) –Attenuation mechanism in optical fibers –Applications: Fiber optic communication –Fiber
optic sensor: Pressure and Displacement.
UNIT II PHOTONIC MATERIALS 6
Classification of optical materials – Carrier generation and recombination processes – Absorption
emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and semiconductors (concepts only) – Photo current
in a P-N diode – Solar cell – LED – Organic LED.
UNIT III MAGNETIC MATERIALS 6
Basic definitions – Origin of magnetic moment – Classification of magnetic materials (Dia, Para & Ferro) –
Domain theory of ferromagnetism – Hysteresis of ferromagnetic materials – Soft and hard magnetic
materials – Giant Magneto Resistance (GMR) effect.
UNIT IV QUANTUM DEVICES AND QUANTUM COMPUTING 6
Quantum confinement – Quantum structures: quantum wells, wires and dots – Tunnelling: Resonant
Tunnelling Diode (RTD) – Quantum system for information processing – Classical bits – Quantum bits
(or) qubits –CNOT gate – Advantage of quantum computing over classical computing.
UNIT V DATA STORAGE DEVICES 6
Computer Data storage, Types of Storage, Primary Storage– RAM, ROM, Cache– Secondary Storage –Hard
disk, Tertiary Storage – Magnetic tape, Compact disc, Digital versatile disc, Blue-ray –Off-line Storage –
USB Flash drive, memory card.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Classify the fiber optic cable and study its engineering applications.
CO2: Understand the concept of optical properties of materials.
CO3: Gain knowledge on magnetic properties of materials and their applications.
CO4: Appreciate the importance of quantum computing.
CO5: Understand various data storage devices.
Text Books:
[1] KittelC., “Introduction to Solid State Physics”,Wiley, New Delhi, 2019.
[2] HansonG.W, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
[3] KasapS.O., “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, McGraw-Hill Education, New Delhi, 2015.
Reference Books:
[1] Pallab Bhattacharya, “Semiconductor Opto-Electronic Devices”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New
Delhi, 2017.
[2] Garcia N. & Damask, A,“Physics for Computer Science Students”, Springer-Verlag, 2012.
[3] Rogers B., Adams, J. &Pennathur, S, “Nanotechnology: Understanding Small Systems”, CRC Press,
New York, 2014.
Web references:
[1] [Link]
[2] [Link]
[3] [Link]
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX
Course Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes (POs/PSOs)
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
CO2 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
CO3 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
CO4 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
CO5 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
Average 3 1 – – – – – – – – – 1
 L T P C Hours
22UCS201 COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE
3 0 0 3 45
Prerequisite:
Course Objectives: This course aims to
● Make students understand the basic structure and operation of digital computer
● Familiarize the students with arithmetic and logic unit and implementation of fixed point and
floating-point arithmetic operations
● Expose the students to the concept of pipelining
● Understand parallelism and multi-core processors
● Understand the memory hierarchies, cache memories and virtual memories
Unit 1 Basic Structure of Computers 9
Functional units, Basic operational concepts, Performance, Instructions, Operations and Operands,
representing instructions, Logical operations, Control operations, MIPS addressing, RISC, CISC.
Unit 2 Arithmetic for Computers 9
ALU, Addition and Subtraction, Multiplication, Division, Floating point representation, Floating point
operations, Sub word parallelism.
Unit 3 Processor and Control Unit 9
Basic MIPS implementation, Hardwired control, Micro programmed control, Pipelining, Pipelined data
path and control, Handling Data Hazards & Control Hazards – Exception Handling.
Unit 4 Parallelism 9
Parallel processing challenges, Flynn‘s classification – SISD, MIMD, SIMD, SPMD, Vector architectures,
Hardware multithreading, Multi-core processors, Introduction to Graphics Processing units, Clusters,
Warehouse scale computers.
Unit 5 Memory and I/O Systems 9
Memory hierarchy, Memory technologies, Cache basics, Measuring and improving cache performance,
Virtual memory, TLBs, Input/output system, programmed I/O, DMA and interrupts, I/O processors.
Course Outcome:
CO1: Explain the basics of organizational and architectural issues of a digital computer and Classify and
compute the performance of machines, Machine Instructions.
CO2: Elucidate arithmetic operations performed in the ALU
CO3:Understand the theory and architecture of central processing unit.
CO4:Summarize the concepts of parallel processing, pipelining and interprocessor communication.
CO5 :Exemplify in a better way the I/O and memory organization.
Text Books:
[1] David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software Interface”, 5th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 2014.
[2] Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems”, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
Reference Books:
[1] William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for
Performance”, 8th Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
[2]John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
[3] John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, “Computer Architecture – A Quantitative Approach”, 5th
Edition, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier Publishers, 2012.
Web references:
● [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix: CO vs PO mapping
P
PO/ PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO O PO PO PSO PSO PSO
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 1 2 3
0
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 1 -
CO2 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 1 -
CO3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
CO4 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
CO5 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
Avg 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1 -
 L T P C Hours
22UIT201 Python Programming
3 0 0 3 45
Common to : IT,CSE,AI&DS,CSBS
Prerequisite(s): Nil
Course objectives: This course aims to
● Understand the basics of object-oriented concepts and python programming.
● Solve problems using flow control and conditional blocks.
● Implement functions and use string manipulation to solve problems.
● Use collections – lists, tuples, dictionaries and sets to represent complex data
● Input/output with files in python.
Unit 1 Introduction to Python 9
Introduction to OOPs – Class and Object, Methods, Inheritance, Polymorphism, Basics of Python
Programming - Python variables, Python basic Operators, Understanding python blocks. Python Data
Types, Declaring and using Numeric data types: int, float etc.
Unit 2 Flow Control & Conditional blocks 9
Selective statements – if, if-else, nested if, if –elif ladder statements. Iterative statements - while, for,
Nested loops, else in loops, Loop manipulation using break, continue and pass statements.
Unit 3 Functions & Strings 9
Functions: Function definition, function call, flow of execution, parameters and arguments, return values,
local and global scope, recursion. Strings: Formatting, Comparison, Slicing, Splitting, Stripping, Negative
indices, String functions.
Unit 4 Collections 9
List: Create, Access, Slicing, Negative Indices, List Methods, and comprehensions. Tuples: Create Indexing
and Slicing, Operations on tuples. Dictionary: Create, add, and replacevalues, operations on dictionaries.
Sets: Create and operations on set.
Unit 5 Files, Exceptions and Packages 9
Python File Operations: Reading files, Writing files in python, Understanding read functions, read(),
readline(), readlines(). Understanding write functions, write() and writelines(), using file operations.
Command line arguments, Errors and Exceptions, Handling exceptions. Libraries: TensorFlow, Pandas,
Numpy, SciPy, Keras
Course outcome(s): After the completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Develop simple computational python program using object oriented concepts.
2. Write simple python programs using flow control and conditional blocks.
3. Implement python programs using functions and strings.
4. Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries and sets.
5. Read and write data from/to files and handle exceptions in python programs.
Text Book(s):
1. E Balagurusamy,” Object Oriented Programming with C++”, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill,2020
2. Allen B. Downey, Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist, 2nd edition, Updated for
Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
3. Jeeva Jose &[Link], “Introduction to Computing and Problem Solving with PYTHON”, Khanna
Publishers, New Delhi, 2016
4. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginners Guide to Problem Solving and programming”,
1st Edition, BCS Learning &Development Limited, 2017.
Reference books:
1. Gowrishankar S, Veena A, ―Introduction to Python Programming, 1st Edition, CRC Press/Taylor &
Francis, 2018
2. Eric Matthes, Python Crash Course: A Hands-On, Project-Based Introduction to Programming, 2nd
Edition, No starch Press, 2019.
3. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018
4. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, ―Introduction to Programming in Python: An
Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Timothy A. Budd, ―Exploring Python‖, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd., 2015.
Web references:
1. www. [Link]/kamthane/python
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 1 3 - - 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO4 - 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO5 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
Average 1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 -
 L T P C Hours
22UME203 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
2 0 2 3 60
Common to Prerequisite(s): Nil
Course objectives: this Course aims to

 Draw the plane curves and orthographic projections.

 Draw the projections of points, lines and plane surfaces.
 Draw the projections of solids.

 Understand the principle of sectioned solids and development of surfaces.

 To understand the principle of isometric and perspective projections.
Concepts and Conventions (Not for Examination)
Importance of graphics in engineering applications — Use of drafting instruments — BIS conventions
and specifications — Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets — Scaling, Lettering and
dimensioning(Not for Examination)
Unit 1 Plane Curves and Free hand sketching 6+9
Engineering Curves: Conics — Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method —
Construction of cycloid — construction of involutes of square and circle-Drawing of tangents and normal
to the above curves. Orthographic Projections - Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial
views of objects.
Unit 2 Projection of Points, Lines and Plane Surface 6+9
Projection of points- Projections of straight lines located in first quadrant - determination of true length
and true inclinations. Projections of plane surfaces - polygonal lamina and circular lamina, located in first
quadrant and inclined to one reference plane.
Unit 3 Projection of Solids 6+9
Projection of simple solids - prism, pyramid, cylinder and cone. Drawing views when the axis of the solid
is inclined to one reference plane. Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD
Software(Not for examination)
Unit 4 Projection of Sectioned Solids and Development of 6+9
Surfaces
Sectioning of simple solids - prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone. Obtaining sectional views and true
shape when the axis of the solid is vertical and cutting plane inclined to one reference plane.
Development of lateral surfaces of truncated prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones. Practicing three
dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software (Not for examination)
Unit 5 Isometric and Perspective Projections 6+9
Isometric projections of simple solids and truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones.
Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray [Link]
three dimensional modeling of isometric projection of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for
examination).
Course outcome(s): At the end of the course student will be able to
CO1: Draw the Projection of points and lines.
CO2: Project simple regular polyhedral and truncated solids.
CO3: Section the solids to obtain true shape of the section.
CO4: Develop the lateral surfaces of simple solid.
CO5: Draw multiple views from pictorial views of objects.
Text Book(s):
1. Natarajan K.V., A Text Book of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2018.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, 15th Edition, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2018.
Reference books:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., ―Engineering Drawing‖, Charotar Publishing House, 50th Edition,
2019.
2. Basant Agrawal, Agrawal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2019.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., ―Engineering Drawing (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Publications, Bangalore,
2017.
Web references:
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
CO / PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
PO 2 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO 1 3 2 2 - 2 - - - 2 - 1 2 - -

CO 2 3 2 2 - 2 - - - 2 - 1 2 - -

CO 3 3 2 2 - 2 - - - 2 - 1 2 - -

CO 4 3 2 2 - 2 - - - 2 - 1 2 - -

CO 5 3 2 2 - 2 - - - 2 - 1 2 - -

Avg 3 2 2 - 2 - - - 2 - 1 2 - -
 DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND SYSTEM L T P C Hours
22UIT202 DESIGN
(For CSE, AIDS, CSBS & IT) 2 0 2 3 60
Prerequisite: -
Course Objectives: This course aims to
● Study various number systems and to deduce the mathematical expressions Using Boolean
functions.
● Introduce the fundamentals of combinational and sequential digital circuit.
● Study the design of various Sequential Circuits.
● Acquire the basic knowledge of Memories and logic families.
● Introduce digital simulation techniques for development of application-oriented logic circuit.
Unit1 BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES 6

NumberSystems–ArithmeticOperations–BinaryCodes-BooleanAlgebraandLogicGates– Theorems and

Properties of Boolean Algebra–Simplification of Boolean Functions using Karnaugh Map upto 4variables.

6
Unit2 COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUIT
Combinational Circuits–Analysis and Design Procedures–Binary Adder-Subtractor–Multiplexers-
Demultiplexers -Encoder –Decoder-code converters

Unit3 SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 6

Sequential Circuits–Storage Elements:Latches, Flip-Flops-SR, D, JK and T–Analysis of Clocked Sequential

Circuits-Introduction of Asynchronous Sequential Circuits
Unit4 MEMORYANDPROGRAMMABLELOGIC 6
ROM,RAM,EEPROM–Programmable Logic Array–Programmable Array Logic-introduction to FPGA- TTL
and CMOS families
Unit5 HDL 6
Digital design process flow using HDL-Modules and ports-compiler directives-data types and operators–
Introduction to VHDL-modeling styles.
List of Experiments
1. Implementation of Boolean equations
2. Implementation of Arithmetic Circuits
3. Implementation of Multiplexer and de-Multiplexer circuits
4. Implementation of Encoder and Decoder circuit
5. Implementation of Latches and Flip-Flops
6. Basic Logic circuits using VHDL
Course Outcome: After the completion course, students will be able to
CO1: Summarize various number systems and techniques to simplify the given Boolean expressions.
CO2: Explain the implementation of various combinational circuits.
CO3: Design various synchronous using Flip Flops
CO4: Describe the various Memories and programmable logic devices.
CO5: Summarize various steps involved to write VHDL coding for logic circuits.
Text Books:
[1].James W. Bignel, Digital Electronics, Cengage learning, 5th Edition, 2007.
[2].M. Morris Mano, ‘Digital Design with an introduction to the VHDL’, Pearson Education, 2013
Reference Books:
[1]. Comer “Digital Logic & State Machine Design, Oxford, 2012
[2]. Mandal, “Digital Electronics Principles & Application, McGraw Hill Edu, 2013
[3]. William Keitz, Digital Electronics-A Practical Approach with VHDL, Pearson, 2013.
[4]. Thomas [Link], ‘Digital Fundamentals’, 11th edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
[5]. Charles [Link], Jr, LizyLizy Kurian John, ‘Digital System Design using VHDL, Cengage,
2013
[6]. [Link], [Link], ‘Digital circuits and Design’, Pearson Education, 2016.
CO-PO Mapping
Course Articulation Matrix: CO vs PO mapping
P
PO/ PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO O PO PO PSO PSO PSO
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 1 2 3
0
CO1 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO2 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO3 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
CO5 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
Avg 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2
 L T P C Hours
22UBS201 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
2 0 0 0 30
Common to All Branches of B.E. / [Link].
Prerequisite: Nil
Course objectives: The course aims to
❖ Study the interrelationship between living organism and environment
❖ Assess the environmental pollution and its impact.
❖ Understand the significance of natural resources and their conservation.
❖ Identify and implement scientific, economic and political solutions to environmental
problems.
❖ Understand the influence of human population on environmental issues and role of
information technology as a tool to minimize the environmental problems.
UNIT I ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 6
Definition, scope and importance of environment - concept of an ecosystem - structure and function
of an ecosystem - food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids - Introduction to biodiversity-
definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity - value of biodiversity - threats to biodiversity-
conservation of [Link] study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6
Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution – solid waste management:
causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an individual in prevention
of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management - floods, earthquake, cyclone and
landslides. Case study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 6
Forest resources - Use and over-exploitation, deforestation - Water resources - Use and over-
utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and
problems –Food resources- Changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern
agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity-Role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources.
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Unsustainable to sustainable development-water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed
management – Resettlement and rehabilitation of people - its problems and concerns -
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid rain,
ozone layer depletion– environment protection act – Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) act –
Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act.
 UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – Pandemic issues and
management – women and child welfare – Role of information technology in environment and
human health – Case studies.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Infer the importance of ecosystem and biodiversity.
CO2: Identify the causes, effects and control measures of different types of pollution.
CO3: Interpret the importance of various natural resources and its sustainable use.
CO4: Outline various environmentally related social issues and their solutions.
CO5: Explore the methods of waste management and resource recovery.
Text Books:
[1] Benny Joseph, “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2017.
[2] Gilbert [Link], “Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science”, 2nd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2016.
[3] George Tchobanoglous, Frank Kreith, “Handbook of Solid Waste Management” (McGrawHill
Handbooks), McGraw-Hill Education, 2ndEdition July 2017.
Reference Books:
[1] R.K. Trivedi, “Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards”, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 2015.
[2] ErachBharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press(I) Private Limited,
Hydrabad, 2015.
[3] Rajagopalan R, “Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure”, Oxford University Press, 2005.
Web References:
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]
5. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
Course Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes (POs/PSOs)
Outcome
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
s
CO1 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2 - - 1
CO2 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2 - - 1
CO3 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2 - - 1
CO4 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2 - - 1
CO5 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2 - - 1
Average 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2 - - 1
 L T P C Hours
22UOC204 Professional Ethics
1 0 0 1 15
Course Objective:
Objective To enable the students to imbibe and internalize the importance of ethics in one’s
professional life
Course Outcome: At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO Understand the importance of values and ethics in their professional lives
Unit1 Professional 3
Definition, professional qualities – integrity, self-awareness, managing complexity and others.
Multiple intelligences for an engineer. The nature of engineering profession. Success and failure
stories of professionals. Role of self-regulation.
Unit2 Work Ethics and Culture 3
Awareness on work dimensions. Teambuilding in work environments. Understanding role,
responsibilities and work ethics. Knowledge on work space behaviour – understanding relevant
competencies relating to work – Role of professional ethics in organisation.
Unit3 Engineering Profession 3
Ethical issues in engineering practice. Social and Ethical responsibilities of an engineer. Knowledge
on psychological dimensions of an engineer. Engineers as managers.
Unit4 Global values 3
Global Issues in professional Ethics – managing the Eco Systems: Role of an engineer; Knowledge of
different cultures in global setting. Increasing international competencies for engineers.
Unit5 Science and Spirituality 3
Role of spirituality in human performance. Various dimensions of spirituality in scientific
development. Balancing productivity and Eco system. Merits and demerits of science and technology.
Role of spirituality in professional ethics of Engineers.
TotalHours: 15
References:
R. S. Naagarazan, A text book on professional Ethics and Human Values, New Aage International (p)
Limited Publishers 2006
Engineering Ethics, Concepts cases: Charles E Harris Jr., Michael S Pritchard, Michael J Rabis, 4e,
Cenage learning, 2015
Business Ethics Concepts & Cases: Manuel G Velasquez, 6e, PHI, 2008
Lester Parrott: Values and Ethics in Social Work Practice, 2nd edition, Learning Matters Ltd. 2010
JosepTàpies and John L. Ward: Family Values and Value Creation, 1st Edition, Palgrave Macmillan,
2010
 L T P C Hours
22UIT203 Python Programming Laboratory
0 0 2 1 45
Common to IT,CSE, AI&DS,CSBS
Prerequisite(s): Nil
Course objectives:
● To perform problems using expressions and operators
● To learn the basic programming concepts using conditionals and loops.
● To use python data structures – lists, tuples, dictionaries.
● To do input/output operations with files in python.
● To handle exceptions using python programming
1. Implement programs using Expression and Operators
2. Scientific programs using Conditional and Iterative loops
3. Implement programs using Functions
4. Practice various String operations using python
5. Implement programs using List &Tuples
6. Develop python programs using Sets
7. Implement various operations in Dictionaries
8. Implement real-time/technical applications using File Handling
9. Develop a python code to handle exceptions
10. Develop a python code using Numpy, Panda and Matplotlib
Course outcome(s):
After the completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Write simple python programs using operators and expressions.
2. Implement python programs using conditionals and loops for solving problems.
3. Develop python programs using various string handling functions.
4. Analyze compound data using python data structures.
5. Use python file handling operations and exception handling in various real time applications.

Text Book(s):
1. Allen B. Downey, Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist, 2nd edition, Updated for
Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginners Guide to Problem Solving and programming”,
1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
Reference books:
1. Gowrishankar S, Veena A, ―Introduction to Python Programming‖, 1st Edition, CRC Press/Taylor
& Francis, 2018
2. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.
3. John V Guttag, ―Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python‘‘, Revised

and expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013

4. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, ―Introduction to Programming in Python: An
Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Timothy A. Budd, ―Exploring Python‖, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,, 2015.
Web references:
1. www. [Link]/kamthane/python
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO P
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
CO O
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
1
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
CO2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO3 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO4 - 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO5 1 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
Average 1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 -
Course Code Course Title L T P C Hours

தநிமரும்மதொமில்த௃ட்஧மும் 1 0 0 1 15

Common to All
அ஬கு I ம஥ெவு நற்றும் ஧ொம஦த்மதொமில்த௃ட்஧ம் 3
ெங்ககொ஬த்தில் ம஥ெவுத்மதொமில் - ஧ொம஦த்மதொமில்த௃ட்஧ம் – கருப்பு ெியப்பு ஧ொண்டங்கள் –
஧ொண்டங்க஭ில் கீ஫ல் கு஫ிம௃டுகள்.
அ஬கு || யடியமநப்பு நற்றும் கட்டிடத்மதொமில்த௃ட்஧ம் 3
ெங்ககொ஬த்தில் யடியமநப்பு நற்றும் கட்டுநொ஦ங்கள் & ெங்ககொ஬த்தில் வீட்டுப்ம஧ொருட்க஭ில்
யடியமநப்பு – ெங்ககொ஬த்தில் கட்டுநொ஦ ம஧ொருட்களும் ஥டுகல்லும் ெி஬ப்஧திகொபத்தில் மநமட
அமநப்பு ஧ற்஫ின யியபங்கள் - நொநல்஬புபச்ெிற்஧ங்களும், மகொயில்களும்-
மெொமர்கொ஬த்துப்ம஧ருங்மகொனில்கள் நற்றும் ஧ி஫ யமி஧ொட்டுத்த஬ங்கள் – ஥ொனக்கர் கொ஬க்மகொனில்கள்
நொதிொி கட்டமநப்புகள் ஧ற்஫ி அ஫ிதல், நதுமப நீ஦ொட்ெி அம்நன் ஆ஬னம் நற்றும் திருநம஬
஥ொனக்கர்நஹொல் – மெட்டி஥ொ ட்டுவீடுகள் – ஧ிொிட்டிஷ் கொ஬த்தில் மென்ம஦னில் இந்மதொ-ெொமபொ
மெ஦ிக்கட்டிடக்கம஬,
அ஬கு III மய஭ொண்மந மதொமில்த௃ட்஧ம் நற்றும் உற்஧த்தித்மதொமில்த௃ட்஧ம் 3
அமண, ஏொி, கு஭ங்கள். நதகு – மெொமர்கொ஬க்கு முமித்தூம் ஧ின் முக்கினத்துயம் – கொல்஥மட ஧பொநொிப்பு
– கொல் ஥மடகளுக்கொக யடியமநக்கப்஧ட்ட கிணறுகள் – மய஭ொண்மந நற்றும் மய஭ொண்மநச்ெொர்த்த
மெனல்஧ொடுகள் – கடல்ெொர் அ஫ிவு - நீன்ய஭ம் – முத்து நற்றும் முத்துக்கு஭ித்தல் ம஧ருங்கடல் கு஫ித்த
஧ண்மடன அ஫ிவு அ஫ிவு ெொர்ெமூகம். யப஬ொற்று ஥ொணனங்கள் கப்஧ல் கட்டும்கம஬ - உம஬ொகயினல் -
இரும்புத்மதொமிற்ெொம஬ – இரும்ம஧ உருக்குதல், எஃகு ெொன்றுக஭ொக மெம்பு நற்றும் தங்க
஥ொணனங்கள் அச்ெடித்தல் – நணி உருயொக்கும் மதொமிற்ெொம஬கள் - கல்நணிகள், கண்ணொடிநணிகள் -
சுடுநண்நணிகள் - ெங்குநணிகள் - எலும்புத்துண்டுகள் - மதொல்லினல்ெொன்றுகள்- ெி஬ப்஧திகொபத்தில்
நணிக஭ின்யமககள்
அ஬கு IV அ஫ியினல் தநிழ் 3
அ஫ியினல் தநிமின் மதொற்஫ம் - ய஭ர்ச்ெி - யப஬ொறு – ஧஬தும஫ அ஫ியினல் தநிழ் த௄ல்கள் உருயொகி
ய஭ர்ந்தமந – தநிமில் அ஫ியினல் இதழ்கள் – ெங்க இ஬க்கினத்தில் அ஫ியினல் கூறுகள் கம஬ச்மெொல்
யி஭க்கம் – தநிமில்கம஬ச்மெொல்஬ொக்க ம஥஫ிகள்
அ஬கு V கணித்தநிழ் 3
கணித்தநிழ் ய஭ர்ச்ெி –தநிழ்த௄ல்கம஭ நின் ஧திப்பு மெய்தல் – தநிழ் மநன்ம஧ொருட்கள் உருயொக்கம் –
தநிழ் இமணனக்கல் யிக்கமகம் – தநிழ் நின்த௄஬கம் – இமணனத்தில் தநிழ் அகபொதிகள் -
மெொற்குமயத்திட்டம்
TEXT- CUM - REFERENCE BOOKS

1. தநிமக யப஬ொறு – நக்களும் ஧ண்஧ொடும் - மக. மக. ஧ிள்ம஭ (மய஭ிம௃டு தநிழ்஥ொடு

஧ொடத௄ல் நற்றும் கல்யினினல் ஧ணிகள்கமகம்).
2. கணி஦ித்தநிழ் -மும஦யர்இ஬. சுந்தபம் (யிகடன்஧ிபசுபம்).கீமடி – ஐயமக ஥திக்கமபனில்
ெங்ககொ஬ ஥ொகொிகம்(மதொல்லினல்தும஫ மய஭ிம௃டு).
3. ம஧ொரும஥ ஆற்஫ங்கமப ஥ொகொிகம், (மதொல்லினல்தும஫ மய஭ிம௃டு).
4. கம஬ச்மெொல்஬ொக்கம் – மும஦யர் இபொ தொ மெல்஬ப்஧ன் (க஦ினமுதம்மய஭ிம௃டு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr. K. K. Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL - (in
print).
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr. S. Singaravelu) (Publishedby:
International Institute of Tamil Studies).
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr. S. V. Subatamanian, DR. K. D. Thirunavukkarasy)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil studies).
8. The Contributors of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr. M. Valarmathi) (Published
by:International Institute of Tamil studies).
9. Keeladi Sangam City Civilization on the banks of river Vaigai' (Jointy Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu).
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr. [Link])
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointy Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
SEMESTER III
 L T P C Hours
22UMA302 DISCRETE STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3 45
Common to CSBS, CSE & IT
Prerequisites : Knowledge in Basic Algebra
Course Objectives :The course aims to
 Understand the concepts of Logic, rules of Inference and Quantifiers
 Familiarize the basic terminologies and concepts of Combinatorics
 Introduce the concepts of Graphs and Trees
 Impart the knowledge on Algebraic Structures
 Elaborate the concepts of Lattices and Boolean Algebra
UNIT 1 LOGIC AND EQUIVALENCES 9
Propositional logic – Propositional equivalences – Normal Forms – Predicates and quantifiers –
Rules of inference (Direct & Indirect) – Verbal arguments.
UNIT 2 COMBINATORICS 9
Mathematical induction – Well ordering – The basics of counting : sum & product rules –
Permutations and Combinations – Generating functions.
UNIT 3 GRAPHS AND TREES 9
Graphs – Basic Definitions –Subgraphs – Isomorphism – Eulerian and Hamiltonian Paths : Dirac’s
Theorem , Euler’s Theorem – Trees and their properties.
UNIT 4 ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURES 9
Algebraic systems – Groups – Subgroups – Cayley’s theorem – Fundamental theorem on
Homomorphism – Lagrange’s theorem.
UNIT 5 LATTICES AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA 9
Partial ordering – Posets – Lattices as posets – Properties of Lattices – Lattices as Algebraic systems
– Sub lattices – Boolean Algebra.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Write mathematical arguments and test the validity of arguments using logic equivalences.
CO2: Prove mathematical statements using induction techniques, generating functions and basics of
counting principle.
CO3: Explain the concepts of graph isomorphism, Eulerian , Hamiltonian paths and properties of
trees
CO4: Illustrate various algebraic structures and their properties
CO5: Determine the concepts of lattices as algebraic system associated with Boolean algebra.
Text Books :
[1] Rosen KH, "Discrete Mathematics and its Applications", Tata McGraw Hill PublicationCompany
Limited, NewDelhi, Special Indian Edition, 8th Edition, 2019.
[2] Tremblay JP and Manohar R, "Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to
Computer Science", Tata McGraw Hill Publication Company Limited,NewDelhi, 30th
Reprint, 2011.
Reference Books:
[1]NarsinghDeo, "Graph Theory with Applications to Engineering and Computer Science",
Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs N.J, 2nd Edition, 2016.
[2]Grimaldi RP, "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics: An Applied Introduction",
Pearson Education, Asia, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2019.
[3] Susanna S. Epp,“Discrete Mathematics with Applications”, 5th Edition, Cengage., USA, 2019.
[4]Bondy JA and MurtyUSR,"Graph Theory with Applications", Elsevier Science Publishing Co., Inc.,
5th Edition, 1982.
Web References:
[1][Link]
[2][Link]
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Course PROGRAM OUTCOMES

Outcome
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
s
CO1 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
Average 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
 L T P C Hours
22UCS301 DATA STRUCTURES CONCEPTS
3 0 0 3 45
Prerequisite: 22UCS101 Programming In C
Course Objectives: The course aims to
 To understand the concepts of ADTs
 To Learn linear data structures stacks, and queues
 To implement nonlinear data structure - tree
 To Learn nonlinear data structures -graph
 To understand sorting, searching and hashing algorithms
Unit 1 Introduction to data structures and Linked Lists 9
Introduction to Data Structures, abstract data types, Linear list – singly linked list implementation, insertion,
deletion and searching operations on linear list, circular linked list implementation, Double linked list
implementation, insertion, deletion and searching operations. Applications of linked lists
Unit 2 Stacks and Queues 9
Stacks-Operations, array and linked representations of stacks, stack applications -infix to postfix conversion,
postfix expression evaluation, recursion implementation. Queues-operations, array and linked
representations. Circular Queue operations, Dequeues, priority queue-applications of queues.
Unit 3 Trees 9
Tree ADT – Tree traversals – Left child right sibling data structures for general trees – Binary Tree ADT –
Expression trees –Binary search tree ADT- AVL trees – B-Tree – Heaps – Binary heaps – Applications of trees.
Unit 4 Graph and Algorithms 9
Definitions – Representation of Graphs – Traversal- Topological sort – Shortest path algorithms: Dijkstra’s
algorithm– Minimum spanning tree: Prim’s and Kruskal’s algorithm.
Unit 5 Sorting , Searching and Hashing 9
Sorting: Insertion sort –Shell sort – Merge sort – Quick sort – Searching: Linear search – Binary search.
Hashing - Hash table methods, Collision techniques.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1 : Define linear and non-linear data structures.
CO2: Implement stack and queue data structure operations
CO3: Use appropriate tree data structure operations for solving a given problem.
CO4: Apply appropriate graph algorithms for graph applications.
CO5: Analyze the various searching and sorting algorithms..
Text Books:
[1] Mark Allen Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
[2] Kamthane, Introduction to Data Structures in C, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2007
Reference Books:
[1] Langsam, Augenstein and Tanenbaum, Data Structures Using C and C++, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
2015.
[2] Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald [Link], Clifford Stein, Introduction to Algorithms",
Fourth Edition, Mcgraw Hill/ MIT Press, 2022.
[3] Alfred V. Aho, Jeffrey D. Ullman,John E. Hopcroft ,Data Structures and Algorithms, 1st edition, Pearson,
2002.
[4] Kruse, Data Structures and Program Design in C, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2006.
Web links:
[1]. [Link]
[2] [Link]
[3]. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO4 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO5 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
Avg 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
 L T P C Hours
22UCS302 FORMAL LANGUAGES AND AUTOMATA THEORY
3 1 0 4 60
Prerequisite :
Course Objectives : The course aims to
 To understand the language hierarchy
 To construct automata for any given pattern and find its equivalent regular expressions
 To design a context free grammar for any given language
 To understand Turing machines and their capability
 To understand undecidable problems and NP class problems
Unit 1 Fundamentals of Finite Automata 9+3
Introduction to formal proof – Additional forms of Proof – Inductive Proofs –Finite Automata – Deterministic
Finite Automata – Non-deterministic Finite Automata – Finite Automata with Epsilon Transitions –
Equivalence of DFA and NFA
Unit 2 Regular Expressions And Languages 9+3
Regular Expressions – FA and Regular Expressions – Proving Languages not to be regular – Closure
Properties of Regular Languages – Equivalence and Minimization of Automata.
Unit 3 Grammars 9+3
Grammar Introduction– Types of Grammar - Context Free Grammars and Languages– Derivations and
Languages – Ambiguity- Relationship between derivation and derivation trees – Simplification of CFG–
Greiback Normal form –Chomsky normal form – Problems related to CNF and GNF.
Unit 4 Pushdown Automata 9+3
Pushdown Automata- Definitions – Moves – Instantaneous descriptions – Deterministic pushdown automata
– Equivalence of Pushdown automata and CFL - pumping lemma for CFL – problems based on pumping
Lemma.
Unit 5 Turing Machine and Undecidability 9+3
Turing Machines (TM) – Programming Techniques – Non Recursive Enumerable Language – Undecidable
Problems with RE – Undecidable Problems about TM – Post’s Correspondence Problem – RICE theorem- The
Class P and NP.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Construct automata, regular expression for any pattern.
CO2: Write Context free grammar for any construct.
CO3: Design Turing machines for any language.
CO4: Propose computation solutions using Turing machines.
CO5: Derive whether a problem is decidable or not.
Text Books :
[1]John E. Hopcroft, Rajeev Motwani, Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Introduction to AutomataTheory, Languages and
Computation”, 3/E, Pearson Education, 2009.
[2][Link], ―Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation‖, Third Edition, TMH, 2003.
Reference Books :
[1]KamalaKrithivasan, Rama R, “Introduction to Formal Languages, AutomataTheory and Computation”,
Pearson, 2009
[2]Dr. B. N. Srinivasa Murthy, “Formal Languages and Automata Theory”, SanguinePublishers, 2006.
[3]Jeffrey D Ullman, John E Hopcroft, Introduction to Automata Theory and Languages, Addison-Wesley ,
1979.
Web Links:
[1]. [Link]
[2]. [Link]
[3]. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
CO2 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
CO3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
CO4 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 -
CO5 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
Avg 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
 L T P C Hours
22UCS303 DATA SCIENCE ESSENTIALS
2 0 0 2 30
Common to
Pre-requisite: 22UIT201 Python Programming
Course Objectives: The course aims to
 Describe about the various types of data
 Discuss about the data science process
 Describe Data with using various statistical techniques
 Understand the pandas and NumPy arrays
 Understand Plotting functions
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DATA SCIENCE 6
Introduction to Data Science - Benefits and uses of data science and big data - facts of data: Structured data,
Unstructured data, Natural Language, Machine generated data, Audio, Image and video streaming data.

UNIT II THE DATA SCIENCE PROCESS 6

Overview of the data science process- defining research goals and creating project charter, retrieving data,
cleansing, integrating and transforming data, exploratory data analysis, Build the models, presenting findings and
building application on top of them.
UNIT III DESCRIBING DATA 6
Types of Data - Types of Variables -Describing Data with Tables and Graphs– Outliers, Relative Frequency ,
Distributions , Cumulative Frequency Distributions, Frequency Distributions For Qualitative (Nominal) Data,
Graphs For Quantitative Data, Histogram, frequency polygon, Stem And Leaf Display , Typical shapes, A Graph
For Qualitative (Nominal) Data , Describing Data with Averages, Mode, Median, Mean
UNIT IV DATA MANIPULATION AND IMPLEMENTATION 6
Basics of NumPy Arrays - Computation on NumPy Arrays, Aggregation: Min, Max. Operating on Data in Pandas,
Handling Missing Data. Implementation basic regression analysis
UNIT V DATA VISUALIZATION WITH MATPLOTLIB 6
General Matplotlib Tips, Simple Line Plots, Simple Scatter Plots, Visualizing Errors Density and Contour Plots,
Histograms, Binnings, and Density, Customizing Plot Legends Customizing Colorbars, Multiple Subplots, Text and
Annotation, Customizing Ticks Customizing Matplotlib: Configurations and Stylesheets.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Identify phases involved in the life cycle of Data Science.
CO2: Apply the Data Science process on real time scenario.
CO3: Realize the various data analytics techniques for labeled/columnar Data using Python Pandas.
CO4: Explore a flexible range of data visualizations approaches in Python.
CO5: Analyze various Machine learning algorithms for data modeling with Python.
Text Books:
[1]Python Data Science Handbook-Essential Tools for Working with Data, Jake Vander Plas, O'Reilly Media, 2nd
edition, 2022.
[2] Data Science from Scratch: First Principles with Python, Joel Grus, O'Reilly, 2nd edition, 2019.
Reference Books:
[1] Python for Data Analysis, Wes Mckinney, O'Reilly Media, 2nd edition, 2017.
[2] Field Cady, “Data Science Hand Book”, John Wiley & Sons, 2017.
[3]Fundamentals of Data Science, Samuel Burns, Amazon KDP printing and Publishing, 2019.
[4] Doing Data Science, Straight Talk From The Frontline, Cathy O'Neil and Rachel Schutt. O'Reilly. 2014.
Web references:
[1][Link]
[2] [Link]
[3] [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
P
PO/ PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO O PO PO PSO
PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 3
0
CO1 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Avg 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
 L T P C Hours
22UEE408 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER
2 0 2 3 45

Prerequisite: 22UIT202 Digital Principles and System Design

Course Objectives: The Course aims to
 Understand the Architecture of 8086 microprocessor.
 Learn the design aspects of I/O and Memory Interfacing circuits. Along with supporting
chips.
 Study the Architecture of 8051 microcontroller.
 Design a microcontroller-based system.
 Understand the hardware features of RISC-based Architecture.
UNIT I THE 8086 MICROPROCESSOR AND BUS STRUCTURE 6
Introduction to 8086 – Microprocessor architecture – 8086 signals – Basic configurations – System
bus timing –System design using 8086 – System Bus Structure – Multiprocessor
configurations – Coprocessor, closely coupled and loosely Coupled configurations - Interrupts and
interrupt service routines
UNIT II 8086 PROGRAMMING 6
Assembly language programming - Instruction set - Addressing modes -assembler directives -
Modular Programming: Linking, Relocation, Stacks, Procedures and Macros –Parallel
communication interface – Serial communication interface – D/A and A/D Interface - DMA
controller
UNIT III 8051 MICROCONTROLLER 6
Architecture of 8051 – Memory Organization and Special Function Registers (SFRs) - I/O Ports–
Instruction set - Addressing modes – Timer – Serial Communication – Interrupts.
UNIT IV MICROCONTROLLER INTERFACING 6
Programming 8051 Timers - Serial Port Programming - Interrupts Programming – LCD &
Keyboard Interfacing – Stepper Motor - ADC, DAC & Sensor Interfacing.
UNIT V INTRODUCTIONTO RISC-BASED ARCHITECTURE 6
PIC16 /18 architecture - Memory organization – Addressing modes – Instruction set -– Timers –
I/O ports – Interrupt – Basic Programming.
Course Outcomes :At the end of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Explain the architecture of 8086 and Illustrate the system bus structures, multiprocessor
configuration of 8086.
CO2: Develop assembly level programs to interfacing various I/O modules with 8086.
CO3: Acquire knowledge about the architecture, programming of microcontroller 8051.
CO4: Develop assembly level programs to configure various hardware features in 8051.
CO5 : Explain the architecture of PIC controller along with the program model.
List of Experiments:
1. PROGRAMMING EXERCISES / EXPERIMENTS WITH µP8086:
1. Simple arithmetic and Logic operations using 8086
2. Programming with control instructions: Ascending /Descending order/Maximum / Minimum of
numbers.
3. Interface Experiments: A/D Interfacing. D/A Interfacing.
2. PROGRAMMING EXERCISES / EXPERIMENTS WITH µC8051:
4. Simple arithmetic and Logical operations with 8051
5. Programming with control instructions: Ascending /Descending order/Maximum / Minimum of
numbers
6. Stepper motor controller and Keyboard and Display Controller interface.
7. PIC Programming with software tools.
Text Books:
1. Yu-Cheng Liu, Glenn A. Gibson, ―Microcomputer Systems: The 8086 / 8088 Family -
Architecture, Programming and Design, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
2. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, Rolin McKinley, ―The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C, Second Edition, Pearson education, 2011.
Reference Books:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi& Janice GilliMazidi, ‘The PIC Micro Controller and Embedded Systems,
2010.
2. Doughlas V. Hall, ―Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware,
TMH,2012.
3. A.K. Ray, K.M. Bhurchandi, Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals ―3rd edition,
TataMcGrawHill, 2012.
4. Kenneth Ayala, ‘The 8051 Microcontroller’, Thomson, 3rd Edition 2004.
Online Resources:
1. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix COvsPO mapping
PO/C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO5 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - -
Avera
3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - -
ge
 L T P C Hours
22UIT302 JAVA PROGRAMMING
3 0 2 4 60
Common to CSE, CSBS& IT
Pre-requisite: C Programming
Course Objectives: The course aims to
 Understand the basic features of OOP in Java
 Apply the types of Inheritance, Packages and Interfaces supported by Java
 Recognize the exception Handling and Multithreading process supported by Java
 Understand and apply I/O file operations, Generics and String Handling.
 Identify the fundamental concepts of collection framework.
UNIT I Introduction to Java 9

An overview of Java- Data Types, Variables, and Arrays - Operators-Control Statements – Classes – Methods –
access specifies – static members – Constructor- Destructor
UNIT II Inheritance and Packages 9
Overloading Methods – Objects as Parameters – Returning Objects –Static, Nested and Inner Classes.
Inheritance: Basics– Types of Inheritance -Super keyword -Method Overriding – Dynamic Method Dispatch –
Abstract Classes – final with Inheritance. Packages and Interfaces: Packages–Importing Packages – Interfaces.
UNIT III Exception Handling and Multi-Threading 9
Exception Handling fundamentals – Multiple catch Clauses – Nested try Statements – Java’s Built-in Exceptions
– User defined Exception. Multithreaded Programming: Java Thread Model–Creating a Thread and Multiple
Threads – Thread Priorities – Synchronization – Inter Thread Communication- Suspending –Resuming, and
Stopping Threads –Multithreading. Wrappers – Auto boxing.
UNIT IV I/O and String Handling 9
I/O Basics – Reading and Writing Console I/O – Reading and Writing Files. Generics: Generic Programming –
Generic classes – Generic Methods – Bounded Types. Strings: Basic String class, methods and String Buffer
Class.
UNIT V Collection Framework 9
Collection overview- List Interface -ArrayList, Linked List, Set Interface-HashSet, Linked HashSet, Queue
Interface -Priority Queue – Deque Interface – ArrayDeque-Accessing a collection via an Iterator- Working with
Maps- Comparators-Collection Algorithms- Introduction to Java Advanced features.
List of Experiments: 15 Hours
1. Implementing a usecase using arrays.
2. Implementation of Inheritance, Interfaces and Packages
3. Implementation of Multithreaded Programming and string methods.
4. Implementation of Exception handling mechanisms
5. Implement real-time/technical applications using File Handling
6. Implementing a usecase using Java Collection framework

Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Apply the concepts of classes and objects to solve simple problems
CO2: Develop programs using inheritance, polymorphism, interfaces and packages.
CO3: Make use of exception handling mechanisms and multithreaded model to solve real world problems
CO4: Build Java applications with files and Strings handling.
CO5: Design java applications using collection framework.
Text Books:
[1] Herbert Schildt, “Java The complete reference”, 12th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2022.
[2] Sachin Malhotra, Saurabh Choudhary, “Programming in Java”, Revised Second Edition, Oxford, 2018.

Reference Books:
[1] Deitel&Deitel, “Java How to Program”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010
[2] Gary Cornell and Cay [Link], “Core Java” Vol.1 and Vol.2, Sun Microsystems Press, 2008
[3] [Link],“Programming with Java- A Primer”, Fifth Edition, TMH, Reprint 2015.
[4] Cay S. Horstmann, “Core Java Fundamentals”, Volume 1, 11 th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2018.

Web references:
[1][Link]
[2] [Link]
[3] [Link]
[4] [Link]

COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes (POs/PSOs)
Course
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -
CO2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -
CO3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -
CO4 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -
CO5 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -
Average 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -
 L T P C Hours
22UCS304 DATA STRUCTURES CONCEPTS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2 60
Prerequisite: 22UCS101 Programming In C
Course Objectives : The course aims to
 To implement linear data structures
 To implement non-linear data structures
 To understand the different operations of search trees
 To implement graph traversal algorithms
 To get familiarized to sorting and searching algorithms
List Of Experiments:
1. Implementation of Linked List
2. Applications of Linked List
3. Implementation Stack and queue
4. Applications of Stack
5. Operations on Binary Search Trees
6. Applications of Binary Search Tree
7. Graphs - Depth First Search and Breadth First Search
8. Hashing and Collision Resolution
9. Sorting algorithms
10. Searching algorithms
Total Hours : 60 Hours
Course Outcome: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Implement linear data structures using arrays and Linked Lists
CO2: Implement linear stack and queue data structures
CO3: Implement Nonlinear data structures using tree data structure
CO4: Implement graph and its applications
CO5: Implement various sorting and hashing Techniques
Software Requirements :
 Software Required – TURBOC version 3 or GCC version 3.3.4.
 Operating System – WINDOWS 2000 / XP / NT OR LINUX
Hardware Requirements:
Computers Required – 30 Nos. (Minimum Requirement: Pentium III or Pentium IV with 256 RAM and 40 GB
harddisk)
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2
Avg 3 2 2 2 2 2
 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS & PERSONALITY L T P C Hours
22UEN301
DEVELOPMENT 0 0 2 1 30
Common to All UG Branches
Prerequisites: Basic Knowledge in Language usage
Course objectives:
 Augment the Employability and Career Skills of students to enhance their prospect of
placement
 Enhance their communicative competence.
 Equip them with soft skills.
 Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
 Develop the confidence to attend interviews effectively
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 6
Introduction to Soft Skills– Hard skills & soft skills – employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs
UNIT 2 COMMUNICATION SKILLS 6
Verbal and nonverbal communication -Self-Introduction-organizing the material – Introducing
oneself to the audience – introducing the topic – answering questions – individual presentation
practice– presenting the visuals effectively – 5 minutes presentations- JAM
UNIT 3 TEAMWORK SKILLS 6
Introduction to Group Discussion— participating in group discussions – understanding group
dynamics – brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to
improve GD skills – Role plays
UNIT 4 PROFESSIONAL SKILLS 6
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending interviews– telephone/online
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews- cover letter –
resume – emails – letters – memos – reports – blogs – writing for publications.
UNIT 5 EMOTIONAL AND SOCIAL SKILLS 6
Multiple intelligences – emotional intelligence – spiritual quotient (ethics) – intercultural
communication – creative and critical thinking – Art of Negotiation and Persuasion
Course outcomes:
CO 1: Develop the hard and soft skills with professional grooming
CO 2: Improve self-introduction and presentation skills.

CO 3: Orient Group discussion tactics and making students understand group dynamics
CO 4: Enhance Career oriented Skills.
CO 5:Acquire adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace
Textbooks:
[1] Robert M Sherfieldet al., “Developing Soft Skills”, 4th edition, New Delhi, Pearson Education,
2009.
[2] Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma, “Professional Communication”, Oxford University
Press, Oxford, 2014.
Reference books:
[1] Butterfield, Jeff, “Soft Skills for Everyone”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2015.
[2] E. Suresh Kumar et al. “Communication for Professional Success”, Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad,
 2015.
[3] Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students, Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad, 2016.
[4] S. Hariharan [Link].,“Soft Skills”, MJP Publishers, Chennai, 2010.
Web references:
[Link]
[Link]
MAPPING OF COs with POs
Course PROGRAM OUTCOMES
Outcome PO1 PO1
s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO12
0 1
CO1 - - - - - 2 - - 3 2 - 1
CO2 - - - - - 2 - - 3 2 - 1
CO3 - - - - - 2 - - 3 2 - 1
CO4 - - - - - 2 - - 3 2 - 1
CO5 - - - - - 2 - - 3 2 - 1
Averag
- - - - - 2 - - 3 2 - 1
e
 DESIGNTHINKING L T P C Hours
22UOC102
(Common to All Branches) 1 0 0 1 15
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Objectives: This course aims
● To impart knowledge on design thinking process for understanding complex designs.
● To provide design skills to analyze design thinking issues and apply the tools and techniques
of design.
Module:I Overview of Design Thinking Process 7
Introduction to design thinking: Definition, Origin of design thinking, Importance of design thinking,
Problem solving, Understanding design thinking and its process model, Design thinking tools,
Human Cantered Design(HCD)process-Karmic design thinking process.
Module:II Design Thinking Practice 8
Empathize-Role of empathy in design thinking, customer journey mapping, How might we
questions, Analyze Or Define - Root cause analysis, conflict of interest, Solve Or Ideate –Silent
brainstorming, introduction to TRIZ, Test(Prototyping and Validation)–Prototyping, Validation in
the market.
Course Outcome: After the completion course, students will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate knowledge of design thinking process.
CO2: Apply human centered design(HCD)methodology for productor service design

Reference Books:
1. [Link] Ramadurai,“Karmic Design Thinking”,FirstEdition,2020.
2. RobertACuredale,Design Thinking Process & amp; Methods 4th Edition,December 2017,
Design Community College Inc.
3. 101 Design Methods:A Structured Approach for Driving Innovation in Your Organization by
VijayKumar
4. Human-Centered Design Toolkit: AnOpen-Source Toolkit To Inspire New Solutions in the
Developing World by IDEO
5. This is Service Design Thinking: Basics, Tools, Cases by Marc Stickdorn and Jakob Schneider
6. Ulrich, Kar [Link]: Creation of artifacts in [Link],2011.
SEMESTER IV
 L T P C Hours
22UMA402 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS
3 0 0 3 45

Common to AI&DS (III SEMESTER) , CSBS,IT and CSE (IV SEMESTER)

Prerequisites : Knowledge ofbasic Probability.
Course Objectives : The course aims to

 Learn the basic concepts of Random Variables and Distributions

 Understand the ideas of Two-Dimensional Random Variables
 Make use of the Statistical Methods to solve real-life problems
 Understand the principles of the Design of Experiments and perform an Analysis of Variance
 Study the concept of statistical techniques to solve quality control problems

UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 9

Probability - Conditional Probability -_Baye’s theorem-Discrete and Continuous Random Variables -
Moment generating functions (Definition only) – Binomial, Poisson, Uniform, Exponential and
Normal distributions.
UNIT II TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 9
Discrete and Continuous Random Variables: Joint distributions – Marginal and Conditional
distributions – Covariance – Correlation.
UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9
Sampling distributions – Estimation of parameters – Statistical hypothesis – Large sample tests
based on Normal distribution for single mean – Small sample tests based on t, Chi–square and F
distributions.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9
One way and Two way classifications – Completely randomized design – Randomized block design –
Latin square design.
UNIT V STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 9
 
Control charts for measurements: Mean chart X and range chart R  – Control charts for attributes
( p , c and np charts).
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Apply the concepts of random variables and distributions
CO 2: Use correlation techniques to study the properties of two-dimensional random
variables
CO 3: Solve different types of large and small sample problems by testing of hypothesis
CO 4: Utilize the analysis of variance for experimental designs
CO 5: Solve the quality control problems using statistical techniques
Text Books :
[1] Johnson RA, Miller I and Freund J, "Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, New Delhi, 9th Edition, 2017.
[2] Gupta S.P, “Statistical Methods”, Sultan Chand &sons ,New Delhi , 46th Edition, 2021.
Reference Books:
[1] Devore JL, "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences", Cengage Learning, New
Delhi, 9th Edition, 2017.
[2] Papoulis A and Unnikrishnapillai S, "Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes",
McGraw Hill Education India, New Delhi, 4th Edition, 2010.
[3] Ross SM, "Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists", Elsevier, 6th
Edition, 2020.
[4]Veerarajan T, “Probability Statistics and Random Process”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education Private
limited,New Delhi, 2007.
Web References:
[1][Link]
[2][Link]
COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Course PROGRAM OUTCOMES

Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1
PO12
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
CO1 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1
CO2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1
CO3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1
CO4 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1
CO5 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1
Average 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1
 L T P C Hours
22UCS401 OPERATING SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3 45
Prerequisite : 22UCS101 Programming In C
Course Objectives : The course aims to
 To understand the basic concepts and functions of operating systems, processes and threads.
 To analyze Scheduling algorithms and deadlocks
 To understand the concept of memory management schemes
 To understand I/O management and File systems.
 To be familiar with the basics of Linux system and Mobile OS like iOS and Android.
Unit 1 Operating System Overview 7
Computer System Overview – Basic Elements – Instruction Execution – Interrupts – Memory Hierarchy –
Cache Memory – Direct Memory Access – Operating System Overview – Objectives and functions – System
calls – System Programs – OS Generation and System boot.
Unit 2 Process Management 11
Processes - Process Concept - Process Scheduling - Operations on Processes - Inter-process Communication;
CPU Scheduling - Scheduling criteria - Scheduling algorithms: Threads - Multithread Models – Threading
issues; Process Synchronization - The Critical-Section problem - Synchronization hardware – Semaphores –
Mutex - Classical problems of synchronization - Monitors; Deadlock - Methods for handling deadlocks,
Deadlock prevention, Deadlock avoidance, Deadlock detection, Recovery from deadlock.
Unit 3 Memory Management 9
Main Memory - Swapping - Contiguous Memory Allocation – Paging - Structure of the Page Table -
Segmentation, Segmentation with paging; Virtual Memory - Demand Paging – Copy on Write - Page
Replacement - Allocation of Frames –Thrashing.
Unit 4 Storage Management 9
Mass Storage system – Disk Scheduling and Management; File-System Interface - File concept - Access
methods - Directory Structure - Directory organization - File system mounting - File Sharing and Protection;
File System Implementation - File System Structure - Directory implementation - Allocation Methods - Free
Space Management; I/O Systems – I/O Hardware, Application I/O interface, Kernel I/O subsystem
Unit 5 Case Study 9
Linux System - Design Principles, Kernel Modules, Process Management, Scheduling, Memory Management,
Input-Output Management, File System, Inter-process Communication; Mobile OS - iOS and Android -
Architecture and SDK Framework, Media Layer, Services Layer, Core OS Layer, File System.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Analyze various scheduling algorithms.
CO2: Understand deadlock, prevention and avoidance algorithms.
CO3: Compare and contrast various memory management schemes.
CO4: Understand the functionality of mass storage and file systems.
CO5: Perform administrative tasks on Linux Servers.
Text Books :
[1]Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, ―Operating System Concepts‖, 9th Edition, John
Wiley and Sons Inc., 2012.
[2]Ramaz Elmasri, A. Gil Carrick, David Levine, ―Operating Systems – A Spiral Approach‖, Tata McGraw Hill
Edition, 2010.
Reference Books :
[1][Link], Atul Kahate, ―Operating Systems‖, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.
[2]Andrew S. Tanenbaum, ―Modern Operating Systems‖, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
[3]Gary Nutt, ―Operating Systems‖, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
web References:
[1]. [Link]
[2]. [Link]
[3]. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
CO2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
CO3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
CO4 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
Avg 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS L T P C Hours
22UCS402
(Common to CSE,IT,AIDS & CSBS) 3 0 0 3 45
Prerequisite: -
Course Objective: The course aims to
 Learn fundamentals of Database Management Systems and Relational Algebra.
 Gain knowledge on the data models and data retrieval.
 Understand normalization techniques.
 Understand the essential concepts of transaction processing and concurrency control
 Study the file system, indexing hashing and query processing

Unit 1 Database Fundamentals 9

Introduction – Database System Applications – Views of data – Data models – Database languages –
Database system architecture – Introduction to relational databases – Relational Model – Structure of
Relational Databases – Database Schema – Keys – Relational Query Languages – Relational algebra.
Unit 2 ENTITY RELATIONSHIP MODELING AND SQL 9
Database Design Process – ER model – ER diagrams – Enhanced ER Model – ER to Relational Mapping –
SQL Basic Structure – Set Operations – Aggregate Functions – Sub queries – Nested Sub queries – Joins –
Views– Index – Integrity Constraints – SQL data types and schemas – Authorization –Triggers.
Unit 3 RELATIONAL DATABASE DESIGN 9
Functional dependency – Decomposition using functional dependencies – Canonical Cover– First Normal
Form – Second Normal Form – Third Normal Form – Boyce Codd Normal Form – Fourth Normal Form –
Fifth Normal Form.
Unit 4 TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9
Transaction Concept – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability – Conflict serializability –
View Serializability – Testing Serializability - Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks –
Multiple Granularity – Time stamp Based Protocols – Validation Based Protocols – Recovery System –
Failure Classification – Storage – Recovery and Atomicity – Log based Recovery Algorithm.
Unit 5 IMPLEMENTATION TECHNIQUES AND QUERY PROCESSING 9
RAID – File organization – Organization of records in files – Data dictionary Storage – Indexing and hashing
– Ordered indices – B+ Tree index files – B Tree index files – Static hashing – Dynamic hashing. Query
Processing: Measures of Query Cost – Selection – Join Operation – Query Optimization.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Explain architecture and evolution of database management systems and relational algebra.
CO2: Design database using ER model.
CO3: Design relational databases using normalization methods for a given application.
CO4: Assess different types of scheduling and recovery techniques for concurrent transactions.
CO5: Describe the indexing strategies and query processing.
Text Books:
[1]AbrahamSilberschatz, Henry F. Korth and Sudharshan S., “Database System Concepts”, Seventh Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2020.
[2] RamezElmasri and Shamkant B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, 7th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2017.
Reference Books:
[1]Raghu Ramakrishnan, “Database Management Systems”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill
Publications, 2015.
[2]Date C. J, Kannan A and Swamynathan S, “An Introduction to Database Systems”, 8th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2012.
[3] Gupta G.K., “Database Management Systems”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2011.
[4] Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation andManagement”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2012.

web links:
[1]. [Link]
[2]. [Link]
[3]. [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 3 3 3 3 - - - - 1 - 3 1 2 3 2
CO2 2 2 3 2 - - - - 1 - 3 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 1 2 3 3
CO4 1 3 3 3 - - - - 1 - 3 1 3 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 - - - - 2 - 3 2 3 1 2
Avg 2 3 2 2 - - - - 1 - 3 1 2 2 2
 L T P C Hours
22UCS403 COMPILER DESIGN
3 1 0 4 60
Prerequisite : 22UCS302 Formal Languages and Automata Theory

Course Objectives : The course aims to

 Acquire knowledge in different phases of a Compiler and its applications
 Understand the categorization of tokens using lexical analyzer and pattern recognition using parsers
 To understand intermediate code generation and run-time environment.
 To learn to implement front-end of the compiler
 Familiar with the code generation schemes and optimization methods.
Unit 1 Introduction to Compiler 7+2
Language processors - Structure of a compiler - Grouping of phases into passes- Compiler construction tools -
Applications of compiler technology: Implementation of high-level programming languages - Optimizations
for computer architectures-Design of new computer architecture - Program Translations- Software
productivity tools.
Unit 2 Lexical Analysis 9+4
Lexical Analysis: Role of Lexical Analyzer - Input Buffering - Lexical Errors - Specification of tokens -
Recognition of Tokens - Finite automata - Regular expression to finite automation- Optimization of DFA
based Pattern Matchers-LEX-Design of Lexical Analyzer for a sample Language
Unit 3 Syntax Analysis 9+5
Introduction-Role of the parser - Context-Free Grammars -Writing a Grammar-Top Down parsing - Recursive
Descent Parsing - Nonrecursive Predictive Parsing - Bottom-up parsing - Shift Reduce Parsing- LR Parsers:
Simple LR Parser - Canonical LR Parser - LALR Parser - Error Handling and Recovery in Syntax Analyzer-
YACC-Design of a syntax Analyzer for a Sample Language.
Unit 4 Semantic Analysis 9+3
Syntax Directed Translation - Construction of Syntax Tree - Variants of Syntax Trees -Three-Address Code -
Types and Declarations - Translation of Expressions - Control Flow - Backpatching - Switch- Statements -
Intermediate Code for Procedures.
Unit 5 Code Optimization and Generation 9+3
The Principle Sources of Optimization -Loop Optimization - The DAG representation of Basic Blocks Global
data flow analysis- Reducible flow graphs - Loop invariant computations - Induction variable elimination -
Other loop optimizations. Issues in Code generation - A simple code generator - Register allocation and
assignment - Code generation from DAG's - Peephole optimization.
Course Outcomes: On the completion of course, students should be able to
CO1: Analyze the output generated in each phase of the compiler
CO2: Design a lexical analyzer for a sample language.
CO3: Apply different parsing algorithms to develop the parsers for a given grammar.
CO4: Generate intermediate code for programming constructs
CO5: Apply optimization techniques in code generation and analyze the issues in code generation.
Text Books :
[1] Alfred V. Aho, Ravi Sethi and Jeffrey D. Ullman Compilers: Principles, Techniques and Tools , 2nd Edition,
Pearson, 2012.
Reference Books :
[1] V. Raghavan, Principles of Compiler Designǁ, Tata McGraw Hill Education Publishers, 2010.
[2] Allen I. Holub, Compiler Design in C, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
web References:
[1] [Link]
[2] [Link]
[3] [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 3 - - - 2 - - 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 3 2 3 - - 1 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 - - - 3 - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 3 - 3 - - - - - - - 1 - - 1
CO5 2 - - 3 - - - - - - 1 - - 1
Avg 2 2 3 3 3 - - 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1
 L T P C Hours
22UCS404 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS
2 0 2 3 60
Prerequisite: 22UCS301 Data Structures Concepts
Course Objectives : The course aims to
 To understand and apply the algorithm analysis techniques.
 To critically analyze the efficiency of alternative algorithmic solutions for the same problem
 To learn various searching and sorting algorithms.
 To understand different algorithm design techniques.
 To understand the limitations of Algorithmic power.
Unit 1 Introduction to Algorithms 6
Notion of an Algorithm – Fundamentals of Algorithmic Problem Solving – Important Problem Types –
Fundamentals of the Analysis of Algorithmic Efficiency –Asymptotic Notations and their properties. Analysis
Framework - Mathematical analysis for Recursive and Non-recursive algorithms.
Unit 2 Divide-And-Conquer 6
Divide and Conquer Methodology – Binary Search – Merge sort – Quick sort –strassens matrix multiplication-
Multiplication of Large Integers.
Unit 3 Dynamic Programming Technique 6
Dynamic programming – Principle of optimality – All pairs shortest path (Floyd’s & Warshalls
algorithm) –Optimal Binary Search Trees – Knapsack Problem and Memory functions.
Unit 4 Iterative Improvement 6
The Simplex Method - The Maximum-Flow Problem – Maximum Matching in Bipartite Graphs, Stable
marriage Problem.
Unit 5 Coping With The Limitations of Algorithm Power 6
Backtracking – N-Queens Problem – Hamiltonian Circuit problem-graph coloring-P, NP, NP complete and
hard problems.
List of Experiments:

1. Design and implement an algorithm towers of hanoi

2. Sort a given set of elements using the Quicksort method and determine the time required to sort the
elements. Repeat the experiment for different values of n, the number of elements in the list to be sorted and
plot a graph of the time taken versus n. The elements can be read from a file or can be generated using the
random number generator.
3. Implement a parallelized Merge Sort algorithm to sort a given set of elements and determine the time
required to sort the elements. Repeat the experiment for different values of n, the number of elements in the
list to be sorted and plot a graph of the time taken versus n. The elements can be read from a file or can be
generated using the random number generator.
4. Implement All-Pairs Shortest Paths Problem using Floyd's algorithm. Parallelize this algorithm, implement
it determine the speed-up achieved.
5. Implement N Queen's problem using Back Tracking.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Apply the fundamental concepts of algorithmic problem-solving types.

CO2:Analyze the fundamentals of the algorithm efficiency for real world problems.
CO3: Examine the searching and sorting techniques in the analysis of algorithms.
CO4: Implement the graph algorithms with dynamic programming.
CO5:Apply the algorithm design techniques for P and NP problems.
Text Books :
[1]Anany Levitin, ―Introduction to the Design & Analysis of Algorithms‖, Prentice Hall of India Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2019.
[2]Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, Computer Algorithms/ C++, Second Edition,
Universities Press, 2007.
Reference Books :
[1]Thomas [Link], Charles [Link], Ronald L. Rivest and Clifford Stein, ―Introduction to Algorithms‖,
Third Edition, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
[2]Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffrey D. Ullman, ―Data Structures and Algorithms‖, Pearson
Education, Reprint 2006.
[3]Harsh Bhasin, ―Algorithms Design and Analysis‖, Oxford university press, 2015.
Web references:
[1]. [Link]
[2]. [Link]
[3] [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 1 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO2 1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2
CO3 1 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2
Avg 1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2

L T P C Hours
22UCS405 OPERATING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2 60
Prerequisite: 22UCS101 Programming In C
Course Objectives: The course aims to
 To learn Unix commands and shell programming
 To implement various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
 To implement Process Creation and Inter Process Communication
 To implement Deadlock Avoidance, Deadlock Detection Algorithms and Page Replacement
Algorithms.
 To implement File Organization and File Allocation Strategies
List of Experiments :
1. Simulation of UNIX commands and system calls
2. Shell programming- Simple functions, Basic tests, Loops, Patterns, Expansions, Substitutions.
3. Process Scheduling- FCFS, SJF, Priority and Round robin.
4. Synchronization using semaphores
5. Implementation of Interprocess Communication.
6. Implementation of memory management schemes –first fit, Best fit, worst fit and page replacement
algorithms.
7. Implementation of Deadlock Avoidance.
8. Implementation of Multi threaded and Multi process applications.
9. Implementation of the following Page Replacement Algorithms - a) FIFO b) LRU c) LFU
10. Implementation of disk scheduling
Total Hours : 60 Hours
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Compare the performance of various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
CO2: Implement Deadlock avoidance and Detection Algorithms
CO3: Implement Semaphores, create processes and implement IPC
CO4: Analyze the performance of the various Page Replacement Algorithms
CO5: Implement File Organization and File Allocation Strategies
Software and Hardware Requirements :
 C Compiler, Turbo C++ , Java
 Standalone desktops with C / C++ / Java / Equivalent complier 30 Nos. (or)Server with C /
C++ / Java / Equivalent complier supporting 30 terminals
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
CO2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
CO3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
CO4 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
Avg 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
[Link] (Low) [Link] (Medium) [Link] (High)
 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C Hours
22UCS406
(Common to CSE,IT,AIDS and CSBS) 0 0 4 2 60
Prerequisite:
Course Objectives : The course aims to
 Learn data definition and data manipulation commands
 Be familiar with query language
 Comprehend function, triggers and procedures
 Learn the use of front end tool
 Be exposed to implementation of database applications
List Of Experiments:
1. Data Definition Commands, Data Manipulation Commands for inserting, deleting, updating and
retrieving Tables and Transaction Control statements
2. Database Querying - Simple queries, Nested queries, Sub queries and Joins
3. Creation of Views, Sequences, Synonyms
4. High level programming language extensions (Control structures, Procedures and Functions).
5. Implicit and Explicit Cursors
6. Creation of database triggers
7. Implementation of Exception Handling
8. Designing Forms
9. Database Connectivity with Front End Tools
10. Mini project for real time applications.
Total Hours : 60 Hours
Course Outcome: At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Use typical data definitions and manipulation commands
CO2: Design applications to test Nested and Join Queries
CO3: Implement simple applications that use Views
CO4: Implement applications that require a Front-end Tool
CO5:Critically analyze the use of Tables, Views, Functions and Procedures
Software Requirements :
 Front end: Python/JAVA
Back end: Oracle / SQL / MySQL/ PostGress / DB2 or Equivalent
Hardware Requirements:
Computers Required – 30 Nos. (Minimum Requirement: Pentium III or Pentium IV with 256 RAM and 40 GB
harddisk)
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
PO/ PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 3 3 3 3 - - - - 1 - 3 1 2 3 2
CO2 2 2 3 2 - - - - 1 - 3 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 1 2 3 3
CO4 1 3 3 3 - - - - 1 - 3 1 3 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 - - - - 2 - 3 2 3 1 2
Avg 2 3 2 2 - - - - 1 - 3 1 2 2 2
 L T P C Hours
22UOC201 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS
1 0 0 1 15
Common to All Branches
Prerequisite(s): -
Course objectives:
● To understand the basics of biology.
● To understand the essential response of the living system
● To learn the engineering and biological relationship.
● To learn evolutionary theory and artificial neural systems and learning algorithms
● To understand collective systems such as ACO, PSO
Unit 1 BASICS OF BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERING 3
Introduction to science of engineering, principles of biology, biological hierarchy, basics of genetics.
Unit 2 RESPONSES OF LIVING SYSTEMS 3
Biological unit and environment, activities through communication, emotional satisfaction and
intellectual stimulation.
Unit 3 UTILIZATION OF LIVING SYSTEMS 3
Basic system approach: Relationship between engineering and biology, bionics/ hybrid system,
biomimetics, solution to biological problems.
Unit 4 EVOLUTIONARY AND NEURAL SYSTEMS 3
Foundations of evolutionary theory, biological nervous systems, artificial neural networks –
overview of unsupervised learning, supervised learning and reinforcement learning algorithms-case
study.
Unit 5 BIO-INSPIRED ALGORITHM 3
Biological self-organization, Lagrangian algorithm, Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO), applications.
Course outcome(s): On completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Describe the basic characteristics and approaches in the field of biology
CO2: Understand the key function of Living system
CO3: Infer the relationship between biological problems with engineering solution.
CO4: Understand the evolution of life, artificial neural systems and learning algorithms
CO5: Explain the collective systems its applications.
Text Book(s):
[1]. Arthur J Jhonson, ‘Biology for Engineers’, CRC Press, 2ndedition, 2018
[2]. BibekanandMallick, ‘Biology for Engineers’, McGraw Hill,1st edition, 2021
Reference books:
[1]. Nancy Arana-Daniel, Carlos Lopez-Franco, Alma Y. Alanis, ‘Bio-inspired Algorithms for
Engineering’, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1st edition, 2018
[2]. S. Rajasekaran, G.A. VijayalakshmiPai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy Systems and Evolutionary
Algorithms: Synthesis and Applications’, PHI Learning, 2nd edition, 2017
Web references:
● [Link]
Course Articulation Matrix
CO vs PO mapping
P
PO/ PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
O PSO3
CO 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1
CO1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO2 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO4 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO5 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
Avg 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS-I Hours
22UIT403
(Common to All Branches) 45
Prerequisite: Nil
Unit –I: Number system 11
Introduction; Number system - Types of numbers, BODMAS rule, Approximation, Divisibility rule,
Unit digit, cyclic rule, squares and square root, Cubes and cube root, LCM & HCF, co-primes , Indices
and surds; Percentage – Percentage to fraction convertion, fraction to percentage convertion,
Percentage of a number, Salary increment and decrement, , Election based questions, Marks based
questions, Population based questions, Successive increase or decrease, Demand and Consumption,
Comparitive percentage and Misc; Syllogism: Introduction to statement and conclusion, Difference
between either and neither, Problem solving methods.
Unit- II: Average 10
Average: Introduction to averages, Average of consecutive numbers, Nature of average, Average on
random numbers, Men replacement, Values misread, Cricket based problems, Comparing two
averages; Ratio and Proportion: Difference between Ratio and Proportion, Types of Ratio,
Combining two ratios, Compendo Didendo, Comparing ratio with numbers, Coins, Income and
Expenditure, Partnership; Blood Relation: Introduction to relations, Family tree, Pointing to a
person/ photograph, Coded Problems.
Unit-III: Profit, Loss and Discount 11
Profit, Loss & Discount: Terms, Profit/Loss percentage, Same SP/CP when Profit/Loss changes,
Consecutive selling, Cheating merchant, Profit/Loss with MP& Discount; Seating Arrangement:
Linear, Parallel, Circular, Square; Puzzle: Floor based, 2 variables, 3 variables, Data based problems.
Unit-IV: SI & CI 7
SI & CI: Problems on SI & CI – Calculation on Monthly, Quarterly, Half yearly and annually,
Difference between SI & CI; Ages: Comparing ages in ratio, Statement based problems; Coding and
Decoding: Letter coding, Number coding, symbolic coding, Chinese coding and Alpha numeric
coding.
Unit –V: Time & work 6
Time and Work: Efficiency based problems, alternate days, Joining and leaving, Chain rule, Group
based problems, Work and wages; Pipes and cistern: Problems on Pipes and Pipes and cistern;
Number series: Missing number and Wrong number out.
Reference Books and Online platforms:
1.R.S Agarwal, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, S Chand Publication, 2022.
[Link] Khattar, The pearson Guide Quantitative Aptitude for competitive Examinations, Pearson
Publication 3rd Edition, 2018.
3.[Link]
4.[Link]
5.[Link]
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON - AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES
REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

I. PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

Graduates can
 Apply their technical competence in computer science to solve real world problems, with
technical and people leadership.
 Conduct cutting edge research and develop solutions on problems of social relevance.
 Work in a business environment, exhibiting team skills, work ethics, adaptability and lifelong
learning.

II. PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

1 Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2 Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3 Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.
4 Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5 Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6 The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities
relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7 Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need
for sustainable development.
8 Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
9 Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10 Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

1
 engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive
clear instructions.
11 Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and
leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

12 Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

III. PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

The Students will be able to

 Exhibit design and programming skills to build and automate business solutions using cutting
edge technologies.
 Strong theoretical foundation leading to excellence and excitement towards research, to
provide elegant solutions to complex problems.
 Ability to work effectively with various engineering fields as a team to design, build and
develop system applications.

2
 Mapping of Course Outcome and Programme Outcome

Year Sem Course name PO PSO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
Induction Programme
I I
Professional English - I 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
Matrices and Calculus 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Engineering Physics 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
Engineering Chemistry 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
Problem Solving and
2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
Python Programming
தமிழர் மரபு
/Heritage of Tamils
Problem Solving and
Python Programming 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
Laboratory
Physics and Chemistry 3 2.4 2.6 1 1
Laboratory
2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -

English Laboratory $ 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -

II Professional English - II 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -

Statistics and
3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Numerical Methods
Physics for Information
3 1.3 2 1.3 2.3 1 1.3 - - - - 2 - - -
Science
Basic Electrical and 2 1.8 1 - - - - 1 - - - 2 - - 1
Electronics Engineering
Engineering Graphics 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -

Programming in C 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 - 3 2 2 2 -

தமிழரும்
ததொழில் நுட்பமும்
/Tamils and
Technology
Engineering Practices 3 2 - - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1 1
Laboratory
Programming in C 2 2 3 2 1 2 - - 2 1 2 2 2 2
Laboratory
Communication
2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
Laboratory / Foreign
$
Language
1 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - - - -
II III Discrete Mathematics
Digital Principles and
3 3 3 3 1.8 1.6 1 1 1 1 1.6 2.6 1.4 2.6 1.6
Computer Organization
Foundations of Data
2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Science
Data Structures 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

3
 Object Oriented
2 1 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
Programming
Data Structures
2 2 2 1 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
Laboratory
Object Oriented
Programming 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Laboratory
Data Science
2 2 2 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
Laboratory
Professional
Development$
IV Theory of Computation 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Artificial Intelligence
2 1 2 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 3 2 2 2
and Machine Learning
Database Management
2 2 3 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
Systems
Algorithms 2.67 1.8 3 1 1.33 1 1 1
Introduction to
2 2 2 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
Operating Systems
Environmental
Sciences and 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
Sustainability
Operating Systems
2 2 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Laboratory
Database Management
2 3 2 2 1 - - - 2 1 3 2 2 2 2
Systems Laboratory
Computer Networks - 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 - - - 1 1
III V
Compiler Design 2.8
3.00 2.60 2.20 2.00 - - - 2.60 2.00 1.60 2.40 1.80 1.80 2.00
0
Cryptography and
3 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.8 - - - 2 - - 1.2 2.8 2.8 3
Cyber Security
Distributed Computing 1.8 2.4 1.8 2.4 2 - - - 2.6 2.2 2.2 1.6 2 1.8 1.6
Object Oriented 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 1 2 2 2 1
VI
Software Engineering
Embedded Systems
2.6 2 3 2.4 1.5 - - - 1 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 1.6 2.6
and IoT
Human Values and
IV VII Ethics

Summer internship
Project Work /
VIII Internship
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

4
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON- AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES
REGULATIONS 2021
B. E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI FOR SEMESTERS I TO VIII
SEMESTER I
PERIODS PER TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE-
COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. IP3151 Induction Programme - - - - - 0
THEORY
2. HS3152 Professional English - I HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MA3151 Matrices and Calculus BSC 3 1 0 4 4
4. PH3151 Engineering Physics BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CY3151 Engineering Chemistry BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Problem Solving and Python
6. GE3151 ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
7. GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
PRACTICALS
8. Problem Solving and Python
GE3171 ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory
9. BS3171 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory BSC 0 0 4 4 2
$
10. GE3172 English Laboratory EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 16 1 10 27 22
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER II
PERIODS PER TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE-
COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS3252 Professional English - II HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
2. MA3251 Statistics and Numerical Methods BSC 3 1 0 4 4
3. PH3256 Physics for Information Science BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Basic Electrical and Electronics
4. BE3251 ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
5. GE3251 Engineering Graphics ESC 2 0 4 6 4
6. CS3251 Programming in C PCC 3 0 0 3 3
தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
7. GE3252
/Tamils and Technology
8. NCC Credit Course Level 1# - 2 0 0 2 2#
PRACTICALS
9. GE3271 Engineering Practices Laboratory ESC 0 0 4 4 2
10. CS3271 Programming in C Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Communication Laboratory / Foreign
11. GE3272 EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Language $
TOTAL 17 1 16 34 26
# NCC Credit Course level 1 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be recorded
in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
$ Skill Based Course

5
 SEMESTER III
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA3354 Discrete Mathematics BSC 3 1 0 4 4
2. Digital Principles and
CS3351 ESC 3 0 2 5 4
Computer Organization
3. Foundations of Data
CS3352 PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Science
4. CS3301 Data Structures PCC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Object Oriented
CS3391 PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
PRACTICALS
6. CS3311 Data Structures Laboratory PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
7. Object Oriented 0 0 3 3
CS3381 PCC 1.5
Programming Laboratory
8. CS3361 Data Science Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
$
9. GE3361 Professional Development EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 15 1 14 30 23
$
Skill Based Course
SEMESTER IV
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. CS3452 Theory of Computation PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. Artificial Intelligence and
CS3491 PCC 3 0 2 5 4
Machine Learning
3. Database Management
CS3492 PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Systems
4. CS3401 Algorithms PCC 3 0 2 5 4
5. Introduction to Operating
CS3451 PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Systems
6. Environmental Sciences and
GE3451 BSC 2 0 0 2 2
Sustainability
7. NCC Credit Course Level 2# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
8. CS3461 Operating Systems Laboratory PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
9. Database Management
CS3481 PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Systems Laboratory
TOTAL 20 0 10 30 22
#
NCC Credit Course level 2 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the
students will be recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for
the computation of CGPA.

6
 SEMESTER V
PERIODS PER TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. CS3591 Computer Networks PCC 3 0 2 5 4
2. CS3501 Compiler Design PCC 3 0 2 5 4
3. Cryptography and Cyber
CB3491 PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Security
4. CS3551 Distributed Computing PCC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective I PEC - - - - 3
6. Professional Elective II PEC - - - - 3
7. Mandatory Course-I& MC 3 0 0 3 0
TOTAL - - - - 20
&
Mandatory Course-I is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list
given under Mandatory Course-I)

SEMESTER VI
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. Object Oriented Software
CCS356 PCC 3 0 2 5 4
Engineering
2. CS3691 Embedded Systems and IoT PCC 3 0 2 5 4
3. Open Elective – I* OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective III PEC - - - - 3
5. Professional Elective IV PEC - - - - 3
6. Professional Elective V PEC - - - - 3
7. Professional Elective VI PEC - - - - 3
8. Mandatory Course-II & MC 3 0 0 3 0
9. NCC Credit Course Level 3# 3 0 0 3 3#
TOTAL - - - - 23
*Open Elective – I Shall be chosen from the list of open electives offered by other
Programmes

&
Mandatory Course-II is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list
given under Mandatory Course-II)

#
NCC Credit Course level 3 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the
students will be recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for
the computation of CGPA

7
 SEMESTER VII / VIII*
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. GE3791 Human Values and Ethics HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
2. Elective - Management# HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Open Elective – II** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Open Elective – III** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Open Elective – IV** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
6. CS3711 Summer internship EEC 0 0 0 0 2
TOTAL 14 0 0 14 16
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII
will be offered during semester VIII.
** Open Elective II - IV (Shall be chosen from the list of open electives offered by other
Programmes).
#
Elective - Management shall be chosen from the Elective Management courses.

SEMESTER VIII /VII*

S. PERIODS TOTAL
COURSE CATE
NO COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
CODE GORY
. L T P PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. CS3811 Project Work/Internship EEC 0 0 20 20 10
TOTAL 0 0 20 20 10
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII
will be offered during semester VIII.
TOTAL CREDITS: 162

ELECTIVE – MANAGEMENT COURSES

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PERWEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. GE3751 Principles of Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
2. GE3752 Total Quality Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Engineering Economics and
GE3753 HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Financial Accounting
4. Human Resource
GE3754 HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
5. GE3755 Knowledge Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GE3792 Industrial Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3

8
 MANDATORY COURSES I

PERIODS TOTAL
S. CATE
COURSE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
CODE L T P PERIODS
1. Introduction to Women
MX3081 MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Gender Studies
2. MX3082 Elements of Literature MC 3 0 0 3 0
3. MX3083 Film Appreciation MC 3 0 0 3 0
4. Disaster Risk Reduction
MX3084 MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Management

MANDATORY COURSES II
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Well Being with
Traditional Practices -
MX3085 MC 3 0 0 3 0
Yoga, Ayurveda and
Siddha
2. History of Science and
MX3086 MC 3 0 0 3 0
Technology in India
3. Political and Economic
MX3087 Thought for a Humane MC 3 0 0 3 0
Society
4. State, Nation Building
MX3088 MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Politics in India
5. MX3089 Industrial Safety MC 3 0 0 3 0

9
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES: VERTICALS

Vertical III Vertical VII

Vertical II Vertical IV Vertical VI
Vertical I Cloud Computing and Vertical V Artificial
Full Stack Cyber Security and Emerging
Data Science Data Center Creative Media Intelligence and
Development Data Privacy Technologies
Technologies Machine Learning
Augmented Augmented
Exploratory Data Knowledge
Web Technologies Cloud Computing Ethical Hacking Reality/Virtual Reality/Virtual
Analysis Engineering
Reality Reality
Recommender Digital and Mobile Multimedia and Robotic Process
App Development Virtualization Soft Computing
Systems Forensics Animation Automation
Cloud Services
Neural Networks Cloud Services Social Network Video Creation Neural Networks Neural Networks
Management
and Deep Learning Management Security and Editing and Deep Learning and Deep Learning

Text and Text and

UI and UX Design Data Warehousing Modern Cryptography UI and UX Design Cyber security
Speech Analysis Speech Analysis
Software Testing Engineering Secure Quantum Optimization
Business Analytics Storage Technologies Digital marketing
and Automation Software Systems Computing Techniques
Cryptocurrency and Cryptocurrency and
Image and Video Web Application Software Defined
Blockchain Visual Effects Blockchain Game Theory
Analytics Security Networks
Technologies Technologies
Game Game
Computer Vision DevOps Stream Processing Network Security Cognitive Science
Development Development
Principles of Multimedia Data
Security and Privacy in Security and Privacy in 3D Printing and
Big Data Analytics Programming Compression and Ethics And AI
Cloud Cloud Design
Languages Storage
Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:
Professional Elective Courses will be registered in Semesters V and VI. These courses are listed in groups called verticals that represent a particular area
of specialisation / diversified group. Students are permitted to choose all the Professional Electives from a particular vertical or from different
verticals. Further, only one Professional Elective course shall be chosen in a semester horizontally (row-wise). However, two courses are permitted from
the same row, provided one course is enrolled in Semester V and another in semester VI.
The registration of courses for B.E./[Link] (Honours) or Minor degree shall be done from Semester V to VIII. The procedure for registration of courses
explained above shall be followed for the courses of B.E/[Link] (Honours) or Minor degree also. For more details on B.E./[Link] (Honours) or Minor
degree refer to the Regulations 2021, Clause 4.10 (Amendments).

10
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES: VERTICALS

VERTICAL 1: DATA SCIENCE

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CCS346 Exploratory Data Analysis PEC 2 0 2 4 3
2. CCS360 Recommender Systems PEC 2 0 2 4 3
3. Neural Networks and Deep
CCS355 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Learning
4. CCS369 Text and Speech Analysis PEC 2 0 2 4 3
5. CCW331 Business Analytics PEC 2 0 2 4 3
6. CCS349 Image and Video Analytics PEC 2 0 2 4 3
7. CCS338 Computer Vision PEC 2 0 2 4 3
8. CCS334 Big Data Analytics PEC 2 0 2 4 3

VERTICAL 2: FULL STACK DEVELOPMENT

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CCS375 Web Technologies PEC 2 0 2 4 3
2. CCS332 App Development PEC 2 0 2 4 3
3. Cloud Services
CCS336 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Management
4. CCS370 UI and UX Design PEC 2 0 2 4 3
5. Software Testing and
CCS366 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Automation
6. CCS374 Web Application Security PEC 2 0 2 4 3
7. CCS342 DevOps PEC 2 0 2 4 3
8. Principles of Programming
CCS358 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Languages

11
 VERTICAL 3: CLOUD COMPUTING AND DATA CENTER TECHNOLOGIES

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CCS335 Cloud Computing PEC 2 0 2 4 3
2. CCS372 Virtualization PEC 2 0 2 4 3
3. Cloud Services
CCS336 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Management
4. CCS341 Data Warehousing PEC 2 0 2 4 3
5. CCS367 Storage Technologies PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CCS365 Software Defined Networks PEC 2 0 2 4 3
7. CCS368 Stream Processing PEC 2 0 2 4 3
8. Security and Privacy in
CCS362 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Cloud

VERTICAL 4: CYBER SECURITY AND DATA PRIVACY

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CCS344 Ethical Hacking PEC 2 0 2 4 3
2. Digital and Mobile
CCS343 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Forensics
3. CCS363 Social Network Security PEC 2 0 2 4 3
4. CCS351 Modern Cryptography PEC 2 0 2 4 3
5. Engineering Secure
CB3591 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Software Systems
6. Cryptocurrency and
CCS339 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Blockchain Technologies
7. CCS354 Network Security PEC 2 0 2 4 3
8. Security and Privacy in
CCS362 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Cloud

12
 VERTICAL 5: CREATIVE MEDIA

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Augmented Reality/Virtual
CCS333 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Reality
2. CCS352 Multimedia and Animation PEC 2 0 2 4 3
3. CCS371 Video Creation and Editing PEC 2 0 2 4 3
4. CCS370 UI and UX Design PEC 2 0 2 4 3
5. CCW332 Digital marketing PEC 2 0 2 4 3
6. CCS373 Visual Effects PEC 2 0 2 4 3
7. CCS347 Game Development PEC 2 0 2 4 3
8. Multimedia Data
CCS353 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Compression and Storage

VERTICAL 6: EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Augmented Reality/Virtual
CCS333 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Reality
2. Robotic Process
CCS361 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Automation
3. Neural Networks and Deep
CCS355 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Learning
4. CCS340 Cyber security PEC 2 0 2 4 3
5. CCS359 Quantum Computing PEC 2 0 2 4 3
6. Cryptocurrency and
CCS339 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Blockchain Technologies
7. CCS347 Game Development PEC 2 0 2 4 3
8. CCS331 3D Printing and Design PEC 2 0 2 4 3

13
 VERTICAL 7: ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING

PERIODS TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CCS350 Knowledge Engineering PEC 2 0 2 4 3
2. CCS364 Soft Computing PEC 2 0 2 4 3
3. Neural Networks and Deep
CCS355 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Learning
4. CCS369 Text and Speech Analysis PEC 2 0 2 4 3
5. CCS357 Optimization Techniques PEC 2 0 2 4 3
6. CCS348 Game Theory PEC 2 0 2 4 3
7. CCS337 Cognitive Science PEC 2 0 2 4 3
8. CCS345 Ethics And AI PEC 2 0 2 4 3

OPEN ELECTIVES
(Students shall choose the open elective courses, such that the course contents are not
similar to any other course contents/title under other course categories).

OPEN ELECTIVES – I
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OAS351 Space Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. Introduction to Industrial
OIE351 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
3. OBT351 Food, Nutrition and Health OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Environment and Social
OCE351 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Impact Assessment
5. Renewable Energy
OEE351 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
6. Introduction to Industrial
OEI351 Instrumentation and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control
7. OMA351 Graph Theory OEC 3 0 0 3 3

14
 OPEN ELECTIVES – II

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Resource Management
OIE352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Techniques
2. OMG351 Fintech Regulation OEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. OFD351 Holistic Nutrition OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. AI3021 IT in Agricultural System OEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Introduction to Control
OEI352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
6. Pharmaceutical
OPY351 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Nanotechnology
7. OAE351 Aviation Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3

OPEN ELECTIVES – III

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. English for Competitive
OHS351 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Examinations
2. NGOs and Sustainable
OMG352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
3. Democracy and Good
OMG353 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Governance
4. Renewable Energy
CME365 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technologies
5. OME354 Applied Design Thinking OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. MF3003 Reverse Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. OPR351 Sustainable Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. AU3791 Electric and Hybrid Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. OAS352 Space Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
10. OIM351 Industrial Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
11. OIE354 Quality Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
12. OSF351 Fire Safety Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
13. Introduction to Non-destructive
OML351 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Testing
14. OMR351 Mechatronics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. ORA351 Foundation of Robotics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. Fundamentals of Aeronautical
OAE352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
17. OGI351 Remote Sensing Concepts OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15
18. OAI351 Urban Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. Drinking Water Supply and
OEN351 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Treatment
20. OEE352 Electric Vehicle Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
21. Introduction to PLC
OEI353 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
22. OCH351 Nano Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
23. OCH352 Functional Materials OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. OFD352 Traditional Indian Foods OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. OFD353 Introduction to food processing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
26. OPY352 IPR for Pharma Industry OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OTT351 Basics of Textile Finishing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
28. Industrial Engineering for
OTT352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Garment Industry
29. OTT353 Basics of Textile Manufacture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
30. Introduction to Petroleum
OPE351 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Refining and Petrochemicals
31. Energy Conservation and
CPE334 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
32. OPT351 Basics of Plastics Processing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
33. OEC351 Signals and Systems OEC 3 0 0 3 3
34. Fundamentals of Electronic
OEC352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Devices and Circuits
35. Foundation Skills in Integrated
CBM348 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Product Development
36. CBM333 Assistive Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
37. OMA352 Operations Research OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OMA353 Algebra and Number Theory OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OMA354 Linear Algebra OEC 3 0 0 3 3
40. Lean Concepts, Tools and
OCE353 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Practices
41. Basics of Microbial
OBT352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
42. OBT353 Basics of Biomolecules OEC 3 0 0 3 3
43. Fundamentals of Cell and
OBT354 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Molecular Biology

16
 OPEN ELECTIVES – IV
COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS352 Project Report Writing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. Advanced Numerical
OMA355 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Methods
3. OMA356 Random Processes OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Queuing and Reliability
OMA357 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Modelling
5. Production and Operations
OMG354 Management for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurs
6. OMG355 Multivariate Data Analysis OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. OME352 Additive Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. CME343 New Product Development OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. Industrial Design & Rapid
OME355 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Prototyping Techniques
10. Micro and Precision
MF3010 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
11. Cost Management of
OMF354 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering Projects
12. Batteries and Management
AU3002 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
system
13. AU3008 Sensors and Actuators OEC 3 0 0 3 3
14. OAS353 Space Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. OIM352 Management Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. Production Planning and
OIM353 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control
17. OIE353 Operations Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
18. OSF352 Industrial Hygiene OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. OSF353 Chemical Process Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. Electrical, Electronic and
OML352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Magnetic materials
21. Nanomaterials and
OML353 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
22. OMR352 Hydraulics and Pneumatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
23. OMR353 Sensors OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. ORA352 Concepts in Mobile Robots OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. MV3501 Marine Propulsion OEC 3 0 0 3 3
26. OMV351 Marine Merchant Vessels OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. Elements of Marine
OMV352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
28. CRA332 Drone Technologies OEC 3 0 0 3 3
17
29. Geographical Information
OGI352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
30. Agriculture Entrepreneurship
OAI352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
31. OEN352 Biodiversity Conservation OEC 3 0 0 3 3
32. Introduction to control
OEE353 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
systems
33. Introduction to Industrial
OEI354 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Automation Systems
34. OCH353 Energy Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
35. OCH354 Surface Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
36. Fundamentals of Food
OFD354 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
37. Food safety and Quality
OFD355 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Regulations
38. OPY353 Nutraceuticals OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OTT354 Basics of Dyeing and Printing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
40. FT3201 Fibre Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
41. Garment Manufacturing
OTT355 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
42. OPE353 Industrial safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
43. Unit Operations in Petro
OPE354 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chemical Industries
44. Plastic Materials for
OPT352 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineers
45. Properties and Testing of
OPT353 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Plastics
46. OEC353 VLSI Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
47. CBM370 Wearable Devices OEC 3 0 0 3 3
48. CBM356 Medical Informatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
49. Basics of Integrated Water
OCE354 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Resources Management
50. Biotechnology for Waste
OBT355 OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
51. OBT356 Lifestyle Diseases OEC 3 0 0 3 3
52. OBT357 Biotechnology in Health Care OEC 3 0 0 3 3

18
 SUMMARY

Name of the Programme: B.E. Computer Science and Engineering

Subject Area Credits per Semester Total

[Link]
Credits
I II III IV V VI VII/VIII VIII/VII
1 HSMC 4 3 5 12
2 BSC 12 7 4 2 25
3 ESC 5 9 4 18
4 PCC 5 14 20 14 8 61
5 PEC 6 12 18
6 OEC 3 9 12
7 EEC 1 2 1 2 10 16

Non-Credit
8 √ √
/(Mandatory)

Total 22 26 23 22 20 23 16 10 162

ENROLLMENT FOR B.E. / B. TECH. (HONOURS) / MINOR DEGREE (OPTIONAL)

A student can also optionally register for additional courses (18 credits) and become eligible for the
award of B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours) or Minor Degree.

For B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours), a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from
semester V onwards. These courses shall be from the same vertical or a combination of different
verticals of the same programme of study only.

For minor degree, a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from semester V
onwards. All these courses have to be in a particular vertical from any one of the other programmes,
Moreover, for minor degree the student can register for courses from any one of the following verticals
also.
Complete details are available in clause 4.10 (Amendments) of Regulations 2021.

19
 VERTICALS FOR MINOR DEGREE
(In addition to all the verticals of other programmes)

Vertical I Vertical III Vertical IV Vertical V

Vertical II
Fintech and Public Business Data Environment and
Entrepreneurship
Block Chain Administration Analytics Sustainability
Financial Sustainable
Foundations of Principles of Public Statistics for
Management infrastructure
Entrepreneurship Administration Management
Development
Team Building & Datamining for Sustainable
Fundamentals
Leadership Constitution of Business Agriculture and
of Investment
Management for India Intelligence Environmental
Business Management
Banking, Human
Public Personnel Sustainable Bio
Financial Creativity & Innovation Resource
Administration Materials
Services and in Entrepreneurship Analytics
Insurance
Introduction to Marketing and
Principles of Marketing Administrative Materials for
Blockchain Social Media
Management for Theories Energy
and its Web Analytics
Business Sustainability
Applications
Fintech Human Resource Operation and
Indian
Personal Management for Supply Chain Green Technology
Administrative
Finance and Entrepreneurs Analytics
System
Payments
Introduction to Financing New Public Policy Financial Environmental
Fintech Business Ventures Administration Analytics Quality Monitoring
and Analysis
Integrated Energy
Planning for
- - - -
Sustainable
Development
Energy Efficiency
- - - - for Sustainable
Development

20
 (choice of courses for Minor degree is to be made from any one vertical of other
programmes or from anyone of the following verticals)

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG331 Financial Management PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. Fundamentals of
CMG332 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Investment
3. Banking, Financial
CMG333 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Services and Insurance
4. Introduction to
CMG334 Blockchain and its PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
5. Fintech Personal
CMG335 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Finance and Payments
6. CMG336 Introduction to Fintech PEC 3 0 0 3 3

VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Foundations of
CMG337 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
2. Team Building &
CMG338 Leadership Management PEC 3 0 0 3 3
for Business
3. Creativity & Innovation in
CMG339 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
4. Principles of Marketing
CMG340 Management For PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business
5. Human Resource
CMG341 Management for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurs
6. Financing New
CMG342 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Ventures

21
 VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Principles of Public
CMG343 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
2. CMG344 Constitution of India PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Public Personnel
CMG345 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
4. CMG346 Administrative Theories PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Indian Administrative
CMG347 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
6. Public Policy
CMG348 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration

VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Statistics for
CMG349 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. Datamining For
CMG350 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Intelligence
3. Human Resource
CMG351 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analytics
4. Marketing and Social
CMG352 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Media Web Analytics
5. Operation and Supply
CMG353 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chain Analytics
6. CMG354 Financial Analytics PEC 3 0 0 3 3

22
 VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Sustainable infrastructure
CES331 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
2. Sustainable Agriculture
CES332 and Environmental PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CES333 Sustainable Bio Materials PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Materials for Energy
CES334 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainability
5. CES335 Green Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Environmental Quality
CES336 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Monitoring and Analysis
7. Integrated Energy
CES337 Planning for Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
8. Energy Efficiency for
CES338 Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development

23
IP3151 INDUCTION PROGRAMME

This is a mandatory 2 week programme to be conducted as soon as the students enter the institution.
Normal classes start only after the induction program is over.

The induction programme has been introduced by AICTE with the following objective:

“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

admission, have a holistic outlook, and have a desire to work for national needs and beyond. The
graduating student must have knowledge and skills in the area of his/her study. However, he/she
must also have a broad understanding of society and relationships. Character needs to be nurtured
as an essential quality by which he/she would understand and fulfill his/her responsibility as an
engineer, a citizen and a human being. Besides the above, several meta-skills and underlying values
are needed.”

“One will have to work closely with the newly joined students in making them feel comfortable, allow
them to explore their academic interests and activities, reduce competition and make them work for
excellence, promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students, give a
broader view of life, and build character.”

Hence, the purpose of this programme is to make the students feel comfortable in their new
environment, open them up, set a healthy daily routine, create bonding in the batch as well as
between faculty and students, develop awareness, sensitivity and understanding of the self, people
around them, society at large, and nature.

The following are the activities under the induction program in which the student would be fully
engaged throughout the day for the entire duration of the program.

(i) Physical Activity

This would involve a daily routine of physical activity with games and sports, yoga, gardening, etc.

(ii) Creative Arts

Every student would choose one skill related to the arts whether visual arts or performing arts.
Examples are painting, sculpture, pottery, music, dance etc. The student would pursue it everyday
for the duration of the program. These would allow for creative expression. It would develop a sense
of aesthetics and
also enhance creativity which would, hopefully, grow into engineering design later.

(iii) Universal Human Values

This is the anchoring activity of the Induction Programme. It gets the student to explore oneself and
allows one to experience the joy of learning, stand up to peer pressure, make decisions with
courage, be aware of relationships with colleagues and supporting stay in the hostel and
department, be sensitive to others, etc. A module in Universal Human Values provides the base.
Methodology of teaching this content is extremely important. It must not be through do's and don'ts,
but get students to explore and think by engaging them in a dialogue. It is best taught through group
discussions and real life activities rather than lecturing.

24
Discussions would be conducted in small groups of about 20 students with a faculty
mentor each. It would be effective that the faculty mentor assigned is also the faculty advisor for the
student for the full duration of the UG programme.

(iv) Literary Activity

Literary activity would encompass reading, writing and possibly, debating, enacting a play etc.

(v) Proficiency Modules

This would address some lacunas that students might have, for example, English, computer
familiarity etc.

(vi) Lectures by Eminent People

Motivational lectures by eminent people from all walks of life should be arranged to give the students
exposure to people who are socially active or in public life.

(vii) Visits to Local Area

A couple of visits to the landmarks of the city, or a hospital or orphanage could be organized. This
would familiarize them with the area as well as expose them to the underprivileged.

(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations

They should be told about what getting into a branch or department means what role it plays in
society, through its technology. They should also be shown the laboratories, workshops & other
facilities.

(ix) Department Specific Activities

About a week can be spent in introducing activities (games, quizzes, social interactions, small
experiments, design thinking etc.) that are relevant to the particular branch of Engineering /
Technology / Architecture that can serve as a motivation and kindle interest in building things
(become a maker) in that particular field. This can be conducted in the form of a workshop. For
example, CSE and IT students may be introduced to activities that kindle computational thinking,
and get them to build simple games. ECE students may be introduced to building simple circuits as
an extension of their knowledge in Science, and so on. Students may be asked to build stuff using
their knowledge of science.

Induction Programme is totally an activity based programme and therefore there shall be no
tests / assessments during this programme.

References:
Guide to Induction program from AICTE

25
HS3152 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH I LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To learn to use basic grammatic structures in suitable contexts
 To acquire lexical competence and use them appropriately in a sentence and understand
their meaning in a text
 To help learners use language effectively in professional contexts
 To develop learners’ ability to read and write complex texts, summaries, articles, blogs,
definitions, essays and user manuals.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 1
What is effective communication? (Explain using activities) Why is communication critical for
excellence during study, research and work? What are the seven C’s of effective communication?
What are key language skills? What is effective listening? What does it involve? What is effective
speaking? What does it mean to be an excellent reader? What should you be able to do? What is
effective writing? How does one develop language and communication skills? What does the course
focus on? How are communication and language skills going to be enhanced during this course?
What do you as a learner need to do to enhance your English language and communication skills
to get the best out of this course?

INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 8

Reading - Reading brochures (technical context), telephone messages / social media messages
relevant to technical contexts and emails. Writing - Writing emails / letters introducing oneself.
Grammar - Present Tense ( simple and progressive); Question types: Wh/ Yes or No/ and Tags.
Vocabulary - Synonyms; One word substitution; Abbreviations & Acronyms (as used in technical
contexts).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 9

Reading - Reading biographies, travelogues, newspaper reports, Excerpts from literature, and travel
& technical blogs. Writing - Guided writing-- Paragraph writing Short Report on an event (field trip
etc.) Grammar –Past tense (simple); Subject-Verb Agreement; and Prepositions. Vocabulary - Word
forms (prefixes& suffixes); Synonyms and Antonyms. Phrasal verbs.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 9

Reading – Reading advertisements, gadget reviews; user manuals. Writing - Writing definitions;
instructions; and Product /Process description. Grammar - Imperatives; Adjectives; Degrees of
comparison; Present & Past Perfect Tenses. Vocabulary - Compound Nouns, Homonyms; and
Homophones, discourse markers (connectives & sequence words).

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 9

Reading – Newspaper articles; Journal reports –and Non Verbal Communcation ( tables, pie charts
etc,. ). Writing – Note-making / Note-taking (*Study skills to be taught, not tested); Writing
recommendations; Transferring information from non verbal ( chart , graph etc, to verbal mode)
Grammar – Articles; Pronouns - Possessive & Relative pronouns. Vocabulary - Collocations; Fixed
/ Semi fixed expressions.

UNIT V EXPRESSION 9
Reading – Reading editorials; and Opinion Blogs; Writing – Essay Writing (Descriptive or narrative).
Grammar – Future Tenses, Punctuation; Negation (Statements & Questions); and Simple,
26
 Compound & Complex Sentences. Vocabulary - Cause & Effect Expressions – Content vs Function
words.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, learners will be able
CO1:To use appropriate words in a professional context
CO2:To gain understanding of basic grammatic structures and use them in right context.
CO3:To read and infer the denotative and connotative meanings of technical texts
CO4:To write definitions, descriptions, narrations and essays on various topics

TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists Orient Blackswan Private Ltd. Department of
English, Anna University, (2020 edition)
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press, 2021.
Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr. KN.
Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.

REFERENCES:
1. Technical Communication – Principles And Practices By Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta
Sharma, Oxford Univ. Press, 2016, New Delhi.
2. A Course Book On Technical English By Lakshminarayanan, Scitech Publications (India)
Pvt. Ltd.
3. English For Technical Communication (With CD) By Aysha Viswamohan, Mcgraw Hill
Education, ISBN : 0070264244.
4. Effective Communication Skill, Kulbhusan Kumar, RS Salaria, Khanna Publishing House.
5. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal, Allied Publishing House, New Delhi,2003.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 2 3 - 3 - - -
AVg. 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -

1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

27
MA3151 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C
3 1 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that are needed by engineers for practical
applications.
 To familiarize the students with differential calculus.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many
branches of engineering.
 To make the students understand various techniques of integration.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their applications.
UNIT I MATRICES 9+3
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigenvalues
and Eigenvectors – Cayley - Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices by orthogonal
transformation – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation –
Nature of quadratic forms – Applications: Stretching of an elastic membrane.

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules (sum,
product, quotient, chain rules) - Implicit differentiation - Logarithmic differentiation - Applications:
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change of
variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of
two variables – Applications: Maxima and minima of functions of two variables and Lagrange’s
method of undetermined multipliers.

UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration: Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial
fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals - Applications: Hydrostatic force and
pressure, moments and centres of mass.

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals – Applications: Moments and centres of mass, moment of inertia.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1:Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
CO2:Apply differential calculus tools in solving various application problems.
CO3:Able to use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.
CO4:Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems.
CO5:Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas, volumes and other practical problems.
28
 TEXT BOOKS :
1. Kreyszig.E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
44th Edition , 2018.
3. James Stewart, " Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 8th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units II & IV - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7 (Tangents problems only),
2.8, 3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 (Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change
theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8 ].

REFERENCES:
1. Anton. H, Bivens. I and Davis. S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016
2. Bali. N., Goyal. M. and Watkins. C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
3. Jain . R.K. and Iyengar. S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S. and Manicavachagom Pillai. T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2016.
6. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia. S.C, “Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
7. Thomas. G. B., Hass. J, and Weir. M.D, "Thomas Calculus", 14th Edition, Pearson India,
2018.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

PH3151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students effectively achieve an understanding of mechanics.
 To enable the students to gain knowledge of electromagnetic waves and its applications.
 To introduce the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
 Equipping the students to successfully understand the importance of quantum physics.
 To motivate the students towards the applications of quantum mechanics.

UNIT I MECHANICS 9
Multi-particle dynamics: Center of mass (CM) – CM of continuous bodies – motion of the CM –
kinetic energy of the system of particles. Rotation of rigid bodies: Rotational kinematics – rotational
kinetic energy and moment of inertia - theorems of M .I –moment of inertia of continuous bodies –

29
M.I of a diatomic molecule - torque – rotational dynamics of rigid bodies – conservation of angular
momentum – rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule - gyroscope - torsional pendulum
– double pendulum –Introduction to nonlinear oscillations.

UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

The Maxwell’s equations - wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, Conditions on
the wave field - properties of electromagnetic waves: speed, amplitude, phase, orientation and
waves in matter - polarization - Producing electromagnetic waves - Energy and momentum in EM
waves: Intensity, waves from localized sources, momentum and radiation pressure - Cell-phone
reception. Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves from a non-conducting medium-
vacuum interface for normal incidence.

UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9

Simple harmonic motion - resonance –analogy between electrical and mechanical oscillating
systems - waves on a string - standing waves - traveling waves - Energy transfer of a wave - sound
waves - Doppler effect. Reflection and refraction of light waves - total internal reflection - interference
–Michelson interferometer –Theory of air wedge and experiment. Theory of laser - characteristics
- Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficients - population inversion - Nd-YAG
laser, CO2 laser, semiconductor laser –Basic applications of lasers in industry.

UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

Photons and light waves - Electrons and matter waves –Compton effect - The Schrodinger equation
(Time dependent and time independent forms) - meaning of wave function - Normalization –Free
particle - particle in a infinite potential well: 1D,2D and 3D Boxes- Normalization, probabilities and
the correspondence principle.

UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

The harmonic oscillator(qualitative)- Barrier penetration and quantum tunneling(qualitative)-
Tunneling microscope - Resonant diode - Finite potential wells (qualitative)- Bloch’s theorem for
particles in a periodic potential –Basics of Kronig-Penney model and origin of energy bands.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1:Understand the importance of mechanics.
CO2:Express their knowledge in electromagnetic waves.
CO3:Demonstrate a strong foundational knowledge in oscillations, optics and lasers.
CO4:Understand the importance of quantum physics.
CO5:Comprehend and apply quantum mechanical principles towards the formation of energy bands.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link] and [Link]. An Introduction to Mechanics. McGraw Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2017.
2. [Link] and [Link], Electricity and Magnetism, Cambridge [Link], 2013.
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, S. Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, McGraw-
Hill (Indian Edition), 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. [Link]. Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson Education (Indian Edition),
2009.
30
 2. Paul A. Tipler, Physic – Volume 1 & 2, CBS, (Indian Edition), 2004.
3. [Link] and [Link]. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications, Laxmi Publications,
(Indian Edition), 2019.
4. [Link], [Link] and [Link]. Principles of Physics, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2015.
5. [Link], [Link] and [Link]. Physics for Computer Science Students. Springer-
Verlag, 2012.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3
1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - -
5 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
AV 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
G 1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CY3151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate sound understanding of water quality parameters and water treatment
techniques.
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles and preparatory methods of nanomaterials.
 To introduce the basic concepts and applications of phase rule and composites.
 To facilitate the understanding of different types of fuels, their preparation, properties and
combustion characteristics.
 To familiarize the students with the operating principles, working processes and applications
of energy conversion and storage devices.

UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

Water: Sources and impurities, Water quality parameters: Definition and significance of-color, odour,
turbidity, pH, hardness, alkalinity, TDS, COD and BOD, fluoride and arsenic. Municipal water
treatment: primary treatment and disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination).
Desalination of brackish water: Reverse Osmosis. Boiler troubles: Scale and sludge, Boiler
corrosion, Caustic embrittlement, Priming & foaming. Treatment of boiler feed water: Internal
treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) and External treatment
– Ion exchange demineralization and zeolite process.

UNIT II NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics: Distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; Size-dependent
properties (optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic); Types of nanomaterials: Definition,
properties and uses of – nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation
of nanomaterials: sol-gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition, electrochemical
deposition and electro spinning. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine, agriculture, energy,
electronics and catalysis.

UNIT III PHASE RULE AND COMPOSITES 9

Phase rule: Introduction, definition of terms with examples. One component system - water system;
Reduced phase rule; Construction of a simple eutectic phase diagram - Thermal analysis; Two
31
component system: lead-silver system - Pattinson process.
Composites: Introduction: Definition & Need for composites; Constitution: Matrix materials (Polymer
matrix, metal matrix and ceramic matrix) and Reinforcement (fiber, particulates, flakes and
whiskers). Properties and applications of: Metal matrix composites (MMC), Ceramic matrix
composites and Polymer matrix composites. Hybrid composites - definition and examples.

UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels: Introduction: Classification of fuels; Coal and coke: Analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate),
Carbonization, Manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method). Petroleum and Diesel:
Manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process), Knocking - octane number, diesel oil - cetane
number; Power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction: Calorific value - higher and lower calorific values, Theoretical
calculation of calorific value; Ignition temperature: spontaneous ignition temperature, Explosive
range; Flue gas analysis - ORSAT Method. CO2 emission and carbon footprint.

UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9

Stability of nucleus: mass defect (problems), binding energy; Nuclear energy: light water nuclear
power plant, breeder reactor. Solar energy conversion: Principle, working and applications of solar
cells; Recent developments in solar cell materials. Wind energy; Geothermal energy; Batteries:
Types of batteries, Primary battery - dry cell, Secondary battery - lead acid battery and lithium-ion-
battery; Electric vehicles - working principles; Fuel cells: H2-O2 fuel cell, microbial fuel cell;
Supercapacitors: Storage principle, types and examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able:
CO1:To infer the quality of water from quality parameter data and propose suitable treatment
methodologies to treat water.
CO2:To identify and apply basic concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology in designing the
synthesis of nanomaterials for engineering and technology applications.
CO3:To apply the knowledge of phase rule and composites for material selection requirements.
CO4:To recommend suitable fuels for engineering processes and applications.
CO5:To recognize different forms of energy resources and apply them for suitable applications in
energy sectors.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, 17th Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2008.
3. S.S. Dara, “A Text book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand Publishing, 12th Edition,
2018
REFERENCES:
1. B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Text book of
nanoscience and nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and Materials
Science, 2018.
2. O.G. Palanna, “Engineering Chemistry” McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2nd
Edition, 2017.

32
 3. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
4. ShikhaAgarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
5. O.V. Roussak and H.D. Gesser, Applied Chemistry-A Text Book for Engineers and
Technologists, Springer Science Business Media, New York, 2nd Edition, 2013.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - -
2 2 - - 1 - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 1 1 - - 1 2 - - - - - - - -
5 3 1 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

GE3151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
● To learn to solve problems using Python conditionals and loops.
● To define Python functions and use function calls to solve problems.
● To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries to represent complex data.
● To do input/output with files in Python.

UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Identification of Computational Problems -Algorithms, building blocks
of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo
code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for
developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card
in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.

UNIT II DATA TYPES, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9

Python interpreter and interactive mode,debugging; values and types: int, float, boolean, string
, and list; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators,
comments; Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n
variables, distance between two points.

UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS, STRINGS 9

Conditionals:Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else),chained conditional
(if-elif-else);Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values,parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings:
string slices,immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays.
Illustrative programs: square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search,
binary search.

33
 UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods;
advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: simple sorting, histogram,
Students marks statement, Retail bill preparation.

UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9

Files and exceptions: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file, Voter’s age validation, Marks range validation (0-100).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs using conditionals and loops for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition,
O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data”, Third Edition, MIT Press,
2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. [Link]
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
34
GE3152 HERITAGE OF TAMILS L T P C
1 0 0 1

UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3

Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam Literature
- Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism in Tamil
Land - Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry - Development of Modern
literature in Tamil - Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.

UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making - - Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.

UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3

Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam,
Valari, Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.

UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3

Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam Literature
- Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities and Ports of
Sangam Age - Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest of Cholas.

UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND INDIAN

CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the other
parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems of
Medicine – Inscriptions & Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.

TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – கக.கக. பிள் ளள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முளனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – ளவளக நதிக்களரயில் சங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துளற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருளந – ஆற் றங் களர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துளற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
35
 Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link])
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு L T PC

1 0 0 1

அலகு I மமொழி மற் றும் இலக்கியம் : 3

இந்திய தமொழிக் குடும் பங் கள் – திரொவிட தமொழிகள் – தமிழ் ஒரு தசம் தமொழி –
தமிழ் தசவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - சங் க இலக்கியத்தின் சமயச் சொர்பற் ற தன் ளம – சங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல் அறம் – திருக்குறளில் கமலொண்ளமக் கருத்துக்கள் –
தமிழ் க் கொப் பியங் கள் , தமிழகத்தில் சமண தபௌத்த சமயங் களின் தொக்கம் - பக்தி
இலக்கியம் , ஆழ் வொர்கள் மற் றும் நொயன்மொர்கள் – சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் – தமிழில்
நவீன இலக்கியத்தின் வளர்ச்சி – தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ச்சியில் பொரதியொர் மற் றும்
பொரதிதொசன் ஆகிகயொரின் பங் களிப் பு.

அலகு II மரபு – பொறற ஓவியங் கள் முதல் நவீன ஓவியங் கள் வறர –
சிற் பக் கறல: 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வளர – ஐம் தபொன் சிளலகள் – பழங் குடியினர்
மற் றும் அவர்கள் தயொரிக்கும் ளகவிளனப் தபொருட்கள் , தபொம் ளமகள் – கதர்
தசய் யும் களல – சுடுமண் சிற் பங் கள் – நொட்டுப் புறத் ததய் வங் கள் –
குமரிமுளனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிளல – இளசக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங் கம் , பளற,
வீளண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வரம் – தமிழர்களின் சமூக தபொருளொதொர வொழ் வில்
ககொவில் களின் பங் கு.

அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

ததருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம் , வில் லுப் பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம் ,
கதொல் பொளவக் கூத்து, சிலம் பொட்டம் , வளரி, புலியொட்டம் , தமிழர்களின்
விளளயொட்டுகள் .

அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களும் , விலங் குகளும் – ததொல் கொப் பியம் மற் றும் சங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற் றும் புறக் ககொட்பொடுகள் – தமிழர்கள் கபொற் றிய
அறக்ககொட்பொடு – சங் ககொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும் , கல் வியும் –
சங் ககொல நகரங் களும் துளற முகங் களும் – சங் ககொலத்தில் ஏற் றுமதி மற் றும்
இறக்குமதி – கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில் கசொழர்களின் தவற் றி.

36
 அலகு V இந் திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற் றும் இந் திய பை்பொட்டிற் குத்
தமிழர்களின் பங் களிப் பு: 3
இந்திய விடுதளலப்கபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு – இந்தியொவின் பிறப் பகுதிகளில்
தமிழ் ப் பண்பொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுயமரியொளத இயக்கம் – இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் ,
சித்த மருத்துவத்தின் பங் கு – கல் தவட்டுகள் , ளகதயழுத்துப் படிகள் - தமிழ் ப்
புத்தகங் களின் அச்சு வரலொறு.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS

TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – கக.கக. பிள் ளள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முளனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – ளவளக நதிக்களரயில் சங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துளற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருளந – ஆற் றங் களர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துளற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link])
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE3171 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the problem solving approaches.
 To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
 To practice various computing strategies for Python-based solutions to real world
problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.

37
EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The examples suggested in each experiment are only indicative. The lab instructor is
expected to design other problems on similar lines. The Examination shall not be restricted
to the sample experiments listed here.

1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and developing
flow charts for the same. (Electricity Billing, Retail shop billing, Sin series, weight of a
motorbike, Weight of a steel bar, compute Electrical Current in Three Phase AC Circuit, etc.)
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions (exchange the values of two
variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between two points).
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops. (Number series, Number Patterns,
pyramid pattern)
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples. (Items present in a
library/Components of a car/ Materials required for construction of a building –operations of
list & tuples)
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries. (Language,
components of an automobile, Elements of a civil structure, etc.- operations of Sets &
Dictionaries)
6. Implementing programs using Functions. (Factorial, largest number in a list, area of shape)
7. Implementing programs using Strings. (reverse, palindrome, character count, replacing
characters)
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries (pandas,
numpy. Matplotlib, scipy)
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling. (copy from one file to
another, word count, longest word)
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling. (divide by zero
error, voter’s age validity, student mark range validation)
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Implement programs in Python using conditionals and loops for solving problems.
CO4: Deploy functions to decompose a Python program.
CO5: Process compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Utilize Python packages in developing software applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition,
O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.

38
 REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data”, Third Edition, MIT Press,
2021.
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. [Link]
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

BS3171 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
PHYSICS LABORATORY : (Any Seven Experiments)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

 To learn the proper use of various kinds of physics laboratory equipment.

 To learn how data can be collected, presented and interpreted in a clear and concise manner.
 To learn problem solving skills related to physics principles and interpretation of experimental
data.
 To determine error in experimental measurements and techniques used to minimize such
error.
 To make the student an active participant in each part of all lab exercises.

1. Torsional pendulum - Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of

regular and irregular objects.
2. Simple harmonic oscillations of cantilever.
3. Non-uniform bending - Determination of Young’s modulus
4. Uniform bending – Determination of Young’s modulus
5. Laser- Determination of the wavelength of the laser using grating
6. Air wedge - Determination of thickness of a thin sheet/wire
7. a) Optical fibre -Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
b) Compact disc- Determination of width of the groove using laser.
39
 8. Acoustic grating- Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in liquids.
9. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of the velocity of sound and compressibility of
liquids
10. Post office box -Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor.
11. Photoelectric effect
12. Michelson Interferometer.
13. Melde’s string experiment
14. Experiment with lattice dynamics kit.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
CO1:Understand the functioning of various physics laboratory equipment.
CO2:Use graphical models to analyze laboratory data.
CO3:Use mathematical models as a medium for quantitative reasoning and describing physical
reality.
CO4:Access, process and analyze scientific information.
CO5:Solve problems individually and collaboratively.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 2.4 2.6 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of water quality parameters,
such as, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, DO, chloride and copper.
 To induce the students to familiarize with electroanalytical techniques such as, pH metry,
potentiometry and conductometry in the determination of impurities in aqueous solutions.
 To demonstrate the analysis of metals and alloys.
 To demonstrate the synthesis of nanoparticles

1. Preparation of Na2CO3 as a primary standard and estimation of acidity of a water sample

using the primary standard
2. Determination of types and amount of alkalinity in a water sample.
- Split the first experiment into two
3. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
4. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
5. Determination of chloride content of water sample by Argentometric method.
6. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
7. Estimation of TDS of a water sample by gravimetry.
8. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.

40
 9. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
10. Conductometric titration of barium chloride against sodium sulphate (precipitation
titration)
11. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
12. Estimation of sodium /potassium present in water using a flame photometer.
13. Preparation of nanoparticles (TiO2/ZnO/CuO) by Sol-Gel method.
14. Estimation of Nickel in steel
15. Proximate analysis of Coal
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:To analyse the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, hardness and
DO.
CO2:To determine the amount of metal ions through volumetric and spectroscopic techniques
CO3:To analyse and determine the composition of alloys.
CO4:To learn simple method of synthesis of nanoparticles
CO5:To quantitatively analyse the impurities in solution by electroanalytical techniques

TEXT BOOKS :
1. J. Mendham, R. C. Denney, J.D. Barnes, M. Thomas and B. Sivasankar, Vogel’s Textbook
of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (2009).

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 1 - - -
3 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - -
4 2 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
5 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

GE3172 ENGLISH LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To help learners use language effectively in academic /work contexts
 To develop various listening strategies to comprehend various types of audio materials
like lectures, discussions, videos etc.
 To build on students’ English language skills by engaging them in listening, speaking and
grammar learning activities that are relevant to authentic contexts.
 To use language efficiently in expressing their opinions via various media.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 6

Listening for general information-specific details- conversation: Introduction to classmates - Audio /
video (formal & informal); Telephone conversation; Listening to voicemail & messages; Listening
and filling a form. Speaking - making telephone calls-Self Introduction; Introducing a friend; -
41
politeness strategies- making polite requests, making polite offers, replying to polite requests and
offers- understanding basic instructions( filling out a bank application for example).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 6

Listening - Listening to podcasts, anecdotes / stories / event narration; documentaries and interviews
with celebrities. Speaking - Narrating personal experiences / events-Talking about current and
temporary situations & permanent and regular situations* - describing experiences and feelings-
engaging in small talk- describing requirements and abilities.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 6

Listening - Listen to product and process descriptions; a classroom lecture; and advertisements
about products. Speaking – Picture description- describing locations in workplaces- Giving
instruction to use the product- explaining uses and purposes- Presenting a product- describing
shapes and sizes and weights- talking about quantities(large & small)-talking about precautions.

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 6

Listening – Listening to TED Talks; Listening to lectures - and educational videos. Speaking – Small
Talk; discussing and making plans-talking about tasks-talking about progress- talking about
positions and directions of movement-talking about travel preparations- talking about
transportation-

UNIT V EXPRESSION 6
Listening – Listening to debates/ discussions; different viewpoints on an issue; and panel
discussions. Speaking –making predictions- talking about a given topic-giving opinions-
understanding a website-describing processes

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
CO1:To listen to and comprehend general as well as complex academic information
CO2:To listen to and understand different points of view in a discussion
CO3:To speak fluently and accurately in formal and informal communicative contexts
CO4:To describe products and processes and explain their uses and purposes clearly and
accurately
CO5:To express their opinions effectively in both formal and informal discussions

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

42
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
 One online / app based assessment to test listening /speaking
 End Semester ONLY listening and speaking will be conducted online.
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of listening and speaking internal
test and end semester exam.

HS3252 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH - II L T P C

2 00 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To engage learners in meaningful language activities to improve their reading and writing
skills
 To learn various reading strategies and apply in comprehending documents in professional
context.
 To help learners understand the purpose, audience, contexts of different types of writing
 To develop analytical thinking skills for problem solving in communicative contexts
 To demonstrate an understanding of job applications and interviews for internship and
placements

UNIT I MAKING COMPARISONS 6

Reading - Reading advertisements, user manuals, brochures; Writing – Professional emails, Email
etiquette - Compare and Contrast Essay; Grammar – Mixed Tenses, Prepositional phrases

UNIT II EXPRESSING CAUSAL RELATIONS IN SPEAKING AND WRITING 6

Reading - Reading longer technical texts– Cause and Effect Essays, and Letters / emails of
complaint, Writing - Writing responses to complaints. Grammar - Active Passive Voice
transformations, Infinitive and Gerunds

UNIT III PROBLEM SOLVING 6

Reading - Case Studies, excerpts from literary texts, news reports etc. Writing – Letter to the Editor,
Checklists, Problem solution essay / Argumentative Essay. Grammar – Error correction; If
conditional sentences

UNIT IV REPORTING OF EVENTS AND RESEARCH 6

Reading –Newspaper articles; Writing – Recommendations, Transcoding, Accident Report, Survey
Report Grammar – Reported Speech, Modals Vocabulary – Conjunctions- use of prepositions

UNIT V THE ABILITY TO PUT IDEAS OR INFORMATION COGENTLY 6

Reading – Company profiles, Statement of Purpose, (SOP), an excerpt of interview with
professionals; Writing – Job / Internship application – Cover letter & Resume; Grammar – Numerical
adjectives, Relative Clauses.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
CO1:To compare and contrast products and ideas in technical texts.
CO2:To identify and report cause and effects in events, industrial processes through technical texts

43
 CO3:To analyse problems in order to arrive at feasible solutions and communicate them in the
written format.
CO4:To present their ideas and opinions in a planned and logical manner
CO5:To draft effective resumes in the context of job search.

TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists (2020 edition) Orient Blackswan Private Ltd.
Department of English, Anna University.
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press 2021.
3. Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr. KN.
Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.

REFERENCES:
1. Raman. Meenakshi, Sharma. Sangeeta (2019). Professional English. Oxford university press.
New Delhi.
2. Improve Your Writing ed. V.N. Arora and Laxmi Chandra, Oxford Univ. Press, 2001,
NewDelhi.
3. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
4. Business Correspondence and Report Writing by Prof. R.C. Sharma & Krishna Mohan, Tata
McGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 2001, New Delhi.
5. Developing Communication Skills by Krishna Mohan, Meera Bannerji- Macmillan India Ltd.
1990, Delhi.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

MA3251 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and
numerical methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of
problems occurring in engineering and technology.
● To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which
plays an important role in real life problems.
● To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.

44
 ● To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering
and technology disciplines.
● To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary
differential equations.

UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3

Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, proportion and difference of means (Large and small
samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – Chi square test for goodness of fit
– Independence of attributes.

UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3

One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design
– Latin square design - 22 factorial design.

UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton Raphson
method- Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss
Jordan method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a matrix by
Power method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.

UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL

INTEGRATION 9 +3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.

UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 +3

Single step methods: Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order differential equations - Multi step methods: Milne’s
and Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order differential equations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1:Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
CO2:Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture.
CO3:Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
CO4:Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
CO5:Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.

45
 REFERENCES:
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage
Learning, New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia,
New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
4. Gupta S.C. and Kapoor V. K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, 12th Edition, 2020.
5. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and
Statistics ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th Edition, 2012.
6. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists", 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

PH3256 PHYSICS FOR INFORMATION SCIENCE L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students understand the importance in studying electrical properties of
materials.
 To enable the students to gain knowledge in semiconductor physics
 To instill knowledge on magnetic properties of materials.
 To establish a sound grasp of knowledge on different optical properties of materials, optical
displays and applications
 To inculcate an idea of significance of nano structures, quantum confinement, ensuing nano
device applications and quantum computing.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression - Wiedemann-Franz law – Success and failures - electrons in metals – Particle in a
three dimensional box – degenerate states – Fermi- Dirac statistics – Density of energy states –
Electron in periodic potential – Energy bands in solids – tight binding approximation - Electron
effective mass – concept of hole.

UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 9

Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect band gap semiconductors –
Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier concentration
in N-type & P-type semiconductors – Variation of carrier concentration with temperature – variation
of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration – Carrier transport in Semiconductor:

46
random motion, drift, mobility and diffusion – Hall effect and devices – Ohmic contacts – Schottky
diode.

UNIT III MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Magnetic dipole moment – atomic magnetic moments- magnetic permeability and susceptibility -
Magnetic material classification: diamagnetism – paramagnetism – ferromagnetism –
antiferromagnetism – ferrimagnetism – Ferromagnetism: origin and exchange interaction- saturation
magnetization and Curie temperature – Domain Theory- M versus H behaviour – Hard and soft
magnetic materials – examples and uses-– Magnetic principle in computer data storage – Magnetic
hard disc (GMR sensor).

UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classification of optical materials – carrier generation and recombination processes - Absorption
emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and semiconductors (concepts only) - photo
current in a P-N diode – solar cell - LED – Organic LED – Laser diodes – Optical data storage
techniques.

UNIT V NANODEVICES AND QUANTUM COMPUTING 9

Introduction - quantum confinement – quantum structures: quantum wells, wires and dots –– band
gap of nanomaterials. Tunneling – Single electron phenomena: Coulomb blockade - resonant-
tunneling diode – single electron transistor – quantum cellular automata - Quantum system for
information processing - quantum states – classical bits – quantum bits or qubits –CNOT gate -
multiple qubits – Bloch sphere – quantum gates – advantage of quantum computing over classical
computing.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to
CO1:gain knowledge on classical and quantum electron theories, and energy band structures
CO2:acquire knowledge on basics of semiconductor physics and its applications in various devices
CO3:get knowledge on magnetic properties of materials and their applications in data storage,
CO4:have the necessary understanding on the functioning of optical materials for optoelectronics
CO5:understand the basics of quantum structures and their applications and basics of quantum
computing

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jasprit Singh, “Semiconductor Devices: Basic Principles”, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2007.
2. S.O. Kasap. Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices, McGraw-Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2020.
3. Parag K. Lala, Quantum Computing: A Beginner's Introduction, McGraw-Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2020.

REFERENCES:
1. Charles Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, Wiley India Edition, 2019.
2. [Link] and [Link], Quantum Mechanics with Applications to Nanotechnology and
3. Information Science, Academic Press, 2013.
4. [Link], V.A. Kochelap and [Link], Introduction to Nanoelectronics, Cambridge
[Link], 2008.
5. G.W. Hanson, Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics, Pearson Education (Indian Edition) 2009.

47
6. [Link], [Link] and [Link], Nanotechnology: Understanding Small Systems, CRC
Press, 2014.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 - - 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - -
4 3 - 2 1 3 - 1 - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 - - -
AVG 3 1.3 2 1.3 2.3 1 1.3 - - - - 2 - - -
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

BE3251 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of electric circuits and analysis
 To impart knowledge in the basics of working principles and application of electrical
machines
 To introduce analog devices and their characteristics
 To educate on the fundamental concepts of digital electronics
 To introduce the functional elements and working of measuring instruments

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9

DC Circuits: Circuit Components: Conductor, Resistor, Inductor, Capacitor – Ohm’s Law - Kirchhoff’s
Laws –Independent and Dependent Sources – Simple problems- Nodal Analysis, Mesh analysis
with Independent sources only (Steady state)
Introduction to AC Circuits and Parameters: Waveforms, Average value, RMS Value, Instantaneous
power, real power, reactive power and apparent power, power factor – Steady state analysis of RLC
circuits (Simple problems only)

UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9

Construction and Working principle- DC Separately and Self excited Generators, EMF equation,
Types and Applications. Working Principle of DC motors, Torque Equation, Types and Applications.
Construction, Working principle and Applications of Transformer, Three phase Alternator,
Synchronous motor and Three Phase Induction Motor.

UNIT III ANALOG ELECTRONICS 9

Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Electronic Circuits- Semiconductor Materials: Silicon
&Germanium – PN Junction Diodes, Zener Diode –Characteristics Applications – Bipolar Junction
Transistor-Biasing, JFET, SCR, MOSFET,IGBT – Types, I-V Characteristics and Applications,
Rectifier and Inverters

48
 UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 9
Review of number systems, binary codes, error detection and correction codes, Combinational logic
- representation of logic functions-SOP and POS forms, K-map representations - minimization using
K maps (Simple Problems only).

UNIT V MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION 9

Functional elements of an instrument, Standards and calibration, Operating Principle, types -Moving
Coil and Moving Iron meters, Measurement of three phase power, Energy Meter, Instrument
Transformers-CT and PT, DSO- Block diagram- Data acquisition.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Compute the electric circuit parameters for simple problems
CO2: Explain the working principle and applications of electrical machines
CO3: Analyze the characteristics of analog electronic devices
CO4: Explain the basic concepts of digital electronics
CO5: Explain the operating principles of measuring instruments

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kothari DP and I.J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, Second Edition,
McGraw Hill Education, 2020
2. [Link] “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2017.
3. Sedha R.S., “A textbook book of Applied Electronics”, S. Chand & Co., 2008
4. James A .Svoboda, Richard C. Dorf, “Dorf’s Introduction to Electric Circuits”, Wiley, 2018.
5. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements &
Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Kothari DP and I.J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill
2. Education, 2019.
3. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Digital Fundamentals’, 11th Edition, Pearson Education, 2017.
4. 4. Albert Malvino, David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education; 7th edition,
2017.
5. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series, McGraw
Hill, 2002.
6. H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 2 2 1 - - - - 1 - - - 2 - - 1
2 2 2 1 - - - - 1 - - - 2 - - 1
3 2 1 1 - - - - 1 - - - 2 - - 1
4 2 2 1 - - - - 1 - - - 2 - - 1
5 2 2 1 - - - - 1 - - - 2 - - 1
CO 2 1.8 1 - - - - 1 - - - 2 - - 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

49
GE3251 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
2 0 4 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
• Drawing engineering curves.
• Drawing a freehand sketch of simple objects.
• Drawing orthographic projection of solids and section of solids.
• Drawing development of solids
• Drawing isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.

CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination)

Importance of graphics in engineering applications — Use of drafting instruments — BIS
conventions and specifications — Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets — Lettering and
dimensioning.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES 6+12

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics — Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method — Construction of cycloid — construction of
involutes of square and circle — Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.

UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12

Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces. Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 6+12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis
is inclined to one of the principal planes and parallel to the other by rotating object method.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of Three
Dimensional objects — Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views
of objects.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software (Not for examination)

UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF

SURFACES 6 +12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to one of the
principal planes and perpendicular to the other — obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids — Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software (Not for examination)

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12

Principles of isometric projection — isometric scale — isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids - Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual
ray method.

50
Practicing three dimensional modeling of isometric projection of simple objects by CAD Software
(Not for examination)
TOTAL: (L=30+P=60) 90 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1:Use BIS conventions and specifications for engineering drawing.
CO2:Construct the conic curves, involutes and cycloid.
CO3:Solve practical problems involving projection of lines.
CO4:Draw the orthographic, isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
CO5:Draw the development of simple solids.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 53rd
Edition, 2019.
2. Natarajan K.V., “A Text Book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2018.
3. Parthasarathy, N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Oxford University Press, 2015

REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2019.
2. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Publications,
Bangalore, 27th Edition, 2017.
3. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Parthasarathy N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New
Delhi, 2015.
5. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Education India, 2nd Edition,
2009.
6. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Size and layout of drawing sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) — 2001 & SP 46 — 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 — 1986 & SP 46 —2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) — 2001: Technical drawings — Projection Methods.

Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be
permitted to use appropriate scale to fit a solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

51
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -
2 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -
3 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -
4 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -
5 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -
CO 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CS3251 PROGRAMMING IN C L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the constructs of C Language.
 To develop C Programs using basic programming constructs
 To develop C programs using arrays and strings
 To develop modular applications in C using functions
 To develop applications in C using pointers and structures
 To do input/output and file handling in C
UNIT I BASICS OF C PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction to programming paradigms – Applications of C Language - Structure of C program - C
programming: Data Types - Constants – Enumeration Constants - Keywords – Operators:
Precedence and Associativity - Expressions - Input/Output statements, Assignment statements –
Decision making statements - Switch statement - Looping statements – Preprocessor directives -
Compilation process

UNIT II ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9

Introduction to Arrays: Declaration, Initialization – One dimensional array –Two dimensional
arrays - String operations: length, compare, concatenate, copy – Selection sort, linear and binary
search.

UNIT III FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 9

Modular programming - Function prototype, function definition, function call, Built-in functions (string
functions, math functions) – Recursion, Binary Search using recursive functions –Pointers –
Pointer operators – Pointer arithmetic – Arrays and pointers – Array of pointers – Parameter passing:
Pass by value, Pass by reference.

UNIT IV STRUCTURES AND UNION 9

Structure - Nested structures – Pointer and Structures – Array of structures – Self referential
structures – Dynamic memory allocation - Singly linked list – typedef – Union - Storage classes and
Visibility.

UNIT V FILE PROCESSING 9

Files – Types of file processing: Sequential access, Random access – Sequential access file -
Random access file - Command line arguments.

52
 COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate knowledge on C Programming constructs
CO2: Develop simple applications in C using basic constructs
CO3: Design and implement applications using arrays and strings
CO4: Develop and implement modular applications in C using functions.
CO5: Develop applications in C using structures and pointers.
CO6: Design applications using sequential and random access file processing.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. ReemaThareja, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2016.
2. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie,D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition,
Pearson Education, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “C How to Program with an Introduction to C++”, Eighth edition,
Pearson Education, 2018.
2. Yashwant Kanetkar, Let us C, 17th Edition, BPB Publications, 2020.
3. Byron S. Gottfried, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Programming with C”,
McGraw-Hill Education, 1996.
4. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, Second
5. Edition, Oxford University Press, 2013.
6. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, 1st Edition,
Pearson Education, 2013.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 - 3 2 1 2 -
2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 - 3 3 2 2 -
3 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 - 3 2 2 2 -
4 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 - 3 3 2 2 -
5 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 - 3 2 2 3 -
6 2 2 3 2 1 2 - - 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 - 3 2 2 2 -

1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

53
GE3252 TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY L T PC
1 0 01

UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3

Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries
(BRW) – Graffiti on Potteries.

UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3

Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam
Age - Building materials and Hero stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in
Silappathikaram - Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and other
worship places - Temples of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)- Thirumalai
Nayakar Mahal - Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo - Saracenic architecture at Madras during British
Period.

UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3

Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -Copper and gold-
Coins as source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone beads -Glass beads
- Terracotta beads -Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences - Gem stone types
described in Silappathikaram.

UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3

Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry
- Wells designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea - Fisheries –
Pearl - Conche diving - Ancient Knowledge of Ocean - Knowledge Specific Society.

UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3

Development of Scientific Tamil - Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development
of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries –
Sorkuvai Project.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS

TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – கக.கக. பிள் ளள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முளனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – ளவளக நதிக்களரயில் சங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துளற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருளந – ஆற் றங் களர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துளற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by: International

54
 Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link]) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE3252 தமிழரும் மதொழில் நுட்பமும் L T PC

1 0 0 1

அலகு I மநசவு மற் றும் பொறனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

சங் க கொலத்தில் தநசவுத் ததொழில் – பொளனத் ததொழில் நுட்பம் - கருப் பு சிவப்பு
பொண்டங் கள் – பொண்டங் களில் கீறல் குறியீடுகள் .

அலகு II வடிவறமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

சங் க கொலத்தில் வடிவளமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டுமொனங் கள் & சங் க கொலத்தில் வீட்டுப்
தபொருட்களில் வடிவளமப் பு- சங் க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன தபொருட்களும் நடுகல் லும்
– சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் கமளட அளமப் பு பற் றிய விவரங் கள் - மொமல் லபுரச்
சிற் பங் களும் , ககொவில் களும் – கசொழர் கொலத்துப் தபருங் ககொயில் கள் மற் றும் பிற
வழிபொட்டுத் தலங் கள் – நொயக்கர் கொலக் ககொயில் கள் - மொதிரி கட்டளமப் புகள்
பற் றி அறிதல் , மதுளர மீனொட்சி அம் மன் ஆலயம் மற் றும் திருமளல நொயக்கர்
மஹொல் – தசட்டிநொட்டு வீடுகள் – பிரிட்டிஷ் கொலத்தில் தசன்ளனயில் இந்கதொ-
சொகரொதசனிக் கட்டிடக் களல.

அலகு III உற் பத்தித் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

கப் பல் கட்டும் களல – உகலொகவியல் – இரும் புத் ததொழிற் சொளல – இரும் ளப
உருக்குதல் , எஃகு – வரலொற் றுச் சொன்றுகளொக தசம் பு மற் றும் தங் க நொணயங் கள் –
நொணயங் கள் அச்சடித்தல் – மணி உருவொக்கும் ததொழிற் சொளலகள் – கல் மணிகள் ,
கண்ணொடி மணிகள் – சுடுமண் மணிகள் – சங் கு மணிகள் – எலும் புத்துண்டுகள் –
ததொல் லியல் சொன்றுகள் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மணிகளின் வளககள் .

அலகு IV கவளொை்றம மற் றும் நீ ர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

அளண, ஏரி, குளங் கள் , மதகு – கசொழர்கொலக் குமுழித் தூம் பின் முக்கியத்துவம் –
கொல் நளட பரொமரிப் பு – கொல் நளடகளுக்கொக வடிவளமக்கப் பட்ட கிணறுகள் –
கவளொண்ளம மற் றும் கவளொண்ளமச் சொர்ந்த தசயல் பொடுகள் – கடல் சொர் அறிவு –
மீன்வளம் – முத்து மற் றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – தபருங் கடல் குறித்த பண்ளடய
அறிவு – அறிவுசொர் சமூகம் .

55
அலகு V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற் றும் கைித்தமிழ் : 3
அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ச்சி –கணித்தமிழ் வளர்ச்சி - தமிழ் நூல் களள மின்பதிப்பு
தசய் தல் – தமிழ் தமன்தபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இளணயக் கல் விக்கழகம்
– தமிழ் மின் நூலகம் – இளணயத்தில் தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் – தசொற் குளவத் திட்டம் .
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS

TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – கக.கக. பிள் ளள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முளனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – ளவளக நதிக்களரயில் சங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துளற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருளந – ஆற் றங் களர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துளற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link]) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

56
NX3251 NCC Credit Course Level 1*
(ARMY WING)
NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C
2 0 0 2

NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking,
PD 1 2
Decision Making and Problem Solving
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral
L1 3
Values, Honour Code
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution
SS 1 3
of Youth
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

57
NX3252 NCC Credit Course Level 1*
(NAVAL WING)
NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision
PD 1 2
Making and Problem Solving
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values,
L1 3
Honour Code
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of
SS 1 3
Youth
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

58
NX3253 NCC Credit Course Level 1*
(AIR FORCE WING)
NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision
2
Making and Problem Solving
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values,
L1 3
Honour Code
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of
SS 1 3
Youth
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

59
GE3271 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LTPC
0 042

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to provide hands on training to the
students in:
1. Drawing pipe line plan; laying and connecting various pipe fittings used in common
household plumbing work; Sawing; planing; making joints in wood materials used in
commonhousehold wood work.

2. Wiring various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.

3. Welding various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machining various
simple processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assembling simple mechanical
assembly of common household equipments; Making a tray out of metal sheet using
sheet metal work.

4. Soldering and testing simple electronic circuits; Assembling and testing simple
electronic components on PCB.

GROUP – A (CIVIL & ELECTRICAL)

PART I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

PLUMBING WORK:
a) Connecting various basic pipe fittings like valves, taps, coupling, unions,
reducers,elbows and other components which are commonly used in
household.

b) Preparing plumbing line sketches.

c) Laying pipe connection to the suction side of a pump

d) Laying pipe connection to the delivery side of a pump.

e) Connecting pipes of different materials: Metal, plastic and flexible pipes

used inhousehold appliances.

WOOD WORK:
a) Sawing,

b) Planing and

c) Making joints like T-Joint, Mortise joint and Tenon joint and Dovetail joint.

Wood Work Study:

a) Studying joints in door panels and wooden furniture

b) Studying common industrial trusses using models.

60
PART II ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

a) Introduction to switches, fuses, indicators and lamps - Basic switch board

wiring with lamp, fan and three pin socket
b) Staircase wiring
c) Fluorescent Lamp wiring with introduction to CFL and LED types.
d) Energy meter wiring and related calculations/ calibration
e) Study of Iron Box wiring and assembly
f) Study of Fan Regulator (Resistor type and Electronic type using
Diac/Triac/quadrac)
g) Study of emergency lamp wiring/Water heater

GROUP – B (MECHANICAL AND ELECTRONICS)

PART III MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

WELDING WORK:
a) Welding of Butt Joints, Lap Joints, and Tee Joints using arc welding.

b) Practicing gas welding.

BASIC MACHINING WORK:

a) (simple)Turning.

b) (simple)Drilling.

c) (simple)Tapping.

ASSEMBLY WORK:
a) Assembling a centrifugal pump.

b) Assembling a household mixer.

c) Assembling an airconditioner.

SHEET METAL WORK:

a) Making of a square tray

FOUNDRY WORK:
a) Demonstrating basic foundry operations.

PART IV ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

SOLDERING WORK:
a) Soldering simple electronic circuits and checking continuity.

ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY AND TESTING WORK:

a) Assembling and testing electronic components on a small PCB.

61
 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STUDY:
a) Study an elements of smart phone..

b) Assembly and dismantle of LED TV.

c) Assembly and dismantle of computer/ laptop

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Draw pipe line plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household plumbing
work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household wood work.
CO2:Wire various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
CO3:Weld various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machine various simple processes
like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assemble simple mechanical assembly of common household
equipments; Make a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
CO4:Solder and test simple electronic circuits; Assemble and test simple electronic components on
PCB.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 2 - - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1 1
2 3 2 - - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1 1
3 3 2 - - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1 1
CO 3 2 - - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1 1

1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CS3271 PROGRAMMING IN C LABORATORY LT P C

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To familiarise with C programming constructs.
 To develop programs in C using basic constructs.
 To develop programs in C using arrays.
 To develop applications in C using strings, pointers, functions.
 To develop applications in C using structures.
 To develop applications in C using file processing.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The lab instructor is expected to design problems based on the topics listed. The
Examination shall not be restricted to the sample experiments designed.
1. I/O statements, operators, expressions
2. decision-making constructs: if-else, goto, switch-case, break-continue
3. Loops: for, while, do-while
4. Arrays: 1D and 2D, Multi-dimensional arrays, traversal
5. Strings: operations
6. Functions: call, return, passing parameters by (value, reference), passing arrays to function.
7. Recursion
62
 8. Pointers: Pointers to functions, Arrays,Strings, Pointers to Pointers, Array of Pointers
9. Structures: Nested Structures, Pointers to Structures, Arrays of Structures and Unions.
10. Files: reading and writing, File pointers, file operations, random access, processor directives.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate knowledge on C programming constructs.
CO2: Develop programs in C using basic constructs.
CO3: Develop programs in C using arrays.
CO4: Develop applications in C using strings, pointers, functions.
CO5: Develop applications in C using structures.
CO6: Develop applications in C using file processing.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. ReemaThareja, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2016.
2. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie,D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “C How to Program with an Introduction to C++”, Eighth
edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
2. Yashwant Kanetkar, Let us C, 17th Edition, BPB Publications, 2020.
3. Byron S. Gottfried, "Schaum's Outline of Theory and Problems of Programming with C",
McGraw-Hill Education, 1996.
4. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, Second
5. Edition, Oxford University Press, 2013.
6. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, 1st
Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 1 3 3 1 1 1 - - 2 1 2 2 2 2
2 2 3 3 2 1 1 - - 2 1 2 2 2 3
3 2 2 2 1 1 2 - - 2 - 2 2 2 2
4 2 2 2 2 1 2 - - 3 - 3 3 3 2
5 2 2 3 2 3 2 - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
6 2 2 3 2 1 2 - - 2 1 2 2 2 2
Avg 2 2 3 2 1 2 - - 2 1 2 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

GE3272 COMMUNICATION LABORATORY LT P C

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To identify varied group discussion skills and apply them to take part in effective discussions
in a professional context.
 To analyse concepts and problems and make effective presentations explaining them clearly
and precisely.
 To be able to communicate effectively through formal and informal writing.
63
  To be able to use appropriate language structures to write emails, reports and essays
 To give instructions and recommendations that are clear and relevant to the context
UNIT I 12
Speaking-Role Play Exercises Based on Workplace Contexts, - talking about competition-
discussing progress toward goals-talking about experiences- talking about events in life- discussing
past events-Writing: writing emails ( formal & semi-formal).

UNIT II 12
Speaking: discussing news stories-talking about frequency-talking about travel problems-
discussing travel procedures- talking about travel problems- making arrangements-describing
arrangements-discussing plans and decisions- discussing purposes and reasons- understanding
common technology terms-Writing: - writing different types of emails.

UNIT III 12
Speaking: discussing predictions-describing the climate-discussing forecasts and scenarios- talking
about purchasing-discussing advantages and disadvantages- making comparisons- discussing likes
and dislikes- discussing feelings about experiences-discussing imaginary scenarios Writing: short
essays and reports-formal/semi-formal letters.

UNIT IV 12
Speaking: discussing the natural environment-describing systems-describing position and
movement- explaining rules-( example- discussing rental arrangements)- understanding technical
instructions-Writing: writing instructions-writing a short article.

UNIT V 12
Speaking: describing things relatively-describing clothing-discussing safety issues (making
recommendations) talking about electrical devices-describing controlling actions- Writing:
job application( Cover letter + Curriculum vitae)-writing recommendations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1:Speak effectively in group discussions held in a formal/semi formal contexts.
CO2:Discuss, analyse and present concepts and problems from various perspectives to arrive at
suitable solutions
CO3:Write emails, letters and effective job applications.
CO4:Write critical reports to convey data and information with clarity and precision
CO5:Give appropriate instructions and recommendations for safe execution of tasks
Assessment Pattern
 One online / app based assessment to test speaking and writing skills
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of speaking and writing.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
64
MA3354 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To extend student’s logical and mathematical maturity and ability to deal with abstraction.
 To introduce most of the basic terminologies used in computer science courses and
application of ideas to solve practical problems.
 To understand the basic concepts of combinatorics and graph theory.
 To familiarize the applications of algebraic structures.
 To understand the concepts and significance of lattices and boolean algebra which are
widely used in computer science and engineering.

UNIT I LOGIC AND PROOFS 9+3

Propositional logic – Propositional equivalences - Predicates and quantifiers – Nested quantifiers –
Rules of inference - Introduction to proofs – Proof methods and strategy.

UNIT II COMBINATORICS 9+3

Mathematical induction – Strong induction and well ordering – The basics of counting – The
pigeonhole principle – Permutations and combinations – Recurrence relations – Solving linear
recurrence relations – Generating functions – Inclusion and exclusion principle and its applications.

UNIT III GRAPHS 9+3

Graphs and graph models – Graph terminology and special types of graphs – Matrix representation
of graphs and graph isomorphism – Connectivity – Euler and Hamilton paths.

UNIT IV ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURES 9+3

Algebraic systems – Semi groups and monoids - Groups – Subgroups – Homomorphism’s – Normal
subgroup and cosets – Lagrange’s theorem – Definitions and examples of Rings and Fields.

UNIT V LATTICES AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA 9+3

Partial ordering – Posets – Lattices as posets – Properties of lattices - Lattices as algebraic systems
– Sub lattices – Direct product and homomorphism – Some special lattices – Boolean algebra – Sub
Boolean Algebra – Boolean Homomorphism.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students would :
CO1:Have knowledge of the concepts needed to test the logic of a program.
CO2:Have an understanding in identifying structures on many levels.
CO3:Be aware of a class of functions which transform a finite set into another finite set which
relates to input and output functions in computer science.
CO4:Be aware of the counting principles.
CO5:Be exposed to concepts and properties of algebraic structures such as groups, rings and
fields.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rosen. K.H., "Discrete Mathematics and its Applications", 7th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, Special Indian Edition, 2017.
2. Tremblay. J.P. and Manohar. R, "Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to
Computer Science", Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 30th Reprint, 2011.

65
 REFERENCES:
1. Grimaldi. R.P. "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics: An Applied Introduction",
5thEdition, Pearson Education Asia, Delhi, 2013.
2. Koshy. T. "Discrete Mathematics with Applications", Elsevier Publications, 2006.
3. Lipschutz. S. and Mark Lipson., "Discrete Mathematics", Schaum’s Outlines, Tata McGraw
Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2010.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 - 3 2 - - 2 - - - 3 - - - - -
4 - 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
5 - 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - - -
AVg. 1 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CS3351 DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND COMPUTER ORGANIZATION L T PC

3 0 2 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To analyze and design combinational circuits.
 To analyze and design sequential circuits
 To understand the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.
 To study the design of data path unit, control unit for processor and to familiarize with the
hazards.
 To understand the concept of various memories and I/O interfacing.

UNIT I COMBINATIONAL LOGIC 9

Combinational Circuits – Karnaugh Map - Analysis and Design Procedures – Binary Adder –
Subtractor – Decimal Adder - Magnitude Comparator – Decoder – Encoder – Multiplexers -
Demultiplexers

UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 9

Introduction to Sequential Circuits – Flip-Flops – operation and excitation tables, Triggering of FF,
Analysis and design of clocked sequential circuits – Design – Moore/Mealy models, state
minimization, state assignment, circuit implementation - Registers – Counters.

UNIT III COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS 9

Functional Units of a Digital Computer: Von Neumann Architecture – Operation and Operands of
Computer Hardware Instruction – Instruction Set Architecture (ISA): Memory Location, Address
and Operation – Instruction and Instruction Sequencing – Addressing Modes, Encoding of Machine
Instruction – Interaction between Assembly and High Level Language.

UNIT IV PROCESSOR 9
Instruction Execution – Building a Data Path – Designing a Control Unit – Hardwired Control,
Microprogrammed Control – Pipelining – Data Hazard – Control Hazards.

66
 UNIT V MEMORY AND I/O 9
Memory Concepts and Hierarchy – Memory Management – Cache Memories: Mapping and
Replacement Techniques – Virtual Memory – DMA – I/O – Accessing I/O: Parallel and Serial
Interface – Interrupt I/O – Interconnection Standards: USB, SATA
45 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Verification of Boolean theorems using logic gates.
2. Design and implementation of combinational circuits using gates for arbitrary functions.
3. Implementation of 4-bit binary adder/subtractor circuits.
4. Implementation of code converters.
5. Implementation of BCD adder, encoder and decoder circuits
6. Implementation of functions using Multiplexers.
7. Implementation of the synchronous counters
8. Implementation of a Universal Shift register.
9. Simulator based study of Computer Architecture

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 : Design various combinational digital circuits using logic gates
CO2 : Design sequential circuits and analyze the design procedures
CO3 : State the fundamentals of computer systems and analyze the execution of an instruction
CO4 : Analyze different types of control design and identify hazards
CO5 : Identify the characteristics of various memory systems and I/O communication
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Morris Mano, Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design : With an Introduction to the Verilog HDL,
VHDL, and System Verilog”, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
2. David A. Patterson, John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design, The
Hardware/Software Interface”, Sixth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann/Elsevier, 2020.

REFERENCES:
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems”, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”,
Tenth Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
3. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Logic and Computer Design”, Pearson Education, 2016.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 3 3
2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 3 1
4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1
5 3 3 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
AVg. 3 3 3 3 1.8 1.6 1 1 1 1 1.6 2.6 1.4 2.6 1.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

67
CS3352 FOUNDATIONS OF DATA SCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the data science fundamentals and process.
 To learn to describe the data for the data science process.
 To learn to describe the relationship between data.
 To utilize the Python libraries for Data Wrangling.
 To present and interpret data using visualization libraries in Python

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Data Science: Benefits and uses – facets of data - Data Science Process: Overview – Defining
research goals – Retrieving data – Data preparation - Exploratory Data analysis – build the model–
presenting findings and building applications - Data Mining - Data Warehousing – Basic Statistical
descriptions of Data

UNIT II DESCRIBING DATA 9

Types of Data - Types of Variables -Describing Data with Tables and Graphs –Describing Data
with Averages - Describing Variability - Normal Distributions and Standard (z) Scores

UNIT III DESCRIBING RELATIONSHIPS 9

Correlation –Scatter plots –correlation coefficient for quantitative data –computational formula for
correlation coefficient – Regression –regression line –least squares regression line – Standard
error of estimate – interpretation of r2 –multiple regression equations –regression towards the mean

UNIT IV PYTHON LIBRARIES FOR DATA WRANGLING 9

Basics of Numpy arrays –aggregations –computations on arrays –comparisons, masks, boolean
logic – fancy indexing – structured arrays – Data manipulation with Pandas – data indexing and
selection – operating on data – missing data – Hierarchical indexing – combining datasets –
aggregation and grouping – pivot tables

UNIT V DATA VISUALIZATION 9

Importing Matplotlib – Line plots – Scatter plots – visualizing errors – density and contour plots –
Histograms – legends – colors – subplots – text and annotation – customization – three dimensional
plotting - Geographic Data with Basemap - Visualization with Seaborn.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Define the data science process
CO2: Understand different types of data description for data science process
CO3: Gain knowledge on relationships between data
CO4: Use the Python Libraries for Data Wrangling
CO5: Apply visualization Libraries in Python to interpret and explore data
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. David Cielen, Arno D. B. Meysman, and Mohamed Ali, “Introducing Data Science”, Manning
Publications, 2016. (Unit I)
2. Robert S. Witte and John S. Witte, “Statistics”, Eleventh Edition, Wiley Publications, 2017.
(Units II and III)

68
 3. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, 2016. (Units IV and V)

REFERENCES:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Stats: Exploratory Data Analysis in Python”, Green Tea Press,2014.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
3 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 2 3
4 3 2 2 1 2 - - - 1 1 2 2 3 3 2
5 2 2 1 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3301 DATA STRUCTURES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concepts of ADTs.
 To Learn linear data structures – lists, stacks, and queues.
 To understand non-linear data structures – trees and graphs.
 To understand sorting, searching and hashing algorithms.
 To apply Tree and Graph structures.

UNIT I LISTS 9
Abstract Data Types (ADTs) – List ADT – Array-based implementation – Linked list implementation
– Singly linked lists – Circularly linked lists – Doubly-linked lists – Applications of lists – Polynomial
ADT – Radix Sort – Multilists.

UNIT II STACKS AND QUEUES 9

Stack ADT – Operations – Applications – Balancing Symbols – Evaluating arithmetic expressions-
Infix to Postfix conversion – Function Calls – Queue ADT – Operations – Circular Queue – DeQueue
– Applications of Queues.

UNIT III TREES 9

Tree ADT – Tree Traversals - Binary Tree ADT – Expression trees – Binary Search Tree ADT – AVL
Trees – Priority Queue (Heaps) – Binary Heap.

UNIT IV MULTIWAY SEARCH TREES AND GRAPHS 9

B-Tree – B+ Tree – Graph Definition – Representation of Graphs – Types of Graph - Breadth-first
traversal – Depth-first traversal –– Bi-connectivity – Euler circuits – Topological Sort – Dijkstra's
algorithm – Minimum Spanning Tree – Prim's algorithm – Kruskal's algorithm

69
UNIT V SEARCHING, SORTING AND HASHING TECHNIQUES 9
Searching – Linear Search – Binary Search. Sorting – Bubble sort – Selection sort – Insertion
sort – Shell sort –. Merge Sort – Hashing – Hash Functions – Separate Chaining – Open
Addressing –Rehashing – Extendible Hashing.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Define linear and non-linear data structures.
CO2: Implement linear and non–linear data structure operations.
CO3: Use appropriate linear/non–linear data structure operations for solving a given problem.
CO4: Apply appropriate graph algorithms for graph applications.
CO5: Analyze the various searching and sorting algorithms.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mark Allen Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2005.
2. Kamthane, Introduction to Data Structures in C, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2007

REFERENCES
1. Langsam, Augenstein and Tanenbaum, Data Structures Using C and C++, 2nd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2015.
2. Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald [Link], Clifford Stein, Introduction to
Algorithms", Fourth Edition, Mcgraw Hill/ MIT Press, 2022.
3. Alfred V. Aho, Jeffrey D. Ullman,John E. Hopcroft ,Data Structures and Algorithms, 1st
edition, Pearson, 2002.
4. Kruse, Data Structures and Program Design in C, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2006.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 1 3
2 1 2 1 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 3 1 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 1 2
4 2 1 - 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
5 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 2 3
AVg. 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3391 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand Object Oriented Programming concepts and basics of Java programming
language
 To know the principles of packages, inheritance and interfaces
 To develop a java application with threads and generics classes
 To define exceptions and use I/O streams
 To design and build Graphical User Interface Application using JAVAFX
70
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OOP AND JAVA 9
Overview of OOP – Object oriented programming paradigms – Features of Object Oriented
Programming – Java Buzzwords – Overview of Java – Data Types, Variables and Arrays –
Operators – Control Statements – Programming Structures in Java – Defining classes in Java –
Constructors-Methods -Access specifiers - Static members- Java Doc comments

UNIT II INHERITANCE, PACKAGES AND INTERFACES 9

Overloading Methods – Objects as Parameters – Returning Objects –Static, Nested and Inner
Classes. Inheritance: Basics– Types of Inheritance -Super keyword -Method Overriding – Dynamic
Method Dispatch –Abstract Classes – final with Inheritance. Packages and Interfaces: Packages –
Packages and Member Access –Importing Packages – Interfaces.

UNIT III EXCEPTION HANDLING AND MULTITHREADING 9

Exception Handling basics – Multiple catch Clauses – Nested try Statements – Java’s Built-in
Exceptions – User defined Exception. Multithreaded Programming: Java Thread Model–Creating a
Thread and Multiple Threads – Priorities – Synchronization – Inter Thread Communication-
Suspending –Resuming, and Stopping Threads –Multithreading. Wrappers – Auto boxing.

UNIT IV I/O, GENERICS, STRING HANDLING 9

I/O Basics – Reading and Writing Console I/O – Reading and Writing Files. Generics: Generic
Programming – Generic classes – Generic Methods – Bounded Types – Restrictions and
Limitations. Strings: Basic String class, methods and String Buffer Class.

UNIT V JAVAFX EVENT HANDLING, CONTROLS AND COMPONENTS 9

JAVAFX Events and Controls: Event Basics – Handling Key and Mouse Events. Controls:
Checkbox, ToggleButton – RadioButtons – ListView – ComboBox – ChoiceBox – Text Controls –
ScrollPane. Layouts – FlowPane – HBox and VBox – BorderPane – StackPane – GridPane. Menus
– Basics – Menu – Menu bars – MenuItem.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1:Apply the concepts of classes and objects to solve simple problems
CO2:Develop programs using inheritance, packages and interfaces
CO3:Make use of exception handling mechanisms and multithreaded model to solve real world
problems
CO4:Build Java applications with I/O packages, string classes, Collections and generics concepts
CO5:Integrate the concepts of event handling and JavaFX components and controls for developing
GUI based applications
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Herbert Schildt, “Java: The Complete Reference”, 11 th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, New
Delhi, 2019
2. Herbert Schildt, “Introducing JavaFX 8 Programming”, 1 st Edition, McGraw Hill Education, New
Delhi, 2015

REFERENCE:
1. Cay S. Horstmann, “Core Java Fundamentals”, Volume 1, 11 th Edition, Prentice Hall,
2018.

71
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 3 1 3 - - - 3 2 2 2 3 1 2
2 2 1 3 2 1 - - - 2 1 1 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 1 2 2 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 1 3
4 3 1 2 2 2 - - - 1 2 1 3 3 1 1
5 1 1 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
AVg. 2 1 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3311 DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To demonstrate array implementation of linear data structure algorithms.
 To implement the applications using Stack.
 To implement the applications using Linked list
 To implement Binary search tree and AVL tree algorithms.
 To implement the Heap algorithm.
 To implement Dijkstra’s algorithm.
 To implement Prim’s algorithm
 To implement Sorting, Searching and Hashing algorithms.

LIST OF EXERCISES:
1. Array implementation of Stack, Queue and Circular Queue ADTs
2. Implementation of Singly Linked List
3. Linked list implementation of Stack and Linear Queue ADTs
4. Implementation of Polynomial Manipulation using Linked list
5. Implementation of Evaluating Postfix Expressions, Infix to Postfix conversion
6. Implementation of Binary Search Trees
7. Implementation of AVL Trees
8. Implementation of Heaps using Priority Queues
9. Implementation of Dijkstra’s Algorithm
10. Implementation of Prim’s Algorithm
11. Implementation of Linear Search and Binary Search
12. Implementation of Insertion Sort and Selection Sort
13. Implementation of Merge Sort
14. Implementation of Open Addressing (Linear Probing and Quadratic Probing)
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Implement Linear data structure algorithms.
CO2: Implement applications using Stacks and Linked lists
CO3: Implement Binary Search tree and AVL tree operations.
CO4: Implement graph algorithms.
CO5: Analyze the various searching and sorting algorithms.
72
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 2 2 1 - - - - 2 1 2 2 2 2 3
2 3 3 1 1 - - - - 1 1 1 3 1 2 2
3 2 1 3 1 - - - - 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
4 3 1 3 3 - - - - 1 2 3 3 2 1 2
5 3 2 1 1 2 - - - 3 3 3 1 3 1 3
AVg. 2 2 2 1 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3381 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To build software development skills using java programming for real-world applications.
 To understand and apply the concepts of classes, packages, interfaces, inheritance,
exception handling and file processing.
 To develop applications using generic programming and event handling
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Solve problems by using sequential search, binary search, and quadratic sorting algorithms
(selection, insertion)
2. Develop stack and queue data structures using classes and objects.
3. Develop a java application with an Employee class with Emp_name, Emp_id, Address,
Mail_id, Mobile_no as members. Inherit the classes, Programmer, Assistant Professor,
Associate Professor and Professor from employee class. Add Basic Pay (BP) as the
member of all the inherited classes with 97% of BP as DA, 10 % of BP as HRA, 12% of
BP as PF, 0.1% of BP for staff club funds. Generate pay slips for the employees with their
gross and net salary.
4. Write a Java Program to create an abstract class named Shape that contains two integers
and an empty method named printArea(). Provide three classes named Rectangle, Triangle
and Circle such that each one of the classes extends the class Shape. Each one of the
classes contains only the method printArea( ) that prints the area of the given shape.
5. Solve the above problem using an interface.
6. Implement exception handling and creation of user defined exceptions.
7. Write a java program that implements a multi-threaded application that has three
threads. First thread generates a random integer every 1 second and if the value is even,
the second thread computes the square of the number and prints. If the value is odd, the
third thread will print the value of the cube of the number.
8. Write a program to perform file operations.
9. Develop applications to demonstrate the features of generics classes.
10. Develop applications using JavaFX controls, layouts and menus.
11. Develop a mini project for any application using Java concepts.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1 : Design and develop java programs using object oriented programming concepts
CO2 : Develop simple applications using object oriented concepts such as package, exceptions
73
CO3: Implement multithreading, and generics concepts
CO4 : Create GUIs and event driven programming applications for real world problems
CO5: Implement and deploy web applications using Java
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1 - - - - 1 2 2 2 1 2 3
2 2 1 3 1 - - - - 2 3 3 2 1 3 1
3 2 2 1 2 1 - - - 1 2 1 3 2 3 2
4 2 2 1 3 - - - - 3 1 1 1 2 1 2
5 1 3 3 1 3 - - - 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
AVg. 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3361 DATA SCIENCE LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the python libraries for data science
 To understand the basic Statistical and Probability measures for data science.
 To learn descriptive analytics on the benchmark data sets.
 To apply correlation and regression analytics on standard data sets.
 To present and interpret data using visualization packages in Python.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Download, install and explore the features of NumPy, SciPy, Jupyter, Statsmodels and
Pandas packages.
2. Working with Numpy arrays
3. Working with Pandas data frames
4. Reading data from text files, Excel and the web and exploring various commands for doing
descriptive analytics on the Iris data set.
5. Use the diabetes data set from UCI and Pima Indians Diabetes data set for performing the
following:
a. Univariate analysis: Frequency, Mean, Median, Mode, Variance, Standard Deviation,
Skewness and Kurtosis.
b. Bivariate analysis: Linear and logistic regression modeling
c. Multiple Regression analysis
d. Also compare the results of the above analysis for the two data sets.
6. Apply and explore various plotting functions on UCI data sets.
a. Normal curves
b. Density and contour plots
c. Correlation and scatter plots
d. Histograms
e. Three dimensional plotting
7. Visualizing Geographic Data with Basemap
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

74
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Make use of the python libraries for data science
CO2: Make use of the basic Statistical and Probability measures for data science.
CO3: Perform descriptive analytics on the benchmark data sets.
CO4: Perform correlation and regression analytics on standard data sets
CO5: Present and interpret data using visualization packages in Python.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 3 3 1 3 2
2 3 2 2 3 1 - - - 3 1 3 2 1 3 3
3 3 2 1 3 1 - - - 2 1 1 1 3 2 3
4 2 3 1 3 - - - - 2 3 2 3 3 3 1
5 1 2 3 1 1 - - - 2 1 3 1 1 3 3
AVg. 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3361 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT LTPC

0 021

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To be proficient in important Microsoft Office tools: MS WORD, EXCEL, POWERPOINT.

 To be proficient in using MS WORD to create quality technical documents, by using standard

templates, widely acceptable styles and formats, variety of features to enhance the
presentability and overall utility value of content.
 To be proficient in using MS EXCEL for all data manipulation tasks including the common
statistical, logical, mathematical etc., operations, conversion, analytics, search and explore,
visualize,interlink, and utilizing many more critical features offered

 To be able to create and share quality presentations by using the features of MS PowerPoint,
including: organization of content, presentability, aesthetics, using media elements and
enhance the overall quality of presentations.
MS WORD: 10 Hours

Create and format a document

Working with tables

Working with Bullets and Lists

Working with styles, shapes, smart art, charts

Inserting objects, charts and importing objects from other office tools

Creating and Using document templates

Inserting equations, symbols and special characters

75
Working with Table of contents and References, citations

Insert and review comments

Create bookmarks, hyperlinks, endnotes footnote

Viewing document in different modes

Working with document protection and security

Inspect document for accessibility

MS EXCEL: 10 Hours

Create worksheets, insert and format data

Work with different types of data: text, currency, date, numeric etc.

Split, validate, consolidate, Convert data

Sort and filter data

Perform calculations and use functions: (Statistical, Logical, Mathematical, date, Time etc.,)

Work with Lookup and reference formulae

Create and Work with different types of charts

Use pivot tables to summarize and analyse data

Perform data analysis using own formulae and functions

Combine data from multiple worksheets using own formulae and built-in functions to generate
results

Export data and sheets to other file formats

Working with macros

Protecting data and Securing the workbook

MS POWERPOINT: 10 Hours

Select slide templates, layout and themes

Formatting slide content and using bullets and numbering

Insert and format images, smart art, tables, charts

Using Slide master, notes and handout master

Working with animation and transitions

Organize and Group slides

Import or create and use media objects: audio, video, animation

Perform slideshow recording and Record narration and create presentable videos

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

76
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion the students will be able to

CO1:Use MS Word to create quality documents, by structuring and organizing content for their day
to day technical and academic requirements
CO2:Use MS EXCEL to perform data operations and analytics, record, retrieve data as per
requirements and visualize data for ease of understanding
CO3:Use MS PowerPoint to create high quality academic presentations by including common
tables, charts, graphs, interlinking other elements, and using media objects.

CS3452 THEORY OF COMPUTATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand foundations of computation including automata theory
 To construct models of regular expressions and languages.
 To design context free grammar and push down automata
 To understand Turing machines and their capability
 To understand Undecidability and NP class problems

UNIT I AUTOMATA AND REGULAR EXPRESSIONS 9

Need for automata theory - Introduction to formal proof – Finite Automata (FA) – Deterministic Finite
Automata (DFA) – Non-deterministic Finite Automata (NFA) – Equivalence between NFA and DFA
– Finite Automata with Epsilon transitions – Equivalence of NFA and DFA- Equivalence of NFAs
with and without ε-moves- Conversion of NFA into DFA – Minimization of DFAs.

UNIT II REGULAR EXPRESSIONS AND LANGUAGES 9

Regular expression – Regular Languages- Equivalence of Finite Automata and regular expressions
– Proving languages to be not regular (Pumping Lemma) – Closure properties of regular languages.

UNIT III CONTEXT FREE GRAMMAR AND PUSH DOWN AUTOMATA 9

Types of Grammar - Chomsky‘s hierarchy of languages -Context-Free Grammar (CFG) and
Languages – Derivations and Parse trees – Ambiguity in grammars and languages – Push Down
Automata (PDA): Definition – Moves - Instantaneous descriptions -Languages of pushdown
automata – Equivalence of pushdown automata and CFG-CFG to PDA-PDA to CFG – Deterministic
Pushdown Automata.

UNIT IV NORMAL FORMS AND TURING MACHINES 9

Normal forms for CFG – Simplification of CFG- Chomsky Normal Form (CNF) and Greibach Normal
Form (GNF) – Pumping lemma for CFL – Closure properties of Context Free Languages –Turing
Machine : Basic model – definition and representation – Instantaneous Description – Language
acceptance by TM – TM as Computer of Integer functions – Programming techniques for Turing
machines (subroutines).

UNIT V UNDECIDABILITY 9
Unsolvable Problems and Computable Functions –PCP-MPCP- Recursive and recursively
enumerable languages – Properties - Universal Turing machine -Tractable and Intractable problems

77
- P and NP completeness – Kruskal’s algorithm – Travelling Salesman Problem- 3-CNF SAT
problems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Construct automata theory using Finite Automata
CO2: Write regular expressions for any pattern
CO3: Design context free grammar and Pushdown Automata
CO4: Design Turing machine for computational functions
CO5: Differentiate between decidable and undecidable problems
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hopcroft J.E., Motwani R. & Ullman J.D., "Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and
Computations", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. John C Martin , "Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation", 4th Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. Harry R Lewis and Christos H Papadimitriou , "Elements of the Theory of Computation", 2nd
Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2015.
2. Peter Linz, "An Introduction to Formal Language and Automata", 6th Edition, Jones & Bartlett,
2016.
3. [Link] and [Link], “Theory of Computer Science: Automata Languages and
Computation”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 2 3 - - - - 1 1 2 3 1 3 2
2 2 2 3 2 1 - - - 3 3 2 3 3 1 2
3 2 2 3 2 1 - - - 1 3 1 2 1 2 2
4 2 2 2 1 - - - - 1 3 3 2 1 3 2
5 2 2 2 1 1 - - - 1 1 3 2 3 1 3
AVg. 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3491 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING L T P C

3 0 2 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of this course are to:
 Study about uninformed and Heuristic search techniques.
 Learn techniques for reasoning under uncertainty
 Introduce Machine Learning and supervised learning algorithms
 Study about ensembling and unsupervised learning algorithms
 Learn the basics of deep learning using neural networks

78
UNIT I PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Introduction to AI - AI Applications - Problem solving agents – search algorithms – uninformed
search strategies – Heuristic search strategies – Local search and optimization problems –
adversarial search – constraint satisfaction problems (CSP)

UNIT II PROBABILISTIC REASONING 9

Acting under uncertainty – Bayesian inference – naïve bayes models. Probabilistic reasoning –
Bayesian networks – exact inference in BN – approximate inference in BN – causal networks.

UNIT III SUPERVISED LEARNING 9

Introduction to machine learning – Linear Regression Models: Least squares, single & multiple
variables, Bayesian linear regression, gradient descent, Linear Classification Models: Discriminant
function – Probabilistic discriminative model - Logistic regression, Probabilistic generative model –
Naive Bayes, Maximum margin classifier – Support vector machine, Decision Tree, Random forests

UNIT IV ENSEMBLE TECHNIQUES AND UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 9

Combining multiple learners: Model combination schemes, Voting, Ensemble Learning - bagging,
boosting, stacking, Unsupervised learning: K-means, Instance Based Learning: KNN, Gaussian
mixture models and Expectation maximization

UNIT V NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Perceptron - Multilayer perceptron, activation functions, network training – gradient descent
optimization – stochastic gradient descent, error backpropagation, from shallow networks to deep
networks –Unit saturation (aka the vanishing gradient problem) – ReLU, hyperparameter tuning,
batch normalization, regularization, dropout.
45 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Implementation of Uninformed search algorithms (BFS, DFS)
2. Implementation of Informed search algorithms (A*, memory-bounded A*)
3. Implement naïve Bayes models
4. Implement Bayesian Networks
5. Build Regression models
6. Build decision trees and random forests
7. Build SVM models
8. Implement ensembling techniques
9. Implement clustering algorithms
10. Implement EM for Bayesian networks
11. Build simple NN models
12. Build deep learning NN models

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Use appropriate search algorithms for problem solving
CO2: Apply reasoning under uncertainty
CO3: Build supervised learning models
CO4: Build ensembling and unsupervised models
CO5: Build deep learning neural network models
TOTAL:75 PERIODS
79
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence – A Modern Approach”, Fourth
Edition, Pearson Education, 2021.
2. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, MIT Press, Fourth Edition, 2020.

REFERENCES:
1. Dan W. Patterson, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems”, Pearson
Education,2007
2. Kevin Night, Elaine Rich, and Nair B., “Artificial Intelligence”, McGraw Hill, 2008
3. Patrick H. Winston, "Artificial Intelligence", Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2006
4. Deepak Khemani, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2013
([Link]
5. Christopher M. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006.
6. Tom Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition,1997.
7. Charu C. Aggarwal, “Data Classification Algorithms and Applications”, CRC Press, 2014
8. Mehryar Mohri, Afshin Rostamizadeh, Ameet Talwalkar, “Foundations of Machine
Learning”, MIT Press, 2012.
9. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning”, MIT Press, 2016
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 3 - - - - 1 3 3 3 1 2 2
2 1 1 1 3 1 - - - 1 2 1 3 2 3 2
3 2 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 3 1 1 1
4 3 1 3 1 - - - - 2 1 2 1 2 2 2
5 3 1 1 2 2 - - - 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
AVg. 2 1 2 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 3 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3492 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamentals of data models, relational algebra and SQL
 To represent a database system using ER diagrams and to learn normalization techniques
 To understand the fundamental concepts of transaction, concurrency and recovery
processing
 To understand the internal storage structures using different file and indexing techniques
which will help in physical DB design
 To have an introductory knowledge about the Distributed databases, NOSQL and database
security

UNIT I RELATIONAL DATABASES 10

Purpose of Database System – Views of data – Data Models – Database System Architecture –
Introduction to relational databases – Relational Model – Keys – Relational Algebra – SQL
fundamentals – Advanced SQL features – Embedded SQL– Dynamic SQL

80
UNIT II DATABASE DESIGN 8
Entity-Relationship model – E-R Diagrams – Enhanced-ER Model – ER-to-Relational Mapping –
Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – First, Second, Third Normal Forms,
Dependency Preservation – Boyce/Codd Normal Form – Multi-valued Dependencies and Fourth
Normal Form – Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form

UNIT III TRANSACTIONS 9

Transaction Concepts – ACID Properties – Schedules – Serializability – Transaction support in SQL
– Need for Concurrency – Concurrency control –Two Phase Locking- Timestamp – Multiversion –
Validation and Snapshot isolation– Multiple Granularity locking – Deadlock Handling – Recovery
Concepts – Recovery based on deferred and immediate update – Shadow paging – ARIES
Algorithm
UNIT IV IMPLEMENTATION TECHNIQUES 9
RAID – File Organization – Organization of Records in Files – Data dictionary Storage – Column
Oriented Storage– Indexing and Hashing –Ordered Indices – B+ tree Index Files – B tree Index Files
– Static Hashing – Dynamic Hashing – Query Processing Overview – Algorithms for Selection,
Sorting and join operations – Query optimization using Heuristics - Cost Estimation.

UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS 9

Distributed Databases: Architecture, Data Storage, Transaction Processing, Query processing and
optimization – NOSQL Databases: Introduction – CAP Theorem – Document Based systems – Key
value Stores – Column Based Systems – Graph Databases. Database Security: Security issues –
Access control based on privileges – Role Based access control – SQL Injection – Statistical
Database security – Flow control – Encryption and Public Key infrastructures – Challenges

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Construct SQL Queries using relational algebra
CO2: Design database using ER model and normalize the database
CO3: Construct queries to handle transaction processing and maintain consistency of the
database
CO4: Compare and contrast various indexing strategies and apply the knowledge to tune the
performance of the database
CO5: Appraise how advanced databases differ from Relational Databases and find a suitable
database for the given requirement.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, Seventh
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2020.
2. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Seventh
Edition, Pearson Education, 2017

REFERENCES:
1. [Link], [Link], [Link], “An Introduction to Database Systems”, Eighth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2006.

81
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 3 2 1 - - - 2 1 1 1 2 1 3
2 3 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 3 3 3 1 2
3 3 2 3 2 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 2 3 3
4 1 2 3 2 - - - - 3 2 3 3 1 2 3
5 1 1 3 3 2 - - - 1 3 3 1 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2 3 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3401 ALGORITHMS L T P C
3 0 2 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand and apply the algorithm analysis techniques on searching and sorting
algorithms
 To critically analyze the efficiency of graph algorithms
 To understand different algorithm design techniques
 To solve programming problems using state space tree
 To understand the concepts behind NP Completeness, Approximation algorithms and
randomized algorithms.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Algorithm analysis: Time and space complexity - Asymptotic Notations and its properties Best
case, Worst case and average case analysis – Recurrence relation: substitution method - Lower
bounds – searching: linear search, binary search and Interpolation Search, Pattern search: The
naïve string-matching algorithm - Rabin-Karp algorithm - Knuth-Morris-Pratt algorithm. Sorting:
Insertion sort – heap sort

UNIT II GRAPH ALGORITHMS 9

Graph algorithms: Representations of graphs - Graph traversal: DFS – BFS - applications -
Connectivity, strong connectivity, bi-connectivity - Minimum spanning tree: Kruskal’s and Prim’s
algorithm- Shortest path: Bellman-Ford algorithm - Dijkstra’s algorithm - Floyd-Warshall algorithm
Network flow: Flow networks - Ford-Fulkerson method – Matching: Maximum bipartite matching

UNIT III ALGORITHM DESIGN TECHNIQUES 9

Divide and Conquer methodology: Finding maximum and minimum - Merge sort - Quick sort
Dynamic programming: Elements of dynamic programming — Matrix-chain multiplication - Multi
stage graph — Optimal Binary Search Trees. Greedy Technique: Elements of the greedy strategy
- Activity-selection problem –- Optimal Merge pattern — Huffman Trees.

UNIT IV STATE SPACE SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9

Backtracking: n-Queens problem - Hamiltonian Circuit Problem - Subset Sum Problem – Graph
colouring problem Branch and Bound: Solving 15-Puzzle problem - Assignment problem -
Knapsack Problem - Travelling Salesman Problem

82
UNIT V NP-COMPLETE AND APPROXIMATION ALGORITHM 9
Tractable and intractable problems: Polynomial time algorithms – Venn diagram representation -
NP-algorithms - NP-hardness and NP-completeness – Bin Packing problem - Problem reduction:
TSP – 3-CNF problem. Approximation Algorithms: TSP - Randomized Algorithms: concept and
application - primality testing - randomized quick sort - Finding kth smallest number

45 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
Searching and Sorting Algorithms
1. Implement Linear Search. Determine the time required to search for an element. Repeat the
experiment for different values of n, the number of elements in the list to be searched and
plot a graph of the time taken versus n.
2. Implement recursive Binary Search. Determine the time required to search an element.
Repeat the experiment for different values of n, the number of elements in the list to be
searched and plot a graph of the time taken versus n.
3. Given a text txt [0...n-1] and a pattern pat [0...m-1], write a function search (char pat [ ], char
txt [ ]) that prints all occurrences of pat [ ] in txt [ ]. You may assume that n > m.
4. Sort a given set of elements using the Insertion sort and Heap sort methods and determine
the time required to sort the elements. Repeat the experiment for different values of n, the
number of elements in the list to be sorted and plot a graph of the time taken versus n.

Graph Algorithms
1. Develop a program to implement graph traversal using Breadth First Search
2. Develop a program to implement graph traversal using Depth First Search
3. From a given vertex in a weighted connected graph, develop a program to find the shortest
paths to other vertices using Dijkstra’s algorithm.
4. Find the minimum cost spanning tree of a given undirected graph using Prim’s algorithm.
5. Implement Floyd’s algorithm for the All-Pairs- Shortest-Paths problem.
6. Compute the transitive closure of a given directed graph using Warshall's algorithm.

Algorithm Design Techniques

1. Develop a program to find out the maximum and minimum numbers in a given list of n
numbers using the divide and conquer technique.
2. Implement Merge sort and Quick sort methods to sort an array of elements and determine
the time required to sort. Repeat the experiment for different values of n, the number of
elements in the list to be sorted and plot a graph of the time taken versus n.

State Space Search Algorithms

1. Implement N Queens problem using Backtracking.
Approximation Algorithms Randomized Algorithms
1. Implement any scheme to find the optimal solution for the Traveling Salesperson problem
and then solve the same problem instance using any approximation algorithm and determine
the error in the approximation.
2. Implement randomized algorithms for finding the kth smallest number.
The programs can be implemented in C/C++/JAVA/ Python.
TOTAL:75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Analyze the efficiency of algorithms using various frameworks

83
CO2: Apply graph algorithms to solve problems and analyze their efficiency.
CO3: Make use of algorithm design techniques like divide and conquer, dynamic programming
and greedy techniques to solve problems
CO4: Use the state space tree method for solving problems.
CO5: Solve problems using approximation algorithms and randomized algorithms

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald L. Rivest and Clifford Stein, "Introduction to
Algorithms", 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2009.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Sanguthevar Rajasekaran “Computer Algorithms/C++” Orient
Blackswan, 2nd Edition, 2019.

REFERENCES:
1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2012.
2. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffrey D. Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms",
Reprint Edition, Pearson Education, 2006.
3. S. Sridhar, “Design and Analysis of Algorithms”, Oxford university press, 2014.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 - - - 1 - - - - 1 - 1 -
2 2 3 - - - - 1 - - - - 1 - 1 -
3 1 2 3 1 - - 2 - - - - - - 1 1
4 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
AVg. 2.67 1.8 3 1 - - 1.33 - - - - 1 - 1 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3451 INTRODUCTION TO OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics and functions of operating systems.
 To understand processes and threads
 To analyze scheduling algorithms and process synchronization.
 To understand the concept of deadlocks.
 To analyze various memory management schemes.
 To be familiar with I/O management and file systems.
 To be familiar with the basics of virtual machines and Mobile OS like iOS and Android.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Computer System - Elements and organization; Operating System Overview - Objectives and
Functions - Evolution of Operating System; Operating System Structures – Operating System
Services - User Operating System Interface - System Calls – System Programs - Design and
Implementation - Structuring methods.

84
UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 11
Processes - Process Concept - Process Scheduling - Operations on Processes - Inter-process
Communication; CPU Scheduling - Scheduling criteria - Scheduling algorithms: Threads -
Multithread Models – Threading issues; Process Synchronization - The Critical-Section problem -
Synchronization hardware – Semaphores – Mutex - Classical problems of synchronization -
Monitors; Deadlock - Methods for handling deadlocks, Deadlock prevention, Deadlock avoidance,
Deadlock detection, Recovery from deadlock.

UNIT III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 10

Main Memory - Swapping - Contiguous Memory Allocation – Paging - Structure of the Page Table -
Segmentation, Segmentation with paging; Virtual Memory - Demand Paging – Copy on Write - Page
Replacement - Allocation of Frames –Thrashing.

UNIT IV STORAGE MANAGEMENT 10

Mass Storage system – Disk Structure - Disk Scheduling and Management; File-System Interface -
File concept - Access methods - Directory Structure - Directory organization - File system mounting
- File Sharing and Protection; File System Implementation - File System Structure - Directory
implementation - Allocation Methods - Free Space Management; I/O Systems – I/O Hardware,
Application I/O interface, Kernel I/O subsystem.

UNIT V VIRTUAL MACHINES AND MOBILE OS 7

Virtual Machines – History, Benefits and Features, Building Blocks, Types of Virtual Machines and
their Implementations, Virtualization and Operating-System Components; Mobile OS - iOS and
Android.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 : Analyze various scheduling algorithms and process synchronization.
CO2 : Explain deadlock prevention and avoidance algorithms.
CO3 : Compare and contrast various memory management schemes.
CO4 : Explain the functionality of file systems, I/O systems, and Virtualization
CO5 : Compare iOS and Android Operating Systems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”‖,
10th Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2018.
2. Andrew S Tanenbaum, "Modern Operating Systems", Pearson, 5th Edition, 2022 New Delhi.
REFERENCES:
1. Ramaz Elmasri, A. Gil Carrick, David Levine, “ Operating Systems – A Spiral Approach”,
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2010.
2. William Stallings, "Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles", 7th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2018.
3. Achyut [Link], Atul Kahate, “Operating Systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.

85
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 2 - - - - 3 2 3 1 1 2 2
2 2 2 3 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 3 2 2 1 - - - 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
4 1 3 3 3 - - - - 1 2 1 2 1 3 2
5 3 1 2 1 1 - - - 3 2 3 2 2 2 1
AVg. 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3451 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND SUSTAINABILITY L T P C

2 0 0 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and emphasize
on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
 To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
 To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and nonrenewable
resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
 To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental
management.
 To inculcate and embrace sustainability practices and develop a broader understanding on
green materials, energy cycles and analyze the role of sustainable urbanization.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 6

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness. Eco-system and
Energy flow– ecological succession. Types of biodiversity: genetic, species and ecosystem
diversity– values of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats
to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic
species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ.

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 9

Causes, Effects and Preventive measures of Water, Soil, Air and Noise Pollutions.
Solid, Hazardous and E-Waste management. Case studies on Occupational Health and Safety
Management system (OHASMS). Environmental protection, Environmental protection acts .

UNIT III RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY 6

Energy management and conservation, New Energy Sources: Need of new sources. Different types
new energy sources. Applications of- Hydrogen energy, Ocean energy resources, Tidal energy
conversion. Concept, origin and power plants of geothermal energy.

UNIT IV SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 6

Development , GDP ,Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects
of sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and protocols-

86
Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate change- Global,
Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies. Concept of Carbon
Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.

UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 6

Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy Cycles-
carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization- Socio-
economical and technological change.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
their conservation.
CO2:To identify the causes, effects of environmental pollution and natural disasters and contribute
to the preventive measures in the society.
CO3:To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.
CO4:To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
CO5:To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials, energy
cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers ,2018.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2016.
3. Gilbert [Link], ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies, Prentice Hall.
5. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning.
6. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006.
7. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication,
London, 1998.

REFERENCES :
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards’, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 38 . edition 2010.
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ., House,
Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, Third
Edition, 2015.
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. 2013.
87
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 2 - - -
3 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
5 3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CS3461 OPERATING SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To install windows operating systems.
 To understand the basics of Unix command and shell programming.
 To implement various CPU scheduling algorithms.
 To implement Deadlock Avoidance and Deadlock Detection Algorithms
 To implement Page Replacement Algorithms
 To implement various memory allocation methods.
 To be familiar with File Organization and File Allocation Strategies.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Installation of windows operating system
2. Illustrate UNIX commands and Shell Programming
3. Process Management using System Calls : Fork, Exit, Getpid, Wait, Close
4. Write C programs to implement the various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
5. Illustrate the inter process communication strategy
6. Implement mutual exclusion by Semaphore
7. Write C programs to avoid Deadlock using Banker's Algorithm
8. Write a C program to Implement Deadlock Detection Algorithm
9. Write C program to implement Threading
10. Implement the paging Technique using C program
11. Write C programs to implement the following Memory Allocation Methods
a. First Fit b. Worst Fit c. Best Fit
12. Write C programs to implement the various Page Replacement Algorithms
13. Write C programs to Implement the various File Organization Techniques
14. Implement the following File Allocation Strategies using C programs
a. Sequential b. Indexed c. Linked
15. Write C programs for the implementation of various disk scheduling algorithms

88
 16. Install any guest operating system like Linux using VMware.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At th end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 : Define and implement UNIX Commands.
CO2 : Compare the performance of various CPU Scheduling Algorithms.
CO3 : Compare and contrast various Memory Allocation Methods.
CO4 :Define File Organization and File Allocation Strategies.
CO5 : Implement various Disk Scheduling Algorithms.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 3 1 1 - - - 1 3 3 3 2 1 3
2 3 1 1 2 2 - - - 3 2 1 1 3 1 2
3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - 3 3 1 2 2 2 2
4 1 2 2 3 2 - - - 3 1 3 1 1 2 1
5 2 2 1 1 3 - - - 1 2 2 3 1 3 3
AVg. 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3481 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn and implement important commands in SQL.
 To learn the usage of nested and joint queries.
 To understand functions, procedures and procedural extensions of databases.
 To understand design and implementation of typical database applications.
 To be familiar with the use of a front end tool for GUI based application development.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Create a database table, add constraints (primary key, unique, check, Not null), insert rows,
update and delete rows using SQL DDL and DML commands.
2. Create a set of tables, add foreign key constraints and incorporate referential integrity.
3. Query the database tables using different ‘where’ clause conditions and also implement
aggregate functions.
4. Query the database tables and explore sub queries and simple join operations.
5. Query the database tables and explore natural, equi and outer joins.
6. Write user defined functions and stored procedures in SQL.
7. Execute complex transactions and realize DCL and TCL commands.
8. Write SQL Triggers for insert, delete, and update operations in a database table.
9. Create View and index for database tables with a large number of records.
10. Create an XML database and validate it using XML schema.
11. Create Document, column and graph based data using NOSQL database tools.
12. Develop a simple GUI based database application and incorporate all the above-
mentioned features
13. Case Study using any of the real life database applications from the following list
89
 a) Inventory Management for a EMart Grocery Shop
b) Society Financial Management
c) Cop Friendly App – Eseva
d) Property Management – eMall
e) Star Small and Medium Banking and Finance
● Build Entity Model diagram. The diagram should align with the business and functional
goals stated in the application.
● Apply Normalization rules in designing the tables in scope.
● Prepared applicable views, triggers (for auditing purposes), functions for enabling
enterprise grade features.
● Build PL SQL / Stored Procedures for Complex Functionalities, ex EOD Batch
Processing for calculating the EMI for Gold Loan for each eligible Customer.
● Ability to showcase ACID Properties with sample queries with appropriate settings
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Create databases with different types of key constraints.
CO2: Construct simple and complex SQL queries using DML and DCL commands.
CO3: Use advanced features such as stored procedures and triggers and incorporate in GUI based
application development.
CO4: Create an XML database and validate with meta-data (XML schema).
CO5: Create and manipulate data using NOSQL database.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 1 3 2 2 3 2
2 2 2 3 2 2 - - - 1 2 3 3 2 1 2
3 3 3 2 1 1 - - - 1 1 1 3 2 3 3
4 1 3 3 3 1 - - - 1 1 3 2 3 1 3
5 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 2 3 1 3 1 2
AVg. 2 3 2 2 1 - - - 2 1 3 2 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3591 COMPUTER NETWORKS L T PC

3 0 2 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of layering in networks.
 To know the functions of protocols of each layer of TCP/IP protocol suite.
 To visualize the end-to-end flow of information.
 To learn the functions of network layer and the various routing protocols
 To familiarize the functions and protocols of the Transport layer

90
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND APPLICATION LAYER 10
Data Communication - Networks – Network Types – Protocol Layering – TCP/IP Protocol suite –
OSI Model – Introduction to Sockets - Application Layer protocols: HTTP – FTP – Email protocols
(SMTP - POP3 - IMAP - MIME) – DNS – SNMP
UNIT II TRANSPORT LAYER 9
Introduction - Transport-Layer Protocols: UDP – TCP: Connection Management – Flow control -
Congestion Control - Congestion avoidance (DECbit, RED) – SCTP – Quality of Service

UNIT III NETWORK LAYER 7

Switching : Packet Switching - Internet protocol - IPV4 – IP Addressing – Subnetting - IPV6, ARP,
RARP, ICMP, DHCP

UNIT IV ROUTING 7
Routing and protocols: Unicast routing - Distance Vector Routing - RIP - Link State Routing – OSPF
– Path-vector routing - BGP - Multicast Routing: DVMRP – PIM.

UNIT V DATA LINK AND PHYSICAL LAYERS 12

Data Link Layer – Framing – Flow control – Error control – Data-Link Layer Protocols – HDLC –
PPP - Media Access Control – Ethernet Basics – CSMA/CD – Virtual LAN – Wireless LAN
(802.11) - Physical Layer: Data and Signals - Performance – Transmission media- Switching –
Circuit Switching.
45 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Learn to use commands like tcpdump, netstat, ifconfig, nslookup and traceroute. Capture
ping and trace route PDUs using a network protocol analyzer and examine.
2. Write a HTTP web client program to download a web page using TCP sockets.
3. Applications using TCP sockets like: a) Echo client and echo server b) Chat
4. Simulation of DNS using UDP sockets.
5. Use a tool like Wireshark to capture packets and examine the packets
6. Write a code simulating ARP /RARP protocols.
7. Study of Network simulator (NS) and Simulation of Congestion Control Algorithms using NS.
8. Study of TCP/UDP performance using Simulation tool.
9. Simulation of Distance Vector/ Link State Routing algorithm.
10. Simulation of an error correction code (like CRC)

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO 1: Explain the basic layers and its functions in computer networks.
CO 2: Understand the basics of how data flows from one node to another.
CO 3: Analyze routing algorithms.
CO 4: Describe protocols for various functions in the network.
CO 5: Analyze the working of various application layer protocols.
TOTAL:75 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking, A Top-Down Approach Featuring the
Internet, Eighth Edition, Pearson Education, 2021.
2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking with TCP/IP Protocol Suite, Sixth
Edition TMH, 2022
91
REFERENCES
1. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, Computer Networks: A Systems Approach, Fifth Edition,
Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Inc., 2012.
2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, Tenth Edition, Pearson Education,
2013.
3. Nader F. Mir, Computer and Communication Networks, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2014.
4. Ying-Dar Lin, Ren-Hung Hwang, Fred Baker, “Computer Networks: An Open Source
Approach”, McGraw Hill, 2012.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
2 - 1 - - 2 - - - - - - 2 - 2 -
3 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 3 -
4 - - 1 2 - - - - 3 - - - - -
5 - 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 3
AVg. - 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 - - - 1 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3501 COMPILER DESIGN LTPC

3 024

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the various phases of compiler.
 To learn the various parsing techniques.
 To understand intermediate code generation and run-time environment.
 To learn to implement the front-end of the compiler.
 To learn to implement code generator.
 To learn to implement code optimization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPILERS & LEXICAL ANALYSIS 8

Introduction- Translators- Compilation and Interpretation- Language processors -The Phases of

Compiler – Lexical Analysis – Role of Lexical Analyzer – Input Buffering – Specification of Tokens
– Recognition of Tokens – Finite Automata – Regular Expressions to Automata NFA, DFA –
Minimizing DFA - Language for Specifying Lexical Analyzers – Lex tool.

UNIT II SYNTAX ANALYSIS 11

Role of Parser – Grammars – Context-free grammars – Writing a grammar Top Down Parsing -
General Strategies - Recursive Descent Parser Predictive Parser-LL(1) - Parser-Shift Reduce
Parser-LR Parser- LR (0)Item Construction of SLR Parsing Table - Introduction to LALR Parser -
Error Handling and Recovery in Syntax Analyzer-YACC tool - Design of a syntax Analyzer for a
Sample Language

92
UNIT III SYNTAX DIRECTED TRANSLATION & INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION 9

Syntax directed Definitions-Construction of Syntax Tree-Bottom-up Evaluation of S-Attribute

Definitions- Design of predictive translator - Type Systems-Specification of a simple type Checker-
Equivalence of Type Expressions-Type Conversions. Intermediate Languages: Syntax Tree, Three
Address Code, Types and Declarations, Translation of Expressions, Type Checking, Back
patching.

UNIT IV RUN-TIME ENVIRONMENT AND CODE GENERATION 9

Runtime Environments – source language issues – Storage organization – Storage Allocation

Strategies: Static, Stack and Heap allocation - Parameter Passing-Symbol Tables - Dynamic
Storage Allocation - Issues in the Design of a code generator – Basic Blocks and Flow graphs -
Design of a simple Code Generator - Optimal Code Generation for Expressions– Dynamic
Programming Code Generation.

UNIT V CODE OPTIMIZATION 8

Principal Sources of Optimization – Peep-hole optimization - DAG- Optimization of Basic Blocks -
Global Data Flow Analysis - Efficient Data Flow Algorithm – Recent trends in Compiler Design.
45 PERIODS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Using the LEX tool, Develop a lexical analyzer to recognize a few patterns in C. (Ex.
identifiers, constants, comments, operators etc.). Create a symbol table, while recognizing
identifiers.
2. Implement a Lexical Analyzer using LEX Tool
3. Generate YACC specification for a few syntactic categories.

a. Program to recognize a valid arithmetic expression that uses operator +, -, * and /.

b. Program to recognize a valid variable which starts with a letter followed by any
number of letters or digits.
c. Program to recognize a valid control structures syntax of C language (For loop,
while loop, if-else, if-else-if, switch-case, etc.).
d. Implementation of calculator using LEX and YACC

4. Generate three address code for a simple program using LEX and YACC.
5. Implement type checking using Lex and Yacc.
6. Implement simple code optimization techniques (Constant folding, Strength reduction and
Algebraic transformation)
7. Implement back-end of the compiler for which the three address code is given as input and
the 8086 assembly language code is produced as output.
30 PERIODS
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:

CO1:Understand the techniques in different phases of a compiler.

CO2:Design a lexical analyser for a sample language and learn to use the LEX tool.
CO3:Apply different parsing algorithms to develop a parser and learn to use YACC tool
CO4:Understand semantics rules (SDT), intermediate code generation and run-time environment.
93
CO5:Implement code generation and apply code optimization techniques.

TEXT BOOK:

1. Alfred V. Aho, Monica S. Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Compilers: Principles,
Techniques and Tools”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.

REFERENCES

1. Randy Allen, Ken Kennedy, Optimizing Compilers for Modern Architectures: A Dependence
based Approach, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2002.
2. Steven S. Muchnick, Advanced Compiler Design and Implementation‖, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers - Elsevier Science, India, Indian Reprint 2003.
3. Keith D Cooper and Linda Torczon, Engineering a Compiler‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers
Elsevier Science, 2004.
4. V. Raghavan, Principles of Compiler Design‖, Tata McGraw Hill Education Publishers, 2010.
5. Allen I. Holub, Compiler Design in C‖, Prentice-Hall Software Series, 1993.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 3 1 3 2 3 2
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 3 2 2 1 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - 3 1 1 1 2 2 3
4 3 2 2 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 3 1 2 1
5 3 3 3 2 1 - - - 2 1 1 3 2 1 2
AVg. 3.00 2.80 2.60 2.20 2.00 - - - 2.60 2.00 1.60 2.40 1.80 1.80 2.00
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CB3491 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND CYBER SECURITY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Learn to analyze the security of in-built cryptosystems.
 Know the fundamental mathematical concepts related to security.
 Develop cryptographic algorithms for information security.
 Comprehend the various types of data integrity and authentication schemes
 Understand cyber crimes and cyber security.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SECURITY 9

Computer Security Concepts – The OSI Security Architecture – Security Attacks – Security Services
and Mechanisms – A Model for Network Security – Classical encryption techniques: Substitution
techniques, Transposition techniques, Steganography – Foundations of modern cryptography:
Perfect security – Information Theory – Product Cryptosystem – Cryptanalysis.

UNIT II SYMMETRIC CIPHERS 9

Number theory – Algebraic Structures – Modular Arithmetic - Euclid‘s algorithm – Congruence and
matrices – Group, Rings, Fields, Finite Fields

94
SYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: SDES – Block Ciphers – DES, Strength of DES – Differential and
linear cryptanalysis – Block cipher design principles – Block cipher mode of operation – Evaluation
criteria for AES – Pseudorandom Number Generators – RC4 – Key distribution.

UNIT III ASYMMETRIC CRYPTOGRAPHY 9

MATHEMATICS OF ASYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Primes – Primality Testing –
Factorization – Euler’s totient function, Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorem – Chinese Remainder
Theorem – Exponentiation and logarithm

ASYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: RSA cryptosystem – Key distribution – Key management – Diffie
Hellman key exchange -– Elliptic curve arithmetic – Elliptic curve cryptography.

UNIT IV INTEGRITY AND AUTHENTICATION ALGORITHMS 9

Authentication requirement – Authentication function – MAC – Hash function – Security of hash
function: HMAC, CMAC – SHA – Digital signature and authentication protocols – DSS – Schnorr
Digital Signature Scheme – ElGamal cryptosystem – Entity Authentication: Biometrics, Passwords,
Challenge Response protocols – Authentication applications – Kerberos
MUTUAL TRUST: Key management and distribution – Symmetric key distribution using symmetric
and asymmetric encryption – Distribution of public keys – X.509 Certificates.

UNIT V CYBER CRIMES AND CYBER SECURITY 9

Cyber Crime and Information Security – classifications of Cyber Crimes – Tools and Methods –
Password Cracking, Keyloggers, Spywares, SQL Injection – Network Access Control – Cloud
Security – Web Security – Wireless Security

TOTAL:45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the fundamentals of networks security, security architecture, threats and
vulnerabilities
CO2: Apply the different cryptographic operations of symmetric cryptographic algorithms
CO3: Apply the different cryptographic operations of public key cryptography
CO4: Apply the various Authentication schemes to simulate different applications.
CO5: Understand various cyber crimes and cyber security.

TEXT BOOKS
1. William Stallings, "Cryptography and Network Security - Principles and Practice", Seventh
Edition, Pearson Education, 2017.
2. Nina Godbole, Sunit Belapure, “Cyber Security: Understanding Cyber crimes, Computer
Forensics and Legal Perspectives”, First Edition, Wiley India, 2011.

REFERENCES
1. Behrouz A. Ferouzan, Debdeep Mukhopadhyay, "Cryptography and Network Security", 3rd
Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2015.
2. Charles Pfleeger, Shari Pfleeger, Jonathan Margulies, "Security in Computing", Fifth Edition,
Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2015.

95
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 2 2 - - - 1 - - 1 2 3 3
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - 1 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - 1 3 3 3
4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - 1 3 3 3
5 3 2 3 2 3 - - - 3 - - 2 3 2 3
AVg. 3 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.8 - - - 2 - - 1.2 2.8 2.8 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CS3551 DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the computation and communication models of distributed systems
 To illustrate the issues of synchronization and collection of information in distributed systems
 To describe distributed mutual exclusion and distributed deadlock detection techniques
 To elucidate agreement protocols and fault tolerance mechanisms in distributed systems
 To explain the cloud computing models and the underlying concepts

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Introduction: Definition-Relation to Computer System Components – Motivation – Message -Passing
Systems versus Shared Memory Systems – Primitives for Distributed Communication –
Synchronous versus Asynchronous Executions – Design Issues and Challenges; A Model of
Distributed Computations: A Distributed Program – A Model of Distributed Executions – Models of
Communication Networks – Global State of a Distributed System.

UNIT II LOGICAL TIME AND GLOBAL STATE 10

Logical Time: Physical Clock Synchronization: NTP – A Framework for a System of Logical Clocks
– Scalar Time – Vector Time; Message Ordering and Group Communication: Message Ordering
Paradigms – Asynchronous Execution with Synchronous Communication – Synchronous Program
Order on Asynchronous System – Group Communication – Causal Order – Total Order; Global
State and Snapshot Recording Algorithms: Introduction – System Model and Definitions – Snapshot
Algorithms for FIFO Channels.

UNIT III DISTRIBUTED MUTEX AND DEADLOCK 10

Distributed Mutual exclusion Algorithms: Introduction – Preliminaries – Lamport’s algorithm – Ricart-
Agrawala’s Algorithm –– Token-Based Algorithms – Suzuki-Kasami’s Broadcast Algorithm;
Deadlock Detection in Distributed Systems: Introduction – System Model – Preliminaries – Models
of Deadlocks – Chandy-Misra-Haas Algorithm for the AND model and OR Model.

UNIT IV CONSENSUS AND RECOVERY 10

Consensus and Agreement Algorithms: Problem Definition – Overview of Results – Agreement in a
Failure-Free System(Synchronous and Asynchronous) – Agreement in Synchronous Systems with
Failures; Checkpointing and Rollback Recovery: Introduction – Background and Definitions – Issues
in Failure Recovery – Checkpoint-based Recovery – Coordinated Checkpointing Algorithm -
- Algorithm for Asynchronous Checkpointing and Recovery
96
UNIT V CLOUD COMPUTING 7
Definition of Cloud Computing – Characteristics of Cloud – Cloud Deployment Models – Cloud
Service Models – Driving Factors and Challenges of Cloud – Virtualization – Load Balancing –
Scalability and Elasticity – Replication – Monitoring – Cloud Services and Platforms: Compute
Services – Storage Services – Application Services

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the foundations of distributed systems (K2)
CO2: Solve synchronization and state consistency problems (K3)
CO3 Use resource sharing techniques in distributed systems (K3)
CO4: Apply working model of consensus and reliability of distributed systems (K3)
CO5: Explain the fundamentals of cloud computing (K2)
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Kshemkalyani Ajay D, Mukesh Singhal, “Distributed Computing: Principles, Algorithms and
Systems”, Cambridge Press, 2011.
2. Mukesh Singhal, Niranjan G Shivaratri, “Advanced Concepts in Operating systems”, Mc-
Graw Hill Publishers, 1994.

REFERENCES
1. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore, Time Kindberg, “Distributed Systems Concepts and
Design”, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
2. Pradeep L Sinha, “Distributed Operating Systems: Concepts and Design”, Prentice Hall of
India, 2007.
3. Tanenbaum A S, Van Steen M, “Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms”, Pearson
Education, 2007.
4. Liu M L, “Distributed Computing: Principles and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Nancy A Lynch, “Distributed Algorithms”, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, 2003.
6. Arshdeep Bagga, Vijay Madisetti, “ Cloud Computing: A Hands-On Approach”, Universities
Press, 2014.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 3 3 1 - - - 2 1 3 3 2 1 1
2 1 3 2 1 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 1 3 2
3 2 2 1 3 3 - - - 3 2 1 1 1 2 1
4 1 2 2 3 1 - - - 3 3 2 1 3 1 1
5 3 3 1 2 3 - - - 3 3 3 1 3 2 3
AVg. 1.8 2.4 1.8 2.4 2 - - - 2.6 2.2 2.2 1.6 2 1.8 1.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

97
CCS356 OBJECT ORIENTED SOFTWARE ENGINEERING LTPC
3 024
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand Software Engineering Lifecycle Models
 To Perform software requirements analysis
 To gain knowledge of the System Analysis and Design concepts using UML.
 To understand software testing and maintenance approaches
 To work on project management scheduling using DevOps

UNIT I SOFTWARE PROCESS AND AGILE DEVELOPMENT 9

Introduction to Software Engineering, Software Process, Perspective and Specialized Process
Models –Introduction to Agility-Agile process-Extreme programming-XP Process-Case Study.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ANALYSIS AND SPECIFICATION 9

Requirement analysis and specification – Requirements gathering and analysis – Software
Requirement Specification – Formal system specification – Finite State Machines – Petrinets –
Object modelling using UML – Use case Model – Class diagrams – Interaction diagrams – Activity
diagrams – State chart diagrams – Functional modelling – Data Flow Diagram- CASE TOOLS.

UNIT III SOFTWARE DESIGN 9

Software design – Design process – Design concepts – Coupling – Cohesion – Functional
independence – Design patterns – Model-view-controller – Publish-subscribe – Adapter – Command
– Strategy – Observer – Proxy – Facade – Architectural styles – Layered - Client Server - Tiered -
Pipe and filter- User interface design-Case Study.

UNIT IV SOFTWARE TESTING AND MAINTENANCE 9

Testing – Unit testing – Black box testing– White box testing – Integration and System testing–
Regression testing – Debugging - Program analysis – Symbolic execution – Model Checking-Case
Study

UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Software Project Management- Software Configuration Management - Project Scheduling- DevOps:
Motivation-Cloud as a platform-Operations- Deployment Pipeline:Overall Architecture Building and
Testing-Deployment- Tools- Case Study

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Compare various Software Development Lifecycle Models
CO2: Evaluate project management approaches as well as cost and schedule estimation
strategies.
CO3: Perform formal analysis on specifications.
CO4: Use UML diagrams for analysis and design.
CO5: Architect and design using architectural styles and design patterns, and test the system
45 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Identify a software system that needs to be developed.
2. Document the Software Requirements Specification (SRS) for the identified system.
3. Identify use cases and develop the Use Case model.
98
 4. Identify the conceptual classes and develop a Domain Model and also derive a Class
Diagram from that.
5. Using the identified scenarios, find the interaction between objects and represent them using
UML Sequence and Collaboration Diagrams
6. Draw relevant State Chart and Activity Diagrams for the same system.
7. Implement the system as per the detailed design
8. Test the software system for all the scenarios identified as per the usecase diagram
9. Improve the reusability and maintainability of the software system by applying appropriate
design patterns.
10. Implement the modified system and test it for various scenarios.

SUGGESTED DOMAINS FOR MINI-PROJECT:

1. Passport automation system.
2. Book bank
3. Exam registration
4. Stock maintenance system.
5. Online course reservation system
6. Airline/Railway reservation system
7. Software personnel management system
8. Credit card processing
9. e-book management system
10. Recruitment system
11. Foreign trading system
12. Conference management system
13. BPO management system
14. Library management system
15. Student information system
TOTAL:75 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bernd Bruegge and Allen H. Dutoit, “Object-Oriented Software Engineering: Using UML,
Patterns and Java”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
2. Roger S. Pressman, Object-Oriented Software Engineering: An Agile Unified Methodology,
First Edition, Mc Graw-Hill International Edition, 2014.

REFERENCES
1. Carlo Ghezzi, Mehdi Jazayeri, Dino Mandrioli, Fundamentals of Software Engineering, 2nd
edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2010.
2. Craig Larman, Applying UML and Patterns, 3rd ed, Pearson Education, 2005.
3. Len Bass, Ingo Weber and Liming Zhu, “DevOps: A Software Architect‘s Perspective”,
Pearson Education, 2016
4. Rajib Mall, Fundamentals of Software Engineering, 3rd edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
5. Stephen Schach, Object-Oriented and Classical Software Engineering, 8th ed, McGraw-Hill,
2010.

99
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 1 2 2 2 1
2 2 3 2 3 2 - - - 2 2 3 2 3 2 1
3 2 3 2 1 1 - - - 2 2 3 2 2 3 1
4 2 3 2 2 3 - - - 2 2 3 2 2 3 1
5 2 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 2
AVg. 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 1 2 2 2 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CS3691 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS AND IOT L T P C

3 0 2 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the internal architecture and programming of an embedded processor.
 To introduce interfacing I/O devices to the processor.
 To introduce the evolution of the Internet of Things (IoT).
 To build a small low-cost embedded and IoT system using Arduino/Raspberry Pi/ open
platform.
 To apply the concept of Internet of Things in real world scenario.

UNIT I 8-BIT EMBEDDED PROCESSOR 9

8-Bit Microcontroller – Architecture – Instruction Set and Programming – Programming Parallel Ports
– Timers and Serial Port – Interrupt Handling.

UNIT II EMBEDDED C PROGRAMMING 9

Memory And I/O Devices Interfacing – Programming Embedded Systems in C – Need For RTOS –
Multiple Tasks and Processes – Context Switching – Priority Based Scheduling Policies.

UNIT III IOT AND ARDUINO PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction to the Concept of IoT Devices – IoT Devices Versus
Computers – IoT Configurations – Basic Components – Introduction to Arduino – Types of Arduino
– Arduino Toolchain – Arduino Programming Structure – Sketches – Pins – Input/Output From Pins
Using Sketches – Introduction to Arduino Shields – Integration of Sensors and Actuators with
Arduino.

UNIT IV IOT COMMUNICATION AND OPEN PLATFORMS 9

IoT Communication Models and APIs – IoT Communication Protocols – Bluetooth – WiFi – ZigBee
– GPS – GSM modules – Open Platform (like Raspberry Pi) – Architecture – Programming –
Interfacing – Accessing GPIO Pins – Sending and Receiving Signals Using GPIO Pins – Connecting
to the Cloud.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS DEVELOPMENT 9

Complete Design of Embedded Systems – Development of IoT Applications – Home Automation –
Smart Agriculture – Smart Cities – Smart Healthcare.

45 PERIODS
100
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Write 8051 Assembly Language experiments using simulator.
2. Test data transfer between registers and memory.
3. Perform ALU operations.
4. Write Basic and arithmetic Programs Using Embedded C.
5. Introduction to Arduino platform and programming
6. Explore different communication methods with IoT devices (Zigbee, GSM, Bluetooth)
7. Introduction to Raspberry PI platform and python programming
8. Interfacing sensors with Raspberry PI
9. Communicate between Arduino and Raspberry PI using any wireless medium
10. Setup a cloud platform to log the data
11. Log Data using Raspberry PI and upload to the cloud platform
12. Design an IOT based system

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the architecture of embedded processors.
CO2: Write embedded C programs.
CO3: Design simple embedded applications.
CO4: Compare the communication models in IOT
CO5: Design IoT applications using Arduino/Raspberry Pi /open platform.
TOTAL :75 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin D. McKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller
and Embedded Systems”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2014
2. Robert Barton, Patrick Grossetete, David Hanes, Jerome Henry, Gonzalo Salgueiro, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of
Things”, CISCO Press, 2017.

REFERENCES
1. Michael J. Pont, “Embedded C”, Pearson Education, 2007.
2. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computer System
Design”, Elsevier, 2006.
3. Andrew N Sloss, D. Symes, C. Wright, “Arm System Developer's Guide”, Morgan Kauffman/
Elsevier, 2006.
4. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities
Press, 2015

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 - - - - 1 2 3 3 2 1 3
2 2 1 3 2 2 - - - 1 2 2 3 3 1 3
3 3 1 3 3 1 - - - 1 2 1 1 1 3 3
4 3 2 3 2 1 - - - 1 2 2 3 2 2 1
5 2 3 3 2 2 - - - 1 3 3 2 3 1 3
AVg. 2.6 2 3 2.4 1.5 - - - 1 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 1.6 2.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

101
CS3711 SUMMER INTERNSHIP LTPC
0 00 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to
 Get connected with reputed industry/ laboratory/academia / research institute
 Get practical knowledge on Product Development / Services and operations / Software
Design and Development / Testing / Analytics/ research/ startups/ professionalism / business
processes and insights / domain knowledge/ Industry Practices/ and other related aspects
and develop skills to solve related problems
 Develop technical, soft, team skills to cater to the needs of the industry / academia /
businesses / research / organizations in the core aspects of Automation, Digitalization

The students individually undergo training in reputed firms/ research institutes / laboratories for the
specified duration. After the completion of training, a detailed report should be submitted within ten
days from the commencement of next semester. The students will be evaluated as per the
Regulations.

No. of Weeks: 04

COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student will know about
CO1: Industry Practices, Processes,Techniques, technology, automation and other core
aspects of software industry
CO2: Analyze, Design solutions to complex business problems
CO3: Build and deploy solutions for target platform
CO4: Preparation of Technical reports and presentation.

CS3811 PROJECT WORK/ INTERNSHIP# L T P C

0 0 20 10
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To train the students
 For gaining domain knowledge, and technical skills to solve potential business / research
problems
 Gather requirements and Design suitable software solutions and evaluate
 alternatives
 To work in small teams and understand the processes and practices in the ‘industry.
 Implement, Test and deploy solutions for target platforms
 Preparing project reports and presentation

The students shall individually / or as group work on business/research domains and related
problems approved by the Department / organization that offered the internship / project.

The student can select any topic which is relevant to his/her specialization of the programme. The
student should continue the work on the selected topic as per the formulated methodology. At the
end of the semester, after completing the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor and review
102
committee, a detailed report which contains clear definition of the identified problem, detailed
literature review related to the area of work and methodology for carrying out the work, results and
discussion, conclusion and references should be prepared as per the format prescribed by the
University and submitted to the Head of the department. The students will be evaluated based on
the report and viva-voce examination by a panel of examiners as per the Regulations.

TOTAL: 300 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the project, the student will be able to
CO1: Gain Domain knowledge and technical skill set required for solving industry /
research problems
CO2: Provide solution architecture, module level designs, algorithms
CO3: Implement, test and deploy the solution for the target platform
CO4: Prepare detailed technical report, demonstrate and present the work

103
 VERTICALS

CCS346 EXPLORATORY DATA ANALYSIS LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To outline an overview of exploratory data analysis.
 To implement data visualization using Matplotlib.
 To perform univariate data exploration and analysis.
 To apply bivariate data exploration and analysis.
 To use Data exploration and visualization techniques for multivariate and time series data.

UNIT I EXPLORATORY DATA ANALYSIS 6

EDA fundamentals – Understanding data science – Significance of EDA – Making sense of data –
Comparing EDA with classical and Bayesian analysis – Software tools for EDA - Visual Aids for
EDA- Data transformation techniques-merging database, reshaping and pivoting, Transformation
techniques.

UNIT II EDA USING PYTHON 6

Data Manipulation using Pandas – Pandas Objects – Data Indexing and Selection – Operating on
Data – Handling Missing Data – Hierarchical Indexing – Combining datasets – Concat, Append,
Merge and Join – Aggregation and grouping – Pivot Tables – Vectorized String Operations.

UNIT III UNIVARIATE ANALYSIS 6

Introduction to Single variable: Distribution Variables - Numerical Summaries of Level and Spread -
Scaling and Standardizing – Inequality.

UNIT IV BIVARIATE ANALYSIS 6

Relationships between Two Variables - Percentage Tables - Analysing Contingency Tables -
Handling Several Batches - Scatterplots and Resistant Lines.

UNIT V MULTIVARIATE AND TIME SERIES ANALYSIS 6

Introducing a Third Variable - Causal Explanations - Three-Variable Contingency Tables and
Beyond – Fundamentals of TSA – Characteristics of time series data – Data Cleaning – Time-based
indexing – Visualizing – Grouping – Resampling.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Install the data Analysis and Visualization tool: R/ Python /Tableau Public/ Power BI.
2. Perform exploratory data analysis (EDA) with datasets like email data set. Export all your
emails as a dataset, import them inside a pandas data frame, visualize them and get different
insights from the data.
3. Working with Numpy arrays, Pandas data frames , Basic plots using Matplotlib.
4. Explore various variable and row filters in R for cleaning data. Apply various plot features in
R on sample data sets and visualize.
5. Perform Time Series Analysis and apply the various visualization techniques.
6. Perform Data Analysis and representation on a Map using various Map data sets with Mouse
Rollover effect, user interaction, etc..

104
 7. Build cartographic visualization for multiple datasets involving various countries of the world;
states and districts in India etc.
8. Perform EDA on Wine Quality Data Set.
9. Use a case study on a data set and apply the various EDA and visualization techniques and
present an analysis report.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the fundamentals of exploratory data analysis.
CO2: Implement the data visualization using Matplotlib.
CO3: Perform univariate data exploration and analysis.
CO4: Apply bivariate data exploration and analysis.
CO5: Use Data exploration and visualization techniques for multivariate and time series data.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Suresh Kumar Mukhiya, Usman Ahmed, “Hands-On Exploratory Data Analysis with Python”,
Packt Publishing, 2020. (Unit 1)
2. Jake Vander Plas, "Python Data Science Handbook: Essential Tools for Working with Data",
First Edition, O Reilly, 2017. (Unit 2)
3. Catherine Marsh, Jane Elliott, “Exploring Data: An Introduction to Data Analysis for Social
Scientists”, Wiley Publications, 2nd Edition, 2008. (Unit 3,4,5)

REFERENCES:
1. Eric Pimpler, Data Visualization and Exploration with R, GeoSpatial Training service, 2017.
2. Claus O. Wilke, “Fundamentals of Data Visualization”, O’reilly publications, 2019.
3. Matthew O. Ward, Georges Grinstein, Daniel Keim, “Interactive Data Visualization:
Foundations, Techniques, and Applications”, 2nd Edition, CRC press, 2015.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 2 2 3 2 3 3 2
2 2 2 2 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 2 1 2 3
3 2 3 2 2 3 - - - 2 2 2 1 2 3 1
4 2 2 2 2 3 - - - 3 2 2 1 2 2 2
5 2 2 3 2 1 - - - 1 2 2 1 2 2 3
AVg. 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.4 2.6 - - - 2.2 2 2.2 1.4 2 2.4 2.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS360 RECOMMENDER SYSTEMS LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the foundations of the recommender system.
 To learn the significance of machine learning and data mining algorithms for
Recommender systems
 To learn about collaborative filtering
 To make students design and implement a recommender system.

105
  To learn collaborative filtering.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Introduction and basic taxonomy of recommender systems - Traditional and non-personalized
Recommender Systems - Overview of data mining methods for recommender systems- similarity
measures- Dimensionality reduction – Singular Value Decomposition (SVD)

Suggested Activities:

 Practical learning – Implement Data similarity measures.

 External Learning – Singular Value Decomposition (SVD) applications

Suggested Evaluation Methods:

 Quiz on Recommender systems.

 Quiz of python tools available for implementing Recommender systems

UNIT II CONTENT-BASED RECOMMENDATION SYSTEMS 6

High-level architecture of content-based systems - Item profiles, Representing item profiles,
Methods for learning user profiles, Similarity-based retrieval, and Classification algorithms.

Suggested Activities:
 Assignment on content-based recommendation systems
 Assignment of learning user profiles

Suggested Evaluation Methods:

 Quiz on similarity-based retrieval.
 Quiz of content-based filtering

UNIT III COLLABORATIVE FILTERING 6

A systematic approach, Nearest-neighbor collaborative filtering (CF), user-based and item-based
CF, components of neighborhood methods (rating normalization, similarity weight computation, and
neighborhood selection

Suggested Activities:
● Practical learning – Implement collaborative filtering concepts
● Assignment of security aspects of recommender systems
Suggested Evaluation Methods:
● Quiz on collaborative filtering
● Seminar on security measures of recommender systems

UNIT IV ATTACK-RESISTANT RECOMMENDER SYSTEMS 6

Introduction – Types of Attacks – Detecting attacks on recommender systems – Individual attack –
Group attack – Strategies for robust recommender design - Robust recommendation algorithms.

Suggested Activities:
● Group Discussion on attacks and their mitigation
● Study of the impact of group attacks
106
 ● External Learning – Use of CAPTCHAs

Suggested Evaluation Methods:

● Quiz on attacks on recommender systems
● Seminar on preventing attacks using the CAPTCHAs

UNIT V EVALUATING RECOMMENDER SYSTEMS 6

Evaluating Paradigms – User Studies – Online and Offline evaluation – Goals of evaluation design
– Design Issues – Accuracy metrics – Limitations of Evaluation measures

Suggested Activities:
● Group Discussion on goals of evaluation design
● Study of accuracy metrics

Suggested Evaluation Methods:

● Quiz on evaluation design
● Problems on accuracy measures 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES 30 PERIODS
1. Implement Data similarity measures using Python
2. Implement dimension reduction techniques for recommender systems
3. Implement user profile learning
4. Implement content-based recommendation systems
5. Implement collaborative filter techniques
6. Create an attack for tampering with recommender systems
7. Implement accuracy metrics like Receiver Operated Characteristic curves
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Understand the basic concepts of recommender systems.
CO2:Implement machine-learning and data-mining algorithms in recommender systems data sets.
CO3:Implementation of Collaborative Filtering in carrying out performance evaluation of
recommender systems based on various metrics.
CO4:Design and implement a simple recommender system.
CO5:Learn about advanced topics of recommender systems.
CO6:Learn about advanced topics of recommender systems applications

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Charu C. Aggarwal, Recommender Systems: The Textbook, Springer, 2016.
2. Dietmar Jannach , Markus Zanker , Alexander Felfernig and Gerhard Friedrich ,
Recommender Systems: An Introduction, Cambridge University Press (2011), 1st ed.
3. Francesco Ricci , Lior Rokach , Bracha Shapira , Recommender Sytems Handbook, 1st ed,
Springer (2011),
4. Jure Leskovec, Anand Rajaraman, Jeffrey David Ullman, Mining of massive datasets, 3 rd
edition, Cambridge University Press, 2020.

107
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 1 - - - 1 - - 1 - - -
2 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -
3 2 3 1 - 1 - - - 2 - - - - - -
4 3 2 2 2 1 - - - 2 - - 2 - - -
5 1 1 - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -
6 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -
AVg 1.83 2 0.83 1.16 1 - - - 0.83 - - 1 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS355 NEURAL NETWORKS AND DEEP LEARNING L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics in deep neural networks
 To understand the basics of associative memory and unsupervised learning networks
 To apply CNN architectures of deep neural networks
 To analyze the key computations underlying deep learning, then use them to build and train
deep neural networks for various tasks.
 To apply autoencoders and generative models for suitable applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Neural Networks-Application Scope of Neural Networks-Artificial Neural Network: An Introduction-
Evolution of Neural Networks-Basic Models of Artificial Neural Network- Important Terminologies of
ANNs-Supervised Learning Network.

UNIT II ASSOCIATIVE MEMORY AND UNSUPERVISED LEARNING NETWORKS 6

Training Algorithms for Pattern Association-Autoassociative Memory Network-Heteroassociative
Memory Network-Bidirectional Associative Memory (BAM)-Hopfield Networks-Iterative
Autoassociative Memory Networks-Temporal Associative Memory Network-Fixed Weight
Competitive Nets-Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps-Learning Vector Quantization-Counter
propagation Networks-Adaptive Resonance Theory Network.

UNIT III THIRD-GENERATION NEURAL NETWORKS 6

Spiking Neural Networks-Convolutional Neural Networks-Deep Learning Neural Networks-Extreme
Learning Machine Model-Convolutional Neural Networks: The Convolution Operation – Motivation –
Pooling – Variants of the basic Convolution Function – Structured Outputs – Data Types – Efficient
Convolution Algorithms – Neuroscientific Basis – Applications: Computer Vision, Image Generation,
Image Compression.

UNIT IV DEEP FEEDFORWARD NETWORKS 6

History of Deep Learning- A Probabilistic Theory of Deep Learning- Gradient Learning – Chain Rule
and Backpropagation - Regularization: Dataset Augmentation – Noise Robustness -Early Stopping,
Bagging and Dropout - batch normalization- VC Dimension and Neural Nets.
108
UNIT V RECURRENT NEURAL NETWORKS 6
Recurrent Neural Networks: Introduction – Recursive Neural Networks – Bidirectional RNNs – Deep
Recurrent Networks – Applications: Image Generation, Image Compression, Natural Language
Processing. Complete Auto encoder, Regularized Autoencoder, Stochastic Encoders and Decoders,
Contractive Encoders.

30 PERIODS
LAB EXPERIMENTS: 30 PERIODS
1. Implement simple vector addition in TensorFlow.
2. Implement a regression model in Keras.
3. Implement a perceptron in TensorFlow/Keras Environment.
4. Implement a Feed-Forward Network in TensorFlow/Keras.
5. Implement an Image Classifier using CNN in TensorFlow/Keras.
6. Improve the Deep learning model by fine tuning hyper parameters.
7. Implement a Transfer Learning concept in Image Classification.
8. Using a pre trained model on Keras for Transfer Learning
9. Perform Sentiment Analysis using RNN
10. Implement an LSTM based Autoencoder in TensorFlow/Keras.
11. Image generation using GAN
Additional Experiments:
12. Train a Deep learning model to classify a given image using pre trained model
13. Recommendation system from sales data using Deep Learning
14. Implement Object Detection using CNN
15. Implement any simple Reinforcement Algorithm for an NLP problem
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Apply Convolution Neural Network for image processing.
CO2: Understand the basics of associative memory and unsupervised learning networks.
CO3: Apply CNN and its variants for suitable applications.
CO4: Analyze the key computations underlying deep learning and use them to build and train deep
neural networks for various tasks.
CO5: Apply autoencoders and generative models for suitable applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning”, MIT Press, 2016.
2. Francois Chollet, “Deep Learning with Python”, Second Edition, Manning Publications,
2021.

REFERENCES:
1. Aurélien Géron, “Hands-On Machine Learning with Scikit-Learn and TensorFlow”, Oreilly,
2018.
2. Josh Patterson, Adam Gibson, “Deep Learning: A Practitioner’s Approach”, O’Reilly Media,
2017.
109
 3. Charu C. Aggarwal, “Neural Networks and Deep Learning: A Textbook”, Springer
International Publishing, 1st Edition, 2018.
4. Learn Keras for Deep Neural Networks, Jojo Moolayil, Apress,2018
5. Deep Learning Projects Using TensorFlow 2, Vinita Silaparasetty, Apress, 2020
6. Deep Learning with Python, FRANÇOIS CHOLLET, MANNING SHELTER ISLAND,2017.
7. S Rajasekaran, G A Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, FuzzyLogic and Genetic
Algorithm, Synthesis and Applications”, PHI Learning, 2017.
8. Pro Deep Learning with TensorFlow, Santanu Pattanayak, Apress,2017
9. James A Freeman, David M S Kapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications, and
Programming Techniques”, Addison Wesley, 2003.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 2 3 1 - - 2 1 - - 2 2 1
2 3 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 2 - 1 -
3 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - 2 1 - - 2 2 1
4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - 2 3 2 2 2
5 1 1 3 2 3 - - - 2 - - - 1 1 -
AVg. 2.6 2 2.8 2.2 2.4 0.4 0 0 1.6 0.6 0.8 1 1.4 1.6 0.8
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS369 TEXT AND SPEECH ANALYSIS L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand natural language processing basics
 Apply classification algorithms to text documents
 Build question-answering and dialogue systems
 Develop a speech recognition system
 Develop a speech synthesizer

UNIT I NATURAL LANGUAGE BASICS 6

Foundations of natural language processing – Language Syntax and Structure- Text Preprocessing
and Wrangling – Text tokenization – Stemming – Lemmatization – Removing stop-words – Feature
Engineering for Text representation – Bag of Words model- Bag of N-Grams model – TF-IDF model

Suggested Activities
● Flipped classroom on NLP
● Implementation of Text Preprocessing using NLTK
● Implementation of TF-IDF models

Suggested Evaluation Methods

 Quiz on NLP Basics
 Demonstration of Programs

110
UNIT II TEXT CLASSIFICATION 6
Vector Semantics and Embeddings -Word Embeddings - Word2Vec model – Glove model –
FastText model – Overview of Deep Learning models – RNN – Transformers – Overview of Text
summarization and Topic Models

Suggested Activities
 Flipped classroom on Feature extraction of documents
 Implementation of SVM models for text classification
 External learning: Text summarization and Topic models

Suggested Evaluation Methods

 Assignment on above topics
 Quiz on RNN, Transformers
 Implementing NLP with RNN and Transformers

UNIT III QUESTION ANSWERING AND DIALOGUE SYSTEMS 9

Information retrieval – IR-based question answering – knowledge-based question answering –
language models for QA – classic QA models – chatbots – Design of dialogue systems -–
evaluating dialogue systems

Suggested Activities:
 Flipped classroom on language models for QA
 Developing a knowledge-based question-answering system
 Classic QA model development

Suggested Evaluation Methods

 Assignment on the above topics
 Quiz on knowledge-based question answering system
 Development of simple chatbots

UNIT IV TEXT-TO-SPEECH SYNTHESIS 6

Overview. Text normalization. Letter-to-sound. Prosody, Evaluation. Signal processing -
Concatenative and parametric approaches, WaveNet and other deep learning-based TTS
systems

Suggested Activities:
 Flipped classroom on Speech signal processing
 Exploring Text normalization
 Data collection
 Implementation of TTS systems
Suggested Evaluation Methods
 Assignment on the above topics
 Quiz on wavenet, deep learning-based TTS systems
 Finding accuracy with different TTS systems

UNIT V AUTOMATIC SPEECH RECOGNITION 6

Speech recognition: Acoustic modelling – Feature Extraction - HMM, HMM-DNN systems

Suggested Activities:
 Flipped classroom on Speech recognition.
111
  Exploring Feature extraction

Suggested Evaluation Methods

 Assignment on the above topics
 Quiz on acoustic modelling
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES 30 PERIODS
1. Create Regular expressions in Python for detecting word patterns and tokenizing text
2. Getting started with Python and NLTK - Searching Text, Counting Vocabulary, Frequency
Distribution, Collocations, Bigrams
3. Accessing Text Corpora using NLTK in Python
4. Write a function that finds the 50 most frequently occurring words of a text that are not stop
words.
5. Implement the Word2Vec model
6. Use a transformer for implementing classification
7. Design a chatbot with a simple dialog system
8. Convert text to speech and find accuracy
9. Design a speech recognition system and find the error rate
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1:Explain existing and emerging deep learning architectures for text and speech processing
CO2:Apply deep learning techniques for NLP tasks, language modelling and machine translation
CO3:Explain coreference and coherence for text processing
CO4:Build question-answering systems, chatbots and dialogue systems
CO5:Apply deep learning models for building speech recognition and text-to-speech systems

TEXTBOOK
1. Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin, “Speech and Language Processing: An Introduction
to Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics, and Speech Recognition”,
Third Edition, 2022.
REFERENCES:
1. Dipanjan Sarkar, “Text Analytics with Python: A Practical Real-World approach to Gaining
Actionable insights from your data”, APress,2018.
2. Tanveer Siddiqui, Tiwary U S, “Natural Language Processing and Information Retrieval”,
Oxford University Press, 2008.
3. Lawrence Rabiner, Biing-Hwang Juang, B. Yegnanarayana, “Fundamentals of Speech
Recognition” 1st Edition, Pearson, 2009.
4. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein, and Edward Loper, “Natural language processing with Python”,
O’REILLY.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 3 - - - 1 2 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 1 2 1 3 - - - 2 2 1 3 3 2 1
3 2 2 1 3 1 - - - 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
4 2 1 1 1 2 - - - 2 1 2 2 3 1 1
112
 5 1 3 2 2 1 - - - 3 2 1 1 2 3 1
AVg. 2.2 1.8 1.8 1.6 2 - - - 2.2 2 1.2 2 2.4 2 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCW331 BUSINESS ANALYTICS L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the Analytics Life Cycle.
 To comprehend the process of acquiring Business Intelligence
 To understand various types of analytics for Business Forecasting
 To model the supply chain management for Analytics.
 To apply analytics for different functions of a business

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ANALYTICS 6

Analytics and Data Science – Analytics Life Cycle – Types of Analytics – Business Problem
Definition – Data Collection – Data Preparation – Hypothesis Generation – Modeling – Validation
and Evaluation – Interpretation – Deployment and Iteration

UNIT II BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE 6

Data Warehouses and Data Mart - Knowledge Management –Types of Decisions - Decision Making
Process - Decision Support Systems – Business Intelligence –OLAP – Analytic functions

UNIT III BUSINESS FORECASTING 6

Introduction to Business Forecasting and Predictive analytics - Logic and Data Driven Models –Data
Mining and Predictive Analysis Modelling –Machine Learning for Predictive analytics.

UNIT IV HR & SUPPLY CHAIN ANALYTICS 6

Human Resources – Planning and Recruitment – Training and Development - Supply chain network
- Planning Demand, Inventory and Supply – Logistics – Analytics applications in HR & Supply Chain
- Applying HR Analytics to make a prediction of the demand for hourly employees for a year.

UNIT V MARKETING & SALES ANALYTICS 6

Marketing Strategy, Marketing Mix, Customer Behaviour –selling Process – Sales Planning –
Analytics applications in Marketing and Sales - predictive analytics for customers' behaviour in
marketing and sales.

30 PERIODS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Use MS-Excel and Power-BI to perform the following experiments using a Business data set, and
make presentations.
Students may be encouraged to bring their own real-time socially relevant data set.

I Cycle – MS Excel
1. Explore the features of Ms-Excel.
2. (i) Get the input from user and perform numerical operations (MAX, MIN, AVG, SUM,
SQRT, ROUND)
ii) Perform data import/export operations for different file formats.

113
 3. Perform statistical operations - Mean, Median, Mode and Standard deviation, Variance,
Skewness, Kurtosis
4. Perform Z-test, T-test & ANOVA
5. Perform data pre-processing operations i) Handling Missing data ii) Normalization
6. Perform dimensionality reduction operation using PCA, KPCA & SVD
7. Perform bivariate and multivariate analysis on the dataset.
8. Apply and explore various plotting functions on the data set.

II Cycle – Power BI Desktop

9. Explore the features of Power BI Desktop
10. Prepare & Load data
11. Develop the data model
12. Perform DAX calculations
13. Design a report
14. Create a dashboard and perform data analysis
15. Presentation of a case study
30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the real world business problems and model with analytical solutions.
CO2: Identify the business processes for extracting Business Intelligence
CO3 : Apply predictive analytics for business fore-casting
CO4: Apply analytics for supply chain and logistics management
CO5: Use analytics for marketing and sales.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. R. Evans James, Business Analytics, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 2017
2. R N Prasad, Seema Acharya, Fundamentals of Business Analytics, 2nd Edition, Wiley,
2016
3. Philip Kotler and Kevin Keller, Marketing Management, 15th edition, PHI, 2016
4. VSP RAO, Human Resource Management, 3rd Edition, Excel Books, 2010.
5. Mahadevan B, “Operations Management -Theory and Practice”,3rd Edition,
Pearson Education,2018.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 3 1 1 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
2 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 2 2 3 1 2
3 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 1 1 3 3 1 2
4 2 1 1 2 2 - - - 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
5 2 3 2 3 2 - - - 3 3 1 3 3 1 1
AVg. 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2 - - - 2.2 2.2 1.4 2 2.6 1.6 1.4
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

114
CCS349 IMAGE AND VIDEO ANALYTICS L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of image processing techniques for computer vision.
 To learn the techniques used for image pre-processing.
 To discuss the various object detection techniques.
 To understand the various Object recognition mechanisms.
 To elaborate on the video analytics techniques.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Computer Vision – Image representation and image analysis tasks - Image representations –
digitization – properties – color images – Data structures for Image Analysis - Levels of image data
representation - Traditional and Hierarchical image data structures.

UNIT II IMAGE PRE-PROCESSING 6

Local pre-processing - Image smoothing - Edge detectors - Zero-crossings of the second derivative
- Scale in image processing - Canny edge detection - Parametric edge models - Edges in multi-
speralct images - Local pre-processing in the frequency domain - Line detection by local pre-
processing operators - Image restoration.

UNIT III OBJECT DETECTION USING MACHINE LEARNING 6

Object detection– Object detection methods – Deep Learning framework for Object detection–
bounding box approach-Intersection over Union (IoU) –Deep Learning Architectures-R-CNN-Faster
R-CNN-You Only Look Once(YOLO)-Salient features-Loss Functions-YOLO architectures

UNIT IV FACE RECOGNITION AND GESTURE RECOGNITION 6

Face Recognition-Introduction-Applications of Face Recognition-Process of Face Recognition-
DeepFace solution by Facebook-FaceNet for Face Recognition- Implementation using FaceNet-
Gesture Recognition.
UNIT V VIDEO ANALYTICS 6
Video Processing – use cases of video analytics-Vanishing Gradient and exploding gradient problem-
RestNet architecture-RestNet and skip connections-Inception Network-GoogleNet architecture-
Improvement in Inception v2-Video analytics-RestNet and Inception v3.

30 PERIODS
LIST OF EXERCISES 30 PERIODS

1. Write a program that computes the T-pyramid of an image.

2. Write a program that derives the quad tree representation of an image using the homogeneity
criterion of equal intensity
3. Develop programs for the following geometric transforms: (a) Rotation (b) Change of scale
(c) Skewing (d) Affine transform calculated from three pairs of corresponding points (e)
Bilinear transform calculated from four pairs of corresponding points.
4. Develop a program to implement Object Detection and Recognition
5. Develop a program for motion analysis using moving edges, and apply it to your image
sequences.
6. Develop a program for Facial Detection and Recognition
7. Write a program for event detection in video surveillance system

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
115
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basics of image processing techniques for computer vision and video analysis.
CO2: Explain the techniques used for image pre-processing.
CO3: Develop various object detection techniques.
CO4: Understand the various face recognition mechanisms.
CO5: Elaborate on deep learning-based video analytics.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine
Vision”, 4nd edition, Thomson Learning, 2013.
2. Vaibhav Verdhan,(2021, Computer Vision Using Deep Learning Neural Network
Architectures with Python and Keras,Apress 2021(UNIT-III,IV and V)
REFERENCES
1. Richard Szeliski, “Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications”, Springer Verlag London
2. Limited,2011.
3. Caifeng Shan, FatihPorikli, Tao Xiang, Shaogang Gong, “Video Analytics for Business
Intelligence”, Springer, 2012.
4. D. A. Forsyth, J. Ponce, “Computer Vision: A Modern Approach”, Pearson Education, 2003.
5. E. R. Davies, (2012), “Computer & Machine Vision”, Fourth Edition, Academic Press.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 2 2 - - - 3 3 2 1 2 1 3
2 2 2 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
3 1 2 2 2 3 - - - 1 2 1 2 1 1 3
4 1 2 3 2 3 - - - 2 2 2 3 2 2 2
5 3 2 1 3 2 - - - 2 1 1 3 3 2 1
AVg. 2 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.6 - - - 2.2 2 1.4 2 2 1.6 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS338 COMPUTER VISION LT P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the fundamental concepts related to Image formation and processing.
 To learn feature detection, matching and detection
 To become familiar with feature based alignment and motion estimation
 To develop skills on 3D reconstruction
 To understand image based rendering and recognition

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO IMAGE FORMATION AND PROCESSING 6

Computer Vision - Geometric primitives and transformations - Photometric image formation - The
digital camera - Point operators - Linear filtering - More neighborhood operators - Fourier transforms
- Pyramids and wavelets - Geometric transformations - Global optimization.

116
UNIT II FEATURE DETECTION, MATCHING AND SEGMENTATION 6
Points and patches - Edges - Lines - Segmentation - Active contours - Split and merge - Mean shift
and mode finding - Normalized cuts - Graph cuts and energy-based methods.

UNIT III FEATURE-BASED ALIGNMENT & MOTION ESTIMATION 6

2D and 3D feature-based alignment - Pose estimation - Geometric intrinsic calibration - Triangulation
- Two-frame structure from motion - Factorization - Bundle adjustment - Constrained structure and
motion - Translational alignment - Parametric motion - Spline-based motion - Optical flow - Layered
motion.

UNIT IV 3D RECONSTRUCTION 6
Shape from X - Active rangefinding - Surface representations - Point-based representations-
Volumetric representations - Model-based reconstruction - Recovering texture maps and albedosos.

UNIT V IMAGE-BASED RENDERING AND RECOGNITION 6

View interpolation Layered depth images - Light fields and Lumigraphs - Environment mattes -
Video-based rendering-Object detection - Face recognition - Instance recognition - Category
recognition - Context and scene understanding- Recognition databases and test sets.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS:
Software needed:
OpenCV computer vision Library for OpenCV in Python / PyCharm or C++ / Visual Studio or or
equivalent

 OpenCV Installation and working with Python

 Basic Image Processing - loading images, Cropping, Resizing, Thresholding, Contour
analysis, Bolb detection
 Image Annotation – Drawing lines, text circle, rectangle, ellipse on images
 Image Enhancement - Understanding Color spaces, color space conversion, Histogram
equialization, Convolution, Image smoothing, Gradients, Edge Detection
 Image Features and Image Alignment – Image transforms – Fourier, Hough, Extract ORB
Image features, Feature matching, cloning, Feature matching based image alignment
 Image segmentation using Graphcut / Grabcut
 Camera Calibration with circular grid
 Pose Estimation
 3D Reconstruction – Creating Depth map from stereo images
 Object Detection and Tracking using Kalman Filter, Camshift

1. [Link]
2. [Link]

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

117
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1:To understand basic knowledge, theories and methods in image processing and computer
vision.
CO2:To implement basic and some advanced image processing techniques in OpenCV.
CO3:To apply 2D a feature-based based image alignment, segmentation and motion estimations.
CO4:To apply 3D image reconstruction techniques
CO5:To design and develop innovative image processing and computer vision applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Richard Szeliski, “Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications”, Springer- Texts in
Computer Science, Second Edition, 2022.
2. Computer Vision: A Modern Approach, D. A. Forsyth, J. Ponce, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Richard Hartley and Andrew Zisserman, Multiple View Geometry in Computer Vision,
Second Edition, Cambridge University Press, March 2004.
2. Christopher M. Bishop; Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Springer, 2006
3. E. R. Davies, Computer and Machine Vision, Fourth Edition, Academic Press, 2012.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 1 3 2 2 1 1
2 3 3 3 2 3 - 1 - 2 1 2 2 3 1 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - 1 1 2 2 3 2 2
4 2 3 3 2 3 - - - 2 1 2 3 2 2 3
5 2 3 3 2 2 2 - - 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
AVg. 2.6 2.6 2.4 1.8 2.4 0.4 0.25 0 2 1 2.2 2.4 2.6 1.8 2.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS334 BIG DATA ANALYTICS L T PC

2 0 23
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand big data.
 To learn and use NoSQL big data management.
 To learn mapreduce analytics using Hadoop and related tools.
 To work with map reduce applications
 To understand the usage of Hadoop related tools for Big Data Analytics

UNIT I UNDERSTANDING BIG DATA 5

Introduction to big data – convergence of key trends – unstructured data – industry examples of big
data – web analytics – big data applications– big data technologies – introduction to Hadoop – open

118
source technologies – cloud and big data – mobile business intelligence – Crowd sourcing analytics
– inter and trans firewall analytics.

UNIT II NOSQL DATA MANAGEMENT 7

Introduction to NoSQL – aggregate data models – key-value and document data models –
relationships – graph databases – schemaless databases – materialized views – distribution models
– master-slave replication – consistency - Cassandra – Cassandra data model – Cassandra
examples – Cassandra clients

UNIT III MAP REDUCE APPLICATIONS 6

MapReduce workflows – unit tests with MRUnit – test data and local tests – anatomy of MapReduce
job run – classic Map-reduce – YARN – failures in classic Map-reduce and YARN – job scheduling
– shuffle and sort – task execution – MapReduce types – input formats – output formats.

UNIT IV BASICS OF HADOOP 6

Data format – analyzing data with Hadoop – scaling out – Hadoop streaming – Hadoop pipes –
design of Hadoop distributed file system (HDFS) – HDFS concepts – Java interface – data flow –
Hadoop I/O – data integrity – compression – serialization – Avro – file-based data structures -
Cassandra – Hadoop integration.

UNIT V HADOOP RELATED TOOLS 6

Hbase – data model and implementations – Hbase clients – Hbase examples – praxis.
Pig – Grunt – pig data model – Pig Latin – developing and testing Pig Latin scripts.
Hive – data types and file formats – HiveQL data definition – HiveQL data manipulation – HiveQL
queries.
30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to:
CO1:Describe big data and use cases from selected business domains.
CO2:Explain NoSQL big data management.
CO3:Install, configure, and run Hadoop and HDFS.
CO4:Perform map-reduce analytics using Hadoop.
CO5:Use Hadoop-related tools such as HBase, Cassandra, Pig, and Hive for big data analytics.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 30 PERIODS

1. Downloading and installing Hadoop; Understanding different Hadoop modes. Startup scripts,
Configuration files.
2. Hadoop Implementation of file management tasks, such as Adding files and directories,
retrieving files and Deleting files
3. Implement of Matrix Multiplication with Hadoop Map Reduce
4. Run a basic Word Count Map Reduce program to understand Map Reduce Paradigm.
5. Installation of Hive along with practice examples.
7. Installation of HBase, Installing thrift along with Practice examples
8. Practice importing and exporting data from various databases.

Software Requirements:
Cassandra, Hadoop, Java, Pig, Hive and HBase.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
119
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Michael Minelli, Michelle Chambers, and AmbigaDhiraj, "Big Data, Big Analytics:
Emerging Business Intelligence and Analytic Trends for Today's Businesses", Wiley,
2013.
2. Eric Sammer, "Hadoop Operations", O'Reilley, 2012.
3. Sadalage, Pramod J. “NoSQL distilled”, 2013

REFERENCES:
1. E. Capriolo, D. Wampler, and J. Rutherglen, "Programming Hive", O'Reilley, 2012.
2. Lars George, "HBase: The Definitive Guide", O'Reilley, 2011.
3. Eben Hewitt, "Cassandra: The Definitive Guide", O'Reilley, 2010.
4. Alan Gates, "Programming Pig", O'Reilley, 2011.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 2 3 1 1 3 3
2 3 3 2 3 2 - - - 2 2 3 3 2 3 2
3 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 3 3
4 2 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 1 3 2 3 2 3
AVg. 2.8 3 2.8 2.8 2.8 - - - 2.2 1.8 2.6 2 2.2 2.8 2.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS375 WEB TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand different Internet Technologies
 To learn java-specific web services architecture
 To Develop web applications using frameworks

UNIT I WEBSITE BASICS, HTML 5, CSS 3, WEB 2.0 7

Web Essentials: Clients, Servers and Communication – The Internet – World wide web – HTTP
Request Message – HTTP Response Message – Web Clients – Web Servers – HTML5 – Tables –
Lists – Image – HTML5 control elements – Drag and Drop – Audio – Video controls - CSS3 – Inline,
embedded and external style sheets – Rule cascading – Inheritance – Backgrounds – Border
Images – Colors – Shadows – Text – Transformations – Transitions – Animations. Bootstrap
Framework

UNIT II CLIENT SIDE PROGRAMMING 6

Java Script: An introduction to JavaScript–JavaScript DOM Model-Exception Handling-Validation-
Built-in objects-Event Handling- DHTML with JavaScript- JSON introduction – Syntax – Function
Files.

UNIT III SERVER SIDE PROGRAMMING 5

Servlets: Java Servlet Architecture- Servlet Life Cycle- Form GET and POST actions- Session
Handling- Understanding Cookies- DATABASE CONNECTIVITY: JDBC.

120
UNIT IV PHP and XML 6
An introduction to PHP: PHP- Using PHP- Variables- Program control- Built-in functions- Form
Validation. XML: Basic XML- Document Type Definition- XML Schema, XML Parsers and Validation,
XSL ,

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO ANGULAR and WEB APPLICATIONS FRAMEWORKS 6

Introduction to AngularJS, MVC Architecture, Understanding ng attributes, Expressions and data
binding, Conditional Directives, Style Directives, Controllers, Filters, Forms, Routers, Modules,
Services; Web Applications Frameworks and Tools – Firebase- Docker- Node JS- React- Django-
UI & UX.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Construct a basic website using HTML and Cascading Style Sheets
CO2: Build dynamic web page with validation using Java Script objects and by applying different
event handling mechanisms.
CO3: Develop server side programs using Servlets and JSP.
CO4: Construct simple web pages in PHP and to represent data in XML format.
CO5: Develop interactive web applications.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
List Of Experiments:
1. Create a web page with the following using HTML.
• To embed an image map in a web page.
• To fix the hot spots.
• Show all the related information when the hot spots are clicked.
2. Create a web page with all types of Cascading style sheets.
3. Client Side Scripts for Validating Web Form Controls using DHTML.
4. Installation of Apache Tomcat web server.
5. Write programs in Java using Servlets:
● To invoke servlets from HTML forms.
● Session Tracking.
6. Write programs in Java to create three-tier applications using JSP and Databases
● For conducting on-line examination.
● For displaying student mark list. Assume that student information is available in a database
which has been stored in a database server.
7. Programs using XML – Schema – XSLT/XSL.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Deitel and Deitel and Nieto, Internet and World Wide Web - How to Program, Prentice Hall, 5th
Edition, 2011.
2. Jeffrey C and Jackson, Web Technologies A Computer Science Perspective, Pearson
Education, 2011.
3. Angular 6 for Enterprise-Ready Web Applications, Doguhan Uluca, 1st edition, Packt
Publishing
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen Wynkoop and John Burke “Running a Perfect Website”, QUE, 2nd Edition,1999.
2. Chris Bates, Web Programming – Building Intranet Applications, 3rd Edition, Wiley
Publications, 2009.
121
 3. Gopalan N.P. and Akilandeswari J., “Web Technology”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
4. [Link], “Web Technologies”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
5. Angular: Up and Running: Learning Angular, Step by Step, Shyam Seshadri, 1st edition,
O′Reilly

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 1 3 3 1 3 2 3
2 2 2 2 1 2 - - - 2 2 1 3 2 2 2
3 1 1 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
4 2 3 3 1 2 - - - 3 1 2 2 2 2 2
5 1 2 3 2 2 - - - 2 1 3 1 1 1 2
AVg. 1.8 2 2.8 1.8 2.4 - - - 1.8 1.8 2 1.6 1.8 1.8 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS332 APP DEVELOPMENT L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn development of native applications with basic GUI Components
 To develop cross-platform applications with event handling
 To develop applications with location and data storage capabilities
 To develop web applications with database access

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF MOBILE & WEB APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 6

Basics of Web and Mobile application development, Native App, Hybrid App, Cross-platform App,
What is Progressive Web App, Responsive Web design,

UNIT II NATIVE APP DEVELOPMENT USING JAVA 6

Native Web App, Benefits of Native App, Scenarios to create Native App, Tools for creating Native
App, Cons of Native App, Popular Native App Dev elopment Frameworks, Java & Kotlin for
Android, Swift & Objective-C for iOS, Basics of React Native, Native Components, JSX, State, Props

UNIT III HYBRID APP DEVELOPMENT 6

Hybrid Web App, Benefits of Hybrid App, Criteria for creating Native App, Tools for creating
Hybrid App, Cons of Hybrid App, Popular Hybrid App Development Frameworks, Ionic, Apache
Cordova,

UNIT IV CROSS-PLATFORM APP DEVELOPMENT USING REACT-NATIVE 6

What is Cross-platform App, Benefits of Cross-platform App, Criteria for creating Cross-platform
App, Tools for creating Cross-platform App, Cons of Cross-platform App, Popular Cross-
platform App Development Frameworks, Flutter, Xamarin, React-Native, Basics of React Native,
Native Components, JSX, State, Props

UNIT V NON-FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF APP FRAMEWORKS 6

Comparison of different App frameworks, Build Performance, App Performance, Debugging
capabilities, Time to Market, Maintainability, Ease of Development, UI/UX, Reusability

122
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Develop Native applications with GUI Components.
CO2:Develop hybrid applications with basic event handling.
CO3: Implement cross-platform applications with location and data storage capabilities.
CO4: Implement cross platform applications with basic GUI and event handling.
CO5:Develop web applications with cloud database access.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Using react native, build a cross platform application for a BMI calculator.
2. Build a cross platform application for a simple expense manager which allows entering
expenses and income on each day and displays category wise weekly income and expense.
3. Develop a cross platform application to convert units from imperial system to metric system
( km to miles, kg to pounds etc.,)
4. Design and develop a cross platform application for day to day task (to-do) management.
5. Design an android application using Cordova for a user login screen with username,
password, reset button and a submit button. Also, include header image and a label. Use
layout managers.
6. Design and develop an android application using Apache Cordova to find and display the
current location of the user.
7. Write programs using Java to create Android application having Databases
● For a simple library application.
● For displaying books available, books lend, book reservation. Assume that student
information is available in a database which has been stored in a database server.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Head First Android Development, Dawn Griffiths, O’Reilly, 1st edition
2. Apache Cordova in Action, Raymond K. Camden, Manning. 2015
3. Full Stack React Native: Create beautiful mobile apps with JavaScript and React Native,
Anthony Accomazzo, Houssein Djirdeh, Sophia Shoemaker, Devin Abbott, FullStack
publishing
REFERENCES
1. Android Programming for Beginners, John Horton, Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition
2. Native Mobile Development by Shaun Lewis, Mike Dunn
3. Building Cross-Platform Mobile and Web Apps for Engineers and Scientists: An Active
Learning Approach, Pawan Lingras, Matt Triff, Rucha Lingras
4. Apache Cordova 4 Programming, John M Wargo, 2015
5. React Native Cookbook, Daniel Ward, Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 3 - - - 1 1 2 1 2 3 3
2 2 1 3 2 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 1
3 2 2 2 1 2 - - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
4 1 3 1 1 3 - - - 1 1 3 2 1 3 1
5 1 1 3 1 3 - - - 1 1 2 1 3 2 1
AVg. 1.6 1.8 2 1.4 2.6 - - - 1.4 1.2 2 1.6 2 2.2 1.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
123
CCS336 CLOUD SERVICES MANAGEMENT L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Introduce Cloud Service Management terminology, definition & concepts
 Compare and contrast cloud service management with traditional IT service management
 Identify strategies to reduce risk and eliminate issues associated with adoption of cloud
services
 Select appropriate structures for designing, deploying and running cloud-based services in
a business environment
 Illustrate the benefits and drive the adoption of cloud-based services to solve real world
problems

UNIT I CLOUD SERVICE MANAGEMENT FUNDAMENTALS 6

Cloud Ecosystem, The Essential Characteristics, Basics of Information Technology Service
Management and Cloud Service Management, Service Perspectives, Cloud Service Models, Cloud
Service Deployment Models

UNIT II CLOUD SERVICES STRATEGY 6

Cloud Strategy Fundamentals, Cloud Strategy Management Framework, Cloud Policy, Key Driver
for Adoption, Risk Management, IT Capacity and Utilization, Demand and Capacity matching,
Demand Queueing, Change Management, Cloud Service Architecture

UNIT III CLOUD SERVICE MANAGEMENT 6

Cloud Service Reference Model, Cloud Service LifeCycle, Basics of Cloud Service Design, Dealing
with Legacy Systems and Services, Benchmarking of Cloud Services, Cloud Service Capacity
Planning, Cloud Service Deployment and Migration, Cloud Marketplace, Cloud Service Operations
Management

UNIT IV CLOUD SERVICE ECONOMICS 6

Pricing models for Cloud Services, Freemium, Pay Per Reservation, Pay per User, Subscription
based Charging, Procurement of Cloud-based Services, Capex vs Opex Shift, Cloud service
Charging, Cloud Cost Models

UNIT V CLOUD SERVICE GOVERNANCE & VALUE 6

IT Governance Definition, Cloud Governance Definition, Cloud Governance Framework, Cloud
Governance Structure, Cloud Governance Considerations, Cloud Service Model Risk Matrix,
Understanding Value of Cloud Services, Measuring the value of Cloud Services, Balanced
Scorecard, Total Cost of Ownership

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Exhibit cloud-design skills to build and automate business solutions using cloud technologies.
CO2: Possess Strong theoretical foundation leading to excellence and excitement towards adoption
of cloud-based services
CO3: Solve the real world problems using Cloud services and technologies
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Create a Cloud Organization in AWS/Google Cloud/or any equivalent Open Source cloud
softwares like Openstack, Eucalyptus, OpenNebula with Role-based access control
124
 2. Create a Cost-model for a web application using various services and do Cost-benefit
analysis
3. Create alerts for usage of Cloud resources
4. Create Billing alerts for your Cloud Organization
5. Compare Cloud cost for a simple web application across AWS, Azure and GCP and suggest
the best one
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Cloud Service Management and Governance: Smart Service Management in Cloud Era by
Enamul Haque, Enel Publications
2. Cloud Computing: Concepts, Technology & Architecture by Thomas Erl, Ricardo Puttini,
Zaigham Mohammad 2013
3. Cloud Computing Design Patterns by Thomas Erl, Robert Cope, Amin Naserpour

REFERENCES
1. Economics of Cloud Computing by Praveen Ayyappa, LAP Lambert Academic Publishing
2. Mastering Cloud Computing Foundations and Applications Programming Rajkumar Buyya,
Christian Vechhiola, S. Thamarai Selvi

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 1 1 1 - - - 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 3 1 2 3 2 - - - 1 2 3 1 2 2 2
3 1 1 3 1 3 - - - 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
4 1 1 1 2 3 - - - 2 3 3 1 1 1 1
5 1 3 3 2 2 - - - 1 3 1 2 1 3 2
AVg. 1.8 1.8 2 1.8 2.2 - - - 1.8 2.4 2.2 1.4 1.8 1.8 1.8
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS370 UI AND UX DESIGN L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide a sound knowledge in UI & UX
 To understand the need for UI and UX
 To understand the various Research Methods used in Design
 To explore the various Tools used in UI & UX
 Creating a wireframe and prototype

UNIT I FOUNDATIONS OF DESIGN 6

UI vs. UX Design - Core Stages of Design Thinking - Divergent and Convergent Thinking -
Brainstorming and Game storming - Observational Empathy

UNIT II FOUNDATIONS OF UI DESIGN 6

Visual and UI Principles - UI Elements and Patterns - Interaction Behaviors and Principles –
Branding - Style Guides

125
UNIT III FOUNDATIONS OF UX DESIGN 6
Introduction to User Experience - Why You Should Care about User Experience - Understanding
User Experience - Defining the UX Design Process and its Methodology - Research in User
Experience Design - Tools and Method used for Research - User Needs and its Goals - Know about
Business Goals

UNIT IV WIREFRAMING, PROTOTYPING AND TESTING 6

Sketching Principles - Sketching Red Routes - Responsive Design – Wireframing - Creating
Wireflows - Building a Prototype - Building High-Fidelity Mockups - Designing Efficiently with Tools
- Interaction Patterns - Conducting Usability Tests - Other Evaluative User Research Methods -
Synthesizing Test Findings - Prototype Iteration

UNIT V RESEARCH, DESIGNING, IDEATING, & INFORMATION ARCHITECTURE 6

Identifying and Writing Problem Statements - Identifying Appropriate Research Methods - Creating
Personas - Solution Ideation - Creating User Stories - Creating Scenarios - Flow Diagrams - Flow
Mapping - Information Architecture
30 PERIODS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 30 PERIODS
1. Designing a Responsive layout for an societal application
2. Exploring various UI Interaction Patterns
3. Developing an interface with proper UI Style Guides
4. Developing Wireflow diagram for application using open source software
5. Exploring various open source collaborative interface Platform
6. Hands on Design Thinking Process for a new product
7. Brainstorming feature for proposed product
8. Defining the Look and Feel of the new Project
9. Create a Sample Pattern Library for that product (Mood board, Fonts, Colors based on
UI principles)
10. Identify a customer problem to solve
11. Conduct end-to-end user research - User research, creating personas, Ideation
process (User stories, Scenarios), Flow diagrams, Flow Mapping
12. Sketch, design with popular tool and build a prototype and perform usability testing and
identify improvements
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Build UI for user Applications
CO2:Evaluate UX design of any product or application
CO3:Demonstrate UX Skills in product development
CO4:Implement Sketching principles
CO5:Create Wireframe and Prototype
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joel Marsh, “UX for Beginners”, O’Reilly , 2022
2. Jon Yablonski, “Laws of UX using Psychology to Design Better Product & Services” O’Reilly
2021

126
REFERENCES
1. Jenifer Tidwell, Charles Brewer, Aynne Valencia, “Designing Interface” 3 rd Edition , O’Reilly
2020
2. Steve Schoger, Adam Wathan “Refactoring UI”, 2018
3. Steve Krug, “Don't Make Me Think, Revisited: A Commonsense Approach to Web &
Mobile”, Third Edition, 2015
4. [Link]
5. [Link]
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 3 1 - - - 3 3 2 1 3 3 1
2 2 3 1 3 2 - - - 1 2 2 2 1 2 2
3 1 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 3 1 2 1 3 3
4 1 2 3 3 1 - - - 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
5 1 2 3 2 1 - - - 2 1 1 1 3 2 2
AVg. 1.6 2.2 2.2 2.6 1.4 - - - 2.2 2.2 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.6 2.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS366 SOFTWARE TESTING AND AUTOMATION L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of software testing
 To learn how to do the testing and planning effectively
 To build test cases and execute them
 To focus on wide aspects of testing and understanding multiple facets of testing
 To get an insight about test automation and the tools used for test automation

UNIT I FOUNDATIONS OF SOFTWARE TESTING 6

Why do we test Software?, Black-Box Testing and White-Box Testing, Software Testing Life Cycle,
V-model of Software Testing, Program Correctness and Verification, Reliability versus Safety,
Failures, Errors and Faults (Defects), Software Testing Principles, Program Inspections, Stages of
Testing: Unit Testing, Integration Testing, System Testing

UNIT II TEST PLANNING 6

The Goal of Test Planning, High Level Expectations,Intergroup Responsibilities, Test Phases, Test
Strategy, Resource Requirements, Tester Assignments, Test Schedule, Test Cases, Bug Reporting,
Metrics and Statistics.

UNIT III TEST DESIGN AND EXECUTION 6

Test Objective Identification, Test Design Factors, Requirement identification, Testable
Requirements, Modeling a Test Design Process, Modeling Test Results, Boundary Value Testing,
Equivalence Class Testing, Path Testing, Data Flow Testing, Test Design Preparedness Metrics,
Test Case Design Effectiveness, Model-Driven Test Design, Test Procedures, Test Case
Organization and Tracking, Bug Reporting, Bug Life Cycle.

127
UNIT IV ADVANCED TESTING CONCEPTS 6
Performance Testing: Load Testing, Stress Testing, Volume Testing, Fail-Over Testing, Recovery
Testing, Configuration Testing, Compatibility Testing, Usability Testing, Testing the Documentation,
Security testing, Testing in the Agile Environment, Testing Web and Mobile Applications.

UNIT V TEST AUTOMATION AND TOOLS 6

Automated Software Testing, Automate Testing of Web Applications, Selenium: Introducing Web
Driver and Web Elements, Locating Web Elements, Actions on Web Elements, Different Web
Drivers, Understanding Web Driver Events, Testing: Understanding [Link], Adding Classes,
Packages, Methods to Test, Test Reports.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Develop the test plan for testing an e-commerce web/mobile application ([Link]).
2. Design the test cases for testing the e-commerce application
3. Test the e-commerce application and report the defects in it.
4. Develop the test plan and design the test cases for an inventory control system.
5. Execute the test cases against a client server or desktop application and identify the defects.
6. Test the performance of the e-commerce application.
7. Automate the testing of e-commerce applications using Selenium.
8. Integrate TestNG with the above test automation.
9. Mini Project:
a) Build a data-driven framework using Selenium and TestNG
b) Build Page object Model using Selenium and TestNG
c) Build BDD framework with Selenium, TestNG and Cucumber

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of software testing and the need for software testing
CO2: Design Test planning and different activities involved in test planning
CO3: Design effective test cases that can uncover critical defects in the application
CO4: Carry out advanced types of testing
CO5: Automate the software testing using Selenium and TestNG
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Yogesh Singh, “Software Testing”, Cambridge University Press, 2012
2. Unmesh Gundecha, Satya Avasarala, "Selenium WebDriver 3 Practical Guide" - Second
Edition 2018
REFERENCES
1. Glenford J. Myers, Corey Sandler, Tom Badgett, The Art of Software Testing, 3rd Edition,
2012, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Ron Patton, Software testing, 2nd Edition, 2006, Sams Publishing
3. Paul C. Jorgensen, Software Testing: A Craftsman’s Approach, Fourth Edition, 2014, Taylor
& Francis Group.
4. Carl Cocchiaro, Selenium Framework Design in Data-Driven Testing, 2018, Packt
Publishing.
5. Elfriede Dustin, Thom Garrett, Bernie Gaurf, Implementing Automated Software Testing,
2009, Pearson Education, Inc.
6. Satya Avasarala, Selenium WebDriver Practical Guide, 2014, Packt Publishing.
7. Varun Menon, TestNg Beginner's Guide, 2013, Packt Publishing.
128
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 2 - - - 1 1 3 2 3 2 3
2 2 3 1 1 1 - - - 2 2 1 2 1 2 3
3 2 2 1 3 1 - - - 1 3 1 2 2 3 2
4 2 1 3 2 1 - - - 1 1 1 2 3 1 2
5 2 2 1 3 1 - - - 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
AVg. 2.2 2.2 1.6 2 1.2 - - - 1.2 2 1.6 1.8 2.2 1.8 2.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS374 WEB APPLICATION SECURITY L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the fundamentals of web application security
 To focus on wide aspects of secure development and deployment of web applications
 To learn how to build secure APIs
 To learn the basics of vulnerability assessment and penetration testing
 To get an insight about Hacking techniques and Tools

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF WEB APPLICATION SECURITY 6

The history of Software Security-Recognizing Web Application Security Threats, Web Application
Security, Authentication and Authorization, Secure Socket layer, Transport layer Security, Session
Management-Input Validation

UNIT II SECURE DEVELOPMENT AND DEPLOYMENT 5

Web Applications Security - Security Testing, Security Incident Response Planning,The Microsoft
Security Development Lifecycle (SDL), OWASP Comprehensive Lightweight Application Security
Process (CLASP), The Software Assurance Maturity Model (SAMM)

UNIT III SECURE API DEVELOPMENT 6

API Security- Session Cookies, Token Based Authentication, Securing Natter APIs: Addressing
threats with Security Controls, Rate Limiting for Availability, Encryption, Audit logging, Securing
service-to-service APIs: API Keys , OAuth2, Securing Microservice APIs: Service Mesh, Locking
Down Network Connections, Securing Incoming Requests.

UNIT IV VULNERABILITY ASSESSMENT AND PENETRATION TESTING 6

Vulnerability Assessment Lifecycle, Vulnerability Assessment Tools: Cloud-based vulnerability
scanners, Host-based vulnerability scanners, Network-based vulnerability scanners, Database-
based vulnerability scanners, Types of Penetration Tests: External Testing, Web Application
Testing, Internal Penetration Testing, SSID or Wireless Testing, Mobile Application Testing.

UNIT V HACKING TECHNIQUES AND TOOLS 7

Social Engineering, Injection, Cross-Site Scripting(XSS), Broken Authentication and Session
Management, Cross-Site Request Forgery, Security Misconfiguration, Insecure Cryptographic

129
Storage, Failure to Restrict URL Access, Tools: Comodo, OpenVAS, Nexpose, Nikto, Burp Suite,
etc.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Install wireshark and explore the various protocols
a. Analyze the difference between HTTP vs HTTPS
b. Analyze the various security mechanisms embedded with different protocols.
2. Identify the vulnerabilities using OWASP ZAP tool
3. Create simple REST API using python for following operation
. GET
a. PUSH
b. POST
c. DELETE
4. Install Burp Suite to do following vulnerabilities:
. SQL injection
a. cross-site scripting (XSS)
5. Attack the website using Social Engineering method
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understanding the basic concepts of web application security and the need for it
CO2: Be acquainted with the process for secure development and deployment of web applications
CO3: Acquire the skill to design and develop Secure Web Applications that use Secure APIs
CO4: Be able to get the importance of carrying out vulnerability assessment and penetration testing
CO5: Acquire the skill to think like a hacker and to use hackers tool sets
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Andrew Hoffman, Web Application Security: Exploitation and Countermeasures for Modern
Web Applications, First Edition, 2020, O’Reilly Media, Inc.
2. Bryan Sullivan, Vincent Liu, Web Application Security: A Beginners Guide, 2012, The McGraw-
Hill Companies.
3. Neil Madden, API Security in Action, 2020, Manning Publications Co., NY, USA.

REFERENCES
1. Michael Cross, Developer’s Guide to Web Application Security, 2007, Syngress Publishing,
Inc.
2. Ravi Das and Greg Johnson, Testing and Securing Web Applications, 2021, Taylor & Francis
Group, LLC.
3. Prabath Siriwardena, Advanced API Security, 2020, Apress Media LLC, USA.
4. Malcom McDonald, Web Security for Developers, 2020, No Starch Press, Inc.
5. Allen Harper, Shon Harris, Jonathan Ness, Chris Eagle, Gideon Lenkey, and Terron Williams
Grey Hat Hacking: The Ethical Hacker’s Handbook, Third Edition, 2011, The McGraw-Hill
Companies.

130
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 2 2 1 3 - - - - - - 1 - - -
2 2 1 2 1 3 - - - - - - - - - -
3 1 1 1 2 3 - - - - - - 1 - - -
4 1 2 1 1 2 - - - - - - - - - -
5 1 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - - -
AVg. 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.4 2.6 - - - - - - 0.6 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS342 DEVOPS L T PC
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce DevOps terminology, definition & concepts
 To understand the different Version control tools like Git, Mercurial
 To understand the concepts of Continuous Integration/ Continuous Testing/ Continuous
Deployment)
 To understand Configuration management using Ansible
 Illustrate the benefits and drive the adoption of cloud-based Devops tools to solve real
world problems

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DEVOPS 6

Devops Essentials - Introduction To AWS, GCP, Azure - Version control systems: Git and Github.

UNIT II COMPILE AND BUILD USING MAVEN & GRADLE 6

Introduction, Installation of Maven, POM files, Maven Build lifecycle, Build phases(compile build,
test, package) Maven Profiles, Maven repositories(local, central, global),Maven plugins, Maven
create and build Artificats, Dependency management, Installation of Gradle, Understand build using
Gradle

UNIT III CONTINUOUS INTEGRATION USING JENKINS 6

Install & Configure Jenkins, Jenkins Architecture Overview, Creating a Jenkins Job, Configuring a
Jenkins job, Introduction to Plugins, Adding Plugins to Jenkins, Commonly used plugins (Git Plugin,
Parameter Plugin, HTML Publisher, Copy Artifact and Extended choice parameters). Configuring
Jenkins to work with java, Git and Maven, Creating a Jenkins Build and Jenkins workspace.

UNIT IV CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT USING ANSIBLE 6

Ansible Introduction, Installation, Ansible master/slave configuration, YAML basics, Ansible
modules, Ansible Inventory files, Ansible playbooks, Ansible Roles, adhoc commands in ansible

UNIT V BUILDING DEVOPS PIPELINES USING AZURE 6

Create Github Account, Create Repository, Create Azure Organization, Create a new pipeline, Build
a sample code, Modify [Link] file

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand different actions performed through Version control tools like Git.

131
 CO2: Perform Continuous Integration and Continuous Testing and Continuous Deployment
using Jenkins by building and automating test cases using Maven & Gradle.
CO3: Ability to Perform Automated Continuous Deployment
CO4: Ability to do configuration management using Ansible
CO5: Understand to leverage Cloud-based DevOps tools using Azure DevOps

30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Create Maven Build pipeline in Azure
2. Run regression tests using Maven Build pipeline in Azure
3. Install Jenkins in Cloud
4. Create CI pipeline using Jenkins
5. Create a CD pipeline in Jenkins and deploy in Cloud
6. Create an Ansible playbook for a simple web application infrastructure
7. Build a simple application using Gradle
8. Install Ansible and configure ansible roles and to write playbooks
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Roberto Vormittag, “A Practical Guide to Git and GitHub for Windows Users: From Beginner
to Expert in Easy Step-By-Step Exercises”, Second Edition, Kindle Edition, 2016.
2. Jason Cannon, “Linux for Beginners: An Introduction to the Linux Operating System and
Command Line”, Kindle Edition, 2014

REFERENCES
1. Hands-On Azure Devops: Cicd Implementation For Mobile, Hybrid, And Web Applications
Using Azure Devops And Microsoft Azure: CICD Implementation for ... DevOps and
Microsoft Azure (English Edition) Paperback – 1 January 2020
2. by Mitesh Soni
3. Jeff Geerling, “Ansible for DevOps: Server and configuration management for humans”, First
Edition, 2015.
4. David Johnson, “Ansible for DevOps: Everything You Need to Know to Use Ansible for
DevOps”, Second Edition, 2016.
5. Mariot Tsitoara, “Ansible 6. Beginning Git and GitHub: A Comprehensive Guide to Version
Control, Project Management, and Teamwork for the New Developer”, Second Edition, 2019.
6. [Link]
7. [Link]

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
2 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
5 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
AVg. 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

132
CCS358 PRINCIPLES OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand and describe syntax and semantics of programming languages
 To understand data, data types, and basic statements
 To understand call-return architecture and ways of implementing them
 To understand object-orientation, concurrency, and event handling in programming
languages
 To develop programs in non-procedural programming paradigms
UNIT I SYNTAX AND SEMANTICS 9
Evolution of programming languages – describing syntax – context-free grammars – attribute
grammars – describing semantics – lexical analysis – parsing – recursive-descent – bottom up
parsing

UNIT II DATA, DATA TYPES, AND BASIC STATEMENTS 9

Names – variables – binding – type checking – scope – scope rules – lifetime and garbage
collection – primitive data types – strings – array types – associative arrays – record types –
union types – pointers and references – Arithmetic expressions – overloaded operators –
type conversions – relational and boolean expressions – assignment statements – mixed mode
assignments – control structures – selection – iterations – branching – guarded statements

UNIT III SUBPROGRAMS AND IMPLEMENTATIONS 9

Subprograms – design issues – local referencing – parameter passing – overloaded
methods – generic methods – design issues for functions – semantics of call and return –
implementing simple subprograms – stack and dynamic local variables – nested
subprograms – blocks – dynamic scoping

UNIT IV OBJECT-ORIENTATION, CONCURRENCY, AND EVENT HANDLING 9

Object-orientation – design issues for OOP languages – implementation of object-oriented
constructs – concurrency – semaphores – monitors – message passing – threads –
statement level concurrency – exception handling – event handling

UNIT V FUNCTIONAL AND LOGIC PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES 9

Introduction to lambda calculus – fundamentals of functional programming languages –
Programming with Scheme – Programming with ML – Introduction to logic and logic
programming – Programming with Prolog – multi-paradigm languages
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe syntax and semantics of programming languages
CO2: Explain data, data types, and basic statements of programming languages
CO3: Design and implement subprogram constructs
CO4: Apply object-oriented, concurrency, and event handling programming constructs
and Develop programs in Scheme, ML, and Prolog
CO5: Understand and adopt new programming languages

TEXT BOOKS
1. Robert W. Sebesta, “Concepts of Programming Languages”, Twelfth Edition (Global
Edition), Pearson, 2022.
2. Michael L. Scott, “Programming Language Pragmatics”, Fourth Edition, Elsevier, 2018.
133
 3. R. Kent Dybvig, “The Scheme programming language”, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall, 2011.
4. Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Elements of ML programming”, Second Edition, Pearson, 1997.
5. W. F. Clocksin and C. S. Mellish, “Programming in Prolog: Using the ISO Standard”, Fifth
Edition, Springer, 2003.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - 3 2 3 -
2 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 3 2 3 -
3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 3 2 3 -
4 3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 3 2 -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 1 3 3 3 -
AVg. 2.8 2.8 3 2.4 2 2.5 2 2 1 3 1 3 2.4 2.8 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS335 CLOUD COMPUTING L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the principles of cloud architecture, models and infrastructure.
 To understand the concepts of virtualization and virtual machines.
 To gain knowledge about virtualization Infrastructure.
 To explore and experiment with various Cloud deployment environments.
 To learn about the security issues in the cloud environment.

UNIT I CLOUD ARCHITECTURE MODELS AND INFRASTRUCTURE 6

Cloud Architecture: System Models for Distributed and Cloud Computing – NIST Cloud Computing
Reference Architecture – Cloud deployment models – Cloud service models; Cloud Infrastructure:
Architectural Design of Compute and Storage Clouds – Design Challenges

UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION BASICS 6

Virtual Machine Basics – Taxonomy of Virtual Machines – Hypervisor – Key Concepts –
Virtualization structure – Implementation levels of virtualization – Virtualization Types: Full
Virtualization – Para Virtualization – Hardware Virtualization – Virtualization of CPU, Memory and
I/O devices.

UNIT III VIRTUALIZATION INFRASTRUCTURE AND DOCKER 7

Desktop Virtualization – Network Virtualization – Storage Virtualization – System-level of Operating
Virtualization – Application Virtualization – Virtual clusters and Resource Management – Containers
vs. Virtual Machines – Introduction to Docker – Docker Components – Docker Container – Docker
Images and Repositories.

UNIT IV CLOUD DEPLOYMENT ENVIRONMENT 6

Google App Engine – Amazon AWS – Microsoft Azure; Cloud Software Environments – Eucalyptus
– OpenStack.

134
UNIT V CLOUD SECURITY 5
Virtualization System-Specific Attacks: Guest hopping – VM migration attack – hyperjacking. Data
Security and Storage; Identity and Access Management (IAM) - IAM Challenges - IAM Architecture
and Practice.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Install Virtualbox/VMware/ Equivalent open source cloud Workstation with different flavours
of Linux or Windows OS on top of windows 8 and above.
2. Install a C compiler in the virtual machine created using a virtual box and execute Simple
Programs
3. Install Google App Engine. Create a hello world app and other simple web applications using
python/java.
4. Use the GAE launcher to launch the web applications.
5. Simulate a cloud scenario using CloudSim and run a scheduling algorithm that is not present
in CloudSim.
6. Find a procedure to transfer the files from one virtual machine to another virtual machine.
7. Install Hadoop single node cluster and run simple applications like wordcount.
8. Creating and Executing Your First Container Using Docker.
9. Run a Container from Docker Hub
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the design challenges in the cloud.
CO2: Apply the concept of virtualization and its types.
CO3: Experiment with virtualization of hardware resources and Docker.
CO4: Develop and deploy services on the cloud and set up a cloud environment.
CO5: Explain security challenges in the cloud environment.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing, From
Parallel Processing to the Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012.
2. James Turnbull, “The Docker Book”, O’Reilly Publishers, 2014.
3. Krutz, R. L., Vines, R. D, “Cloud security. A Comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud
Computing”, Wiley Publishing, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. James E. Smith, Ravi Nair, “Virtual Machines: Versatile Platforms for Systems and
Processes”, Elsevier/Morgan Kaufmann, 2005.
2. Tim Mather, Subra Kumaraswamy, and Shahed Latif, “Cloud Security and Privacy: an
enterprise perspective on risks and compliance”, O’Reilly Media, Inc., 2009.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 1 3 2 1 3
2 3 1 2 2 1 - - - 1 2 1 3 2 2 1
3 2 3 2 3 1 - - - 3 1 1 3 1 1 1
4 1 2 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 1 2 1 3 3
5 2 3 3 1 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 2 3
AVg. 2.2 2.2 2.2 2 1.8 - - - 2.2 2.2 1 2.6 1.6 1.8 2.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

135
CCS372 VIRTUALIZATION L T PC
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To Learn the basics and types of Virtualization
 To understand the Hypervisors and its types
 To Explore the Virtualization Solutions
 To Experiment the virtualization platforms

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUALIZATION 7

Virtualization and cloud computing - Need of virtualization – cost, administration, fast deployment,
reduce infrastructure cost – limitations- Types of hardware virtualization: Full virtualization - partial
virtualization - Paravirtualization-Types of Hypervisors

UNIT II SERVER AND DESKTOP VIRTUALIZATION 6

Virtual machine basics- Types of virtual machines- Understanding Server Virtualization- types of
server virtualization- Business Cases for Server Virtualization – Uses of Virtual Server Consolidation
– Selecting Server Virtualization Platform-Desktop Virtualization-Types of Desktop Virtualization

UNIT III NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION 6

Introduction to Network Virtualization-Advantages- Functions-Tools for Network Virtualization-
VLAN-WAN Architecture-WAN Virtualization

UNIT IV STORAGE VIRTUALIZATION 5

Memory Virtualization-Types of Storage Virtualization-Block, File-Address space Remapping-Risks
of Storage Virtualization-SAN-NAS-RAID

UNIT V VIRTUALIZATION TOOLS 6

VMWare-Amazon AWS-Microsoft HyperV- Oracle VM Virtual Box - IBM PowerVM- Google
Virtualization- Case study.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
[Link] type 2 virtualization in VMWARE or any equivalent Open Source Tool. Allocate memory
and storage space as per requirement. Install Guest OS on that VMWARE.

2.
[Link] and extend virtual disk
b. Create, Manage, Configure and schedule snapshots
c. Create Spanned, Mirrored and Striped volume
d. Create RAID 5 volume
3.
[Link] Virtualization using VNC
[Link] Virtualization using Chrome Remote Desktop

[Link] type 2 virtualization on ESXI 6.5 server

[Link] a VLAN in CISCO packet tracer
[Link] KVM in Linux
[Link] Nested Virtual Machine(VM under another VM)

136
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Analyse the virtualization concepts and Hypervisor
CO2: Apply the Virtualization for real-world applications
CO3: Install & Configure the different VM platforms
CO4: Experiment with the VM with various software
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Cloud computing a practical approach - Anthony [Link] , Toby J. Velte Robert Elsenpeter,
TATA McGraw- Hill , New Delhi – 2010
2. Cloud Computing (Principles and Paradigms), Edited by Rajkumar Buyya, James Broberg,
Andrzej Goscinski, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2011
3. David Marshall, Wade A. Reynolds, Advanced Server Virtualization: VMware and Microsoft
Platform in the Virtual Data Center, Auerbach
4. Chris Wolf, Erick M. Halter, “Virtualization: From the Desktop to the Enterprise”, APress,
2005.
5. James E. Smith, Ravi Nair, “Virtual Machines: Versatile Platforms for Systems and
Processes”, Elsevier/Morgan Kaufmann, 2005.
6. David Marshall, Wade A. Reynolds, “Advanced Server Virtualization: VMware and Microsoft
Platform in the Virtual Data Center”, Auerbach Publications, 2006.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 1 3 2 - - - 1 1 3 1 2 3 2
2 3 2 2 1 2 - - - 1 2 2 3 3 2 1
3 3 2 1 3 1 - - - 2 2 1 3 3 3 2
4 1 1 2 3 3 - - - 3 3 1 1 3 2 2
5 1 3 2 3 1 - - - 2 1 3 3 1 1 2
AVg. 1.8 2.2 1.6 2.6 1.8 - - - 1.8 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.2 1.8
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS341 DATA WAREHOUSING L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the details of data warehouse Architecture
 To understand the OLAP Technology
 To understand the partitioning strategy
 To differentiate various schema
 To understand the roles of process manager & system manager

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DATA WAREHOUSE 5

Data warehouse Introduction - Data warehouse components- operational database Vs data
warehouse – Data warehouse Architecture – Three-tier Data Warehouse Architecture - Autonomous
Data Warehouse- Autonomous Data Warehouse Vs Snowflake - Modern Data Warehouse

137
UNIT II ETL AND OLAP TECHNOLOGY 6
What is ETL – ETL Vs ELT – Types of Data warehouses - Data warehouse Design and Modeling -
Delivery Process - Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) - Characteristics of OLAP - Online
Transaction Processing (OLTP) Vs OLAP - OLAP operations- Types of OLAP- ROLAP Vs MOLAP
Vs HOLAP.

UNIT III META DATA, DATA MART AND PARTITION STRATEGY 7

Meta Data – Categories of Metadata – Role of Metadata – Metadata Repository – Challenges for
Meta Management - Data Mart – Need of Data Mart- Cost Effective Data Mart- Designing Data
Marts- Cost of Data Marts- Partitioning Strategy – Vertical partition – Normalization – Row Splitting
– Horizontal Partition

UNIT IV DIMENSIONAL MODELING AND SCHEMA 6

Dimensional Modeling- Multi-Dimensional Data Modeling – Data Cube- Star Schema- Snowflake
schema- Star Vs Snowflake schema- Fact constellation Schema- Schema Definition - Process
Architecture- Types of Data Base Parallelism – Datawarehouse Tools

UNIT V SYSTEM & PROCESS MANAGERS 6

Data Warehousing System Managers: System Configuration Manager- System Scheduling
Manager - System Event Manager - System Database Manager - System Backup Recovery
Manager - Data Warehousing Process Managers: Load Manager – Warehouse Manager- Query
Manager – Tuning – Testing
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Data exploration and integration with WEKA
2. Apply weka tool for data validation
3. Plan the architecture for real time application
4. Write the query for schema definition
5. Design data ware house for real time applications
6. Analyse the dimensional Modeling
7. Case study using OLAP
8. Case study using OTLP
9. Implementation of warehouse testing.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students should be able to
CO1: Design data warehouse architecture for various Problems
CO2: Apply the OLAP Technology
CO3: Analyse the partitioning strategy
CO4: Critically analyze the differentiation of various schema for given problem
CO5: Frame roles of process manager & system manager
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Alex Berson and Stephen J. Smith “Data Warehousing, Data Mining & OLAP”, Tata
McGraw – Hill Edition, Thirteenth Reprint 2008.
2. Ralph Kimball, “The Data Warehouse Toolkit: The Complete Guide to Dimensional
Modeling”, Third edition, 2013.

138
REFERENCES
1. Paul Raj Ponniah, “Data warehousing fundamentals for IT Professionals”, 2012.
2. K.P. Soman, ShyamDiwakar and V. Ajay “Insight into Data mining Theory and Practice”,
Easter Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 3 - - 3
2 3 2 2 2 3 - - - 2 - 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3
4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3
5 3 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2
AVg. 3 2.6 2.6 1.2 2.5 1 - - 2.5 - 2 2.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS367 STORAGE TECHNOLOGIES LT P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

 Characterize the functionalities of logical and physical components of storage

 Describe various storage networking technologies
 Identify different storage virtualization technologies
 Discuss the different backup and recovery strategies
 Understand common storage management activities and solutions

UNIT I STORAGE SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to Information Storage: Digital data and its types, Information storage, Key
characteristics of data center and Evolution of computing platforms. Information Lifecycle
Management. Third Platform Technologies: Cloud computing and its essential characteristics, Cloud
services and cloud deployment models, Big data analytics, Social networking and mobile computing,
Characteristics of third platform infrastructure and Imperatives for third platform transformation. Data
Center Environment: Building blocks of a data center, Compute systems and compute virtualization
and Software-defined data center.

UNIT II INTELLIGENT STORAGE SYSTEMS AND RAID 5

Components of an intelligent storage system, Components, addressing, and performance of hard
disk drives and solid-state drives, RAID, Types of intelligent storage systems, Scale-up and scale-
out storage
Architecture.

UNIT III STORAGE NETWORKING TECHNOLOGIES AND VIRTUALIZATION 13

Block-Based Storage System, File-Based Storage System, Object-Based and Unified Storage. Fibre
Channel SAN: Software-defined networking, FC SAN components and architecture, FC SAN
topologies, link aggregation, and zoning, Virtualization in FC SAN environment. Internet Protocol
SAN: iSCSI protocol, network components, and connectivity, Link aggregation, switch aggregation,
and VLAN, FCIP protocol,

139
connectivity, and configuration. Fibre Channel over Ethernet SAN: Components of FCoE SAN,
FCoE SAN connectivity, Converged Enhanced Ethernet, FCoE architecture.

UNIT IV BACKUP, ARCHIVE AND REPLICATION 12

Introduction to Business Continuity, Backup architecture, Backup targets and methods, Data
deduplication, Cloud-based and mobile device backup, Data archive, Uses of replication and its
characteristics, Compute based, storage-based, and network-based replication, Data migration,
Disaster Recovery as a Service
(DRaaS).

UNIT V SECURING STORAGE INFRASTRUCTURE 6

Information security goals, Storage security domains, Threats to a storage infrastructure, Security
controls to protect a storage infrastructure, Governance, risk, and compliance, Storage infrastructure
management functions, Storage infrastructure management processes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Demonstrate the fundamentals of information storage management and various models of
Cloud infrastructure services and deployment
CO2: Illustrate the usage of advanced intelligent storage systems and RAID
CO3: Interpret various storage networking architectures - SAN, including storage subsystems and
virtualization
CO4: Examine the different role in providing disaster recovery and remote replication technologies
CO5: Infer the security needs and security measures to be employed in information storage
management
TOTAL:45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS
1. EMC Corporation, Information Storage and Management, Wiley, India
2. Jon Tate, Pall Beck, Hector Hugo Ibarra, Shanmuganathan Kumaravel and Libor Miklas,
Introduction to Storage Area Networks, Ninth Edition, IBM - Redbooks, December 2017
3. Ulf Troppens, Rainer Erkens, Wolfgang Mueller-Friedt, Rainer Wolafka, Nils Haustein
,Storage Networks Explained, Second Edition, Wiley, 2009

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 2 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 1 3 1 2 1
2 3 1 2 3 3 - - - 3 2 3 2 2 3 1
3 1 1 3 2 2 - - - 3 1 1 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 1 2 2 - - - 1 1 3 1 3 2 1
5 1 3 2 1 2 - - - 1 2 3 1 3 2 1
AVg. 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.4 - - - 1.8 1.4 2.2 1.8 2.2 2.4 1.4
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

140
CCS365 SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS L T PC
2 0 23
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the need for SDN and its data plane operations
 To understand the functions of control plane
 To comprehend the migration of networking functions to SDN environment
 To explore various techniques of network function virtualization
 To comprehend the concepts behind network virtualization

UNIT I SDN: INTRODUCTION 6

Evolving Network Requirements – The SDN Approach – SDN architecture - SDN Data Plane ,
Control plane and Application Plane

UNIT II SDN DATA PLANE AND CONTROL PLANE 6

Data Plane functions and protocols - OpenFLow Protocol - Flow Table - Control Plane
Functions - Southbound Interface, Northbound Interface – SDN Controllers - Ryu, OpenDaylight,
ONOS - Distributed Controllers

UNIT III SDN APPLICATIONS 6

SDN Application Plane Architecture – Network Services Abstraction Layer – Traffic Engineering –
Measurement and Monitoring – Security – Data Center Networking

UNIT IV NETWORK FUNCTION VIRTUALIZATION 6

Network Virtualization - Virtual LANs – OpenFlow VLAN Support - NFV Concepts – Benefits and
Requirements – Reference Architecture

UNIT V NFV FUNCTIONALITY 6

NFV Infrastructure – Virtualized Network Functions – NFV Management and Orchestration – NFV
Use cases – SDN and NFV
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1) Setup your own virtual SDN lab
i) Virtualbox/Mininet Environment for SDN - [Link]
ii) [Link]
iii) GNS3
2) Create a simple mininet topology with SDN controller and use Wireshark to capture and
visualize the OpenFlow messages such as OpenFlow FLOW MOD, PACKET IN, PACKET
OUT etc.
3) Create a SDN application that uses the Northbound API to program flow table rules on the
switch for various use cases like L2 learning switch, Traffic Engineering, Firewall etc.
4) Create a simple end-to-end network service with two VNFs using vim-emu
[Link]
5) Install OSM and onboard and orchestrate network service.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Describe the motivation behind SDN
CO2: Identify the functions of the data plane and control plane

141
CO3: Design and develop network applications using SDN
CO4: Orchestrate network services using NFV
CO5: Explain various use cases of SDN and NFV
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. William Stallings, “Foundations of Modern Networking: SDN, NFV, QoE, IoT and Cloud”,
Pearson Education, 1st Edition, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Ken Gray, Thomas D. Nadeau, “Network Function Virtualization”, Morgan Kauffman, 2016.
2. Thomas D Nadeau, Ken Gray, “SDN: Software Defined Networks”, O’Reilly Media, 2013.
3. Fei Hu, “Network Innovation through OpenFlow and SDN: Principles and Design”, 1st Edition,
CRC Press, 2014.
4. Paul Goransson, Chuck Black Timothy Culver, “Software Defined Networks: A
Comprehensive Approach”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Press, 2016.
5. Oswald Coker, Siamak Azodolmolky, “Software-Defined Networking with OpenFlow”, 2nd
Edition, O’Reilly Media, 2017.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 2 3 1 3 - - - 2 3 1 3 1 2 1
2 2 1 2 2 3 - - - 2 2 2 2 1 3 2
3 2 2 2 3 3 - - - 3 1 1 2 1 3 3
4 2 2 2 3 1 - - - 1 3 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 3 1 1 3 - - - 1 2 1 2 2 1 3
AVg. 2 2 2 2 2.6 - - - 1.8 2.2 1.2 2.2 1.4 2.2 2.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS368 STREAM PROCESSING LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Introduce Data Processing terminology, definition & concepts
 Define different types of Data Processing
 Explain the concepts of Real-time Data processing
 Select appropriate structures for designing and running real-time data services in a
business environment
 Illustrate the benefits and drive the adoption of real-time data services to solve real world
problems
UNIT I FOUNDATIONS OF DATA SYSTEMS 6
Introduction to Data Processing, Stages of Data processing, Data Analytics, Batch Processing,
Stream processing, Data Migration, Transactional Data processing, Data Mining, Data Management
Strategy, Storage, Processing, Integration, Analytics, Benefits of Data as a Service, Challenges

UNIT II REAL-TIME DATA PROCESSING 6

Introduction to Big data, Big data infrastructure, Real-time Analytics, Near real-time solution,
Lambda architecture, Kappa Architecture, Stream Processing,Understanding Data Streams,
Message Broker, Stream Processor, Batch & Real-time ETL tools, Streaming Data Storage

142
UNIT III DATA MODELS AND QUERY LANGUAGES 6
Relational Model, Document Model, Key-Value Pairs, NoSQL, Object-Relational Mismatch, Many-
to-One and Many-to-Many Relationships, Network data models, Schema Flexibility, Structured
Query Language, Data Locality for Queries, Declarative Queries, Graph Data models, Cypher Query
Language, Graph Queries in SQL, The Semantic Web, CODASYL, SPARQL

UNIT IV EVENT PROCESSING WITH APACHE KAFKA 6

Apache Kafka, Kafka as Event Streaming platform, Events, Producers, Consumers, Topics,
Partitions, Brokers, Kafka APIs, Admin API, Producer API, Consumer API, Kafka Streams API,
Kafka Connect API.

UNIT V REAL-TIME PROCESSING USING SPARK STREAMING 6

Structured Streaming, Basic Concepts, Handling Event-time and Late Data, Fault-tolerant
Semantics, Exactly-once Semantics, Creating Streaming Datasets, Schema Inference, Partitioning
of Streaming datasets, Operations on Streaming Data, Selection, Aggregation, Projection,
Watermarking, Window operations, Types of Time windows, Join Operations, Deduplication
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Install MongoDB
2. Design and Implement Simple application using MongoDB
3. Query the designed system using MongoDB
4. Create a Event Stream with Apache Kafka
5. Create a Real-time Stream processing application using Spark Streaming
6. Build a Micro-batch application
7. Real-time Fraud and Anomaly Detection,
8. Real-time personalization, Marketing, Advertising

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Understand the applicability and utility of different streaming algorithms.
CO2:Describe and apply current research trends in data-stream processing.
CO3:Analyze the suitability of stream mining algorithms for data stream systems.
CO4:Program and build stream processing systems, services and applications.
CO5:Solve problems in real-world applications that process data streams.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Streaming Systems: The What, Where, When and How of Large-Scale Data Processing by
Tyler Akidau, Slava Chemyak, Reuven Lax, O’Reilly publication
2. Designing Data-Intensive Applications by Martin Kleppmann, O’Reilly Media
3. Practical Real-time Data Processing and Analytics : Distributed Computing and Event
Processing using Apache Spark, Flink, Storm and Kafka, Packt Publishing
REFERENCES
1. [Link]
2. [Link]

143
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 1 - - - 2 3 1 2 1 3 3
2 2 1 1 2 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 1 2 1
3 3 1 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
4 2 1 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 1 1 1 2 1
5 3 3 1 2 2 - - - 3 3 2 3 2 3 2
AVg. 2.6 1.8 1.8 2.6 2.2 - - - 2.6 2.6 1.4 2 1.4 2.4 1.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS362 SECURITY AND PRIVACY IN CLOUD LT P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To Introduce Cloud Computing terminology, definition & concepts
 To understand the security design and architectural considerations for Cloud
 To understand the Identity, Access control in Cloud
 To follow best practices for Cloud security using various design patterns
 To be able to monitor and audit cloud applications for security

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD SECURITY CONCEPTS 7

Overview of cloud security- Security Services - Confidentiality, Integrity, Authentication, Non-
repudiation, Access Control - Basic of cryptography - Conventional and public-key cryptography,
hash functions, authentication, and digital signatures.

UNIT II SECURITY DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE FOR CLOUD 6

Security design principles for Cloud Computing - Comprehensive data protection - End-to-end
access control - Common attack vectors and threats - Network and Storage - Secure Isolation
Strategies - Virtualization strategies - Inter-tenant network segmentation strategies - Data Protection
strategies: Data retention, deletion and archiving procedures for tenant data, Encryption, Data
Redaction, Tokenization, Obfuscation, PKI and Key

UNIT III ACCESS CONTROL AND IDENTITY MANAGEMENT 6

Access control requirements for Cloud infrastructure - User Identification - Authentication and
Authorization - Roles-based Access Control - Multi-factor authentication - Single Sign-on, Identity
Federation - Identity providers and service consumers - Storage and network access control options
- OS Hardening and minimization - Verified and measured boot - Intruder Detection and prevention

UNIT IV CLOUD SECURITY DESIGN PATTERNS 6

Introduction to Design Patterns, Cloud bursting, Geo-tagging, Secure Cloud Interfaces, Cloud
Resource Access Control, Secure On-Premise Internet Access, Secure External Cloud

UNIT V MONITORING, AUDITING AND MANAGEMENT 5

Proactive activity monitoring - Incident Response, Monitoring for unauthorized access, malicious
traffic, abuse of system privileges - Events and alerts - Auditing – Record generation, Reporting and
Management, Tamper-proofing audit logs, Quality of Services, Secure Management, User
management, Identity management, Security Information and Event Management

144
 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Simulate a cloud scenario using Cloud Sim and run a scheduling algorithm not present in
Cloud Sim
2. simulate resource management using cloud sim
3. simulate log forensics using cloud sim
4. simulate a secure file sharing using a cloud sim
5. Implement data anonymization techniques over the simple dataset (masking, k-
anonymization, etc)
6. Implement any encryption algorithm to protect the images
7. Implement any image obfuscation mechanism
8. Implement a role-based access control mechanism in a specific scenario
9. implement an attribute-based access control mechanism based on a particular scenario
10. Develop a log monitoring system with incident management in the cloud

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the cloud concepts and fundamentals.
CO2: Explain the security challenges in the cloud.
CO3: Define cloud policy and Identity and Access Management.
CO4: Understand various risks and audit and monitoring mechanisms in the cloud.
CO5: Define the various architectural and design considerations for security in the cloud.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Raj Kumar Buyya , James Broberg, andrzejGoscinski, “Cloud Computing:‖, Wiley 2013
2. Dave shackleford, “Virtualization Security‖, SYBEX a wiley Brand 2013.
3. Mather, Kumaraswamy and Latif, “Cloud Security and Privacy‖, OREILLY 2011
REFERENCES
1. Mark C. Chu-Carroll “Code in the Cloud‖,CRC Press, 2011
2. Mastering Cloud Computing Foundations and Applications Programming RajkumarBuyya,
Christian Vechhiola, S. ThamaraiSelvi

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 1 2 - - - 1 1 1 3 3 1 2
2 1 3 2 3 1 - - - 2 2 3 2 3 1 2
3 3 2 2 3 2 - - - 3 1 1 2 2 3 1
4 2 1 2 3 3 - - - 3 2 3 3 1 1 2
5 1 3 3 1 1 - - - 2 3 3 2 2 3 2
AVg. 2 2.4 2.4 2.2 1.8 - - - 2.2 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.2 1.8 1.8
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

145
CCS344 ETHICAL HACKING L T PC
2 0 23
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of computer based vulnerabilities.
 To explore different foot printing, reconnaissance and scanning methods.
 To expose the enumeration and vulnerability analysis methods.
 To understand hacking options available in Web and wireless applications.
 To explore the options for network protection.
 To practice tools to perform ethical hacking to expose the vulnerabilities.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Ethical Hacking Overview - Role of Security and Penetration Testers .- Penetration-Testing
Methodologies- Laws of the Land - Overview of TCP/IP- The Application Layer - The Transport
Layer - The Internet Layer - IP Addressing .- Network and Computer Attacks - Malware - Protecting
Against Malware Attacks.- Intruder Attacks - Addressing Physical Security

UNIT II FOOT PRINTING, RECONNAISSANCE AND SCANNING NETWORKS 6

Footprinting Concepts - Footprinting through Search Engines, Web Services, Social Networking
Sites, Website, Email - Competitive Intelligence - Footprinting through Social Engineering -
Footprinting Tools - Network Scanning Concepts - Port-Scanning Tools - Scanning Techniques -
Scanning Beyond IDS and Firewall

UNIT III ENUMERATION AND VULNERABILITY ANALYSIS 6

Enumeration Concepts - NetBIOS Enumeration – SNMP, LDAP, NTP, SMTP and DNS
Enumeration - Vulnerability Assessment Concepts - Desktop and Server OS Vulnerabilities -
Windows OS Vulnerabilities - Tools for Identifying Vulnerabilities in Windows- Linux OS
Vulnerabilities- Vulnerabilities of Embedded Oss

UNIT IV SYSTEM HACKING 6

Hacking Web Servers - Web Application Components- Vulnerabilities - Tools for Web Attackers and
Security Testers Hacking Wireless Networks - Components of a Wireless Network – Wardriving-
Wireless Hacking - Tools of the Trade –

UNIT V NETWORK PROTECTION SYSTEMS 6

Access Control Lists. - Cisco Adaptive Security Appliance Firewall - Configuration and Risk Analysis
Tools for Firewalls and Routers - Intrusion Detection and Prevention Systems - Network-Based and
Host-Based IDSs and IPSs - Web Filtering - Security Incident Response Teams – Honeypots.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Install Kali or Backtrack Linux / Metasploitable/ Windows XP
2. Practice the basics of reconnaissance.
3. Using FOCA / SearchDiggity tools, extract metadata and expanding the target
list.
4. Aggregates information from public databases using online free tools like
Paterva’s Maltego.
5. Information gathering using tools like Robtex.
6. Scan the target using tools like Nessus.
7. View and capture network traffic using Wireshark.
146
 8. Automate dig for vulnerabilities and match exploits using Armitage
FOCA : [Link]
Nessus : [Link]
Wireshark : [Link]
Armitage : [Link]
Kali or Backtrack Linux, Metasploitable, Windows XP

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able:
CO1: To express knowledge on basics of computer based vulnerabilities
CO2: To gain understanding on different foot printing, reconnaissance and scanning methods.
CO3: To demonstrate the enumeration and vulnerability analysis methods
CO4: To gain knowledge on hacking options available in Web and wireless applications.
CO5: To acquire knowledge on the options for network protection.
CO6: To use tools to perform ethical hacking to expose the vulnerabilities.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Michael T. Simpson, Kent Backman, and James E. Corley, Hands-On Ethical Hacking and
Network Defense, Course Technology, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2010.
2. The Basics of Hacking and Penetration Testing - Patrick Engebretson, SYNGRESS,
Elsevier, 2013.
3. The Web Application Hacker’s Handbook: Finding and Exploiting Security Flaws, Dafydd
Stuttard and Marcus Pinto, 2011.

REFERENCES
1. Black Hat Python: Python Programming for Hackers and Pentesters, Justin Seitz , 2014.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 3 2 1 - - - 1 2 2 1 1 2 3
2 1 2 1 2 1 - - - 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
3 2 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
4 2 1 1 2 1 - - - 1 3 3 3 3 2 1
5 2 3 1 1 2 - - - 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
AVg. 1.8 2 1.8 2 1.2 - - - 1.4 2 1.6 1.6 1.6 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS343 DIGITAL AND MOBILE FORENSICS L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand basic digital forensics and techniques.
 To understand digital crime and investigation.
 To understand how to be prepared for digital forensic readiness.
 To understand and use forensics tools for iOS devices.
 To understand and use forensics tools for Android devices.

147
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL FORENSICS 6
Forensic Science – Digital Forensics – Digital Evidence – The Digital Forensics Process –
Introduction – The Identification Phase – The Collection Phase – The Examination Phase – The
Analysis Phase – The Presentation Phase

UNIT II DIGITAL CRIME AND INVESTIGATION 6

Digital Crime – Substantive Criminal Law – General Conditions – Offenses – Investigation Methods
for Collecting Digital Evidence – International Cooperation to Collect Digital Evidence

UNIT III DIGITAL FORENSIC READINESS 6

Introduction – Law Enforcement versus Enterprise Digital Forensic Readiness – Rationale for Digital
Forensic Readiness – Frameworks, Standards and Methodologies – Enterprise Digital Forensic
Readiness – Challenges in Digital Forensics

UNIT IV iOS FORENSICS 6

Mobile Hardware and Operating Systems - iOS Fundamentals – Jailbreaking – File System –
Hardware – iPhone Security – iOS Forensics – Procedures and Processes – Tools – Oxygen
Forensics – MobilEdit – iCloud

UNIT V ANDROID FORENSICS 6

Android basics – Key Codes – ADB – Rooting Android – Boot Process – File Systems – Security –
Tools – Android Forensics – Forensic Procedures – ADB – Android Only Tools – Dual Use Tools –
Oxygen Forensics – MobilEdit – Android App Decompiling

COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Have knowledge on digital forensics.
CO2: Know about digital crime and investigations.
CO3: Be forensic ready.
CO4: Investigate, identify and extract digital evidence from iOS devices.
CO5: Investigate, identify and extract digital evidence from Android devices.
30 PERIODS
LAB EXPERIMENTS:
1. Installation of Sleuth Kit on Linux. List all data blocks. Analyze allocated as well as unallocated
blocks of a disk image.
2. Data extraction from call logs using Sleuth Kit.
3. Data extraction from SMS and contacts using Sleuth Kit.
4. Install Mobile Verification Toolkit or MVT and decrypt encrypted iOS backups.
5. Process and parse records from the iOS system.
6. Extract installed applications from Android devices.
7. Extract diagnostic information from Android devices through the adb protocol.
8. Generate a unified chronological timeline of extracted records,
30 PERIODS
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Andre Arnes, “Digital Forensics”, Wiley, 2018.
2. Chuck Easttom, “An In-depth Guide to Mobile Device Forensics”, First Edition, CRC
Press, 2022.
148
REFERENCES
1. Vacca, J, Computer Forensics, Computer Crime Scene Investigation, 2nd Ed, Charles
River Media, 2005, ISBN: 1-58450-389.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 3 2 1 - - - 1 1 3 3 1 3 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 1 3 1
3 3 3 2 3 1 - - - 3 2 1 1 3 2 3
4 3 1 2 2 3 - - - 1 3 3 2 1 3 3
5 1 3 2 3 2 - - - 2 3 2 3 1 2 1
AVg. 3 2 2 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 1 3 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS363 SOCIAL NETWORK SECURITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop semantic web related simple applications
 To explain Privacy and Security issues in Social Networking
 To explain the data extraction and mining of social networks
 To discuss the prediction of human behavior in social communities
 To describe the Access Control, Privacy and Security management of social networks

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF SOCIAL NETWORKING 6

Introduction to Semantic Web, Limitations of current Web, Development of Semantic Web,
Emergence of the Social Web, Social Network analysis, Development of Social Network Analysis,
Key concepts and measures in network analysis, Historical overview of privacy and security, Major
paradigms, for understanding privacy and security

UNIT II SECURITY ISSUES IN SOCIAL NETWORKS 6

The evolution of privacy and security concerns with networked technologies, Contextual influences
on privacy attitudes and behaviors, Anonymity in a networked world

UNIT III EXTRACTION AND MINING IN SOCIAL NETWORKING DATA 6

Extracting evolution of Web Community from a Series of Web Archive, Detecting communities in
social networks, Definition of community, Evaluating communities, Methods for community detection
and mining, Applications of community mining algorithms, Tools for detecting communities social
network infrastructures and communities, Big data and Privacy

UNIT IV PREDICTING HUMAN BEHAVIOR AND PRIVACY ISSUES 6

Understanding and predicting human behavior for social communities, User data Management,
Inference and Distribution, Enabling new human experiences, Reality mining, Context, Awareness,
Privacy in online social networks, Trust in online environment, What is Neo4j, Nodes, Relationships,
Properties.

149
UNIT V ACCESS CONTROL, PRIVACY AND IDENTITY MANAGEMENT 6
Understand the access control requirements for Social Network, Enforcing Access Control
Strategies, Authentication and Authorization, Roles-based Access Control, Host, storage and
network access control options, Firewalls, Authentication, and Authorization in Social Network,
Identity & Access Management, Single Sign-on, Identity Federation, Identity providers and service
consumers, The role of Identity provisioning

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Develop semantic web related simple applications
CO2 : Address Privacy and Security issues in Social Networking
CO3: Explain the data extraction and mining of social networks
CO4: Discuss the prediction of human behavior in social communities
CO5: Describe the applications of social networks
30 PERIODS
PRACTICALEXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Design own social media application
2. Create a Network model using Neo4j
3. Read and write Data from Graph Database
4. Find “Friend of Friends” using Neo4j
5. Implement secure search in social media
6. Create a simple Security & Privacy detector
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Peter Mika, Social Networks and the Semantic Web, First Edition, Springer 2007.
2. BorkoFurht, Handbook of Social Network Technologies and Application, First Edition,
Springer, 2010.
3. Learning Neo4j 3.x Second Edition By Jérôme Baton, Rik Van Bruggen, Packt publishing
4. David Easley, Jon Kleinberg, Networks, Crowds, and Markets: Reasoning about a Highly
Connected World‖, First Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2010.

REFERENCES
1. Easley D. Kleinberg J., Networks, Crowds, and Markets – Reasoning about a Highly
Connected World‖, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
2. Jackson, Matthew O., Social and Economic Networks‖, Princeton University Press, 2008.
3. GuandongXu ,Yanchun Zhang and Lin Li, ―Web Mining and Social Networking –
Techniques and applications‖, First Edition, Springer, 2011.
4. Dion Goh and Schubert Foo, Social information Retrieval Systems: Emerging Technologies
and Applications for Searching the Web Effectively‖, IGI Global Snippet, 2008.
5. Max Chevalier, Christine Julien and Chantal Soulé-Dupuy, Collaborative and Social
Information Retrieval and Access: Techniques for Improved user Modeling‖, IGI Global
Snippet, 2009.
6. John G. Breslin, Alexander Passant and Stefan Decker, The Social Semantic Web‖,
Springer, 2009.

150
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
2 2 2 2 3 3 - - - 1 2 2 3 3 3 2
3 2 1 1 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 1 1 3 3
4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 1 1 2 1 3
5 1 3 2 2 2 - - - 1 1 3 1 2 3 3
AVg. 2.2 2 2 2.8 2.2 - - - 1.4 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.2 2.6 2.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS351 MODERN CRYPTOGRAPHY L T PC

2 0 23
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about Modern Cryptography.
 To focus on how cryptographic algorithms and protocols work and how to use them.
 To build a Pseudorandom permutation.
 To construct Basic cryptanalytic techniques.
 To provide instruction on how to use the concepts of block ciphers and message
authentication codes.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Basics of Symmetric Key Cryptography, Basics of Asymmetric Key Cryptography, Hardness of
Functions. Notions of Semantic Security (SS) and Message Indistinguishability (MI): Proof of
Equivalence of SS and MI, Hard Core Predicate, Trap-door permutation, Goldwasser-Micali
Encryption. Goldreich-Levin Theorem: Relation between Hardcore Predicates and Trap-door
permutations.

UNIT II FORMAL NOTIONS OF ATTACKS 6

Attacks under Message Indistinguishability: Chosen Plaintext Attack (IND-CPA), Chosen Ciphertext
Attacks (IND-CCA1 and IND-CCA2), Attacks under Message Non-malleability: NM-CPA and NM-
CCA2, Inter-relations among the attack model

UNIT III RANDOM ORACLES 6

Provable Security and asymmetric cryptography, hash functions. One-way functions: Weak and
Strong one-way functions. Pseudo-random Generators (PRG): Blum-Micali-Yao Construction,
Construction of more powerful PRG, Relation between One-way functions and PRG, Pseudo-
random Functions (PRF)

UNIT IV BUILDING A PSEUDORANDOM PERMUTATION 6

The LubyRackoff Construction: Formal Definition, Application of the LubyRackoff Construction to
the construction of Block Ciphers, The DES in the light of LubyRackoff Construction.

UNIT V MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION CODES 6

Left or Right Security (LOR). Formal Definition of Weak and Strong MACs, Using a PRF as a MAC,
Variable length MAC. Public Key Signature Schemes: Formal Definitions, Signing and Verification,
Formal Proofs of Security of Full Domain Hashing. Assumptions for Public Key Signature Schemes:
151
One-way functions Imply Secure One-time Signatures. Shamir's Secret Sharing Scheme. Formally
Analyzing Cryptographic Protocols. Zero Knowledge Proofs and Protocols.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Implement Feige-Fiat-Shamir identification protocol.
2. Implement GQ identification protocol.
3. Implement Schnorr identification protocol.
4. Implement Rabin one-time signature scheme.
5. Implement Merkle one-time signature scheme.
6. Implement Authentication trees and one-time signatures.
7. Implement GMR one-time signature scheme.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Interpret the basic principles of cryptography and general cryptanalysis.
CO2: Determine the concepts of symmetric encryption and authentication.
CO3: Identify the use of public key encryption, digital signatures, and key establishment.
CO4: Articulate the cryptographic algorithms to compose, build and analyze simple cryptographic
solutions.
CO5: Express the use of Message Authentication Codes.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hans Delfs and Helmut Knebl, Introduction to Cryptography: Principles and Applications,
Springer Verlag.
2. Wenbo Mao, Modern Cryptography, Theory and Practice, Pearson Education (Low Priced
Edition)
REFERENCES:
1. ShaffiGoldwasser and MihirBellare, Lecture Notes on Cryptography, Available at
[Link]
2. OdedGoldreich, Foundations of Cryptography, CRC Press (Low Priced Edition Available),
Part 1 and Part 23
3. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice”, PHI 3rd
Edition, 2006.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 2 1 1
2 1 3 2 1 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 3 2 - - - 1 1 1 3 1 1 3
4 3 1 2 1 3 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
5 2 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 1 1 1 2 1 1
AVg. 2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 - - - 2.4 1.4 1.2 2 2 1.2 1.8
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

152
CB3591 ENGINEERING SECURE SOFTWARE SYSTEMS L T PC
2 0 23
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Know the importance and need for software security.
 Know about various attacks.
 Learn about secure software design.
 Understand risk management in secure software development.
 Know the working of tools related to software security.

UNIT I NEED OF SOFTWARE SECURITY AND LOW-LEVEL ATTACKS 6

Software Assurance and Software Security - Threats to software security - Sources of software
insecurity - Benefits of Detecting Software Security - Properties of Secure Software – Memory-
Based Attacks: Low-Level Attacks Against Heap and Stack - Defense Against Memory-Based
Attacks

UNIT II SECURE SOFTWARE DESIGN 7

Requirements Engineering for secure software - SQUARE process Model - Requirements
elicitation and prioritization- Isolating The Effects of Untrusted Executable Content - Stack
Inspection – Policy Specification Languages – Vulnerability Trends – Buffer Overflow – Code
Injection - Session Hijacking. Secure Design - Threat Modeling and Security Design Principles

UINT III SECURITY RISK MANAGEMENT 5

Risk Management Life Cycle – Risk Profiling – Risk Exposure Factors – Risk Evaluation and
Mitigation – Risk Assessment Techniques – Threat and Vulnerability Management

UNIT IV SECURITY TESTING 8

Traditional Software Testing – Comparison - Secure Software Development Life Cycle - Risk
Based Security Testing – Prioritizing Security Testing With Threat Modeling – Penetration Testing
– Planning and Scoping - Enumeration – Remote Exploitation – Web Application Exploitation -
Exploits and Client Side Attacks – Post Exploitation – Bypassing Firewalls and Avoiding Detection
- Tools for Penetration Testing

UNIT V SECURE PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4

Governance and security - Adopting an enterprise software security framework - Security and
project management - Maturity of Practice
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES
1. Implement the SQL injection attack.
2. Implement the Buffer Overflow attack.
3. Implement Cross Site Scripting and Prevent XSS.
4. Perform Penetration testing on a web application to gather information about the system, then
initiate XSS and SQL injection attacks using tools like Kali Linux.
5. Develop and test the secure test cases
6. Penetration test using kali Linux
30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Identify various vulnerabilities related to memory attacks.
153
CO2: Apply security principles in software development.
CO3: Evaluate the extent of risks.
CO4: Involve selection of testing techniques related to software security in the testing phase of
software development.
CO5: Use tools for securing software.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Julia H. Allen, “Software Security Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2008
2. Evan Wheeler, “Security Risk Management: Building an Information Security Risk Management
Program from the Ground Up”, First edition, Syngress Publishing, 2011
3. Chris Wysopal, Lucas Nelson, Dino Dai Zovi, and Elfriede Dustin, “The Art of Software Security
Testing: Identifying Software Security Flaws (Symantec Press)”, Addison-Wesley Professional,
2006
REFERENCES:
1. Robert C. Seacord, “Secure Coding in C and C++ (SEI Series in Software Engineering)”,
Addison-Wesley Professional, 2005.
2. Jon Erickson, “Hacking: The Art of Exploitation”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2008.
3. Mike Shema, “Hacking Web Apps: Detecting and Preventing Web Application Security
Problems”, First edition, Syngress Publishing, 2012
4. Bryan Sullivan and Vincent Liu, “Web Application Security, A Beginner's Guide”, Kindle
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2012
5. Lee Allen, “Advanced Penetration Testing for Highly-Secured Environments: The Ultimate
Security Guide (Open Source: Community Experience Distilled)”, Kindle Edition, Packt
Publishing,2012
6. Jason Grembi, “Developing Secure Software”

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 2 3 2 - - - 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
2 2 2 2 3 3 - - - 2 1 2 2 1 2 1
3 1 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 1 2 1 2 2 1
4 2 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
5 2 1 2 2 3 - - - 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
AVg. 1.8 2.2 2 2.4 2.2 - - - 1.8 1 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS339 CRYPTOCURRENCY AND BLOCKCHAIN TECHNOLOGIES LT P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of Blockchain
 To learn Different protocols and consensus algorithms in Blockchain
 To learn the Blockchain implementation frameworks
 To understand the Blockchain Applications
 To experiment the Hyperledger Fabric, Ethereum networks

154
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN 7
Blockchain- Public Ledgers, Blockchain as Public Ledgers - Block in a Blockchain, Transactions-
The Chain and the Longest Chain - Permissioned Model of Blockchain, Cryptographic -Hash
Function, Properties of a hash function-Hash pointer and Merkle tree

UNIT II BITCOIN AND CRYPTOCURRENCY 6

A basic crypto currency, Creation of coins, Payments and double spending, FORTH – the precursor
for Bitcoin scripting, Bitcoin Scripts , Bitcoin P2P Network, Transaction in Bitcoin Network, Block
Mining, Block propagation and block relay

UNIT III BITCOIN CONSENSUS 6

Bitcoin Consensus, Proof of Work (PoW)- Hashcash PoW , Bitcoin PoW, Attacks on PoW ,monopoly
problem- Proof of Stake- Proof of Burn - Proof of Elapsed Time - Bitcoin Miner, Mining Difficulty,
Mining Pool-Permissioned model and use cases.

UNIT IV HYPERLEDGER FABRIC & ETHEREUM 5

Architecture of Hyperledger fabric v1.1- chain code- Ethereum: Ethereum network, EVM,
Transaction fee, Mist Browser, Ether, Gas, Solidity.

UNIT V BLOCKCHAIN APPLICATIONS 6

Smart contracts, Truffle Design and issue- DApps- NFT. Blockchain Applications in Supply Chain
Management, Logistics, Smart Cities, Finance and Banking, Insurance,etc- Case Study.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand emerging abstract models for Blockchain Technology
CO2: Identify major research challenges and technical gaps existing between theory and practice
in the crypto currency domain.
CO3: It provides conceptual understanding of the function of Blockchain as a method of securing
distributed ledgers, how consensus on their contents is achieved, and the new applications
that they enable.
CO4: Apply hyperledger Fabric and Ethereum platform to implement the Block chain Application.

30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL 30 PERIODS
1. Install and understand Docker container, [Link], Java and Hyperledger Fabric, Ethereum
and perform necessary software installation on local machine/create instance on cloud to
run.
2. Create and deploy a blockchain network using Hyperledger Fabric SDK for Java Set up and
initialize the channel, install and instantiate chain code, and perform invoke and query on
your blockchain network.
3. Interact with a blockchain network. Execute transactions and requests against a blockchain
network by creating an app to test the network and its rules.
4. Deploy an asset-transfer app using blockchain. Learn app development within a Hyperledger
Fabric network.
5. Use blockchain to track fitness club rewards. Build a web app that uses Hyperledger Fabric
to track and trace member rewards.

155
 6. Car auction network: A Hello World example with Hyperledger Fabric Node SDK and IBM
Blockchain Starter Plan. Use Hyperledger Fabric to invoke chain code while storing results
and data in the starter plan
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bashir and Imran, Mastering Blockchain: Deeper insights into decentralization, cryptography,
Bitcoin, and popular Blockchain frameworks, 2017.
2. [Link] Antonopoulos, “Mastering Bitcoin: Unlocking Digital Cryptocurrencies”, O’Reilly,
2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Daniel Drescher, “Blockchain Basics”, First Edition, Apress, 2017.
2. Arvind Narayanan, Joseph Bonneau, Edward Felten, Andrew Miller, and Steven Goldfeder.
Bitcoin and cryptocurrency technologies: a comprehensive introduction. Princeton University
Press, 2016.
3. Melanie Swan, “Blockchain: Blueprint for a New Economy”, O’Reilly, 2015
4. Ritesh Modi, “Solidity Programming Essentials: A Beginner’s Guide to Build Smart Contracts
for Ethereum and Blockchain”, Packt Publishing
5. Handbook of Research on Blockchain Technology, published by Elsevier Inc. ISBN:
9780128198162, 2020.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 3 1 1
2 3 3 3 3 1 - - - 2 - - 2 1 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 3 - - 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 3 2 3 - - - 3 - - 2 2 2 3
AVg. 3 2.75 2.75 2.5 1.75 2.25 2 3 2.75 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS354 NETWORK SECURITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamentals of cryptography.
 To learn the key management techniques and authentication approaches.
 To explore the network and transport layer security techniques.
 To understand the application layer security standards.
 To learn the real time security practices.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Basics of cryptography, conventional and public-key cryptography, hash functions, authentication,
and digital signatures.

UNIT II KEY MANAGEMENT AND AUTHENTICATION 7

Key Management and Distribution: Symmetric Key Distribution, Distribution of Public Keys, X.509
Certificates, Public-Key Infrastructure. User Authentication: Remote User-Authentication Principles,
Remote User-Authentication Using Symmetric Encryption, Kerberos Systems, Remote User
Authentication Using Asymmetric Encryption.
156
UNIT III ACCESS CONTROL AND SECURITY 4
Network Access Control: Network Access Control, Extensible Authentication Protocol, IEEE 802.1X
Port-Based Network Access Control - IP Security - Internet Key Exchange (IKE). Transport-Level
Security: Web Security Considerations, Secure Sockets Layer, Transport Layer Security, HTTPS
standard, Secure Shell (SSH) application.

UNIT IV APPLICATION LAYER SECURITY 5

Electronic Mail Security: Pretty Good Privacy, S/MIME, DomainKeys Identified Mail. Wireless
Network Security: Mobile Device Security

UNIT V SECURITY PRACTICES 6

Firewalls and Intrusion Detection Systems: Intrusion Detection Password Management, Firewall
Characteristics Types of Firewalls, Firewall Basing, Firewall Location and Configurations.
Blockchains, Cloud Security and IoT security
30 PERIODS
PRACTICALEXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Implement symmetric key algorithms
2. Implement asymmetric key algorithms and key exchange algorithms
3. Implement digital signature schemes
4. Installation of Wire shark, tcpdump and observe data transferred in client-server
communication using UDP/TCP and identify the UDP/TCP datagram.
5. Check message integrity and confidentiality using SSL
6. Experiment Eavesdropping, Dictionary attacks, MITM attacks
7. Experiment with Sniff Traffic using ARP Poisoning
8. Demonstrate intrusion detection system using any tool.
9. Explore network monitoring tools
10. Study to configure Firewall, VPN

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able:
CO1: Classify the encryption techniques
CO2: Illustrate the key management technique and authentication.
CO3 Evaluate the security techniques applied to network and transport layer
CO4: Discuss the application layer security standards.
CO5: Apply security practices for real time applications.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice, 6th Edition, William Stallings,
2014, Pearson, ISBN 13:9780133354690.

REFERENCES:
1. Network Security: Private Communications in a Public World, M. Speciner, R. Perlman, C.
Kaufman, Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. Linux iptables Pocket Reference, Gregor N. Purdy, O'Reilly, 2004, ISBN-13: 978-
0596005696.
3. Linux Firewalls, by Michael Rash, No Starch Press, October 2007, ISBN: 978-1-59327-141-
1.

157
 4. Network Security, Firewalls And VPNs, J. Michael Stewart, Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2013,
ISBN-10: 1284031675, ISBN-13: 978-1284031676.
5. The Network Security Test Lab: A Step-By-Step Guide, Michael Gregg, Dreamtech Press,
2015, ISBN-10:8126558148, ISBN-13: 978-8126558148.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 1 2 1 2 3 1
2 1 1 3 2 2 - - - 2 2 1 1 3 1 2
3 1 2 1 1 2 - - - 3 3 1 3 2 1 3
4 2 2 3 2 3 - - - 3 3 2 1 2 1 3
5 2 1 3 2 2 - - - 2 1 1 3 2 1 1
AVg. 1.8 1.8 2.4 1.8 2.2 - - - 2.4 2 1.4 1.8 2.2 1.4 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS333 AUGMENTED REALITY/VIRTUAL REALITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamental aspects and principles of AR/VR technologies.
 To know the internals of the hardware and software components involved in the
development of AR/VR enabled applications.
 To learn about the graphical processing units and their architectures.
 To gain knowledge about AR/VR application development.
 To know the technologies involved in the development of AR/VR based applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Introduction to Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality – Definition – Introduction to Trajectories and
Hybrid Space-Three I’s of Virtual Reality – Virtual Reality Vs 3D Computer Graphics – Benefits of
Virtual Reality – Components of VR System – Introduction to AR-AR Technologies-Input Devices –
3D Position Trackers – Types of Trackers – Navigation and Manipulation Interfaces – Gesture
Interfaces – Types of Gesture Input Devices – Output Devices – Graphics Display – Human Visual
System – Personal Graphics Displays – Large Volume Displays – Sound Displays – Human Auditory
System.

UNIT II VR MODELING 6
Modeling – Geometric Modeling – Virtual Object Shape – Object Visual Appearance – Kinematics
Modeling – Transformation Matrices – Object Position – Transformation Invariants –Object
Hierarchies – Viewing the 3D World – Physical Modeling – Collision Detection – Surface
Deformation – Force Computation – Force Smoothing and Mapping – Behavior Modeling – Model
Management.

UNIT III VR PROGRAMMING 6

VR Programming – Toolkits and Scene Graphs – World ToolKit – Java 3D – Comparison of World
ToolKit and Java 3D

158
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 6
Human Factors in VR – Methodology and Terminology – VR Health and Safety Issues – VR and
Society-Medical Applications of VR – Education, Arts and Entertainment – Military VR Applications
– Emerging Applications of VR – VR Applications in Manufacturing – Applications of VR in Robotics
– Information Visualization – VR in Business – VR in Entertainment – VR in Education.

UNIT V AUGMENTED REALITY 5

Introduction to Augmented Reality-Computer vision for AR-Interaction-Modelling and Annotation-
Navigation-Wearable devices
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Study of tools like Unity, Maya, 3DS MAX, AR toolkit, Vuforia and Blender.
2. Use the primitive objects and apply various projection types by handling camera.
3. Download objects from asset store and apply various lighting and shading effects.
4. Model three dimensional objects using various modelling techniques and apply textures over
them.
5. Create three dimensional realistic scenes and develop simple virtual reality enabled mobile
applications which have limited interactivity.
6. Add audio and text special effects to the developed application.
7. Develop VR enabled applications using motion trackers and sensors incorporating full haptic
interactivity.
8. Develop AR enabled applications with interactivity like E learning environment, Virtual
walkthroughs and visualization of historic places.
9. Develop AR enabled simple applications like human anatomy visualization, DNA/RNA
structure visualization and surgery simulation.
10. Develop simple MR enabled gaming applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of AR and VR
CO2:Understand the tools and technologies related to AR/VR
CO3:Know the working principle of AR/VR related Sensor devices
CO4:Design of various models using modeling techniques
CO5:Develop AR/VR applications in different domains
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Charles Palmer, John Williamson, “Virtual Reality Blueprints: Create compelling VR
experiences for mobile”, Packt Publisher, 2018
2. Dieter Schmalstieg, Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality: Principles & Practice”, Addison
Wesley, 2016
3. John Vince, “Introduction to Virtual Reality”, Springer-Verlag, 2004.
4. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig: Understanding Virtual Reality – Interface, Application,
Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003

159
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 - 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 1 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
AVg. 3.00 2.60 2.40 2.00 3.00 - - - 2.80 2.20 1.80 2.60 2.80 1.80 2.20
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS352 MULTIMEDIA AND ANIMATION LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To grasp the fundamental knowledge of Multimedia elements and systems
 To get familiar with Multimedia file formats and standards
 To learn the process of Authoring multimedia presentations
 To learn the techniques of animation in 2D and 3D and for the mobile UI
 To explore different popular applications of multimedia

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA 6

Definitions, Elements, Multimedia Hardware and Software, Distributed multimedia systems,
challenges: security, sharing / distribution, storage, retrieval, processing, computing. Multimedia
metadata, Multimedia databases, Hypermedia, Multimedia Learning.

UNIT II MULTIMEDIA FILE FORMATS AND STANDARDS 6

File formats – Text, Image file formats, Graphic and animation file formats, Digital audio and Video
file formats, Color in image and video, Color Models. Multimedia data and file formats for the web.

UNIT III MULTIMEDIA AUTHORING 6

Authoring metaphors, Tools Features and Types: Card and Page Based Tools, Icon and Object
Based Tools, Time Based Tools, Cross Platform Authoring Tools, Editing Tools,
Painting and Drawing Tools, 3D Modeling and Animation Tools, Image Editing Tools,
audio Editing Tools, Digital Movie Tools, Creating interactive presentations, virtual learning,
simulations.

UNIT IV ANIMATION 6
Principles of animation: staging, squash and stretch, timing, onion skinning, secondary action, 2D,
2 ½ D, and 3D animation, Animation techniques: Keyframe, Morphing, Inverse Kinematics, Hand
Drawn, Character rigging, vector animation, stop motion, motion graphics, , Fluid Simulation,
skeletal animation, skinning Virtual Reality, Augmented Reality.

UNIT V MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS 6

Multimedia Big data computing, social networks, smart phones, surveillance, Analytics, Multimedia
Cloud Computing, Multimedia streaming cloud, media on demand, security and forensics, Online
social networking, multimedia ontology, Content based retrieval from digital libraries.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
160
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Working with Image Editing tools:
Install tools like GIMP/ InkScape / Krita / Pencil and perform editing operations:
Ø Use different selection and transform tools to modify or improve an image
Ø Create logos and banners for home pages of websites.
Working with Audio Editing tools:
Ø Install tools like, Audacity / Ardour for audio editing, sound mixing and special effects like fade-in
or fade-out etc.,
Ø Perform audio compression by choosing a proper codec.
Working with Video Editing and conversion tools:
Install tools like OpenShot / Cinelerra / HandBrake for editing video content.
Ø Edit and mix video content, remove noise, create special effects, add captions.
Ø Compress and convert video file format to other popular formats.
Working with web/mobile authoring tools:
Adapt / KompoZer/ BlueGriffon / BlueFish / Aptana Studio/ NetBeans / WordPress /Expression Web:
Ø Design simple Home page with banners, logos, tables quick links etc
Ø Provide a search interface and simple navigation from the home page to the inside pages of the
website.
Ø Design Responsive web pages for use on both web and mobile interfaces.
Working with Animation tools:
Install tools like, Krita, Wick Editor, Blender:
Ø Perform a simple 2D animation with sprites
Ø Perform simple 3D animation with keyframes, kinematics
 Working with Mobile UI animation tools: Origami studio / Lottie / Framer etc.,
Working with E-Learning authoring tools:
Install tools like EdApp / Moovly / CourseLab/ IsEazy and CamStudio/Ampache, VideoLAN:
Ø Demonstrate screen recording and further editing for e-learning content.
Ø Create a simple E-Learning module for a topic of your choice.
Creating VR and AR applications:
Ø Any affordable VR viewer like Google Cardboard and any development platform like Openspace
3D / ARCore etc.

Note: all tools listed are open source. Usage of any proprietary tools in place of open source tools
is not restricted.

30 PERIODS

161
 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
WEB REFERENCES:
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]
[Link]
5. [Link]
6. [Link] (UNIT-IV)

COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Get the bigger picture of the context of Multimedia and its applications
 Use the different types of media elements of different formats on content pages
 Author 2D and 3D creative and interactive presentations for different target multimedia
applications.
 Use different standard animation techniques for 2D, 21/2 D, 3D applications
 Understand the complexity of multimedia applications in the context of cloud, security,
bigdata streaming, social networking, CBIR etc.,

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ze-Nian Li, Mark S. Drew, Jiangchuan Liu, Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Third Edition,
Springer Texts in Computer Science, 2021. (UNIT-I, II, III)

REFERENCES:
1. John M Blain, The Complete Guide to Blender Graphics: Computer Modeling & Animation,
CRC press, 3rd Edition, 2016.
2. Gerald Friedland, Ramesh Jain, “Multimedia Computing”, Cambridge University Press,
2018.
3. Prabhat [Link], Kiran Thakrar, “Multimedia System Design”, Pearson
Education, 1st Edition, 2015.
4. Mohsen Amini Salehi, Xiangbo Li, “Multimedia Cloud Computing Systems”, Springer Nature,
1st Edition, 2021.
5. Mark Gaimbruno, “3D Graphics and Animation”, Second Edition, New Riders, 2002.
6. Rogers David, “Animation: Master – A Complete Guide (Graphics Series)”, Charles River
Media, 2006.
7. Rick parent, “Computer Animation: Algorithms and Techniques”, Morgan Kauffman, 3rd
Edition, 2012.
8. Emilio Rodriguez Martinez, Mireia Alegre Ruiz, “UI Animations with Lottie and After Effects:
Create, render, and ship stunning After Effects animations natively on mobile with React
Native”, Packt Publishing, 2022.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 2 3 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 2 3
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 2 3 3 2 3

162
 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
AVg. 3.00 2.80 3.00 2.80 3.00 2.00 - - 3.00 2.80 2.20 2.60 3.00 2.40 3.00
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS371 VIDEO CREATION AND EDITING L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the broad perspective of linear and nonlinear editing concepts.
● To understand the concept of Storytelling styles.
● To be familiar with audio and video recording. To apply different media tools.
● To learn and understand the concepts of AVID XPRESS DV 4.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS 6
Evolution of filmmaking - linear editing - non-linear digital video - Economy of Expression - risks
associated with altering reality through editing.

UNIT II STORYTELLING 6
Storytelling styles in a digital world through jump cuts, L-cuts, match cuts, cutaways, dissolves, split
edits - Consumer and pro NLE systems - digitizing images - managing resolutions - mechanics of
digital editing - pointer files - media management.

UNIT III USING AUDIO AND VIDEO 6

Capturing digital and analog video importing audio putting video on exporting digital video to tape
recording to CDs and VCDs.

UNIT IV WORKING WITH FINAL CUT PRO 6

Working with clips and the Viewer - working with sequences, the Timeline, and the canvas - Basic
Editing - Adding and Editing Testing Effects - Advanced Editing and Training Techniques - Working
with Audio - Using Media Tools - Viewing and Setting Preferences.

UNIT V WORKING WITH AVID XPRESS DV 4 6

Starting Projects and Working with Project Window - Using Basic Tools and Logging - Preparing to
Record and Recording - Importing Files - Organizing with Bins - Viewing and Making Footage -
Using Timeline and Working in Trim Mode - Working with Audio - Output Options.
30 PERIODS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 30 PERIODS
1. Write a Movie Synopsis (Individual/Team Writing)
2. Present team stories in class.
3. Script/Storyboard Writing(Individual Assignment)
4. Pre-Production: Personnel, budgeting, scheduling, location scouting, casting, contracts &
agreements
5. Production: Single camera production personnel & equipment, Documentary Production
6. Writing The Final Proposal: Overview, Media Treatments, Summary, Pitching
163
 7. Write Documentary & Animation Treatment
8. Post-production: Editing, Sound design, Finishing
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Compare the strengths and limitations of Nonlinear editing.
CO2:Identify the infrastructure and significance of storytelling.
CO3:Apply suitable methods for recording to CDs and VCDs.
CO4:Address the core issues of advanced editing and training techniques.
CO5:Design and develop projects using AVID XPRESS DV 4

TEXT BOOKS
1. Avid Xpress DV 4 User Guide, 2007.
2. Final Cut Pro 6 User Manual, 2004.
3. Keith Underdahl, “Digital Video for Dummies”, Third Edition, Dummy Series, 2001.
4. Robert M. Goodman and Partick McGarth, “Editing Digital Video: The Complete Creative
and Technical Guide”, Digital Video and Audio, McGraw – Hill 2003.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 1 1 - - - 1 2 3 2 3 1 1
2 2 3 3 3 1 - - - 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
3 2 2 3 3 1 - - - 3 1 1 1 2 1 2
4 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 3 1 1 1 2 2 2
5 2 1 3 3 1 - - - 3 2 1 2 2 2 1
AVg. 2.2 1.8 2.6 2.4 1 - - - 2.2 1.6 1.6 1.4 2 1.4 1.4
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCW332 DIGITAL MARKETING L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The primary objective of this module is to examine and explore the role and importance of
digital marketing in today’s rapidly changing business environment.
 It also focuses on how digital marketing can be utilized by organizations and how
its effectiveness can be measured.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ONLINE MARKET 6

Online Market space- Digital Marketing Strategy- Components - Opportunities for building Brand
Website - Planning and Creation - Content Marketing.

UNIT II SEARCH ENGINE OPTIMISATION 6

Search Engine optimisation - Keyword Strategy- SEO Strategy - SEO success factors -On-Page
Techniques - Off-Page Techniques. Search Engine Marketing- How Search Engine works- SEM
components- PPC advertising -Display Advertisement

164
UNIT III E- MAIL MARKETING 6
E- Mail Marketing - Types of E- Mail Marketing - Email Automation - Lead Generation - Integrating
Email with Social Media and Mobile- Measuring and maximizing email campaign effectiveness.
Mobile Marketing- Mobile Inventory/channels- Location based; Context based; Coupons and offers,
Mobile Apps, Mobile Commerce, SMS Campaigns-Profiling and targeting

UNIT IV SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING 6

Social Media Marketing - Social Media Channels- Leveraging Social media for brand conversations
and buzz. Successful /benchmark Social media campaigns. Engagement Marketing- Building
Customer relationships - Creating Loyalty drivers - Influencer Marketing.

UNIT V DIGITAL TRANSFORMATION 6

Digital Transformation & Channel Attribution- Analytics- Ad-words, Email, Mobile, Social Media, Web
Analytics - Changing your strategy based on analysis- Recent trends in Digital marketing.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Subscribe to a weekly/quarterly newsletter and analyze how its content and structure aid
with the branding of the company and how it aids its potential customer segments.
2. Perform keyword search for a skincare hospital website based on search volume and
competition using Google keyword planner tool.
3. Demonstrate how to use the Google WebMasters Indexing API
4. Discuss an interesting case study regarding how an insurance company manages leads.
5. Discuss negative and positive impacts and ethical implications of using social media for
political advertising.
6. Discuss how Predictive analytics is impacting marketing automation

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: To examine and explore the role and importance of digital marketing in today’s
rapidly changing business environment..
CO2: To focuses on how digital marketing can be utilized by organizations and how its
effectiveness can be measured.
CO3: To know the key elements of a digital marketing strategy.
CO4: To study how the effectiveness of a digital marketing campaign can be measured
CO5: To demonstrate advanced practical skills in common digital marketing tools such as SEO,
SEM, Social media and Blogs.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Digital Marketing by Puneet Singh Bhatia;Publisher: Pearson Education;
2. First edition ( July 2017);ISBN-10: 933258737X;ISBN-13: 978-9332587373.
3. Digital Marketing by Vandana Ahuja ;Publisher: Oxford University Press ( April 2015). ISBN-
10: 0199455449
4. Marketing 4.0: Moving from Traditional to Digital by Philip Kotler;Publisher: Wiley; 1st edition
( April 2017); ISBN10: 9788126566938;ISBN 13: 9788126566938;ASIN: 8126566930.
5. Ryan, D. (2014 ). Understanding Digital Marketing: Marketing Strategies for Engaging the
Digital Generation, Kogan Page Limited..
6. Barker, Barker, Bormann and Neher(2017), Social Media Marketing: A Strategic Approach,
2E South-Western ,Cengage Learning.
7. Pulizzi,J Beginner's Guide to Digital Marketing , Mcgraw Hill Education
165
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 3 - - - 1 2 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 1 3 - - - 1 2 3 3 3 3 3
3 1 1 1 2 2 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
4 3 2 2 3 1 - - - 1 3 2 3 2 3 2
5 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 2 3 1 2 1 2 1
AVg. 2.2 2.2 1.6 2 2.4 - - - 1.2 2.4 2 2.4 2.4 2.6 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS373 VISUAL EFFECTS L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
● To get a basic idea on animation principles and techniques
● To get exposure to CGI, color and light elements of VFX
● To have a better understanding of basic special effects techniques
● To have a knowledge of state of the art vfx techniques
● To become familiar with popular compositing techniques

UNIT I ANIMATION BASICS 6

VFX production pipeline, Principles of animation, Techniques: Keyframe, kinematics, Full animation,
limited animation, Rotoscoping, stop motion, object animation, pixilation, rigging, shape keys, motion
paths.

UNIT II CGI, COLOR, LIGHT 6

CGI – virtual worlds, Photorealism, physical realism, function realism, 3D Modeling and Rendering:
color - Color spaces, color depth, Color grading, color effects, HDRI, Light – Area and mesh lights,
image based lights, PBR lights, photometric light, BRDF shading model

UNIT III SPECIAL EFFECTS 6

Special Effects – props, scaled models, animatronics, pyrotechniques, Schüfftan process, Particle
effects – wind, rain, fog, fire

UNIT IV VISUAL EFFECTS TECHNIQUES 6

Motion Capture, Matt Painting, Rigging, Front [Link], Match Moving – Tracking,
camera reconstruction, planar tracking, Calibration, Point Cloud Projection, Ground plane
determination, 3D Match Moving

UNIT V COMPOSITING 6
Compositing – chroma key, blue screen/green screen, background projection, alpha compositing,
deep image compositing, multiple exposure, matting, VFX tools - Blender, Natron, GIMP.
30 PERIODS

166
Laboratory Experiments:
Using Natron:
o Understanding Natron Environment:
o Working with color and using color grading
o using Channels
o Merging images
o Using Rotopaint
o performing Tracking and stabilizing
o Transforming elements
o Stereoscopic compositing
Using Blender:
Ø Motion Tracking – camera and object tracking
Ø Camera fx, color grading, vignettes
Ø Compositing images and video files
Ø Multilayer rendering
30 PERIODS
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1:To implement animation in 2D / 3D following the principles and techniques
CO2:To use CGI, color and light elements in VFX applications
CO3:To create special effects using any of the state of the art tools
CO4:To apply popular visual effects techniques using advanced tools
CO5:To use compositing tools for creating VFX for a variety of applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chris Roda, Real Time Visual Effects for the Technical Artist, CRC Press, 1st Edition, 2022.
2. Steve Wright, Digital Compositing for film and video, Routledge, 4th Edition, 2017.
3. John Gress, Digital Visual Effects and Compositing, New Riders Press, 1st Edition, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Jon Gress, “Digital Visual Effects and Compositing”, New Riders Press, 1st Edition, 2014.
2. Robin Brinkman, The Art and Science of Digital Compositing: Techniques for Visual Effects,
Animation and Motion Graphics”, Morgan Kauffman, 2008.
3. Luiz Velho, Bruno Madeira, “Introduction to Visual Effects A Computational Approach”,
Routledge, 2023.
4. Jasmine Katatikarn, Michael Tanzillo, “Lighting for Animation: The art of visual storytelling
, Routledge, 1st Edition, 2016.
5. Eran Dinur, “The Complete guide to Photorealism, for Visual Effects, Visualization
6. Jeffrey A. Okun, Susan Zwerman, Christopher McKittrick, “ The VES Handbook of Visual
Effects: Industry Standard VFX Practices and Procedures”, Third Edition, [Link]
Games”, Routledge, 1st Edition, 2022.
7. [Link]
8. [Link]

167
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 3 2
2 1 3 3 2 1 - - - 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - 1 2 1 2 2 2 2
4 3 3 2 2 3 - - - 3 3 2 2 2 3 1
5 1 2 1 1 2 - - - 1 3 2 3 2 3 1
AVg. 2 2.8 2.4 2 1.6 - - - 1.8 2.4 1.6 2 2 2.4 1.4
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS347 GAME DEVELOPMENT L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basics of 2D and 3D graphics for game development.
 To know the stages of game development.
 To understand the basics of a game engine.
 To survey the gaming development environment and tool kits.
 To learn and develop simple games using Pygame environment

UNIT I 3D GRAPHICS FOR GAME DESIGN 6

Genres of Games, Basics of 2D and 3D Graphics for Game Avatar, Game Components – 2D and
3D Transformations – Projections – Color Models – Illumination and Shader Models – Animation –
Controller Based Animation.

UNIT II GAME DESIGN PRINCIPLES 6

Character Development, Storyboard Development for Gaming – Script Design – Script Narration,
Game Balancing, Core Mechanics, Principles of Level Design – Proposals – Writing for
Preproduction, Production and Post – Production.

UNIT III GAME ENGINE DESIGN 6

Rendering Concept – Software Rendering – Hardware Rendering – Spatial Sorting Algorithms –
Algorithms for Game Engine– Collision Detection – Game Logic – Game AI – Pathfinding.

UNIT IV OVERVIEW OF GAMING PLATFORMS AND FRAMEWORKS 6

Pygame Game development – Unity – Unity Scripts –Mobile Gaming, Game Studio, Unity
Single player and Multi-Player games.

UNIT V GAME DEVELOPMENT USING PYGAME 6

Developing 2D and 3D interactive games using Pygame – Avatar Creation – 2D and 3D Graphics
Programming – Incorporating music and sound – Asset Creations – Game Physics algorithms
Development – Device Handling in Pygame – Overview of Isometric and Tile Based arcade Games
– Puzzle Games.
30 PERIODS

168
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Explain the concepts of 2D and 3d Graphics
CO2:Design game design documents.
CO3:Implementation of gaming engines.
CO4:Survey gaming environments and frameworks.
CO5:Implement a simple game in Pygame.
EXPERIMENTS: 30 PERIODS
1. Installation of a game engine, e.g., Unity, Unreal Engine, familiarization of the GUI.
Conceptualize the theme for a 2D game.
2. Character design, sprites, movement and character control
3. Level design: design of the world in the form of tiles along with interactive and collectible
objects.
4. Design of interaction between the player and the world, optionally using the physics engine.
5. Developing a 2D interactive using Pygame
6. Developing a Puzzle game
7. Design of menus and user interaction in mobile platforms.
8. Developing a 3D Game using Unreal
9. Developing a Multiplayer game using unity
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Sanjay Madhav, “Game Programming Algorithms and Techniques: A Platform Agnostic
Approach”, Addison Wesley,2013.
2. Will McGugan, “Beginning Game Development with Python and Pygame: From Novice to
Professional”, Apress,2007.
3. Paul Craven, “Python Arcade games”, Apress Publishers,2016.
4. David H. Eberly, “3D Game Engine Design: A Practical Approach to Real-Time Computer
Graphics”, Second Edition, CRC Press,2006.
5. Jung Hyun Han, “3D Graphics for Game Programming”, Chapman and Hall/CRC, 2011.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
2 1 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
3 1 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
4 3 3 1 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 3
5 3 3 2 1 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 3
AVg. 2.2 2.2 1.6 1.6 2.2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS353 MULTIMEDIA DATA COMPRESSION AND STORAGE L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of compression techniques
 To understand the categories of compression for text, image and video
 To explore the modalities of text, image and video compression algorithms
 To know about basics of consistency of data availability in storage devices
 To understand the concepts of data streaming services
169
UNIT I BASICS OF DATA COMPRESSION 6
Introduction ––Lossless and LossyCompression– Basics of Huffmann coding- Arithmetic coding-
Dictionary techniques- Context based compression – Applications

UNIT II IMAGE COMPRESSION 6

Lossless Image compression – JPEG-CALIC-JPEG LS-Prediction using conditional averages –
Progressive Image Transmission – Lossless Image compression formats – Applications - Facsimile
encoding

UNIT III VIDEO COMPRESSION 6

Introduction – Motion Compensation – Video Signal Representation – H.261 – MPEG-1- MPEG-2-
H.263.

UNIT IV DATA PLACEMENT ON DISKS 6

Statistical placement on Disks – Striping on Disks – Replication Placement on Disks – Constraint
allocation on Disks – Tertiary storage Devices – Continuous Placement on Hierarchical storage
system – Statistical placement on Hierarchical storage systems – Constraint allocation on
Hierarchical storage system

UNIT V DISK SCHEDULING METHODS 6

Scheduling methods for disk requests – Feasibility conditions of concurrent streams– Scheduling
methods for request streams
30 PERIODS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Construct Huffman codes for given symbol probabilities.

2. Encode run lengths with fixed-length code.
3. Lempel-Ziv algorithm for adaptive variable-length encoding
4. Compress the given word using arithmetic coding based on the frequency of the letters.
5. Write a shell script, which converts all images in the current directory in JPEG.
6. Write a program to split images from a video without using any primitives.
7. Create a photo album of a trip by applying appropriate image dimensions and format.
8. Write the code for identifying the popularity of content retrieval from media server.
9. Write the code for ensuring data availability in disks using strip based method.
10. Program for scheduling requests for data streams.

30 PERIODS
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basics of text, Image and Video compression
CO2: Understand the various compression algorithms for multimedia content
CO3: Explore the applications of various compression techniques
CO4: Explore knowledge on multimedia storage on disks
CO5: Understand scheduling methods for request streams

170
TEXT BOOKS
1. Khalid Sayood, Introduction to Data Compression, Morgan Kaufmann Series in Multimedia
Information and Systems, 2018, 5th Edition.
2. Philip [Link], Multimedia Information Storage and Retrieval: Techniques and
Technologies, 2008
REFERENCES
1. David Salomon, A concise introduction to data compression, 2008.
2. Lenald Best, Best’s Guide to Live Stream Video Broadcasting, BCB Live Teaching series,
2017.
3. Yun-Qing Shi, Image And Video Compression For Multimedia Engineering Fundamentals
Algorithms And Standards, Taylor& Francis,2019
4. Irina Bocharova, Compression for Multimedia, Cambridge University Press; 1st edition,
2009

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
2 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
4 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
5 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
AVg. 3 2 2 1 1.4 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS361 ROBOTIC PROCESS AUTOMATION LT P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of Robotic Process Automation.
 To expose to the key RPA design and development strategies and methodologies.
 To learn the fundamental RPA logic and structure.
 To explore the Exception Handling, Debugging and Logging operations in RPA.
 To learn to deploy and Maintain the software bot.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTIC PROCESS AUTOMATION 6

Emergence of Robotic Process Automation (RPA), Evolution of RPA, Differentiating RPA from
Automation - Benefits of RPA - Application areas of RPA, Components of RPA, RPA Platforms.
Robotic Process Automation Tools - Templates, User Interface, Domains in Activities, Workflow
Files.

UNIT II AUTOMATION PROCESS ACTIVITIES 6

Sequence, Flowchart & Control Flow: Sequencing the Workflow, Activities, Flowchart, Control Flow
for Decision making. Data Manipulation: Variables, Collection, Arguments, Data Table, Clipboard
management, File operations Controls: Finding the control, waiting for a control, Act on a control,
UiExplorer, Handling Events

171
UNIT III APP INTEGRATION, RECORDING AND SCRAPING 6
App Integration, Recording, Scraping, Selector, Workflow Activities. Recording mouse and keyboard
actions to perform operation, Scraping data from website and writing to CSV. Process Mining.

UNIT IV EXCEPTION HANDLING AND CODE MANAGEMENT 6

Exception handling, Common exceptions, Logging- Debugging techniques, Collecting crash dumps,
Error reporting. Code management and maintenance: Project organization, Nesting workflows,
Reusability, Templates, Commenting techniques, State Machine.

UNIT V DEPLOYMENT AND MAINTENANCE 6

Publishing using publish utility, Orchestration Server, Control bots, Orchestration Server to deploy
bots, License management, Publishing and managing updates. RPA Vendors - Open Source
RPA, Future of RPA
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
Setup and Configure a RPA tool and understand the user interface of the tool:
1. Create a Sequence to obtain user inputs display them using a message box;
2. Create a Flowchart to navigate to a desired page based on a condition;
3. Create a State Machine workflow to compare user input with a random number.
4. Build a process in the RPA platform using UI Automation Activities.
5. Create an automation process using key System Activities, Variables and Arguments
6. Also implement Automation using System Trigger
7. Automate login to (web)Email account
8. Recording mouse and keyboard actions.
9. Scraping data from website and writing to CSV
10. Implement Error Handling in RPA platform
11. Web Scraping
12. Email Query Processing
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
By the end of this course, the students will be able to:
 Enunciate the key distinctions between RPA and existing automation techniques and
platforms.
 Use UiPath to design control flows and work flows for the target process
 Implement recording, web scraping andprocess mining by automation
 Use UIPath Studio to detect, and handle exceptions in automation processes
 Implement and use Orchestrator for creation, monitoring, scheduling, and controlling of
automated bots and processes.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Learning Robotic Process Automation: Create Software robots and automate business
processes with the leading RPA tool - UiPath by Alok Mani Tripathi, Packt Publishing, 2018.
2. Tom Taulli , “The Robotic Process Automation Handbook: A Guide to Implementing RPA
Systems”, Apress publications, 2020.

172
REFERENCES:
1. Frank Casale (Author), Rebecca Dilla (Author), Heidi Jaynes (Author), Lauren Livingston
(Author), Introduction to Robotic Process Automation: a Primer, Institute of Robotic Process
Automation, Amazon Asia-Pacific Holdings Private Limited, 2018
2. Richard Murdoch, Robotic Process Automation: Guide To Building Software Robots,
Automate Repetitive Tasks & Become An RPA Consultant, Amazon Asia-Pacific Holdings
Private Limited, 2018
3. A Gerardus Blokdyk, “Robotic Process Automation Rpa A Complete Guide “, 2020

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 3 - - - 1 3 3 2 2 2 1
2 1 1 2 3 3 - - - 1 2 3 1 3 2 1
3 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 2 3 1 1 3 3 3
4 1 2 1 2 2 - - - 1 2 1 3 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 1 1 1 3 2 1
AVg. 2 2.2 2 2.4 2.8 - - - 1.6 2.2 1.8 1.6 2.8 2.4 1.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS340 CYBER SECURITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn cybercrime and cyberlaw.
 To understand the cyber attacks and tools for mitigating them.
 To understand information gathering.
 To learn how to detect a cyber attack.
 To learn how to prevent a cyber attack.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Cyber Security – History of Internet – Impact of Internet – CIA Triad; Reason for Cyber Crime –
Need for Cyber Security – History of Cyber Crime; Cybercriminals – Classification of Cybercrimes –
A Global Perspective on Cyber Crimes; Cyber Laws – The Indian IT Act – Cybercrime and
Punishment.

UNIT II ATTACKS AND COUNTERMEASURES 6

OSWAP; Malicious Attack Threats and Vulnerabilities: Scope of Cyber-Attacks – Security Breach –
Types of Malicious Attacks – Malicious Software – Common Attack Vectors – Social engineering
Attack – Wireless Network Attack – Web Application Attack – Attack Tools – Countermeasures.

UNIT III RECONNAISSANCE 5

Harvester – Whois – Netcraft – Host – Extracting Information from DNS – Extracting Information
from E-mail Servers – Social Engineering Reconnaissance; Scanning – Port Scanning – Network
Scanning and Vulnerability Scanning – Scanning Methodology – Ping Sweer Techniques – Nmap
Command Switches – SYN – Stealth – XMAS – NULL – IDLE – FIN Scans – Banner Grabbing and
OS Finger printing Techniques.

173
UNIT IV INTRUSION DETECTION 5
Host -Based Intrusion Detection – Network -Based Intrusion Detection – Distributed or Hybrid
Intrusion Detection – Intrusion Detection Exchange Format – Honeypots – Example System Snort.

UNIT V INTRUSION PREVENTION 5

Firewalls and Intrusion Prevention Systems: Need for Firewalls – Firewall Characteristics and
Access Policy – Types of Firewalls – Firewall Basing – Firewall Location and Configurations –
Intrusion Prevention Systems – Example Unified Threat Management Products.
30 PERIODS

PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS

1. Install Kali Linux on Virtual box
2. Explore Kali Linux and bash scripting
3. Perform open source intelligence gathering using Netcraft, Whois Lookups, DNS
Reconnaissance, Harvester and Maltego
4. Understand the nmap command d and scan a target using nmap
5. Install metasploitable2 on the virtual box and search for unpatched vulnerabilities
6. Use Metasploit to exploit an unpatched vulnerability
7. Install Linus server on the virtual box and install ssh
8. Use Fail2banto scan log files and ban Ips that show the malicious signs
9. Launch brute-force attacks on the Linux server using Hydra.
10. Perform real-time network traffic analysis and data pocket logging using Snort
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the basics of cyber security, cyber crime and cyber law (K2)
CO2: Classify various types of attacks and learn the tools to launch the attacks (K2)
CO3 Apply various tools to perform information gathering (K3)
CO4: Apply intrusion techniques to detect intrusion (K3)
CO5: Apply intrusion prevention techniques to prevent intrusion (K3)
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS
1. Anand Shinde, “Introduction to Cyber Security Guide to the World of Cyber Security”, Notion
Press, 2021 (Unit 1)
2. Nina Godbole, Sunit Belapure, “Cyber Security: Understanding Cyber Crimes, Computer
Forensics and Legal Perspectives”, Wiley Publishers, 2011 (Unit 1)
3. [Link]
REFERENCES
1. David Kim, Michael G. Solomon, “Fundamentals of Information Systems Security”, Jones &
Bartlett Learning Publishers, 2013 (Unit 2)
2. Patrick Engebretson, “The Basics of Hacking and Penetration Testing: Ethical Hacking and
Penetration Testing Made easy”, Elsevier, 2011 (Unit 3)
3. Kimberly Graves, “CEH Official Certified Ethical hacker Review Guide”, Wiley Publishers,
2007 (Unit 3)
4. William Stallings, Lawrie Brown, “Computer Security Principles and Practice”, Third Edition,
Pearson Education, 2015 (Units 4 and 5)
5. Georgia Weidman, “Penetration Testing: A Hands-On Introduction to Hacking”, No Starch
Press, 2014 (Lab)

174
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - 1 - 2 2 2
2 1 3 1 3 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1
3 2 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - 1 - 2 2 2
4 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 3
5 3 2 1 1 1 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2 1.2 1.6 1 1 0 0.2 0 0 0.6 0 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS359 QUANTUM COMPUTING L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the background of classical computing and quantum computing.
 To learn the fundamental concepts behind quantum computation.
 To study the details of quantum mechanics and its relation to Computer Science.
 To gain knowledge about the basic hardware and mathematical models of quantum
computation.
 To learn the basics of quantum information and the theory behind it.

UNIT I QUANTUM COMPUTING BASIC CONCEPTS 6

Complex Numbers - Linear Algebra - Matrices and Operators - Global Perspectives Postulates of
Quantum Mechanics – Quantum Bits - Representations of Qubits - Superpositions

UNIT II QUANTUM GATES AND CIRCUITS 5

Universal logic gates - Basic single qubit gates - Multiple qubit gates - Circuit development -
Quantum error correction

UNIT III QUANTUM ALGORITHMS 7

Quantum parallelism - Deutsch’s algorithm - The Deutsch–Jozsa algorithm - Quantum Fourier
transform and its applications - Quantum Search Algorithms: Grover’s Algorithm

UNIT IV QUANTUM INFORMATION THEORY 6

Data compression - Shannon’s noiseless channel coding theorem - Schumacher’s quantum
noiseless channel coding theorem - Classical information over noisy quantum channels

UNIT V QUANTUM CRYPTOGRAPHY 6

Classical cryptography basic concepts - Private key cryptography - Shor’s Factoring Algorithm -
Quantum Key Distribution - BB84 - Ekart 91
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES 30 PERIODS
1. Single qubit gate simulation - Quantum Composer
2. Multiple qubit gate simulation - Quantum Composer
3. Composing simple quantum circuits with q-gates and measuring the output into classical
bits.
4. IBM Qiskit Platform Introduction
175
5. Implementation of Shor’s Algorithms
6. Implementation of Grover’s Algorithm
7. Implementation of Deutsch’s Algorithm
8. Implementation of Deutsch-Jozsa’s Algorithm
9. Integer factorization using Shor’s Algorithm
10. QKD Simulation
11. Mini Project such as implementing an API for efficient search using Grover’s Algorithms or

COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basics of quantum computing.
CO2: Understand the background of Quantum Mechanics.
CO3: Analyze the computation models.
CO4: Model the circuits using quantum computation.
environments and frameworks.
CO5: Understand the quantum operations such as noise and error–correction.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Parag K Lala, Mc Graw Hill Education, “Quantum Computing, A Beginners Introduction”,
First edition (1 November 2020).
2. Michael A. Nielsen, Issac L. Chuang, “Quantum Computation and Quantum Information”,
Tenth Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
3. Chris Bernhardt, The MIT Press; Reprint edition (8 September 2020), “Quantum Computing
for Everyone”.

REFERENCES
1. Scott Aaronson, “Quantum Computing Since Democritus”, Cambridge University Press,
2013.
2. N. David Mermin, “Quantum Computer Science: An Introduction”, Cambridge University
Press, 2007.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 3 2
2 3 2 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 3 1
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 3 - - - 3 2 2
4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 - - - 1 3 2
5 3 3 2 3 - - - - 2 - - - 1 3 3
AVg. 3 2.6 2.4 2.6 1 - - - 2.4 - - - 1.8 2.8 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

176
CCS331 3D PRINTING AND DESIGN LT P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To discuss on basics of 3D printing
To explain the principles of 3D printing technique
 To explain and illustrate inkjet technology
 To explain and illustrate laser technology
 To discuss the applications of 3D printing

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Introduction; Design considerations – Material, Size, Resolution, Process; Modelling and viewing -
3D; Scanning; Model preparation – Digital; Slicing; Software; File formats

UNIT II PRINCIPLE 6
Processes – Extrusion, Wire, Granular, Lamination, Photopolymerisation; Materials - Paper,
Plastics, Metals, Ceramics, Glass, Wood, Fiber, Sand, Biological Tissues, Hydrogels, Graphene;
Material Selection - Processes, applications, limitations;

UNIT III INKJET TECHNOLOGY 6

Printer - Working Principle, Positioning System, Print head, Print bed, Frames, Motion control; Print
head Considerations – Continuous Inkjet, Thermal Inkjet, Piezoelectric Drop-On-Demand; Material
Formulation for jetting; Liquid based fabrication – Continous jet, Mulitjet; Powder based fabrication
– Colourjet.

UNIT IV LASER TECHNOLOGY 6

Light Sources – Types, Characteristics; Optics – Deflection, Modulation; Material feeding and flow
– Liquid, powder; Printing machines – Types, Working Principle, Build Platform, Print bed
Movement, Support structures;

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 6

Product Models, manufacturing – Printed electronics, Biopolymers, Packaging, Healthcare, Food,
Medical, Biotechnology, Displays; Future trends;
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Study the interface and basic tools in the CAD software.
2. Study 3D printer(s) including print heads, build envelope, materials used and related
support removal system(s).
3. Review of geometry terms of a 3D mesh.
4. Commands for moving from 2D to 3D.
5. Advanced CAD commands to navigate models in 3D space
6. Design any four everyday objects
Refer to web sites like Thingiverse, Shapeways and GitFab to design four everyday objects
that utilize the advantages of 3D printing
. Choose four models from a sharing site like Thingiverse, Shapeways or Gitfab.
a. Improve upon a file and make it your own. Some ideas include:
• Redesign it with a specific user in mind

177
• Redesign it for a slightly different purpose
• Improve the look of the product
7. Use the CAM software to prepare files for 3D printing.
8. Manipulate machine movement and material layering.
9. Repair a 3D mesh using
a) Freeware utilities: Autodesk MeshMixer ([Link] MeshLab ([Link] or
Netfabb Basic or Cloud Service ([Link]
b) Freeware tool tutorials: Netfabb Basic or Cloud Service ([Link] Netfabb and
MeshLab ([Link]
c) Professional tools: Magics or Netfabb
Equipment : one 3D printer for every 10-15 students

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Outline and examine the basic concepts of 3D printing technology
CO2:Outline 3D printing workflow`
CO3: Explain and categorise the concepts and working principles of 3D printing using inkjet
technique
CO4: Explain and categorise the working principles of 3D printing using laser technique
CO5: Explain various method for designing and modeling for industrial applications
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Christopher Barnatt, 3D Printing: The Next Industrial Revolution, CreateSpace Independent
Publishing Platform, 2013.
2. Ian M. Hutchings, Graham D. Martin, Inkjet Technology for Digital Fabrication, John Wiley &
Sons, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Chua, C.K., Leong K.F. and Lim C.S., Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications, second
edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010
2. Ibrahim Zeid, Mastering CAD CAM Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., 2007
3. Joan Horvath, Mastering 3D Printing, APress, 2014

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 2 3 1 - - 2 - 2 2 3 2 1
2 3 2 3 3 3 2 - - 3 - 3 2 3 2 3
3 2 2 2 2 2 2 - - 2 - 2 2 3 2 2
4 2 2 2 2 3 2 - - 2 - 2 2 3 3 2
5 1 3 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - 3 3 3 3 1
AVg. 1.8 2 2.4 2.4 2.8 2 - - 2.4 - 2.4 2.2 3 2.4 1.8
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

178
CCS350 KNOWLEDGE ENGINEERING L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of Knowledge Engineering.
 To discuss methodologies and modeling for Agent Design and Development.
 To design and develop ontologies.
 To apply reasoning with ontologies and rules.
 To understand learning and rule learning.

UNIT I REASONING UNDER UNCERTAINTY 6

Introduction – Abductive reasoning – Probabilistic reasoning: Enumerative Probabilities – Subjective
Bayesian view – Belief Functions – Baconian Probability – Fuzzy Probability – Uncertainty methods
- Evidence-based reasoning – Intelligent Agent – Mixed-Initiative Reasoning – Knowledge
Engineering.

UNIT II METHODOLOGY AND MODELING 6

Conventional Design and Development – Development tools and Reusable Ontologies – Agent
Design and Development using Learning Technology – Problem Solving through Analysis and
Synthesis – Inquiry-driven Analysis and Synthesis – Evidence-based Assessment – Believability
Assessment – Drill-Down Analysis, Assumption-based Reasoning, and What-If Scenarios.

UNIT III ONTOLOGIES – DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT 6

Concepts and Instances – Generalization Hierarchies – Object Features – Defining Features –
Representation – Transitivity – Inheritance – Concepts as Feature Values – Ontology Matching.
Design and Development Methodologies – Steps in Ontology Development – Domain
Understanding and Concept Elicitation – Modelling-based Ontology Specification.

UNIT IV REASONIING WITH ONTOLOGIES AND RULES 6

Production System Architecture – Complex Ontology-based Concepts – Reduction and Synthesis
rules and the Inference Engine – Evidence-based hypothesis analysis – Rule and Ontology
Matching – Partially Learned Knowledge – Reasoning with Partially Learned Knowledge.

UNIT V LEARNING AND RULE LEARNING 6

Machine Learning – Concepts – Generalization and Specialization Rules – Types – Formal definition
of Generalization. Modelling, Learning and Problem Solving – Rule learning and Refinement –
Overview – Rule Generation and Analysis – Hypothesis Learning.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Perform operations with Evidence Based Reasoning.
2. Perform Evidence based Analysis.
3. Perform operations on Probability Based Reasoning.
4. Perform Believability Analysis.
5. Implement Rule Learning and refinement.
6. Perform analysis based on learned patterns.
7. Construction of Ontology for a given domain.

179
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basics of Knowledge Engineering.
CO2: Apply methodologies and modelling for Agent Design and Development.
CO3: Design and develop ontologies.
CO4: Apply reasoning with ontologies and rules.
CO5: Understand learning and rule learning.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gheorghe Tecuci, Dorin Marcu, Mihai Boicu, David A. Schum, Knowledge Engineering
Building Cognitive Assistants for Evidence-based Reasoning, Cambridge University Press,
First Edition, 2016. (Unit 1 – Chapter 1 / Unit 2 – Chapter 3,4 / Unit 3 – Chapter 5, 6 / Unit 4
- 7 , Unit 5 – Chapter 8, 9 )
REFERENCES:
1. Ronald J. Brachman, Hector J. Levesque: Knowledge Representation and Reasoning,
Morgan Kaufmann, 2004.
2. Ela Kumar, Knowledge Engineering, I K International Publisher House, 2018.
3. John F. Sowa: Knowledge Representation: Logical, Philosophical, and Computational
Foundations, Brooks/Cole, Thomson Learning, 2000.
4. King , Knowledge Management and Organizational Learning , Springer, 2009.
5. Jay Liebowitz, Knowledge Management Learning from Knowledge Engineering, 1st
Edition,2001.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1 1 - - 1 2 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 2 3 2 2 - - - 2 1 2 1 3 3 1
3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
4 2 2 3 1 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
5 2 2 2 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
AVg. 2.4 1.8 2.4 1.4 1.4 0.2 0 0 2 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.2 1.6 1.4
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS364 SOFT COMPUTING L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the ideas of fuzzy sets, fuzzy logic and use of heuristics based on human
experience.
 To provide the mathematical background for carrying out the optimization associated with
neural network learning
 To learn various evolutionary Algorithms.
 To become familiar with neural networks that can learn from available examples and
generalize to form appropriate rules for inference systems.
 To introduce case studies utilizing the above and illustrate the Intelligent behavior of
programs based on soft computing

180
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING AND FUZZY LOGIC 6
Introduction - Fuzzy Logic - Fuzzy Sets, Fuzzy Membership Functions, Operations on Fuzzy Sets,
Fuzzy Relations, Operations on Fuzzy Relations, Fuzzy Rules and Fuzzy Reasoning, Fuzzy
Inference Systems

UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS 6

Supervised Learning Neural Networks – Perceptrons - Backpropagation -Multilayer Perceptrons –
Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks – Kohonen Self-Organizing Networks

UNIT III GENETIC ALGORITHMS 6

Chromosome Encoding Schemes -Population initialization and selection methods - Evaluation
function - Genetic operators- Cross over – Mutation - Fitness Function – Maximizing function

UNIT IV NEURO FUZZY MODELING 6

ANFIS architecture – hybrid learning – ANFIS as universal approximator – Coactive Neuro fuzzy
modeling – Framework – Neuron functions for adaptive networks – Neuro fuzzy spectrum - Analysis
of Adaptive Learning Capability

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 6
Modeling a two input sine function - Printed Character Recognition – Fuzzy filtered neural networks
– Plasma Spectrum Analysis – Hand written neural recognition - Soft Computing for Color Recipe
Prediction.
30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the fundamentals of fuzzy logic operators and inference mechanisms
CO2: Understand neural network architecture for AI applications such as classification and
clustering
CO3: Learn the functionality of Genetic Algorithms in Optimization problems
CO4: Use hybrid techniques involving Neural networks and Fuzzy logic
CO5: Apply soft computing techniques in real world applications

PRACTICAL EXERCISES 30 PERIODS

1. Implementation of fuzzy control/ inference system
2. Programming exercise on classification with a discrete perceptron
3. Implementation of XOR with backpropagation algorithm
4. Implementation of self organizing maps for a specific application
5. Programming exercises on maximizing a function using Genetic algorithm
6. Implementation of two input sine function
7. Implementation of three input non linear function
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. SaJANG, J.-S. R., SUN, C.-T., & MIZUTANI, E. (1997). Neuro-fuzzy and soft computing: A
computational approach to learning and machine intelligence. Upper Saddle River, NJ,
Prentice Hall,1997
2. Himanshu Singh, Yunis Ahmad Lone, Deep Neuro-Fuzzy Systems with Python
3. With Case Studies and Applications from the Industry, Apress, 2020

181
REFERENCES
1. roj Kaushik and Sunita Tiwari, Soft Computing-Fundamentals Techniques and Applications,
1st Edition, McGraw Hill, 2018.
2. S. Rajasekaran and [Link], “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms”, PHI,
2003.
3. Samir Roy, Udit Chakraborthy, Introduction to Soft Computing, Neuro Fuzzy and Genetic
Algorithms, Pearson Education, 2013.
4. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Third Edition, Wiley India Pvt
Ltd, 2019.
5. [Link], [Link] and [Link], “Computational Intelligence - PC Tools”, AP
Professional, Boston, 1996

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 3 1 3 2 3 1 2
2 2 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 2 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 3 2 2 1 - - - 3 1 1 2 1 3 2
4 1 2 1 3 2 - - - 3 3 1 1 2 1 1
5 2 3 1 2 1 - - - 3 3 3 2 1 2 3
AVg. 1.8 2.6 2 2.4 2 - - - 3 2 2.2 1.8 1.8 1.6 2.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS357 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to enable the student to
 Formulate and solve linear programming problems (LPP)
 Evaluate Integer Programming Problems, Transportation and Assignment Problems.
 Obtain a solution to network problems using CPM and PERT techniques.
 Able to optimize the function subject to the constraints.
 Identify and solve problems under Markovian queuing models.

UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 6

Introduction of Operations Research - mathematical formulation of LPP- Graphical Methods to solve
LPP- Simplex Method- Two-Phase method

UNIT II INTEGER PROGRAMMING AND TRANSPORTATION PROBLEMS 6

Integer programming: Branch and bound method- Transportation and Assignment problems -
Traveling salesman problem.

UNIT III PROJECT SCHEDULING 6

Project network -Diagram representation – Floats - Critical path method (CPM) – PERT- Cost
considerations in PERT and CPM.

182
UNIT IV CLASSICAL OPTIMIZATION THEORY 6
Unconstrained problems – necessary and sufficient conditions - Newton-Raphson method,
Constrained problems – equality constraints – inequality constraints - Kuhn-Tucker conditions.

UNIT V QUEUING MODELS 6

Introduction, Queuing Theory, Operating characteristics of a Queuing system, Constituents of a
Queuing system, Service facility, Queue discipline, Single channel models, multiple service
channels.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICALS
[Link] simplex maximization problems using R programming.
2. Solving simplex minimization problems using R programming.
3. Solving mixed constraints problems – Big M & Two phase method using TORA.
4. Solving transportation problems using R.
5. Solving assignment problems using R.
6. Solving optimization problems using LINGO.
7. Studying Primal-Dual relationships in LP using TORA.
8. Solving LP problems using dual simplex method using TORA.
9. Sensitivity & post optimality analysis using LINGO.
10. Solving shortest route problems using optimization software
11. Solving Project Management problems using optimization software
12. Testing random numbers and random variates for their uniformity.
13. Testing random numbers and random variates for their independence
14. Solve single server queuing model using simulation software package.
15. Solve multi server queuing model using simulation software package.
30 PERIODS
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will able to
CO1:Formulate and solve linear programming problems (LPP)
CO2:Evaluate Integer Programming Problems, Transportation and Assignment Problems.
CO3:Obtain a solution to network problems using CPM and PERT techniques.
CO4:Able to optimize the function subject to the constraints.
CO5:Identify and solve problems under Markovian queuing models

TEXT BOOK:
1. Hamdy A Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Pearson, 10th Edition, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. ND Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2011.
2. J. K. Sharma, Operations Research Theory and Applications, Macmillan, 5th Edition, 2012.
3. Hiller F.S, Liberman G.J, Introduction to Operations Research, 10th Edition McGraw Hill,
2017.
4. Jit. S. Chandran, Mahendran P. Kawatra, KiHoKim, Essentials of Linear Programming,
Vikas Publishing House [Link]. New Delhi, 1994.
5. Ravindran A., Philip D.T., and Solberg J.J., Operations Research, John Wiley, 2nd Edition,
2007.

183
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 3 3 3
2 3 1 2 2 3 - - - 3 2 3 1 2 1 1
3 2 3 3 2 2 - - - 3 3 1 3 1 3 1
4 2 2 1 1 3 - - - 2 1 3 1 2 1 2
5 2 1 1 3 2 - - - 3 3 1 3 3 2 1
AVg. 2.4 2 1.8 1.8 2.2 - - - 2.6 2 1.8 2 2.2 2 1.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS348 GAME THEORY L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the student to the notion of a game, its solutions concepts, and other basic
notions and tools of game theory, and the main applications for which they are appropriate,
including electronic trading markets.
 To formalize the notion of strategic thinking and rational choice by using the tools of game
theory, and to provide insights into using game theory in 41odeIIing applications.
 To draw the connections between game theory, computer science, and economics,
especially emphasizing the computational issues.
 To introduce contemporary topics in the intersection of game theory, computer science,
and economics.
 To apply game theory in searching, auctioning and trading.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Introduction — Making rational choices: basics of Games — strategy — preferences — payoffs —
Mathematical basics — Game theory — Rational Choice — Basic solution concepts-non-
cooperative versus cooperative games — Basic computational issues — finding equilibria and
learning in games- Typical application areas for game theory (e.g. Google's sponsored search, eBay
auctions, electricity trading markets).

UNIT II GAMES WITH PERFECT INFORMATION 6

Games with Perfect Information — Strategic games — prisoner's dilemma, matching pennies - Nash
equilibria —mixed strategy equilibrium — zero-sum games

UNIT III GAMES WITH IMPERFECT INFORMATION 6

Games with Imperfect Information — Bayesian Games — Motivational Examples — General

Definitions — Information aspects — Illustrations — Extensive Games with Imperfect — Information
— Strategies — Nash Equilibrium —Repeated Games — The Prisoner's Dilemma — Bargaining

UNIT IV NON-COOPERATIVE GAME THEORY 6

Non-cooperative Game Theory — Self-interested agents — Games in normal form — Analyzing
games: from optimality to equilibrium — Computing Solution Concepts of Normal — Form Games
— Computing Nash equilibria of two-player, zero-sum games —Computing Nash equilibria of two-
player, general- sum games — Identifying dominated strategies

184
UNIT V MECHANISM DESIGN 6
Aggregating Preferences — Social Choice — Formal Model — Voting — Existence of social functions
— Ranking systems — Protocols for Strategic Agents: Mechanism Design — Mechanism design with
unrestricted preferences
30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1:Discuss the notion of a strategic game and equilibria and identify the characteristics of main
applications of these concepts.
CO2:Discuss the use of Nash Equilibrium for other problems.
CO3:Identify key strategic aspects and based on these be able to connect them to appropriate
game theoretic concepts given a real world situation.
CO4:Identify some applications that need aspects of Bayesian Games.
CO5:Implement a typical Virtual Business scenario using Game theory.

LABORATORY EXERCISES:
1. Prisoner’s dilemma
2. Pure Strategy Nash Equilibrium
3. Extensive Form – Graphs and Trees, Game Trees
4. Strategic Form – Elimination of dominant strategy
5. Minimax theorem, minimax strategies
6. Perfect information games: trees, players assigned to nodes, payoffs, backward Induction,
subgame perfect equilibrium,
7. imperfect-information games - Mixed Strategy Nash Equilibrium - Finding mixed-strategy
Nash equilibria for zero sum games, mixed versus behavioral strategies.
8. Repeated Games
9. Bayesian Nash equilibrium

30 PERIODS
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. M. J. Osborne, An Introduction to Game Theory. Oxford University Press, 2012.

2. M. Machler, E. Solan, S. Zamir, Game Theory, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
3. N. Nisan, T. Roughgarden, E. Tardos, and V. V. Vazirani, Algorithmic Game Theory.
Cambridge University Press, 2007.
4. [Link] and S. Skeath, Games of Strategy, Second Edition. W W Norton & Co Inc, 2004.
5. YoavShoham, Kevin Leyton-Brown, Multiagent Systems: Algorithmic, Game-Theoretic,
and Logical Foundations, Cambridge University Press 2008.
6. Zhu Han, DusitNiyato, WalidSaad, TamerBasar and Are Hjorungnes, “Game Theory in
Wireless and Communication Networks”, Cambridge University Press, 2012.
7. [Link], “Game Theory and Mechanism Design”, IISC Press, World Scientific.
8. William Spaniel, “Game Theory 101: The Complete Textbook”, CreateSpace Independent
Publishing, 2011.

185
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 1 3
2 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
3 1 1 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 1 2
4 2 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 2
5 2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 2
AVg. 2.2 2 2.4 2.2 2.2 - - - - - - - 1 1 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS337 COGNITIVE SCIENCE L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the theoretical background of cognition.
 To understand the link between cognition and computational intelligence.
 To explore probabilistic programming language.
 To study the computational inference models of cognition.
 To study the computational learning models of cognition.

UNIT I PHILOSOPHY, PSYCHOLOGY AND NEUROSCIENCE 6

Philosophy: Mental-physical Relation – From Materialism to Mental Science – Logic and the
Sciences of the Mind – Psychology: Place of Psychology within Cognitive Science – Science of
Information Processing –Cognitive Neuroscience – Perception – Decision – Learning and Memory
– Language Understanding and Processing.

UNIT II COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE 6

Machines and Cognition – Artificial Intelligence – Architectures of Cognition – Knowledge Based
Systems – Logical Representation and Reasoning – Logical Decision Making –Learning – Language
– Vision.

UNIT III PROBABILISTIC PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE 6

WebPPL Language – Syntax – Using Javascript Libraries – Manipulating probability types and
distributions – Finding Inference – Exploring random computation – Coroutines: Functions that
receive continuations –Enumeration

UNIT IV INFERENCE MODELS OF COGNITION 6

Generative Models – Conditioning – Causal and statistical dependence – Conditional dependence
– Data Analysis – Algorithms for Inference.

UNIT V LEARNING MODELS OF COGNITION 6

Learning as Conditional Inference – Learning with a Language of Thought – Hierarchical Models–
Learning (Deep) Continuous Functions – Mixture Models.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES
[Link] of Mathematical functions using WebPPL.
2. Implementation of reasoning algorithms.
186
3. Developing an Application system using generative model.
4. Developing an Application using conditional inference learning model.
5. Application development using hierarchical model.
6. Application development using Mixture model.
30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Understand the underlying theory behind cognition.
CO2:Connect to the cognition elements computationally.
CO3:Implement mathematical functions through WebPPL.
CO4:Develop applications using cognitive inference model.
CO5:Develop applications using cognitive learning model.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijay V Raghavan,Venkat [Link], VenuGovindaraju, C.R. Rao, Cognitive Computing:
Theory and Applications: (Handbook of Statistics 35), Elsevier publications, 2016
2. Judith Hurwitz, Marcia Kaufman, Adrian Bowles, Cognitive Computing and Big Data
Analytics, Wiley Publications, 2015
3. Robert A. Wilson, Frank C. Keil, “The MIT Encyclopedia of the Cognitive Sciences”,The MIT
Press, 1999.
4. Jose Luis Bermúdez, Cognitive Science -An Introduction to the Science of the Mind,
Cambridge University Press 2020

REFERENCES:

1. Noah D. Goodman, Andreas Stuhlmuller, “The Design and Implementation of Probabilistic

Programming Languages”, Electronic version of book, [Link]
2. Noah D. Goodman, Joshua B. Tenenbaum, The ProbMods Contributors, “Probabilistic
Models of Cognition”, Second Edition, 2016, [Link]

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 3 2 2 - - - 1 1 2 2 1 2 2
2 2 2 1 1 2 - - - 3 2 3 1 2 3 2
3 1 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 3 1 3 3 1 2
4 2 1 1 2 3 - - - 1 2 3 1 3 3 1
5 1 2 3 2 2 - - - 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
AVG 1.8 1.8 1.8 2 2.4 - - - 1.4 2 2.2 1.8 2.2 2.2 1.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

CCS345 ETHICS AND AI L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Study the morality and ethics in AI
 Learn about the Ethical initiatives in the field of artificial intelligence

187
  Study about AI standards and Regulations
 Study about social and ethical issues of Robot Ethics
 Study about AI and Ethics- challenges and opportunities

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Definition of morality and ethics in AI-Impact on society-Impact on human psychology-Impact on the
legal system-Impact on the environment and the planet-Impact on trust

UNIT II ETHICAL INITIATIVES IN AI 6

International ethical initiatives-Ethical harms and concerns-Case study: healthcare robots,
Autonomous Vehicles , Warfare and weaponization.

UNIT III AI STANDARDS AND REGULATION 6

Model Process for Addressing Ethical Concerns During System Design - Transparency of
Autonomous Systems-Data Privacy Process- Algorithmic Bias Considerations -
Ontological Standard for Ethically Driven Robotics and Automation Systems

UNIT IV ROBOETHICS: SOCIAL AND ETHICAL IMPLICATION OF ROBOTICS 6

Robot-Roboethics- Ethics and Morality- Moral Theories-Ethics in Science and Technology - Ethical
Issues in an ICT Society- Harmonization of Principles- Ethics and Professional Responsibility-
Roboethics Taxonomy.

UNIT V AI AND ETHICS- CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES 6

Challenges - Opportunities- ethical issues in artificial intelligence- Societal Issues Concerning the
Application of Artificial Intelligence in Medicine- decision-making role in industries-National and
International Strategies on AI.
30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Learn about morality and ethics in AI
CO2:Acquire the knowledge of real time application ethics, issues and its challenges.
CO3:Understand the ethical harms and ethical initiatives in AI
CO4:Learn about AI standards and Regulations like AI Agent, Safe Design of Autonomous and
Semi-Autonomous Systems
CO5:Understand the concepts of Roboethics and Morality with professional responsibilities.
CO6:Learn about the societal issues in AI with National and International Strategies on AI

PRACTICAL EXERCISES 30 PERIODS

1. Recent case study of ethical initiatives in healthcare, autonomous vehicles and defense
2. Exploratory data analysis on a 2 variable linear regression model
3. Experiment the regression model without a bias and with bias
4. Classification of a dataset from UCI repository using a perceptron with and without bias
5. Case study on ontology where ethics is at stake
6. Identification on optimization in AI affecting ethics
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. y. Eleanor Bird, Jasmin Fox-Skelly, Nicola Jenner, Ruth Larbey, Emma Weitkamp and Alan
Winfield ,”The ethics of artificial intelligence: Issues and initiatives”, EPRS | European
188
 Parliamentary Research Service Scientific Foresight Unit (STOA) PE 634.452 – March
2020
2. Patrick Lin, Keith Abney, George A Bekey,” Robot Ethics: The Ethical and Social Implications
of Robotics”, The MIT Press- January 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Towards a Code of Ethics for Artificial Intelligence (Artificial Intelligence: Foundations,
Theory, and Algorithms) by Paula Boddington, November 2017
2. Mark Coeckelbergh,” AI Ethics”, The MIT Press Essential Knowledge series, April 2020
3. Web link:
4. [Link]
5. [Link]
challenges-and-opportunities/
6. [Link]
7. [Link]

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 1 1
2 2 1 1 2 1 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 3 1
3 2 3 1 1 3 - - - 2 1 1 2 3 2 2
4 3 1 3 3 2 - - - 2 2 3 1 2 1 3
5 3 1 1 3 3 - - - 2 3 3 3 1 3 3
AVg. 2.6 1.6 1.8 2.4 2 - - - 1.6 2 1.8 1.6 2.4 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

189
 SOFT CORE – MANAGEMENT

GE3751 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Sketch the Evolution of Management.
 Extract the functions and principles of management.
 Learn the application of the principles in an organization.
 Study the various HR related activities.
 Analyze the position of self and company goals towards business.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur- types of managers-
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management –Scientific, human relations, system and
contingency approaches– Types of Business organization- Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises- Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.

UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – Planning process – Types of planning – Objectives – Setting
objectives – Policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization chart – Organization
structure – Types – Line and staff authority – Departmentalization – delegation of authority –
Centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning,
Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career planning
and management.

UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour– Motivation – Motivation theories – Motivational
techniques – Job satisfaction – Job enrichment – Leadership – types and theories of leadership –
Communication – Process of communication – Barrier in communication – Effective
communication – Communication and IT.

UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – Budgetary and non - Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – Control and
performance – Direct and preventive control – Reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling.
CO2: Have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
CO3: Ability to understand management concept of organizing.
CO4: Ability to understand management concept of directing.
190
CO5: Ability to understand management concept of controlling.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
2. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “ Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd.,
10th Edition, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Robert Kreitner and MamataMohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
2. Stephen A. Robbins and David A. Decenzo and Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of
Management” Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
3. Tripathy PC and Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1 1
2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
3 1 - 2 - - 1 - 2 - 1 1 - - 2
4 - 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - 1 1 1
5 1 - - 1 1 - - - 3 - 1 1 - 1
AVg. 1.66 1 1 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1.5 1 1.25
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3752 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality gurus,
TQMframework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
 Explain the TQM Principles for application.
 Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking
andFMEA.
 Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply
Techniqueslike QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
 Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM - Gurus of TQM (Brief introduction)
-- TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic planning-
Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback, Customer complaints, Service
Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention – Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment,
Team and Teamwork, Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal-- Continuous process
improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering,
191
Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.

UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process Capability-
Bench marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to Bench Mark,
Understanding Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others, Learning from the data, Using the
findings, Pitfalls and Criticisms of Benchmarking - FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages: Design
FMEA and Process FMEA.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality - BPR.

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-Specific Standards
- AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-Implementation-Documentation-
Internal Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Introduction—ISO
14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001-Benefits of EMS.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools,
Benchmarking andFMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and
apply QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
AVg. 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale [Link], Carol [Link],Glen H. Bester field,[Link], HemantUrdhwareshe
and RashmiUrdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression,2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,Routledge.,2017.
2. Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies, Butterworth –
192
 Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
3. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third
Edition,2003.
4. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd.,2006 .

GE3753 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the concept of Engineering Economics.
 Implement various micro economics concept in real life.
 Gaining knowledge in the field of macro economics to enable the students to have better
 understanding of various components of macro economics.
 Understanding the different procedures of pricing.
 Learn the various cost related concepts in micro economics.

UNIT I DEMAND & SUPPLY ANALYSIS 9

Managerial Economics - Relationship with other disciplines - Firms: Types, objectives
and goals - Managerial decisions - Decision [Link] - Types of demand - Determinants of
demand - Demand function – Demand elasticity - Demand forecasting - Supply - Determinants of
supply - Supply function -Supply elasticity.

UNIT II PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS 9

Production function - Returns to scale - Production optimization - Least cost input -
Isoquants - Managerial uses of production function.
Cost Concepts - Cost function - Determinants of cost - Short run and Long run cost
curves - Cost Output Decision - Estimation of Cost.

UNIT III PRICING 9

Determinants of Price - Pricing under different objectives and different market structures
- Price discrimination - Pricing methods in practice.

UNIT IV FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Balance sheet and related concepts - Profit & Loss Statement and related concepts - -
Financial Ratio Analysis - Cash flow analysis - Funds flow analysis - Comparative
financial statements - Analysis & Interpretation of financial statements.

UNIT V CAPITAL BUDGETING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Investments - Risks and return evaluation of investment decision - Average rate of return
- Payback Period - Net Present Value - Internal rate of return.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will acquire the skills to apply the basics
of economics and cost analysis to engineering and take economically sound decisions
CO2: Evaluate the economic theories, cost concepts and pricing policies
CO3: Understand the market structures and integration concepts
193
CO4: Understand the measures of national income, the functions of banks and concepts of
globalization
CO5: Apply the concepts of financial management for project appraisal

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi,2001.
2. Managerial Economics: Analysis, Problems and Cases - P. L. Mehta, Edition, 13. Publisher,
Sultan Chand, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Chan [Link], “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
2. Donald.G. Newman, [Link], “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg.
Press, Texas, 2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan, New
York, 2011.
4. Zahid A khan: Engineering Economy, "Engineering Economy", Dorling Kindersley, 2012
5. Dr. S. N. Maheswari and Dr. S.K. Maheshwari: Financial Accounting, Vikas, 2009

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 - 3 - - - - - - - 2 - - 1 3 -
2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 2
3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 2 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 -
5 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - 2
AVg. 2.5 2.4 3 - 2 - - - - 2 - - 1.8 2.6 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3754 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to staffing,
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to training,
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to performance
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to compensation
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to human factors consideration
and compliance with human resource requirements.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9

The importance of human resources – Objective of Human Resource Management - Human
resource policies - Role of human resource manager.

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

Importance of Human Resource Planning – Internal and External sources of Human Resources -
Recruitment - Selection – Socialization.

194
UNIT III TRAINING AND EXECUTIVE DEVELOPMENT 9
Types of training and Executive development methods – purpose – benefits.

UNIT IV EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION 9

Compensation plan – Reward – Motivation – Career Development - Mentor – Protege relationships.

UNIT V PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND CONTROL 9

Performance evaluation – Feedback - The control process – Importance – Methods – grievances –
Causes – Redressal methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Students would have gained knowledge on the various aspects of HRM
CO2: Students will gain knowledge needed for success as a human resources professional.
CO3: Students will develop the skills needed for a successful HR manager.
CO4: Students would be prepared to implement the concepts learned in
the workplace.
CO5: Students would be aware of the emerging concepts in the field of HRM

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Decenzo and Robbins, "Human Resource Management", 8th Edition, Wiley, 2007.
2. John Bernardin. H., "Human Resource Management – An Experimental Approach", 5th Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2013, New Delhi.

REFERENCES:
1. Luis R,. Gomez-Mejia, DavidB. Balkin and Robert L. Cardy, “Managing Human
Resources", 7th Edition, PHI, 2012.
2. Dessler, "Human Resource Management", Pearson Education Limited, 2007.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 2.8 2.8 1.8 2.6 2.6 2.2 1.8 1.8 2.4 1 1.4 1 1 1.4 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3755 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 Learn the Evolution of Knowledge management.
 Be familiar with tools.
 Be exposed to Applications.
 Be familiar with some case studies.

195
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: An Introduction to Knowledge Management - The foundations of knowledge
management- including cultural issues- technology applications organizational concepts and
processes- management aspects- and decision support systems. The Evolution of Knowledge
management: From Information Management to Knowledge Management - Key Challenges Facing
the Evolution of Knowledge Management - Ethics for Knowledge Management.

UNIT II CREATING THE CULTURE OF LEARNING AND KNOWLEDGE SHARING 9

Organization and Knowledge Management - Building the Learning Organization. Knowledge Markets:
Cooperation among Distributed Technical Specialists – Tacit Knowledge and Quality Assurance.

UNIT III KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT-THE TOOLS 9

Telecommunications and Networks in Knowledge Management - Internet Search Engines and
Knowledge Management - Information Technology in Support of Knowledge Management -
Knowledge Management and Vocabulary Control - Information Mapping in Information Retrieval -
Information Coding in the Internet Environment - Repackaging Information.

UNIT IV KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION 9

Components of a Knowledge Strategy - Case Studies (From Library to Knowledge Center, Knowledge
Management in the Health Sciences, Knowledge Management in Developing Countries).

UNIT V FUTURE TRENDS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Advanced topics and case studies in knowledge management - Development of a knowledge
management map/plan that is integrated with an organization's strategic and business plan - A case
study on Corporate Memories for supporting various aspects in the process life -cycles of an
organization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Understand the process of acquiry knowledge from experts
CO2: Understand the learning organization.
CO3: Use the knowledge management tools.
CO4: Develop knowledge management Applications.
CO5: Design and develop enterprise applications.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1
2 2 1
3 2 2
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
AVg. 1 1.4 1 1 1.33
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation
TEXT BOOK:
1. Srikantaiah, T.K., Koenig, M., “Knowledge Management for the Information Professional”
Information Today, Inc., 2000.
196
 REFERENCE:
1. Nonaka, I., Takeuchi, H., “The Knowledge-Creating Company: How Japanese Companies
Create the Dynamics of Innovation”, Oxford University Press, 1995.

GE3792 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES

 To study the basic concepts of management; approaches to management; contributors

to management studies; various forms of business organization and trade unions function
in professional organizations.
 To study the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
 To study the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in
professional organization.
 To learn the organizational theory in professional organization.
 To learn the principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 9

Management: Introduction; Definition and Functions – Approaches to the study of Management –
Mintzberg’s Ten Managerial Roles – Principles of Taylor; Fayol; Weber; Parker – Forms of Organization:
Sole Proprietorship; Partnership; Company (Private and Public); Cooperative – Public Sector Vs
Private Sector Organization – Business Environment: Economic; Social; Political; Legal – Trade Union:
Definition; Functions; Merits & Demerits.

UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT - I 9

Planning: Characteristics; Nature; Importance; Steps; Limitation; Planning Premises; Strategic
Planning; Vision & Mission statement in Planning– Organizing: Organizing Theory; Principles; Types;
Departmentalization; Centralization and Decentralization; Authority & Responsibility – Staffing: Systems
Approach; Recruiting and Selection Process; Human Resource Development (HRD) Concept and
Design.

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT - II 9

Directing (Leading): Leadership Traits; Style; Morale; Managerial Grids (Blake-Mounton, Reddin) –
Communication: Purpose; Model; Barriers – Controlling: Process; Types; Levels; Guidelines; Audit
(External, Internal, Merits); Preventive Control – Decision Making: Elements; Characteristics; Nature;
Process; Classifications.

UNIT IV ORGANIZATION THEORY 9

Organizational Conflict: Positive Aspects; Individual; Role; Interpersonal; Intra Group; Inter Group;
Conflict Management – Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory; Herzberg’s motivation-hygiene theory;
McClelland’s three needs motivation theory; Vroom’s valence-expectancy theory – Change
Management: Concept of Change; Lewin’s Process of Change Model; Sources of Resistance;
Overcoming Resistance; Guidelines to managing Conflict.

197
UNIT – V PRODUCTIVITY AND MODERN TOPICS 9
Productivity: Concept; Measurements; Affecting Factors; Methods to Improve – Modern Topics (concept,
feature/characteristics, procedure, merits and demerits): Business Process Reengineering (BPR);
Benchmarking; SWOT/SWOC Analysis; Total Productive Maintenance; Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP); Management of Information Systems (MIS).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Explain basic concepts of management; approaches to management; contributors to
management studies; various forms of business organization and trade unions function in
professional organizations.

CO2 Discuss the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
CO3 Apply the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in professional
organization.
CO4 Discuss the organizational theory in professional organization.
CO5 Apply principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. M. Govindarajan and S. Natarajan, “Principles of Management”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2009.
2. Koontz. H. and Weihrich. H., “Essentials of Management: An International Perspective”, 8th
Edition, Tata McGrawhill, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Joseph J, Massie, “Essentials of Management”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 1987.
2. Saxena, P. K., “Principles of Management: A Modern Approach”, Global India
Publications, 2009.
3. [Link], “Organizational Behaviours”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 1994.
4. Richard L. Daft, “Organization Theory and Design”, South Western College Publishing, 11th
Edition, 2012.
5. S. TrevisCerto, “Modern Management Concepts and Skills”, Pearson Education, 2018.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

198
 MANDATORY COURSES I

MX3081 INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN AND GENDER STUDIES LTPC

3 000

COURSE OUTLINE

UNIT I CONCEPTS
Sex vs. Gender, masculinity, femininity, socialization, patriarchy, public/ private, essentialism,
binaryism, power, hegemony, hierarchy, stereotype, gender roles, gender relation, deconstruction,
resistance, sexual division of labour.

UNIT II FEMINIST THEORY

Liberal, Marxist, Socialist, Radical, Psychoanalytic, postmodernist, ecofeminist.

UNIT III WOMEN’S MOVEMENTS: GLOBAL, NATIONAL AND LOCAL

Rise of Feminism in Europe and America.
Women’s Movement in India.

UNIT IV GENDER AND LANGUAGE

Linguistic Forms and Gender.
Gender and narratives.

UNIT V GENDER AND REPRESENTATION

Advertising and popular visual media.

Gender and Representation in Alternative Media.

Gender and social media.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

MX3082 ELEMENTS OF LITERATURE LTPC

3 000

COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students aware about the finer sensibilities of human existence through an art
form. The students will learn to appreciate different forms of literature as suitable modes of
expressing human experience.

1. COURSE CONTENTS

Introduction to Elements of Literature

1. Relevance of literature

a) Enhances Reading, thinking, discussing and writing skills.

b) Develops finer sensibility for better human relationship.
c) Increases understanding of the problem of humanity without bias.

199
d) Providing space to reconcile and get a cathartic effect.

2. Elements of fiction

a) Fiction, fact and literary truth.

b) Fictional modes and patterns.

c) Plot character and perspective.

3. Elements of poetry

a) Emotions and imaginations.

b) Figurative language.

c) (Simile, metaphor, conceit, symbol, pun and irony).

d) Personification and animation.

e) Rhetoric and trend.

4. Elements of drama

a) Drama as representational art.

b) Content mode and elements.

c) Theatrical performance.

d) Drama as narration, mediation and persuasion.

e) Features of tragedy, comedy and satire.

3. READINGS:

1. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature, W.H. Hudson, Atlantic, 2007.

2. An Introduction to Literary Studies, Mario Klarer, Routledge, 2013.

3. The Experience of Poetry, Graham Mode, Open college of Arts with Open Unv Press,
1991.

4. The Elements of Fiction: A Survey, Ulf Wolf (ed), Wolfstuff, 2114.

5. The Elements of Drama, [Link], Literary Licensing, 2011.
3.1 Textbook:

3.2 *Reference Books:: To be decided by the teacher and student, on the basis of individual student
so as to enable him or her to write the term paper.
4. OTHER SESSION:

4.1*Tutorials:

200
4.2*Laboratory:

4.3*Project: The students will write a term paper to show their understanding of a particular piece of
literature

5.*ASSESSMENT:

5.1HA:

5.2Quizzes-HA:

5.3Periodical Examination: one

5.4Project/Lab: one (under the guidance of the teachers the students will take a volume of poetry,
fiction or drama and write a term paper to show their understanding of it in a given context;
sociological, psychological, historical, autobiographical etc.

5.5Final Exam:
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
 Students will be able to understand the relevance of literature in human life and appreciate
its aspects in developing finer sensibilities.

MX3083 FILM APPRECIATION LT PC

3 0 00
In this course on film appreciation, the students will be introduced broadly to the development of film
as an art and entertainment form. It will also discuss the language of cinema as it evolved over a
century. The students will be taught as to how to read a film and appreciate the various nuances of
a film as a text. The students will be guided to study film joyfully.

Theme - A: The Component of Films

A-1: The material and equipment

A-2: The story, screenplay and script
A-3: The actors, crew members, and the director
A-4: The process of film making… structure of a film

Theme - B: Evolution of Film Language

B-1: Film language, form, movement etc.

B-2: Early cinema… silent film (Particularly French)
B-3: The emergence of feature films: Birth of a Nation
B-4: Talkies

Theme - C: Film Theories and Criticism/Appreciation

C-1: Realist theory; Auteurists
C-2: Psychoanalytic, Ideological, Feminists
201
C-3: How to read films?
C-4: Film Criticism / Appreciation

Theme – D: Development of Films

D-1: Representative Soviet films

D-2: Representative Japanese films
D-3: Representative Italian films
D-4: Representative Hollywood film and the studio system

Theme - E: Indian Films

E-1: The early era

E-2: The important films made by the directors
E-3: The regional films
E-4: The documentaries in India

READING:

A Reader containing important articles on films will be prepared and given to the students. The
students must read them and present in the class and have discussion on these.

MX3084 DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

300 0
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To impart knowledge on concepts related to disaster, disaster risk reduction, disaster
management
 To acquaint with the skills for planning and organizing disaster response

UNIT I HAZRADS, VULNERABILITY AND DISASTER RISKS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Types of Disasters: Natural, Human
induced, Climate change induced –Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc – Technological
disasters- Structural collapse, Industrial accidents, oil spills -Causes, Impacts including social,
Economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Disaster vulnerability profile of India
and Tamil Nadu - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters, pandemics, Complex emergencies, -
-, Inter relations between Disasters and Sustainable development Goals

UNIT II DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9

Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction, Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety,
prevention, mitigation and preparedness community Based DRR, Structural- nonstructural
measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj Institutions / Urban Local
Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stakeholders- Early Warning System – Advisories
from Appropriate Agencies.- Relevance of indigenous Knowledge, appropriate technology and Local
resources.

UNIT III DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Components of Disaster Management – Preparedness of rescue and relief, mitigation, rehabilitation
and reconstruction- Disaster Risk Management and post disaster management – Compensation
202
and Insurance- Disaster Management Act (2005) and Policy - Other related policies, plans,
programmers and legislation - Institutional Processes and Framework at State and Central Level-
(NDMA –SDMA-DDMA-NRDF- Civic Volunteers)

UNIT IV TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGY FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Early warning systems -Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation, Shelter, Health,
Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and Preparedness, – Role of
GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk Assessment, Response and
Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment. - Elements of Climate Resilient
Development –Standard operation Procedure for disaster response – Financial planning for disaster
Management

UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: CASE STUDIES 9

Discussion on selected case studies to analyse the potential impacts and actions in the contest of
disasters-Landslide Hazard Zonation: Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.- Field work-Mock drill -
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Taimpo (2016), Disaster Management and Preparedness, CRC Publications
2 Singh R (2017), Disaster Management Guidelines for earthquakes, Landslides, Avalanches and
tsunami, Horizon Press Publications
3 Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
4 Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India
Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]

REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act, Government of India, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy, 2009.
3. Shaw R (2016), Community based Disaster risk reduction, Oxford University Press

COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: To impart knowledge on the concepts of Disaster, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk reduction
(DRR)
CO2: To enhance understanding on Hazards, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Assessment
prevention and risk reduction
CO3: To develop disaster response skills by adopting relevant tools and technology
CO4: Enhance awareness of institutional processes for Disaster response in the country and
CO5: Develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential Disaster response
in areas where they live, with due sensitivity

203
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - 1
4 3 3 2 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
5 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - 1
AVG 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

MANDATORY COURSES II

MX3085 WELL-BEING WITH TRADITIONAL PRACTICES-YOGA, AYURVEDA AND

SIDDHA L T PC
3 0 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enjoy life happily with fun filled new style activities that help to maintain health also
 To adapt a few lifestyle changes that will prevent many health disorders
 To be cool and handbill every emotion very smoothly in every walk of life
 To learn to eat cost effective but healthy foods that are rich in essential nutrients
 To develop immunity naturally that will improve resistance against many health disorders

UNIT I HEALTH AND ITS IMPORTANCE 2+4

Health: Definition - Importance of maintaining health - More importance on prevention than

treatment
Ten types of health one has to maintain - Physical health - Mental health - Social health - Financial
health - Emotional health - Spiritual health - Intellectual health - Relationship health - Environmental
health - Occupational/Professional heath.

Present health status - The life expectancy-present status - mortality rate - dreadful diseases -
Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) the leading cause of death - 60% - heart disease – cancer –
diabetes - chronic pulmonary diseases - risk factors – tobacco – alcohol - unhealthy diet - lack of
physical activities.

Types of diseases and disorders - Lifestyle disorders – Obesity – Diabetes - Cardiovascular

diseases – Cancer – Strokes – COPD - Arthritis - Mental health issues.

Causes of the above diseases / disorders - Importance of prevention of illness - Takes care
of health - Improves quality of life - Reduces absenteeism - Increase satisfaction - Saves time

Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health - Healthy Eating habits (Balanced diet
according to age) Physical Activities (Stretching exercise, aerobics, resisting exercise) - Maintaining
BMI-Importance and actions to be taken

204
UNIT II DIET 4+6
Role of diet in maintaining health - energy one needs to keep active throughout the day - nutrients
one needs for growth and repair - helps one to stay strong and healthy - helps to prevent diet-related
illness, such as some cancers - keeps active and - helps one to maintain a healthy weight - helps to
reduce risk of developing lifestyle disorders like diabetes – arthritis – hypertension – PCOD –
infertility – ADHD – sleeplessness -helps to reduce the risk of heart diseases - keeps the teeth and
bones strong.

Balanced Diet and its 7 Components - Carbohydrates – Proteins – Fats – Vitamins – Minerals -
Fibre and Water.

Food additives and their merits & demerits - Effects of food additives - Types of food additives -
Food additives and processed foods - Food additives and their reactions

Definition of BMI and maintaining it with diet

Importance - Consequences of not maintaining BMI - different steps to maintain optimal BM

Common cooking mistakes

Different cooking methods, merits and demerits of each method

UNIT III ROLE OF AYURVEDA & SIDDHA SYSTEMS IN MAINTAINING HEALTH 4+4
AYUSH systems and their role in maintaining health - preventive aspect of AYUSH - AYUSH as
a soft therapy.
Secrets of traditional healthy living - Traditional Diet and Nutrition - Regimen of Personal and
Social Hygiene - Daily routine (Dinacharya) - Seasonal regimens (Ritucharya) - basic sanitation and
healthy living environment - Sadvritta (good conduct) - for conducive social life.
Principles of Siddha & Ayurveda systems - Macrocosm and Microcosm theory - Pancheekarana
Theory / (Five Element Theory) 96 fundamental Principles - Uyir Thathukkal (Tri-Dosha Theory) -
Udal Thathukkal
Prevention of illness with our traditional system of medicine
Primary Prevention - To decrease the number of new cases of a disorder or illness - Health
promotion/education, and - Specific protective measures - Secondary Prevention - To lower the rate
of established cases of a disorder or illness in the population (prevalence) - Tertiary Prevention - To
decrease the amount of disability associated with an existing disorder.

UNIT IV MENTAL WELLNESS 3+4

Emotional health - Definition and types - Three key elements: the subjective experience - the
physiological response - the behavioral response - Importance of maintaining emotional health -
Role of emotions in daily life -Short term and long term effects of emotional disturbances - Leading
a healthy life with emotions - Practices for emotional health - Recognize how thoughts influence
emotions - Cultivate positive thoughts - Practice self-compassion - Expressing a full range of
emotions.

Stress management - Stress definition - Stress in daily life - How stress affects one’s life -
Identifying the cause of stress - Symptoms of stress - Managing stress (habits, tools, training,
professional help) - Complications of stress mismanagement.

Sleep - Sleep and its importance for mental wellness - Sleep and digestion.

205
 Immunity - Types and importance - Ways to develop immunity

UNIT V YOGA 2+12

Definition and importance of yoga - Types of yoga - How to Choose the Right Kind for individuals
according to their age - The Eight Limbs of Yoga - Simple yogasanas for cure and prevention of
health disorders - What yoga can bring to our life.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nutrition and Dietetics - Ashley Martin, Published by White Word Publications,
New York, NY 10001, USA
2. Yoga for Beginners_ 35 Simple Yoga Poses to Calm Your Mind and Strengthen Your Body,
by Cory Martin, Copyright © 2015 by Althea Press, Berkeley, California

REFERENCES:
1. WHAT WE KNOW ABOUT EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE How It Affects Learning, Work,
Relationships, and Our Mental Health, by Moshe Zeidner, Gerald Matthews, and Richard D.
Roberts
2. A Bradford Book, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, London, England The
Mindful Self-Compassion Workbook, Kristin Neff, Ph.D Christopher Germer, Ph.D,
Published by The Guilford Press A Division of Guilford Publications, Inc.370 Seventh
Avenue, Suite 1200, New York, NY 10001

1. [Link]
2. Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health
[Link]
health#:~:text=Make%20your%20new%20healthy%20habit,t%20have%20time%20to%20cook.
3. Read more: [Link]
4. [Link]
5. Benefits of healthy eating [Link]
[Link]
6. Food additives [Link]
additives
7. BMI [Link]
[Link]
recommendations
8. Yoga [Link]
[Link]
Ayurveda : [Link]
9. Siddha : [Link]
10. CAM : [Link]
11. Preventive herbs : [Link]

COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing the course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Learn the importance of different components of health
CO2:Gain confidence to lead a healthy life
CO3:Learn new techniques to prevent lifestyle health disorders
CO4:Understand the importance of diet and workouts in maintaining health
206
MX3086 HISTORY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA LT PC
3 0 00

UNIT I CONCEPTS AND PERSPECTIVES

Meaning of History
Objectivity, Determinism, Relativism, Causation, Generalization in History; Moral judgment in history
Extent of subjectivity, contrast with physical sciences, interpretation and speculation, causation
verses evidence, concept of historical inevitability, Historical Positivism.
Science and Technology-Meaning, Scope and Importance, Interaction of science, technology &
society, Sources of history on science and technology in India.

UNIT II HISTORIOGRAPHY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA

Introduction to the works of D.D. Kosambi, Dharmpal, Debiprasad Chattopadhyay, Rehman, S. Irfan
Habib, Deepak Kumar, Dhruv Raina, and others.

UNIT III SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA

Technology in pre-historic period
Beginning of agriculture and its impact on technology
Science and Technology during Vedic and Later Vedic times
Science and technology from 1st century AD to C-1200.

UNIT IV SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA

Legacy of technology in Medieval India, Interactions with Arabs
Development in medical knowledge, interaction between Unani and Ayurveda and alchemy
Astronomy and Mathematics: interaction with Arabic Sciences
Science and Technology on the eve of British conquest

UNIT V SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN COLONIAL INDIA

Science and the Empire
Indian response to Western Science
Growth of techno-scientific institutions

UNIT VI SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN A POST-INDEPENDENT INDIA

Science, Technology and Development discourse
Shaping of the Science and Technology Policy
Developments in the field of Science and Technology
Science and technology in globalizing India
Social implications of new technologies like the Information Technology and Biotechnology
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

MX3087 POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC THOUGHT FOR A HUMANE SOCIETY LT PC

3 0 00

Pre-Requisite: None. (Desirable: Universal Human Values 1, Universal Human Values 2)

207
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 This course will begin with a short overview of human needs and desires and how different
political-economic systems try to fullfill them. In the process, we will end with a critique of different
systems and their implementations in the past, with possible future directions.

COURSE TOPICS:
Considerations for humane society, holistic thought, human being’s desires, harmony in self,
harmony in relationships, society, and nature, societal systems. (9 lectures, 1 hour each)

(Refs: A Nagaraj, M K Gandhi, JC Kumarappa)

Capitalism – Free markets, demand-supply, perfect competition, laissez-faire, monopolies,

imperialism. Liberal democracy. (5 lectures)

(Refs: Adam smith, J S Mill)

Fascism and totalitarianism. World war I and II. Cold war. (2 lectures)

Communism – Mode of production, theory of labour, surplus value, class struggle, dialectical
materialism, historical materialism, Russian and Chinese models.

(Refs: Marx, Lenin, Mao, M N Roy) (5 lectures)

Welfare state. Relation with human desires. Empowered human beings, satisfaction. (3 lectures)

Gandhian thought. Swaraj, Decentralized economy & polity, Community. Control over one’s lives.
Relationship with nature. (6 lectures)

(Refs: M K Gandhi, Schumacher, Kumarappa)

Essential elements of Indian civilization. (3 lectures)

(Refs: Pt Sundarlal, R C Mazumdar, Dharampal)

Technology as driver of society, Role of education in shaping of society. Future directions. (4

lectures) (Refs: Nandkishore Acharya, David Dixon, Levis Mumford)

Conclusion (2 lectures)

Total lectures: 39

Preferred Textbooks: See Reference Books

Reference Books: Authors mentioned along with topics above. Detailed reading list will be
provided.

208
GRADING:
Mid sems 30
End sem 20
Home Assign 10
Term paper 40
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOME:
 The students will get an understanding of how societies are shaped by philosophy, political
and economic system, how they relate to fulfilling human goals & desires with some case studies of
how different attempts have been made in the past and how they have fared.

MX3088 STATE, NATION BUILDING AND POLITICS IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the course is to provide an understanding of the state, how it works through its main
organs, primacy of politics and political process, the concept of sovereignty and its changing
contours in a globalized world. In the light of this, an attempt will be made to acquaint the students
with the main development and legacies of national movement and constitutional development in
India, reasons for adopting a Parliamentary-federal system, the broad philosophy of the Constitution
of India and the changing nature of Indian Political System. Challenges/ problems and issues
concerning national integration and nation-building will also be discussed in the contemporary
context with the aim of developing a future vision for a better India.

TOPICS:
Understanding the need and role of State and politics.
Development of Nation-State, sovereignty, sovereignty in a globalized world.

Organs of State – Executive, Legislature, Judiciary. Separation of powers, forms of government-

unitary-federal, Presidential-Parliamentary,
The idea of India.

1857 and the national awakening.

1885 Indian National Congress and development of national movement – its

legacies. Constitution making and the Constitution of India.
Goals, objective and philosophy.
Why a federal system?
National integration and nation-building.

Challenges of nation-building – State against democracy (Kothari)

New social movements.
The changing nature of Indian Political System, the future scenario.
What can we do?

209
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
It is expected that this course will make students aware of the theoretical aspect of the state, its
organs, its operationalization aspect, the background and philosophy behind the founding of the
present political system, broad streams and challenges of national integration and nation-building in
India. It will equip the students with the real understanding of our political system/ process in correct
perspective and make them sit up and think for devising ways for better participation in the system
with a view to making the governance and delivery system better for the common man who is often
left unheard and unattended in our democratic setup besides generating a lot of dissatisfaction and
difficulties for the system.

SUGGESTED READING:
i. Sunil Khilnani, The Idea of India. Penguin India Ltd., New Delhi.
ii. Madhav Khosla, The Indian Constitution, Oxford University Press. New Delhi, 2012.
iii. Brij Kishore Sharma, Introduction to the Indian Constitution, PHI, New Delhi, latest edition.
iv. Sumantra Bose, Transforming India: Challenges to the World’s Largest Democracy,
Picador India, 2013.
v. Atul Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, U. K., 1991.
vi. M. P. Singh and Rekha Saxena, Indian Politics: Contemporary Issues and Concerns, PHI,
New Delhi, 2008, latest edition.
vii. Rajni Kothari, Rethinking Democracy, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 2005.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

MX3089 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY L T PC

3 0 0 0
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To Understand the Introduction and basic Terminologies safety.
 To enable the students to learn about the Important Statutory Regulations and standards.
 To enable students to Conduct and participate the various Safety activities in the Industry.
 To have knowledge about Workplace Exposures and Hazards.
 To assess the various Hazards and consequences through various Risk Assessment
Techniques.

UNIT I SAFETY TERMINOLOGIES

Hazard-Types of Hazard- Risk-Hierarchy of Hazards Control Measures-Lead indicators- lag
Indicators-Flammability- Toxicity Time-weighted Average (TWA) - Threshold LimitValue (TLV) -
Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL)- Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)- acute and
chronic Effects- Routes of Chemical Entry-Personnel Protective Equipment- Health and Safety
Policy-Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS

UNIT II STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

Indian Factories Act-1948- Health- Safety- Hazardous materials and Welfare- ISO 45001:2018
occupational health and safety (OH&S) - Occupational Safety and Health Audit IS14489:1998-
Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis- code of practice IS 15656:2006

210
UNIT III SAFETY ACTIVITIES
Toolbox Talk- Role of safety Committee- Responsibilities of Safety Officers and Safety
Representatives- Safety Training and Safety Incentives- Mock Drills- On-site Emergency Action
Plan- Off-site Emergency Action Plan- Safety poster and Display- Human Error Assessment

UNIT IV WORKPLACE HEALTH AND SAFETY

Noise hazard- Particulate matter- musculoskeletal disorder improper sitting poster and lifting
Ergonomics RULE & REBA- Unsafe act & Unsafe Condition- Electrical Hazards- Crane Safety-
Toxic gas Release

UNIT V HAZARD IDENTIFICATION TECHNIQUES

Job Safety Analysis-Preliminary Hazard Analysis-Failure mode and Effects Analysis- Hazard and
Operability- Fault Tree Analysis- Event Tree Analysis Qualitative and Quantitative Risk Assessment-
Checklist Analysis- Root cause analysis- What-If Analysis- and Hazard Identification and Risk
Assessment
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Course outcomes on completion of this course the student will be able:
CO1:Understand the basic concept of safety.
CO2:Obtain knowledge of Statutory Regulations and standards.
CO3:Know about the safety Activities of the Working Place.
CO4:Analyze on the impact of Occupational Exposures and their Remedies
CO5:Obtain knowledge of Risk Assessment Techniques.

TEXTBOOKS
1. R.K. Jain and Prof. Sunil S. Rao Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management
Systems KHANNA PUBLISHER
2. L. M. Deshmukh Industrial Safety Management: Hazard Identification and Risk Control
McGraw-Hill Education
REFERENCES
1. Frank Lees (2012) ‘Lees’ Loss Prevention in Process [Link]-Heinemann
publications, UK, 4th Edition.
2. John Ridley & John Channing (2008)Safety at Work: Routledge, 7th Edition.
3. Dan Petersen (2003) Techniques of Safety Management: A System Approach.
4. Alan Waring.(1996).Safety management system: Chapman &Hall,England
5. Society of Safety Engineers, USA
ONLINE RESOURCES
ISO 45001:2018 occupational health and safety (OH&S) International Organization for
Standardization [Link]
Indian Standard code of practice on occupational safety and health audit
[Link]
Indian Standard code of practice on Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis IS 15656:2006
[Link]

211
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

Program Outcome
Course
P
Outcome Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
O1
s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 O1 O2 O3
2
Understand the basic
3 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
CO1 concept of safety.
Obtain knowledge of
CO2 Statutory Regulations 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
and standards.
Know about the safety
CO3 Activities of the 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
Working Place.
Analyze on the impact
CO4 of Occupational
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Exposures and their
Remedies
Obtain knowledge of
CO5 Risk Assessment 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Techniques.
Industrial safety 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3

1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

212
 OPEN ELECTIVE I

OAS351 SPACE SCIENCE L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To outline the space environment and their effects.
 To extend the origin of universe and development.
 To classify the galaxies and their evolution.
 To interpret the variable stars in the galaxies.
 To explain theory of formation of our solar system.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to space science and applications – historical development – Space Environment-
Vacuum and its Effects, Plasma & Radiation Environments and their Effects, Debris Environment
and its Effects - Newton's Law of gravitation – Fundamental Physical Principles.

UNIT II ORIGIN OF UNIVERSE 9

Early history of the universe – Big-Bang and Hubble expansion model of the universe – cosmic
microwave background radiation – dark matter and dark energy.

UNIT III GALAXIES 7

Galaxies, their evolution and origin – active galaxies and quasars – Galactic rotation – Stellar
populations – galactic magnetic field and cosmic rays.

UNIT IV STARS 10
Stellar spectra and structure – stellar evolution – Nucleo-synthesis and formation of elements –
Classification of stars – Harvard classification system – Hertsprung-Russel diagram – Luminosity of
star – variable stars – composite stars (white dwarfs, Neutron stars, black hole, star clusters,
supernova and binary stars) – Chandrasekhar limit.

UNIT V SOLAR SYSTEM 10

Nebular theory of formation of our Solar System – Solar wind and nuclear reaction as the source of
energy – Sun and Planets: Brief description about shape size – period of rotation about axis and
period of revolution – distance of planets from sun – Bode's law – Kepler's Laws of planetary motion
– Newton's deductions from Kepler's Laws – correction of Kepler's third law – determination of mass
of earth – determination of mass of planets with respect to earth – Brief description of Asteroids –
Satellites and Comets.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1:Obtain a broad, basic knowledge of the space sciences.
CO2:Explain the scientific concepts such as evolution by means of natural selection, age of the
Earth and solar system and the Big-Bang.
CO3:Describe the main features and formation theories of the various types of observed galaxies,
in particular the Milky Way.
CO4:Explain stellar evolution, including red giants, supernovas, neutron stars, pulsars, white dwarfs
and black holes, using evidence and presently accepted theories;

213
CO5:Describe the presently accepted formation theories of the solar system based upon
observational and physical constraints;
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hess W., “Introduction to Space Science”, Gordon & Breach Science Pub; Revised Ed.,
1968.
2. Krishnaswami K. S., “Astrophysics: A modern Perspective”, New Age International, 2006.

REFERENCES:
1. Arnab Rai Choudhuri, “Astrophysics for Physicists”, Cambridge University Press, New
York, 2010.
2. Krishnaswami K. S., “Understanding cosmic Panorama”, New Age International, 2008.

OIE351 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to provide foundation in Industrial Engineering in order to enable the
students to make significant contributions for improvements in diverse organizations.
 Explain the concepts productivity and productivity measurement approaches.
 Explain the basic principles in facilities planning and plant location.
 Apply work study and ergonomic principles to design workplaces for the improvement of
human performance
 Impart knowledge to design and implement Statistical Process control in any industry.
 Recognize the concept of Production and Operations Management in creating and enhancing
a firm’s competitive advantages

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Concepts of Industrial Engineering – History and development of Industrial Engineering – Roles of
Industrial Engineer – Applications of Industrial Engineering – Production Management Vs Industrial
Engineering – Production System – Input Output Model – Productivity – Factors affecting
Productivity – Increasing Productivity of resources – Kinds of Productivity measures.

UNIT II PLANT LOCATION AND LAYOUT 9

Factors affecting Plant location – COURSE OBJECTIVES of Plant Layout – Principles of Plant
Layout – Types of Plant Layout – Methods of Plant and Facility Layout – Storage Space
requirements – Plant Layout procedure – Line Balancing methods.

UNIT III WORK SYSTEM DESIGN& ERGONOMICS 9

Need – COURSE OBJECTIVES – Method Study procedure – Principles of Motion Economy – Work
Measurement procedures – Time Study –Work sampling- Ergonomics and its areas of application
in the work system - Physical work load and energy expenditure, Anthropometry – measures –
design procedure, Work postures-sitting, standing.

UNIT IV STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 9

Definition and Concepts – Fundamentals – Control Charts for variables – Control Charts for
attributes – Acceptance Sampling- O.C curve –Single sampling plan- Double sampling plan.

214
UNIT V PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL 9
Forecasting – Qualitative and Quantitative forecasting techniques – Types of production – Process
planning – Economic Batch Quantity– Loading – Scheduling and control of production –
Dispatching–Progress control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Ability To define the concepts of productivity and productivity measurement approaches.
CO2: Ability to evaluate appropriate location models for various facility types and design various
facility layouts
CO3: Ability To conduct a method study and time study to improve the efficiency of the system.
CO4: Ability to Control the quality of processes using control charts in manufacturing/service
industries.
CO5: Ability to define the Planning strategies and Material Requirement Plan.
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1
2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
4 2 2 3 1 1
5 1 2 2 1 3
AVg. 2.2 2 2.5 1.3 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

TEXT BOOK:
1. [Link], 2010, Industrial Engineering and Management, Dhanpat Rai Publications.

REFERENCES:
1. Ravi Shankar, 2009, Industrial Engineering and Management, Galgotia Publications & Private
Limited.
2. Martand Telsang,2006, Industrial Engineering and Production Management, S. Chand and
Company

OBT351 FOOD, NUTRITION AND HEALTH LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

 Build knowledge and an overview on general aspects of nutrition and health.

 Distinguish the nutritive value of various food items, BMI calculation differentiating super
junk, and functional foods in the market.
 To Solve the real-world problems based on nutrition and health

UNIT I FOOD AND MICROBIOLOGY OF HEALTH: 9

Food resources (plant, animal, microbes); Overview of current production systems; constraints and
necessity of novel strategies. Functional and “Super” Foods - role in optimal nutrition. Sugar, protein
and fat substitutes. Food and behaviour- physiological disturbances in alcoholism, drug abuse and
215
smoking. Food Related Laws: Inspection – Microbial Indicators of product quality – Indicators of food
safety – 229 Microbiological safety of foods - control strategies – Hazard Analysis Critical Point
System (HACCP concept)- Microbiological criteria.

UNIT II NUTRIENTS AND FOOD ADDITIVES: 9

Macro nutrients- carbohydrates, proteins and lipids. Micronutrients-Minerals: Calcium, Magnesium,

Iron, Zinc, Copper and Selenium; Vitamins. Nutritional Physiology: Digestion, absorption, and
utilization of major and minor nutrients. Biotechnology of food additives- Bioflavors and colors,
microbial polysaccharides, recombinant enzymes in food sector.

UNIT III NANO FOOD TECHNOLOGY: 9

Nano materials as food components, food packaging and nano materials, policies on usage of
nanomaterials in foods. Food product development: steps involved in food product development,
shelf-life assessment.

UNIT IV FOOD RELATED NUTRITIONAL DISORDERS AND ENERGY CALCULATION:

9

Type I Disorders-Causes of life style and stress related diseases. Cardio-vascular diseases,
hypertension, obesity. Type-II Disorders: Cancer, diabetics, ulcers, electrolyte and water imbalance.
Health indices. Preventive and remedial measures. Energy balance and methods to calculate
individual nutrient and energy needs. Planning a healthy diet.

UNIT V CONSUMERS ON GM FOODS AND CONTEMPORARY ISSUES: 9

Global perspective of consumers on GM foods; Major concerns of transgenic, foods GM ingredients

in food products. (labeling, bioavailability, safety aspects); regulatory agencies involved in GM foods,
Case studies- GM foods.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK(S):

1. P.J. Fellows.2009. Food Processing Technology -Principles and Practice (Third Edition). A
volume in Woodhead Publishing Series in Food Science, Technology and Nutrition.
2. Kalidas Shetty, Gopinadhan Paliyath, Anthony Pometto, Robert E. Levin. 2015. Food
Biotechnology. CRC Press. Second edition.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Understanding Nutrition. 2010. Ellie Whitney, Sharon Rady Rolfes, 11e. Thompson
Wadsworth. 2.
2. Nutritional Sciences- From Fundamentals to Food.2013. Michelle McGuire, Kathy A.
Beerman, 2 nd e. Thompson Wadsworth.
3. Yasmine Motarjemi, Huub Lelieveld, Food Safety Management - A Practical Guide for the
Food Industry (2014), 1st Edition, Academic Press, London, UK

EXPECTED COURSE OUTCOME:

CO1:To be able to understand the nutritional values of the various types of foods

CO2:To be able to Analyze the role of food in the metabolic activity of the healthy diet

216
CO3:To be able to Infer the BMI calculation and stress related diseases.

CO4:To be able to Elaborate the independent decision on the choice of food to prevent life style
disorders and diseases

CO5:To be able to Assess about the food laws governance

CO6:To be able to Compare junk, modified and super foods

OCE351 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT L T PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart the knowledge and skills to identify, assess and mitigate the environmental and
social impacts of developmental projects

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Impacts of Development on Environment – Rio Principles of Sustainable Development-
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) – Objectives – Historical development – EIA Types – EIA
in project cycle –EIA Notification and Legal Framework–Stakeholders and their Role in EIA–
Selection & Registration Criteria for EIA Consultants

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT 9

Screening and Scoping in EIA – Drafting of Terms of Reference,Baseline monitoring, Prediction and
Assessment of Impact on land, water, air, noise and energy, flora and fauna - Matrices – Networks
– Checklist Methods - Mathematical models for Impact prediction – Analysis of alternatives

UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9

Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on water, air and land, water, energy, flora and fauna –
Environmental Monitoring Plan – EIA Report Preparation – Review of EIA Reports – Public Hearing-
Environmental Clearance Post Project Monitoring

UNIT IV SOCIO ECONOMIC ASSESSMENT 9

Baseline monitoring of Socio economic environment – Identification of Project Affected Personal –
Rehabilitation and Resettlement Plan- Economic valuation of Environmental impacts – Cost benefit
Analysis-

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

EIA case studies pertaining to Infrastructure Projects – Real Estate Development - Roads and
Bridges – Mass Rapid Transport Systems - Ports and Harbor – Airports - Dams and Irrigation
projects - Power plants – CETPs- Waste Processing and Disposal facilities – Mining Projects.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The students completing the course will have ability to
CO1:carry out scoping and screening of developmental projects for environmental and social
assessments
CO2:explain different methodologies for environmental impact prediction and assessment
CO3:plan environmental impact assessments and environmental management plans
CO4:evaluate environmental impact assessment reports
217
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Canter, R.L, “Environmental impact Assessment “, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Inc, New
Delhi,1995.
2. Lohani, B., J.W. Evans, H. Ludwig, R.R. Everitt, Richard A. Carpenter, and S.L. Tu,
“Environmental Impact Assessment for Developing Countries in Asia”, Volume 1 – Overview,
Asian Development Bank,1997.
3. Peter Morris, Riki Therivel “Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment”, Routledge
Publishers,2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Becker H. A., Frank Vanclay,“The International handbook of social impact assessment”
conceptual and methodological advances, Edward Elgar Publishing, 2003.
2. Barry Sadler and Mary McCabe, “Environmental Impact Assessment Training Resource
Manual”, United Nations Environment Programme, 2002.
3. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I and II”, Blackwell
Science New York, 1998.
4. Ministry of Environment and Forests EIA Notification and Sectoral Guides, Government of
India, New Delhi, 2010.

OEE351 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEM LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To Provide knowledge about various renewable energy technologies
 To enable students to understand and design a PV system.
 To provide knowledge about wind energy system.
 To Provide knowledge about various possible hybrid energy systems
 To gain knowledge about application of various renewable energy technologies

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Primary energy sources, renewable vs. non-renewable primary energy sources, renewable energy
resources in India, Current usage of renewable energy sources in India, future potential of renewable
energy in power production and development of renewable energy technologies.

UNIT II SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar Radiation and its measurements, Solar Thermal Energy Conversion from plate Solar
Collectors, Concentrating Collectors and its Types, Efficiency and performance of collectors,. Direct
Solar Electricity Conversion from Photovoltaic, types of solar cells and its application of battery
charger, domestic lighting, street lighting, and water pumping, power generation schemes. Recent
Advances in PV Applications: Building Integrated PV, Grid Connected PV Systems,

UNIT III WIND ENERGY 9

Wind energy principles, wind site and its resource assessment, wind assessment, Factors
influencing wind, wind turbine components, wind energy conversion systems (WECS), Classification
of WECS devices, wind electric generating and control systems, characteristics and applications.

218
 UNIT IV BIO-ENERGY 9
Energy from biomass, Principle of biomass conversion technologies/process and their
classification, Bio gas generation, types of biogas plants, selection of site for biogas plant,
classification of biogas plants, Advantage and disadvantages of biogas generation, thermal
gasification of biomass, biomass gasifies, Application of biomass and biogas plants and their
economics.

UNIT V OTHER TYPES OF ENERGY 9

Energy conversion from Hydrogen and Fuel cells, Geo thermal energy Resources, types of wells,
methods of harnessing the energy, potential in India. OTEC, Principles utilization, setting of OTEC
plants, thermodynamic cycles. Tidal and wave energy: Potential and conversion techniques, mini-
hydel power plants and their economics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course students will be able to:
CO1: Attained knowledge about various renewable energy technologies
CO2: Ability to understand and design a PV system.
CO3: Understand the concept of various wind energy system.
CO4: Gained knowledge about various possible hybrid energy systems
CO5: Attained knowledge about various application of renewable energy technologies
REFERENCES
1. Twidell & Wier,‘Renewable Energy Resources’ CRC Press( Taylor & Francis).
2. Tiwari and Ghosal/ Narosa,‘Renewable energy resources’.
3. [Link], [Link],‘Renewable energy sources and emerging technologies’, P.H.I.
4. [Link], S.K. Srivastava, ‘Non – Conventional Energy Resources’, New Age
Publishers, 2006.
5. [Link], ‘Non – Conventional Energy Resources’, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2006.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
AVg. 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OEI351 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce common unit operations carried out in process industries.
 To impact knowledge about the important unit operations taking place in process industries.

219
  To prepare them to take up a case study on selected process industries like petrochemical
industry, power plant industry and paper & pulp industry to make the students understand
the different measurement and control techniques for important processes.
 Facilitate the students to apply knowledge to select appropriate measurement technique and
control strategy for a given process.

UNIT I COMMON UNIT OPERATIONS IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES -I 9

Unit Operation, Measurement and Control:-Transport of solid, liquid and gases - Evaporators –
Crystallizers-Dryers.

UNIT II COMMON UNIT OPERATIONS IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES -II 9

Unit Operation, Measurement and Control: - Distillation – Refrigeration processes – Chemical
reactors.

UNIT III PROCESS MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL

INDUSTRY 9
Process flow diagram of Petro Chemical Industry - Gas oil separation in production platform – wet
gas processing – Fractionation Column – Catalytic Cracking unit – Catalytic reforming unit

UNIT IV PROCESS MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL IN THERMAL POWER PLANT

INDUSTRY 9
Process flow diagram of Coal fired thermal Power Plant– Coal pulverizer - Deaerator – Boiler drum
- Superheater – Turbines.

UNIT V PROCESS MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL IN PAPER & PULP INDUSTRY

9
Process flow diagram of paper and pulp industry – Batch digestor – Continuous sulphatedigestor –
Control problems on the paper machine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
Study the characteristics of various processing units involved in chemical plant.
Develop the process model by using predefined unit operations (e.g. mixing, distillation, heating)
from the library of any process simulator.
Analyse the functioning of each processing units with help of virtual unit operations packages.
Perform a physical property analysis using simulation packages
Implement distillation column analysis using simulation software.
Create process flow models and diagrams

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 understand common unit operations in process industries. L2
CO2 Identify the dynamics of important unit operations in petro chemical industry. L2
CO3 develop understanding of important processes taking place selected case studies namely
petrochemical industry, power plant industry and paper & pulp industry. L5
CO4 Select appropriate measurement techniques for selective processes. L5
CO5 Develop controller structure based on the process knowledge. L5
220
CO6 Analyze the operation and challenges in integrated industrial processes. L4

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Balchen ,J.G., and Mumme, K.J., “ Process Control structures and applications”, Van
Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, 1988
2. Warren L. McCabe, Julian C. Smith and Peter Harriot, “Unit Operations of Chemical
Engineering”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, New York, Sixth Edition, 2001.
REFERENCES:
1. Liptak B.G., “Instrument and Automation Engineers' Handbook: Process Measurement and
Analysis”, Fifth Edition, CRC Press, 2016.
2. James [Link], Roy Penny, W., James [Link] and Stanley [Link], “Chemical
ProcessEquipment: Selection and Design”, Gulf Professional Publishing, 2010.
3. Austin G.T and Shreeves, A.G.T., “Chemical Process Industries”, McGraw–Hill International
student, Singapore, 1985.
4. Luyben W.C., “Process Modeling, Simulation and Control for Chemical Engineers”, McGraw-
Hill International edition, USA, 1989.
5. K. Krishnaswamy, Process Control, new age publishers , 2009.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]
of-processes/
5. [Link]
6. [Link]

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO,PSO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

CO 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 1 1

CO2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2

CO3 3 3 1 1 1

CO4 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 3

CO6 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2
2.3
Avg 3 3 1.5 3 2.5 2 2 1 1.16 1.5 1 3 3
3
1- low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

221
OMA351 GRAPH THEORY LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the graph models and basic concepts of graphs.
 To study the characterization and properties of trees and graph connectivity.
 To provide an exposure to the Eulerian and Hamiltonian graphs.
 To introduce Graph colouring and explain its significance.
 To provide an understanding of Optimization Graph Algorithms.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO GRAPHS 9

Graphs and Graph Models – Connected graphs – Common classes of graphs – Multi graphs and
Digraphs – Degree of a vertex – Degree Sequence – Graphs and Matrices – Isomorphism of graphs.

UNIT II TREES AND CONNECTIVITY 9

Bridges – Trees – Characterization and properties of trees – Cut vertices – Connectivity.

UNIT III TRAVERSABILITY 9

Eulerian graphs – Characterization of Eulerian graphs – Hamiltonian graphs – Necessary condition
for Hamiltonian graphs – Sufficient condition for Hamiltonian graphs.

UNIT IV PLANARITY AND COLOURING 9

Planar Graphs – The Euler Identity – Non planar Graphs – Vertex Colouring – Lower and Upper
bounds of chromatic number.

UNIT V OPTIMIZATION GRAPH ALGORITHMS 9

Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm – Kruskal’s and Prim’s minimum spanning tree algorithms –
Transport Network – The Max-Flow Min-Cut Theorem – The Labeling Procedure – Maximum flow
problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
CO1:Apply graph models for solving real world problem.
CO2:Understand the importance the natural applications of trees and graph connectivity.
CO3:Understand the characterization study of Eulerian graphs and Hamiltonian graphs.
CO4:Apply the graph colouring concepts in partitioning problems.
CO5:Apply the standard optimization graph algorithms in solving application problems.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Gary Chatrand and Ping Zhang, “Introduction to Graph Theory”, Tata McGraw – Hill
companies Inc., New York, 2006.
2. Ralph P. Grimaldi, “Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics, An applied introduction" Fifth
edition, Pearson Education, Inc, Singapore, 2004.

REFERENCES
1. Balakrishnan R. and Ranganathan K., “A Text Book of Graph Theory”,
Springer – Verlag, New York, 2012.

222
2. Douglas B. West, “Introduction to Graph Theory”, Pearson, Second Edition, New York,
2018.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PO PO0 PO0 PO0 PO0 PO0 PO0 PO0 PO1 PO1 PO1 PS PS PS
01 02 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 3
CO6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OPEN ELECTIVE II

OIE352 RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Learn to formulate linear programming problems and solve LPP using simple algorithm
 Learn to solve networking problems
 Learn to formulate and solve integer programming problems
 Learn to solve Non Linear programming problems
 Learn to understand and solve project management problems

UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Principal components of decision problem – Modeling phases – LP formulation and graphic solution
– Resource allocation problems – simplex method – sensitivity analysis.

UNIT II DUALITY AND NETWORKS 9

Definition of dual problems – primal – Dual relationships – Dual simplex method –post optimality
analysis – Transportation and assignment model – Shortest route problem.

UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING 9

Cutting plan algorithm – Branch and bound methods, Multistage (Dynamic) programming.

UNIT IV CLASSICAL OPTIMISATION THEROY: 9

Unconstrained external problems, Newton – Ralphson method – Equality constraints –Jacobean
methods – Lagrangian method – Kuhn – Tucker conditions – Simple problems.

UNIT V OBJECT SCHEDULOING: 9

Network diagram representation – Critical path method – Time charts and resource leveling – PERT.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
CO1 : Understand to formulate linear programming problems and solve LPP using simple algorithm
223
CO2 : Understand to solve networking problems
CO3 : Understand to formulate and solve integer programming problems
CO4 : Understand to solve Non Linear programming problems
CO5 : Understand to understand and solve project management problems

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 2 3
2 3 3 2 3 2 3
3 3 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 3 2 3
5 3 3 2 3 2 3
AVg. 3 3 2 3 2 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

TEXT BOOK:
1. H.A. Taha, “Operation Research”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

RFERENCES:
1. Paneer selvam, ‘Operations Research’ Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
2. Anderson ‘Quantitative Methods for Business’, 8th Edition, Thomson Learning, 2002.
3. Winston ‘Operations Research for Business’, Thomson Learning, 2003.
4. Vohra, ’Quantitative Techniques in Management’, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2002.
5. Anand sarma, ‘Operation Research’ Himalaya Publishing House, 2003.

OMG351 FINTECH REGULATION LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about Laws and Regulation
 To acquire the knowledge of Regulations of Fintech firm and their role in Market

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
The Role of the Regulators, Equal Treatment and Competition, Need for a regulatory assessment
of Fintech, India Regulations, The Risks to Consider, Regtech and SupTech, The rise of TechFins,
Regulatory sandboxes, compliance and whistleblowing.

UNIT II INNOVATION AND REGULATION 9

The technology, market and the law, Regulation and Innovation in Banking and Finance,
Regulations of Fintech Firms and their role in Market-Based Chains, Current Regulatory Approach,
Fintech Innovations in Banking, Asset Management, Insurance, Pensions and Healthcare Schemes,
Patentability of FinTech inventions.

UNIT III CROWDFUNDING AND DIGITAL ASSETS 9

Types of crowdfunding, The Jobs Act, Regulation crowdfunding, Regulation A+, Regulation D
crowdfunding, Intrastate offerings, Digital Assets – Three uses of Digital Assets, A world of Altcoins,
224
Stablecoins, Digital Asset Forks, Initial Coin Offerings, Regulatory Framework for Digital and Crypto
Assets, Central Bank Digital Currencies.

UNIT IV MARKETPLACE LENDING AND MOBILE PAYMENTS 9

Online Lending Business Models, Payday Loans, Consumer Protection Laws, Debt Collection,
Equal Credit Opportunity Act, Contract Formation and the E-Sign Act, Military Lending Act,
Securities Laws Considerations, Mobile Devices, Payment Cards and the Law, Truth in Lending Act
and Regulation Z, Card Act, Electronic Fund Transfer Act and Regulation E, Fair Credit Reporting
Act, Federal Bank Secrecy Act, State Money Transmitter Laws.

UNIT V ANTI-MONEY LAUNDERING AND CYBERSECURITY 9

Reporting requirements under the Bank Secrecy Act, Patriot Act, Panalties for violating the BSA,
Virtual currencies and the Bank Secrecy Act, Cybersecurity Frameworks, Cybersecurity Act of 2015,
Contractual and Self Regulatory obligations.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. JelenaMadir, FinTech – Law and Regulation, Edward Elgar Publishing Limited, 2019
2. Valerio Lemma, Fintech Regulation : Exploring New Challenges of the Capital Markets
Union, Palgrave Macmillan, 2020
3. Chris Brummer, Fintech Law in a Nutshell, West Academic Publishing, 2020
4. Bernardo Nicoletti, The Future of Fintech, Integrating Finance and Technology in Financial
Services, Springer Nature, 2017
5. Kevin C. Taylor, FinTech Law : A Guide to Technology Law in the Financial Services
Industry, BNA Books, 2014
6. Lee Reiners, FinTech Law and Policy, 2018

OFD351 HOLISTIC NUTRITION L T PC

3 0 0 3
UNIT I NUTRITION AND HEALTH 9
Introduction to the principles of nutrition; Basics of nutrition including; micronutrients (vitamins and
minerals), the energy-yielding nutrients (Carbohydrates, Lipids and Proteins), metabolism,
digestion, absorption and energy balance. Lipids: their functions, classification, dietary
requirements, digestion & absorption, metabolism and links to the major fatal diseases, heart
disease and cancer.

UNIT II AYURVEDA – MIND/BODY HEALING 9

Philosophy of Holistic Nutrition with spiritual and psychological approaches towards attaining optimal
health; Principles and practical applications of Ayurveda, the oldest healing system in the world.
Three forces – Vata, Pitta and Kapha, that combine in each being into a distinct constitution.
Practical dietary and lifestyle recommendations for different constitutions will also be explored in
real case studies.

UNIT III NUTRITION AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Based on an underlying philosophy that environments maintain and promote health and that
individuals have a right to self-determination and self-knowledge, Nutrition principles which promote

225
health and prevent disease. Safety of our food supply, naturally occurring and environmental toxins
in foods, microbes and food poisoning.

UNIT IV COMPARATIVE DIETS 9

Evaluating principles of food dynamics, nutrient proportions, holistic individuality, the law of
opposites, food combining, and more. Therapeutic benefits and limitations of several alternative diet
approaches, including: modern diets (intermittent fasting, macrobiotics), food combining (colour-
therapy/rainbow diet), high protein diets (Ketogenic, Paleo), Vegetarian approaches (plant-
based/vegetarian/vegan variations, fruitarian, raw food), as well as cleansing and detoxification diets
(caffeine, alcohol, and nicotine detoxes, juice fasts).

UNIT V PREVENTIVE HEALTH CARE 9

Proper nutrition protection against, reverse and/or retard many ailments including: osteoporosis,
diabetes, atherosclerosis and high blood pressure, arthritis, cancer, anemia, kidney disease and
colon cancer. Current research developments on phytochemicals, antioxidants and nutraceuticals
will be explored.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Discuss the role of essential nutrients in physical, mental and emotional wellness
CO2 Discuss the role of deficiencies in essential nutrients in the disease process
CO3 Explain how the standard American diet relates to the disease process
CO4 Identify five contemporary eating “styles” and lists the pros and cons of each
CO5 Discuss the concept of whole foods nutrition and its relationship to wellness

TEXTBOOKS
1. Desai, B. B., Handbook of Nutrition and Diet. Marcel Dekker, New York. 2000
2. Macrae, R., Rolonson Roles and Sadlu, M.J. 1994. Encyclopedia of Food Science &
Technology & Nutrition. Vol. XI. Academic Press

REFERENCES
1. Modern Nutrition in Health & Disease by Young & Shils.
2. Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy – by Krause and Mahan 1996, Publisher- W.B. Saunders,
ISBN: 0721658350
3. Nutritive Value of Indian Foods.- by C. Gopalan, B. V. Rama Sastri, S. C. Balasubramanian
Published by National Institute of Nutrition, Indian Council of Medical Research, 1989

AI3021 IT IN AGRICULTURAL SYSTEM L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students to areas of agricultural systems in which IT and computers play a
major role.
 To also expose the students to IT applications in precision farming, environmental control
systems, agricultural systems management and weather prediction models.

UNIT I PRECISION FARMING 9

Precision agriculture and agricultural management – Ground based sensors, Remote sensing, GPS,
GIS and mapping software, Yield mapping systems, Crop production modeling.
226
UNIT II ENVIRONMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
Artificial light systems, management of crop growth in greenhouses, simulation of CO2 consumption
in greenhouses, on-line measurement of plant growth in the greenhouse, models of plant production
and expert systems in horticulture.

UNIT III AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 9

Agricultural systems - managerial overview, Reliability of agricultural systems, Simulation of crop
growth and field operations, Optimizing the use of resources, Linear programming, Project
scheduling, Artificial intelligence and decision support systems.

UNIT IV WEATHER PREDICTION MODELS 9

Importance of climate variability and seasonal forecasting, Understanding and predicting world’s
climate system, Global climatic models and their potential for seasonal climate forecasting, General
systems approach to applying seasonal climate forecasts.

UNIT V E-GOVERNANCE IN AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS 9

Expert systems, decision support systems, Agricultural and biological databases, e-commerce, e-
business systems & applications, Technology enhanced learning systems and solutions, e-learning,
Rural development and information society.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:
1. National Research Council, “Precision Agriculture in the 21st Century”, National Academies
Press, Canada, 1997.
2. H. Krug, Liebig, H.P. “International Symposium on Models for Plant Growth, Environmental
Control and Farm Management in Protected Cultivation”, 1989.

REFERENCES:
1. Peart, R.M., and Shoup, W. D., “Agricultural Systems Management”, Marcel Dekker, New
York, 2004.
2. Hammer, G.L., Nicholls, N., and Mitchell, C., “Applications of Seasonal Climate”, Springer,
Germany, 2000.

COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1:The students shall be able to understand the applications of IT in remote sensing applications
such as Drones etc.
CO2:The students will be able to get a clear understanding of how a greenhouse can be automated
and its advantages.
CO3:The students will be able to apply IT principles and concepts for management of field
operations.
CO4:The students will get an understanding about weather models, their inputs and applications.
CO5:The students will get an understanding of how IT can be used for e-governance in agriculture.

227
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO/PSO Course Outcome Overall

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 correlation of
CO s to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering 2 3 2 3 2 2
Sciences
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO3 Design/ Development of 3 3 3 3 3 3
Solutions
PO4 Investigations 2 3 2 1 2 2
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO6 Individual and Team work 1 1 2 2 3 2
PO7 Communication 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO8 The Engineer and Society 3 3 2 3 3 3
PO9 Ethics 1 1 2 1 2 1
PO10 Environment and 3 3 3 3 3 3
Sustainability
PO11 Project Management and 3 3 3 3 3 3
Finance
PO12 Life Long Learning 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO1 To make expertise in 1 1 2 2 3 2
design and engineering
problem solving approach
in agriculture with proper
knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability 1 1 2 2 3 2
to formulate solutions to
real-world problems
pertaining to
sustained agricultural
productivity using modern
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate 1 1 2 2 3 2
entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-
Institution linkage.
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OEI352 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL ENGINEERING L TPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the control system components and transfer function model with their graphical
representation
 To understand the analysis of system in time domain along with steady state error.

228
  To introduce frequency response analysis of systems.
 To accord basic knowledge in design of compensators.
 To introduce the state space models.

UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 9

Introduction – transfer function – simple electrical, mechanical, ,pneumatic , hydraulic and thermal
systems–analogies

UNIT II FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Control system components - Block diagram representation of control systems, Reduction of block
diagrams, Signal flow graphs, Output to input ratios

UNIT III TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS 9

Response of systems to different inputs viz., Step impulse, pulse, parabolic and sinusoidal inputs,
Time response of first and second order systems, steady state errors and error constants of unity
feedback circuit.

UNIT IV STABILITY ANALYSIS 9

Necessary and sufficient conditions, Routh-Hurwitz criteria of stability,Rootlocus and
Bodetechniques,Concept and construction,frequency response.

UNIT V STATE SPACE TECHNIQUE 9

State vectors–state space models-Digital Controllers–design aspects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5

1. Explore various controllers presently used in industries.

2. Develop control structures for industrial processes.
3. Implement the controllers for various transfer functions of industrial systems.
4. Using software tools for practical exposures to the controllers used in industries by undergoing
training.
5. Realisation of various stability criterion techniques for economical operation of process.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To represent and develop systems in different forms using the knowledge gained (L5).
CO2 To analyses the system in time and frequency domain (L4).
CO3 Ability to Derive Transfer function Model of Electrical and Mechanical Systems. (L2)
CO4 Ability to Obtain the transfer Function by the Reduction of Block diagram & Signal flow
graph (L3)
CO5 To analyses the stability of physical systems(L4).
CO6 To acquire and analyse knowledge in State variable model for MIMO systems(L1)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal, M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers,2017.
2. Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Wiley, 2014

229
REFERENCES:
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson, 2015.
2. Richard C. Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education,2009.
3. John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and HoupisSttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System
Analysis and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.
4. [Link] and T. Thyagarajan, “An Introduction to Process Modelling Identification and
Control of Engineers”, Narosa Publishing House, 2017.
5. M. Gopal, “Control System: Principle and design”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
6. NPTEL Video Lecture Notes on “Control Engineering “by Prof. S. D. Agashe, IIT Bombay.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO’s
1 L5 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 - 1 - 1
2 L4 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 - 1 - 1
3 L2 2 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 1 - 1
4 L5 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 - 1 - 1
5 L4 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 - 1 - 1
6 L4 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 - 1 - 1
AVg. 2.8 2.6 3 2.1 - - - 1 - 1 - 1
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

OPY351 PHARMACEUTICAL NANOTECHNOLOGY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of nanotechnology in
biomedical and Pharmaceutical research. It will also guide the students to understand how
nanomaterials can be used for a diversity of analytical and medicinal rationales.

UNIT I NANOSTRUCTURES 9
Preparation, properties and characterization - Self-assembling nanostructure - vesicular and micellar
polymerization-nanofilms - Metal Nanoparticles- lipid nanoparticles- nanoemulsion - Molecular
nanomaterials: dendrimers, etc.,

UNIT II NANOTECHNOLOGY IN BIOMEDICAL INDUSTRY 9

Reconstructive Intervention and Surgery- Nanomaterials in bone substitutes and dentistry – Implants
and Prosthesis -in vivo imaging- genetic defects and other disease states –– Nanorobotics in
Surgery –Nanocarriers: sustained, controlled, targeted drug delivery systems.

230
UNIT III NANOTECHNOLOGY IN CANCER THERAPY 9
Cancer Cell Targeting and Detection- Polymeric Nanoparticles for cancer treatment – mechanism
of drug delivery to tumors -advantages and limitations - Multifunctional Agents - Cancer Imaging –
Magnetic Resonance Imaging- Cancer Immunotherapy.

UNIT IV NANOTECHNOLOGY IN COSMETICS 9

Polymers in cosmetics: Film Formers – Thickeners – Hair Colouring – Conditioning Polymers:
conditioning, Cleansing – Silicons – Emulsions – Stimuli Responsive Polymeric Systems -
Formulation of Nano Gels, Shampoos, Hair-conditioners -Micellar self-assembly Sun-screen
dispersions for UV protection – Color cosmetics.

UNIT V NANOTOXICITY 9
NanoToxicology- introduction, dose relationship- Hazard Classification-Risk assessment and
management - factors affecting nano toxicity- Dermal Effects of Nanomaterials, Pulmonary, Neuro
and Cardiovascular effects of Nanoparticles - Gene–Cellular and molecular Interactions of
Nanomaterials.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The student will be able to
CO1:Identify the process for the preparation and characterization of the different nanostructured
materials.
CO2:Apply the nanotechnology in biomedical discipline with related to drug delivery and disease
diagnosis
CO3:Develop the process, experiments and apply in identifying in a societal and global context.
CO4:Design and develop the process with suitable equipment for the preparation of nanomaterials
in developing cosmetic products.
CO5:Understand the ethical principles to confirm the safety of the nano products with respect to risk
assessment and its management.
CO6:Have the knowledge about nanotechnology products and its different applications in a societal
and global context.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology- Ed. by B. Bhushan, Springer-Verlag 2004
2. Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives,. [Link] C A. Mirkin,
(Eds) , Wiley, 2004
3. Nanotechnology: Health and Environmental Risks, Jo Anne Shatkin, Second Edition, CRC
Press, 2013
4. Sarah E. Morgan, Kathleen O. Havelka, Robert Y. Lochhead “Cosmetic Nanotechnology:
Polymers and Colloids in Cosmetics”, American Chemical Society, 2006.

REFERENCES:
1. Nanotechnology in Biology and Medicine: Methods, Devices and Applications, Tuan VoDinh,
CRC Press, 2007
2. The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications, C.N.R. Rao, A.
Muller, A. K. Cheetham (Eds), Wiley-VCH Verlag 2004
3. Nanotechnology: Environmental Health and safety, Risks, Regulation and Management,
Matthew Hull and Diana Bowman, Elsevier, 2010.

231
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
Course Outcome Programme Outcomes (PO) Programme
Statements Specific
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO1 3 3 1 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 1 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO6 3 3 2 2 3 3 2
Overall CO 3 3 1 2 2 3 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation
(1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and
Substantial (High) respectively.)

OAE351 AVIATION MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire solid background of managerial skills in aviation management
 To develop personality to face business difficulties.
 To control multicultural conditions.
 To identify the relevant analytical and logical skills to deal with problems in the airline
industry.
 To learn the concepts of performing well in teams, professionalism, an d the knowledge
acquired in the field of airport planning, airport security, passengers forecasting, aerodromes
work etc

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
History of aviation – organisation, global, social & ethical environment – history of Aviation in India
– major players in the airline industry - swot analysis of the different Airline companies in India –
market potential of airline industry in India – new airport Development plans – current challenges in
the airline industry - competition in the Airline industry – domestic and international from an Indian
perspective

UNIT II AIRPORT INFRASTRUCTURE AND MANAGEMENT 8

Airport planning – terminal planning design and operation – airport operations – Airport functions –
organisation structure in an airline - airport authority of India - Comparison of global and Indian
airport management – role of AAI -airline privatisation - full Privatisation - gradual privatisation –
partial privatization

UNIT III AIR TRANSPORT SERVICES 12

Various airport services - international air transport services – Indian scenario – an Overview of
airports in Delhi, Mumbai, Hyderabad and Bangalore – the role of private Operators – airport
development fees, rates, tariffs
232
UNIT IV INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK 8
Role of DGCA - slot allocation – methodology followed by AFC and DGCA -management of
Bilaterals – economic regulations

UNIT V CONTROLLING 8
Role of air traffic control - airspace and navigational aids – control process – case
Studies in airline industry – Mumbai Delhi airport privatisation – Navi Mumbai airport
Tendering process – 6 cases in the airline industry
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Graham.A. Managing Airports: An International Perspective - Butterworth - Heinemann,
Oxford 2001.
2. Wells.A. Airport Planning and Management, 4th Edition McGraw- Hill, London 2000.

REFERENCES
1. Doganis. R. The Airport Business Routledge, London 1992
2. Alexender T. Wells, Seth Young, Principles of Airport Management, McGraw Hill 2003
3. P S Senguttavan Fundementals of Air Transport Management , Excel Books 2007
4. Richard de Neufille, Airport Systems: Planning, Design and Management, McGraw-Hill
London 2007.
5.. Manual of Aerodrome licensing of AAI airports – AAI website – freely downloadable – issue may
2010

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:To interpret business difficulties.
CO2:To Dissect multicultural conditions.
CO3:To identify and apply the relevant analytical and logical skills to deal with problems in the
airline industry.
CO4:To Develop well in teams, professionalism etc.
CO5:To apply the knowledge acquired in the field of airport planning, airport security, passengers
forecasting, aerodromes work etc.

233
 OPEN ELCTIVE III

OHS351 ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMINATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course Description:
Students aspiring to take up competitive exams of which the English language is a vital component
will find this course useful. Designed for students in the higher semesters, the course will help
students to familiarise themselves with those aspects of English that are tested in these
examinations.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in the language components essential to face competitive examinations
both at the national (UPSC, Banking, Railway, Defence) and the international level (GRE,
TOEFL, IELTS).
 To enhance an awareness of the specific patterns in language testing and the respective skills
to tackle verbal reasoning and verbal ability tests.
 To inculcate effective practices in language-learning in order to improve accuracy in usage of
grammar and coherence in writing.
 To improve students’ confidence to express their ideas and opinions in formal contexts
 To create awareness of accuracy and precision in communication

UNIT I 9
Orientation on different formats of competitive exams - Vocabulary – Verbal ability – Verbal
reasoning - Exploring the world of words – Essential words – Meaning and their usage – Synonyms-
antonyms – Word substitution – Word analogy – Idioms and phrases – Commonly confused words
– Spellings – Word expansion – New words in use.

UNIT II 9
Grammar – Sentence improvement –Sentence completion – Rearranging phrases into sentences –
Error identification –Tenses – Prepositions – Adjectives – Adverbs – Subject-verb agreement –
Voice – Reported speech – Articles – Clauses – Speech patterns.

UNIT III 9
Reading - Specific information and detail – Identifying main and supporting ideas – Speed reading
techniques – Improving global reading skills – Linking ideas – Summarising – Understanding
argument – Identifying opinion/attitude and making inferences - Critical reading.

UNIT IV 9
Writing – Pre-writing techniques – Mindmap - Describing pictures and facts - Paragraph structure –
organising points – Rhetoric writing – Improving an answer – Drafting, writing and developing an
argument – Focus on cohesion – Using cohesive devices –Analytic writing – Structure and types of
essay – Mind maps – Structure of drafts, letters, memos, emails – Statements of Purpose –
Structure, Content and Style.

UNIT V 9
Listening and Speaking – Contextual listening – Listening to instructions – Listening for specific
information – Identifying detail, main ideas – Following signpost words – Stress, rhythm and
intonation - Speaking to respond and elicit ideas – Guided speaking – Opening phrases – Interactive
234
communication – Dysfluency -Sentence stress – Speaking on a topic – Giving opinions – Giving an
oral presentation – Telling a story or a personal anecdote – Talking about oneself - Utterance –
Speech acts- Brainstorming ideas – Group discussion.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 expand their vocabulary and gain practical techniques to read and comprehend a wide range
of texts with the emphasis required
 identify errors with precision and write with clarity and coherence
 understand the importance of task fulfilment and the usage of task-appropriate vocabulary
 communicate effectively in group discussions, presentations and interviews
 write topic based essays with precision and accuracy

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
AVg. 2 2.6 2.6 2 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 3 2.4 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

Teaching Methods:
Instructional methods will involve discussions, taking mock tests on various question papers –
Objective, multiple-choice and descriptive. Peer evaluation, self-check on improvement and peer
feedback - Practice sessions on speaking assessments, interview and discussion – Using
multimedia.

Evaluative Pattern:
Internal Tests – 50%
End Semester Exam - 50%

TEXTBOOKS:
1. [Link] - General English for Competitive Examinations. Macmillan India Limited,
2009.

REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Educational Testing Service - The Official Guide to the GRE Revised General Test, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. The Official Guide to the TOEFL Test, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. R Rajagopalan- General English for Competitive Examinations, McGraw Hill Education
(India) Private Limited, 2008.

235
Websites
[Link] [Link] , [Link]
[Link] [Link]
[Link]

OMG352 NGOS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 to understand the importance of sustainable development
 to acquire a reasonable knowledge on the legal frameworks pertaining to pollution control and
environmental management
 to comprehend the role of NGOs in attaining sustainable development

Unit I ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 9

Introduction to sustainable development goals, Global responsibility of environmental concern,
Importance of environmental preservation, Environmental threats, Pollution and its types, Effects of
Pollution, Pollution control, Treatment of wastes

UNIT II ROLE OF NGOS 9

Role of NGO’s in national development, NGO’s and participatory management, Challenges and
limitations of NGO’s, Community Development programmes, Role of NGO’s in Community
Development programmes, Participation of NGO’s in environment management, Corporate Social
responsibility, NGO’s and corporate social responsibility

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Issues and Challenges of Sustainable Development, Bioenergy, Sustainable Livelihoods and Rural
Poor in Sustainable Development, Protecting ecosystem services for sustainable development,
Non-renewable sources of energy and its effect, Renewable sources of energy for sustainability,
Nuclear resources and Legal Regulation of Hazardous Substances, Sustainable Development:
Programme and Policies, Sustainability assessment and Indicators

UNIT IV NGO’S FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Civil Society Initiatives in Environment Management, Civil Society Initiatives for Sustainable
Development, Global Initiatives in Protecting Global Environment, World Summit on Sustainable
Development (Johannesburg Summit 2002), Ecological economics, Environmental sustainability,
Social inclusion, Health for all, education for all, Food security and Water security, NGOs and
Sustainable Development strategies

UNIT V LEGAL FRAMEWORKS 9

Need for a Legal framework and its enforcement, Legal measures to control pollution, Environmental
Legislations in India, Mechanism to implement Environmental Laws in India, Legal Protection of
Forests Act 1927, Legal Protection of Wild Life, Role of NGO’s in implementing environmental laws,
Challenges in the implementation of environmental legislation
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS

236
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student will :
CO1 Have a thorough grounding on the issues and challenges being faced in attaining sustainable
development
CO2 have a knowledge on the role of NGOs towards sustainable developemnt
CO3 present strategies for NGOs in attaining sustainable development
CO4 recognize the importance of providing energy, food security and health equity to all members
of the society without damaging the environment
CO5 understand the environmental legislations

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Kulsange, S and Kamble, R. (2019). Environmental NGO’s: Sustainability Stewardship, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing, India, ISBN-13: 978-6200442444.
2. Dodds, F. (2007). NGO diplomacy: The influence of nongovernmental organizations in
international environmental negotiations. Mit Press, Cambridge, ISBN-13: 978-0262524766.
3. Ghosh, S. (Ed.). (2019). Indian environmental law: Key concepts and principles. Orient
BlackSwan, India, ISBN-13: 978-9352875795.
4. Alan Fowler and Chiku Malunga (2010) NGO Management: The Earthscan Companion,
Routledge, ISBN-13 : 978-1849711197.

OMG353 DEMOCRACY AND GOOD GOVERNANCE L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I (9)
Structure and Process of Governance: Indian Model of Democracy, Parliament, Party Politics and
Electoral Behaviour, Federalism, the Supreme Court and Judicial Activism, Units of Local
Governance

UNIT II (9)
Regulatory Institutions – SEBI, TRAI, Competition Commission of India,

UNIT III (9)

Lobbying Institutions: Chambers of Commerce and Industries, Trade Unions, Farmers Associations,
etc.

UNIT IV (9)
Contemporary Political Economy of Development in India: Policy Debates over Models of
Development in India, Recent trends of Liberalisation of Indian Economy in different sectors, E‐
governance

UNIT V (9)
Dynamics of Civil Society: New Social Movements, Role of NGO’s, Understanding the political
significance of Media and Popular Culture.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS

237
REFERENCES:
1. Atul Kohli (ed.): The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
2. Corbridge, Stuart and John Harris: Reinventing India: Liberalisation, Hindu Nationalism and
Popular Democracy, Oxford University Press, 2000.
3. [Link] and [Link], India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, Clarendon, 1995.
4. Saima Saeed: Screening the Public Sphere: Media and Democracy in India,2013
5. Himat Singh: Green Revolution Reconsidered: The Rural World of Punjab, OUP, 2001.
6. Jagdish Bhagwati: India in Transition: Freeing The Economy, 1993.
7. Smitu Kothari: Social Movements and the Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder, Westview, 1993.

CME365 RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To know the Indian and global energy scenario
 To learn the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
 To educate the various wind energy technologies.
 To explore the various bio-energy technologies.
 To study the ocean and geothermal technologies.

UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Indian energy scenario in various sectors – domestic, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
transportation and others – Present conventional energy status – Present renewable energy status-
Potential of various renewable energy sources-Global energy status-Per capita energy consumption
- Future energy plans

UNIT II SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar radiation – Measurements of solar radiation and sunshine – Solar spectrum - Solar thermal
collectors – Flat plate and concentrating collectors – Solar thermal applications – Solar thermal
energy storage – Fundamentals of solar photo voltaic conversion – Solar cells – Solar PV Systems
– Solar PV applications.

UNIT III WIND ENERGY 9

Wind data and energy estimation – Betz limit - Site selection for windfarms – characteristics - Wind
resource assessment - Horizontal axis wind turbine – components - Vertical axis wind turbine – Wind
turbine generators and its performance – Hybrid systems – Environmental issues - Applications.

UNIT IV BIO-ENERGY 9
Bio resources – Biomass direct combustion – thermochemical conversion - biochemical conversion-
mechanical conversion - Biomass gasifier - Types of biomass gasifiers - Cogeneration –-
Carbonisation – Pyrolysis - Biogas plants – Digesters –Biodiesel production – Ethanol production -
Applications.

UNIT V OCEAN AND GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9

Small hydro - Tidal energy – Wave energy – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Limitations –
Geothermal energy – Geothermal energy sources - Types of geothermal power plants – Applications
- Environmental impact.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
238
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
 Discuss the Indian and global energy scenario.
 Describe the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
 Explain the various wind energy technologies.
 Explore the various bio-energy technologies.
 Discuss the ocean and geothermal technologies.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals and Applications of Renewable Energy | Indian Edition, by Mehmet Kanoglu,
Yunus A. Cengel, John M. Cimbala, cGraw Hill; First edition (10 December 2020), ISBN-
10 : 9390385636
2. Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, by Kothari, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited; 2nd edition (1 January 2011), ISBN-10 : 8120344707

REFERENCES:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K., 2012.
2. Rai.G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Sukhatme.S.P., “Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Alpha
Science Intl Ltd, 2015.
5. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2
4 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
5 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OME354 APPLIED DESIGN THINKING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Introduce tools & techniques of design thinking for innovative product
 development Illustrate customer-centric product innovation using on simple
 use cases Demonstrate development of Minimum usable Prototypes
 Outline principles of solution concepts & their evaluation
 Describe system thinking principles as applied to complex systems

239
UNIT I DESIGN THINKING PRINCIPLES 9
Exploring Human-centered Design - Understanding the Innovation process, discovering areas of
opportunity, Interviewing & empathy-building techniques, Mitigate validation risk with FIR [Forge
Innovation rubric] - Case studies

UNIT II ENDUSER-CENTRIC INNOVATION 9

Importance of customer-centric innovation - Problem Validation and Customer Discovery -
Understanding problem significance and problem incidence - Customer Validation. Target user,
User persona & user stories. Activity: Customer development process - Customer interviews and
field visit

UNIT III APPLIED DESIGN THINKING TOOLS 9

Concept of Minimum Usable Prototype [MUP] - MUP challenge brief - Designing & Crafting
the value proposition - Designing and Testing Value Proposition; Design a compelling value
proposition; Process, tools and techniques of Value Proposition Design

UNIT IV CONCEPT GENERATION 9

Solution Exploration, Concepts Generation and MUP design- Conceptualize the solution concept;
explore, iterate and learn; build the right prototype; Assess capability, usability and feasibility.
Systematic concept generation; evaluation of technology alternatives and the solution concepts

UNIT V SYSTEM THINKING 9

System Thinking, Understanding Systems, Examples and Understandings, Complex Systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
CO1:Define & test various hypotheses to mitigate the inherent risks in product innovations.
CO2:Design the solution concept based on the proposed value by exploring alternate solutions to
achieve value-price fit.
CO3:Develop skills in empathizing, critical thinking, analyzing, storytelling & pitching
CO4:Apply system thinking in a real-world scenario

TEXT BOOKS
1. Steve Blank, (2013), The four steps to epiphany: Successful strategies for products that win,
Wiley.
2. Alexander Osterwalder, Yves Pigneur, Gregory Bernarda, Alan Smith, Trish Papadakos, (2014),
Value
3. Proposition Design: How to Create Products and Services Customers Want, Wiley
4. Donella H. Meadows, (2015), “Thinking in Systems -A Primer”, Sustainability Institute.
5. Tim Brown,(2012) “Change by Design: How Design Thinking Transforms Organizations and
Inspires Innovation”, Harper Business.

REFERENCES
1. [Link]
2. [Link] [Link]/valuation-risk-versus-validation-risk-in-product-innovations-
49f253ca86 24
3. [Link] [Link]/product-innovation-rubric-adf5ebdfd356
4. [Link] [Link]/evaluating-product-innovations-e8178e58b86e
240
5. [Link] [Link]/user-guide-for-product-innovation-rubric-857181b253dd
6. [Link] [Link]/star tup-failure-is-like-true-lie-7812cdfe9b85

MF3003 REVERSE ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The main learning objective of this course is to prepare students for:
 Applying the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design
and development.
 Applying the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation
in reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Applying the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Analysing the various legal aspect and applications of reverse engineering in product design
and development.
 Understand about 3D scanning hardware & software operations and procedure to generate
3D model

UNIT I INTRODUCTION & GEOMETRIC FORM 9 Hours

Definition – Uses – The Generic Process – Phases – Computer Aided Reverse Engineering -
Surface and Solid Model Reconstruction – Dimensional Measurement – Prototyping.

UNIT II MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS AND PROCESS IDENTIFICATION 9 Hours

.Alloy Structure Equivalency – Phase Formation and Identification – Mechanical Strength –
Hardness –Part Failure Analysis – Fatigue – Creep and Stress Rupture – Environmentally Induced
Failure Material Specification - Composition Determination - Microstructure Analysis - Manufacturing
Process Verification.

UNIT III DATA PROCESSING 9 Hours

Statistical Analysis – Data Analysis – Reliability and the Theory of Interference – Weibull Analysis –
Data Conformity and Acceptance – Data Report – Performance Criteria – Methodology of
Performance Evaluation – System Compatibility.

UNIT IV 3D SCANNING AND MODELLING 9 Hours

Introduction, working principle and operations of 3D scanners: Laser, White Light, Blue Light -
Applications- Software for scanning and modelling: Types- Applications- Preparation techniques for
Scanning objects- Scanning and Measuring strategies - Calibration of 3D Scanner- Step by step
procedure: 3D scanning - Geometric modelling – 3D inspection- Case studies.

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9 Hours

Reverse Engineering in the Automotive Industry; Aerospace Industry; Medical Device Industry. Case
studies and Solving Industrial projects in Reverse [Link]: Patent – Copyrights –Trade
Secret – Third-Party Materials.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Apply the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
241
development.
CO2:Apply the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
CO3:Apply the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
CO4:Apply the concept and principles of data processing, part performance and system
compatibility in reverse engineering of product design and development.
CO5:Analyze the various legal aspect
CO6:Applications of reverse engineering in product design and development.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Messler, Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials, 1st
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. Wego Wang, Reverse Engineering Technology of Reinvention, CRC Press, 2011

REFERENCES:
1. Scott J. Lawrence , Principles of Reverse Engineering, Kindle Edition, 2022
2. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, Product Design: Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New
Product Development, Prentice Hall, 2001
3. Kathryn, A. Ingle, “Reverse Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
4. Linda Wills, “Reverse Engineering”, Kluver Academic Publishers, 1996
5. Vinesh Raj and Kiran Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-
Verlag London Limited 2008.

OPR351 SUSTAINABLE MANUFACTURING LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To be acquainted with sustainability in manufacturing and its evaluation.
 To provide knowledge in environment and social sustainability.
 To provide the student with the knowledge of strategy to achieve sustainability.
 To familiarize with trends in sustainable operations.
 To create awareness in current sustainable practices in manufacturing industry.

UNIT I ECONOMIC SUSTAINABILITY 9

Industrial Revolution-Economic sustainability: globalization and international issues Sustainability
status - Emerging issues- Innovative products- Reconfiguration manufacturing enterprises -
Competitive manufacturing strategies - Performance evaluation- Management for sustainability -
Assessments of economic sustainability

UNIT II SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY 9

Social sustainability – Introduction-Work management -Human rights - Societal commitment -
Customers -Business practices -Modelling and assessing social sustainability. Environmental issues
pertaining to the manufacturing sector: Pollution - Use of resources -Pressure to reduce costs -
Environmental management: Processes that minimize negative environmental impacts -
environmental legislation and energy costs - need to reduce the carbon footprint of manufacturing
Operations-Modelling and assessing environmental sustainability

242
UNIT III SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 9
Sustainability awareness - Measuring Industry Awareness-Drivers and barriers -Availability of
sustainability indicators -Analysis of sustainability practicing -Modeling and assessment of
sustainable practicing -Sustainability awareness -Sustainability drivers and barriers - Availability of
sustainability indicators- Designing questionnaires- Optimizing Sustainability Indexes-Elements –
Cost and time model.

UNIT IV MANUFACTURING STRATEGY FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.

UNIT V TRENDS IN SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS 9

Principles of sustainable operations - Life cycle assessment manufacturing and service activities -
influence of product design on operations - Process analysis – Capacity management - Quality
management -Inventory management - Just-In-Time systems - Resource efficient design -
Consumerism and sustainable well-being.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Discuss the importance of economic sustainability.
CO2: Describe the importance of sustainable practices.
CO3: Identify drivers and barriers for the given conditions.
CO4: Formulate strategy in sustainable manufacturing.
CO5: Plan for sustainable operation of industry with environmental, cost consciousness.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises Concepts, Analyses and
Assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer International Publishing., United States, 2016, ISBN-
13: 978-3319293042.
2. Davim J.P., “Sustainable Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons., United States, 2010,ISBN: 978-
1-848-21212-1.

REFERENCES:
1. Jovane F, Ęmper, W.E. and Williams, D.J., “The ManuFuture Road: Towards
Competitive and Sustainable High-Adding-Value Manufacturing”, Springer,2009, United
States, ISBN 978-3-540-77011-4.
2. Kutz M., “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, John Wiley & Sons., United States,
2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-72636-4.
3. Seliger G., “Sustainable Manufacturing: Shaping Global Value Creation”, Springer,
United States, 2012, ISBN 978-3-642-27289-9.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
243
 CO2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 - - - - - 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO/PO &
3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
PSO Average
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

AU3791 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to prepare the students to know about the general aspects of
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (EHV), including architectures, modelling, sizing, and sub
system design and hybrid vehicle control.

UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Need for Electric vehicle- Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and electric Vehicles.
Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric Vehicles. - Design requirement for electric
vehicles- Range, maximum velocity, acceleration, power requirement, mass of the vehicle. Various
Resistance- Transmission efficiency- Electric vehicle chassis and Body Design, Electric Vehicle
Recharging and Refuelling Systems.

UNIT II ENERGY SOURCES 9

Battery Parameters- - Different types of batteries – Lead Acid- Nickel Metal Hydride - Lithium ion-
Sodium based- Metal Air. Battery Modelling - Equivalent circuits, Battery charging- Quick Charging
devices. Fuel Cell- Fuel cell Characteristics- Fuel cell types-Half reactions of fuel cell. Ultra
capacitors. Battery Management System.

UNIT III MOTORS AND DRIVES 9

Types of Motors- DC motors- AC motors, PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors
working principle, construction and characteristics.

UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9

Solid state Switching elements and characteristics – BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRIAC -
Power Converters – rectifiers, inverters and converters - Motor Drives - DC, AC motor, PMSM
motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors – four quadrant operations –operating modes

UNIT V HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Main components and working principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different configurations
of hybrid and electric vehicles. Power Split devices for Hybrid Vehicles - Operation modes - Control
Strategies for Hybrid Vehicle - Economy of hybrid Vehicles - Case study on specification of electric
and hybrid vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
CO1:Understand the operation and architecture of electric and hybrid vehicles
CO2:Identify various energy source options like battery and fuel cell
244
CO3:Select suitable electric motor for applications in hybrid and electric vehicles.
CO4:Explain the role of power electronics in hybrid and electric vehicles
CO5:Analyze the energy and design requirement for hybrid and electric vehicles.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRCPress,2005.

REFERENCES:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley &
Sons,2003
2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005
3. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication,2005.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
4 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
5 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Avg. 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OAS352 SPACE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Use the standard atmosphere tables and equations.
 Find lift and drag coefficient data from NACA plots.
 Apply the concept of static stability to flight vehicles.
 Describe the concepts of stress, strain, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield strength.
 Demonstrate a basic knowledge of dynamics relevant to orbital mechanics.

UNIT I STANDARD ATMOSPHERE 6

History of aviation – standard atmosphere - pressure, temperature and density altitude.

UNIT II AERODYNAMICS 10
Aerodynamic forces – Lift generation Viscosity and its implications - Shear stress in a velocity profile
- Lagrangian and Eulerian flow field - Concept of a streamline – Aircraft terminology and geometry -
Aircraft types - Lift and drag coefficients using NACA data.

UNIT III PERFORMANCE AND PROPULSION 9

Viscous and pressure drag - flow separation - aerodynamic drag - thrust calculations -thrust/power
available and thrust/power required.

245
UNIT IV AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND STRUCTURAL THEORY 10
Degrees of freedom of aircraft motions - stable, unstable and neutral stability - concept of static
stability - Hooke’s Law- brittle and ductile materials - moment of inertia - section
modulus.

UNIT V SPACE APPLICATIONS 10

History of space research - spacecraft trajectories and basic orbital manoeuvres - six orbital
elements - Kepler’s laws of orbits - Newtons law of gravitation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Illustrate the history of aviation & developments over the years
CO2:Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
CO3:Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
CO4:Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
CO5:Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket

TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D. Anderson, Introduction to Flight, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Education, New York,2015.
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021.
3. Stephen. A. Brandt, " Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective "
American Institute of Aeronautics & Astronautics,1997.
REFERENCE:
1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.

OIM351 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce fundamental concepts of industrial management
 To understand the approaches to the study of Management
 To learn about Decision Making, Organizing and leadership
 To analyze the Managerial Role and functions
 To know about the Supply Chain Management’

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Technology Management - Definition - Functions - Evolution of Modern Management - Scientific
Management Development of Management Thought. Approaches to the study of Management,
Forms of Organization -Individual Ownership - Partnership - Joint Stock Companies - Co-operative
Enterprises - Public Sector Undertakings, Corporate Frame Work- Share Holders - Board of
Directors - Committees - Chief Executive Line and Functional Managers,-Financial-Legal-Trade
Union

UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 9

Planning - Nature and Purpose - Objectives - Strategies – Policies and Planning Premises - Decision
Making - Organizing - Nature and Process - Premises - Departmentalization - Line and staff -
Decentralization -Organizational culture, Staffing - selection and training .Placement - Performance
appraisal - Career Strategy – Organizational Development. Leading - Managing human factor -
246
Leadership .Communication, Controlling - Process of Controlling - Controlling techniques,
productivity and operations management - Preventive control, Industrial Safety.

UNIT III ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9

Definition - Organization - Managerial Role and functions -Organizational approaches, Individual
behaviour - causes - Environmental Effect - Behaviour and Performance, Perception -
Organizational Implications. Personality - Contributing factors - Dimension – Need Theories -
Process Theories - Job Satisfaction, Learning and Behaviour-Learning Curves, Work Design and
approaches.

UNIT IV GROUPDYNAMICS 9
Group Behaviour - Groups - Contributing factors - Group Norms, Communication - Process - Barriers
to communication - Effective communication, leadership - formal and informal characteristics –
Managerial Grid - Leadership styles - Group Decision Making - Leadership Role in Group Decision,
Group Conflicts - Types -Causes - Conflict Resolution -Inter group relations and conflict,
Organization centralization and decentralization - Formal and informal - Organizational Structures
Organizational Change and Development -Change Process – Resistance to Change - Culture and
Ethics.

UNIT V MODERN CONCEPTS 9

Management by Objectives (MBO) - Management by Exception (MBE),Strategic Management -
Planning for Future direction - SWOT Analysis -Evolving development strategies, information
technology in management Decisions support system-Management Games Business Process Re-
engineering(BPR) –Enterprises Resource Planning (ERP) - Supply Chain Management (SCM) -
Activity Based Management (AM) - Global Perspective - Principles and Steps Advantages and
disadvantage
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of industrial management
CO2: Identify the group conflicts and its causes.
CO3: Perform swot analysis
CO4 : Analyze the learning curves
CO5 : Understand the placement and performance appraisal

REFERENCES:
1. Maynard H.B, “Industrial Engineering Hand book”, McGraw-Hill, sixth 2008
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3
4 2 2 3 3 3 3
5 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2.2 2.3 3 1.8 2 2.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

247
OIE354 QUALITY ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Developing a clear knowledge in the basics of various quality concepts.
 Facilitating the students in understanding the application of control charts and its techniques.
 Developing thespecialcontrolproceduresforserviceandprocessorientedindustries.
 Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
 Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Quality Dimensions–Quality definitions–Inspection-Quality control–Quality Assurance–Quality
planning-Quality costs–Economics of quality– Quality loss function

UNIT II CONTROLCHARTS 9
Chance and assignable causes of process variation, statistical basis of the control chart, control
charts for variables- X , R and S charts, attribute control charts - p, np, c and u- Construction and
application.

UNIT III SPECIAL CONTROL PROCEDURES 9

Warning and modified control limits, control chart for individual measurements, multi-vari chart,
Xchart with a linear trend, chart for moving averages and ranges, cumulative-sum and exponentially
weighted moving average control charts.

UNIT IV STATISTICALPROCESSCONTROL 9
Process stability, process capability analysis using a Histogram or probability plots and control
[Link] capability studies,setting specification limits.

UNITV ACCEPTANCESAMPLING 9
The acceptance sampling fundamental, OC curve, sampling plans for attributes, simple, double,
multiple and sequential, sampling plans for variables,MIL-STD-105DandMIL-STD-414E&IS2500
standards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
CO1: Control the quality of processes using control charts for variables in manufacturing industries.
CO2: Control the occurrence of defective product and the defects in manufacturing companies.
CO3: Control the occurrence of defects in services.
CO4: Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
CO5: Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
4 3 2 3 1 1

248
 5 2 3 3 3 1
AVg. 2.6 2.7 2.7 3 3 1 2.7 1 2.7 1 2 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OSF351 FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Fire and Safety Studies
 To learn about the effect of fire on materials used for construction, the method of test for non-
combustibility & fire resistance
 To learn about fire area, fire stopped areas and different types of fire-resistant doors
 To learn about the method of fire protection of structural members and their repair due to fire
damage.
 To develop safety professionals for both technical and management through systematic and
quality-based study programmes

UNIT I INHERENT SAFETY CONCEPTS 9

Compartment fire-factors controlling fire severity, ventilation controlled and fuel controlled fires;
Spread of fire in rooms, within building and between buildings. Effect of temperature on the
properties of structural materials- concrete, steel, masonry and wood; Behavior of non-structural
materials on fire- plastics, glass, textile fibres and other house hold materials.

UNIT II PLANT LOCATIONS 9

Compartment temperature-time response at pre-flashover and post flashover periods; Equivalence
of fire severity of compartment fire and furnace fire; Fire resistance test on structural elements-
standard heating condition, Indian standard test method, performance criteria.

UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9

Fire separation between building- principle of calculation of safe distance. Design principles of fire
resistant walls and ceilings; Fire resistant screens- solid screens and water curtains; Local barriers;
Fire stopped areas-in roof, in fire areas and in connecting structures; Fire doors- Low combustible,
Non-combustible and Spark-proof doors; method of suspension of fire doors; Air-tight sealing of
doors;

UNIT IV FIRE SEVERITY AND REPAIR TECHNIQUES 9

Fabricated fire proof boards-calcium silicate, Gypsum, Vermiculite, and Perlite boards; Fire
protection of structural elements - Wooden, Steel and RCC.. Reparability of fire damaged structures-
Assessment of damage to concrete, steel, masonry and timber structures, Repair techniques- repair
methods to reinforced concrete Columns, beams and slabs, Repair to steel structural members,
Repair to masonry structures.

UNIT V WORKING AT HEIGHTS 9

Safe Access - Requirement for Safe Work Platforms- Stairways - Gangways and Ramps-Fall
Prevention & Fall Protection - Safety Belts - Safety nets - Fall Arrestors- Working on Fragile Roofs -
Work Permit Systems-Accident Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

249
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1:Understand the effect of fire on materials used for construction
CO2:Understand the method of test for non-combustibility and fire resistance; and will be able to
select different structural elements and their dimensions for a particular fire resistance rating of a
building.
CO3:To understand the design concept of fire walls, fire screens, local barriers and fire doors and
able to select them appropriately to prevent fire spread.
CO4:To decide the method of fire protection to RCC, steel, and wooden structural elements and
their repair methods if damaged due to fire.
CO5:Describe the safety techniques and improve the analytical and intelligence to take the right
decision at right time.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Roytman, M. Y,”Principles of fire safety standards for building construction”. Amerind Publishing
Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,1975
2. John A. Purkiss,”Fire safety engineering design of structures” (2nd edn.), Butterworth
Heinemann, Oxford, UK,2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Smith, E.E. and Harmathy, T.Z. (Editors),”Design of buildings for fire safety”. ASTM Special
Publication 685, American Society for Testing and Materials, Boston, U.S.A,1979.
2. Butcher, E. G. and Parnell, A. C, ”Designing of fire safety”. JohnWiley and Sons Ltd., New
York, U.S.A.1983.
3. Jain, V.K,”Fire safety in buildings” (2nd edn.). New Age International(P) Ltd., New Delhi,2010.
4. Hazop&Hazan,”Identifying and Assessing Process Industry Hazards”, Fourth
Edition ,1999
4. Frank R. Spellman, Nancy E. Whiting,”The Handbook of Safety Engineering: Principles and
Applications”, 2009

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 1 - 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - - - - -
4 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
5 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - -
AVg. 1.3 - 1.75 - - 1 1.3 1 1 - 1 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OML351 INTRODUCTION TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Understanding the basic importance of NDT in quality assurance.

250
  Imbibing the basic principles of various NDT techniques, its applications, limitations, codes
and standards.
 Equipping themselves to locate a flaw in various materials, products.
 Applying apply the testing methods for inspecting materials in accordance with industry
specifications and standards.
 Acquiring the knowledge on the selection of the suitable NDT technique for a given
application

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NDT & VISUAL TESTING 9

Concepts of Non-destructive testing-relative merits and limitations-NDT Versus mechanical testing,
Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material attributes, environmental factors, visual
perception, direct and indirect methods – mirrors, magnifiers, boroscopes and fibroscopes – light
sources and special lighting.

UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT & MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING 9

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: principle, applications, advantages and limitations, dyes, developers
and cleaners, Methods & Interpretation.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: Principles, applications, magnetization methods, magnetic particles,
Testing Procedure, demagnetization, advantages and limitations, – Interpretation and evaluation of
test indications.

UNIT III EDDY CURRENT TESTING & THERMOGRAPHY 9

Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents– properties– eddy current sensing elements,
probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, applications, advantages, limitations – Factors
affecting sensing elements and coil impedance, calibration, Interpretation/Evaluation.
Thermography- Principle, Contact & Non-Contact inspection methods, Active & Passive methods,
Liquid Crystal – Concept, example, advantages & limitations. Electromagnetic spectrum, infrared
thermography- approaches, IR detectors, Instrumentation and methods, applications.

UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING & AET 9

Ultrasonic Testing: Types of ultrasonic waves, characteristics, attenuation, couplants, probes,
EMAT. Inspection methods-pulse echo, transmission and phased array techniques, types of
scanning and displays, angle beam inspection of welds, time of flight diffraction (TOFD) technique,
Thickness determination by ultrasonic method, Study of A, B and C scan presentations, calibration.
Acoustic Emission Technique – Introduction, Types of AE signal, AE wave propagation, Source
location, Kaiser effect, AE transducers, Principle, AE parameters, AE instrumentation, Advantages
& Limitations, Interpretation of Results, Applications.

UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY TESTING 9

Sources-X-rays and Gamma rays and their characteristics-absorption, scattering. Filters and
screens, Imaging modalities-film radiography and digital radiography (Computed, Direct, Real Time,
CT scan). Problems in shadow formation, exposure factors, inverse square law, exposure charts,
Penetrameters, safety in radiography.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1:Realize the importance of NDT in various engineering fields.

251
CO2:Have a basic knowledge of surface NDE techniques which enables to carry out various
inspection in accordance with the established procedures.
CO3:Calibrate the instrument and inspect for in-service damage in the components by means of
Eddy current testing as well as Thermography testing.
CO4:Differentiate various techniques of UT and AET and select appropriate NDT methods for better
evaluation.
CO5:Interpret the results of Radiography testing and also have the ability to analyse the influence
of various parameters on the testing.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha
Science International Limited, 3rd edition, 2002.
2. J. Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata McGraw-
Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2011.
3. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, V-17, "Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control", American
Society of Metals, USA, 2001.
2. Barry Hull and Vernon John,"Nondestructive Testing", Macmillan, 1989.
3. Chuck Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive Evaluation”, Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
4. Louis Cartz, "Nondestructive Testing", ASM International, USA, 1995.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2 2 1.8 2 1.3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMR351 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Selecting sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
 Explaining the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also interpret
and develop programs.
 Designing appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
 Applying PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
 Designing and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.

252
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SENSORS 9
Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Need for Mechatronics – Emerging areas of
Mechatronics – Classification of Mechatronics. Sensors and Transducers: Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance Sensors – Strain Gauges –
Eddy Current Sensor – Hall Effect Sensor –Temperature Sensors – Light Sensors.

UNIT II 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9

Introduction – Pin Configuration - Architecture of 8085 – Addressing Modes – Instruction set,
Timing diagram of 8085.

UNIT III PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 9

Introduction – Architecture of 8255, Keyboard Interfacing, LED display – Interfacing, ADC and
DAC Interface, Temperature Control – Stepper Motor Control – Traffic Control Interface.

UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9

Introduction – Architecture – Input / Output Processing – Programming with Timers, Counters
and Internal relays – Data Handling – Selection of PLC.

UNIT V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Characteristics, Stages
of Mechatronics Design Process – Comparison of Traditional and Mechatronics Design
Concepts with Examples – Case studies of Mechatronics Systems – Pick and Place Robot –
Engine Management system – Automatic Car Park Barrier.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Select sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
CO2: Explain the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also
interpret and develop programs.
CO3: Design appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
CO 4: Apply PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
CO 5: Design and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Average
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.

253
 2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with
the 8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.

ORA351 FOUNDATION OF ROBOTICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the kinematics, drive systems and programming of robots.
 To study the basics of robot laws and transmission systems.
 To familiarize students with the concepts and techniques of robot manipulator, its
kinematics.
 To familiarize students with the various Programming and Machine Vision application in
robots.
 To build confidence among students to evaluate, choose and incorporate robots in
engineering systems.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9

Robot – Definition – Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate systems, Work Envelope, types and
classification – specifications – Pitch, yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load –
Robot Parts and their functions – Need for Robots – Different Applications.

UNIT II ROBOT KINEMATICS 9

Forward kinematics, inverse kinematics and the difference: forward kinematics and inverse
Kinematics of Manipulators with two, three degrees of freedom (in 2 dimensional), four degrees
of freedom (in 3 dimensional) – derivations and problems. Homogeneous transformation
matrices, translation and rotation matrices.

UNIT III ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9

Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives – Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo
Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of
All These Drives. End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic
Grippers, Magnetic grippers, vacuum grippers, internal grippers and external grippers, selection
and design considerations of a gripper

254
UNIT IV SENSORS IN ROBOTICS 9
Force sensors, touch and tactile sensors, proximity sensors, non-contact sensors, safety
considerations in robotic cell, proximity sensors, fail safe hazard sensor systems, and compliance
mechanism. Machine vision system - camera, frame grabber, sensing and digitizing image data
– signal conversion, image storage, lighting techniques, image processing and analysis – data
reduction, segmentation, feature extraction, object recognition, other algorithms, applications –
Inspection, identification, visual serving and navigation.

UNIT V PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS OF ROBOT 9

Teach pendant programming, lead through programming, robot programming languages – VAL
programming – Motion Commands, Sensors commands, End-Effector Commands, and simple
programs - Role of robots in inspection, assembly, material handling, underwater, space and
medical fields.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the features of robots and technology involved in the control.
CO2: Apply the basic engineering knowledge and laws for the design of robotics.
CO3: Explain the basic concepts like various configurations, classification and parts of end
effectors compare various end effectors and grippers and tools and sensors used in robots.
CO4: Explain the concept of kinematics, degeneracy, dexterity and trajectory planning.
CO5: Demonstrate the image processing and image analysis techniques by machine vision
system.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

COs/POs& POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO/PO &
PSO
Average
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link],”A textbook of Industrial Robotics”, Lakshmi Publications, 2006.
2. [Link] , “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and applications”
McGraw Hill 2ND edition 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Fu K.S. Gonalz R.C. and ice C.S.G.”Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,
McGraw Hill book co. 2007.
2. YoramKoren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Book, Co., 2002.

255
 3. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill 2005.
4. John. [Link], “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control” 2nd Edition, 2002.
5. 5. Jazar, “Theory of Applied Robotics: Kinematics, Dynamics and Control”, Springer India
reprint, 2010.

OAE352 FUNDAMENTALS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire the knowledge on the Historical evaluation of Airplanes
 To learn the different component systems and functions
 To know the concepts of basic properties and principles behind the flight
 To learn the basics of different structures & construction
 To learn the various types of power plants used in aircrafts

UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8

Balloon flight-ornithopter-Early Airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes,
Developments in aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.

UNIT II AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS AND ITS CONTROLS 10

Different types of flight vehicles, classifications-Components of an airplane and their functions-
Conventional control, powered control- Basic instruments for flying-Typical systems for control
actuation.

UNIT III BASICS OF AERODYNAMICS 9

Physical Properties and structures of the Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude
relationships, Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics-Evolution of lift, drag and moment.
Aerofoils, Mach number, Maneuvers.

UNIT IV BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9

General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, typical
wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium,
stainless steel and composite materials. Stresses and strains-Hooke’s law- stress-strain diagrams-
elastic constants-Factor of Safety.

UNIT V BASICS OF PROPULSION 9

Basic ideas about piston, turboprop and jet engines – use of propeller and jets for thrust production-
Comparative merits, Principle of operation of rocket, types of rocket and typical
applications, Exploration into space.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Illustrate the history of aircraft & developments over the years
CO2:Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
CO3:Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
CO4:Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
CO5:Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket

256
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021
3. Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.

REFERENCE
1. SADHU SINGH, “INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINE”-, SS Kataraia
& sons, 2015
2. KERMODE , “FLIGHT WITHOUT FORMULAE”, -, Pitman; 4th Revised edition 1989

OGI351 REMOTE SENSING CONCEPTS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concepts of remote sensing processes and its components.
 To expose the various remote sensing platforms and sensors and to introduce the elements
of data interpretation

UNIT I REMOTE SENSING AND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 9

Definition – components of RS – History of Remote Sensing – Merits and demerits of data
collation between conventional and remote sensing methods - Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radiation principles - Wave theory, Planck‘s law, Wien’s Displacement Law, Stefan’s
Boltzmann law, Kirchoff‘s law – Radiation sources: active & passive - Radiation Quantities

UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIAL 9

Standard atmospheric profile – main atmospheric regions and its characteristics – interaction of
radiation with atmosphere – Scattering, absorption and refraction – Atmospheric windows - Energy
balance equation – Specular and diffuse reflectors – Spectral reflectance & emittance –
Spectroradiometer – Spectral Signature concepts – Typical spectral reflectance curves for
vegetation, soil and water – solid surface scattering in microwave region.

UNIT III ORBITS AND PLATFORMS 9

Motions of planets and satellites – Newton‘s law of gravitation - Gravitational field and potential -
Escape velocity - Kepler‘s law of planetary motion - Orbit elements and types – Orbital perturbations
and maneuvers – Types of remote sensing platforms - Ground based, Airborne platforms and Space
borne platforms – Classification of satellites – Sun synchronous and Geosynchronous satellites –
Lagrange Orbit.

UNIT IV SENSING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification of remote sensors – Resolution concept : spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal
resolutions - Scanners - Along and across track scanners – Optical-infrared sensors – Thermal
sensors – microwave sensors – Calibration of sensors - High Resolution Sensors - LIDAR , UAV –
Orbital and sensor characteristics of live Indian earth observation satellites

UNIT V DATA PRODUCTS AND INTERPRETATION 9

Photographic and digital products – Types, levels and open source satellite data products –-
257
selection and procurement of data– Visual interpretation: basic elements and interpretation keys -
Digital interpretation – Concepts of Image rectification, Image enhancement and Image classification
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO 1 Understand the concepts and laws related to remote sensing
CO 2 Understand the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atmosphere and earth material
CO 3 Acquire knowledge about satellite orbits and different types of satellites
CO 4 Understand the different types of remote sensors
CO 5 Gain knowledge about the concepts of interpretation of satellite imagery

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas [Link], Ralph W. Kiefer and Jonathan W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and
Image interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,2015.
2. George Joseph and C Jeganathan, Fundamentals of Remote Sensing,Third Edition
Universities Press (India) Private limited, Hyderabad, 2018

REFERENCES:
1. Janza, F.Z., Blue H.M. and Johnson,J.E. Manual of Remote Sensing. Vol.1, American Society
of Photogrametry, Virginia, USA, 2002.
2. Verbyla, David, Satellite Remote Sensing of Natural Resources. CRC Press, 1995
3. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman, RLBS, 1988.
4. Introduction to Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing , Charles Elachi and Jacob Van Zyl,
2006 Edition II, Wiley Publication.
5. Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press, 2011
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

258
OAI351 URBAN AGRICULTURE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students the principles of agricultural crop production and the production
practices of crops in modern ways.
 To delineate the role of agricultural engineers in relation to various crop production practices.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Benefits of urban agriculture- economic benefits, environmental benefits, social and cultural benefits,
educational, skill-building and job training benefits, health, nutrition and food accessibility benefits.

UNIT II VERTICAL FARMING 9

Vertical farming- types, green facade, living/green wall-modular green wall , vegetated mat wall-
Structures and components for green wall system: plant selection, growing media, irrigation and
plant nutrition: Design, light, benefits of vertical gardening. Roof garden and its types. Kitchen
garden, hanging baskets: The house plants/ indoor plants

UNIT III SOIL LESS CULTIVATION 9

Hydroponics, aeroponics, aquaponics: merits and limitations, costs and Challenges, backyard
gardens- tactical gardens- street landscaping- forest gardening, greenhouses, urban beekeeping

UNIT IV MODERN CONCEPTS 9

Growth of plants in vertical pipes in terraces and inside buildings, micro irrigation concepts suitable
for roof top gardening, rain hose system, Green house, polyhouse and shade net system of crop
production on roof tops

UNIT V WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Concept, scope and maintenance of waste management- recycle of organic waste, garden wastes-
solid waste management-scope, microbiology of waste, other ingredients like insecticide, pesticides
and fungicides residues, waste utilization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1:Demonstrate the principles behind crop production and various parameters that influences
the crop growth on roof tops
CO2:Explain different methods of crop production on roof tops
CO3:Explain nutrient and pest management for crop production on roof tops
CO4:Illustrate crop water requirement and irrigation water management on roof tops
CO5:Explain the concept of waste management on roof tops

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martellozzo F and J S Landry. 2020. Urban Agriculture. Scitus Academics Llc.
2. Rob Roggema. 2016. Sustainable Urban Agriculture and Food Planning. Routledge Taylor
and Francis Group.
3. Akrong M O. 2012. Urban Agriculture. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing.

REFERENCES:
1. Agha Rokh A. 2008. Evaluation of ornamental flowers and fishes breeding in Bushehr urban
wastewater using a pilot-scale aquaponic system. Water and Wastewater, 19 (65): 47–53.
259
2. Agrawal M, Singh B, Rajput M, Marshall F and Bell J. N. B. 2003. Effect of air pollution on peri-
urban agriculture: A case study. Environmental Pollution, 126 (3): 323–329.
[Link]
3. Jac Smit and Joe Nasr. 1992. Urban agriculture for sustainable cities: using wastes and idle land
and water bodies as resources. Environment and Urbanization, 4 (2):141-152.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall
correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO2 Problem Analysis 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 2 1 1 3 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of
1 1 2 2 1 1
Complex Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 3 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
1 2 1 1 2 1
approach in agriculture with
proper knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 2 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity
using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 2 1 2
linkage.
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OEN351 DRINKING WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To equip the students with the principles and design of water treatment units and
distribution system.
UNIT I SOURCES OF WATER 9
Public water supply system – Planning, Objectives, Design period, Population forecasting; Water
demand – Sources of water and their characteristics, Surface and Groundwater – Impounding
Reservoir – Development and selection of source – Source Water quality – Characterization –
260
Significance – Drinking Water quality standards.

UNIT II CONVEYANCE FROM THE SOURCE 9

Water supply – intake structures – Functions; Pipes and conduits for water – Pipe materials –
Hydraulics of flow in pipes – Transmission main design – Laying, jointing and testing of pipes –
appurtenances – Types and capacity of pumps – Selection of pumps and pipe materials.

UNIT III WATER TREATMENT 9

Objectives – Unit operations and processes – Principles, functions, and design of water treatment
plant units, aerators of flash mixers, Coagulation and flocculation –- sand filters - Disinfection -–
Construction, Operation and Maintenance aspects.

UNIT IV ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9

Water softening – Desalination- R.O. Plant – demineralization – Adsorption - Ion exchange–
Membrane Systems - Iron and Manganese removal - Defluoridation - Construction and Operation
and Maintenance aspects

UNIT V WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY 9

Requirements of water distribution – Components – Selection of pipe material – Service reservoirs -
Functions – Network design – Economics - Computer applications – Appurtenances – Leak detection
- Principles of design of water supply in buildings – House service connection – Fixtures and fittings,
systems of plumbing and types of plumbing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: an understanding of water quality criteria and standards, and their relation to public
health
CO2: the ability to design the water conveyance system
CO3: the knowledge in various unit operations and processes in water treatment
CO4: an ability to understand the various systems for advanced water treatment
CO5: an insight into the structure of drinking water distribution system

TEXTBOOKS :
1. Garg. S.K., "Water Supply Engineering", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, September 2008.
2. Punmia B.C, Arun [Link], Ashok [Link], “ Water supply Engineering” Lakshmi publication
private limited, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Rangwala "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", February 2022
4. Birdie.G.S., "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", Dhanpat Rai and sons, 2018.

REFERENCES :
1. Fair. G.M., Geyer.J.C., "Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal", John Wiley and Sons, 1954.
2. Babbit.H.E, and Donald.J.J, "Water Supply Engineering" , McGraw Hill book Co, 1984.
3. Steel. [Link] al., "Water Supply Engineering" , Mc Graw Hill International book Co, 1984.
4. Duggal. K.N., “Elememts of public Health Engineering”, [Link] and Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 1998.

261
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 1 2 3 1
Avg. 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3

[Link], 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

OEE352 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To provide knowledge about electric machines and special machine
 To understand the basics of power converters
 To know the concepts of controlling DC and AC drive systems
 To understand the architecture and power train components.
 To impart knowledge on vehicle control for standard drive cycles of hybrid electrical vehicles
(HEVs)

UNIT I ROTATING POWER CONVERTERS 9

Magnetic circuits- DC machine and AC machine –Working principle of Generator and Motor-DC
and AC - Voltage and torque equations – Characteristics and applications. Working principle of
special machines like: Brushless DC motor, Switched reluctance motor and PMSM.

UNIT II STATIC POWER CONVERTERS 9

Working and Characteristics of Power Diodes, MOSFET and IGBT. Working of uncontrolled
rectifiers, controlled rectifiers (Single phase and Three phase), DC choppers, single and three phase
inverters, Multilevel inverters and Matrix Converters.

UNIT III CONTROL OF DC AND AC MOTOR DRIVES 9

Speed control for constant torque, constant HP operation of all electric motors - DC/DC chopper
based four quadrant operation of DC motor drives, inverter based V/f Operation (motoring and
braking) of induction motor drives, Transformation theory, vector control operation of Induction motor
and PMSM, Brushless DC motor drives, Switched reluctance motor (SRM) drives

UNIT IV HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE AND POWER TRAIN

COMPONENTS 9
History of evolution of Electric Vehicles - Comparison of Electric Vehicles with Internal Combustion
Engines - Architecture of Electric Vehicles (EV) and Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV) – Plug-in Hybrid
Electric Vehicles (PHEV)- Power train components and sizing, Gears, Clutches, Transmission and
Brakes.

262
UNIT V MECHANICS OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND CONTROL OF
VEHICLES 9
Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics - tractive force, power and energy requirements for standard
drive cycles of HEV's - motor torque and power rating and battery capacity. HEV supervisory control
- Selection of modes - power spilt mode - parallel mode - engine brake mode - regeneration mode -
series parallel mode
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand the principles of conventional and special electrical machines.
CO2: Acquired the concepts of power devices and power converters
CO3: Able to understand the control for DC and AC drive systems.
CO4: Learned the electric vehicle architecture and power train components.
CO5: Acquired the knowledge of mechanics of electric vehicles and control of electric
vehicles.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

REFERENCES:
1 Stephen D. Umans, “Fitzgerald & Kingsley’s Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Edition,
2020.
2 Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, The Industrial Electronics Handbook, Second Edition,
Power Electronics and Motor Drives, CRC Press, 2011
3 Paul C. Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D. Sudhoff, Steven D. Pekarek “Analysis of Electric
Machinery and Drive Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2013.
4 Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson, fourth Edition,
10th Impression 2021.
5 Iqbal Husain, ‘Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles’, CRC Press, 2021.
6 Wei Liu, ‘Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control’, Second Edition, WILEY, 2017
7 James Larminie and John Lowry, ‘Electric Vehicle Technology Explained’, Second Edition,
Wiley, 2012

OEI353 INTRODUCTION TO PLC PROGRAMMING LT P C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand basic PLC terminologies digital principles, PLC architecture and operation.
 Familiarize different programming language of PLC.
 Develop PLC logic for simple applications using ladder logic.
 Understand the hardware and software behind PLC and SCADA.
 Exposures about communication architecture of PLC/SCADA.
263
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLC 9
Introduction to PLC: Microprocessor, I/O Ports, Isolation, Filters, Drivers, Microcontrollers/DSP,
PLC/DDC- PLC Construction: What is a PLC, PLC Memories, PLC I/O, , PLC Special I/O, PLC
Types.

UNIT II PLC INSTRUCTIONS 9

PLC Basic Instructions: PLC Ladder Language- Function block Programming- Ladder/Function
Block functions- PLC Basic Instructions, Basic Examples (Start Stop Rung, Entry/Reset Rung)-
Configuration of Sensors, Switches, Solid State Relays-Interlock examples- Timers, Counters,
Examples.

UNIT III PLC PROGRAMMING 9

Different types of PLC program, Basic Ladder logic, logic functions, PLC module addressing,
registers basics, basic relay instructions, Latching Relays, arithmetic functions, comparison
functions, data handling, data move functions, timer-counter instructions, input-output instructions,
sequencer instructions

UNIT IV COMMUNICATION OF PLC AND SCADA 9

Communication Protocol – Modbus, HART, Profibus- Communication facilities SCADA: - Hardware
and software, Remote terminal units, Master Station and Communication architectures

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

Stepper Motor Control- Elevator Control-CNC Machine Control- conveyor control-Interlocking
Problems
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Communication Network Used for PLC/SCADA.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the basic requirement of a PLC input/output devices and architecture. (L1)
CO2 Ability to apply Basics Instruction Sets used for ladder Logic and Function Block
Programming.(L2)
CO3 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO4 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
CO5 Ability to Understand the Concepts of Communication used for PLC/SCADA.(L1)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Petruzzula, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition
2. John W. Webb, Ronald A. Reis, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and
Applications, PHI publication

264
REFERENCES:
1. MadhuchanndMitra and SamerjitSengupta, Programmable Logic Controllers Industrial
Automation an Introduction, Penram International Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
2. J. R. Hackworth and F. D. Hackworth, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles
andApplications, Pearson publication

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
0Controllers%20Programming%[Link]
4. [Link]

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO,
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.9 2.25 2.6 1.6 1 1 3 3 2.9

1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OCH351 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T PC

3 0 03

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
General definition and size effects–important nano structured materials and nano particles-
importance of nano materials- Size effect on thermal, electrical, electronic, mechanical, optical and
magnetic properties of nanomaterials- surface area - band gap energy and applications.
Photochemistry and Electrochemistry of nanomaterials –Ionic properties of nanomaterials- Nano
catalysis.

UNIT II SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 8

Bottom up and Top-down approach for obtaining nano materials - Precipitation methods – sol gel
technique – high energy ball milling, CVD and PVD methods, gas phase condensation, magnetron
sputtering and laser deposition methods – laser ablation, sputtering.

UNIT III NANO COMPOSITES 10

Definition- importance of nanocomposites- nano composite materials-classification of composites-
metal/metal oxides, metal-polymer- thermoplastic based, thermoset based and elastomer based-
influence of size, shape and role of interface in composites applications.
265
UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES AND CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 10
Classifications of nanomaterials - Zero dimensional, one-dimensional and two-dimensional
nanostructures- Kinetics in nanostructured materials- multilayer thin films and superlattice- clusters
of metals, semiconductors and nanocomposites. Spectroscopic techniques, Diffraction methods,
thermal analysis method, BET analysis method.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANO MATERIALS 9

Overview of nanomaterials properties and their applications, nano painting, nano coating,
nanomaterials for renewable energy, Molecular Electronics and Nanoelectronics – Nanobots-
Biological Applications. Emerging technologies for environmental applications- Practice of
nanoparticles for environmental remediation and water treatment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 understand the basic properties such as structural, physical, chemical properties of
nanomaterials and their applications.
CO2 able to acquire knowledge about the different types of nano material synthesis
CO3 describes about the shape, size,structure of composite nano materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the different characterization techniques for nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper knowledge in the application of nanomaterials in different fields.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara,Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmom, Burkhard Raguse, “ Nano
Technology: Basic Science & Engineering Technology”, 2005, Overseas Press
2. G. Cao, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties &Applications” Imperial
College Press, 2004
[Link] A Goddard “Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology”, 3rd Edition, CRC
Taylor and Francis group 2012.

REFERENCES
1. [Link] & [Link], Nanostructure Control, Wood Head Publishing Ltd.,Cambridge,
2006.
2. [Link], [Link], [Link], The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties
and Applications Vol. I & II, 2nd edition, 2005, Wiley VCH Verlag Gibtl & Co
3. Ivor Brodie and Julius [Link],’The physics of Micro/Nano – Fabrication’,Springer
International Edition,2010

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 understand the basic
properties such as
structural, physical,
2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
chemical properties of
nanomaterials and
their applications

266
CO2 acquire knowledge
about the different
2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
types of nano material
synthesis
CO3 describes about the
shape, size,structure
of composite nano 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the
different
characterization 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
techniques for
nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper
knowledge in the
3
application of 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1
nanomaterials in
different fields
Overall CO 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OCH352 FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The course emphasis on the molecular safe assembly and materials for polymer electronics

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical Perspectives, Lessons from the Nature, Engineering the Functions, Tuning the functions,
Multiscale Modeling and Computation, Classification of Functional Materials, Functional Diversity of
Materials, Hybrid Materials, Technological Relevance, Societal Impact.

UNIT II MOLECULAR SELF ASSEMBLY 9

Molecular Organization, Self-Assembly in Biology, Energetics of Self-Organization, A Few Case
Studies, Synthetic Protocols and Challenges, Solvent-assisted Self-Assembly, Directed Assembly-
Langmuir-Blodgett and Langmuir-Schaefer techniques, Technological Applications of SAMs.

UNIT III BIO-INSPIRED MATERIALS 9

Bio-inspired materials, Classification, Biomimicry, Spider Silk, Lotus Leaf, Gecko feet, Synovial fluid,
‘Bionics’-Bio-inspired Information Technologies, Artificial Sensory Organs, Biomineralization- En
route to Nanotechnology.

UNIT IV SMART OR INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9

Criteria for Smartness, Significance of Smart Materials, Representative Examples like Smart Gels
and Polymers, Electro/Magneto Rheological Fluids, Smart Electroceramics, Technical Limitations
and Challenges, Functional Nanocomposites, Polymer-carbon nanotube composities.
267
UNIT V MATERIALS FOR POLYMER ELECTRONICS 9
Polymers for Electronics, Organic Light Emitting Diodes, Working Principle of OLEDs, Illustrated
Examples, Organic Field-Effect Transistors Operating Principle, Design Considerations, Polymer
FETs vs Inorganic FETs, Liquid Crystal Displays, Engineering Aspects of Flat Panel Displays,
Intelligent Polymers for Data Storage, Polymer-based Data Storage-Principle, Magnetic Vs.
Polymer-based Data Storage.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
 Students will be able to differentiate among various functional properties and select
appropriate material for certain functional applications, analyze the nature and potential of functional
material.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijayamohanan K. Pillai and MeeraParthasarathy, “Functional Materials: A chemist’s
perpective”, Universities Press Hyderabad (2012).

REFERENCE:
1. Stephen Manne “Biomimetic Materials Chemistry” Wiley-VCH Newyork, 1966.

OFD352 TRADITIONAL INDIAN FOODS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To help students acquire a sound knowledge on diversities of foods, food habits and patterns in
India with focus on traditional foods.

UNIT I HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES 9

Food production and accessibility - subsistence foraging, horticulture, agriculture and
pastoralization, origin of agriculture, earliest crops grown. Food as source of physical sustenance,
food as religious and cultural symbols; importance of food in understanding human culture -
variability, diversity, from basic ingredients to food preparation; impact of customs and traditions on
food habits, heterogeneity within cultures (social groups) and specific social contexts - festive
occasions, specific religious festivals, mourning etc. Kosher, Halal foods; foods for religious and
other fasts.

UNIT II TRADITIONAL METHODS OF FOOD PROCESSING 9

Traditional methods of milling grains – rice, wheat and corn – equipments and processes as
compared to modern methods. Equipments and processes for edible oil extraction, paneer, butter
and ghee manufacture – comparison of traditional and modern methods. Energy costs, efficiency,
yield, shelf life and nutrient content comparisons. Traditional methods of food preservation –
sundrying, osmotic drying, brining, pickling and smoking.

UNIT III TRADITIONAL FOOD PATTERNS 9

Typical breakfast, meal and snack foods of different regions of [Link] foods that have gone
Pan Indian / Global. Popular regional foods; Traditional fermented foods,pickles and preserves,
beverages, snacks, desserts and sweets, street foods; IPR issues in traditional foods

268
UNIT IV COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION OF TRADITIONAL FOODS 9
Commercial production of traditional breads, snacks, ready-to-eat foods and instant mixes, frozen
foods – types marketed, turnover; role of SHGs, SMES industries, national and multinational
companies; commercial production and packaging of traditional beverages such as tender coconut
water, neera, lassi, buttermilk, dahi. Commercial production of intermediate foods – ginger and garlic
pastes, tamarind pastes, masalas (spice mixes), idli and dosa batters.

UNIT V HEALTH ASPECTS OF TRADIONAL FOODS 9

Comparison of traditional foods with typical fast foods / junk foods – cost, food safety, nutrient
composition, bioactive components; energy and environmental costs of traditional foods; traditional
foods used for specific ailments /illnesses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1To understand the historical and traditional perspective of foods and food habits
CO2 To understand the wide diversity and common features of traditional Indian foods and meal
patterns.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sen, Colleen Taylor “Food Culture in India” Greenwood Press, 2005.
2. Davidar, Ruth N. “Indian Food Science: A Health and Nutrition Guide to Traditional Recipes: East
West Books, 2001.

OFD353 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD PROCESSING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The course aims to introduce the students to the area of Food Processing. This is necessary for
effective understanding of a detailed study of food processing and technology subjects. This course
will enable students to appreciate the importance of food processing with respect to the producer,
manufacturer and consumer.

UNIT I PROCESSING OF FOOD AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Source of food - plant, animal and microbial origin; different foods and groups of foods as raw
materials for processing – cereals, pulses, grains, vegetables and fruits, milk and animal foods, sea
weeds, algae, oil seeds & fats, sugars, tea, coffee, cocoa, spices and condiments, additives; need
and significance of processing these foods.
UNIT II METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9
Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using low
temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub atmospheric
storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and tubers; freezing of raw
and processed foods.

UNIT III LARGE-SCALE FOOD PROCESSING 12

Milling of grains and pulses; edible oil extraction; Pasteurisation of milk and yoghurt; canning and
bottling of foods; drying – Traditional and modern methods of drying, Dehydration of fruits,
vegetables, milk, animal products etc; preservation by use of acid, sugar and salt; Pickling and curing

269
with microorganisms, use of salt, and microbial fermentation; frying, baking, extrusion cooking,
snack foods.

UNIT IV FOOD WASTES IN VARIOUS PROCESSES 6

Waste disposal-solid and liquid waste; rodent and insect control; use of pesticides; ETP; selecting
and installing necessary equipment.

UNIT V FOOD HYGIENE 9

Food related hazards – Biological hazards – physical hazards – microbiological considerations in
foods. Food adulteration – definition, common food adulterants, contamination with toxic metals,
pesticides and insecticides; Safety in food procurement, storage handling and preparation;
Relationship of microbes to sanitation, Public health hazards due to contaminated water and food;
Personnel hygiene; Training& Education for safe methods of handling and processing food;
sterilization and disinfection of manufacturing plant; use of sanitizers, detergents, heat, chemicals,
Cleaning of equipment and premises.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the students are expected to
CO1 Be aware of the different methods applied to processing foods.
CO2 Be able to understand the significance of food processing and the role of foodand beverage
industries in the supply of foods.

TEXT BOOKS/REFERENCES:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge, 2003.
2. VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and Practice”.Surbhi
Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.

OPY352 IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the basic fundamental knowledge of different forms of Intellectual Property
Rights in national and international level.
 To provide the significance of the Intellectual Property Rights about the patents, copyrights,
industrial design, plant and geographical indications.
 This paper is to study significance of the amended patent act on pharma industry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION- INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 9

Introduction, Types of Intellectual Property Rights -patents, plant varieties protection, geographical
indicators, copyright, trademark, trade secrets.

UNIT II PATENTS 9
Patents-Objective, Introduction, Requirement for patenting- Novelty, Inventive step (Non-
obviousness) and industrial application (utility), Non-patentable inventions, rights of patent owner,
assignment of patent rights, patent specification (provisional and complete), parts of complete
specification, claims, procedure for obtaining patents, compulsory license.
270
UNIT III PLANT VARIETY-TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE –GEOGRAPHICAL
INDICATIONS 9
Plant variety- Justification, criteria for protection of plant variety and protection in India. Traditional
knowledge- Concept of traditional knowledge, protection of traditional knowledge under Intellectual
Property frame works in national level and Traditional knowledge digital library (TKDL).
Geographical Indications – Justification for protection, National and International position.

UNIT IV ENFORCEMENT AND PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF IPR 9

Introduction – civil remedies – injunction, damage, account of profit – criminal remedies – patent,
trademark. Practical aspects – Introduction, benefits of licensing, licensing of basic types of IPR,
licensing clauses of IPR. Case studies of patent infringement, compulsory licensing, simple patent
license agreements.

UNIT V INTERNATIONAL BACKGROUND OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9

International Background of Intellectual Property- Paris Convention, Berne convention, World Trade
Organization (WTO), World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), Trade Related Aspects of
Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Patent Co-operation Treaty (PCT).
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. Nagpal, M. Arora, M.R.D. Usman, S. Rahar, “Intellectual Property Rights” Edu creation
Publishing, New Delhi, 2017.
2. The Patents Act, 1970 (Bare Act with Short Notes) (New Delhi: Universal Law Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. 2012.
3. B.S. Rao, P.V. Appaji, “Intellectual Property Rights in Pharmaceutical Industry: Theory and
Practice”, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Patents for Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, & Biotechnology-Fundamentals of Global Law,
Practice and Strategy. Philip W. Grubb, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Basic Principles of patent law – Basics principles and acquisition of IPR. Ramakrishna T.
CIPRA, NLSIU, Bangalore, 2005
3. S. Lakshmana Prabu, TNK. Suriyaprakash, “Intellectual Property Rights”, 1st ed., In Tech
open access, Croatia, 2017.

COURSE OUTCOME
The student will be able to
C1 Understand and differentiate the categories of intellectual property rights.
C2 Describe about patents and procedure for obtaining patents.
C3 Distinguish plant variety, traditional knowledge and geographical indications under IPR.
C4 Provide the information about the different enforcements and practical aspects involved in
protection of IPR.
C5 Provide different organizations role and responsibilities in the protection of IPR in the
international level.
C6 Understand the interrelationships between different Intellectual Property Rights on International
Society

271
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY
PO1 PO2 PO PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO11 PO
3 0 12
C1 3 3 2 2 2
C2 3 3 2 2
C3 3 3 2 2 1
C4 2 3 3 2 2
C5 3 3 2 1
C6 3 2 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OTT351 BASICS OF TEXTILE FINISHING LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics and different types of finishes required for
textile materials and machines used for finishing.

UNIT I RESIN FINISHING 9

Importance of finishing and its classification. Resin finishing: Mechanism of creasing, Types of
Resins .Anti crease, wash and wear, durable press resin finishing. Study about eco friendly method
of anti crease finishing.

UNIT II FLAME PROOF & WATERPROOF 9

Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy. Flame retardant finishes for cotton, Concept of
waterproof and water repellent Finishes, Durable & Semi durable and Temporary finishes, Concept
of Antimicrobial finish.

UNIT III SOIL RELEASE AND ANTISTATIC FINISHES 9

Soil Release Finishing: Mechanism of soil retention & soil release. Anti pilling Finishing: chemical
and mechanical methods to produce anti pilling. Concept of UV Protection finishes- Concept of
antistatic finishes.

UNIT IV MECHANICAL FINISHES 9

Mechanical finishing of textile materials - calendaring, compacting, Sanforising, Peach finishing.
Object of Heat setting. Various methods of heat setting and mechanism of heat setting.

UNIT V STIFFENING AND SOFTENING 9

Concept of stiffening and softening of textile materials. Mechanism in the weight reduction of PET
.Concept of Micro encapsulation techniques in finishing process, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment
and Bio finishing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO: 1 Basics of Resin Finishing Process.

272
CO: 2 Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy, waterproof and water repellent, Antimicrobial
finishes.
CO: 3 Concept of Soil Release, Anti Pilling, UV Protection and Antistatic finishes.
CO: 4 Concept of Mechanical finishing.
CO: 5 Basics of Micro encapsulation techniques, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link], "Technology of Finishing", Vol X, Sevak Publications, Mumbai
2. Perkins, W.S., “Textile colouration and finishing”, Carolina Academic Press., U.K, ISBN:
0890898855.2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Microencapsulation in finishing, Review of progress of Colouration, SDC, 2001 62
2. Chakraborty, J.N, Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles, Woodhead Publishing
India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3
3. W. D. Schindler and P. J. Hauser "Chemical finishing of textiles", Woodhead Publishing
Cambridge England,2004.

OTT352 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING FOR GARMENT INDUSTRY LTPC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about basics of industrial engineering and different tools of
industrial engineering and its application in apparel industry

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Scope of industrial engineering in apparel Industry, role of industrial engineers.
Productivity: Definition - Productivity, Productivity measures .Reduction of work content due to
the product and process, Reduction of ineffective time due to the management, due to the
worker. Causes for low productivity in apparel industry and measures for improvement.

UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Definition, Purpose, Basic procedure and techniques of work-study.
Work environment – Lighting, Ventilation, Climatic condition on productivity.
Temperature control, humidity control, noise control measures. Safety and ergonomics on
work station and work environment
Material Handling – Objectives, Classification and characteristics of material handling
equipments, Specialized material handling equipments.

UNIT III METHOD STUDY 9

Definition, Objectives, Procedure, Process charts and symbols. Various charts – Charts
indicating process sequence: Outline process chart, flow process chart (man type, material type
and equipment type); Charts using time scale – multiple activity chart. Diagrams indicating
movement – flow diagram, string diagram, cycle graph, chrono cycle graph, travel chart
MOTION STUDY: Principle of motion economy, Two handed process chart, micro motion analysis
– therbligs, SIMO chart.

UNIT IV WORK MEASUREMENT 9

Definition, purpose, procedure, equipments, techniques. Time study - Definition, basics of
273
 time study- equipments. Time study forms, Stop watch procedure. Predetermined motion time
standards (PMTS). Time Study rating, calculation of standard time, Performance rating –
relaxation and other allowances. Calculation of SAM for different garments, GSD.

UNIT V WORK STUDY APPLICATION 9

Application of work study techniques in cutting, stitching and packing in garment industry. Workaids
in sewing, Pitch diagram, Line balancing, Capacity planning, scientific method of training.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to understand
CO1: Fundamental concepts of industrial Engineering and productivity
CO2: Method study
CO3: Motion analysis
CO4: Work measurement and SAM
CO5: Ergonomics and its application to garment industry

TEXTBOOKS:
1. George Kanwaty, “Introduction to Work Study “, ILO, Geneva, 1996, ISBN: 9221071081
|ISBN-13: 9789221071082
2. Enrick N. L., “Time study manual for Textile industry”, Wiley Eastern (P) Ltd., 1989, ISBN:
0898740444 | ISBN-13: 9780898740448
3. Khanna O. P., and Sarup A., “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, New Delhi, 2010, ISBN: 818992835X / ISBN: 978-8189928353

REFERENCES
1. Norberd Lloyd Enrick., “Industrial Engineering Manual for Textile Industry”, Wiley Eastern
(P) Ltd., New Delhi, 1988, ISBN: 0882756311 | ISBN-13: 9780882756318
2. Chuter A. J., “Introduction to Clothing Production Management”, Wiley-Black well Science,
U.S. A., 1995, ISBN: 0632039396 | ISBN-13: 9780632039395
3. GordanaColovic., “Ergonomics in the garment industry”, Wood publishing India Pvt. Ltd.,
India, 2014, ISBN: 0857098225 | ISBN-13: 9780857098221
4. Rajesh Bheda, “Managing Productivity in Apparel Industry “CBS Publishers & Distributors,
2008

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

Course Program Outcome
Outcome Statement PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
s 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O 2 O3
CO1 Fundamental concepts of
industrialEngineering and 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
productivity
CO2 Method study 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO3 Motion analysis 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO4 Work measurement and SAM 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
CO5 Ergonomics and itsapplication
to 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
garment industry
Overall CO 1.2 2 3 3 2 1 1.2 2 2 1 2.4 2 1 1 -

274
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial
(High) respectively

OTT353 BASICS OF TEXTILE MANUFACTURE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about the basics of fibre forming, yarn production, fabric
formation, coloration of fabrics and garment manufacturing

UNIT I NATURAL FIBRES 9

Introduction: Definition of staple fibre, filament; Classification of natural and man-made fibres,
essential and desirable properties of fibres. Production and cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cultivation
of cotton, production of silk (sericulture), wool and jute – physical and chemical structure of these
fibres..

UNIT II REGENERATED AND SYNTHETIC FIBRES 9

Production sequence of regenerated and modified cellulosic fibres: viscose rayon, Acetate Rayon,
high wet modulus and high tenacity fibres; synthetic fibres – chemical structure, fibre forming
polymers, production principles.

UNIT III BASICS OF SPINNING 9

Spinning – principle of yarn formation, sequence of machines for yarn production with short staple
fibres and blends, principles of opening and cleaning machines; yarn numbering – calculations

UNIT IV BASICS OF WEAVING 9

Woven fabric – warp, weft, weaving, path of warp; looms – classification, handloom and its parts,
powerloom, automatic looms, shuttleless looms, special type of looms; preparatory machines for
weaving process and their objectives; basic weaving mechanism - primary, secondary and auxiliary
mechanisms,

UNIT V BASICS OF KNITTING AND NONWOVEN 9

Knitting – classification, principle, types of fabrics; nonwoven process –classification, principle, types
of fabrics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students shall have the basic knowledge on
CO1: Classification of fibres and production of natural fibres
CO2: Regenerated and synthetic fibres
CO3: Yarn spinning
CO4: Weaving
CO5: Knitting and nonwoven
TEXTBOOKS
1. Mishra S. P. , “A Text Book of Fibre Science and Technology”, New Age Publishers, 2000,
ISBN: 8122412505
2. Marks R., and Robinson. T.C., “Principles of Weaving”, The Textile Institute, Manchester,
1989, ISBN: 0 900739 258.

275
 3. Spencer D.J., “Knitting Technology”, III Ed., Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001, ISBN:
185573 333 1.
REFERENCES:
1. Hornberer M., Eberle H., Kilgus R., Ring W. and Hermeling H., “Clothing Technology: From
Fibre to Fabric”, Europa LehrmittelVerlag, 2008, ISBN: 3808562250 / ISBN: 978-
3808562253.
2. Wynne A., “Motivate Series-Textiles”, Maxmillan Publications, London, 1997.
3. Carr H. and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture” Backwell Science, U.K.,
1994, ISBN: 0632037482 / ISBN:13: [Link] W., “The Rieter Manual of
Spinning, Vol.1”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-1-4 /
ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-1-0.
4. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.2”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur,
2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-2-2 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-2-7.
5. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.1-3”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur,
2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-3-0 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-3-4.
6. Talukdar. M.K., Sriramulu. P.K., and Ajgaonkar. D.B., “Weaving: Machines, Mechanisms,
Management”, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998, ISBN: 81-85401-16-0.
7. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
8. Gohl E. P. G., “Textile Science”, CBS Publishers and distributors, 1987, ISBN 0582685958
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

Course Stateme Program Outcome

Outcom nt PO PO PO PO1 PO PO PS PS PS
PO1PO2PO3PO4PO5PO6
es 7 8 9 0 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1. Classific - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ation of
fibres
and
producti
on of
natural
fibres
CO2. Regener - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ated and
synthetic
fibres
CO3. Yarn - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
spinning
CO4. Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO5. Knitting - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
and
nonwov
en
Overall CO - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

276
OPE351 INTRODUCTION TO PETROLEUM REFINING AND
PETROCHEMICALS LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The course is aimed to
Gain knowledge about petroleum refining process and production of petrochemical products.

UNIT I ORIGIN, FORMATION AND REFINING OF CRUDE OIL 9

Origin, Formation and Evaluation of Crude Oil. Testing of Petroleum Products. Refining of Petroleum
- Atmospheric and Vacuum Distillation.

UNIT II CRACKING 9
Cracking, Thermal Cracking, Vis-breaking, Catalytic Cracking (FCC), Hydro Cracking, Coking and
Air Blowing of Bitumen

UNIT III REFORMING AND HYDROTREATING 9

Catalytic Reforming of Petroleum Feed Stocks. Lube oil processing- Solvent Treatment Processes,
Dewaxing, Clay Treatment and Hydrofining. Treatment Techniques: Removal of Sulphur
Compounds in all Petroleum Fractions to improve performance.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO PETROCHEMICALS 9

Petrochemicals - Cracking of Naphtha and Feed stock gas for the production of Ethylene, Propylene,
Isobutylene and Butadiene. Production of Acetylene from Methane, and Extraction of Aromatics.

UNIT V PRODUCTION OF PETROCHEMICALS 9

Production of Petrochemicals like Dimethyl Terephathalate(DMT), Ethylene Glycol, Synthetic
glycerine, Linear Alkyl Benzene (LAB), Acrylonitrile, Methyl Methacrylate (MMA), Vinyl Acetate
Monomer, Phthalic Anhydride, Maleic Anhydride, Phenol, Acetone, Methanol, Formaldehyde,
Acetaldehyde, Pentaerythritol and production of Carbon Black.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand the classification, composition and testing methods of crude petroleum and its
products. Learn the mechanism of refining process.
CO2: Understand the insights of primary treatment processes to produce the precursors.
CO3: Study the secondary treatment processes cracking, vis-breaking and coking to produce more
petroleum products.
CO4: Appreciate the need of treatment techniques for the removal of sulphur and other impurities
from petroleum products.
CO5: Understand the societal impact of petrochemicals and learn their manufacturing processes.
CO6: Learn the importance of optimization of process parameters for the high yield of petroleum
products.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Nelson, W. L., “Petroleum Refinery Engineering”, 4th Edition., McGraw Hill, New York,1985.
2. Wiseman. P., "Petrochemicals", UMIST Series in Science and Technology, John Wiley &
Sons,1986.

277
REFERENCES
1. Bhaskara Rao, B. K., “Modern Petroleum Refining Processes”, 2nd Edition, Oxford and
IBH Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.
2. Bhaskara Rao, B. K. “A Text on Petrochemicals”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers

CPE334 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
 understand and analyse the energy data of industries
 carryout energy accounting and balancing
 conduct energy audit and suggest methodologies for energy savings and
 utilise the available resources in optimal ways

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data –
Environmental aspects associated with energy utilization – Energy Auditing: Need, Types,
Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditing.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors,
Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency Computation, Energy
Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of
Encon in Illumination.

UNIT III THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilization, Insulators & Refractories

UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 9

Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems –
Cooling Towers – D.G. sets

UNIT V ECONOMICS 9
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present Value,
Life Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

278
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyze the energy data of industries.
CO1: Remember the knowledge for Basic combustion and furnace design and
selection of thermal and mechanical energy equipment.
CO2: Study the Importance of Stoichiometry relations, Theoretical air required for
complete combustion.
CO3: Skills on combustion thermodynamics and kinetics.
CO4: Apply calculation and design tube still heaters.
CO5: Studied different heat treatment furnace.
CO6: Practical and theoretical knowledge burner design.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at
[Link]. a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency
(BEE), a statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and
Utilisation” Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon
Press, Oxford, 1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987

OPT351 BASICS OF PLASTICS PROCESSING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the fundamentals of plastics processing, such as the relationships between
material structural properties and required processing parameters, and so on
 To gain practical knowledge on the polymer selection and its processing
 Understanding the major plastic material processing techniques (Extrusion, Injection
molding, Compression and Transfer molding, Blow molding, Thermoforming and
casting)
 To understand suitable additives for plastics compounding
 To Propose troubleshooting mechanisms for defects found in plastics products
manufactured by various processing techniques

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICS PROCESSING 9

Introduction to plastic processing – Principles of plastic processing: processing of plastics vs.
metals and ceramics. Factors influencing the efficiency of plastics processing: molecular
weight, viscosity and rheology. Difference in approach for thermoplastic and thermoset
processing. Additives for plastics compounding and processing: antioxidants, light stabilizers,
UV stabilizers, lubricants, impact modifiers, flame retardants, antistatic agents, stabilizers and
plasticizers. Compounding: plastic compounding techniques, plasticization, pelletization.

279
UNIT II EXTRUSION 9
Extrusion – Principles of extrusion. Features of extruder: barrel, screw, types of screws, drive
mechanism, specifications, heating & cooling systems, types of extruders. Flow mechanism:
process variables, die entry effects and exit instabilities. Die swell, Defects: melt fracture,
shark skin, bambooing. Factors determining efficiency of an extruder. Extrusion of films: blown
and cast films. Tube/pipe extrusion. Extrusion coating: wire & cable. Twin screw extruder and
its applications. Applications of extrusion and new developments.

UNIT III INJECTION MOLDING 9

Injection molding – Principles and processing outline, machinery, accessories and functions,
specifications, process variables, mould cycle. Types of clamping: hydraulic and toggle
mechanisms. Start-up and shut down procedures-Cylinder nozzles- Press capacity projected
area -Shot weight Basic theoretical concepts and their relationship to processing - Interaction
of moulding process aspect effects in quoted variables. Basic mould types. Reciprocating vs.
plunger type injection moulding. Thermoplastic vs. thermosetting injection moulding. Injection
moulding vs. other plastic processing techniques. State-of-the art injection moulding
techniques - Introduction to trouble shooting

UNIT IV COMPRESSION AND TRANSFER MOLDING 9

Compression moulding – Basic principles of compression and transfer moulding-Meaning of
terms-Bulk factor and flow properties, moulding materials, process variables and process
cycle, Inter relation between flow properties-Curing time-Mould temperature and Pressure
requirements. Preforms and preheating- Techniques of preheating. Machines used-Types of
compression mould- positive, semi-positive and flash. Common moulding faults and their
correction- Finishing of mouldings. Transfer moulding: working principle, equipment, Press
capacity-Integral moulds and auxiliary ram moulds, moulding cycle, moulding tolerances, pot
transfer, plunger transfer and screw transfer moulding techniques, advantages over
compression moulding

UNIT V BLOW MOLDING, THERMOFORMING AND CASTING 9

Blow moulding: principles and terminologies. Injection blow moulding. Extrusion blow
moulding. Design guidelines for optimum product performance and appearance.
Thermoforming: principle, vacuum forming, pressure forming mechanical forming. Casting:
working principle, types and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1:Ability to find out the correlation between various processing techniques with product
properties.
CO2:Understand the major plastics processing techniques used in moulding (injection, blow,
compression, and transfer), extrusion, thermoforming, and casting.
CO3:Acquire knowledge on additives for plastic compounding and methods employed for the
same
CO4:Familiarize with the machinery and ancillary equipment associated with various plastic
processing techniques.
CO5:Select an appropriate processing technique for the production of a plastic product

280
REFERENCES
1. S. S. Schwart, S. H. Goodman, Plastics Materials and Processes, Van Nostrad
Reinhold Company Inc. (1982).
2. F. Hensen (Ed.), Plastic Extrusion Technology, Hanser Gardner (1997).
3. W. S. Allen and P. N. Baker, Hand Book of Plastic Technology, Volume-1, Plastic
Processing Operations [Injection, Compression, Transfer, Blow Molding], CBS Publishers and
Distributors (2004).
4. M. Chanda, S. K. Roy, Plastic Technology handbook, 4th Edn., CRC Press (2007).
5. I. I. Rubin, Injection Molding Theory & Practice, Society of Plastic Engineers, Wiley
(1973).
6. D.V. Rosato, M. G. Rosato, Injection Molding Hand Book, Springer (2012).
7. M. L. Berins (Ed.), SPI Plastic Engineering Hand Book of Society of Plastic Industry
Inc., Springer (2012).
8. B. Strong, Plastics: Material & Processing, A, Pearson Prentice hall (2005).
9. D.V Rosato, Blow Molding Hand Book, Carl HanserVerlag GmbH & Co (2003).

OEC351 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
● To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
● To analyze continuous time signals and system in the Fourier and Laplace domain
● To analyze discrete time signals and system in the Fourier and Z transform domain
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and
Sinusoids_Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals,
Periodic & Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals -
Classification of systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant&
Time-invariant,Causal & Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.

UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9

Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
Properties

UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9

Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace
transforms in Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.

UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9

Baseband signal Sampling–Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT)– Properties of
DTFT - Z Transform & Properties

UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9

Impulse response–Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and Z
Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in series
and parallel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

281
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1:determine if a given system is linear/causal/stable
CO2: determine the frequency components present in a deterministic signal
CO3:characterize continuous LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO4:characterize discrete LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO5:compute the output of an LTI system in the time and frequency domains

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oppenheim, Willsky and Hamid, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2015.(Units I - V)
2. Simon Haykin, Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2002

REFERENCES :
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. M. J. Roberts, “Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform methods and
MATLAB”, McGraw- Hill Education, 2018.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - 3 - - 1
2 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3 -
3 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 2 - -
4 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
5 3 3 - 3 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
C 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 2 3 1
- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
1O

282
OEC352 FUNDAMENTALS Of ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To give a comprehensive exposure to all types of devices and circuits constructed with discrete
components. This helps to develop a strong basis for building linear and digital integrated
circuits
● To analyze the frequency response of small signal amplifiers
● To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
 To study about feedback amplifiers and oscillators principles
 To understand the analysis and design of multi vibrators

UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode, Zener diode, BJT, MOSFET, UJT –structure, operation and V-I characteristics,
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier, Zener as regulator

UNIT II AMPLIFIERS 9
Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET, BJT small signal model – Analysis
of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –Analysis of CS and Source follower – Gain
and frequency response- High frequency analysis.

UNIT III MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9

Cascode amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – Tuned
amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods.

UNIT IV FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Advantages of negative feedback – Analysis of Voltage / Current, Series , Shunt feedback
Amplifiers – positive feedback–Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley, Colpitts
and Crystal oscillators.

UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC/DC CONVERTERS 9

Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Temperature Effect- Class AB Power amplifier
using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost analysis and
design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1: Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
CO2: Design and analyze amplifiers.
CO3: Analyze frequency response of BJT and MOSFET amplifiers
CO4: Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and oscillator principles.
CO5: Design and analyze power amplifiers and supply circuits

TEXT BOOKS :
1. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Oxford Higher Education press, 5 th Edition,
2010.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 10th
Edition, Pearson Education / PHI, 2008.

283
3. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, "Micro Electronic Circuits", Oxford University Press, 7 th
Edition, 2014.

REFERENCES :
1. Donald.A. Neamen, "Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition,
2010.
2. [Link] and [Link], "Electronic Circuits", McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition, 1989
3. Muhammad [Link], "Power Electronics", Pearson Education / PHI , 2004.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
5 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CBM348 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of products
and services
 To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product based
on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the hardware,
software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
 To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
 To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive at the
optimum system specification and characteristics
 To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to validate
and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering customer

UNIT I BASICS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends- Economical Trends
- Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development
Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product
Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle – Product
Development Planning and Management.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability Matrix
and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction to System
Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design - Interface Design.

284
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9
Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept generation
Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept Screening & Evaluation
- Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical, Electronics and Software
Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W
Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping -
Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing,
Certification and Documentation

UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation -
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence Management
– Configuration Management - EoL Disposal

UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus Academia –
The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development processes -
Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical, Embedded and
Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property Rights and
Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Define, formulate, and analyze a problem
CO2:Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
CO3:Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business Context
CO4:Work independently as well as in teams
CO5:Manage a project from start to finish

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw Hill,
Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill, Eleventh
Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford, 2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design", McGraw
Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013

285
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 1
2 3 2 3 1 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg.
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CBM333 ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement various assistive devices
 To understand the prosthetic and orthotic devices
 To know the developments in assistive technology

UNIT I CARDIAC ASSIST DEVICES 9

Cardiac functions and parameters, principle of External counter pulsation techniques, intra aortic
balloon pump, Auxillary ventricle and schematic for temporary bypass of left ventricle, prosthetic
heart valves, cardiac pacemaker.

UNIT II HEMODIALYSERS 9
Physiology of kidney, Artificial kidney, Dialysis action, hemodialyser unit, membrane dialysis,
portable dialyser monitoring and functional parameters.

UNIT III HEARING AIDS 9

Anatomy of ear, Common tests – audiograms, air conduction, bone conduction, masking techniques,
SISI, Hearing aids – principles, drawbacks in the conventional unit, DSP based hearing aids.

UNIT IV PROSTHETIC AND ORTHODIC DEVICES 9

Hand and arm replacement – different types of models, externally powered limb prosthesis, feedback
in orthotic system, functional electrical stimulation, sensory assist devices.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulator, bio-feedback, assistive devices in drug delivery
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Interpret the various mechanical techniques that will help in assisting the heart functions.
CO2: Describe the underlying principles of hemodialyzer machine.
CO3: Indicate the methodologies to assess the hearing loss.
CO4: Evaluate the types of assistive devices for mobilization.
CO5: Explain about TENS and biofeedback system.

286
 TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, Third Edition: Three Volume Set,
CRC Press,2006
2. Marion. A. Hersh, Michael A. Johnson,Assistive Technology for visually impaired and
blind,Springer Science & Business Media, 1st edition, 12-May-2010
3. Yadin David, Wolf W. von Maltzahn, Michael R. Neuman, Joseph.D, Bronzino, Clinical
Engineering, CRC Press, 1st edition,2010.

REFERENCES
1. Kenneth J. Turner Advances in Home Care Technologies: Results of the match Project,
Springer, 1stedition, 2011.
2. Gerr M. Craddock Assistive Technology-Shaping the future, IOS Press, 1st edition, 2003.
3. 3D Printing in Orthopaedic Surgery, Matthew Dipaola , Elsevier 2019 ISBN 978 -0-323-662116
4. Cardiac Assist Devices, Daniel Goldstein (Editor), Mehmet Oz (Editor), Wiley-Blackwell April
2000 ISBN: 978-0-879-93449-1
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 1 1 1
4 3 1 1 1 1
5 3 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 1 1 1 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMA352 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course will help the students to
 determine the optimum solution for Linear programming problems.
 study the Transportation and assignment models and various techniques to solve them.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of integer programming
problems.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of dynamic programming
problems.
 determine the optimum solution for non-linear programming problems.

UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Formulation of linear programming models – Graphical solution – Simplex method - Big M Method
– Two phase simplex method - Duality - Dual simplex method.

UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS 9

Matrix form of Transportation problems – Loops in T.P – Initial basic feasible solution –
Transportation algorithm – Assignment problem – Unbalanced assignment problems .

287
UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction – All and mixed I.P.P – Gomory’s method – Cutting plane algorithm – Branch and
bound algorithm – Zero – one programming.

UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Recursive nature of computation – Forward and backward recursion – Resource Allocation model
– Cargo – loading model – Work – force size model - Investment model – Solution of L.P.P by
dynamic programming .

UNIT V NON - LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Lagrange multipliers – Equality constraints – Inequality constraints – Kuhn – Tucker Conditions –
Quadratic programming.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1:Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop a
linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex method for solving linear
programming problems.
CO2:analyze the concept of developing, formulating, modeling and solving transportation and
assignment problems.
CO3:solve the integer programming problems using various methods.
CO4:conceptualize the principle of optimality and sub-optimization, formulation and computational
procedure of dynamic programming.
CO5:determine the optimum solution for non linear programming problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kanti Swarup, [Link] and Man Mohan, " Operations Research " , Sultan Chand & Sons,
New Delhi, Fifth Edition , 1990.
2. Taha. H.A, " Operations Research – An Introduction , Pearson Education, Ninth Edition ,
New Delhi, 2012.

REFERENCES :
1. [Link] , " Operations Research - Theory and Applications " Mac Millan India Ltd ,
Second Edition , New Delhi , 2003.
2. Richard Bronson & Govindasami Naadimuthu , " Operations Research " ( Schaum’s Outlines –
TMH Edition) Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Pradeep Prabhakar Pai , " Operations Research and Practice", Oxford University Press, New
Delhi , 2012.
4. [Link] and [Link] , " Operations Research , Ane Books [Link], New Delhi , 2014.
5. [Link] and G.J. Lieberman, " Introduction to Operations Research " , Tata McGraw Hill,
Eighth Edition , New Delhi, 2005.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
288
 CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMA353 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve related
problems.
 To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
 To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.

UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 9

Groups: Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets - Lagrange's
theorem.
Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n - Ring homomorphism.

UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 9

Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of polynomials
over finite fields.

UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 9

Division algorithm- Base-b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite numbers –
GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.

UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 9

Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence’s – Linear Congruence’s - Applications : Divisibility tests
- Modular exponentiation - Chinese remainder theorem – 2x2 linear systems.

UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 9

Wilson’s theorem – Fermat’s Little theorem – Euler’s theorem – Euler’s Phi functions – Tau and
Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1:Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
CO2:Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
CO3:The students should be able to demonstrate their mastery by solving non-trivial problems
related to the concepts, and by proving simple theorems about the, statements proven by the text

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", Pearson
Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Thomas Koshy, “Elementary Number Theory with Applications”, Elsevier
Publications , New Delhi , 2002.
289
REFERENCES:
1. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, “Coding Theory – A first Course”, Cambridge Publications,
Cambridge, 2004.
2. Niven.I, Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., “An Introduction to Theory of Numbers” , John
Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. Lidl.R., and Pitz. G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2nd Edition , 2006.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 1 2 - - - 2 1 - 1 2 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO5 2 2 1 - 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 - - -
Avg 2.8 2.4 1.6 0.8 2.4 1 2.2 1 0.8 1 2.2 2.6 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMA354 LINEAR ALGEBRA LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
 To find the basis and dimension of vector space.
 To obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
 To find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
 To find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix
decomposition.

UNIT I MATRICES AND SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS 9

Matrices - Row echelon form - Rank - System of linear equations - Consistency - Gauss elimination
method - Gauss Jordan method.

UNIT II VECTOR SPACES 9

Vector spaces over Real and Complex fields - Subspace – Linear space - Linear independence and
dependence - Basis and dimension.

UNIT III LINEAR TRANSFORMATION 9

Linear transformation - Rank space and null space - Rank and nullity - Dimension theorem– Matrix
representation of linear transformation - Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of linear transformation –
Diagonalization.

UNIT IV INNER PRODUCT SPACES 9

Inner product and norms - Properties - Orthogonal, Orthonormal vectors - Gram Schmidt
orthonormalization process - Least square approximation.

290
UNIT V EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS AND MATRIX DECOMPOSITION 9
Eigen value Problems : Power method, Jacobi rotation method - Singular value decomposition – QR
decomposition.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1:Test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
CO2:Find the basis and dimension of vector space.
CO3:Obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
CO4:Find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
CO5:Find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Faires J.D. and Burden R., Numerical Methods, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Publications), New Delhi,
2002.
2. Friedberg A.H, Insel A.J. and Spence L, Linear Algebra, Pearson Education, 5th Edition,2019.

REFERENCES
1. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, Introductory Linear Algebra, Pearson Educations, New Delhi,
8th Edition, 2009.
2. Gerald C.F. and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Educations, New Delhi,
7th Edition, 2007.
3. Kumaresan S, Linear Algebra - A geometric approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
Reprint, 2010.
4. Richard Branson, Matrix Operations, Schaum's outline series, 1989.
5. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, Thomson (Brooks / Cole) New Delhi, 4th Edition,
2005.
6. Sundarapandian V, Numerical Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OCE353 LEAN CONCEPTS, TOOLS AND PRACTICES LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about the basics of lean principles, tools and techniques, and
implementation in the construction industry.

291
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction and overview of the construction project management - Review of Project Management
& Productivity Measurement Systems - Productivity in Construction - Daily Progress Report-The
state of the industry with respect to its management practices -construction project phases - The
problems with current construction management techniques.

UNIT II LEAN MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to lean management - Toyota’s management principle-Evolution of lean in construction
industry - Production theories in construction –Lean construction value - Value in construction -
Target value design - Lean project delivery system- Forms of waste in construction industry - Waste
Elimination.

UNIT III CORE CONCEPTS IN LEAN 9

Concepts in lean thinking – Principles of lean construction – Variability and its impact – Traditional
construction and lean construction – Traditional project delivery - Lean construction and workflow
reliability – Work structuring – Production control.

UNIT IV LEAN TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Value Stream Mapping – Work sampling – Last planner system – Flow and pull based production –
Last Planner System – Look ahead schedule – constraint analysis – weekly planning meeting- Daily
Huddles – Root cause analysis – Continuous improvement – Just in time.

UNIT V LEAN IMPLEMENTATION IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 9

Lean construction implementation- Enabling lean through information technology - Lean in design -
Design Structure - BIM (Building Information Modelling) - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) –
Sustainability through lean construction approach.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
On completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to

CO1 Explains the contemporary management techniques and the issues in present scenario.
CO2 Apply the basics of lean management principles and their evolution from manufacturing
industry to construction industry.
CO3 Develops a better understanding of core concepts of lean construction tools and techniques
and their importance in achieving better productivity.
CO4 Apply lean techniques to achieve sustainability in construction projects.
CO5 Apply lean construction techniques in design and modeling.

REFERENCES:
1. Corfe, C. and Clip, B., Implementing lean in construction: Lean and the sustainability agenda,
CIRIA, 2013.
2. Shang Gao and Sui Pheng Low, Lean Construction Management: The Toyota Way, Springer,
2014.
3. Dave, B., Koskela, L., Kiviniemi, A., Owen, R., andTzortzopoulos, P.,Implementing lean in
construction: Lean construction and BIM, CIRIA, 2013.
4. Ballard, G., Tommelein, I., Koskela, L. and Howell, G., Lean construction tools and techniques,
2002.

292
 5. Salem, O., Solomon, J., Genaidy, A. and Luegring, M., Site implementation and Assessment
of Lean Construction Techniques, Lean Construction Journal, 2005.

OBT352 BASICS OF MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Enable the Non-biological student’s to understand about the basics of life science and their
pro and cons for living organisms.

UNIT I BASICS OF MICROBES AND ITS TYPES 9

Introduction to microbes, existence of microbes, inventions of great scientist and history, types of
microorganisms – Bacteria, Virus, Fungi.

UNIT II MICROBIAL TECHNIQUES 9

Sterilization – types – physical and chemical sterilization, Decontamination, Preservation methods,
fermentation, Cultivation and growth of microbes, Diagnostic methods.

UNIT III PATHOGENIC MICROBES 9

Infectious Disease – Awareness, Causative agent, Prevention and control - Cholera, Dengu, Malaria,
Diarrhea, Tuberculosis, Typhoid, Covid, HIV.

UNIT IV BENEFICIAL MICROBES 9

Applications of microbes – Clinical microbiology, agricultural microbiology, Food Microbiology,
Environmental Microbiology, Animal Microbiology, Marine Microbiology.

UNIT V PRODUCTS FROM MICROBES 9

Fermentedproducts – Fermented Beverages, Curd, Cheese, Mushroom, Agricultural products –
Biopesticide, Biofertilizers, Vermi compost, Pharmaceutical products - Antibiotics, Vaccines
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1:Microbes and their types
CO2:Cultivation of microbes
CO3:Pathogens and control measures for safety
CO4:Microbes in different industry for economy.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Talaron K, Talaron A, Casita, Pelczar and Reid. Foundations in Microbiology, W.C. Brown
Publishers, 1993.
2. Pelczar MJ, Chan ECS and Krein NR, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, India.
3. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein DA, Microbiology, 3rd Edition, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 1996.

293
OBT353 BASICS OF BIOMOLECULES LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective is to offer basic concepts of biochemistry to students with diverse background
in life sciences including but not limited to the structure and function of various biomolecules and
their metabolism.

UNIT I CARBOHYDRATES 9
Introduction to carbohydrate, classification, properties of monosaccharide, structural aspects of
monosaccharides. Introduction to disaccharide (lactose, maltose, sucrose) and polysaccharide
(Heparin, starch, and glycogen) biological function of carbohydrate.

UNIT II LIPID AND FATTY ACIDS 9

Introduction to lipid, occurrence, properties, classification of lipid. Importance of phospholipids,
sphingolipid and glycerolipid. Biological function of lipid. Fatty acid, Introduction, Nomenclature and
classification of fatty acid Essential and non essential fatty acids.

UNIT III AMINO ACIDS AND PROTEIN. 9

Introduction to amino acid, structure, classification of protein based on polarity. Introduction to
protein, classification of protein based on solubility, shape, composition and Function. Peptide bond–
Structure of peptide bond. Denauration – renaturation of protein, properties of protein. Introduction
to lipoprotein, glycoprotein and [Link] function of protein.

UNIT IV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Introduction to nucleic acid, Difference between nucleotide and nucleoside, composition of DNA &
amp; RNA Structure of Nitrogen bases in DNA and RNA along with the nomenclature· DNA double
helix (Watson and crick) model, types of DNA, RNA.

UNIT V VITAMINS AND HORMONES 9

Different types of vitamins, their diverse biochemical functions and deficiency related diseases.
Overview of hormones. Hormone mediated signaling. Mechanism of action of steroid hormones,
epinephrine, glucagons and [Link] of vitamins and hormones in metabolism; Hormonal
disorders; Therapeutic uses ofvitamins and hormones.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Students will learn about various kinds of biomolecules and their physiological role.
CO2:Students will gain knowledge about various metabolic disorders and will help them to know the
importance of various biomolecules in terms of disease correlation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry 6th Edition by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox
[Link] and Company 2017
2. Satyanarayana, U. and U. Chakerapani, “Biochemistry” 3rd Rev. Edition, Books & Allied
(P) Ltd., 2006. 3. Rastogi, S.C. “Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
3. Conn, E.E., etal., “Outlines of Biochemistry” 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1987.
4. Outlines of Biochemistry, 5th Edition: By E E Conn, P K Stumpf, G Bruening and R Y [Link]
693. John Wiley and Sons, New York. 1987.

294
REFERENCES
1. Berg, Jeremy M. et al. “Biochemsitry”, 6th Edition, W.H. Freeman & Co., 2006.
2. Murray, R.K., etal “Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry”, 31st Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2018.
3. Voet, D. and Voet, J.G., “Biochemistry”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.

OBT354 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on the fundamentals of cell biology.
 To understand the signalling mechanisms.
 Understand basic principles of molecular biology at intracellular level to regulate growth,
division and development.

UNIT-I INTRODUCTION TO CELL 9

Cell, cell wall and Extracellular Matrix (ECM), composition, cellular dimensions, Evolution,
Organisation, differentiation of prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells, Virus, bacteria,cyanobacteria,
mycoplasma and prions.

UNIT II CELL ORGANELLES 9

Molecular organisation, biogenesis and functin Mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulam, golgi
apparatus, plastids, chloroplast, leucoplast, centrosome, lysosome, ribosome, peroxisome, Nucleus
and nucleolus. Endo membrane system, concept of compartmentalisation.

UNIT III BIO-MEMBRANE TRANSPORT 9

Physiochemical properties of cell membranes. Molecular constitute of membranes, asymmetrical
organisation of lipids and proteins. Solute transport across membrane’s-fick’s law, simple diffusion,
passive-facilitated diffusion, active transport- primary and secondary, group translocation, transport
ATPases, membrane transport in bacteria and animals. Transportmechanism- mobile carriers and
pores mechanisms. Transport by vesicle formation, endocytosis, exocytosis, cell respiration.

UNIT IV CELL CYCLE 9

Cell cycle- Cell division by mitosis and meosis, Comparision of meosis and mitosis, regulation of cell
cycle, cell lysis, Cytokinesis, Cell signaling, Cell communication, Cell adhesion and Cell junction, cell
cycle checkpoints.

UNIT V CENTRAL DOGMA 9

Overview of Central dogma DNA replication: Meselson & Stahl experiment, bi–directional DNA
replication, Okazaki fragments. Structure and function of mRNA, rRNA and tRNA. RNA synthesis:
Initiation, elongation and termination of RNA synthesis Introduction to Genetic code- Steps in
translation: Initiation, Elongation and termination of protein synthesis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Understanding of cell at structural and functional level.
CO2:Understand the central dogma of life and its significance.
CO3:Comprehend the basic mechanisms of cell division.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cooper, G.M. and R.E. Hansman “The Cell: A Molecular Approach”, 8th Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2018
295
2. Friefelder, David. “Molecular Biology.” Narosa Publications, 1999
3. Weaver, Robert F. “Molecular Biology” IInd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Lodish H, Berk A, MatsudairaP,Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Schot MP, Zipursky L, Darnell J.
Molecular Cell Biology, 6th Edition, 2007.
2. Becker, W.M. etal., “The World of the Cell”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Campbell, N.A., J.B. Recee and E.J. Simon “Essential Biology”, VIIrd Edition, Pearson
International, 2007.
4. Alberts, Bruce etal., “Essential Cell Biology”, 4th Edition, W.W. Norton, 2013.

OPEN ELECTIVE IV

OHS352 PROJECT REPORT WRITING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course will enable Learners to,
 Understand the essentials of project writing.
 Perceive the difference between general writing and technical writing
 Assimilate the fundamental features of report writing.
 Understand the essential differences that exist between general and technical writing.
 Learn the structure of a technical and project report.

UNIT I 9
Writing Skills – Essential Grammar and Vocabulary – Passive Voice, Reported Speech, Concord,
Signpost words, Cohesive Devices – Paragraph writing - Technical Writing vs. General Writing.

UNIT II 9
Project Report – Definition, Structure, Types of Reports, Purpose – Intended Audience – Plagiarism
– Report Writing in STEM fields – Experiment – Statistical Analysis.

UNIT III 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 1) Framing a Title – Content – Acknowledgement – Funding
Details -Abstract – Introduction – Aim of the Study – Background - Writing the research question -
Need of the Study/Project Significance, Relevance – Determining the feasibility – Theoretical
Framework.

UNIT IV 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 2) – Literature Review, Research Design, Methods of Data
Collection - Tools and Procedures - Data Analysis - Interpretation - Findings –Limitations -
Recommendations – Conclusion – Bibliography.

UNIT V 9
Proof reading a report – Avoiding Typographical Errors – Bibliography in required Format – Font –
Spacing – Checking Tables and Illustrations – Presenting a Report Orally – Techniques.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS

296
COURSE OUTCOMES
By the end of the course, learners will be able to
CO1:Write effective project reports.
CO2:Use statistical tools with confidence.
CO3:Explain the purpose and intension of the proposed project coherently and with clarity.
CO4:Create writing texts to suit achieve the intended purpose.
CO5:Master the art of writing winning proposals and projects.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.2 2.4 2.2 2 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.6 3 2.6 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

REFERENCES
1. Gerson and Gerson - Technical Communication: Process and Product, 7th Edition, Prentice
Hall(2012)
2. Virendra K. Pamecha - Guide to Project Reports, Project Appraisals and Project Finance
(2012)
3. Daniel Riordan - Technical Report Writing Today (1998)
4. Darla-Jean Weatherford - Technical Writing for Engineering Professionals (2016) Penwell
Publishers.

OMA355 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge on numerical methods that will come in handy to solve numerically the
problems that arise in engineering and technology. This will also serve as a precursor for future
research.

UNIT I ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEM 9

System of nonlinear equations : Fixed point iteration method - Newton's method; System of linear
equations: Thomas algorithm for tri diagonal system - SOR iteration methods ; Eigen value
problems: Given's method - Householder's method.

UNIT II INTERPOLATION 9
Central difference: Stirling and Bessel's interpolation formulae ; Piecewise spline interpolation:
Piecewise linear, piecewise quadratic and cubic spline ; Least square approximation for continuous
data (upto 3rd degree).

297
UNIT III NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Explicit Adams - Bashforth Techniques - Implicit Adams - Moulton Techniques, Predictor -Corrector
Techniques - Finite difference methods for solving two - point linear boundary value problems -
Orthogonal Collocation method.

UNIT IV FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS FOR ELLIPTIC EQUATIONS 9

Laplace and Poisson’s equations in a rectangular region : Five point finite difference schemes -
Leibmann’s iterative methods - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – Laplace equation in polar
coordinates : Finite difference schemes .

UNIT V FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD FOR TIME DEPENDENT PARTIAL

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Parabolic equations : Explicit and implicit finite difference methods – Weighted average
approximation - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – First order hyperbolic equations - Method of
characteristics - Different explicit and implicit methods; Wave equation : Explicit scheme – Stability
of above schemes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for nonlinear equations,
system of linear equations and eigenvalue problems;
CO2: understand the interpolation theory;
CO3: understand the concepts of numerical methods for ordinary differential equations;
CO4: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for elliptic equations;
CO5: understand the concepts of numerical methods for time dependent partial differential equations

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal, B.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering & Science ", Khanna Publications,
Delhi, 2013.
2. Gupta, S.K., "Numerical Methods for Engineers", (Third Edition), New Age Publishers, 2015.
3. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K. and Jain, R.K., "Computational Methods for Partial Differential
Equations", New Age Publishers, 1994.

REFERENCES:
1. Saumyen Guha and Rajesh Srivastava, "Numerical methods for Engineering and Science",
Oxford Higher Education, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Burden, R.L., and Faires, J.D., “Numerical Analysis – Theory and Applications”, 9 th Edition,
Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gupta S.K., “Numerical Methods for Engineers”,4th Edition, New Age Publishers, 2019.
4. Sastry, S.S., “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 5th Edition, PHI Learning, 2015.
5. Morton, K.W. and Mayers D.F., "Numerical solution of Partial Differential equations",
Cambridge University press, Cambridge, 2002.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
298
 CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMA356 RANDOM PROCESSES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random variables with
applications to engineering which can describe real life phenomenon.
 To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in communication
networks.
 To acquaint with specialized random processes which are apt for modelling the real time scenario.
 To understand the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.

UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES 9

Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Joint
Distribution- Covariance and Correlation – Transformation of a random variable.

UNIT II RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Characterization – Cross correlation and Cross covariance functions - Stationary
Random Processes – Markov process - Markov chain.

UNIT III SPECIAL RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Bernoulli Process – Gaussian Process - Poisson process – Random telegraph process.

UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 9

Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions – Properties – Power spectral density – Cross
spectral density – Properties.

UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 9

Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with random inputs – Auto
correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:

CO1:Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
CO2:Apply the concept random processes in engineering disciplines.
CO3:Understand and apply the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
CO4:Get an exposure of various distribution functions and help in acquiring skills in handling
situations involving more than one variable.
CO5:Analyze the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.

299
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1st Indian Reprint,
Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata McGraw
Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.

REFERENCES
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis", Oxford
University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to
Signal Processing and Communications ", Academic Press, 2004.
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing ", Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., “Probability and Stochastic Processes", Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd., Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -

1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMA357 QUEUEING AND RELIABILITY MODELLING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications such
as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
 To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
 To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop probabilistic
models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
 To study the system reliability and hazard function for series and parallel systems.
 To implement Markovian Techniques for availability and maintainability which opens up new
avenues for research.

UNIT I RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.

300
UNIT II MARKOVIAN QUEUEING MODELS 9
Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models –
Little’s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms.

UNIT III ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 9

M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special cases – Series queues
– Open Jackson networks.

UNIT IV SYSTEM RELIABILITY 9

Reliability and hazard functions- Exponential, Normal, Weibull and Gamma failure distribution – Time
- dependent hazard models – Reliability of Series and Parallel Systems.

UNIT V MAINTAINABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 9

Maintainability and Availability functions – Frequency of failures – Two Unit parallel system with
repair – k out of m systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1:Enable the students to apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines.
CO2:Students acquire skills in analyzing various queueing models.
CO3:Students can understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time in a
probabilistic manner.
CO4:Students can analyze reliability of the systems for various probability distributions.
CO5:Students can be able to formulate problems using the maintainability and availability analyses
by using theoretical approach.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Shortle J.F, Gross D, Thompson J.M,Harris C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York,2018.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,2010.

REFERENCES
1. Medhi J, ”Stochastic models of Queueing Theory”, Academic Press, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2003.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi, 2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Govil A.K., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,1983.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1.4 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation
301
OMG354 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation Management for
entrepreneurship.
 To understand the Production process and planning.
 To understand the Production and Operations Management Control for business owners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANGEMENT 9

Functions of Production Management - Relationship between production and other functions –
Production management and operations management, Characteristics of modern production and
operation management, organisation of production function, recent trends in production /operations
management - production as an organisational function, decision making in production Operations
research

UNIT II PRODUCTION & OPERATION SYSTEMS 9

Production Systems- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation in Production - Functions and
significance- Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning- Capacity
measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing and service
industry

UNIT III PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS PLANNING 9

Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design process and techniques
– Location break even analysis-Production Process Planning: Characteristic of production process
systems – Steps for production process- Production Planning Control Functions – Planning phase-
Action phase- Control phase - Aggregate production planning

UNIT IV PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT PROCESS 9

Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study – Significance – Methods,
evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and rating - Value Analysis - Plant Layout: meaning
– characters –- Plant location techniques - Types- MRP and Layout Design - Optimisation and
Theory of Constraints (TOC)– Critical Chain Project Management (CCPM)- REL (Relationship) Chart
– Assembly line balancing- – Plant design optimisation -Forecasting methods.

UNIT V CONTROLING PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Material requirement planning (MRP)- Concept- Process and control - Inventory control systems and
techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing - Network techniques - Quality Management: Preventive
Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality – Techniques for measuring quality - Control Chart (X , R ,
p , np and C chart ) - Cost of Quality, Continuous improvement (Kaizen) - Quality awards - Supply
Chain Management - Total Quality Management - 6 Sigma approach and Zero Defect
Manufacturing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able :
CO 1 To understand the basics and functions of Production and Operation Management for business
owners.
CO 2 To learn about the Production & Operation Systems.
302
CO 3 To acquaint on the Production & Operations Planning Techniques followed by entrepreneurs
in Industries.
CO 4 To known about the Production & Operations Management Processes in organisations.
CO 5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling , Production and Operations in industries.

REFERENCES
1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing,
Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management, , 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan India,1992.
6. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
7. Terry Hill ,Operation Management. Pal Grave McMillan (Case Study).2005.

OMG355 MULTIVARIATE DATA ANALYSIS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To know various multivariate data analysis techniques for business research.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Uni-variate, Bi-variate and Multi-variate techniques – Classification of multivariate techniques –
Guidelines for multivariate analysis and interpretation.

UNIT II PREPARING FOR MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS 9

Conceptualization of research model with variables, collection of data –-Approaches for dealing with
missing data – Testing the assumptions of multivariate analysis.

UNIT III MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS, FACTOR ANALYSIS 9

Multiple Linear Regression Analysis – Inferences from the estimated regression function – Validation
of the model. -Approaches to factor analysis – interpretation of results.

UNIT IV LATENT VARIABLE TECHNIQUES 9

Confirmatory Factor Analysis, Structural equation modelling, Mediation models, Moderation models,
Longitudinal studies.

UNIT V ADVANCED MULTIVARIATE TECHNIQUES 9

Multiple Discriminant Analysis, Logistic Regression, Cluster Analysis, Conjoint Analysis,
multidimensional scaling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1: Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the concepts and methods; know the exact
scopes and possible limitations of each method; and show capability of using multivariate techniques
to provide constructive guidance in decision making.
CO2:Use advanced techniques to conduct thorough and insightful analysis, and interpret the results
correctly with detailed and useful information.
CO3:Show substantial understanding of the real problems; conduct deep analysis using correct
methods; and draw reasonable conclusions with sufficient explanation and elaboration.
303
CO4:Write an insightful and well-organized report for a real-world case study, including thoughtful
and convincing details.
CO5:Make better business decisions by using advanced techniques in data analytics. ‘

REFERENCES :
1. Joseph F Hair, Rolph E Anderson, Ronald L. Tatham & William C. Black, Multivariate Data
Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Barbara G. Tabachnick, Linda [Link], Using Multivariate Statistics, 6th Edition, Pearson, 2012.
3. Richard A Johnson and Dean [Link], Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, Prentice Hall,
New Delhi, 2005.
4. David R Anderson, Dennis J Seveency, and Thomas A Williams, Statistics for Business and
Economics, Thompson, Singapore, 2002

OME352 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the development, capabilities, applications, of Additive Manufacturing (AM),
and its business opportunities.
 To be acquainted with vat polymerization and material extrusion processes
 To be familiar with powder bed fusion and binder jetting processes.
 To gain knowledge on applications of direct energy deposition, and material jetting
processes.
 To impart knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technologies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Overview - Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing (AM) Technology: Rapid Prototyping-
Rapid Tooling - Rapid Manufacturing - Additive Manufacturing. AM Process Chain - ASTM/ISO
52900 Classification - Benefits - AM Unique Capabilities - AM File formats: STL, AMF Applications:
Building Printing, Bio Printing, Food Printing, Electronics Printing, Automobile, Aerospace,
Healthcare. Business Opportunities in AM.

UNIT II VAT POLYMERIZATION AND MATERIAL EXTRUSION 9

Photo polymerization: Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Materials -Process - top down and bottom
up approach - Advantages - Limitations - Applications. Digital Light Processing (DLP) - Process -
Advantages - Applications.
Material Extrusion: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) - Process-Materials -Applications and
Limitations.

UNIT III POWDER BED FUSION AND BINDER JETTING 9

Powder Bed Fusion: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Process - Powder Fusion Mechanism -
Materials and Application. Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Materials -
Process - Advantages and Applications.
Binder Jetting: Three-Dimensional Printing - Materials - Process - Benefits - Limitations -
Applications.

UNIT IV MATERIAL JETTING AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION 9

Material Jetting: Multijet Modeling- Materials - Process - Benefits - Applications.

304
Directed Energy Deposition: Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - Process - Material Delivery -
Materials -Benefits -Applications.

UNIT V SHEET LAMINATION AND DIRECT WRITE TECHNOLOGY 9

Sheet Lamination: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM)- Basic Principle- Mechanism: Gluing or
Adhesive Bonding - Thermal Bonding - Materials - Application and Limitation.
Ink-Based Direct Writing (DW): Nozzle Dispensing Processes, Inkjet Printing Processes, Aerosol
DW - Applications of DW.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students shall be able to:
CO1: Recognize the development of AM technology and how AM technology propagated into
various businesses and developing opportunities.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on process vat polymerization and material extrusion processes and its
applications.
CO3: Elaborate the process and applications of powder bed fusion and binder jetting.
CO4: Evaluate the advantages, limitations, applications of material jetting and directed energy
deposition processes.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technology.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Mahyar Khorasani “Additive manufacturing
technologies”. 3rd edition Springer Cham, Switzerland. (2021). ISBN: 978-3-030-56126-0
2. Andreas Gebhardt and Jan-Steffen Hötter “Additive Manufacturing: 3D Printing for Prototyping
and Manufacturing”, Hanser publications, United States, 2015, ISBN: 978-1-56990-582-

REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”, Hanser Gardner Publication, Cincinnati., Ohio, 2011, ISBN :9783446425521.
2. Milan Brandt, “Laser Additive Manufacturing: Materials, Design, Technologies, and Applications”,
Woodhead Publishing., United Kingdom, 2016, ISBN: 9780081004333.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing”, 1st Edition, CRC Press.,
United States, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-1482223590.
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer., United States
,2006, ISBN: 978-1-4614-9842-1.
5. Liou, L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press., United States, 2011, ISBN: 9780849334092.

305
CME343 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the fundamental concepts of the new product development
 To develop material specifications, analysis and process.
 To Learn the Feasibility Studies & reporting of new product development.
 To study the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new product
development
 To learn Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF NPD 9

Introduction – Reading of Drawing – Grid reading, Revisions, ECN (Engg. Change Note), Component
material grade, Specifications, customer specific requirements – Basics of monitoring of NPD applying
Gantt chart, Critical path analysis – Fundamentals of BOM (Bill of Materials), Engg. BOM & Manufacturing
BOM. Basics of MIS software and their application in industries like SAP, MS Dynamics, Oracle ERP Cloud
– QFD.

UNIT II MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS, ANALYSIS & PROCESS 9

Material specification standards – ISO, DIN, JIS, ASTM, EN, etc. – Awareness on various manufacturing
process like Metal castings & Forming, Machining (Conventional, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, 5 Axis, ), Fabrications,
Welding process. Qualifications of parts mechanical, physical & Chemical properties and their test report
preparation and submission. Fundamentals of DFMEA & PFMEA, Fundamentals of FEA, Bend Analysis,
Hot Distortion, Metal and Material Flow, Fill and Solidification analysis.

UNIT III ESSENTIALS OF NPD 9

RFQ (Request of Quotation) Processing – Feasibility Studies & reporting – CFT (Cross Function Team)
discussion on new product and reporting – Concept design, Machine selection for tool making, Machining
– Manufacturing Process selection, Machining Planning, cutting tool selection – Various Inspection methods
– Manual measuring, CMM – GOM (Geometric Optical Measuring), Lay out marking and Cut section
analysis. Tool Design and Detail drawings preparation, release of details to machine shop and CAM
programing. Tool assembly and shop floor trials. Initial sample submission with PPAP documents.

UNIT IV CRITERIONS OF NPD 9

New product qualification for Dimensions, Mechanical & Physical Properties, Internal Soundness proving
through X-Ray, Radiography, Ultrasonic Testing, MPT, etc. Agreement with customer for testing
frequencies. Market Survey on similar products, Risk analysis, validating samples with simulation results,
Lesson Learned & Horizontal deployment in NPD.

UNIT V REPORTING & FORWARD-THINKING OF NPD 9

Detailed study on PPAP with 18 elements reporting, APQP and its 5 Sections, APQP vs PPAP, Importance
of SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) – Purpose & documents, deployment in shop floor. Prototyping &
RPT - Concepts, Application and its advantages, 3D Printing – resin models, Sand cores for foundries;
Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model – Advantages &
Limitation of RE, CE (Concurrent Engineering) – Basics, Application and its advantages in NPD (to reduce
development lead time, time to Market, Improve productivity and product cost.)
TOTAL :45 PERIODS

306
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1:Discuss fundamental concepts and customer specific requirements of the New Product development
CO2:Discuss the Material specification standards, analysis and fabrication, manufacturing process.
CO3:Develop Feasibility Studies & reporting of New Product development
CO4:Analyzing the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new product
development
CO5:Develop Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Product Development – Sten Jonsson
2. Product Design & Development – Karl T. Ulrich, Maria C. Young, Steven D. Eppinger

REFERENCES:
1. Revolutionizing Product Development – Steven C Wheelwright & Kim B. Clark
2. Change by Design
3. Toyota Product Development System – James Morgan & Jeffrey K. Liker
4. Winning at New Products – Robert Brands 3rd Edition
5. Product Design & Value Engineering – Dr. M.A. Bulsara &Dr. H.R. Thakkar
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
4 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
5 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OME355 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN & RAPID PROTOTYPING TECHNIQUES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Outline Fundamental concepts in UI & UX
 Introduce the principles of Design and Building an mobile app
 Illustrate the use of CAD in product design
 Outline the choice and use of prototyping tools
 Understanding design of electronic circuits and fabrication of electronic devices

UNIT I UI/UX 9
Fundamental concepts in UI & UX - Tools - Fundamentals of design principles - Psychology and
Human Factors for User Interface Design - Layout and composition for Web, Mobile and
Devices - Typography - Information architecture - Color theory - Design process flow, wireframes,
best practices in the industry -User engagement ethics - Design alternatives
307
UNIT II APP DEVELOPMENT 9
SDLC - Introduction to App Development - Types of Apps - web Development - understanding
Stack - Frontend - backend - Working with Databases - Introduction to API - Introduction to Cloud
services - Cloud environment Setup- Reading and writing data to cloud - Embedding ML
models to Apps - Deploying application.

UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9

Introduction to Industrial Design - Points, lines, and planes - Sketching and concept generation
- Sketch to CAD - Introduction to CAD tools - Types of 3D modeling - Basic 3D Modeling Tools -
Part creation – Assembly - Product design and rendering basics - Dimensioning & Tolerancing

UNIT IV MECHANICAL RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Need for prototyping - Domains in prototyping - Difference between actual manufacturing and
prototyping - Rapid prototyping methods - Tools used in different domains - Mechanical
Prototyping; 3D Printing and classification - Laser Cutting and engraving - RD Works - Additive
manufacturing

UNIT V ELECTRONIC RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Basics of electronic circuit design - lumped circuits - Electronic Prototyping - Working with
simulation tool - simple PCB design with EDA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
CO1:Create quick UI/UX prototypes for customer needs
CO2:Develop web application to test product traction / product feature
CO3:Develop 3D models for prototyping various product ideas
CO4:Built prototypes using Tools and Techniques in a quick iterative methodology

TEXT BOOKS
1. Peter Fiell, Charlotte Fiell, Industrial Design A-Z, TASCHEN America Llc(2003)
2. Samar Malik, Autodesk Fusion 360 - The Master Guide.
3. Steve Krug, Don't Make Me Think, Revisited: A Common Sense Approach to Web Usability,
Pearson,3rd edition(2014)

REFERENCES
1. [Link] [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link] y/prusaslicer_204

MF3010 MICRO AND PRECISION ENGINEERING LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of this course the student should be able to
 Learn about the precision machine tools
 Learn about the macro and micro components.
308
 Understand handling and operating of the precision machine tools.
 Learn to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
 Learn metrology for micro system

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEMS 9

Design, and material selection, micro-actuators: hydraulic, pneumatic, electrostatic/ magnetic etc.
for medical to general purpose applications. Micro-sensors based on Thermal, mechanical, electrical
properties; micro-sensors for measurement of pressure, flow, temperature, inertia, force,
acceleration, torque, vibration, and monitoring of manufacturing systems.

UNIT II FABRICATION PROCESSES FOR MICRO-SYSTEMS: 9

Additive, subtractive, forming process, microsystems-Micro-pumps, micro- turbines, micro engines,
micro-robot, and miniature biomedical devices

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PRECISION ENGINEERING 9

Machine tools, holding and handling devices, positioning fixtures for fabrication/ assembly of
microsystems. Precision drives: inch worm motors, ultrasonic motors, stick- slip mechanism and
other piezo-based devices.

UNIT IV PRECISION MACHINING PROCESSES 9

Precision machining processes for macro components - Diamond turning, fixed and free abrasive
processes, finishing processes.

UNIT V METROLOGY FOR MICRO SYSTEMS 9

Metrology for micro systems - Surface integrity and its characterization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1:Select suitable precision machine tools and operate
CO2:Apply the macro and micro components for fabrication of micro systems.
CO3:Apply suitable machining process
CO4:Able to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
CO5:Apply metrology for micro system

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Davim, J. Paulo, ed. Microfabrication and Precision Engineering: Research and
Development. Woodhead Publishing, 2017
2. Gupta K, editor. Micro and Precision Manufacturing. Springer; 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Dornfeld, D., and Lee, D. E., Precision Manufacturing, 2008, Springer.
2. H. Nakazawa, Principles of Precision Engineering, 1994, Oxford University Press.
3. Whitehouse, D. J., Handbook of Surface Metrology, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Philadelphia PA, 1994.
4. Murthy.R.L, ―Precision Engineering in Manufacturing‖, New Age International, New Delhi,
2005

309
OMF354 COST MANAGEMENT OF ENGINEERING PROJECTS LT PC
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Summarize the costing concepts and their role in decision making
 Infer the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection
 Interpret costing concepts with project execution
 Develop knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques
 Illustrate with quantitative techniques in cost management

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Objectives of a Costing System; Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential cost,
Incremental cost and Opportunity cost; Creation of a Database for operational control.’

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project
execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and
nontechnical activities, Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances and
documents, Project team: Role of each member, Importance Project site: Data required with
significance, Project contracts

UNIT III PROJECT EXECUTION AND COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning:
mechanical and process, Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing; Distinction between
Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis,
Various decision-making problems, Pricing strategies: Pareto Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle
Costing

UNIT IV COSTING OF SERVICE SECTOR AND BUDGETERY CONTROL 9

Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Activity
Based Cost Management, Bench Marking; Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis,
Budgetary Control: Flexible Budgets; Performance budgets; Zero-based budgets.

UNIT V QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR COST MANAGEMENT 9

Linear Programming, PERT/CPM, Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Learning Curve
Theory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand the costing concepts and their role in decision making.
CO2: Understand the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection.
CO3: Interpret costing concepts with project execution.
CO4: Gain knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques.
CO5: Become familiar with quantitative techniques in cost management.

310
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John M. Nicholas, Herman Steyn Project Management for Engineering, Business and
Technology, Taylor & Francis, 2 August 2020, ISBN: 9781000092561.
2. Albert Lester ,Project Management, Planning and Control, Elsevier/Butterworth-Heinemann,
2007, ISBN: 9780750669566, 075066956X.

REFERENCES:
1. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler publisher,
1991.
2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting, 1988.
3. Charles T. Horngren et al Cost Accounting a Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2011.
4. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting, 2003.
5. Vohra N.D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd, 2007.

AU3002 BATTERIES AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to make the students
 to understand the working and characteristics of different types of batteries and
their management .

UNIT I ADVANCED BATTERIES 9

Li-ion Batteries-different formats, chemistry, safe operating area, efficiency, aging. Characteristics-
SOC,DOD, SOH. Balancing-Passive Balancing Vs Active Balancing. Other Batteries-NCM and NCA
Batteries. NCR18650B specifications.

UNIT II BATTERY PACK 9

Battery Pack- design, sizing, calculations, flow chart, real and simulation [Link] power –
definition, testing methods-relationships with Power, Temperature and ohmic Internal Resistance.
Cloud based and Local Smart charging.

UNIT III BATTERY MODELLING 9

Battery Modelling Methods-Equivalent Circuit Models, Electrochemical Model, Neural Network
Model. ECM Comparisons- Rint model, Thevenin model, PNGV model. State space Models-
Introduction. Battery Modelling software/simulation frameworks

UNIT IV BATTERY STATE ESTIMATION 9

SOC Estimation- Definition, importance, single cell Vs series batteries SOC. Estimation Methods-
Load voltage, Electromotive force, AC impedance, Ah counting, Neural networks, Neuro-fuzzy
forecast method, Kalman filter. Estimation Algorithms.

UNIT V BMS ARCHITECTURE AND REAL TIME COMPONENTS 9

Battery Management System- need, operation, classification. BMS ASIC-bq76PL536A-Q1 Battery
Monitor IC- CC2662R-Q1 Wireless BMS MCU. Communication Modules- CAN Open-Flex Ray-
CANedge1 [Link] Battery Tester. BMS Development with Modeling software and Model-
Based Design.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
311
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
CO1:Acquire knowledge of different Li-ion Batteries performance.
CO2:Design a Battery Pack and make related calculations.
CO3:Demonstrate a BatteryModel or Simulation.
CO4:Estimate State-of-Charges in a Battery Pack.
CO5:Approach different BMS architectures during real world usage.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Jiuchun Jiang and Caiping Zhang, “Fundamentals and applications of Lithium-Ion batteriesin
Electric Drive Vehicles’’, Wiley, 2015.
2. Davide Andrea ,“Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery Packs” ARTECH
House, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Developing Battery Management Systems with Simulink and Model-Based Design-whitepaper
2. Panasonic NCR18650B- DataSheet
3. bq76PL536A-Q1- IC DataSheet
4. CC2662R-Q1- IC DataSheet

AU3008 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to make the students to list common types of sensor and
actuators used in automotive vehicles.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENTS AND SENSORS 9

Sensors: Functions- Classifications- Main technical requirement and trends Units and standards-
Calibration methods- Classification of errors- Error analysis- Limiting error- Probable error-
Propagation of error- Odds and uncertainty- principle of transduction-Classification. Static
characteristics- mathematical model of transducers- Zero, First and Second order transducers-
Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test inputs.

UNIT II VARIABLE RESISTANCE AND INDUTANCE SENSORS 9

Principle of operation- Construction details- Characteristics and applications of resistive
potentiometer- Strain gauges- Resistive thermometers- Thermistors- Piezoresistive sensors
Inductive potentiometer- Variable reluctance transducers:- EI pick up and LVDT

UNIT III VARIABLE AND OTHER SPECIAL SENSORS 9

Variable air gap type, variable area type and variable permittivity type- capacitor microphone
Piezoelectric, Magnetostrictive, Hall Effect, semiconductor sensor- digital transducers-Humidity
Sensor. Rain sensor, climatic condition sensor, solar, light sensor, antiglare sensor.

UNIT IV AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS 9

Electromechanical actuators‐ Fluid‐mechanical actuators‐ Electrical machines‐ Direct‐current
machines‐ Three‐phase machines‐ Single‐phase alternating‐current Machines ‐ Duty‐type ratings

312
for electrical machines. Working principles, construction and location of actuators viz. Solenoid,
relay, stepper motor etc.

UNIT V AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ACTUATORS 9

Different types of actuators used in automatic temperature control‐ Fixed and variable displacement
temperature control‐ Semi Automatic‐ Controller design for Fixed and variable displacement type air
conditioning system.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1:List common types of sensor and actuators used in vehicles.
CO2:Design measuring equipment’s for the measurement of pressure force, temperature and flow.
CO3:Generate new ideas in designing the sensors and actuators for automotive application
CO4:Understand the operation of thesensors, actuators and electronic control.
CO5:Design temperature control actuators for vehicles.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin's Measurement Systems: 7th Edition (SIE),Ernest O. Doebelin [Link]
McGraw Hill Publishers, 2019.
2. Robert Brandy, “ Automotive Electronics and Computer System”, Prentice Hall,2001
3. William Kimberley,” Bosch Automotive Handbook”, 6th Edition, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004.
4. Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics Systems and Components,
Networking and Hybrid Drive, 5th Edition, 2007, ISBN No: 978‐3‐658‐01783‐5.

REFERENCES:
1. James D Halderman, “ Automotive Electrical and Electronics” , Prentice Hall, USA, 2013
2. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics Systems,” Third Edition, 2004, SAE
International.
3. Patranabis.D, “ Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India Ltd,2003
4. William Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics ‐An Engineering Perspective," 7th
Edition, Elsevier Butterworth‐Heinemann Publishers, 2012.

OAS353 SPACE VEHICLES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To interpret the missile space stations, space vs earth environment.
 To explain the life support systems, mission logistics and planning.
 To deploy the skills effectively in the understanding of space vehicle configuration design.
 To explain Engine system and support of space vehicle
 To interpret nose cone configuration of space vehicle

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS 9

Energy and Efficiencies of power plants for space vehicles – Typical Performance Values – Mission
design – Structural design aspects during launch - role of launch environment on launch vehicle
integrity.

313
UNIT II SELECTION OF ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9
Ascent flight mechanics – Launch vehicle selection process – Criteria for Selection for different
missions – selection of subsystems – types of staging – Interfaces – selection and criteria for stages
and their role in launch vehicle configuration design.

UNIT III ENGINE SYSTEMS, CONTROLS, AND INTEGRATION 9

Propellant Budget – Performance of Complete or Multiple Rocket Propulsion Systems – Engine
Design – Engine Controls – Engine System Calibration – System Integration and Engine
Optimization.

UNIT IV THRUST VECTOR CONTROL 9

TVC Mechanisms with a Single Nozzle – TVC with Multiple Thrust Chambers or Nozzles – Testing
– Integration with Vehicle – SITVC method – other jet control methods - exhaust plume problems in
space environment

UNIT V NOSE CONE CONFIGURATION 9

Aerodynamic aspects on the selection of nose shape of a launch vehicle - design factors in the
finalization of nose configuration with respect to payload - nose cone thermal protection system -
separation of fairings - payload injection mechanism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1:Explain exotic space propulsion concepts, such as nuclear, solar sail, and antimatter.
CO2:Apply knowledge in selecting the appropriate rocket propulsion systems.
CO3:interpret the air-breathing propulsion suitable for initial stages and fly-back boosters.
CO4:Analyze aerodynamics aspect, including boost-phase lift and drag, hypersonic, and re-entry.
CO5:Adapt from aircraft engineers moving into launch vehicle, spacecraft, and hypersonic vehicle
design.

OIM352 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
 To introduce fundamental concepts of management and organization to students.
 Toi mpart knowledge to students on various aspects of marketing, quality control and
marketing strategies.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of human resources management.
 To acquaint students with the concepts of project management and cost analysis.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of planning process and business strategies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION 9

Concepts of Management and organization- nature, importance and Functions of Management,
Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's Scientific Management Theory- Fayal's Principles of
Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy of Human Needs- Douglas McGregor's
TheoryXandTheoryY-HertzbergTwoFactorTheoryofMotivation-
LeadershipStyles,Socialresponsibilities of Management, Designing Organisational Structures: Basic
314
concepts related to Organisation -Departmentation and Decentralisation.
UNIT II OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9
Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of Production(Job, batch and Mass Production),Work
Study - Basic procedure involved in Method Study and Work Measurement -
BusinessProcessReengineering(BPR)-
StatisticalQualityControl:controlchartsforVariablesandAttributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance
Sampling, Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ,ABC Analysis, Purchase Procedure, Stores
Management and Store Records - JIT System,Supply Chain Management, Functions of Marketing,
Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies based on ProductLifeCycle.

UNIT III HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9

Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs
PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager:Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection,
TrainingandDevelopment,WageandSalaryAdministration,Promotion,Transfer,PerformanceAppraisa
l, Grievance Handling and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating –Capability
Maturity Model (CMM)Levels.

UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path
Method(CPM), identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time, Project
Cost Analysis,Project Crashing (simple problems).

UNIT V STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY STRATEGIC ISSUES 9

Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning Process,
Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy Formulation and
Implementation, Generic Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced Score Cardas
Contemporary Business Strategies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1:Plananorganizationalstructureforagivencontextintheorganisationtocarryoutproductionoperatio
nsthroughWork-study.
CO2:Surveythemarkets,customersandcompetitionbetterandpricethegivenproductsappropriatey
CO3:Ensurequalityforagivenproduct or service.
CO4:Plan, schedule and control projects through PERTandCPM.
CO5:Evaluate strategyforabusiness orserviceorganisation.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2.8 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 2 2.5
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation
315
TEXTBOOKS:
1. KanishkaBedi, Production and Operations Management,Oxford University Press, 2007.
2. Stoner,Freeman,Gilbert, Management,6th Ed, PearsonEducation,NewDelhi,2004.
3. [Link] & John [Link] Management Principles and Guidelines,
Biztantra,2007.
4. [Link],[Link] Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, CengageLearning India,2012.

REFERECES:
1. KotlerPhilip and KellerKevinLane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. KoontzandWeihrich: Essentials of Management, McGrawHill, 2012.
3. Lawrence RJauch,[Link] William F. Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic Management
Science,McGrawHill,2012.
4. [Link]:Modern Management,2012.

OIM353 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of production planning and control act work study,
 To apply the concept of product planning,
 To analyze the production scheduling,
 To apply the Inventory Control concepts.
 To prepare the manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP).

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of production-
job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect - Functional aspects-
Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit consideration-
Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-Economics of a new design.

UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data -
Predetermined motion time standards.

UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9

Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process
planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-Machine capacity,
balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.

UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gantt
charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production scheduling-
Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems- Periodic batch
316
control-Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching-Progress reporting and expediting-
Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.

UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures.
Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic
lot size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production planning
systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
CO1:The students can able to prepare production planning and control act work study,
CO2:The students can able to prepare product planning,
CO3:The students can able to prepare production scheduling,
CO4:The students can able to prepare Inventory Control.
CO5:They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).

TEXT BOOKS:
1. James. B. Dilworth, ”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for manufacturing
and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, S. Chand
and Company, 2000.

REFERENCES
1. Chary. S.N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1995.
2. Elwood [Link], and Rakesh [Link], “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th
Edition John Wiley and Sons, 2000
3. Jain. K.C. & Aggarwal. L.N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”,
Khanna Publishers, 1990
4. Kanishka Bedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford university
press, 2007.
5. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw hill.
6. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management” 9th Edition, Thomson learning IE,
2007
7. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book Corpn.1984
8. Upendra Kachru, “ Production and Operations Management – Text and cases” 1st Edition,
Excel books 2007
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 1 1 3
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 2
5 3 3 2 1

317
 AVg. 3 2.6 2 3 1 1 3 1.8
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OIE353 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Recognize and appreciate the concept of Production and Operations Management in creating
and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages.
 Describe the concept and contribution of various constituents of Production and Operations
Management (both manufacturing and service).
 Relate the interdependence of the operations function with the other key functional areas of a
firm.
 Teach analytical skills and problem-solving tools to the analysis of the operations problems.
 Apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System Performance.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Operations Management – Nature, Importance, historical development, transformation processes,
differences between services and goods, a system perspective, functions, challenges, current
priorities, recent trends; Operations Strategy - Strategic fit , framework; Supply Chain
Management

UNIT II FORECASTING, CAPACITY AND FACILITY DESIGN 9

Demand Forecasting - Need, Types, COURSE OBJECTIVES and Steps. Overview of
Qualitative andQuantitative methods. Capacity Planning - Long range, Types, Developing capacity
alternatives. Overview of sales and operations planning. Overview of MRP, MRP II and ERP.
Facility Location – Theories, Steps in Selection, Location Models. Facility Layout – Principles,
Types, Planning tools and techniques.

UNIT III DESIGN OF PRODUCT, PROCESS AND WORK SYSTEMS 9

Product Design – Influencing factors, Approaches, Legal, Ethical and Environmental issues.
Process – Planning, Selection, Strategy, Major Decisions. Work Study – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Procedure. Method Study and Motion Study. Work Measurement and
Productivity – Measuring Productivityand Methods to improve productivity.

UNIT IV MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 9

Materials Management – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Planning, Budgeting and Control. Purchasing
– COURSE OBJECTIVES, Functions, Policies, Vendor rating and Value Analysis. Stores
Management – Nature, Layout, Classification and Coding. Inventory – COURSE OBJECTIVES,
Costs and control techniques. Overview of JIT.

UNIT V SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project Management – Scheduling Techniques, PERT, CPM; Scheduling - work centers – nature,
importance; Priority rules and techniques, shopfloor control; Flow shop scheduling – Johnson‟s
Algorithm – Gantt charts; personnel scheduling in services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: The students will appreciate the role of Production and Operations management in enabling
and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages in the dynamic business

318
environment.
CO2: The students will obtain sufficient knowledge and skills to forecast demand for Production
and Service Systems.
CO3: The students will able to Formulate and Assess Aggregate Planning strategies and
Material Requirement Plan.
CO4: The students will be able to develop analytical skills to calculate capacity requirements and
developing capacity alternatives.
CO5: The students will be able to apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System
Performance.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2
2 3 3 3 3
3 2 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 3 2 3
5 3 2
AVg. 3 2.6 3 2.6 2 2 3 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation
TEXT BOOKS
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano, Operations and
Supply Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2010.
2. Norman Gaither and Gregory Frazier, Operations Management, South Western Cengage
Learning, 2002.

REFERENCES
1. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2009.
2. Russel and Taylor, Operations Management, Wiley, Fifth Edition, 2006.
3. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2004.
4. Chary S. N, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2008.
5. Aswathappa K and Shridhara Bhat K, Production and Operations Management,
Himalaya Publishing House, Revised Second Edition, 2008.
6. Mahadevan B, Operations Management Theory and practice, Pearson Education, 2007.
7. Pannerselvam R, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall India, Second
Edition, 2008.

OSF352 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Demonstrate an understanding of how occupational hygiene standards are set and used in
work health and safety.
 Compare and contrast the roles of environmental and biological monitoring in work health
and safety
 Outline strategies for identifying, assessing and controlling risks associated with airborne
gases, vapours and particulates

319
  Discuss how personal protective equipment can be used to reduce risks associated with
workplace exposures
 Provide high-level advice on managing and controlling noise and noise-related hazards

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9

Occupational Health and Environmental Safety Management - Principles practices. Common
Occupational diseases: Occupational Health Management Services at the work place. Pre-
employment, periodic medical examination of workers, medical surveillance for control of
occupational diseases and health records.

UNIT II MONITORING FOR SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT 9

Occupational Health and Environment Safety Management System, ILO and EPA Standards
Industrial Hygiene: Definition of Industrial Hygiene, Industrial Hygiene: Control Methods,
Substitution, Changing the process, Local Exhaust Ventilation, Isolation, Wet method, Personal
hygiene, housekeeping and maintenance, waste disposal, special control measures.

UNIT III OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY EDUCATION 9

Element of training cycle, Assessment of [Link] of training, design and development
of training [Link] methods and strategies types of [Link] and review of
training programs. Occupational Health Hazards, Promoting Safety, Safety and Health training,
Stress and Safety, Exposure Limit .

UNIT IV OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT 9

Bureau of Indian standards on safety and health 14489 - 1998 and 15001 – 2000, OSHA, Process
Safety Management (PSM) as per OSHA, PSM principles, OHSAS – 18001, EPA Standards,
Performance measurements to determine effectiveness of PSM. Importance of Industrial safety, role
of safety department,

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS 9

i. Radiation: Types and effects of radiation on human body, Measurement and detection of radiation
intensity. Effects of radiation on human body, Measurement – disposal of radioactive waste, Control
of radiation ii. Noise and Vibration: Sources, and its control, Effects of noise on the auditory system
and health, Measurement of noise , Different air pollutants in industries, Effect of different gases and
particulate matter ,acid fumes ,smoke, fog on human health, Vibration: effects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Explain and apply human factors engineering concepts in both evaluation of existing systems
and design of new systems
CO2: Specify designs that avoid occupation related injuries
CO3: Define and apply the principles of work design, motion economy, and work environment
design.
CO4: Identify the basic human sensory, cognitive, and physical capabilities and limitations with
respect to human-machine system performance.
CO5: Acknowledge the impact of workplace design and environment on productivity

320
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006)
2. Slote. L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, New York .

REFERENCES:
1. Jeanne MagerStellman, Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and Safety (ILO) Ms. Irma Jourdan
publication
2. Frank P Lees - Loss of prevention in Process Industries, Vol. 1 and 2,
3. ButterworthHeinemann Ltd., London (1991). 2. Industrial Safety - National Safety Council of India
4. Frank P Lees – Loss of prevention in Process Industries , Vol. 1 and 2, Butterworth- Heinemann
Ltd., London
5. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao, Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006).
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - - - -
3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
4 - - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - -
5 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
AVg. 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 2 - 2 - - -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OSF353 CHEMICAL PROCESS SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Teach the principles of safety applicable to the design, and operation of chemical process plants.
 Ensure that potential hazards are identified and mitigation measures are in place to prevent
unwanted release of energy.
 Learn about the hazardous chemicals into locations that could expose employees and others to
serious harm.
 Focuses on preventing incidents and accidents during large scale manufacturing of chemicals
and pharmaceuticals.
 Ensure that the general design of the plant is capable of complying with the dose limits in force
and with the radioactive releases.

UNIT I SAFETY IN THE STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CHEMICALS AND GASES 9

Types of storage-general considerations for storage layouts- atmospheric venting, pressure and
temperature relief - relief valve sizing calculations - storage and handling of hazardous chemicals
and industrial gases, safe disposal methods, reaction with other chemicals, hazards during
transportation - pipe line transport - safety in chemical laboratories.

321
UNIT II CHEMICAL REACTION HAZARDS 9
Hazardous inorganic and organic reactions and processes, Reactivity as a process hazard,
Detonations, Deflagrations, and Runaways, Assessment and Testing strategies, Self - heating
hazards of solids, Explosive potential of chemicals, Structural groups and instability of chemicals,
Thermochemical screening,

UNIT III SAFETY IN THE DESIGN OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Design principles -Process design development -types of designs, feasibility survey, preliminary
design, Flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagram, batch versus continuous operation,
factors in equipment scale up and design, equipment specifications - reliability and safety in
designing - inherent safety - engineered safety - safety during startup and shutdown - non destructive
testing methods - pressure and leak testing - emergency safety devices - scrubbers and flares- new
concepts in safety design and operation- Pressure vessel testing standards- Inspection techniques
for boilers and reaction vessels.

UNIT IV SAFETY IN THE OPERATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Properties of chemicals - Material Safety Data Sheets - the various properties and formats used -
methods available for property determination. Operational activities and hazards -standards
operating procedures - safe operation of pumps, compressors, heaters, column, reactors, pressure
vessels, storage vessels, piping systems - effects of pressure, temperature, Flow rate and humidity
on operations - corrosion and control measures- condition monitoring - control valves - safety valves
- pressure reducing valves, drains, bypass valves, inert gases. Chemical splashes, eye irrigation and
automatic showers.

UNIT V SAFETY AND ANALYSIS 9

Safety vs reliability- quantification of basic events, system safety quantification, Human error
analysis, Accident investigation and analysis, OSHAS 18001 and OSHMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Differentiate between inherent safety and engineered safety and recognize the
importance of safety in the design of chemical process plants.
CO2 Develop thorough knowledge about safety in the operation of chemical plants.
CO3Apply the principles of safety in the storage and handling of gases.
CO4Identify the conditions that lead to reaction hazards and adopt measures to prevent them.
CO5Develop thorough knowledge about

TEXT BOOK
1 David A Crowl& Joseph F Louvar,”Chemical Process safety”, Pearson publication, 3rd
Edition,2014
2 Maurice Jones .A,”Fire Protection Systems,2nd edition, Jones & Bartlett Publishers,2015

REFERENCES:
1. Ralph King and Ron Hirst,”King´s safety in the process industries”, Arnold, London, 1998.
2. Industrial Environment and its Evolution and Control, NIOSH Publication, 1973.
3. National Safety Council,” Accident prevention manual for industrial operations”. Chicago, 1982.
4. Lewis, Richard. J., Sr,“Sax´s dangerous properties of materials”. (Ninth edition). Van Nostrand
Reinhold, New York, 1996.
322
5. Roy E Sanders, ”Chemical Process Safety”,3rd Edition, Gulf professional publishing, 2006

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - 2 - -
2 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 -
3 - 3 1 - - - 2 - - 1 - - - -
4 - 2 - - 1 - - 1 - - - - 2
5 - 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - -
AVg. 2 2.5 3 1.5 - 1 - 1.5 1 - 1 2 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OML352 ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Understanding the importance of various materials used in electrical, electronics and
 magnetic applications
 Acquiring knowledge on the properties of electrical, electronics and magnetic materials.
 Gaining knowledge on the selection of suitable materials for the given application
 Knowing the fundamental concepts in Semiconducting materials
 Getting equipped with the materials used in optical and optoelectronic applications.

UNIT I DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9

Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric strength, breakdown
voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics, electric conductivity in solid, liquid
and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of ferromagnetic materials in static
fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-ferromagnetic materials, piezoelectric materials,
pyroelectric materials.

UNIT II MAGNETIC MATERIALS 9

Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic materials,
magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and hard materials, special
purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent magnets, ageing
of magnets. Factors effecting permeability and Hysteresis

UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS 9

Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and very large scale
Integration techniques. Concept of superconductivity; theories and examples for high temperature
superconductivity; discussion on specific superconducting materials; comments on fabrication and
engineering applications.

UNIT IV MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures, stranded conductors,
bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact materials, electric carbon materials,

323
thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous insulating materials, Effect of moisture on
insulation.

UNIT V OPTICAL AND OPTOELECTRONIC MATERIALS 9

Principles of photoconductivity - effect of impurities - principles of luminescence-laser principles -
He-Ne, injection lasers, LED materials - binary, ternary photoelectronic materials - LCD materials -
photo detectors - applications of optoelectronic materials - optical fibres and materials - electro optic
modulators - Kerr effect - Pockels effect.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1:Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
CO2:Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
CO3:Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
CO4:Select suitable materials for electrical engineering applications.
CO5:Identify right material for optical and optoelectronic applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradeep Fulay, “Electronic, Magnetic and Optical materials”, CRC Press, taylor and Francis, 2
nd illustrated edition, 2017.
2. “R K Rajput”, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Laxmi Publications, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. T K Basak, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, New Age Science Publications, 2009
2. TTTI Madras, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 2004.
3. Adrianus J. Dekker, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, PHI Publication, 2006.
4. S. P. Seth, P. V. Gupta “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Dhanpat Rai & amp;
Sons, 2011.
5. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,Singapore,
(2006).
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO1 PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO11 PO12
0 1 2 3
C01 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 3 1.8 1.6 2.2 2 2 2 1.2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OML353 NANOMATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
324
 Understanding the evolution of nanomaterials in the scientific era and make them to understand
different types of nanomaterials for the future engineering applications
 Gaining knowledge on dimensionality effects on different properties of nanomaterials
 Getting acquainted with the different processing techniques employed for fabricating
nanomaterials
 Having knowledge on the different characterisation techniques employed to characterise the
nanomaterials
 Acquiring knowledge on different applications of nanomaterials in different disciplines of
engineering.

UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction, Classification: 0D, 1D, 2D, 3D nanomaterials and nano-composites, their mechanical,
electrical, optical, magnetic properties; Nanomaterials versus bulk materials.

UNIT II THERMODYNAMICS & KINETICS OF NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS 9

Size and interface/interphase effects, interfacial thermodynamics, phase diagrams, diffusivity, grain
growth, and thermal stability of nanomaterials.

UNIT III PROCESSING 9

Bottom-up and top-down approaches for the synthesis of nanomaterials, mechanical alloying,
chemical routes, severe plastic deformation, and electrical wire explosion technique.

UNIT IV STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS 9

Principles of emerging nanoscale X-ray techniques such as small angle X-ray scattering and X-ray
absorption fine structure (XAFS), electron and neutron diffraction techniques and their application to
nanomaterials; SPM, Nanoindentation, Grain size, phase formation, texture, stress analysis

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of nanoparticles, quantum dots, nanotubes, nanowires, nanocoatings; applications in
electronic, electrical and medical industries
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1:Evaluate nanomaterials and understand the different types of nanomaterials
CO2:Recognise the effects of dimensionality of materials on the properties
CO3:Process different nanomaterials and use them in engineering applications
CO4:Use appropriate techniques for characterising nanomaterials
CO5:Identify and use different nanomaterials for applications in different engineering fields.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2nd edition, 2007.
2. Carl C. Koch (ed.), NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS, Processing, Properties and Potential
Applications, NOYES PUBLICATIONS, Norwich, New York, U.S.A.

REFERENCES:
1. Poole C.P, and Owens F.J., Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley 2003

325
 2. Nalwa H.S., Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, American Scientific
Publishers 2004
3. Zehetbauer M.J. and Zhu Y.T., Bulk Nanostructured Materials, Wiley 2008
4. Wang Z.L., Characterization of Nanophase Materials, Wiley 2000
5. Gutkin Y., Ovid’ko I.A. and Gutkin M., Plastic Deformation in Nanocrystalline Materials,
Springer 2004
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.7 2.2 2 1.8 2 1.3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMR352 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To knowledge on fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
 To obtain the knowledge in hydraulic actuators and control components
 To understand the basics in hydraulic circuits and systems
 To obtain the knowledge in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
 To apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting

UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINICIPLES AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS 9

Introduction to Fluid power – Advantages and Applications – Fluid power systems – Types of fluids
- Properties of fluids and selection – Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law – Principles of flow - Friction
loss – Work, Power and Torque Problems, Sources of Hydraulic power : Pumping Theory – Pump
Classification – Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages, Performance,
Selection criteria of Linear and Rotary – Fixed and Variable displacement pumps – Problems.

UNIT II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND CONTROL COMPONENTS 9

Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Application, Hydraulic cushioning –
Hydraulic motors - Control Components : Direction Control, Flow control and pressure control valves
– Types, Construction and Operation – Servo and Proportional valves – Applications – Accessories
: Reservoirs, Pressure Switches – Applications – Fluid Power ANSI Symbols – Problems.

UNIT III HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS 9

Accumulators, Intensifiers, Industrial hydraulic circuits – Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double
Pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-Safe,
Speed Control, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical hydraulic servo
systems.

326
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRO PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9
Properties of air – Perfect Gas Laws – Compressor – Filters, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air
control Valves, Quick Exhaust Valves, Pneumatic actuators, Design of Pneumatic circuit – Cascade
method – Electro Pneumatic System – Elements – Ladder diagram – Problems, Introduction to
fluidics and pneumatic logic circuits

UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9

Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and Pneumatic
systems, Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface grinding, Press and
Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for Pick and Place applications and tool handling
in CNC Machine tools – Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Analyze the methods in fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
CO 2: Recognize the concepts in hydraulic actuators and control components
CO 3: Obtain the knowledge in basics of hydraulic circuits and systems
CO 4: Know about the basics concept in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
CO 5: Apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting hydraulic and pneumatics

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & PSOs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
Average
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

TEXT BOOKS
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. James A. Sullivan, “Fluid Power Theory and Applications”, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall,
1997.
REFERENCES
1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”. Chand & Co, 2006.
2. Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McG Raw Hill,
2001.
3. Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGRaw Hill,
2007.
4. Dudley, A. Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987
5. Srinivasan. R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”, Vijay Nicole Imprints, 2008
6. Joshi.P, Pneumatic Control”, Wiley India, 2008.
7. Jagadeesha T, “Pneumatics Concepts, Design and Applications “, Universities Press, 2015.

327
OMR353 SENSORS LT PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the various types of sensors, transducers, sensor output signal types, calibration
techniques, formulation of system equation and its characteristics.
 To understand basic working principle, construction, Application and characteristics of
displacement, speed and ranging sensors.
 To understand and analyze the working principle, construction, application and
characteristics of force, magnetic and heading sensors.
 To learn and analyze the working principle, construction, application and characteristics of
optical, pressure, temperature and other sensors.
 To familiarize students with different signal conditioning circuits design and data acquisition
system.

UNIT I SENSOR CLASSIFICATION, CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNAL TYPES 9

Basics of Measurement – Classification of Errors – Error Analysis – Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Transducers – Performance Measures of Sensors – Classification of Sensors –
Sensor Calibration Techniques – Sensor Outputs - Signal Types - Analog and Digital Signals, PWM
and PPM.

UNIT II DISPLACEMENT, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9

Displacement Sensors – Brush Encoders - Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical, Magnetic,
Inductive, Capacitive, LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – Range Sensors -
Ultrasonic Ranging - Reflective Beacons - Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR) – GPS - RF Beacons.

UNIT III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 9

Strain Gage – Types, Working, Advantage, Limitation, and Applications: Load Measurement – Force
and Torque Measurement - Magnetic Sensors – Types, Principle, Advantage, Limitation, and
Applications - Magneto Resistive – Hall Effect, Eddy Current Sensor - Heading Sensors – Compass,
Gyroscope and Inclinometers.

UNIT IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE AND OTHER SENSORS 9

Photo Conductive Cell, Photo Voltaic, Photo Resistive, LDR – Fiber Optic Sensors – Pressure –
Diaphragm – Bellows - Piezoelectric - Piezo-resistive - Acoustic, Temperature – IC, Thermistor, RTD,
Thermocouple – Non Contact Sensor - Chemical Sensors - MEMS Sensors - Smart Sensors.

UNIT V SIGNAL CONDITIONING 9

Need for Signal Conditioning – Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Bridges for Measurement - DC
and AC Signal Conditioning - Voltage, Current, Power and Instrumentation Amplifiers – Filter and
Isolation Circuits – Fundamentals of Data Acquisition System
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand various sensor effects, sensor characteristics, signal types, calibration
methods and obtain transfer function and empirical relation of sensors. They can also
analyze the densor response.
CO2: Analyze and select suitable sensor for displacement, proximity and range measurement.

328
CO3: Analyze and select suitable sensor for force, magnetic field, speed, position and direction
measurement.
CO4: Analyze and Select suitable sensor for light detection, pressure and temperature
measurement and also familiar with other miniaturized smart sensors.
CO5: Select and design suitable signal conditioning circuit with proper compensation and
linearizing element based on sensor output signal.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 2 0. 0. 0.8 0.8 2 3 2 1
Average 8 8
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.

ORA352 CONCEPTS IN MOBILE ROBOTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce mobile robotic technology and its types in detail.
 To learn the kinematics of wheeled and legged robot.
 To familiarize the intelligence into the mobile robots using various sensors.
 To acquaint the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
 To aware the collaborative mobile robotics in task planning, navigation and intelligence.

329
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE ROBOTICS 9
Introduction – Locomotion of the Robots – Key Issues on Locomotion – Legged Mobile Roots –
Configurations and Stability – Wheeled Mobile Robots – Design Space and Mobility Issues –
Unmanned Aerial and Underwater Vehicles

UNIT II KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic Models – Representation of Robot – Forward Kinematics – Wheel and Robot
Constraints – Degree of Mobility and Steerability – Manoeuvrability – Workspace – Degrees of
Freedom – Path and Trajectory Considerations – Motion Controls - Holonomic Robots

UNIT III PERCEPTION 9

Sensor for Mobile Robots – Classification and Performance Characterization – Wheel/Motor
Sensors – Heading Sensors - Ground-Based Beacons - Active Ranging - Motion/Speed Sensors
– Camera - Visual Appearance based Feature Extraction.

UNIT IV LOCALIZATION 9
Localization Based Navigation Versus Programmed Solutions - Map Representation -
Continuous Representations - Decomposition Strategies - Probabilistic Map-Based Localization
- Landmark-Based Navigation - Globally Unique Localization - Positioning Beacon Systems -
Route-Based Localization - Autonomous Map Building - Simultaneous Localization and Mapping
(SLAM).

UNIT V PLANNING, NAVIGATION AND COLLABORATIVE ROBOTS 9

Introduction - Competences for Navigation: Planning and Reacting - Path Planning - Obstacle
Avoidance - Navigation Architectures - Control Localization - Techniques for Decomposition -
Case Studies – Collaborative Robots – Swarm Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Evaluate the appropriate mobile robots for the desired application.
CO2: Create the kinematics for given wheeled and legged robot.
CO3:Analyse the sensors for the intelligence of mobile robotics.
CO4: Create the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
CO5: Create the collaborative mobile robotics for planning, navigation and intelligence for desired
applications.

TEXTBOOK
1. Roland Siegwart and [Link], “Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots” MIT
Press, Cambridge, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, TeppeiTsujita, “Humanoid Robots: Modelling and
Control”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2018
2. MohantaJagadish Chandra, “Introduction to Mobile Robots Navigation”, LAP Lambert
Academic Publishing, 2015.
3. Peter Corke, “Robotics, Vision and Control”, Springer, 2017.
4. Ulrich Nehmzow, “Mobile Robotics: A Practical Introduction”, Springer, 2003.

330
 5. Xiao Qi Chen, Y.Q. Chen and J.G. Chase, “Mobile Robots - State of the Art in Land, Sea,
Air, and Collaborative Missions”, Intec Press, 2009.
6. Alonzo Kelly, Mobile Robotics: Mathematics, Models, and Methods, Cambridge University
Press, 2013, ISBN: 978-1107031159.

MV3501 MARINE PROPULSION LT PC

3 0 03
COOURSE OBJECTIVES:

 To impart knowledge on basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements

 To educate them on basic layout and propulsion equipment’s
 To impart basic knowledge on performance of the ship
 To impart basic knowledge on Ship propeller and its types
 To impart knowledge on ship rudder and its types

UNIT I BASICS SHIP PROPULSION SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENTS 9

law of floatation - Basics principle of propulsion- Earlier methods of propulsion- ship propulsion
machinery- boiler, Marine steam engine, diesel engine, ship power transmission system, ship
dynamic structure, Marine propulsion equipment - shaft tunnel, Intermediate shaft and bearing, stern
tube, stern tube sealing etc. degree of freedom, Modern propelling methods- water jet propulsion ,
screw propulsion.

UNIT II SHIPS MOVEMENTS AND SHIP STABILIZATION 9

Thrust augmented devices, Ship hull, modern ship propulsion design, bow thruster – Advantages,
various methods to stabilize the ship- passive and active stabilizer, fin stabilizer, bilge keel -
stabilizing and securing ship in port- effect of tides on ship – effect of river water and sea water
sailing vessel, Load line and load line of marking- draught markings.

UNIT III SHIPS SPEED AND ITS PERFORMANCE 9

Ship propulsion factors, factors affecting ships speed, various velocities of ship, hull drag, effects of
fouling on ships hull, ship wake, relation between powers, Fuel consumption of ship, cavitations -
effects of cavitation’s, ship turning radius.

UNIT IV BASICS OF PROPELLER 9

Propeller dimension, Propeller and its types – fixed propeller, control pitch propeller, kort nozzle,
ducted propeller, voith schneider, Parts of propeller, 3 blade - 5 blade - 6 blade propellers and its
advantages, propeller boss hub, crown nut, propeller skew, pitch of propeller - Thrust creation by
propeller. Propeller Material – Propeller balancing- static and dynamic.

UNIT V BASICS OF RUDDER 9

Rudder dimension, Area of rudder and its design, Rudder arrangements, Rudder fittings- Rudder
pintle - Rudder types- Balanced rudder, semi balanced rudder, Spade rudder, merits and demerits
of various types of rudders, Propeller and rudder interaction, Rudder stopper, movement of rudders,
Basic construction of Rudder
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

331
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Explain the basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
CO2: Familiarize with various components assisting ship stabilization.
CO3: Demonstrate the performance of the ship.
CO4: Classify the Propeller and its types, Materials etc.
CO5: Categories the Rudder and its types, design criteria of rudder.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. GP. Ghose, “Basic Ship propulsion”,2015
2. E.A. Stokoe “Reeds Ship construction for marine engineers”, Vol. 5,2010
3. E.A. Stokoe, “Reeds Naval architecture for the marine engineers”,4th Edition,2009

REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. DJ Eyers and GJ Bruse, “Ship Construction”, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. KJ Rawson and EC Tupper, “Basic Ship theory I” Vol. 1,5th Edition,2001.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
C PO PSO
O PO P P P P P P P P PO PO PO PS PS PS PS
1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Av 5/5 2/2 4/4 4/4 2/2 1/1 1/1 2/2 1/1 1/1 5/5 5/5
g =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMV351 MARINE MERCHANT VESSELS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to acquire
 Knowledge on basics of Hydrostatics
 Familiarization on types of merchant ships
 Knowledge on Shipbuilding Materials
 Knowledge on marine propeller and rudder
 Awareness on governing bodies in shipping industry

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HYDROSTATICS 9

Archimedes Principle- Laws of floatation– Meta centre – stability of floating and submerged bodies-
Density, relative density - Displacement –Pressure –centre of pressure.

UNIT II TYPES OF SHIP 10

General cargo ship - Refrigerated cargo ships - Container ships - Roll-on Roll-off ships – Oil tankers-
Bulk carriers - Liquefied Natural Gas carriers - Liquefied Petroleum Gascarriers - Chemical tankers -
Passenger ships
332
UNIT III SHIPBUILDING MATERIALS 9
Types of Steels used in Shipbuilding - High tensile steels, Corrosion resistant steels, Steel sandwich
panels, Steel castings, Steel forgings - Other shipbuilding materials, Aluminium alloys, Aluminium
alloy sandwich panels, Fire protection especially for Aluminium Alloys, Fiber Reinforced Composites

UNIT IV MARINE PROPELLER AND RUDDER 8

Types of rudder, construction of Rudder-Types of Propeller, Propeller material-Cavitations and its
effects on propeller

UNIT V GOVERNING BODIES FOR SHIPPING INDUSTRY 9

Role of IMO (International Maritime Organization), SOLAS (International Convention for the Safety
of Life at Sea), MARPOL (International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships ) ,
MLC (Maritime Labour Convention), STCW 2010 (International Convention on Standards of
Training, Certification and Watch keeping for Seafarers), Classification societies Administration
authorities
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students would
CO1:Acquire Knowledge on floatation of ships
CO2:Acquire Knowledge on features of various ships
CO3:Acquire Knowledge of Shipbuilding Materials
CO4:Acquire Knowledge to identify the different types of marine propeller and
rudder
CO5:Understand the Roles and responsibilities of governing bodies

TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link], “Ship Constructions”, Seventh Edition, Butter Worth Heinemann Publishing,
USA,2015
2. [Link] Taylor, “Merchant Ship Naval Architecture” I. Mar EST publications, 2006
3. EA Stokoe, E.A, “Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers”, Vol.4, Reeds Publications,2000

REFERENCES:
1. Kemp & Young “Ship Construction Sketches & Notes”, Butter Worth Heinemann
Publishing,USA, 2011
2. MARPOL Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2018
3. SOLAS Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2016

OMV352 ELEMENTS OF MARINE ENGINEERING LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to
 Understand the role of Marine machinery systems
 Be familiar with Marine propulsion machinery system
 Acquaint with Marine Auxiliary machinery system
 Have acquired basics of Marine Auxiliary boiler system
 Be aware of ship propellers and steering system

333
UNIT I ELEMENTARY KNOWLEDGE ON MARINE MACHINERY SYSTEMS 9
Marine Engineering Terminologies, Parts of Ship, Introduction to Machinery systems on board ships
– Propulsion Machinery system, Electricity Generator system, Steering gear system, Air
compressors & Air reservoirs, Fuel oil and Lubricating Oil Purifiers, Marine Boiler systems

UNIT II MARINE PROPULSION MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Two stroke Large Marine slow speed Diesel Engine – General Construction, Basic knowledge of Air
starting and reversing mechanism, Cylinder lubrication oil system, Main lubricating oil system and
cooling water system

UNIT III MARINE AUXILIARY MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Four stroke medium speed Diesel engine – General Construction, Inline, V-type arrangement of
engine, Difference between slow speed and medium speed engines – advantages, limitations and
applications

UNIT IV MARINE BOILER SYSTEM 9

Types of Boiler – Difference between Water tube boiler and Fire tube boiler, Need for boiler on board
ships, Uses of steam, Advantages of using steam as working medium, Boiler mountings and
accessories – importance of mountings, need for accessories

UNIT V SHIP PROPELLERS AND STEERING MECHANISM 9

Importance of Propellor and Steering gear, Types of propellers - Fixed pitch propellers, Controllable
pitch propellers, Water jet propellers, Steering gear systems - 2-Ram and 4 Ram steering gear,
Electric steering gear
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should able to,
CO1:Distinguish the role of various marine machinery systems
CO2:Relate the components of marine propulsion machinery system
CO3:Explain the importance of marine auxiliary machinery system
CO4:Acquire knowledge of marine boiler system
CO5:Understand the importance of ship propellors and steering system

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Taylor, “Introduction to Marine engineering”, Revised Second Edition, Butterworth
Heinemann, London, 2011
2. [Link], “Basic Marine Engineering”, Tenth Edition, G-Maritime Publications, Mumbai, 2011
3. [Link], “ Text book on Marine Engineering”, Eswar Press, Chennai, 2018

REFERENCES:
1. Alan [Link], “Introduction to Practical Marine Engineering, Volume 1&2, The Institute of
Marine Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2006
2. [Link], “Naval Architecture and Ship Construction”, The Institute of Marine Engineers
(India), Mumbai, 2015

334
CRA332 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of drone concepts
 To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of drone
 To impart the knowledge of an flying and operation of drone
 To know about the various applications of drone
 To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of
drones based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses- Drone
business through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and
employability

UNIT II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9

Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the
parts -Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of
autonomy- Drones configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program -
Install program on computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi
connection.

UNIT III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9

Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled environment-
Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage capacity -
Removable storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications

UNIT IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in delivering
mail, parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of transmission lines
and power distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing

UNIT V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9

The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization- Drone
license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in swarms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Know about a various type of drone technology, drone fabrication and programming.
CO2: Execute the suitable operating procedures for functioning a drone
CO3: Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Drones
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications
CO5: Createthe programs for various drones

335
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
COs/Pos&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

TEXT BOOKS
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and
Implementation”, 2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc, 2016

REFERENCES
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and ROVs”,
Que Publishing, 2016
2. Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for Security
and Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.

OGI352 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the knowledge on basic components, data preparation and implementation of
Geographical Information System.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS - Basic spatial concepts - Coordinate Systems - GIS and Information
Systems – Definitions – History of GIS - Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software, Data,
People, Methods – Proprietary and open source Software - Types of data – Spatial, Attribute
data- types of attributes – scales/ levels of measurements.

UNIT II SPATIAL DATA MODELS 9

Database Structures – Relational, Object Oriented – Entities – ER diagram - data models -
conceptual, logical and physical models - spatial data models – Raster Data Structures – Raster
Data Compression - Vector Data Structures - Raster vs Vector Models- TIN and GRID data models.

UNIT III DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner - Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing – Vector Data Input –
Digitizer – Datum Projection and reprojection -Coordinate Transformation – Topology - Adjacency,

336
connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non topological file formats - Attribute
Data linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data Integration

UNIT IV DATA QUALITY AND STANDARDS 9

Data quality - Basic aspects - completeness, logical consistency, positional accuracy, temporal
accuracy, thematic accuracy and lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –Interoperability - OGC -
Spatial Data Infrastructure

UNIT V DATA MANAGEMENT AND OUTPUT 9

Import/Export – Data Management functions- Raster to Vector and Vector to Raster Conversion -
Data Output - Map Compilation – Chart/Graphs – Multimedia – Enterprise Vs. Desktop GIS-
distributed GIS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Have basic idea about the fundamentals of GIS.
CO2 Understand the types of data models.
CO3 Get knowledge about data input and topology
CO4 Gain knowledge on data quality and standards
CO5 Understand data management functions and data output

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kang - Tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, McGraw Hill Publishing,
2nd Edition, 2011.
2. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction Geographical
Information Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Lo. C. P., Albert K.W. Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems,
Prentice-Hall India Publishers, 2006

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING: GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM

Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning

337
 PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
Engineering problems and 3 3 3 3 3
innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OAI352 AGRICULTURE ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the importance of Agri-business management, its characteristics and principles
 To impart knowledge on the functional areas of Agri-business like Marketing management,
Product pricing methods and Market potential assessment.

UNIT I ENTREPRENEURIAL ENVIRONMENT IN INDIAN CONTEXT 9

Entrepreneur Development(ED): Concept of entrepreneur and entrepreneurship assessing overall
business environment in Indian economy- Entrepreneurial and managerial characteristics-
Entrepreneurship development programmers (EDP)-Generation incubation and commercialization
of ideas and innovations- Motivation and entrepreneurship development- Globalization and the
emerging business entrepreneurial environment.

UNIT II AGRIPRNEURSHIP IN GLOBAL ARENA: LEGAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Importance of agribusiness in Indian economy - International trade-WTO agreements- Provisions
related to agreements in agricultural and food commodities - Agreements on Agriculture (AOA)-
Domestic supply, market access, export subsidies agreements on sanitary and phyto-sanitary (SPS)
measures, Trade related intellectual property rights (TRIPS).

UNIT III ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT: FINANCIAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Entrepreneurship - Essence of managerial Knowledge -Management functions- Planning-
organizing-Directing-Motivation-ordering-leading-supervision- communication and control-
Understanding Financial Aspects of Business - Importance of financial statements-liquidity ratios-
leverage ratios, coverage ratios-turnover ratios-Profitability ratios. Agro-based industries-Project-
Project cycle-Project appraisal and evaluation techniques-undiscounted measures-Payback period-
proceeds per rupee of outlay, Discounted measures-Net Present Value (NPV)-Benefit-Cost
Ratio(BCR)-Internal Rate of Return(IRR)-Net benefit investment ratio(N/K ratio)-sensitivity analysis.

UNIT IV ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES: ECONOMIC GROWTH

PERSPECTIVE 9
Managing an enterprise: Importance of planning, budgeting, monitoring evaluation and follow-up
managing competition. Role of ED in economic development of a country- Overview of Indian social,
political system and their implications for decision making by individual entrepreneurs- Economic
system and its implication for decision making by individual entrepreneurs.

338
UNITV ENTREPRENEURIAL PROMOTION MEASURES AND GOVERNMENT
SUPPORT 9
Social responsibility of business. Morals and ethics in enterprise management- SWOT analysis-
Government schemes and incentives for promotions of entrepreneurship. Government policy on
small and medium enterprises (SMEs)/SSIs/MSME sectors- Venture capital (VC), contract framing
(CF) and Joint Venture (JV), public-private
partnerships (PPP) - overview of agricultural engineering industry, characteristics of Indian farm
machinery industry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1:Judge about agricultural finance, banking and cooperation
CO2:Evaluate basic concepts, principles and functions of financial management
CO3:Improve the skills on basic banking and insurance schemes available to customers
CO4:Analyze various financial data for efficient farm management
CO5:Identify the financial institutions
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph L. Massie, 1995, “Essentials of Management”, prentice Hall of India Pvt limited, New
Delhi
2. Khanka S, 1999, Entrepreneurial Development, S, Chand and Co, New Delhi
3. Mohanty S K, 2007, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi.
REFERENCES
1. Harih S B, Conner U J and Schwab G D, 1981, Management of the Farm Business, Prentice
Hall Inc, New Jersey
2. Omri Ralins, N.1980, Introduction to Agricultural: Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
3. Gittenger Price, 1989, Economic Analysis of Agricultural project, John Hopkins University,
Press, London.
4. Thomas W Zimmer and Norman M Scarborough, 1996, Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey.
5. Mar J Dollinger, 1999, Entrepreneurship strategies and resources, Prentice –Hall, Upper Saddal
Rover, New Jersey.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall
correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 1 1 2 1 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex
1 1 2 1 1 1
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 1 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO8 Ethics 1 2 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 1 2 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 1 1 1 2 1

339
 PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 1 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving approach
1 2 1 1 1 1
in agriculture with proper knowledge
and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to formulate
solutions to real-world problems
pertaining to 1 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity using
modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 1 2 1
linkage.
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OEN352 BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The identification of different aspects of biological diversity and conservation
techniques.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Concept of Species, Variation; Introduction to Major Plant Groups; Evolutionary relationships
between Plant Groups; Nomenclature and History of plant taxonomy; Systems of Classification and
their Application; Study of Plant Groups; Study of Identification Characters; Study of important
families of Angiosperms; Plant Diversity Application.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL DIVERSITY AND TAXONOMY 9

Principles and Rules of Taxonomy; ICZN Rules, Animal Study Techniques; Concepts of Taxon,
Categories, Holotype, Paratype, Topotype etc; Classification of Animal kingdom, Invertebrates,
Vertebrates, Evolutionary relationships between Animal Groups.

UNIT III MICROBIAL DIVERSITY 9

Microbes and Earth History, Magnitude, Occurrence and Distribution. Concept of Species, Criteria
for Classification, Outline Classification of Microorganisms (Bacteria, Viruses and Protozoa); Criteria
for Classification and Identification of Fungi; Chemical and Biochemical Methods of Microbial
Diversity Analysis

UNIT IV MEGA DIVERSITY 9

Biodiversity Hot-spots, Floristic and Faunal Regions in India and World; IUCN Red List; Factors
affecting Diversity, Impact of Exotic Species and Human Disturbance on Diversity, Dispersal,
Diversity-Stability Relationship; Socio- economic Issues of Biodiversity; Sustainable Utilization of
Bioresources; National Movements and International Convention/Treaties on Biodiversity.

340
UNIT V CONSERVATIONS OF BIODIVERSITY 9
In-Situ Conservation- National parks, Wildlife sanctuaries, Biosphere reserves; Ex-situ
conservation- Gene bank, Cryopreservation, Tissue culture bank; Long term captive breeding,
Botanical gardens, Animal Translocation, Zoological Gardens; Concept of Keystone Species,
Endangered Species, Threatened Species, Rare Species, Extinct Species
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. A textbook of Botany: Angiosperms- Taxonomy, Anatomy, Economic Botany & Embryology. S.
Chand, Limited, Pandey, B. P. January 2001
2. Principles of Systematic Zoology, Mcgraw-Hill College, Ashlock, P.D., Latest Edition.
3. Microbiology, MacGraw Hill Companies Inc, Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P., and Klein D.A. (2022).
4. Microbiology, Pearson Publisher, Gerard J. Tortora, Berdell R. Funke, Christine [Link], 13th
Edition 2019

REFERENCES:
1. Ecological Census Technique: A Handbook, Cambridge University Press, Sutherland, W.
2. Encyclopedia of Biodiversity, Academic Press, Simonson Asher Levin.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of this course, students will:
CO1: An insight into the structure and function of diversity for ecosystem stability.
CO2: Understand the concept of animal diversity and taxonomy
CO3: Understand socio-economic issues pertaining to biodiversity
CO4: An understanding of biodiversity in community resource management.
CO5: Student can apply fundamental knowledge of biodiversity conservation to solve problems
associated with infrastructure development.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
[Link], 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

OEE353 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS LTPC

30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To impart knowledge on various representations of systems.
 To familiarize time response analysis of LTI systems and steady state error.
 To analyze the frequency responses and stability of the systems
 To analyze the stability of linear systems in frequency domain and time domain
341
 To develop linear models mainly state variable model and transfer function model

UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICALSYSTEMS 9

Definition & classification of system – terminology & structure of feedback control theory –
Analogous systems - Physical system representation by Differential equations – Block diagram
reduction–Signal flow graphs.

UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS & ROOTLOCUSTECHNIQUE 9

Standard test signals – Steady state error & error constants – Time Response of I and II order
system–Root locus–Rules for sketching root loci.

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Correlation between Time & Frequency response – Polar plots – Bode Plots – Determination of
Transfer Function from Bode plot.

UNIT IV STABILITY CONCEPTS & ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability – Necessary condition – RH criterion – Relative stability – Nyquist stability
criterion – Stability from Bode plot – Relative stability from Nyquist & Bode – Closed loop
frequency response.

UNITV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Concept of state – State Variable & State Model – State models for linear & continuous time
systems–Solution of state & output equation–controllability & observability.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Ability to
CO1: Design the basic mathematical model of physical System.
CO2: Analyze the time response analysis and techniques.
CO3: Analyze the transfer function from different plots.
CO4: Apply the stability concept in various criterion.
CO5: Assess the state models for linear and continuous Systems.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Farid Golnarghi , Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems Paper back McGraw Hill
Education, 2018.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, Pearson, 5th Edition2015.
3. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering (Multi Colour Edition), New Age
International, 2018.
REFERENCES
1. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. Control System Dynamics" by Robert Clark, Cambridge University Press, 1996 USA.
3. John J. D’Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis and Stuart N. Sheldon, Linear Control System
AnalysisandDesign, 5th Edition, CRC PRESS, 2003.
4. S. Palani, Control System Engineering, McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited, 2009.
5. Yaduvir Singh and [Link], Modern Control, Cengage Learning, First
Impression2010.

342
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3
3 3 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OEI354 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To educate on design of signal conditioning circuits for various applications.
 To Introduce signal transmission techniques and their design.
 Study of components used in data acquisition systems interface techniques
 To educate on the components used in distributed control systems
 To introduce the communication buses used in automation industries.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Automation overview, Requirement of automation systems, Architecture of Industrial Automation
system, Introduction of PLC and supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA). Industrial bus
systems : Modbus & Profibus

UNIT II AUTOMATION COMPONENTS 9

Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level, humidity and pH
measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC, power
MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.

UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Role of computers in measurement and control, Elements of computer aided measurement and
control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control hardware, process related
interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data transfer
techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data acquisition system,
Internet of things (IoT) for plant automation.

UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9

Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog digital input and output modules,
PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication and networking,
PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial automation, Application of
PLC to process control industries.

UNIT V DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9

Overview of DCS, DCS software configuration, DCS communication, DCS Supervisory Computer
Tasks, DCS integration with PLC and Computers, Features of DCS, Advantages of DCS.
343
 TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Industrial Data Networks.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Design a signal conditioning circuits for various application (L3).
CO2 Acquire a detail knowledge on data acquisition system interface and DCS system (L2).
CO3 Understand the basics and Importance of communication buses in applied automation
Engineering (L2).
CO4 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO5 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link], “Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd edition companies,2003.
2. C D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall India,8th Edition,
2006.
3. [Link], Newnes ,NewDelhi,“Industrial Control Handbook”,3rd Edition, 2000.

REFERENCES:
1. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Applications”,
5th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill, New York, 2016.
3. Krishna Kant, “Computer - Based Industrial Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2011.
4. Gary Dunning, Thomson Delmar,“Programmable Logic Controller”, CeneageLearning, 3 rd
Edition,2005.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]
5. [Link]

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 1
CO2 3 `1 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO3 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1

344
 CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2.25 2 2.6 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OCH353 ENERGY TECHNOLOGY L T PC

3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Units of energy, conversion factors, general classification of energy, world energy resources and
energy consumption, Indian energy resources and energy consumption, energy crisis, energy
alternatives, Renewable and non-renewable energy sources and their availability. Prospects of
Renewable energy sources

UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 8

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, thermal, hydel and nuclear
power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants, combustion processes,
fluidized bed combustion.

UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 10

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating,
solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power
generation, solar energy application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills,
types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Gravian rotor, wind electric power generation, wind power in
India, economics of wind farm, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal energy conversion,
tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.

UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 10

Biomass energy resources, thermo-chemical and biochemical methods of biomass conversion,
combustion, gasification, pyrolysis, biogas production, ethanol, fuel cells, alkaline fuel cell,
phosphoric acid fuel cell, molten carbonate fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cell, solid polymer electrolyte
fuel cell, magneto hydrodynamic power generation, energy storage routes like thermal energy
storage, chemical, mechanical storage and electrical storage.

UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation in chemical process plants, energy audit, energy saving in heat exchangers,
distillation columns, dryers, ovens and furnaces and boilers, steam economy in chemical plants,
energy conservation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Students will be able to describe the fundamentals and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources and their differences compared to fossil fuels.
CO2: Students will excel as professionals in the various fields of energy engineering
CO3: Compare different renewable energy technologies and choose the most appropriate based on
local conditions.
CO4: Explain the technological basis for harnessing renewable energy sources.
345
 CO5: Identify and critically evaluate current developments and emerging trends within the
field of renewable energy technologies and to develop in-depth technical
understanding of energy problems at an advanced level.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Bansal, N.K., Kleeman, M. and Meliss, M., Renewable Energy Sources and Conversion
Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.
4. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.

REFERENCES
1. Nejat Vezirog, Alternate Energy Sources, IT, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. El. Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2002.
3. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Enery - Thermal Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw hill, New
Delhi, 1981.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

Cour Program Outcomes
se Statements P P P P P P P P P P P P P PS PS
Outc O O O O O O O O O O O O S O2 O3
ome 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 O
s 0 1 2 1
CO1 Students will be able to 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
describe the
fundamentals and main
characteristics of
renewable energy
sources and their
differences compared to
fossil fuels.
CO2 Students will excel as 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
professionals in the
various fields of energy
engineering
CO3 Compare different 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
renewable energy
technologies and choose
the most appropriate
based on local
conditions.
CO4 Explain the technological 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
basis for harnessing
renewable energy
sources.
CO5 Identify and critically 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
evaluate current

346
 developments and
emerging trends within
the field of renewable
energy technologies and
to develop in-depth
technical understanding
of energy problems at an
advanced level
OVERALL CO 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial
(High) respectively

OCH354 SURFACE SCIENCE LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to analyze properties of a surfaces and correlate them to structure,
chemistry, and physics and surface modification technique.

UNIT I SURFACE STRUCTURE AND EXPERIMENTAL PROBES 9

Relevance of surface science to Chemical and Electrochemical Engineering, Heterogeneous
Catalysis and Nanoscience; Surface structure and reconstructions, absorbate structure, Band and
Vibrational structure, Importance of UHV techniques, Electronic probes and molecular beams,
Scanning probes and diffraction, Qualitative introduction to electronic and vibrational spectroscopy

UNIT II ADSORPTION, DYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS AT

SURFACES 9
Interactions at the surface, Physisorption, Chemisorption, Diffusion, dynamics and reactions of
atoms/molecules on surfaces, Generic reaction mechanism on surfaces, Adsorption isotherms,
Kinetics of adsorption, Use of temperature desorption methods

UNIT III LIQUID INTERFACES 9

Structure and Thermodynamics of liquid-solid interface, Self-assembled monolayers, Electrified
interfaces, Charge transfer at the liquid-solid interfaces, Photoelectrochemical processes, Gratzel
cells

UNIT IV HETEROGENEOUS CATALYSIS 9

Characterization of heterogeneous catalytic processes, Microscopic kinetics to catalysis, Overview
of important heterogeneous catalytic processes: Haber-Bosch, Fishcher-Tropsch and Automotive
catalysis, Role of promoters and poisons, Bimetallic surfaces, surface functionalization and clusters
in catalysis, Role of Sabatier principle in catalyst design, Rate oscillations and spatiotemporal pattern
formation

UNIT V EPITAXIAL GROWTH AND NANO SURFACE-STRUCTURES 9

Origin of surface forces, Role of stress and strain in epitaxial growth, Energetic and growth modes,
Nucleation theory, Nonequilibrium growth modes, MBE, CVD and ablation techniques, Catalytic

347
growth of nanotubes, Etching of surfaces, Formation of nanopillars and nanorods and its application
in photoelectrochemical processes, Polymer surfaces and biointerfaces.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
 Upon completion of this course, the students can understand, predict and design surface
properties based on surface structure. Students would understand the physics and chemistry behind
surface phenomena

TEXT BOOK:
1. K. W. Kolasinski, “Surface Science: Foundations of catalysis and nanoscience” II Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.

REFERENCE:
1. Gabor A. Somorjai and Yimin Li “Introduction to Surface Chemistry and catalysis”, II Edition John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 2010.

OFD354 FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOD ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to
 acquaint and equip the students with different techniques of measurement of engineering
properties.
 make the students understand the nature of food constituents in the design of processing
equipment

UNIT I 9
Engineering properties of food materials: physical, thermal, aerodynamic, mechanical, optical and
electromagnetic properties.

UNIT II 9
Drying and dehydration: Basic drying theory, heat and mass transfer in drying, drying rate curves,
calculation of drying times, dryer efficiencies; classification and selection of dryers; tray, vacuum,
osmotic, fluidized bed, pneumatic, rotary, tunnel, trough, bin, belt, microwave, IR, heat pump and
freeze dryers; dryers for liquid: Drum or roller dryer, spray dryer and foammat dryers

UNIT III 9
Size reduction: Benefits, classification, determination and designation of the fineness of ground
material, sieve/screen analysis, principle and mechanisms of comminution of food, Rittinger’s, Kick’s
and Bond’s equations, work index, energy utilization; Size reduction equipment: Principal types,
crushers (jaw crushers, gyratory, smooth roll), hammer mills and impactors, attrition mills, buhr mill,
tumbling mills, tumbling mills, ultra fine grinders, fluid jet pulverizer, colloid mill, cutting machines
(slicing, dicing, shredding, pulping)

UNIT IV 9
Mixing: theory of solids mixing, criteria of mixer effectiveness and mixing indices, rate of mixing,
theory of liquid mixing, power requirement for liquids mixing; Mixing equipment: Mixers for lo.w- or
medium-viscosity liquids (paddle agitators, impeller agitators, powder-liquid contacting devices,
348
other mixers), mixers for high viscosity liquids and pastes, mixers for dry powders and particulate
solids.

UNIT V 9
Mechanical Separations: Theory, centrifugation, liquid-liquid centrifugation, liquid-solid
centrifugation, clarifiers, desludging and decanting machine, Filtration: Theory of filtration, rate of
filtration, pressure drop during filtration, applications, constant-rate filtration and constant-pressure
filtration, derivation of equation; Filtration equipment; plate and frame filter press, rotary filters,
centrifugal filters and air filters, filter aids, Membrane separation: General considerations, materials
for membrane construction, ultra-filtration, microfiltration, concentration, polarization, processing
variables, membrane fouling, applications of ultra-filtration in food processing, reverse osmosis,
mode of operation, and applications; Membrane separation methods, demineralization by electro-
dialysis, gel filtration, ion exchange, per-evaporation and osmotic dehydration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 understand the importance of food polymers
CO2 understand the effect of various methods of processing on the structure and texture of food
materials
CO3 understand the interaction of food constituents with respect to thermal, electrical properties to
develop new technologies for processing and preservation.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.L. Earle. 2004. Unit Operations in Food Processing. The New Zealand Intitute of Food Science
& Technology, Nz. Warren L. McCabe, Julian Smith, Peter Harriott. 2004.
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 7th Ed. McGraw-Hill, Inc., NY, USA. Christie John
Geankoplis. 2003.
3. Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations), 4th Ed.
Prentice-Hall, NY, USA.
4. George D. Saravacos and Athanasios E. Kostaropoulos. 2002. Handbook of Food Processing
Equipment. Springer Science+Business Media, New York, USA.
5. J. F. Richardson, J. H. Harker and J. R. Backhurst. 2002. Coulson & Richardson's Chemical
Engineering, Vol. 2, Particle Technology and Separation Processes, 5th Ed.

OFD355 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY REGULATIONS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To characterize different type of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the
industry and food service establishments
 To help become skilled in systems for food safety surveillance
 To be aware of the regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
 To ensure processed food meets global standards

UNIT I 10
Introduction to food safety and security: Hygienic design of food plants and equipments, Food
Contaminants (Microbial, Chemical, Physical), Food Adulteration (Common adulterants), Food
Additives (functional role, safety issues), Food Packaging & labeling. Sanitation in warehousing,
349
storage, shipping, receiving, containers and packaging materials. Control of rats, rodents, mice,
birds, insects and microbes. Cleaning and Disinfection, ISO 22000 – Importance and Implementation

UNIT II 8
Food quality: Various Quality attributes of food, Instrumental, chemical and microbial Quality control.
Sensory evaluation of food and statistical analysis. Water quality and other utilities.

UNIT III 9
Critical Quality control point in different stages of production including raw materials and processing
materials. Food Quality and Quality control including the HACCP system. Food inspection and Food
Law, Risk assessment – microbial risk assessment, dose response and exposure response
modelling, risk management, implementation of food surveillance system to monitor food safety, risk
communication

UNIT IV 9
Indian and global regulations: FAO in India, Technical Cooperation programmes, Bio-security in
Food and Agriculture, World Health Organization (WHO), World Animal Health Organization (OIE),
International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC)

UNIT V 9
Codex Alimentarius Commission - Codex India – Role of Codex Contact point, National Codex
contact point (NCCP), National Codex Committee of India – ToR, Functions, Shadow Committees
etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Thorough Knowledge of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry and
food service establishments
CO2 Awareness on regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world

REFERENCES:
1. Handbook of food toxicology by S. S. Deshpande, 2002
2. The food safety information handbook by Cynthia A. Robert, 2009
3. Nutritional and safety aspects of food processing by Tannenbaum SR, Marcel Dekker Inc., New
York 1979
4. Microbiological safety of Food by Hobbs BC, 1973
5. Food Safety Handbook by Ronald H. Schmidt, Gary E. Rodrick, A John Wiley & Sons Publication,
2003

OPY353 NUTRACEUTICALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of Nutraceuticals and functional food, their chemical nature
and methods of extraction.
 To understand the role of Nutraceuticals and functional food in health and disease.

350
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SIGNIFICANCE 6
Introduction to Nutraceuticals and functional foods; importance, history, definition, classification, list
of functional foods and their benefits, Phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants,
animals and microbes.

UNIT II PHYTOCHEMICALS AS NUTRACEUTICALS 11

Phytoestrogens in plants; isoflavones; flavonols, polyphenols, tannins, saponins, lignans, lycopene,
chitin, caratenoids. Manufacturing practice of selected nutraceuticals such as lycopene,
isoflavonoids, glucosamine, phytosterols. Formulation of functional foods containing nutraceuticals -
stability, analytical and labelling issues.

UNIT III ASSESSMENT OF ANTIOXIDANT ACTIVITY 11

In vitro and in vivo methods for the assessment of antioxidant activity, Comparison of different in
vitro methods to evaluate the antioxidant, antioxidant mechanism, Prediction of the antioxidant
activity of natural phenolics from electrotopological state indices, Optimising phytochemical release
by process technology; Variation of Antioxidant Activity during technological treatments, new food
grade peptidases from plant sources.

UNIT IV ROLE IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 11

The health benefit of - Soy protein, Spirulina, Tea, Olive oil, plant sterols, Broccoli, omega3 fatty acid
and eicosanoids. Nutraceuticals and Functional foods in Gastrointestinal disorder, Cancer, CVD,
Diabetic Mellitus, HIV and Dental disease; Importance and function of probiotic, prebiotic and
synbiotic and their applications, Functional foods and immune competence; role and use in obesity
and nervous system disorders.

UNIT V SAFETY ISSUES 6

Health Claims, Adverse effects and toxicity of nutraceuticals, regulations and safety issues
International and national.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bisset, Normal Grainger and Max Wich H “Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals”, 2nd
Edition, CRC, 2001.
2. Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods: Robert Wildman, CRC, Publications. 2006
3. WEBB, PP, Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods Blackwell Publishing Ltd (United
Kingdom), 2006
4. Ikan, Raphael “Natural Products: A Laboratory Guide”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press /
Elsevier, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Asian Functional Foods (Nutraceutical Science and Technology) by John Shi (Editor),
Fereidoon Shahidi (Editor), Chi-Tang Ho (Editor), CRC Publications, Taylor & Francis,
2007
2. Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals in Cancer Prevention by Ronald Ross Watson
(Author), Blackwell Publishing, 2007
3. Marketing Nutrition: Soy, Functional Foods, Biotechnology, and Obesity by Brian
Wansink.
4. Functional foods: Concept to Product: Edited by G R Gibson and C M Williams, Wood
head Publ., 2000
351
 5. Hanson, James R. “Natural Products: The Secondary Metabolites”, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2003.

COURSE OUTCOME - NUTRACEUTICALS

CO 1 acquire knowledge about the Nutraceuticals and functional foods, their classification and
benefits.
CO 2 acquire knowledge of phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants,
animals and microbes
CO 3 attain the knowledge of the manufacturing practices of selected nutraceutical components
and formulation considerations of functional foods.
CO 4 distinguish the various In vitro and In vivo assessment of Antioxidant activity of
compounds from plant sources.
CO 5 gain information about the health benefits of various functional foods and nutraceuticals
in the prevention and treatment of various lifestyle diseases.
CO 6 Attain the knowledge of the regulatory and safety issues of nutraceuticals at national and
international level.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

NUTRACEUTICALS
Course PO1 PO2 PO PO PO PO6 PO PO8 PO PO10 PO11 PO12
outcome 3 4 5 7 9
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OTT354 BASICS OF DYEING AND PRINTING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn about the basics of Pretreatment, dyeing, printing and
machinery in textile processing.

UNIT I INTRODUCTIO 9
Impurities present in different fibres, Inspection of grey goods and lot preparation. Shearing,

UNIT II PRE TREATMENT 9

Desizing-Objective of Desizing- types of Desizing- Objective of Scouring- Mechanism of Scouring–
Degumming of Silk, Scouring of wool - Bio Scouring. Bleaching -Objective of Bleaching: Bleaching
mechanism of Hydrogen Peroxide, Hypo chlorites. Objective of Mercerizing - Physical and Chemical
changes of Mercerizing.

352
UNIT III DYEING 9
Dye - Affinity, Substantively, Reactivity, Exhaustion and Fixation. Classification of dyes. Direct dyes:
General properties, principles and method of application on cellulosic materials. Reactive dyes –
principles and method of application on cellulosic materials hot brand, cold brand.

UNIT IV PRINTING 9
Definition of printing – Difference between printing and dying- Classification thickeners –
Requirements to be good thickener, printing paste Preparation - different styles of printing.

UNIT V MACHINERIES 9
Fabric Processing - winch, jigger and soft flow machines. Beam dyeing machines: Printing -flat bed
screen - Rotary screen. Thermo transfer printing machinery. Garment dyeing machines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO1: Basics of grey fabric
CO2: Basics of pre treatment
CO3: Concept of Dyeing
CO4: Concept of Printing
CO5: Machinery in processing industry

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Trotman, E.R., Textile Scouring and Bleaching, Charless Griffins, Com. Ltd., London 1990.
2. Shenai V.A. “Technology of Textile Processing Vol. IV” 1998, Sevak Publications, Mumbai.

REFERENCES:
1. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, Charles Griffin & Co. Ltd.,
U.K., 1984, ISBN : 0 85264 165 6.
2. Dr. N N Mahapatra., “Textile dyeing”, Wood head publishing India, 2018
3. Mathews Kolanjikombil., ”Dyeing of Textile substrates III –Fibres, Yarns and Knitted fabrics”,
Wood head publishing India , 2021
4. Bleaching & Mercerizing – BTRA Silver Jubilee Monograph series
5. Chakraborty, J.N, "Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles", Wood head
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING:

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial
(High) respectively

Course Program Outcome

Outco Stateme PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
mes nt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Classific - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ation of
fibres
CO1
and
producti
on of
353
 natural
fibres
Regener - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ated and
CO2
synthetic
fibres
Yarn - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO3
spinning
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
Knitting - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
and
CO5
nonwove
n
Over - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
all
CO
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

FT3201 FIBRE SCIENCE L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To enable the students to learn about the types of fibre and its properties
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO TEXTILE FIBRES 9
Definition of various forms of textile fibres - staple fibre, filament, bicomponent fibres. Classification
of Natural and Man-made fibres, essential and desirable properties of Fibres. Production and
cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cotton, Silk, Wool -Physical and chemical structure of the above fibres.
UNIT II REGENERATED FIBRES 9
Production Sequence of Regenerated Cellulosic fibres: Viscose Rayon, Acetate rayon – High wet
modulus fibres: Modal and Lyocel ,Tencel

UNIT III SYNTHEITC FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Synthetic Fibers: polymer-Polyester, Nylon, Acrylic and polypropylene.
Mineral fibres: fibre glass ,carbon .Introduction to spin finishes and texturization

UNIT IV SPECIALITY FIBRES 9

Properties and end uses of high tenacity and high modulus fibres, high temperature and flame
retardant fibres, Chemical resistant fibres

UNIT V FUNCTIONAL SPECIALITY FIBRES 9

Properties and end uses : Fibres for medical application – Biodegradable fibres based on PLA
,Super absorbent fibres elastomeric fibres, ultra-fine fibres, electrospun nano fibres, metallic fibres
– Gold and Silver coated.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
CO1:Understand the process sequence of various fibres

354
CO2:Understand the properties of various fibres

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile Institute,
Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
2. Meredith R., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Methods of Investigation of Textiles”, Wiley
Publication, New York, 1989, ISBN: B00JCV6ZWU | ISBN-13:
3. Mukhopadhyay S. K., “Advances in Fibre Science”, The Textile Institute,1992, ISBN:
1870812379

REFERENCES:
1. Meredith R., “Mechanical Properties of Textile Fibres”, North Holland, Amsterdam, 1986, ISBN:
1114790699, ISBN-13: 9781114790698
2. Hearle J. W. S., Lomas B., and Cooke W. D., “Atlas of Fibre Fracture and Damage to Textiles”,
The Textile Institute, 2nd Edition, 1998, ISBN: 1855733196.
3. Raheel M. (ed.)., “Modern Textile Characterization Methods”, Marcel Dekker, 1995,
ISBN:0824794737
4. Mukhopadhyay. S. K., “The Structure and Properties of Typical Melt Spun Fibres”, Textile
Progress, Vol. 18, No. 4, Textile Institute, 1989, ISBN: 1870812115
5. Hearle J.W.S., “Polymers and Their Properties: Fundamentals of Structures and Mechanics Vol
1”, Ellis Horwood, England, 1982, ISBN: 047027302X | ISBN-13: 9780470273029 36

OTT355 GARMENT MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics of pattern making, cutting and sewing.
 To expose the students to various problems & remedies during garment manufacturing

UNIT I PATTERN MAKING, MARKER PLANNING, CUTTING 9

Anthropometry, specification sheet, pattern making – principles, basic pattern set drafting, grading,
marker planning, spreading & cutting

UNIT II TYPES OF SEAMS, STITCHES AND FUNCTIONS OF NEEDLES 9

Different types of seams and stitches; single needle lock stitch machine – mechanism and
accessories; needle – functions, special needles, needlepoint

UNIT III COMPONENTS AND TRIMS USED IN GARMENT 9

Sewing thread-construction, material, thread size, packages, accessories – labels, linings,
interlinings, wadding, lace, braid, elastic, hook and loop fastening, shoulder pads, eyelets and laces,
zip fasteners, buttons

UNIT IV GARMENT INSPECTION AND DIMENSIONAL CHANGES 9

Raw material, in process and final inspection; needle cutting; sewability of fabrics; strength properties
of apparel; dimensional changes in apparel due to laundering, dry-cleaning, steaming and pressing.

355
UNIT V GARMENT PRESSING, PACKING AND CARE LABELING 9
Garment pressing – categories and equipment, packing; care 356abelling of apparels

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand
CO1: Pattern making, marker planning, cutting
CO2: Types of seams, stitches and functions of needles
CO3: Components and trims used in garment
CO4: Garment inspection and dimensional changes
CO5: Garment pressing, packing and careabelling

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Carr H., and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Science Ltd.,
Oxford, 1994.
2. Gerry Cooklin, “Introduction to Clothing Manufacture” Blackwell Science Ltd., 1995. 64
3. Harrison.P.W Garment Dyeing, The Textile Institute Publication, Textile Progress, Vol .19
No.2,1988.

REFERENCES:
1. Winifred Aldrich., “Metric Pattern Cutting”, Blackwell Science Ltd., Oxford, 1994
2. Peggal H., “The Complete Dress Maker”, Marshall Caverdish, London, 1985
3. Jai Prakash and Gaur R.K., “Sewing Thread”, NITRA, 1994
4. Ruth Glock, Grace I. Kunz, “Apparel Manufacturing”, Dorling Kindersley Publishing Inc., New
Jersey, 1995.
5. Pradip [Link], “An Introduction to Quality Control for the Apparel Industry”, J.S.N.
Internationals, 1992.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
2 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
4 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
Avg 1.6 1.2 1 0.8 1.4 0.8 1.4 1 0.2 1.8 2.4 1 1.8 2.6 1 2.6
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

OPE353 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To educate about the health hazards and the safety measures to be followed in the industrial
environment.

356
 Describe industrial legislations (Factories Acts, Workmen's Compensation and other laws)
enacted for the protection of employees health at work settings
 Describe methods of prevention and control of Occupational Health diseases, accidents /
emergencies and other hazards

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for developing Environment, Health and Safety systems in work places - Accident Case
Studies - Status and relationship of Acts - Regulations and Codes of Practice - Role of trade union
safety representatives. International initiatives - Ergonomics and work place.

UNIT II OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE 9

Definition of the term occupational health and hygiene - Categories of health hazards - Exposure
pathways and human responses to hazardous and toxic substances - Advantages and limitations of
environmental monitoring and occupational exposure limits - Hierarchy of control measures for
occupational health risks - Role of personal protective equipment and the selection criteria - Effects
on humans - control methods and reduction strategies for noise, radiation and excessive stress.

UNIT III WORKPLACE SAFETY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 9

Features of Satisfactory and Safe design of work premises – good housekeeping - lighting and
colour, Ventilation and Heat Control – Electrical Safety – Fire Safety – Safe Systems of work for
manual handling operations – Machine guarding – Working at different levels – Process and System
Safety.

UNIT IV HAZARDS AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Safety appraisal - analysis and control techniques – plant safety inspection – Accident investigation
- Analysis and Reporting – Hazard and Risk Management Techniques – major accident hazard
control – Onsite and Offsite emergency Plans.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9

Concept of Environmental Health and Safety Management – Elements of Environmental Health and
Safety Management Policy and methods of its effective implementation and review – Elements of
Management Principles – Education and Training – Employee Participation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to:
CO1:Describe, with example, the common work-related diseases and accidents in occupational
setting
CO2:Name essential members of the Occupational Health team
CO3:What roles can a community health practitioners play in an Occupational setting to ensure the
protection, promotion and maintenance of the health of the employee

OPE354 UNIT OPERATIONS IN PETRO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart to the student basic knowledge on fluid mechanics, mechanical operations, heat
transfer operations and mass transfer operations.

357
UNIT I FLUID MECHANICS CONCEPTS
Fluid definition and classification of fluids, types of fluids, Rheological behaviour of fluids & Newton’s
Law of viscosity. Fluid statics-Pascal's law, Hydrostatic equilibrium, Barometric equation and
pressure measurement(problems),Basic equations of fluid flow - Continuity equation, Euler’s
equation and Bernoulli equation; Types of flow - laminar and turbulent; Reynolds experiment; Flow
through circular and non-circular conduits - Hagen Poiseuille equation (no derivation). Flow through
stagnant fluids – theory of Settling and Sedimentation – Equipment (cyclones, thickeners)
Conceptual numericals.

UNIT II FLOW MEASUREMENTS & MECHANICAL OPERATIONS

Different types of flow measuring devices (Orifice meter, Venturimeter, Rotameter) with derivations,
flow measurements –. Pumps – types of pumps (Centrifugal & Reciprocating pumps), Energy
calculations and characteristics of pumps. Size reduction–characteristics of comminute products,
sieve analysis, Properties and handling of particulate solids – characterization of solid particles,
average particle size, screen analysis- Conceptual numerical of differential and cumulative analysis.
Size reduction, crushing laws, working principle of ball mill. Filtration & types, filtration equipments
(plate and frame, rotary drum). Conceptual numericals.

UNIT III CONDUCTIVE & CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER

Modes of heat transfer; Conduction – steady state heat conduction through unilayer and multilayer
walls, cylinders; Insulation, critical thickness of insulation. Convection- Forced and Natural
convection, principles of heat transfer co-efficient, log mean temperature difference, individual and
overall heat transfer co-efficient, fouling factor; Condensation – film wise and drop wise (no
derivation). Heat transfer equipments – double pipe heat exchanger, shell and tube heat exchanger
(with working principle and construction with applications).

UNIT IV BASICS OF MASS TRANSFER

Diffusion-Fick’s law of diffusion. Types of diffusion. Steady state molecular diffusion in fluids at rest
and laminar flow (stagnant / unidirection and bi direction). Measurement of diffusivity, Mass transfer
coefficients and their correlations. Conceptual numerical.

UNIT V MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS

Basic concepts of Liquid-liquid extraction – equilibrium, stage type extractors (belt extraction and
basket extraction).Distillation – Methods of distillation, distillation of binary mixtures using McCabe
Thiele [Link]- drying operations, batch and continuous drying. Conceptual numerical.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
CO1:State and describe the nature and properties of the fluids.
CO2:Study the different flow measuring instruments, the principles of various size reductions,
conveying equipment’s, sedimentation and mixing tanks.
CO3:Comprehend the laws governing the heat and mass transfer operations to solve the problems.
CO4:Design the heat transfer equipment suitable for specific requirement.

TEXTBOOK(S)
1. Unit operations in Chemical Engineering Warren L. McCabe, Julian C. Smith & Peter
Harriot McGraw-Hill Education (India) Edition 2014
358
 2. Fluid Mechanics K L Kumar S Chand & Company Ltd 2008
3. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Badger W.I. and Banchero, J.T., Tata McGraw Hill
New York 1997

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Principles of Unit Operations Alan S Foust, L.A. Wenzel, C.W. Clump, L. Maus, and L.B.
Anderson John Wiley & Sons 2nd edition 2008
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, Vol I &II Chattopadhyaya Khanna Publishers,
Delhi-6 1996
3. Heat Transfer J P Holman McGraw Hill International Ed

OPT352 PLASTIC MATERIALS FOR ENGINEERS L T PC

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the advantages, disadvantages and general classification of plastic materials
 To know the manufacturing, sources, and applications of engineering thermoplastics
 Understand the basics as well as the advanced applications of various plastic materials in
the industry
 To understand the preparation methods of thermosetting materials
 Select suitable specialty plastics for different end applications

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTIC MATERIALS 9

Introduction to Plastics – Brief history of plastics, advantages and disadvantages, thermoplastic and
thermosetting behavior, amorphous polymers, crystalline polymers and cross-linked structures.
General purpose thermoplastics/ Commodity plastics: manufacture, structure, properties and
applications of polyethylene (PE), cross-linked PE, chlorinated PE, polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride-
compounding, formulation, polypropylene (PP)

UNIT II ENGINEERING THERMOPLASTICS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Engineering thermoplastics – Aliphatic polyamides: structure, properties, manufacture and
applications of Nylon 6, Nylon 66. Polyesters: manufacture, structure, properties and uses of PET,
PBT. Manufacture, structure, properties and uses of Polycarbonates, acetal resins, polyimides,
PMMA, polyphenylene oxide, thermoplastic polyurethane (PU)

UNIT III THERMOSETTING PLASTICS 9

Thermosetting Plastics – Manufacture, curing, moulding powder, laminates, properties and uses of
phenol formaldehyde resins, urea formaldehyde, melamine formaldehyde, unsaturated polyester
resin, epoxy resin, silicone resins, polyurethane resins.

UNIT IV MISCELLANEOUS PLASTICS FOR END APPLICATIONS 9

Miscellaneous plastics- Manufacture, properties and uses of polystyrene, HIPS, ABS, SAN,
poly(tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE), TFE and copolymers, PVDF, PVA, poly (vinyl acetate), poly (vinyl
carbazole), cellulose acetate, PEEK, High energy absorbing polymers, super absorbent polymers-
their synthesis, properties and applications

359
UNIT V PLASTICS MATERIALS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9
Sources, raw materials, methods of manufacturing, properties and applications of bio-based
polymers- poly lactic acid (PLA), poly hydroxy alkanoates (PHA), PBAT, bioplastics- bio-PE, bio-PP,
bio-PET, polymers for biomedical applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1:To study the importance, advantages and classification of plastic materials
CO2:Summarize the raw materials, sources, production, properties and applications of various
engineering thermoplastics
CO3:To understand the application of polyamides, polyesters and other engineering thermoplastics,
thermosetting resins
CO4:Know the manufacture, properties and uses of thermosetting resins based on polyester,
epoxy, silicone and PU
CO5:To understand the engineering applications of various polymers in miscellaneous areas and
applications of different biopolymers

REFERENCES
1. Marianne Gilbert (Ed.), Brydson’s Plastics Materials, 8th Edn., Elsevier (2017).
2. [Link], Plastics Materials, 7th Edn., Butterworth Heinemann (1999).
3. Manas Chanda, Salil K. Roy, Plastics Technology Handbook, 4th Edn., CRC press (2006).
4. A. Brent Strong, Plastics: Materials and Processing, 3rd Edn., Pearson Prentice Hall (2006).
5. Olagoke Olabisi, Kolapo Adewale (Eds.), Handbook of Thermoplastics 2nd Edn.,
CRC press (2016).
6. Charles A. Harper, Modern Plastics Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
7. H. Dominighaus, Plastics for Engineers, Hanser Publishers, Munich, 1988.

OPT353 PROPERTIES AND TESTING OF PLASTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the relevance of standards and specifications as well as the specimen
preparation for polymer testing.
 To study the mechanical properties and testing of polymer materials and their structural
property relationships.
 To understand the thermal properties of polymers and their testing methods.
 To gain knowledge on the electrical and optical properties of polymers and their testing
methods.
 To study about the environmental effects and prevent polymer degradation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING OF POLYMERS 9

Introduction- Standard organizations: BIS, ASTM, ISO, BS, DIN etc. Standards and specifications.
Importance of standards in the quality control of polymers and polymer products. Preparation of test
pieces, conditioning and test atmospheres. Tests on elastomers: processability parameters of
rubbers – plasticity, Mooney viscosity, scorch time, cure time, cure rate index, Processability tests
carried out on thermoplastics and thermosets: MFI, cup flow index, gel time, bulk density, bulk factor.

360
UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9
Mechanical properties: Tensile, compression, flexural, shear, tear strength, hardness, impact
strength, resilience, abrasion resistance, creep and stress relaxation, compression set, dynamic
fatigue, ageing properties, Basic concepts of stress and strain, short term tests: Viscoelastic behavior
(simple models: Kelvin model for creep and stress relaxation, Maxwell-Voigt model, strain recovery
and dynamic response), Effect of structure and composition on mechanical properties, Behavior of
reinforced polymers

UNIT III THERMAL RHEOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 9

Thermal properties: Transition temperatures, specific heat, thermal conductivity, co-efficient of
thermal expansion, heat deflection temperature, Vicat softening point, shrinkage, brittleness
temperature, thermal stability and flammability. Product testing: Plastic films, sheeting, pipes,
laminates, foams, containers, cables and tubes.

UNIT IV ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES 9

Electrical properties: volume and surface resistivity, dielectric strength, dielectric constant and power
factor, arc resistance, tracking resistance, dielectric behavior of polymers (dielectric co-efficient,
dielectric polarization), dissipation factor and its importance. Optical properties: transparency,
refractive index, haze, gloss, clarity, birefringence.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL AND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE 9

Environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR), water absorption, weathering, aging, ozone
resistance, permeability and adhesion. Tests for chemical resistance. Acids, alkalies, Flammability
tests- oxygen index test.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1:Understand the relevance of standards and specifications.
CO2:Summarize the various test methods for evaluating the mechanical properties of the polymers.
CO3:To know the thermal, electrical & optical properties of polymers.
CO4:Identify various techniques used for characterizing polymers.
CO5:Distinguish the processability tests used for thermoplastics, thermosets and elastomers.

REFERENCES
1. [Link], [Link], Handbook of analysis of synthetic polymers and plastics, Ellis Horwood
Limited Publisher 1977.
2. [Link], Experimental Methods in Polymer Chemistry, John Wiley and Sons 1980.
3. [Link], Plastic test methods, 2nd Edn., Harlond, Longman Scientific, 1981.
4. A. B. Mathur, I. S. Bharadwaj, Testing and Evaluation of Plastcis, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2003.
5. Vishu Shah, Handbook of Plastic Testing Technology, 3rd Edn., John Wiley & Sons 2007.
6. S. K. Nayak, S. N. Yadav, S. Mohanty, Fundamentals of Plastic Testing, Springer, 2010.

OEC353 VLSI DESIGN LT PC

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Understand the fundamentals of IC technology components and their characteristics.
● Understand combinational logic circuits and design principles.

361
● Understand sequential logic circuits and clocking strategies.
● Understand Interconnects and Memory Architecture.
● Understand the design of arithmetic building blocks

UNIT I MOS TRANSISTOR PRINCIPLES 9

MOS logic families (NMOS and CMOS), Ideal and Non Ideal IV Characteristics, CMOS devices.
MOS(FET) Transistor DC transfer Characteristics ,small signal analysis of MOSFET.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Propagation Delays, stick diagram, Layout diagrams, Examples of combinational logic design,
Elmore’s constant, Static Logic Gates, Dynamic Logic Gates, Pass Transistor Logic, Power
Dissipation.

UNIT III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS AND CLOCKING STRATEGIES 9

Static Latches and Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers, Pipelines, Timing classification of
Digital Systems, Synchronous Design, Self-Timed Circuit Design .

UNIT IV INTERCONNECT, MEMORY ARCHITECTURE 9

Interconnect Parameters – Capacitance, Resistance, and Inductance, Logic Implementation using
Programmable Devices (ROM, PLA, FPGA), Memory Architecture and Building Blocks.

UNIT V DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders-Ripple Carry Adder, Carry-Bypass Adder, Carry
Select Adder, Carry-Look Ahead Adder, Multipliers, Barrel Shifter, power and speed tradeoffs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the working principle and characteristics of MOSFET
CO2: Design Combinational Logic Circuits
CO3: Design Sequential Logic Circuits and Clocking systems
CO4: Understand Memory architecture and interconnects
CO5: Design of arithmetic building blocks.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Jan D Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
PHI, 2016.(Units II, III IV and V).
2. Neil H E Weste, Kamran Eshranghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System
Perspective,” Addison Wesley, 2009.( Units - I).

REFERENCES
1. D.A. Hodges and H.G. Jackson, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits,
International Student Edition, McGraw Hill 1983
2. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, "System-on-a-Chip Verification-Methodology and
Techniques", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Samiha Mourad and Yervant Zorian, “Principles of Testing Electronic Systems”, Wiley 2000
4. M. Bushnell and V. D. Agarwal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2000

362
 CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
O
1 1
3 2
3 3
2 4
2 5
1 6
3 7- 8- 9- 0- 1
2 2
3 1
3 2
3 3
2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
3 3 - 3 2 1 2 - - - - 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3 2
5 2 - 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2 2
C 3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3
- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation
1O

CBM370 WEARABLE DEVICES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement of wearable systems
 To understand the communication and security aspects in the wearable devices
 To know the applications of wearable devices in the field of medicine

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WEARABLE SYSTEMS AND SENSORS 9

Wearable Systems- Introduction, Need for Wearable Systems, Drawbacks of Conventional Systems
for Wearable Monitoring, Applications of Wearable Systems, Types of Wearable Systems,
Components of wearable Systems. Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement sensors,
Respiration activity sensor, Impedance plethysmography, Wearable ground reaction force sensor.

UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE

DEVICES 9
Wearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor, Technical challenges - sensor design,
signal acquisition, sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption, Rejection of irrelevant
information. Power Requirements- Solar cell, Vibration based, Thermal based, Human body as a
heat source for power generation, Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaic energy harvests, Thermopiles.

UNIT III WIRELESS HEALTH SYSTEMS 9

Need for wireless monitoring, Definition of Body area network, BAN and Healthcare, Technical
Challenges- System security and reliability, BAN Architecture – Introduction, Wireless
communication Techniques.

UNIT IV SMART TEXTILE 9

Introduction to smart textile- Passive smart textile, active smart textile. Fabrication Techniques-
Conductive Fibres, Treated Conductive Fibres, Conductive Fabrics, Conductive [Link] study-
smart fabric for monitoring biological parameters - ECG, respiration.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF WEARABLE SYSTEMS 9

Medical Diagnostics, Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients, Elderly
patients, neural recording, Gait analysis, Sports Medicine.

363
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Describe the concepts of wearable system.
CO2: Explain the energy harvestings in wearable device.
CO3: Use the concepts of BAN in health care.
CO4: Illustrate the concept of smart textile
CO5: Compare the various wearable devices in healthcare system
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Annalisa Bonfiglo and Danilo De Rossi, Wearable Monitoring Systems, Springer, 2011
2. Zhang and Yuan-Ting, Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems,Springer, 2013
3. Edward Sazonov and Micheal R Neuman, Wearable Sensors: Fundamentals,
Implementation and Applications, Elsevier, 2014
4. Mehmet R. Yuce and [Link], Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation applications,Pan Stanford Publishing [Link], Singapore, 2012

REFERENCES
1. Sandeep K.S, Gupta, Tridib Mukherjee and Krishna Kumar Venkatasubramanian, Body
Area Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
2. Guang-Zhong Yang, Body Sensor Networks, Springer, 2006.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CBM356 MEDICAL INFORMATICS LTPC

3 0 03
Preamble:
1. To study the applications of information technology in health care management.
2. This course provides knowledge on resources, devices, and methods required to optimize
the acquisition, storage, retrieval, and use of information in health and biomedicine.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Introduction - Structure of Medical Informatics –Internet and Medicine -Security issues , Computer
based medical information retrieval, Hospital management and information
system, Functional capabilities of a computerized HIS, Health Informatics – Medical
Informatics, Bioinformatics

364
UNIT II COMPUTERS IN CLINICAL LABORATORY AND MEDICAL IMAGING 9
Automated clinical laboratories-Automated methods in hematology, cytology and histology,
Intelligent Laboratory Information System - Computer assisted medical imaging- nuclear
medicine, ultrasound imaging, computed X-ray tomography, Radiation therapy and
planning, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance.

UNIT III COMPUTERISED PATIENT RECORD 9

Introduction - conventional patient record, Components and functionality of CPR, Development
tools, Intranet, CPR in Radiology- Application server provider, Clinical information system,
Computerized prescriptions for patients.

UNIT IV COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DECISION-MAKING 9

Neuro computers and Artificial Neural Networks application, Expert system-General model of CMD,
Computer–assisted decision support system-production rule system cognitive model, semantic
networks, decisions analysis inclinical medicine-computers in the care of critically ill patients,
Computer aids for the handicapped.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Virtual reality applications in medicine, Virtual endoscopy, Computer assisted surgery, Surgical
simulation, Telemedicine - Tele surgery, Computer assisted patient education and health- Medical
education and healthcare information, computer assisted instruction in medicine.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1:Explain the structure and functional capabilities of Hospital Information System.
CO2:Describe the need of computers in medical imaging and automated clinical laboratory.
CO3:Articulate the functioning of information storage and retrieval in computerized patient record
system.
CO4:Apply the suitable decision support system for automated clinical diagnosis.
CO5:Discuss the application of virtual reality and telehealth technology in medical industry.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd, 2003.
2. [Link], “Computers in medicine progress in medical informatics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill,2005

REFERENCES:
1. Kathryn J. Hannah, Marion J Ball, “Health Informatics”, 3rd Edition, Springer, 2006.
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

365
OCE354 BASICS OF INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the interdisciplinary approach of water management.
 To develop knowledge base and capacity building on IWRM.

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF IWRM 9

Facts about water - Definition – Key challenges - Paradigm shift - Water management Principles -
Social equity - Ecological sustainability – Economic efficiency - SDGs - World Water Forums.

UNIT II WATER USE SECTORS: IMPACTS AND SOLUTION 9

Water users: People, Agriculture, ecosystem and others - Impacts of the water use sectors on water
resources - Securing water for people, food production, ecosystems and other uses - IWRM
relevance in water resources management.

UNIT III WATER ECONOMICS 9

Economic characteristics of water good and services – Economic instruments – Private sector
involvement in water resources management - PPP experiences through case studies.

UNIT IV RECENT TREANDS IN WATER MANAGEMENT 9

River basin management - Ecosystem Regeneration – 5 Rs - WASH - Sustainable livelihood - Water
management in the context of climate change.

UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION OF IWRM 9

Barriers to implementing IWRM - Policy and legal framework - Bureaucratic reforms and inclusive
development - Institutional Transformation - Capacity building - Case studies on conceptual
framework of IWRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES
On completion of the course, the student will be able to apply appropriate management techniques
towards managing the water resources.
CO1 Describe the context and principles of IWRM; Compare the conventional and integrated ways
of water management.
CO2 Discuss on the different water uses; how it is impacted and ways to tackle these impacts.
CO3 Explain the economic aspects of water and choose the best economic option among the
alternatives; illustrate the pros and cons of PPP through case studies.
CO4 Illustrate the recent trends in water management.
CO5 Understand the implementation hitches and the institutional frameworks.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Cech Thomas V., Principles of water resources: history, development, management and
policy. John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. 2003.
2. Mollinga P. et al. “ Integrated Water Resources Management”, Water in South Asia Volume
I, Sage Publications, 2006.

REFERENCES
1. Technical Advisory Committee, Background Papers No: 1, 4 and 7, Stockholm, Sweden.
2002.
366
2. IWRM Guidelines at River Basin Level (UNESCO, 2008).
3. Tutorial on Basic Principles of Integrated Water Resources Management ,CAP-NET.
[Link]
.pdf
4. Pramod R. Bhave, 2011, Water Resources Systems, Narosa Publishers.
5. The 17 Goals, United Nations, [Link]

OBT355 BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003

UNIT I BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS 9

Fundamentals of biological process - Anaerobic process – Pretreatment methods in anaerobic
process – Aerobic process, Anoxic process, Aerobic and anaerobic digestion of organic wastes -
Factors affecting process efficiency - Solid state fermentation – Submerged fermentation – Batch
and continous fermentation

UNIT II WASTE BIOMASS AND ITS VALUE ADDITION 9

Types of waste biomass – Solid waste management - Nature of biomass feedstock – Biobased
economy/process – Value addition of waste biomass – Biotransformation of biomass –
Biotransformation of marine processing wastes – Direct extraction of biochemicals from biomass –
Plant biomass for industrial application

UNIT III BIOCONVERSION OF WASTES TO ENERGY 9

Perspective of biofuels from wastes - Bioethanol production – Biohydrogen Production – dark and
photofermentative process - Biobutanol production – Biogas and Biomethane production - Single
stage anaerobic digestion, Two stage anaerobic digestion - Biodiesel production - Enzymatic
hydrolysis technologies

UNIT IV CHEMICALS AND ENZYME PRODUCTION FROM WASTES 9

Production of lactic acid, succinic acid, citric acid – Biopolymer synthesis – Production of Amylases
- Lignocellulolytic enzymes - Pectinolytic enzymes - Proteases – Lipases

UNIT V BIOCOMPOSTING OF ORGANIC WASTES 9

Overview of composting process - Benefitis of composting, Role of microorganisms in composting -
Factors affecting the composting process - Waste Materials for Composting, Fundamentals of
composting process - Composting technologies, Composting systems – Nonreactor Composting,
Reactor composting - Compost Quality
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able
CO1:To learn the various methods biological treatment
CO2:To know the details of waste biomass and its value addition
CO3:To develop the bioconversion processes to convert wastes to energy
CO4:To synthesize the chemicals and enzyme from wastes
CO5:To produce the biocompost from wastes
CO6:To apply the theoretical knowledge for the development of value added products

367
TEXT BOOKS
1. Antoine P. T., (2017) “Biofuels from Food Waste Applications of Saccharification Using Fungal
Solid State Fermentation”, CRC press
2. Joseph C A., (2019)“Anaerobic Waste-Wastewater Treatment and Biogas Plants-A Practical
Handbook”, CRC Press,

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Palmiro P. and Oscar F.D’Urso, (2016) ‘Biotransformation of Agricultural
Waste and By-Products’,The Food, Feed, Fibre, Fuel (4F) Economy, Elsevier
2. Kaur Brar S., Gurpreet Singh D. and Carlos R.S., (Eds), (2014)‘Biotransformation of Waste
Biomass into High Value Biochemicals’, Springer.
3. Keikhosro K, Editor, (2015) ‘Lignocellulose-Based Bioproducts’, Springer.
4. John P, (2014) ‘Waste Management Practices-Municipal, Hazardous, and Industrial’, Second
Edition, CRC Press, 2014

OBT356 LIFESTYLE DISEASES L T P C

3 0 0 3
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Lifestyle diseases – Definition ; Risk factors – Eating, smoking, drinking, stress, physical activity,
illicit drug use ; Obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases, cancer; Prevention
– Diet and exercise.

UNIT II CANCER 9
Types - Lung cancer, Mouth cancer, Skin cancer, Cervical cancer, Carcinoma oesophagus; Causes
Tobacco usage, Diagnosis – Biomarkers, Treatment

UNIT III CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES 9

Coronoary atherosclerosis – Coronary artery disease; Causes -Fat and lipids, Alcohol abuse -–
Diagnosis - Electrocardiograph, echocardiograph, Treatment, Exercise and Cardiac rehabilitation

UNIT IV DIABETES AND OBESITY 9

Types of Diabetes mellitus; Blood glucose regulation; Complications of diabetes – Paediatric and
adolescent obesity – Weight control and BMI

UNIT V RESPIRATORY DISEASES 9

Chronic lung disease, Asthma, COPD; Causes - Breathing pattern (Nasal vs mouth), Smoking –
Diagnosis - Pulmonary function testing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link]&Meenal Kumar, “Guide to Prevention of Lifestyle Diseases”, Deep & Deep Publications,
2003
2. Gary Eggar et al, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2017

REFERENCES:
1. James M.R, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2013
2. Akira Miyazaki et al, “New Frontiers in Lifestyle-Related Disease”, Springer, 2008
368
OBT357 BIOTECHNOLOGY IN HEALTH CARE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to
 Create higher standard of knowledge on healthcare system and services
 Prioritize advanced technologies for the diagnosis and treatment of various diseases

UNIT I PUBLIC HEALTH 9

Definition and Concept of Public Health, Historical aspects of Public Health, Changing Concepts of
Public Health, Public Health versus Medical Care, Unique Features of Public Health, Determinants
of Health (Social, Economic, Cultural, Environmental, Education, Genetics, Food and Nutrition).
Indicators of health, Burden of disease, Role of different disciplines in Public Health.

UNIT II CLINICAL DISEASES 9

Communicable diseases: Chickenpox / Shingles, COVID-19, Tuberculosis, Hepatitis B, Hepatitis C,
HIV / AIDS, Influenza, Swine flu. Non Communicable diseases: Diabetes mellitus, atherosclerosis,
fatty liver, Obesity, Cancer

UNIT III VACCINOLOGY 9

History of Vaccinology, conventional approaches to vaccine development, live attenuated and killed
vaccines, adjuvants, quality control, preservation and monitoring of microorganisms in seed lot
systems. Instruments related to monitoring of temperature, sterilization, environment.

UNIT IV OUTPATIENT & IN PATIENT SERVICES 9

Radiotherapy, Nuclear medicine, surgical units, OT Medical units, G & Obs. units Pediatric, neonatal
units, Critical care units, Physical medicine & Rehabilitation, Neurology, Gastroenterology,
Endoscopy, Pulmonology, Cardiology.

UNIT V BASICS OF IMAGING MODALITIES 9

Diagnostic X-rays - Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography – Endoscopy – Thermography
– Different types of biotelemetry systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph [Link] and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, John
Wiley and sons, New York, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas M. [Link] of Biochemistry with clinical correlations. Wiley Liss
Publishers
3. The Vaccine Book (2nd Ed.), Rafi Ahmed, Roy M. Anderson et. [Link](s): Barry R.
Bloom, PaulHenri Lambert, Academic Press, 2016, Pages xxi-xxiv.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011
2. Burtis & Ashwood W.B. Tietz Textbook of Clinical chemistry. Saunders Company
3. Levine, M. M. (2004). New Generation Vaccines. New York: M. Dekker

369
 VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

CMG331 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
[Link] acquire the knowledge of the decision areas in finance.
2. To learn the various sources of Finance
3. To describe about capital budgeting and cost of capital.
4. To discuss on how to construct a robust capital structure and dividend policy
5. To develop an understanding of tools on Working Capital Management.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANGEMENT 9

Definition and Scope of Finance Functions - Objectives of Financial Management - Profit
Maximization and Wealth Maximization- Time Value of money- Risk and return concepts.

UNIT II SOURCES OF FINANCE 9

Long term sources of Finance -Equity Shares – Debentures - Preferred Stock – Features – Merits
and Demerits. Short term sources - Bank Sources, Trade Credit, Overdrafts, Commercial Papers,
Certificate of Deposits, Money market mutual funds etc

UNIT III INVESTMENT DECISIONS: 9

Investment Decisions: capital budgeting – Need and Importance – Techniques of Capital Budgeting
-– Payback -ARR – NPV – IRR –Profitability Index.
Cost of Capital - Cost of Specific Sources of Capital - Equity -Preferred Stock- Debt - Reserves -
Concept and measurement of cost of capital - Weighted Average Cost of Capital.

UNIT IV FINANCING AND DIVIDEND DECISION 9

Operating Leverage and Financial Leverage- EBIT-EPS analysis. Capital Structure – determinants
of Capital structure- Designing an Optimum capital structure .
Dividend policy - Aspects of dividend policy - practical consideration - forms of dividend policy - -
Determinants of Dividend Policy

UNIT V WORKING CAPITAL DECISION 9

Working Capital Management: Working Capital Management - concepts - importance -Determinants
of Working capital. Cash Management: Motives for holding cash – Objectives and Strategies of Cash
Management. Receivables Management: Objectives - Credit policies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. M.Y. Khan and [Link] Financial management, Text, Tata McGraw Hill
2. M. Pandey Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd

REFERENCES .
1. James C. Vanhorne –Fundamentals of Financial Management– PHI Learning,.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management,
3. Srivatsava, Mishra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press, 2011

370
CMG332 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENT L T PC
3 0 03

COURSEOBJECTIVES:
 Describe the investment environment in which investment decisions are taken.
 Explain how to Value bonds and equities
 Explain the various approaches to value securities
 Describe how to create efficient portfolios through diversification
 Discuss the mechanism of investor protection in India.

UNIT I THE INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT 9

The investment decision process, Types of Investments – Commodities, Real Estate and
FinancialAssets, the Indian securities market, the market participants and trading of securities,
securitymarket indices, sources of financial information, Concept of return and risk, Impact of Taxes
andInflationonreturn.

UNIT II FIXED INCOME SECURITIES 9

Bond features, types of bonds, estimating bond yields, Bond Valuation types of bond risks, defaultrisk
andcreditrating.

UNIT III APPROACHES TOEQUITYANALYSIS 9

Introduction to Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis and Efficient Market Hypothesis, dividend
capitalisation models, and price-earnings multiple approach to equity valuation.

UNIT IV PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES 9

Portfolio and Diversification, Portfolio Risk and Return; Mutual Funds; Introduction to Financial
Derivatives; Financial Derivatives Markets in India

UNIT V INVESTOR PROTECTIONRole of SEBI and stock exchanges in investor protection;

Investor grievances and their redressal system, insider trading, investors’ awareness andactivism
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Charles P. Jones, Gerald R. Jensen. Investments: analysis and management. Wiley, 14TH
Edition, 2019.
2. Chandra, Prasanna. Investment analysis and portfolio management. McGraw-hill education,
5th, Edition, 2017.
3. Rustagi, R. P. Investment Management Theory and Practice. Sultan Chand & Sons, 2021.
4. ZviBodie, Alex Kane, Alan J Marcus, PitabusMohanty, Investments, McGraw Hill Education
(India), 11 Edition(SIE), 2019

CMG333 BANKING, FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSURANCE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the Banking system in India
 Grasp how banks raise their sources and how they deploy it
 Understand the development in banking technology
 Understand the financial services in India
 Understand the insurance Industry in India
371
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM 9
Overview of Banking system – Structure – Functions –Banking system in India - Key Regulations in
Indian Banking sector –RBI. Relationship between Banker and Customer - Retail & Wholesale
Banking – types of Accounts - Opening and operation of Accounts.

UNIT II MANAGING BANK FUNDS/ PRODUCTS 9

Liquid Assets - Investment in securities - Advances - [Link] Instruments – Cheques, Bills
of Exchange & Promissory [Link] deposit schemes– Asset and Liability Management –
NPA’s – Current issues on NPA’s – M&A’s of banks into securities market

UNIT III DEVELOPMENT IN BANKING TECHNOLOGY 9

Payment system in India – paper based – e payment –electronic banking –plastic money – e-money
–forecasting of cash demand at ATM’s –The Information Technology Act, 2000 in India – RBI’s
Financial Sector Technology vision document – security threats in e-banking & RBI’s Initiative.

UNIT IV FINANCIAL SERVICES 9

Introduction – Need for Financial Services – Financial Services Market in India – NBFC –– Leasing
and Hire Purchase –– mutual funds. Venture Capital Financing –Bill discounting –factoring –
Merchant Banking

UNIT V INSURANCE 9
Insurance –Concept - Need - History of Insurance industry in India. Insurance Act, 1938 –IRDA –
Regulations – Life Insurance - Annuities and Unit Linked Policies - Lapse of the Policy – revival –
settlement of claim
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES :
1. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, “Management of Banking and Financial Services, Pearson,
Delhi, 2017.
2. Meera Sharma, “Management of Financial Institutions – with emphasis on Bank and Risk
Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010
3. Peter S. Rose and Sylvia C. and Hudgins, “Bank Management and Financial Services”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017

CMG334 INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN AND ITS APPLICATIONS LTPC

3 003

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN 9

Blockchain: The growth of blockchain technology - Distributed systems - The history of blockchain
and Bitcoin - Features of a blockchain - Types of blockchain, Consensus: Consensus mechanism -
Types of consensus mechanisms - Consensus in blockchain. Decentralization: Decentralization
using blockchain - Methods of decentralization - Routes to decentralization- Blockchain and full
ecosystem decentralization - Smart contracts - Decentralized Organizations- Platforms for
decentralization.

372
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOCURRENCY 9
Bitcoin – Digital Keys and Addresses – Transactions – Mining – Bitcoin Networks and Payments –
Wallets – Alternative Coins – Theoretical Limitations – Bitcoin limitations – Name coin – Prime coin
– Zcash – Smart Contracts – Ricardian Contracts- Deploying smart contracts on a blockchain

UNIT III ETHEREUM 9

Introduction - The Ethereum network - Components of the Ethereum ecosystem - Transactions and
messages - Ether cryptocurrency / tokens (ETC and ETH) - The Ethereum Virtual Machine (EVM),
Ethereum Development Environment: Test networks - Setting up a private net - Starting up the
private network

UNIT IV WEB3 AND HYPERLEDGE ` 9

Introduction to Web3 – Contract Deployment – POST Requests – Development Frameworks –
Hyperledger as a Protocol – The Reference Architecture – Hyperledger Fabric – Distributed Ledger
– Corda.

UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS 9

Kadena – Ripple – Rootstock – Quorum – Tendermint – Scalability – Privacy – Other Challenges –
Blockchain Research – Notable Projects – Miscellaneous Tools.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Imran. Bashir. Mastering block chain: Distributed Ledger Technology, Decentralization, and
Smart Contracts Explained. Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2018
2. Peter Borovykh , Blockchain Application in Finance, Blockchain Driven, 2nd Edition, 2018
3. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Blockchain Applications: A Hands On Approach”, VPT,
2017.

CMG335 FINTECH PERSONAL FINANCE AND PAYMENTS LT PC

3 0 03

UNIT I CURRENCY EXCHANGE AND PAYMENT 9

Understand the concept of Crypto currency- Bitcoin and Applications -Cryptocurrencies and Digital
Crypto Wallets -Types of Cryptocurrencies - Cryptocurrencies and Applications, block chain, Artificial
Intelligence, machine learning. Fintech users, Individual Payments, RTGS Systems, Immediate
Page 54 of 90 Payment Service (IMPS), Unified Payments Interface (UPI).Legal and Regulatory
Implications of Crypto currencies, Payment systems and their [Link] Payments Smart
Cards, Stored-Value Cards, EC Micropayments, Payment Gateways, Mobile Payments, Digital and
Virtual Currencies, Security, Ethical, Legal, Privacy, and Technology Issues

UNIT II DIGITAL FINANCE AND ALTERNATIVE FINANCE 9

A Brief History of Financial Innovation, Digitization of Financial Services, Crowd funding, Charity and
Equity,. Introduction to the concept of Initial Coin Offering

UNIT III INSURETECH 9

InsurTech Introduction , Business model disruption AI/ML in InsurTech ● IoT and InsurTech ,Risk
Modeling ,Fraud Detection Processing claims and Underwriting Innovations in Insurance Services
373
UNIT IV PEER TO PEER LENDING 9
P2P and Marketplace Lending, New Models and New Products in market place lending P2P
Infrastructure and technologies , Concept of Crowdfunding Crowdfunding Architecture and
Technology ,P2P and Crowdfunding unicorns and business models , SME/MSME Lending: Unique
opportunities and Challenges, Solutions and Innovations

UNIT V REGULATORY ISSUES 9

FinTech Regulations: Global Regulations and Domestic Regulations, Evolution of RegTech,
RegTech Ecosystem: Financial Institutions, RegTech Ecosystem: StartupsRegTech, Startups:
Challenges, RegTech Ecosystem: Regulators, Use of AI in regulation and Fraud detection

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Swanson Seth, Fintech for Beginners: Understanding and Utilizing the power of technology,
Createspace Independent Publishing Platform,2016.
2. Models AuTanda, Fintech Bigtech And Banks Digitalization and Its Impact On Banking
Business, Springer, 2019
3. Henning Diedrich, Ethereum: Blockchains, Digital Assets, Smart Contracts, Decentralized
Autonomous Organizations, Wildfire Publishing, 2016
4. Jacob William, FinTech:TheBeginner’s Guide to Financial Technology, Createspace
Independent Publishing Platform, 2016
5. IIBF, Digital Banking, Taxmann Publication, 2016
6. Jacob William, Financial Technology, Create space Independent Pub, 2016
7. Luke Sutton, Financial Technology: Bitcoin & Blockchain, Createspace Independent Pub,
2016

CMG336 INTRODUCTION TO FINTECH LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about history, importance and evolution of Fintech
 To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in payment industry
 To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in insurance industry
 To learn the Fintech developments around the world
 To know about the future of Fintech

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Fintech - Definition, History, concept, meaning, architecture, significance, Goals, key areas in
Fintech, Importance of Fintech, role of Fintech in economic development, opportunities and
challenges in Fintech, Evolution of Fintech in different sectors of the industry - Infrastructure, Banking
Industry, Startups and Emerging Markets, recent developments in FinTech, future prospects and
potential issues with Fintech.

UNIT II PAYMENT INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Payment Industry-Multichannel digital wallets, applications supporting wallets,
onboarding and KYC application, FinTech in Lending Industry- Formal lending, Informal lending, P2P
lending, POS lending, Online lending, Payday lending, Microfinance, Crowdfunding.

374
UNIT III INSURANCE INDUSTRY 9
FinTech in Wealth Management Industry-Financial Advice, Automated investing, Socially
responsible investing, Fractional Investing, Social Investing. FinTech in Insurance Industry- P2P
insurance, On-Demand Insurance, On-Demand Consultation, Customer engagement through Quote
to sell, policy servicing, Claims Management, Investment linked health insurance.

UNIT IV FINTECH AROUND THE GLOBE 9

FinTech developments - US, Europe and UK, Germany, Sweden, France, China, India, Africa,
Australia, New Zealand, Brazil and Middle East, Regulatory and Policy Assessment for Growth of
FinTech. FinTech as disruptors, Financial institutions collaborating with FinTech companies, The
new financial world.

UNIT V FUTURE OF FINTECH 9

How emerging technologies will change financial services, the future of financial services, banking
on innovation through data, why FinTech banks will rule the world, The FinTech Supermarket, Banks
partnering with FinTech start-ups, The rise of BankTech, Fintech impact on Retail Banking, A future
without money, Ethics in Fintech.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

REFERENCES
1. Arner D., Barbers J., Buckley R, The evolution of FinTech: a new post crisis paradigm,
University of New South Wales Research Series, 2015
2. Susanne Chishti, Janos Barberis, The FINTECH Book: The Financial Technology Handbook
for Investors, Entrepreneurs and Visionaries, Wiley Publications, 2016
3. Richard Hayen, FinTech: The Impact and Influence of Financial Technology on Banking and
the Finance Industry, 2016
4. Parag Y Arjunwadkar, FinTech: The Technology Driving Disruption in the financial service
industry CRC Press, 2018
5. Sanjay Phadke, Fintech Future : The Digital DNA of Finance Paperback .Sage Publications,
2020
6. Pranay Gupta, T. Mandy Tham, Fintech: The New DNA of Financial Services Paperback,
2018

VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP

CMG337 FOUNDATIONS OF ENTREPRENERUSHIP L TP C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the entrepreneurial quality and motivation of learners.
 To impart the entrepreneurial skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of entrepreneurship and management in Technology
oriented businessess.
 To empower the learners to run a Technology driven business efficiently and effectively

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Entrepreneurship- Definition, Need, Scope - Entrepreneurial Skill & Traits - Entrepreneur vs.
Intrapreneur; Classification of entrepreneurs, Types of entrepreneurs -Factors affecting
375
entrepreneurial development – Achievement Motivation – Contributions of Entreprenrship to
Economic Development.

UNIT II BUSINESS OWNERSHIP & ENVRIONMENT 9

Types of Business Ownership – Buiness Envrionemental Factors – Political-Economic-Sociological-
Technological-Environmental-Legal aspects – Human Reosurces Mobilisation-Basics of Managing
Finance- Esentials of Marketing Management - Production and Operations Planning – Systems
Management and Administration

UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Introduction to Technopreneurship - Definition, Need, Scope- Emerging Concepts- Principles -
Characterisitcis of a technopreneur - Impacts of Technopreneurship on Society – Economy- Job
Opportuinites in Technopreneurship - Recent trends

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Technology Entrepreneurship - Local, National and Global practices - Intrapreneurship and
Technology interactions, Networking of entrepreneurial activities – Launching - Managing
Technology based Product / Service entrepreneurship -– Success Stories of Technopreneurs - Case
Studies

UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS IN ENTREPRENERUSHIP 9

Effective Business Management Strategies For Franchising - Sub-Contracting- Leasing-
Technopreneurs – Agripreneurs - Netpreneurs- Portfolio entrepreneruship - NGO Entrepreneurship
– Recent Entrperneruial Develoments - Local – National – Global perspectives.
TOTAL45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the business ownership patterns and evnironment
CO 3 Understand the Job opportunites in Industries relating to Technopreneurship
CO 4 Learn about applications of tehnopreneurship and successful technopreneurs
CO 5 Acquaint with the recent and emerging trends in entrepreneruship

TEXT BOOKS:
1 [Link], “Entrepreneurial Development” [Link] & Co. Ltd. Ram Nagar New Delhi, 2021.
2 Donal F Kuratko Entrepreneurship (11th Edition) Theory, Process, Practice by Published 2019
by Cengage Learning,

REFERENCES :
1 Daniel Mankani. 2003. Technopreneurship: The successful Entrepreneur in the new
Economy. Prentice Hall
2 Edward Elgar. 2007. Entrepreneurship, Cooperation and the Firm: The Emergence and Survival
of High-Technology Ventures in Europe. Edi: Jan Ulijn, Dominique Drillon, and Frank Lasch.
Wiley Pub.
3 Lang, J. 2002, The High Tech Entrepreneur's Handbook, [Link].
4 David Sheff 2002, China Dawn: The Story of a Technology and Business Revolution,
5 HarperBusiness,[Link]
[Link]
376
6 JumpStart: A Technoprenuership Fable, Dennis Posadas, (Singapore: Pearson Prentice Hall,
2009
7 Basics of Technoprenuership: Module 1.1-1.2, Frederico Gonzales, President-PESO Inc; M.
Barcelon, UP
8 Journal articles pertaining to Entrepreneurship

CMG338 TEAM BUILDING & LEADERSHIP MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the Leadership qualities and motivation of learners.
 To impart the Leadership skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of Team Building in managing Technology oriented
businessess.
 To empower the learners to build robust teams for running and leading a business efficiently
and effectively

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGING TEAMS 9

Introduction to Team - Team Dynamics - Team Formation – Stages of Team Devlopment -
Enhancing teamwork within a group - Team Coaching - Team Decision Making - Virtual Teams - Self
Directed Work Teams (SDWTs) -Multicultural Teams.

UNIT II MANAGING AND DEVELOPING EFFECTIVE TEAMS 9

Team-based Organisations- Leadershp roles in team-based organisations - Offsite training and
team development - Experiential Learning - Coaching and Mentoring in team building - Building High-
Performance Teams - Building Credibility and Trust - Skills for Developing Others - Team Building
at the Top - Leadership in Teamwork Effectiveness.

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP 9

Introduction to Leadership - Leadership Myths – Characteristics of Leader, Follower and Situation -
Leadership Attributes - Personality Traits and Leadership- Intelligence Types and Leadership -
Power and Leadership - Delegation and Empowerment .

UNIT IV LEADERSHIP IN ORGANISATIONS 9

Leadership Styles – LMX Theory- Leadership Theory and Normative Decision Model - Situational
Leadership Model - Contingency Model and Path Goal Theory – Transactional and Transformational
Leadership - Charismatic Leadership - Role of Ethics and Values in Organisational Leadership.

UNIT V LEADERSHIP EFFECTIVENESS 9

Leadership Behaviour - Assessment of Leadership Behaviors - Destructive Leadership - Motivation
and Leadership - Managerial Incompetence and Derailment Conflict Management - Negotiation and
Leadership - Culture and Leadership - Global Leadership – Recent Trends in Leadership.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of managing teams for business.
CO 2 Understand developing effective teams for business management.
CO 3 Understand the fundamentals of leadership for running a business.
377
CO 4 Learn about the importance of leadership for business development.
CO 5 Acquaint with emerging trends in leadership effectiveness for entreprenerus.’’

REFERENCES :
1. Hughes, R.L., Ginnett, R.C., & Curphy, G.J., Leadership: Enhancing the lessons of
experience ,9th Ed, McGraw Hill Education, Chennai, India. (2019).
2. Katzenback, J.R., Smith, D.K., The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High Performance
Organisations, Harvard Business Review Press, (2015).
3. Haldar, U.K., Leadership and Team Building, Oxford University Press, (2010).
4. Daft, R.L., The Leadership Experience, Cengage, (2015).
5. Daniel Levi, Group Dynamics for Teams ,4th Ed, (2014), Sage Publications.
6. Dyer, W. G., Dyer, W. G., Jr., & Dyer, J. H..Team building: Proven strategies for improving
team performance, 5thed, Jossey-Bass, (2013).

CMG339 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the creativity skills among the learners
 To impart the knowledge of creative intelligence essential for entrepreneurs
 To know the applications of innovation in entprerenship.
 To develeop innovative business models for business.

UNIT I CREATIVITY 9
Creativity: Definition- Forms of Creativity-Essence, Elaborative and Expressive Creativities- Quality
of Creativity-Existential, Entrepreneurial and Empowerment Creativities – Creative Environment-
Creative Technology- - Creative Personality and Motivation.

UNIT II CREATIVE INTELLIGENCE 9

Creative Intelligence: Convergent thinking ability – Traits Congenial to creativity – Creativity Training-
-Criteria for evaluating Creativity-Credible Evaluation- Improving the quality of our creativity –
Creative Tools and Techniques - Blocks to creativity- fears and Disabilities- Strategies for
Unblocking- Designing Creativity Enabling Environment.

UNIT III INNOVATION 9

Innovation: Definition- Levels of Innovation- Incremental Vs Radical Innovation-Product Innovation
and Process- Technological, Organizational Innovation – Indicators- Characteristics of Innovation in
Different Sectors. Theories in Innovation and Creativity- Design Thinking and Innovation- Innovation
as Collective Change-Innovation as a system

UNIT IV INNOVATION AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Innovation and Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial Mindset , Motivations and Behaviours-
Opportunity Analysis and Decision Making- Industry Understanding - Entrepreneurial Opportunities-
Entrepreneurial Strategies – Technology Pull/Market Push – Product -Market fit

UNIT V INNOVATIVE BUSINESS MODELS 9

Innovative Business Models: Customer Discovery-Customer Segments-Prospect Theory and
Developing Value Propositions- Developing Business Models: Elements of Business Models –
378
Innovative Business Models: Elements, Designing Innovative Business Models- Responsible
Innovation and Creativity.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of creativity for developing Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the importance of creative inteligence for business growth
CO 3 Understand the advances through Innovation in Industries
CO 4 Learn about applications of innovation in building successful ventures
CO 5 Acquaint with developing innovative business models to run the business effecientlty and
effectively

Suggested Readings:
Creativity and Inovation in Entrepreneurship, Kankha, Sultan Chand
Pradip N Khandwalla, Lifelong Creativity, An Unending Quest, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, 4e, Pearson, 2018.
Vinnie Jauhari, Sudanshu Bhushan, Innovation Management, Oxford Higher Education, 2014.
Innovation Management, C.S.G. Krishnamacharyulu, R. Lalitha, Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.
A. Dale Timpe, Creativity, Jaico Publishing House, 2003.
Brian Clegg, Paul Birch, Creativity, Kogan Page, 2009.
Strategic Innovation: Building and Sustaining Innovative Organizations- Course Era, Raj Echambadi.

CMG340 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide basic knowledge of concepts, principles, tools and techniques of marketing for
entrepreneurs
 To provide an exposure to the students pertaining to the nature and Scope of marketing,
which they are expected to possess when they enter the industry as practitioners.
 To give them an understanding of fundamental premise underlying market driven strategies
and the basic philosophies and tools of marketing management for business owners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Market and Marketing – Concepts- Functions of Marketing - Importance of Marketing
- Marketing Orientations - Marketing Mix-The Traditional 4Ps - The Modern Components of the Mix
- The Additional 3Ps - Developing an Effective Marketing Mix.

UNIT II MARKETING ENVIRONMENT 9

Introduction - Environmental Scanning - Analysing the Organisation’s Micro Environment and Macro
Environment - Differences between Micro and Macro Environment – Techniques of Environment
Scanning - Marketing organization - Marketing Research and the Marketing Information System,
Types and Components.

UNIT III PRODUCT AND PRICING MANAGEMENT 9

Product- Meaning, Classification, Levels of Products – Product Life Cycle (PLC) - Product Strategies
- Product Mix - Packaging and Labelling - New Product Development - Brand and Branding -
Advantages and disadvantages of branding Pricing - Factors Affecting Price Decisions - Cost Based
379
Pricing - Value Based and Competition Based Pricing - Pricing Strategies - National and Global
Pricing.

UNIT IV PROMOTION AND DISTRIBTUION MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to Promotion – Marketing Channels- Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) -
Introduction to Advertising and Sales Promotion – Basics of Public Relations and Publicity - Personal
Selling - Process - Direct Marketing - Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning (STP)-Logistics
Management- Introduction to Retailing and Wholesaling.

UNIT V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management - CRM practices - Managing Customer
Loyalty and Development – Buyer-Seller Relationships- Buying Situations in Industrial / Business
Market - Buying Roles in Industrial Marketing - Factors that Influence Business - Services Marketing
- E-Marketing or Online Marketing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to :
CO1 Have the awareness of marketing management process
CO 2 Understand the marketing environment
CO 3 Acquaint about product and pricing strategies
CO 4 Knowledge of promotion and distribution in marketing management.
CO 5 Comprehend the contemporary marketing scenairos and offer solutions to marketing issues.

REFERENCES:
1. Marketing Management, Sherlekar S.A, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
2. Marketing Management , Philip Kortler and Kevin Lane Keller, PHI 15th Ed, 2015.
3 Marketing Management- An Indian perspective, Vijay Prakash Anand, Biztantra, Second edition,
2016.
4. Marketing Management Global Perspective, Indian Context, [Link] &
[Link], Macmillan Publishers India,5th edition, 2015.
5. Marketing Management, S.H.H. Kazmi, 2013, Excel Books India.
6. Marketing Management- text and Cases, Dr. [Link] & Dr. [Link] Nair, 17th edition, 2016.

CMG341 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts, structure and functions of human resource management for
entrepreneurs.
 To create an awareness of the roles, functions and functioning of human resource
department.
 To understand the methods and techniques followed by Human Resource Management
practitioners.

380
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HRM 9
Concept, Definition, Objectives- Nature and Scope of HRM - Evolution of HRM - HR Manager Roles-
Skills - Personnel Management Vs. HRM - Human Resource Policies - HR Accounting - HR Audit -
Challenges in HRM.

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

HR Planning - Definition - Factors- Tools - Methods and Techniques - Job analysis- Job rotation-
Job Description - Career Planning - Succession Planning - HRIS - Computer Applications in HR -
Recent Trends

UNIT III RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION 9

Sources of recruitment- Internal Vs. External - Domestic Vs. Global Sources -eRecruitment -
Selection Process- Selection techniques -eSelection- Interview Types- Employee Engagement.

UNIT IV TRAINING AND EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of Training - On-The-Job, Off-The-Job - Training Needs Analysis – Induction and Socialisation
Process - Employee Compensation - Wages and Salary Administration – Health and Social Security
Measures- Green HRM Practices

UNIT V CONTROLLING HUMAN RESOURCES 9

Performance Appraisal – Types - Methods - Collective Bargaining - Grievances Redressal Methods
– Employee Discipline – Promotion – Demotion - Transfer – Dismissal - Retrenchment - Union
Management Relationship - Recent Trends
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO 1 To understand the Evolution of HRM and Challenges faced by HR Managers
CO 2 To learn about the HR Planning Methods and practices.
CO 3 To acquaint about the Recruitment and Selection Techniques followed in Industries.
CO 4 To known about the methods of Training and Employee Development.
CO 5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling human resources in organisations.

REFERENCES
1) Gary Dessler and Biju Varkkey, Human Resource Management, 14e , Pearson, 2015.
2) Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning 15e, 2017.
3) David A. Decenzo, [Link], and Susan L. Verhulst, Human Resource
Management, Wiley, International Student Edition, 11th Edition, 2014
4) R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management, Pearson , 2015.
5) Luis [Link]-Mejia, David [Link], Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resource. PHI
Learning. 2012
6) John M. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management,12e, McGraw Hill Irwin,2013.
7) K. Aswathappa, Sadhna Dash , Human Resource Management - Text and Cases , 9th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2021.
8) Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012

381
CMG342 FINANCING NEW BUSINESS VENTURES LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the basics of business venture financing.
 To impart the knowledge essential for entrepreneurs for financing new ventures.
 To acquaint the learners with the sources of debt and quity financing.
 To empower the learners towards fund rasiing for new ventures effectively.

UNIT I ESSENTIALS OF NEW BUSINES VENTURE 9

Setting up new Business Ventures – Need - Scope - Franchising - Location Strategy, Registration
Process - State Directorate of Industries- Financing for New Ventures - Central and State
Government Agencies - Types of loans – Financial Institutions - SFC, IDBI, NSIC and SIDCO.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO VENTURE FINANCING 9

Venture Finance – Definition – Historic Background - Funding New Ventures- Need – Scope – Types
- Cost of Project - Means of Financing - Estimation of Working Capital - Requirement of funds – Mix
of Dent and Equity - Challenges and Opportunities.

UNIT III SOURCES OF DEBT FINANCING 9

Fund for Capital Assets - Term Loans - Leasing and Hire-Purchase - Money Market instruments –
Bonds, Corporate Papers – Preference Capital- Working Capital Management- Fund based Credit
Facilities - Cash Credit - Over Draft.

UNIT IV SOURCES OF EQUITY FINANCING 9

Own Capital, Unsecured Loan - Government Subsidies , Margin Money- Equity Funding - Private
Equity Fund- Schemes of Commercial banks - Angel Funding – Crowdfunding- Venture Capital.

UNIT V METHODS OF FUND RAISING FOR NEW VENTURES 9

Investor Decision Process - Identifying the appropriate investors- Targeting investors- Developing
Relationships with investors - Investor Selection Criteria- Company Creation- Raising Funds - Seed
Funding- VC Selection Criteria – Process- Methods- Recent Trends
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of starting a new business venture.
CO 2 Understand the basics of venture financing.
CO 3 Understand the sources of debt financing.
CO 4 Understanf the sources of equity financing.
CO 5 Acquaint with the methods of fund raising for new business ventures.

REFERENCES :
1) Principles of Corporate Finance by Brealey and Myers et al.,12TH ed, McGraw Hill Education
(India) Private Limited, 2018
2) Prasanna Chandra, Projects : Planning ,Analysis,Selection ,Financing,Implementation and
Review, McGraw Hilld Education India Pvt Ltd ,New Delhi , 2019.
3) Introduction to Project Finance. Andrew Fight,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006.

382
4) Metrick, Andrew; Yasuda, Ayako. Venture Capital And The Finance Of Innovation. Venture
Capital And The Finance Of Innovation, 2nd Edition, Andrew Metrick And Ayako Yasuda, Eds., John
Wiley And Sons, Inc, 2010.
5) Feld, Brad; Mendelson, Jason. Venture Deals. Wiley, 2011.
6) May, John; Simons, Cal. Every Business Needs An Angel: Getting The Money You Need To
Make Your Business Grow. Crown Business, 2001.
7) Gompers, Paul Alan; Lerner, Joshua. The Money Of Invention: How Venture Capital Creates
New Wealth. Harvard Business Press, 2001.
8) Camp, Justin J. Venture Capital Due Diligence: A Guide To Making Smart Investment
Choices And Increasing Your Portfolio Returns. John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
9) Byers, Thomas. Technology Ventures: From Idea To Enterprise. Mcgraw-Hill Higher
Education, 2014.
10) Lerner, Josh; Leamon, Ann; Hardymon, Felda. Venture Capital, Private Equity, And The
Financing Of Entrepreneurship. 2012.

VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

CMG343 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION L TPC

3 003

UNIT I (9)
1. Meaning, Nature and Scope of Public Administration
2. Importance of Public Administration
3. Evolution of Public Administration

UNIT II (9)
1. New Public Administration
2. New Public Management
3. Public and Private Administration

UNIT III (9)

1. Relationships with Political Science, History and Sociology
2. Classical Approach
3. Scientific Management Approach

UNIT IV (9)
1. Bureaucratic Approach: Max Weber
2. Human Relations Approach : Elton Mayo
3. Ecological Approach : Riggs

UNIT V (9)
1. Leadership: Leadership - Styles - Approaches
2. Communication: Communication Types - Process - Barriers
3. Decision Making: Decision Making - Types, Techniques and Processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

383
REFERENCEs:
1. Avasthi and Maheswari: Public Administration in India, Agra:Lakshmi Narain Agarwal,2013.
2. Ramesh K Arora: Indian Public Administration, New Delhi: Wishwa Prakashan, 2012.
3. R.B. Jain: Public Administration in India,21st Century Challenges for Good Governance, New
Delhi: Deep and Deep, 2002.
4. Rumki Basu: Public Administration:Concept and Theories, New Delhi:Sterling, 2013.
5. R. Tyagi, Public Administration, Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi, 1983.

CMG344 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA LTPC

3 003

UNIT I (9)
1. Constitutional Development Since 1909 to 1947
2. Making of the Constitution.
3. Constituent Assembly

UNIT II (9)
1. Fundamental Rights
2. Fundamental Duties
3. Directive Principles of State Policy

UNIT III (9)

1. President
2. Parliament
3. Supreme Court
UNIT IV (9)
1. Governor
2. State Legislature
3. High Court

UNIT V (9)
1. Secularism
2. Social Justice
3. Minority Safeguards
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCES:
1. Basu. D.D.: Introduction to Indian Constitution ; Prentice Hall; New Delhi.
2. Kapur. A.C: Indian Government and Political System; [Link] and Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Johari J.C.: Indian Politics, Vishal Publications Ltd, New Delhi
4. Agarwal R.C: Indian Political System; [Link] & Co., New Delhi

384
CMG345 PUBLIC PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION L T PC
3 0 03

UNIT I (9)
1. Meaning, Scope and Importance of Personnel Administration
2. Types of Personnel Systems: Bureaucratic, Democratic and Representative systems

UNIT II (9)
1. Generalist Vs Specialist
2. Civil Servants’ Relationship with Political Executive
3. Integrity in Administration.

UNIT III (9)

1. Recruitment: Direct Recruitment and Recruitment from Within
2. Training: Kinds of Training
3. Promotion

UNIT IV (9)
1. All India Services
2. Service Conditions
3. State Public Service Commission

UNIT V (9)
1. Employer Employee Relations
2. Wage and Salary Administration
3. Allowances and Benefits
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Stahl Glean O: Public Personnel Administration
2. Parnandikar Pai V.A: Personnel System for Development Administration.
3. Bhambhiru . P: Bureaucracy and Policy in India.
4. Dwivedi O.P and Jain R.B: India’s Administrative state.
5. Muttalis M.A: Union Public Service Commission.
6. Bhakara Rao .V: Employer Employee Relations in India.
7. Davar R.S. Personnel Management & Industrial Relations

CMG346 ADMINISTRATIVE THEORIES L T PC

3 0 0 3

UNIT I (9)
Meaning, Scope and significance of Public Administration, Evolution of Public Administration as a
discipline and Identity of Public Administration

385
UNIT II (9)
Theories of Organization: Scientific Management Theory, Classical Model,
Human Relations Theory

UNIT III (9)

Organization goals and Behaviour, Groups in organization and group dynamics, Organizational
Design.

UNIT IV (9)
Motivation Theories, content, process and contemporary; Theories of Leadership: Traditional and
Modern: Process and techniques of decision-making

UNIT V (9)
Administrative thinkers: Kautilya, Woodrow Willson, C.I. Barnard . Peter Drucker
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Crozior M : The Bureaucratic phenomenon (Chand)
2. Blau. P.M and Scott. W : Formal Organizations (RKP)
3. Presthus. R : The Organizational Society (MAC)
4. Alvi, Shum Sun Nisa : Eminent Administrative Thinkers.
5. Keith Davis : Organization Theory (MAC)

CMG347 INDIAN ADMINISTRATIVE SYSTEM LTPC

3 003

UNIT I (9)
Evolution and Constitutional Context of Indian Administration, Constitutional Authorities: Finance
Commission, Union Public Services Commission, Election Commission, Comptroller and Auditor
General of India, Attorney General of India

UNIT II (9)
Role & Functions of the District Collector, Relationship between the District
Collector and Superintendent of Police, Role of Block Development Officer in development
programmes, Local Government

UNIT III (9)

Main Features of 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act 1992, Salient Features of 74th Constitutional
Amendment Act 1992

UNIT IV (9)
Coalition politics in India, Integrity and Vigilance in Indian Administration

UNIT V (9)
Corruption – Ombudsman, Lok Pal & Lok Ayuktha

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
386
REFERENCES:
1. S.R. Maheswari : Indian Administration
2. Khera. S.S : Administration in India
3. Ramesh K. Arora : Indian Public Administration
4. T.N. Chaturvedi : State administration in India
5. Basu, D.D : Introduction to the Constitution of India

CMG348 PUBLIC POLICY ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3 003

UNIT I (9)
Meaning and Definition of Public Policy - Nature, Scope and Importance of public policy – Public
policy relationship with social sciences especially with political science and Public Administration.

UNIT II (9)
Approaches in Policy Analysis - Institutional Approach – Incremental Approach and System’s
Approach – Dror’s Optimal Model

UNIT III (9)

Major stages involved in Policy making Process – Policy Formulation – Policy Implementation –
Policy Evaluation.

UNIT IV (9)
Institutional Framework of Policy making – Role of Bureaucracy – Role of Interest Groups and Role
of Political Parties.

UNIT V (9)
Introduction to the following Public Policies – New Economic Policy – Population Policy – Agriculture
policy - Information Technology Policy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Rajesh Chakrabarti & Kaushik Sanyal : Public Policy in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
2. Kuldeep Mathur : Public Policy and Politics in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. Bidyutv Chakrabarty: Public Policy: Concept, Theory and Practice, 2015.
4. Pradeep Saxena : Public Policy Administration and Development
5. Sapru R.K. : Public Policy: Formulation, Implementation and Evaluation, Sterling Publishers, 2016.

VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

CMG349 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 03

COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the applications of statistics in business decision making.

387
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basic definitions and rules for probability, Baye‘s theorem and random variables, Probability
distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal distributions.

UNIT II SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION AND ESTIMATION 9

Introduction to sampling distributions, Central limit theorem and applications, sampling techniques,
Point and Interval estimates of population parameters.

UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS - PARAMETIRC TESTS 9

Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means of large samples (z-test), one
sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test), ANOVA one way.

UNIT IV NON-PARAMETRIC TESTS 9

Chi-square tests for independence of attributes and goodness of fit, Kolmogorov-Smirnov – test for
goodness of fit, Mann – Whitney U test and Kruskal Wallis test.

UNIT V CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 9

Correlation –Rank Correlation – Regression – Estimation of Regression line – Method of Least
Squares – Standard Error of estimate.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:To facilitate objective solutions in business decision making.
CO2:To understand and solve business problems
CO3:To apply statistical techniques to data sets, and correctly interpret the results.
CO4:To develop skill-set that is in demand in both the research and business environments
CO5:To enable the students to apply the statistical techniques in a work setting.

REFERENCES:
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Masood [Link], Sanjay Rastogi, Statistics for Management,
Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2017.
2. Prem. S. Mann, Introductory Statistics, Wiley Publications, 9th Edition, 2015.
3. T N Srivastava and Shailaja Rego, Statistics for Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition 2017.
4. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2012.
5. David R. Anderson, Dennis J. Sweeney, Thomas [Link], Jeffrey [Link], James [Link],
Statistics for business and economics, 13th edition, Thomson (South – Western) Asia, Singapore,
2016.
6. N. D. Vohra, Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.

CMG350 DATAMINING FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To know how to derive meaning form huge volume of data and information.
 To understand how knowledge discovering process is used in business decision making.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Data mining, Text mining, Web mining, Data ware house.

388
UNIT II DATA MINING PROCESS 9
Datamining process – KDD, CRISP-DM, SEMMA
Prediction performance measures

UNIT III PREDICTION TECHNIQUES 9

Data visualization, Time series – ARIMA, Winter Holts,

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification, Association, Clustering.

UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING AND AI 9

Genetic algorithms, Neural network, Fuzzy logic, Ant Colony optimization, Particle Swarm
optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Learn to apply various data mining techniques into various areas of different domains.
CO2:Be able to interact competently on the topic of data mining for business intelligence.
CO3:Apply various prediction techniques.
CO4:Learn about supervised and unsupervised learning technique.
CO5:Develop and implement machine learning algorithms

REFERENCES :
1. Jaiwei Ham and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining concepts and techniques, Kauffmann Publishers
2006
2. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Jay E. Aronson and David King, Business Intelligence, Prentice
Hall, 2008.
3. [Link], Building the Data Warehouse, fourth edition Wiley India pvt. Ltd. 2005.
4. Ralph Kimball and Richard Merz, The data warehouse toolkit, John Wiley, 3rd edition,2013.
5. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Mastering Data mining, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2nd Edition,
2011
6. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Data mining techniques for Marketing, Sales and Customer
support, John Wiley, 2011
7. G. K. Gupta, Ïntroduction to Data mining with Case Studies, Prentice hall of India, 2011
8. Giudici, Applied Data mining – Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, John Wiley. 2009
9. Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich Stacia Misner, Business Intelligence, Microsoft, 2011
10. Michalewicz Z., Schmidt M. Michalewicz M and Chiriac C, Adaptive Business Intelligence,
Springer – Verlag, 2007
11. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel and Peter C. Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence –
Concepts, Techniques and Applications Wiley, India, 2010.

CMG351 HUMAN RESOURCE ANALYTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To develop the ability of the learners to define and implement HR metrics that are aligned
with the overall business strategy.

389
  To know the different types of HR metrics and understand their respective impact and
application.
 To understand the impact and use of HR metrics and their connection with HR analytics.
 To understand common workforce issues and resolving them using people analytics.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HR ANALYTICS 9

People Analytics - stages of maturity - Human Capital in the Value Chain : impact on business – HR
metrics and KPIs.

UNIT II HR ANLYTICS I: RECRUITMENT 9

Recruitment Metrics : Fill-up ratio - Time to hire - Cost per hire - Early turnover - Employee referral
hires - Agency hires - Lateral hires - Fulfillment ratio- Quality of hire.

UNIT III HR ANALYTICS - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Training & Development Metrics : Percentage of employees trained- Internally and externally trained
-Training hours and cost per employee - ROI.

UNIT IV HR ANALYTICS EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT AND CAREER

PROGRESSION 9
Employee Engagement Metrics :Talent Retention index - Voluntary and involuntary turnover- grades,
performance, and service tenure - Internal hired index Career Progression Metrics: Promotion index
- Rotation index - Career path index.

UNIT V HR ANALYTICS IV: WORKFORCE DIVERSITY AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Workforce Diversity and Development Metrics : Employees per manager – Workforce age profiling -
Workforce service profiling - Churnover index - Workforce diversity
index - Gender mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1:The learners will be conversant about HR metrics and ready to apply at work settings.
CO2:The learners will be able to resolve HR issues using people analytics.

REFERENCES:
1. JacFitzenz , The New HR Analytics, AMACOM , 2010.
2. Edwards M. R., & Edwards K, Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the HR [Link]: Kogan
Page.2016.
3. Human Resources kit for Dummies – 3 rd edition – Max Messmer, 2003
4. Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya, HR Analytics ,Understanding Theories and
Applications, SAGE Publications India ,2017.
5. Sesil, J. C. , Applying advanced analytics to HR management decisions: Methods fo selection,
developing incentives, and improving collaboration. Upper Saddle River,New Jersey: Pearson
Education,2014.
6. Pease, G., & Beresford, B, Developing Human Capital: Using Analytics to Plan and Optimize Your
Learning and Development Investments. Wiley ,2014.
7. Phillips, J., & Phillips, P.P, Making Human Capital Analytics Work: Measuring the ROI of Human
Capital Processes and OUTCOME. McGraw-Hill,2014.
8. HR Scorecard and Metrices, HBR, 2001.

390
CMG352 MARKETING AND SOCIAL MEDIA WEB ANALYTICS LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To showcase the opportunities that exist today to leverage the power of the web and social
media

UNIT I MARKETING ANALYTICS 9

Marketing Budget and Marketing Performance Measure, Marketing - Geographical Mapping, Data
Exploration, Market Basket Analysis

UNIT II COMMUNITY BUILDING AND MANAGEMENT 9

History and Evolution of Social Media-Understanding Science of Social Media –Goals for using Social
Media- Social Media Audience and Influencers - Digital PR- Promoting Social Media Pages- Linking
Social Media Accounts-The Viral Impact of Social Media.

UNIT III SOCIAL MEDIA POLICIES AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Social Media Policies-Etiquette, Privacy- ethical problems posed by emerging social media
technologies - The Basics of Tracking Social Media.

UNIT IV WEB ANALYTICS 9

Data Collection, Overview of Qualitative Analysis, Business Analysis, KPI and Planning, Critical
Components of a Successful Web Analytics Strategy, Proposals & Reports, Web Data Analysis.

UNIT V SEARCH ANALYTICS 9

Search engine optimization (SEO), user engagement, user-generated content, web traffic analysis,
online security, online ethics, data visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
 The Learners will understand social media, web and social media analytics and their
potential impact.

REFERENCES:
1. K. M. Shrivastava, Social Media in Business and Governance, Sterling Publishers Private Limited,
2013
2. Christian Fuchs, Social Media a critical introduction, SAGE Publications Ltd, 2014
3. Bittu Kumar, Social Networking, V & S Publishers, 2013
4. Avinash Kaushik, Web Analytics - An Hour a Day, Wiley Publishing, 2007
5. Ric T. Peterson, Web Analytics Demystified, Celilo Group Media and CafePress 2004
6. Takeshi Moriguchi, Web Analytics Consultant Official Textbook, 7th Edition, 2016

CMG353 OPERATION AND SUPPLY CHAIN ANALYTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To treat the subject in depth by emphasizing on the advanced quantitative models and
methods in operations and supply chain management and its practical aspects and the latest
developments in the field.

391
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, Data Driven Supply Chains – Basics, transforming
supply chains.

UNIT II WAREHOUSING DECISIONS 9

P-Median Methods - Guided LP Approach, Greedy Drop Heuristics, Dynamic Location Models,
Space Determination and Layout Methods.

UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9

Dynamic Lot sizing Methods, Multi-Echelon Inventory models, Aggregate Inventory system and
LIMIT, Risk Analysis in Supply Chain, Risk pooling strategies.

UNIT IV TRANSPORTATION NETWORK MODELS 9

Minimal Spanning Tree, Shortest Path Algorithms, Maximal Flow Problems, Transportation
Problems, Set covering and Set Partitioning Problems, Travelling Salesman Problem, Scheduling
Algorithms.

UNIT V MCDM MODELS 9

Analytic Hierarchy Process(AHP), Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA), Fuzzy Logic an Techniques,
the analytical network process (ANP), TOPSIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
 To enable quantitative solutions in business decision making under conditions of certainty,
risk and uncertainty.

REFERENCES:
1. Nada R. Sanders, Big data driven supply chain management: A framework for implementing
analytics and turning information into intelligence, Pearson Education, 2014.
2. Michael Watson, Sara Lewis, Peter Cacioppi, Jay Jayaraman, Supply Chain Network Design:
Applying Optimization and Analytics to the Global Supply Chain, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. Anna Nagurney, Min Yu, Amir H. Masoumi, Ladimer S. Nagurney, Networks Against Time: Supply
Chain Analytics for Perishable Products, Springer, 2013.
4. Muthu Mathirajan, Chandrasekharan Rajendran, Sowmyanarayanan Sadagopan, Arunachalam
Ravindran, Parasuram Balasubramanian, Analytics in
Operations/Supply Chain Management , I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Gerhard J. Plenert, Supply Chain Optimization through Segmentation and Analytics, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2014.

CMG354 FINANCIAL ANALYTICS L T PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 This course introduces a core set of modern analytical tools that specifically target finance
applications.

UNIT I CORPORATE FINANCE ANALYSIS 9

Basic corporate financial predictive modelling- Project analysis- cash flow analysis- cost of capital,
Financial Break even modelling, Capital Budget model-Payback, NPV, IRR.
392
UNIT II FINANCIAL MARKET ANALYSIS 9
Estimation and prediction of risk and return ( bond investment and stock investment) –Time series-
examining nature of data, Value at risk, ARMA, ARCH and GARCH.

UNIT III PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS 9

Portfolio Analysis – capital asset pricing model, Sharpe ratio, Option pricing models- binomial model
for options, Black Scholes model and Option implied volatility.

UNIT IV TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 9

Prediction using charts and fundamentals – RSI, ROC, MACD, moving average and candle charts,
simulating trading strategies. Prediction of share prices.

UNIT V CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS 9

Credit Risk analysis- Data processing, Decision trees, logistic regression and evaluating credit risk
model.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
 The learners should be able to perform financial analysis for decision making using excel,
Python and R.

REFERENCES:
1. Financial analytics with R by Mark J. Bennett, Dirk L. Hugen, Cambridge university press.
2. Haskell Financial Data Modeling and Predictive Analytics Paperback – Import, 25 Oct 2013 by
Pavel Ryzhov.
3. Quantitative Financial Analytics: The Path To Investment Profits Paperback – Import, 11 Sep 2017
by Edward E Williams (Author), John A Dobelman.
4. Python for Finance - Paperback – Import, 30 Jun 2017 by Yuxing Yan (Author).
5. Mastering Python for Finance Paperback – Import, 29 Apr 2015 by James Ma Weiming.

VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

CES331 SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about sustainable Infrastructure development goals, practices and to
understand the concepts of sustainable planning, design, construction, maintenance and
decommissioning of infrastructure projects.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS 9

Definitions, principles and history of Sustainable Development - Sustainable development goals
(SDG): global and Indian – Infrastructure Demand and Supply - Environment and Development
linkages - societal and cultural demands – Sustainability indicators - Performance indicators of
sustainability and Assessment mechanism - Policy frameworks and practices: global and Indian –
Infrastructure Project finance – Infrastructure project life cycle - Constraints and barriers for
sustainable development - future directions.
393
UNIT II SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9
Overview of Infrastructure projects: Housing sector, Power sector, Water supply, road, rail and port
transportation sector, rural and urban infrastructure. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), Land
acquisition -Legal aspects, Resettlement &Rehabilitation and Development - Cost effectiveness
Analysis - Risk Management Framework for Infrastructure Projects, Economic, demand, political,
socio-environmental and cultural risks. Shaping the Planning Phase of Infrastructure Projects to
mitigate risks, Designing Sustainable Contracts, Negotiating with multiple Stakeholders on
Infrastructure Projects. Use of ICT tools in planning – Integrated planning - Clash detection in
construction - BIM (Building Information Modelling).

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND TECHNIQUES 9

Sustainability through lean construction approach - Enabling lean through information technology –
Lean in planning and design - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) - Location Based Management
System - Geospatial Technologies for machine control, site management, precision control and real
time progress monitoring - Role of logistics in achieving sustainable construction – Data
management for integrated supply chains in construction - Resource efficiency benefits of effective
logistics - Sustainability in geotechnical practice – Design considerations, Design Parameters and
Procedures – Quality control and Assurance - Use of sustainable construction techniques: Precast
concrete technology, Pre-engineered buildings.

UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 9

Construction materials: Concrete, steel, glass, aluminium, timber and FRP - No/Low cement
concrete - Recycled and manufactured aggregate - Role of QC and durability - Sustainable
consumption – Eco-efficiency - green consumerism - product stewardship and green engineering -
Extended producer responsibility – Design for Environment Strategies, Practices, Guidelines,
Methods, And Tools. Eco-design strategies –Design for Disassembly - Dematerialization,
rematerialization, transmaterialization – Green procurement and green distribution - Analysis
framework for reuse and recycling – Typical constraints on reuse and recycling - Communication of
Life Cycle Information - Indian Eco mark scheme - Environmental product declarations –
Environmental marketing- Life cycle Analysis (LCA), Advances in LCA: Hybrid LCA, Thermodynamic
LCA - Extending LCA - economic dimension, social dimension - Life cycle costing (LCC) - Combining
LCA and LCC – Case studies

UNIT V SUSTAINABLE MAINTENANCE OF INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Case Studies - Sustainable projects in developed countries and developing nations - An Integrated
Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and Management - Information Technology and
Systems for Successful Infrastructure Management, - Structural Health Monitoring for Infrastructure
projects - Innovative Design and Maintenance of Infrastructure Facilities - Capacity Building and
Improving the Governments Role in Infrastructure Implementation, Infrastructure Management
Systems and Future Directions. – Use of Emerging Technologies – IoT, Big Data Analytics and Cloud
Computing, Artificial Intelligences, Machine and Deep Learning, Fifth Generation (5G) Network
services for maintenance .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Understand the environment sustainability goals at global and Indian scenario.
CO2 Understand risks in development of projects and suggest mitigation measures.

394
 CO3 Apply lean techniques, LBMS and new construction techniques to achieve sustainability in
infrastructure construction projects.
CO4 Explain Life Cycle Analysis and life cycle cost of construction materials.
CO5 Explain the new technologies for maintenance of infrastructure projects.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles J Kibert, Sustainable Construction : Green Building Design & Delivery, 4th Edition ,
Wiley Publishers 2016.
2. Steve Goodhew, Sustainable Construction Process, Wiley Blackwell,UK, 2016.
3. Craig A. Langston & Grace K.C. Ding, Sustainable Practices in the Built Environment,
4. Butterworth Heinemann Publishers, 2011.
5. William P Spence, Construction Materials, Methods & Techniques (3e), Yesdee Publication
Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
6. New Building Materials and Construction World magazine
7. Kerry Turner. R, "Sustainable Environmental Management", Principles and Practice
Publisher:Belhaven Press,ISBN:1852930039.
8. Munier N, "Introduction to Sustainability”, Springer2005
9. Sharma, “Sustainable Smart Cities In India: Challenges And Future Perspectives”,
SPRINGER, 2022.
10. Ralph Horne, Tim Grant, KarliVerghese, Life Cycle Assessment: Principles, Practice and
Prospects, Csiro Publishing,2009
11. European Commission - Joint Research Centre - Institute for Environment and Sustainability:
International Reference Life Cycle Data System (ILCD) Handbook - General guide for Life
Cycle Assessment - Detailed guidance. Luxembourg. European Union;2010
12. Hudson, Haas, Uddin, Infrastructure management: integrating design, construction,
maintenance, rehabilitation, and renovation, McGraw Hill, (1997).
13. GregerLundesjö, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction: Delivering
Tomorrow's Built Environment, Kogan Page Publishers, 2015.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
2 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
4 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
Avg. 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CES332 SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To educate the students about the issues of sustainability in agroecosystems, introduce the
concepts and principles of agroecology as applied to the design and management of sustainable
agricultural systems for a changing world.

395
UNIT I AGROECOLOGY, AGROECOSYSTEM AND SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE
CONCEPTS 9
Ecosystem definition - Biotic Vs. abiotic factors in an ecosystem - Ecosystem processes - Ecological
services and agriculture - Problems associated with industrial agriculture/food systems - Defining
sustainability - Characteristics of sustainable agriculture - Difference between regenerative and
sustainable agriculture systems

UNIT II SOIL HEALTH, NUTRIENT AND PEST MANAGEMENT 9

Soil health definition - Factors to consider (physical, chemical and biological) - Composition of
healthy soils - Soil erosion and possible control measures - Techniques to build healthy soil -
Management practices for improving soil nutrient - Ecologically sustainable strategies for pest and
disease control

UNIT III WATER MANAGEMENT 9

Soil water storage and availability - Plant yield response to water - Reducing evaporation in
agriculture - Earthworks and tanks for rainwater harvesting - Options for improving the productivity
of water - Localized irrigation - Irrigation scheduling - Fertigation - Advanced irrigation systems and
agricultural practices for sustainable water use

UNIT IV ENERGY AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Types and sources of agricultural wastes - Composition of agricultural wastes - Sustainable
technologies for the management of agricultural wastes - Useful and high value materials produced
using different processes from agricultural wastes - Renewable energy for sustainable agriculture

UNIT V EVALUATING SUSTAINABILITY IN AGROECOSYSTEMS 9

Indicators of sustainability in agriculture - On-farm evaluation of agroecosystem sustainability -
Alternative agriculture approaches/ farming techniques for sustainable food production - Goals and
components of a community food system - Case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Have an in-depth knowledge about the concepts, principles and advantages of sustainable
agriculture
CO2 Discuss the sustainable ways in managing soil health, nutrients, pests and diseases
CO3 Suggest the ways to optimize the use of water in agriculture to promote an ecological use of
resources
CO4 Develop energy and waste management plans for promoting sustainable agriculture in non-
sustainable farming areas
CO5 Assess an ecosystem for its level of sustainability and prescribe ways of converting to a
sustainable system through the redesign of a conventional agroecosystem

REFERENCES:
1. Approaches to Sustainable Agriculture – Exploring the Pathways Towards the Future of
Farming, Oberc, B.P. & Arroyo Schnell, A., IUCN, Belgium, 2020
2. Natural bioactive products in sustainable agriculture, Singh, J. & Yadav, A.N., Springer, 2020
3. Organic Farming for Sustainable Agriculture, Nandwani, D., Springer, 2016
4. Principles of Agronomy for Sustainable Agriculture, Villalobos, F.J. & Fereres, E., Springer,
2016
396
5. Sustainable Agriculture for Food Security: A Global Perspective, Balkrishna, A., CRC Press,
2021
6. Sustainable Energy Solutions in Agriculture, Bundschuh, J. & Chen, G., CRC Press, 2014

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING - SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE PRACTICES

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation

CES333 SUSTAINABLE BIOMATERIALS LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To Impart knowledge of biomaterials and their properties
 To learn about Fundamentals aspects of Biopolymers and their applications
 To learn about bioceramics and biopolymers
 To introduce the students about metals as biomaterials and their usage as implants
 To make the students understand the significance of bionanomaterials and its applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMATERIALS 9

Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials- Types of
Biomaterials- Degradable and resorbable biomaterials- engineered natural materials-
Biocompatibility-Hydrogels-pyrolitic carbon for long term medical implants-textured and porous
materials-Bonding types- crystal structure-imperfection in crystalline structure-surface properties
and adhesion of materials –strength of biological tissues-performance of implants-tissue response
to implants- Impact and Future of Biomaterials

UNIT II BIO POLYMERS 9

Molecular structure of polymers -Molecular weight - Types of polymerization techniques–Types of
polymerization reactions- Physical states of polymers- Common polymeric biomaterials -
Polyethylene -Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA-Polylactic acid (PLA) and polyglycolic acid (PGA) -
Polycaprolactone (PCL) - Other biodegradable polymers –Polyurethan- reactions polymers for
medical purposes - Collagens- Elastin- Cellulose and derivatives-Synthetic polymeric membranes
and their biological applications

UNIT III BIO CERAMICS AND BIOCOMPOSITES 9

General properties- Bio ceramics -Silicate glass - Alumina (Al2O3) -Zirconia (ZrO2)-Carbon- Calcium
phosphates (CaP)- Resorbable Ceramics- surface reactive ceramics- Biomedical Composites-
Polymer Matrix Compsite(PMC)-Ceramic Matrix Composite(CMC)-Metal Matrix Composite (MMC)–
glass ceramics - Orthopedic implants-Tissue engineering scaffolds

397
UNIT IV METALS AS BIOMATERIALS 9
Biomedical metals-types and properties-stainless steel-Cobalt chromium alloys-Titanium alloys-
Tantalum-Nickel titanium alloy (Nitinol)- magnesium-based biodegradable alloys-surface properties
of metal implants for osteointegration-medical application-corrosion of metallic implants – biological
tolerance of implant metals

UNIT V NANOBIOMATERIALS 9
Meatllicnanobiomaterials–Nanopolymers-Nanoceramics- Nanocomposites -Carbon based
nanobiomaterials - transport of nanoparticles- release rate-positive and negative effect of nanosize-
nanofibres-Nano and micro features and their importance in implant performance-Nanosurface and
coats-Applications nanoantibiotics-Nanomedicines- Biochips – Biomimetics- BioNEMs -Biosensor-
Bioimaging/Molecular Imaging- challenges and future perspective.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1:Students will gain familiarity with Biomaterials and they will understand their importance.
CO2:Students will get an overview of different biopolymers and their properties
CO3:Students gain knowledge on some of the important Bioceramics and Biocomposite materials
CO4:Students gain knowledge on metals as biomaterials
CO5:Student gains knowledge on the importance of nanobiomaterials in biomedical applications.

REFERENCES
1. C. Mauli Agrawal, Joo L. Ong, Mark R. Appleford, Gopinath Mani “Introduction to Biomaterials
Basic Theory with Engineering Applications” Cambridge University Press, 2014.
2. Donglu shi “Introduction to Biomaterials” Tsinghua University press, 2006.
3. Joon Park, [Link] “Biomaterials An Introduction” third edition, Springer 2007.
4. [Link],[Link], [Link] and [Link] “Characterization of Biomaterials” Wood head
publishing, 2013.
5. Buddy [Link] and Allan [Link] Biomaterials Science “An Introduction to Material in
Medicine” Third Edition, 2013.
6. VasifHasirci, NesrinHasirci “Fundamentals of Biomaterials” Springer, 2018
7. Leopoido Javier Rios Gonzalez. “Handbook of Research on Bioenergy and Biomaterials:
Consolidated and green process” Apple academic press, 2021.
8. Devarajan Thangadurai, Jeyabalan Sangeetha, Ram Prasad “Functional Bionanomaterials”
springer, 2020.
9. [Link] Biomaterials; Narosa Publishing house, 2002.

CES334 MATERIALS FOR ENERGY SUSTAINABILITY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To familiarize the students about the challenges and demands of energy sustainability
 To provide fundamental knowledge about electrochemical devices and the materials used.
 To introduce the students to various types of fuel cell
 To enable students to appreciate novel materials and their usage in photovoltaic application
 To introduce students to the basic principles of various types Supercapacitors and the
materials used.

398
UNIT I SUSTAINABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Introduction to energy demand and challenges ahead – sustainable source of energy (wind, solar
etc.) – electrochemical energy systems for energy harvesting and storage – materials for sustainable
electrochemical systems building – India centric solutions based on locally available materials –
Economics of wind and solar power generators vs. conventional coal plants – Nuclear energy

UNIT II ELECTROCHEMICAL DEVICES 9

Electrochemical Energy – Difference between primary and secondary batteries – Secondary battery
(Li-ion battery, Sodium-ion battery, Li-S battery, Li-O2 battery, Nickel Cadmium, Nickel Metal
Hydride) – Primary battery (Alkaline battery, Zinc-Carbon battery) – Materials for battery (Anode
materials – Lithiated graphite, Sodiated hard carbon, Silicon doped graphene, Lithium Titanate)
(Cathode Materials – S, LiCoO2, LiFePO4, LiMn2O4) – Electrolytes for Lithium-ion battery (ethylene
carbonate and propylene carbonate based)

UNIT III FUEL CELLS 9

Principle of operation of fuel cells – types of fuel cells (Proton exchange membrane fuel cells, alkaline
fuel cell, direct methanol fuel cells, direct borohydride fuel cells, phosphoric acid fuel cells, solid oxide
fuel cells, and molten carbonate fuel cells) – Thermodynamics of fuel cell – Fuel utilization –
electrolyte membrane ( proton conducting and anion conducting) – Catalysts ( Platinum, Platinum
alloys, carbon supported platinum systems and metal oxide supported platinum catalysts) – Anatomy
of fuel cells (gas diffusion layer, catalyst layer, flow field plate, current conductors, bipolar plates and
monopolar plates).

UNIT IV PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Physics of the solar cell – Theoretical limits of photovoltaic conversion – bulk crystal growth of Si
and wafering for photovoltaic application - Crystalline silicon solar cells – thin film silicon solar cells
– multijunction solar cells – amorphous silicon based solar cells – photovoltaic concentrators –
Cu(InGa)Se2 solar cells – Cadium Telluride solar cells – dye sensitized solar cells – Perovskite solar
cells – Measurement and characterization of solar cells - Materials used in solar cells ( metallic
oxides, CNT films, graphene, OD fullerenes, single-multi walled carbon nanotubes, two-dimensional
Graphene, organic or Small molecule-based solar cells materials - copper-phthalocyanine and
perylenetetracarboxylicbis - benzine – fullerenes - boron subphthalocyanine- tin (II) phthalocyanine)

UNIT V SUPERCAPACITORS 9
Supercapacitor –types of supercapacitors (electrostatic double-layer capacitors, pseudo capacitors
and hybrid capacitors) - design of supercapacitor-three and two electrode cell-parameters of
supercapacitor- Faradaic and non - Faradaic capacitance – electrode materials (transition metal
oxides (MO), mixed metal oxides, conducting polymers (CP), Mxenes, nanocarbons, non-noble
metal, chalcogenides, hydroxides and 1D-3D metal-organic frame work (MOF), activated carbon
fibres (ACF)- Hydroxides-Based Materials - Polyaniline (PANI), a ternary hybrid composite-
conductive polypyrrole hydrogels – Different types of nanocomposites for the SC electrodes
(carbon–carbon composites, carbon-MOs composites, carbon-CPs composites and MOs-CPs
composites) - Two-Dimensional (2D) Electrode Materials - 2D transition metal carbides,
carbonitrides, and nitrides.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1:Students will acquire knowledge about energy sustainability.
CO2:Students understand the principles of different electrochemical devices.
399
CO3:Students learn about the working of fuel cells and their application.
CO4:Students will learn about various Photovoltaic applications and the materials used.
CO5:The students gain knowledge on different types of supercapacitors and the performance of
various materials

REFERENCES
1. Functional materials for sustainable energy applications; John A. Kilner, Stephen J. Skinner,
Stuart J. C. Irvine and Peter P. Edwards.
2. Hand Book of Fuel Cells: Fuel Cell Technology and Applications, Wolf Vielstich, Arnold Lamm,
Hubert Andreas Gasteiger, Harumi Yokokawa, Wiley, London 2003.
3. B.E. Conway, Electrochemical supercapacitors: scientific fundamentals and technological
applications, Kluwer Academic / Plenum publishers, New York, 1999.
4. T.R. Crompton, Batteries reference book, Newners, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Materials for Supercapacitor applications; [Link]. [Link] Scibioh
6. Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors: A Review of Recent Advances, Parnia Forouzandeh,
Vignesh Kumaravel and Suresh C. Pillai, catalysts 2020.
7. Recent advances, practical challenges, and perspectives of intermediate temperature solid
oxide fuel cell cathodes Amanda Ndubuisi, Sara Abouali, Kalpana Singh and
VenkataramanThangadurai, J. Mater. Chem. A, 2022.
8. Review of next generation photovoltaic solar cell technology and comparative materialistic
development Neeraj Kant, Pushpendra Singh, Materials Today: Proceedings, 2022.

CES335 GREEN TECHNOLOGY L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To acquire knowledge on green systems and the environment, energy technology and
efficiency, and sustainability.
 To provide green engineering solutions to energy demand, reduced energy footprint.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF GREEN CHEMISTRY 9

Historical Perspectives and Basic Concepts. The twelve Principles of Green Chemistry and green
engineering. Green chemistry metrics- atom economy, E factor, reaction mass efficiency, and other
green chemistry metrics, application of green metrics analysis to synthetic plans.

UNIT II POLLUTION TYPES 9

Pollution – types, causes, effects, and abatement. Waste – sources of waste, different types of
waste, chemical, physical and biochemical methods of waste minimization and recycling.

UNIT III GREEN REAGENTS AND GREEN SYNTHESIS 9

Environmentally benign processes- alternate solvents- supercritical solvents, ionic liquids, water as
a reaction medium, energy-efficient design of processes- photo, electro and sono chemical methods,
microwave-assisted reactions

UNIT IV DESIGNING GREEN PROCESSES 9

Safe design, process intensification, in process monitoring. Safe product and process design –
Design for degradation, Real-time Analysis for pollution prevention, inherently safer chemistry for
accident prevention
400
UNIT V GREEN NANOTECHNOLOGY 9
Nanomaterials for water treatment, nanotechnology for renewable energy, nanotechnology for
environmental remediation and waste management, nanotechnology products as potential
substitutes for harmful chemicals, environmental concerns with nanotechnology
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: To understand the principles of green engineering and technology
CO2: To learn about pollution using hazardous chemicals and solvents
CO3: To modify processes and products to make them green and safe.
CO4: To design processes and products using green technology
CO5: To understand advanced technology in green synthesis

TEXT BOOKS
1. Green technology and design for the environment, Samir B. Billatos, Nadia A. Basaly, Taylor &
Francis, Washington, DC, ©1997
2. Green Chemistry – An introductory text - M. Lancaster, RSC,2016.
3. Green chemistry metrics - Alexi Lapkin and david Constable (Eds) , Wiley publications,2008

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Environmental chemistry, Stanley E Manahan, Taylor and Francis, 2017

CES336 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING AND ANALYSIS LT PC

3 0 03

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 to understand and study the complexity of the environment in relation to pollutants generated
due to industrial activity.
 To analyze the quality of the environmental parameters and monitor the same for the purpose
of environmental risk assessment.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND STANDARDS 9

Introduction- Environmental Standards- Classification of Environmental Standards- Global
Environmental Standards- Environmental Standards in India- Ambient air quality standards- water
quality standard- Environmental Monitoring-Need for environmental monitoring- Concepts of
environmental monitoring- Techniques of Environmental Monitoring.

UNIT II MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS 9

Current Environmental Issues- Global Environmental monitoring programme-International
conventions- Application of Environmental Monitoring- Atmospheric Monitoring - screening
parameters – Significance of environmental sampling- sampling methods – water sampling -
sampling of ambient air-sampling of flue gas.

UNIT III ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 9

Classification of Instrumental Method- Analysis of Organic Pollutants by Spectrophotometric
methods -Determination of nitrogen, phosphorus and, chemical oxygen demand (COD) in sewage;
Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)- Sampling techniques for air pollution measurements; analysis

401
of particulates and air pollutants like oxides of nitrogen, oxides of sulfur, carbon monoxide,
hydrocarbon; Introduction to advanced instruments for environmental analysis

UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME (EMP) & RISKASSESSMENT 9

Water quality monitoring programme- national water quality monitoring- Parameters for National
Water Quality Monitoring- monitoring protocol; Process of risk assessment- hazard identification-
exposure assessment- dose-response assessment; risk characterization.

UNIT V AUTOMATED DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING 9

Data Acquisition for Process Monitoring and Control - The Data Acquisition System - Online Data
Acquisition, Monitoring, and Control - Implementation of a Data Management System - Review of
Observational Networks -Sensors and transducers- classification of transducers- data acquisition
system- types of data acquisition systems- data management and quality control; regulatory
overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students will know

CO1 Basic concepts of environmental standards and monitoring.

CO2 the ambient air quality and water quality standards;
CO3 the various instrumental methods and their principles for environmental monitoring
CO4 The significance of environmental standards in monitoring quality and sustainability
of the environment.
CO5 the various ways of raising environmental awareness among the people.
CO6 Know the standard research methods that are used worldwide for monitoring the
environment.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Environmental monitoring Handbook, Frank R. Burden, © 2002 by The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc.
2. Handbook of environmental analysis: chemical pollutants in the air, water, soil, and soild
wastes / Pradyot Patnaik, © 1997 by CRC Press, Inc
REFERENCES
1. Environmental monitoring / edited by G. Bruce Wiersma, © 2004 by CRC Press LLC.
2. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merit, J. A. Dean and F. A. Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis,
CBP Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Heaslip, G. (1975) Environmental Data Handling. John Wiley & Sons. New York.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
Course Program Outcomes
Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 - 1 1 1 - -
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 - - - 2 - 3 3 1 - -
CO5 1 1 3 2 1 - - - 3 - 3 1 2 - -

402
 CO6 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
Over all 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-“- no correlation

CES337 INTEGRATED ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To create awareness on the energy scenario of India with respect to world
 To understand the fundamentals of energy sources, energy efficiency and resulting
environmental implications of energy utilisation
 Familiarisation on the concept of sustainable development and its benefits
 Recognize the potential of renewable energy sources and its conversion technologies for
attaining sustainable development
 Acquainting with energy policies and energy planning for sustainable development

UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Comparison of energy scenario – India and World (energy sources, generation mix, consumption
pattern, T&D losses, energy demand, per capita energy consumption) – energy pricing – Energy
security

UNIT II ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Conventional Energy Sources - Emissions from fuels – Air, Water and Land pollution –
Environmental standards - measurement and controls

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) -
Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty. Globalization
and Economic growth - Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and growth.

UNIT IV RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9

Renewable Energy – Sources and Potential – Technologies for harnessing from Solar, Wind, Hydro,
Biomass and Oceans – Principle of operation, relative merits and demerits

UNIT V ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

National & State Energy Policy - National solar mission - Framework of Central Electricity Authority
- National Hydrogen Mission - Energy and climate policy - State Energy Action Plan, RE integration,
Road map for ethanol blending, Energy Efficiency and Energy Mix

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1:Understand the world and Indian energy scenario
CO2:Analyse energy projects, its impact on environment and suggest control strategies
CO3:Recognise the need of Sustainable development and its impact on human resource
development
CO4:Apply renewable energy technologies for sustainable development
CO5:Fathom Energy policies and planning for sustainable development.
403
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at [Link]
[Link]/[Link], a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory
body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Robert Ristirer and Jack P. Kraushaar, “Energy and the environment”, Willey, 2005.
3. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K., 2012
4. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
5. Dhandapani Alagiri, Energy Security in India Current Scenario, The ICFAI University Press,
2006.
6. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
7. [Link]

CES338 ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the types of energy sources, energy efficiency and environmental
implications of energy utilisation
 To create awareness on energy audit and its impacts
 To acquaint the techniques adopted for performance evaluation of thermal utilities
 To familiarise on the procedures adopted for performance evaluation of electrical utilities
 To learn the concept of sustainable development and the implication of energy usage

UNIT I ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Primary energy sources - Coal, Oil, Gas – India Vs World with respect to energy production and
consumption, Climate Change, Global Warming, Ozone Depletion, UNFCCC, COP

UNIT II ENERGY AUDITING 9

Need and types of energy audit. Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy costs,
bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing system
efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel & energy substitution, energy audit
instruments

UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES 9

Energy conservation avenues in steam generation and utilisation, furnaces, Thermic Fluid Heaters.
Insulation and Refractories - Commercial waste heat recovery devices: recuperator, regenerator,
heat pipe, heat exchangers (Plate, Shell & Tube), heat pumps, and thermocompression

UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVTION IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 9

Demand side management - Power factor improvement – Energy efficient transformers - Energy
conservation avenues in Motors, HVAC, fans, blowers, pumps, air compressors, illumination
systems and cooling towers

404
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9
Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG).
Globalization and Economic growth. Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and
growth. Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty,

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1:Understand the prevailing energy scenario
CO2:Familiarise on energy audits and its relevance
CO3:Apply the concept of energy audit on thermal utilities
CO4:Employ relevant techniques for energy improvement in electrical utilities
CO5:Understand Sustainable development and its impact on human resource development

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at [Link]
[Link]/[Link], a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory
body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Eastop.T.D& Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”, Logman
Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184, 1990
3. W.R. Murphy and G. McKay “Energy Management” Butterworths, London 1987
4. Pratap Bhattacharyya, “Climate Change and Greenhouse Gas Emission”, New India
Publishing Agency- Nipa,2020
5. Matthew John Franchetti , Defne Apul “Carbon Footprint Analysis: Concepts, Methods,
Implementation, and Case Studies” CRC Press,2012
6. Robert A. Ristinen, Jack J. Kraushaar, Jeffrey T. Brack, “Energy and the Environment”, 4th
Edition,Wiley,2022
7. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
8. Sustainable development in India: Stocktaking in the run up to Rio+20: Report prepared by
TERI for MoEF, 2011.

405
406
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs):

1. To enable graduates to pursue higher education and research, or have a successful career
in industries associated with Computer Science and Engineering, or as entrepreneurs. To
ensure that graduates will have the ability and attitude to adapt to emerging technological
changes.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES POs:

Engineering Graduates will be able to:

1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.

2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.

3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.

4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and

research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.

5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.

6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.

7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering

solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.

8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.

9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or

leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.

1
 11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES (PSOs)

To analyze, design and develop computing solutions by applying foundational concepts of

Computer Science and Engineering.

To apply software engineering principles and practices for developing quality software for scientific
and business applications.

To adapt to emerging Information and Communication Technologies (ICT) to innovate ideas and
solutions to existing/novel problems.

Mapping of POs/PSOs to PEOs

Contribution 1: Reasonable 2:Significant 3:Strong

2
 PEOs

POs 1. Graduates will 2. Graduates will

pursue higher have the ability
education and and attitude to
research, or have a adapt to
successful career in emerging
industries associated technological
with Computer changes.
Science and
Engineering, or as
entrepreneurs.

1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge

of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering 3 1
specialization to the solution of complex
engineering problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review
research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated
3 1
conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and
engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design
solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes
that meet the specified needs with appropriate
3 2
consideration for the public health and safety,
and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.

4. Conduct investigations of complex

problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of 3 2
data, and synthesis of the information to
provide valid conclusions.

5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply

appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction
2 3
and modeling to complex engineering activities
with an understanding of the limitations.

6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning

informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and
cultural issues and the consequent
2 2
responsibilities relevant to the professional
engineering practice.

3
7. Environment and sustainability:
Understand the impact of the professional
engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts, and demonstrate the 2 1
knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development.

8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to

professional ethics and responsibilities and
3 1
norms of the engineering practice.

9. Individual and team work: Function effectively

as an individual, and as a member or leader in
3 2
diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

10. Communication: Communicate effectively on

complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at
large, such as, being able to comprehend and
3 2
write effective reports and design
documentation, make effective presentations,
and give and receive clear instructions.

11. Project management and finance:

Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of
the engineering and management principles and
apply these to one’s own work, as a member 2 2
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in
multidisciplinary environments.

12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for,

and have the preparation and ability to engage
1 3
in independent and life-long learning in the
broadest context of technological change.

PSOs
1. Analyze, design and develop computing solutions by applying foundational concepts of
3 1
computer science and engineering.
2. Apply software engineering principles and practices for developing quality software for
3 1
scientific and business applications.
3. Adapt to emerging information and communication technologies (ICT) to innovate ideas
1 3
and solutions to existing/novel problems.

4
 MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
A broad relation between the Course Outcomes and Programme Outcomes is given in the
following table

Course Title Programme Outcome (PO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Communicative √ √ √ √
English
Engineering √ √ √
√
Mathematics - I
Engineering Physics √ √ √
Engineering √ √ √
Chemistry
SEMESTER I

Problem Solving
and Python √ √ √
Programming
Engineering √ √ √ √ √ √ √
√
Graphics
Problem Solving √
and Python
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Programming
Laboratory
Physics and √ √ √ √ √ √
Chemistry
Laboratory

Technical English √ √ √ √
Engineering √ √ √
√
Mathematics II
Physics for √ √ √
Information
Science
Basic Electrical, √ √ √
SEMESTER II

Electronics and
Measurement
Engineering
Environmental √ √ √ √
Science and √ √ √ √
Engineering
Programming in C √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Engineering √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Practices √ √ √
Laboratory
C Programming √
√ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory

5
 PROGRAMME OUTCOME (PO)
COURSE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TITLE
Discrete
√ √ √ √
Mathematics
Digital
Principles and √ √ √
Design
Data Structures √ √ √
SEMESTER III

Object Oriented
√ √ √
Programming
Communication
√ √ √
Engineering
Data Structures
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Object Oriented
Programming √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Digital Systems
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Interpersonal
Skills/Listening √ √ √ √
YEAR II

&Speaking

Probability and
Queueing √ √ √ √ √ √
Theory
Computer
√ √ √
Architecture
Database
Management √ √ √
Systems
SEMESTER IV

Design and
Analysis of √ √ √ √ √ √
Algorithms
Operating
√ √ √
Systems
Software
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Engineering
Database
Management
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Systems
Laboratory
Operating
Systems √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Advanced
Reading and √ √ √ √
Writing

6
 Algebra and
√ √ √ √
Number Theory
Computer
√ √ √
Networks
Microprocessors
and √ √ √
Microcontrollers
Theory of
√ √ √
Computation
SEMESTER V

Object Oriented
Analysis and √ √ √ √
YEAR III

Design
Open Elective I
Microprocessors
and
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Microcontrollers
Laboratory
Object Oriented
Analysis and
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Design
Laboratory
Networks
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory

Internet
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Programming
Artificial
√ √ √
Intelligence
Mobile
√ √ √
Computing
SEMESTER VI

Compiler Design √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Distributed
√ √ √
Systems
Professional
Elective I
Internet
Programming √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Mobile
Application
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Development
Laboratory
Mini Project √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Professional 
 
Communication

Principles of
SEMESTER VII

√ √ √ √
Management
YEAR IV

Cryptography
and Network √ √ √
Security
Cloud Computing √ √ √
Open Elective II

7
 Professional
Elective II
Professional
Elective III
Cloud Computing
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Security
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory

Professional
Elective IV
SEMESTER

Professional
VIII

Elective V
Project Work
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

8
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES

SEM COURSE TITLE PROGRAMME OUTCOME (PO)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
VI Data Warehousing and Data
√ √ √
Mining
Software Testing √ √ √ √ √ √
Embedded Systems √ √ √
Agile Methodologies √ √ √
Graph Theory and Applications- √ √ √
Intellectual Property Rights √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Digital Signal Processing √ √ √
VII Big Data Analytics √ √ √ √ √ √
Machine Learning Techniques √ √ √ √ √ √
Computer Graphics and
√ √ √
Multimedia
Software Project Management √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Internet of Things √ √ √
Service Oriented Architecture √ √ √
Total Quality Management √ √ √ √
Multi-core Architectures
√ √ √
and Programming
Human Computer Interaction √ √ √
C# and .Net Programming √ √ √ √ √ √
Wireless Adhoc and Sensor
√ √ √
Networks
Advanced Topics on Databases √ √ √
Foundation Skills in Integrated
√ √ √
Product Development
Human Rights √ √ √
Disaster Management √ √ √ √
VIII Digital Image Processing √ √ √
Social Network Analysis √ √ √
Information Security √ √ √ √
Software Defined Networks √ √ √
Cyber Forensics √ √ √ √
Soft Computing √ √ √
Professional Ethics in
√ √ √ √ √ √
Engineering
Information Retrieval Techniques √ √ √
Green Computing √ √ √
GPU Architecture and
√ √ √
Programming
Natural Language Processing √ √ √
Parallel Algorithms √ √ √
Speech Processing √ √ √
Fundamentals of Nanoscience √ √ √

9
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I - VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI

SEMESTER I
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8151 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics - I
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 0 0 3
3
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and ES 4
Python Programming 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry BS 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25

SEMESTER II
COURSE CONTACT
[Link] COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8251 Engineering BS
4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics - II
3. PH8252 Physics for Information BS
3 3 0 0 3
Science
4. BE8255 Basic Electrical, ES
Electronics and
3 3 0 0 3
Measurement
Engineering
5. GE8291 Environmental Science HS
3 3 0 0 3
and Engineering
6. CS8251 Programming in C PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. CS8261 C Programming PC 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 28 20 0 8 24

10
 SEMESTER III
COURSE CONTACT
[Link] COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8351 Discrete Mathematics BS 4 4 0 0 4
2. Digital Principles and
CS8351 ES 4 4 0 0 4
System Design
3. CS8391 Data Structures PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. Object Oriented
CS8392 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
5. Communication
EC8395 ES 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRACTICALS
6. Data Structures
CS8381 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. Object Oriented
CS8383 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
8. Digital Systems
CS8382 ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. Interpersonal
HS8381 Skills/Listening EEC 2 0 0 2 1
&Speaking
TOTAL 31 17 0 14 24

SEMESTER IV
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8402 Probability and Queueing BS
4 4 0 0 4
Theory
2. CS8491 Computer Architecture PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. CS8492 Database Management PC
3 3 0 0 3
Systems
4. CS8451 Design and Analysis of PC
3 3 0 0 3
Algorithms
5. CS8493 Operating Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. CS8494 Software Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. CS8481 Database Management PC
4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
8. CS8461 Operating Systems PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. HS8461 Advanced Reading and EEC
2 0 0 2 1
Writing
TOTAL 29 19 0 10 24

11
 SEMESTER V
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8551 Algebra and Number
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Theory
2. CS8591 Computer Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. EC8691 Microprocessors and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
4. CS8501 Theory of Computation PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. CS8592 Object Oriented Analysis
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Design
6. Open Elective I OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. EC8681 Microprocessors and
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers Laboratory
8. CS8582 Object Oriented Analysis
PC 4 0 0 4 2
and Design Laboratory
9. CS8581 Networks Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25

SEMESTER VI

Sl. COURSE CONTACT

COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. CS8651 Internet Programming PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. CS8691 Artificial Intelligence PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. CS8601 Mobile Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8602 Compiler Design PC 5 3 0 2 4
5. CS8603 Distributed Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. CS8661 Internet Programming
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. CS8662 Mobile Application
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Development Laboratory
9. CS8611 Mini Project EEC 2 0 0 2 1
10. HS8581 Professional EEC 2
0 0 2 1
Communication
TOTAL 32 18 0 14 25

12
 SEMESTER VII

SI. COURSE CONTACT

COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MG8591 Principles of
HS 3 3 0 0 3
Management
2. CS8792 Cryptography and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Network Security
3. CS8791 Cloud Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. Open Elective II OE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective II PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective III
PRACTICALS
7. CS8711 Cloud Computing
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. IT8761 Security Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 26 18 0 8 22

SEMESTER VIII

Sl. COURSE CONTACT

COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. Professional Elective IV PE
3 3 0 0 3
2. Professional Elective V PE
3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
3. CS8811 Project Work
EEC 20 0 0 20 10
TOTAL 26 6 0 20 16

TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS: 185

13
 HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES (HS)

Sl. COURSE CONTACT

COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
3. GE8291 Environmental Science
HS 3 3 0 0 3
and Engineering
4. MG8591 Principles of Management HS 3 3 0 0 3

BASIC SCIENCES (BS)

Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT

L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MA8151 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics I
2. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry BS
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
5. MA8251 Engineering BS
4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics II
6. PH8252 Physics for Information BS
3 3 0 0 3
Science
7. MA8351 Discrete Mathematics BS 4 4 0 0 4
8. MA8402 Probability and Queueing BS
4 4 0 0 4
Theory
9. MA8551 Algebra and Number BS
4 4 0 0 4
Theory

ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)

Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

NO CODE PERIODS
1. GE8151 Problem Solving and
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
2. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
3. Problem Solving and
GE8161 Python Programming ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
4. Basic Electrical, Electronics
BE8255 and Measurement ES 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5. GE8261 Engineering Practices
ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
6. CS8351 Digital Principles and
ES 4 4 0 0 4
System Design
7. EC8395 Communication ES
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
8. CS8382 Digital Systems Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2

14
 PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. CS8251 Programming in C PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. CS8261 C Programming Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
3. CS8391 Data Structures PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8392 Object Oriented
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
5. CS8381 Data Structures Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
6. CS8383 Object Oriented
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
7. CS8491 Computer Architecture PC 3 3 0 0 3
8. CS8492 Database Management
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
9. CS8451 Design and Analysis of
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Algorithms
10. CS8493 Operating Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
11. CS8494 Software Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
12. CS8481 Database Management
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
13. CS8461 Operating Systems
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
14. CS8591 Computer Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
15. EC8691 Microprocessors and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
16. CS8501 Theory of Computation PC 3 3 0 0 3
17. CS8592 Object Oriented Analysis
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Design
18. EC8681 Microprocessors and
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers Laboratory
19. CS8582 Object Oriented Analysis
PC 4 0 0 4 2
and Design Laboratory
20. CS8581 Networks Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
21. CS8651 Internet Programming PC 3 3 0 0 3
22. CS8691 Artificial Intelligence PC 3 3 0 0 3
23. CS8601 Mobile Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
24. CS8602 Compiler Design PC 5 3 0 2 4
25. CS8603 Distributed Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
26. CS8661 Internet Programming
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
27. CS8662 Mobile Application
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Development Laboratory
28. CS8792 Cryptography and Network
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Security
29. CS8791 Cloud Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
30. CS8711 Cloud Computing
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
31. IT8761 Security Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2

15
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)

SEMESTER VI
ELECTIVE - I
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8075 Data Warehousing and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Data Mining
2. IT8076 Software Testing PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. IT8072 Embedded Systems PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8072 Agile Methodologies PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. CS8077 Graph Theory and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Applications-
6. IT8071 Digital Signal Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8075 Intellectual Property
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Rights

SEMESTER VII
ELECTIVE - II
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8091 Big Data Analytics PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. CS8082 Machine Learning
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
3. CS8092 Computer Graphics and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Multimedia
4. IT8075 Software Project
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
5. CS8081 Internet of Things PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. IT8074 Service Oriented
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Architecture
7. GE8077 Total Quality Management PE 3 3 0 0 3

SEMESTER VII
ELECTIVE - III
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8083 Multi-core Architectures and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
2. CS8079 Human Computer
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Interaction
3. CS8073 C# and .Net Programming PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8088 Wireless Adhoc and Sensor
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Networks
5. CS8071 Advanced Topics on
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Databases
6. GE8072 Foundation Skills in
Integrated Product PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
7. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
8. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 3 0 0 3

16
 SEMESTER VIII
ELECTIVE - IV
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. EC8093 Digital Image Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. CS8085 Social Network Analysis PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. IT8073 Information Security PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8087 Software Defined Networks PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. CS8074 Cyber Forensics PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. CS8086 Soft Computing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8076 Professional Ethics in
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering

SEMESTER VIII
ELECTIVE - V
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8080 Information Retrieval
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
2. CS8078 Green Computing PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. CS8076 GPU Architecture and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
4. CS8084 Natural Language Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. CS8001 Parallel Algorithms PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. IT8077 Speech Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8073 Fundamentals of Nanoscience PE 3 3 0 0 3

EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)

Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

NO CODE PERIODS
1. HS8381 Interpersonal Skills/Listening
EEC 2 0 0 2 1
& Speaking
2. HS8461 Advanced Reading and
EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Writing
3. CS8611 Mini Project EEC 2 0 0 2 1
4. HS8581 Professional Communication EEC 2 0 0 2 1
5. CS8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10

17
 SUMMARY

[Link]. SUBJECT CREDITS AS PER SEMESTER CREDITS Percentage

AREA TOTAL

II III IV V VI VII VIII

I

1. HS 4 7 3 14 7.60%
2. BS 12 74 4 4 31 16.8%
3. ES 9 59 23 12.5%
4. PC 5
10 19 18 20 10 82 44.5%
5. PE 3 6 6 15 8.15%
6. OE 3 3 6 3.3%
7. EEC 1 1 2 10 14 7.65%
Total 25 24 24 24 25 25 22 16 185
Non Credit /
8.
Mandatory

18
 L T P C
HS8151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
4 0 0 4

OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology
students.
 To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions; seeking clarifications.
 To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
 To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills

UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& FRIENDS 12

Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing-
completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language
development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech.
Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- count/ uncount nouns.

UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12

Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives and
descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short Listening
texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short
narrative descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening- telephonic
conversations. Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking leave-
Language development – prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing
meanings of words in context.

UNIT III GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12

Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure-
use of reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening – listening
to longer texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different sources.
Speaking- asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language development-
degrees of comparison- pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary development – single
word substitutes- adverbs.

UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12

Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines
Writing- letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email-
Listening- listening to dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them.
Speaking- speaking about oneself- speaking about one’s friend- Language development-
Tenses- simple present-simple past- present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary
development- synonyms-antonyms- phrasal verbs

19
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing
an outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks-
conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language
development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-collocations-
fixed and semi-fixed expressions.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
AT THE END OF THE COURSE, LEARNERS WILL BE ABLE TO:
• Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers.
• Participate effectively in informal conversations; introduce themselves and their friends and
express opinions in English.
• Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
• Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Coursebook for Undergarduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient BlackSwan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York: Rutledge,2011.
2. Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
CengageLearning ,USA: 2007
3. Redston, Chris &Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student’s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
4. Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively: Developing Speaking Skills for Business English.
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
5. Dutt P. Kiranmai and Rajeevan Geeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books: 2013.

MA8151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I L T P C

4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
The goal of this course is to achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of
traditional calculus. The syllabus is designed to provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the
purpose of modelling the engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions. This is a
foundation course which mainly deals with topics such as single variable and multivariable
calculus and plays an important role in the understanding of science, engineering, economics and
computer science, among other disciplines.

UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules -
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.

20
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change
of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions
of two variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of
undetermined multipliers.

UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by
parts, Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by
partial fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.

UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals.

UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of
parameters – Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous
linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following
skills:
 Use both the limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions.
 Apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.
 Evaluate integrals both by using Riemann sums and by using the Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus.
 Apply integration to compute multiple integrals, area, volume, integrals in polar
coordinates, in addition to change of order and change of variables.
 Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial fractions
and integration by parts.
 Determine convergence/divergence of improper integrals and evaluate convergent
improper integrals.
 Apply various techniques in solving differential equations.

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition,
2014.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems only), 2.8,
3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change
theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8].

REFERENCES:
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications,
New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
4. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
5. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.

21
 L T P C
PH8151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.

UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9

Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses - factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile
strength – torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and
experiment - bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment – uniform
and non-uniform bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to bending in
beams.

UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9

Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution – plane
progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers : population of energy levels, Einstein’s A and B
coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Semiconductor lasers:
homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture and acceptance
angle - types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – losses associated with optical
fibers - fibre optic sensors: pressure and displacement.

UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9

Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints - bimetallic
strips - thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal
conductivity - Forbe’s and Lee’s disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through
compound media (series and parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers,
refrigerators, ovens and solar water heaters.

UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9

Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification – wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its physical
significance – Schrödinger’s wave equation – time independent and time dependent equations –
particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning tunnelling microscope.

UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9

Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal
systems, Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar distances
- coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond structures -
crystal imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults – role of
imperfections in plastic deformation - growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth
techniques.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
 The students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its applications,
 The students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves and optical devices and
their applications in fibre optics,
 The students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties of
materials and their applications in expansion joints and heat exchangers,
 The students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory and its
applications in tunneling microscopes, and
 The students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal
growth techniques.

22
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. “Engineering Physics”. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. “Engineering Physics”. Cengage Learning India, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. “Principles of Physics”. Wiley, 2015.
2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”. Cengage Learning,
2010.
3. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’.
[Link], 2007.

CY8151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and
water treatment techniques.
 To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to single
and two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
 Preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.
 Types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
 Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and
fuel cells.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external
treatment – Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse
Osmosis.
UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9
Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from
solutions – adsorption isotherms – Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir’s adsorption
isotherm – contact theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir -
applications of adsorption on pollution abatement. Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria
– autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and catalytic promoters - acid base catalysis – applications
(catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis– Michaelis – Menten equation.

UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9

Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and effect of
alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase rule:
Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system - reduced
phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver system -
Pattinson process.

UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum -
manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil - cetane
number - natural gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - power
alcohol and biodiesel. Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and lower calorific
values- theoretical calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature - spontaneous ignition
temperature - explosive range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
23
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission
and fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant - breeder
reactor - solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and
supercapacitors: Types of batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid
battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells – H2-O2 fuel cell.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 The knowledge gained on engineering materials, fuels, energy sources and water treatment
techniques will facilitate better understanding of engineering processes and applications for
further learning.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley India PVT, LTD,
New Delhi, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, 2015.

GE8151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving
 To read and write simple Python programs.
 To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
 To define Python functions and call them.
 To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.

UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation
(pseudo code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies
for developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a
card in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.

UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9

Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments;
modules and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments;
Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables,
distance between two points.

UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9

Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values, parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
24
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.

UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9

Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort,
insertion sort, mergesort, histogram.

UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9

Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
 Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
 Read, write, execute by hand simple Python programs.
 Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
 Decompose a Python program into functions.
 Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016 ([Link]
python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and
updated for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised
and expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
2. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in
Python: An Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
3. Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,, 2015.
4. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning,
2012.
5. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational
Problem-Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
6. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An Introduction
to Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC,
2013.

GE8152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

2 0 4 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Engineering products.
 T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.

CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1

Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and

25
dimensioning.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of
Three Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial
views of objects

UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12

Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection
of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.

UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF

SURFACES 5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one
of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and
cones.

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6 +12

Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by
visual ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
 Familiarize with the fundamentals and standards of Engineering graphics
 Perform freehand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of
objects.
 Project orthographic projections of lines and plane surfaces.
 Draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.
 Visualize and to project isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2009.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.

REFERENCES:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 50th
Edition, 2010.
2. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores,
Bangalore, 2007.

26
 4. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern
Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
5. N. S. Parthasarathy and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press,
New Delhi, 2015.
6. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.

Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The
students will be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

GE8161 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LT PC

0 04 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
 To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
 Use functions for structuring Python programs.
 Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 Read and write data from/to files in Python.
LIST OF PROGRAMS:
1. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
2. Find the square root of a number (Newton’s method)
3. Exponentiation (power of a number)
4. Find the maximum of a list of numbers
5. Linear search and Binary search
6. Selection sort, Insertion sort
7. Merge sort
8. First n prime numbers
9. Multiply matrices
10. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
11. Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
12. Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
13. Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
PLATFORM NEEDED
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
 Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
 Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
 Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.

27
  Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
 Read and write data from/to files in Python.

BS8161
PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / [Link] Programmes)
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics,
thermal physics, properties of matter and liquids.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
 Apply principles of elasticity, optics and thermal properties for engineering applications.

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)

OBJECTIVES:
 To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
 To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometery.

1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in water
sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Determination of CMC.
15. Phase change in a solid.

28
 16. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.

OUTCOMES:
 The students will be outfitted with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis
of water quality related parameters.

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8TH edition, 2014).

HS8251 L T P C
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The Course prepares second semester engineering and Technology students to:
• Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend engineering
and technology texts.
• Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
• Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations, participate in group
discussions.
• Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in their
areas of specialization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12

Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing information-gap
exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short technical texts
from journals- newsapapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions – issue- writing
instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical vocabulary
Language Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.

UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12

Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking
– describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions
in a text- paragraphing- Writing- interpreting cgarts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-
vocabulary used in formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal
passive voice, numerical adjectives.

UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12

Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talkls on engineering/technology -Speaking –
introduction to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical,
practice in speed reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary
Development- sequence words- Misspelled words. Language Development- embedded
sentences

UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12

Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of
presentations- Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job
application – cover letter –Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and
issue based essays--Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-.
Language Development- clauses- if conditionals.

29
UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12
Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and
survey-Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported
speech.

TOTAL :60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course learners will be able to:
 Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
 Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialisation successfully.
 Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
 Write reports and winning job applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology.
Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles
and [Link] University Press: New Delhi,2014.
2. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
3. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
4. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
5. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning, USA: 2007

Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for supplementary
reading.

MA8251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C

4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
This course is designed to cover topics such as Matrix Algebra, Vector Calculus, Complex
Analysis and Laplace Transform. Matrix Algebra is one of the powerful tools to handle practical
problems arising in the field of engineering. Vector calculus can be widely used for modelling the
various laws of physics. The various methods of complex analysis and Laplace transforms can be
used for efficiently solving the problems that occur in various branches of engineering disciplines.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices –
Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic
forms.

UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
surface - Volume integral - Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.

30
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal
1 2
mapping – Mapping by functions w  z  c, cz, , z - Bilinear transformation.
z
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s
series – Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for
evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.

UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12

Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and
unit impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and
integrals – Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem –
Transform of periodic functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential
equations with constant coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After successfully completing the course, the student will have a good understanding of
the following topics and their applications:
 Eigen values and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix, Symmetric matrices, Positive
definite matrices and similar matrices.
 Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector point function and related identities.
 Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green’s
theorems and their verification.
 Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration.
 Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, various related
theorems and application to differential equations with constant coefficients.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2016.

REFERENCES :
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O’Neil, P.V. “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India
Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Sastry, S.S, “Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.

PHYSICS FOR INFORMATION SCIENCE L T P C

PH8252
(Common to CSE & IT) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the essential principles of Physics of semiconductor device and Electron
transport properties. Become proficient in magnetic and optical properties of materials and
Nano-electronic devices.
31
UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression - Wiedemann-Franz law – Success and failures - electrons in metals – Particle in a
three dimensional box – degenerate states – Fermi- Dirac statistics – Density of energy states –
Electron in periodic potential – Energy bands in solids – tight binding approximation - Electron
effective mass – concept of hole.

UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 9

Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect band gap semiconductors
– Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier
concentration in N-type & P-type semiconductors – Variation of carrier concentration with
temperature – variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration – Carrier
transport in Semiconductor: random motion, drift, mobility and diffusion – Hall effect and devices –
Ohmic contacts – Schottky diode.

UNIT III MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Magnetic dipole moment – atomic magnetic moments- magnetic permeability and susceptibility -
Magnetic material classification: diamagnetism – paramagnetism – ferromagnetism –
antiferromagnetism – ferrimagnetism – Ferromagnetism: origin and exchange interaction-
saturation magnetization and Curie temperature – Domain Theory- M versus H behaviour – Hard
and soft magnetic materials – examples and uses-– Magnetic principle in computer data storage
– Magnetic hard disc (GMR sensor).

UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classification of optical materials – carrier generation and recombination processes - Absorption
emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and semiconductors (concepts only) - photo
current in a P-N diode – solar cell - LED – Organic LED – Laser diodes – Optical data storage
techniques.

UNIT V NANO DEVICES 9

Electron density in bulk material – Size dependence of Fermi energy – Quantum confinement –
Quantum structures – Density of states in quantum well, quantum wire and quantum dot structure
- Band gap of nanomaterials – Tunneling: single electron phenomena and single electron
transistor – Quantum dot laser. Conductivity of metallic nanowires – Ballistic transport – Quantum
resistance and conductance – Carbon nanotubes: Properties and applications .

TOTAL :45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will able to
 Gain knowledge on classical and quantum electron theories, and energy band structuues,
 Acquire knowledge on basics of semiconductor physics and its applications in various
devices,
 Get knowledge on magnetic properties of materials and their applications in data storage,
 Have the necessary understanding on the functioning of optical materials for
optoelectronics,
 Understand the basics of quantum structures and their applications in carbon electronics..

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jasprit Singh, “Semiconductor Devices: Basic Principles”, Wiley 2012.
2. Kasap, S.O. “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, McGraw-Hill Education, 2007.
3. Kittel, C. “Introduction to Solid State Physics”. Wiley, 2005.

32
REFERENCES:
1. Garcia, N. & Damask, A. “Physics for Computer Science Students”. Springer-Verlag, 2012.
2. Hanson, G.W. “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”. Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Rogers, B., Adams, J. & Pennathur, S. “Nanotechnology: Understanding
Small Systems”. CRC Press, 2014.

BE8255 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND MEASUREMENT LTPC

ENGINEERING 3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the fundamentals of electronic circuit constructions.
 To learn the fundamental laws, theorems of electrical circuits and also to analyze them
 To study the basic principles of electrical machines and their performance
 To study the different energy sources, protective devices and their field applications
 To understand the principles and operation of measuring instruments and transducers

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ANALYSIS 9

Ohms Law, Kirchhoff’s Law-Instantaneous power- series and parallel circuit analysis with resistive,
capacitive and inductive network - nodal analysis, mesh analysis- network theorems - Thevenins
theorem, Norton theorem, maximum power transfer theorem and superposition theorem, three
phase supply-Instantaneous, Reactive and apparent power-star delta conversion.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
DC and AC ROTATING MACHINES:Types, Construction, principle, Emf and torque equation,
application Speed Control- Basics of Stepper Motor – Brushless DC motors- Transformers-
Introduction- types and construction, working principle of Ideal transformer-Emf equation- All day
efficiency calculation.
UNIT III UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER 9
Renewable energy sources-wind and solar panels. Illumination by lamps- Sodium Vapour,
Mercury vapour, Fluorescent tube. Domestic refrigerator and air conditioner-Electric circuit,
construction and working principle. Batteries-NiCd, Pb Acid and Li ion–Charge and Discharge
Characteristics. Protection-need for earthing, fuses and circuit [Link] Tariff calculation
for domestic loads.

UNIT IV ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS 9

PN Junction-VI Characteristics of Diode, zener diode, Transistors configurations - amplifiers. Op
amps- Amplifiers, oscillator,rectifiers, differentiator, integrator, ADC, DAC. Multi vibrator using 555
Timer IC . Voltage regulator IC using LM 723,LM 317.

UNIT V ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENT 9

Characteristic of measurement-errors in measurement, torque in indicating instruments- moving
coil and moving iron meters, Energy meter and watt meter. Transducers- classification-thermo
electric, RTD, Strain gauge, LVDT, LDR and piezoelectric. Oscilloscope-CRO.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Discuss the essentials of electric circuits and analysis.
 Discuss the basic operation of electric machines and transformers
 Introduction of renewable sources and common domestic loads.
 Introduction to measurement and metering for electric circuits.

33
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.P. Kotharti and I.J Nagarath, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering,
Mc Graw Hill, 2016,Third Edition.
2. M.S. Sukhija and T.K. Nagsarkar, Basic Electrical and Electronic Engineering, Oxford, 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. S.B. Lal Seksena and Kaustuv Dasgupta, Fundaments of Electrical Engineering,
Cambridge, 2016
2. B.L Theraja, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics. Chand
& Co, 2008.
3. [Link], Basic of Electrical Engineering, Pearson, 2015
4. John Bird, ―Electrical and Electronic Principles and Technologyǁ, Fourth Edition, Elsevier,
2010.
5. Mittle,Mittal, Basic Electrical Engineeringǁ, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, 2016.
6. [Link], “Generation, Distribution and Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, New Age
international [Link].,2003.

GE8291 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the nature and facts about environment.
 To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
 To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
 To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world;
envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
 To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth‟s interior and
surface.
 To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and
waste management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams,
lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and
ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity: consumptive
use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national
and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to
biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic
species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field
study of common plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes,
etc.

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8

Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid
waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an
individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial /
Agricultural.

34
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over- utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems –
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral
resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity,
case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy
sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land as a resource, land
degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field
study of local area to document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.

UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7

From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy –
water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental
organization- environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global
warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. –
wasteland reclamation – consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act –
Wildlife protection act – Forest conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in
environmental legislation- central and state pollution control boards- Public awareness.

UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6

Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and
child welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Environmental Pollution or problems cannot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is an
important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One will obtain knowledge on
the following after completing the course.
 Public awareness of environmental is at infant stage.
 Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
 Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Gilbert [Link], ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.

REFERENCES :
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD,New Delhi, 2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,
Hydrabad, 2015.
3. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, 2005.
4. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning India
PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2014.

35
CS8251 PROGRAMMING IN C LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop C Programs using basic programming constructs
 To develop C programs using arrays and strings
 To develop applications in C using functions , pointers and structures
 To do input/output and file handling in C

UNIT I BASICS OF C PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction to programming paradigms - Structure of C program - C programming: Data Types –
Storage classes - Constants – Enumeration Constants - Keywords – Operators: Precedence and
Associativity - Expressions - Input/Output statements, Assignment statements – Decision making
statements - Switch statement - Looping statements – Pre-processor directives - Compilation
process

UNIT II ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9

Introduction to Arrays: Declaration, Initialization – One dimensional array – Example Program:
Computing Mean, Median and Mode - Two dimensional arrays – Example Program: Matrix
Operations (Addition, Scaling, Determinant and Transpose) - String operations: length, compare,
concatenate, copy – Selection sort, linear and binary search

UNIT III FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 9

Introduction to functions: Function prototype, function definition, function call, Built-in functions
(string functions, math functions) – Recursion – Example Program: Computation of Sine series,
Scientific calculator using built-in functions, Binary Search using recursive functions – Pointers –
Pointer operators – Pointer arithmetic – Arrays and pointers – Array of pointers – Example
Program: Sorting of names – Parameter passing: Pass by value, Pass by reference – Example
Program: Swapping of two numbers and changing the value of a variable using pass by reference

UNIT IV STRUCTURES 9
Structure - Nested structures – Pointer and Structures – Array of structures – Example Program
using structures and pointers – Self referential structures – Dynamic memory allocation - Singly
linked list - typedef

UNIT V FILE PROCESSING 9

Files – Types of file processing: Sequential access, Random access – Sequential access file -
Example Program: Finding average of numbers stored in sequential access file - Random access
file - Example Program: Transaction processing using random access files – Command line
arguments

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
 Develop simple applications in C using basic constructs
 Design and implement applications using arrays and strings
 Develop and implement applications in C using functions and pointers.
 Develop applications in C using structures.
 Design applications using sequential and random access file processing.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reema Thareja, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2016.
2. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie,D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition,
Pearson Education, 2006

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “C How to Program”, Seventh edition, Pearson Publication
2. Juneja, B. L and Anita Seth, “Programming in C”, CENGAGE Learning India pvt. Ltd., 2011
36
 3. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2009.
4. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, Dorling
Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education in South Asia, 2011.
5. Byron S. Gottfried, "Schaum's Outline of Theory and Problems of Programming with
C",McGraw-Hill Education, 1996.

GE8261 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.

GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)

I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

BUILDINGS:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings.
Safety
aspects.

PLUMBING WORKS:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions,
reducers,
elbows in household fittings.
(b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.

(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.

CARPENTRY USING POWER TOOLS ONLY:

(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.

II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18

WELDING:
(a) Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
(b) Gas welding practice

BASIC MACHINING:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Drilling Practice

SHEET METAL WORK:

(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays and funnels.
(c) Different type of joints.
MACHINE ASSEMBLY PRACTICE:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
37
 (b) Study of air conditioner
DEMONSTRATION ON:
(a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
(c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.

GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)

III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC
circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding
measurement of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
Fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works.
Use welding equipments to join the structures.
Carry out the basic machining operations
Make the models using sheet metal works
Illustrate on centrifugal pump, Air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundary and
fittings
Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
Measure the electrical quantities
Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fittings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos
MECHANICAL

1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.

38
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each.

ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
supply

CS8261 C PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop programs in C using basic constructs.
 To develop applications in C using strings, pointers, functions, structures.
 To develop applications in C using file processing.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Programs using I/O statements and expressions.
2. Programs using decision-making constructs.
3. Write a program to find whether the given year is leap year or Not? (Hint: not every
centurion year is a leap. For example 1700, 1800 and 1900 is not a leap year)
4. Design a calculator to perform the operations, namely, addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division and square of a number.
5. Check whether a given number is Armstrong number or not?
6. Given a set of numbers like <10, 36, 54, 89, 12, 27>, find sum of weights based on the
following conditions.
 5 if it is a perfect cube.
 4 if it is a multiple of 4 and divisible by 6.
 3 if it is a prime number.
Sort the numbers based on the weight in the increasing order as shown below
<10,its weight>,<36,its weight><89,its weight>
7. Populate an array with height of persons and find how many persons are above the
average height.
8. Populate a two dimensional array with height and weight of persons and compute the Body
Mass Index of the individuals.
9. Given a string “a$bcd./fg” find its reverse without changing the position of special
characters.
(Example input:a@gh%;j and output:j@hg%;a)
39
 10. Convert the given decimal number into binary, octal and hexadecimal numbers using user
defined functions.
11. From a given paragraph perform the following using built-in functions:
a. Find the total number of words.
b. Capitalize the first word of each sentence.
c. Replace a given word with another word.
12. Solve towers of Hanoi using recursion.
13. Sort the list of numbers using pass by reference.
14. Generate salary slip of employees using structures and pointers.
15. Compute internal marks of students for five different subjects using structures and
functions.
16. Insert, update, delete and append telephone details of an individual or a company into a
telephone directory using random access file.
17. Count the number of account holders whose balance is less than the minimum balance
using sequential access file.
Mini project
18. Create a “Railway reservation system” with the following modules
 Booking
 Availability checking
 Cancellation
 Prepare chart
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Develop C programs for simple applications making use of basic constructs, arrays and
strings.
 Develop C programs involving functions, recursion, pointers, and structures.
 Design applications using sequential and random access file processing.

MA8351 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS L T P C

4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To extend student’s logical and mathematical maturity and ability to deal with abstraction.
 To introduce most of the basic terminologies used in computer science courses and
application of ideas to solve practical problems.
 To understand the basic concepts of combinatorics and graph theory.
 To familiarize the applications of algebraic structures.
 To understand the concepts and significance of lattices and boolean algebra which are
widely used in computer science and engineering.

UNIT I LOGIC AND PROOFS 12

Propositional logic – Propositional equivalences - Predicates and quantifiers – Nested quantifiers –
Rules of inference - Introduction to proofs – Proof methods and strategy.

UNIT II COMBINATORICS 12
Mathematical induction – Strong induction and well ordering – The basics of counting – The
pigeonhole principle – Permutations and combinations – Recurrence relations – Solving linear
recurrence relations – Generating functions – Inclusion and exclusion principle and its applications

UNIT III GRAPHS 12

Graphs and graph models – Graph terminology and special types of graphs – Matrix
representation of graphs and graph isomorphism – Connectivity – Euler and Hamilton paths.

40
UNIT IV ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURES 12
Algebraic systems – Semi groups and monoids - Groups – Subgroups – Homomorphism’s –
Normal subgroup and cosets – Lagrange’s theorem – Definitions and examples of Rings and
Fields.

UNIT V LATTICES AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA 12

Partial ordering – Posets – Lattices as posets – Properties of lattices - Lattices as algebraic
systems – Sub lattices – Direct product and homomorphism – Some special lattices – Boolean
algebra.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students would:
 Have knowledge of the concepts needed to test the logic of a program.
 Have an understanding in identifying structures on many levels.
 Be aware of a class of functions which transform a finite set into another finite set which
relates to input and output functions in computer science.
 Be aware of the counting principles.
 Be exposed to concepts and properties of algebraic structures such as groups, rings and
fields.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rosen, K.H., "Discrete Mathematics and its Applications", 7th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, Special Indian Edition, 2011.
2. Tremblay, J.P. and Manohar.R, " Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to
Computer Science", Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 30th Reprint, 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. Grimaldi, R.P. "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics: An Applied Introduction", 4th Edition,
Pearson Education Asia, Delhi, 2007.
2. Lipschutz, S. and Mark Lipson., "Discrete Mathematics", Schaum’s Outlines, Tata McGraw Hill
Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2010.
3. Koshy, T. "Discrete Mathematics with Applications", Elsevier Publications, 2006.

CS8351 DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C

4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To design digital circuits using simplified Boolean functions
• To analyze and design combinational circuits
• To analyze and design synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuits
• To understand Programmable Logic Devices
• To write HDL code for combinational and sequential circuits

UNIT I BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES 12

Number Systems - Arithmetic Operations - Binary Codes- Boolean Algebra and Logic Gates
- Theorems and Properties of Boolean Algebra - Boolean Functions - Canonical and
Standard Forms - Simplification of Boolean Functions using Karnaugh Map - Logic Gates –
NAND and NOR Implementations.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC 12

Combinational Circuits – Analysis and Design Procedures - Binary Adder-Subtractor -
Decimal Adder - Binary Multiplier - Magnitude Comparator - Decoders – Encoders –
Multiplexers - Introduction to HDL – HDL Models of Combinational circuits.
41
 UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 12
Sequential Circuits - Storage Elements: Latches , Flip-Flops - Analysis of Clocked
Sequential Circuits - State Reduction and Assignment - Design Procedure - Registers and
Counters - HDL Models of Sequential Circuits.

UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 12

Analysis and Design of Asynchronous Sequential Circuits – Reduction of State and Flow
Tables – Race-free State Assignment – Hazards.

UNIT V MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC 12

RAM – Memory Decoding – Error Detection and Correction - ROM - Programmable Logic
Array – Programmable Array Logic – Sequential Programmable Devices.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Simplify Boolean functions using KMap
 Design and Analyze Combinational and Sequential Circuits
 Implement designs using Programmable Logic Devices
 Write HDL code for combinational and Sequential Circuits

TEXT BOOK:
1. M. Morris R. Mano, Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design: With an Introduction to the
Verilog HDL, VHDL, and SystemVerilog”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. G. K. Kharate, Digital Electronics, Oxford University Press, 2010
2. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practices, Fifth Edition, Pearson
Education, 2017.
3. Charles H. Roth Jr, Larry L. Kinney, Fundamentals of Logic Design, Sixth Edition,
CENGAGE Learning, 2013
4. Donald D. Givone, Digital Principles and Designǁ, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2003.

CS8391 DATA STRUCTURES LT PC

30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concepts of ADTs
 To Learn linear data structures – lists, stacks, and queues
 To understand sorting, searching and hashing algorithms
 To apply Tree and Graph structures

UNIT I LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – LIST 9

Abstract Data Types (ADTs) – List ADT – array-based implementation – linked list implementation
––singly linked lists- circularly linked lists- doubly-linked lists – applications of lists –Polynomial
Manipulation – All operations (Insertion, Deletion, Merge, Traversal).

UNIT II LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – STACKS, QUEUES 9

Stack ADT – Operations - Applications - Evaluating arithmetic expressions- Conversion of Infix to
postfix expression - Queue ADT – Operations - Circular Queue – Priority Queue - deQueue –
applications of queues.

42
UNIT III NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – TREES 9
Tree ADT – tree traversals - Binary Tree ADT – expression trees – applications of trees – binary
search tree ADT –Threaded Binary Trees- AVL Trees – B-Tree - B+ Tree - Heap – Applications of
heap.

UNIT IV NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES - GRAPHS 9

Definition – Representation of Graph – Types of graph - Breadth-first traversal - Depth-first
traversal – Topological Sort – Bi-connectivity – Cut vertex – Euler circuits – Applications of graphs.

UNIT V SEARCHING, SORTING AND HASHING TECHNIQUES 9

Searching- Linear Search - Binary Search. Sorting - Bubble sort - Selection sort - Insertion sort -
Shell sort – Radix sort. Hashing- Hash Functions – Separate Chaining – Open Addressing –
Rehashing – Extendible Hashing.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
 Implement abstract data types for linear data structures.
 Apply the different linear and non-linear data structures to problem solutions.
 Critically analyze the various sorting algorithms.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education,1997.
2. Reema Thareja, “Data Structures Using C”, Second Edition , Oxford University Press, 2011

REFERENCES:
1. Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald [Link], Clifford Stein, “Introduction to
Algorithms", Second Edition, Mcgraw Hill, 2002.
2. Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson Education,1983.
3. Stephen G. Kochan, “Programming in C”, 3rd edition, Pearson Education.
4. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”,
Second Edition, University Press, 2008

CS8392 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand Object Oriented Programming concepts and basic characteristics of Java
 To know the principles of packages, inheritance and interfaces
 To define exceptions and use I/O streams
 To develop a java application with threads and generics classes
 To design and build simple Graphical User Interfaces

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OOP AND JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 10

Object Oriented Programming - Abstraction – objects and classes - Encapsulation- Inheritance -
Polymorphism- OOP in Java – Characteristics of Java – The Java Environment - Java Source
File -Structure – Compilation. Fundamental Programming Structures in Java – Defining classes in
Java – constructors, methods -access specifiers - static members -Comments, Data Types,
Variables, Operators, Control Flow, Arrays , Packages - JavaDoc comments.

UNIT II INHERITANCE AND INTERFACES 9

Inheritance – Super classes- sub classes –Protected members – constructors in sub classes- the
Object class – abstract classes and methods- final methods and classes – Interfaces – defining an
interface, implementing interface, differences between classes and interfaces and extending
43
interfaces - Object cloning -inner classes, Array Lists - Strings

UNIT III EXCEPTION HANDLING AND I/O 9

Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions – built-in exceptions, creating
own exceptions, Stack Trace Elements. Input / Output Basics – Streams – Byte streams and
Character streams – Reading and Writing Console – Reading and Writing Files

UNIT IV MULTITHREADING AND GENERIC PROGRAMMING 8

Differences between multi-threading and multitasking, thread life cycle, creating threads,
synchronizing threads, Inter-thread communication, daemon threads, thread groups. Generic
Programming – Generic classes – generic methods – Bounded Types – Restrictions and
Limitations.

UNIT V EVENT DRIVEN PROGRAMMING 9

Graphics programming - Frame – Components - working with 2D shapes - Using color, fonts, and
images - Basics of event handling - event handlers - adapter classes - actions - mouse events -
AWT event hierarchy - Introduction to Swing – layout management - Swing Components – Text
Fields , Text Areas – Buttons- Check Boxes – Radio Buttons – Lists- choices- Scrollbars –
Windows –Menus – Dialog Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
 Develop Java programs using OOP principles
 Develop Java programs with the concepts inheritance and interfaces
 Build Java applications using exceptions and I/O streams
 Develop Java applications with threads and generics classes
 Develop interactive Java programs using swings

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Herbert Schildt, “Java The complete reference”, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
2. Cay S. Horstmann, Gary cornell, “Core Java Volume –I Fundamentals”, 9th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, “Java SE 8 for programmers”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2015.
2. Steven Holzner, “Java 2 Black book”, Dreamtech press, 2011.
3. Timothy Budd, “Understanding Object-oriented programming with Java”, Updated Edition,
Pearson Education, 2000.

EC8395 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the relevance of this course to the existing technology through demonstrations,
case studies, simulations, contributions of scientist, national/international policies with a
futuristic vision along with socio-economic impact and issues
 To study the various analog and digital modulation techniques
 To study the principles behind information theory and coding
 To study the various digital communication techniques

UNIT I ANALOG MODULATION 9

Amplitude Modulation – AM, DSBSC, SSBSC, VSB – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Angle
modulation – PM and FM – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Superheterodyne receivers

44
UNITII PULSE MODULATION 9
Low pass sampling theorem – Quantization – PAM – Line coding – PCM, DPCM, DM, and
ADPCM And ADM, Channel Vocoder - Time Division Multiplexing, Frequency Division Multiplexing

UNIT III DIGITAL MODULATION AND TRANSMISSION 9

Phase shift keying – BPSK, DPSK, QPSK – Principles of M-ary signaling M-ary PSK & QAM –
Comparison, ISI – Pulse shaping – Duo binary encoding – Cosine filters – Eye pattern, equalizers

UNIT IV INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING 9

Measure of information – Entropy – Source coding theorem – Shannon–Fano coding, Huffman
Coding, LZ Coding – Channel capacity – Shannon-Hartley law – Shannon's limit – Error control
codes – Cyclic codes, Syndrome calculation – Convolution Coding, Sequential and Viterbi
decoding

UNIT V SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS 9

PN sequences – properties – m-sequence – DSSS – Processing gain, Jamming – FHSS –
Synchronisation and tracking – Multiple Access – FDMA, TDMA, CDMA,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
 Ability to comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world
 Apply analog and digital communication techniques.
 Use data and pulse communication techniques.
 Analyze Source and Error control coding.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. H Taub, D L Schilling, G Saha, “Principles of Communication Systems” 3/e, TMH 2007
2. S. Haykin “Digital Communications” John Wiley 2005

REFERENCES:
1. [Link], “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3rd edition, Oxford
University Press, 2007
2. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series – “Analog and Digital Communications” TMH 2006
3. [Link], Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications” 2/e Pearson
Education 2007.

CS8381 DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
OBJECTIVES
 To implement linear and non-linear data structures
 To understand the different operations of search trees
 To implement graph traversal algorithms
 To get familiarized to sorting and searching algorithms

1. Array implementation of Stack and Queue ADTs

2. Array implementation of List ADT
3. Linked list implementation of List, Stack and Queue ADTs
4. Applications of List, Stack and Queue ADTs
5. Implementation of Binary Trees and operations of Binary Trees
6. Implementation of Binary Search Trees
7. Implementation of AVL Trees
8. Implementation of Heaps using Priority Queues.
45
 9. Graph representation and Traversal algorithms
10. Applications of Graphs
11. Implementation of searching and sorting algorithms
12. Hashing – any two collision techniques
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
 Write functions to implement linear and non-linear data structure operations
 Suggest appropriate linear / non-linear data structure operations for solving a given
problem
 Appropriately use the linear / non-linear data structure operations for a given problem
 Apply appropriate hash functions that result in a collision free scenario for data storage and
retrieval

CS8383 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
OBJECTIVES
 To build software development skills using java programming for real-world applications.
 To understand and apply the concepts of classes, packages, interfaces, arraylist, exception
handling and file processing.
 To develop applications using generic programming and event handling.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Develop a Java application to generate Electricity bill. Create a class with the following
members: Consumer no., consumer name, previous month reading, current month reading,
type of EB connection (i.e domestic or commercial). Compute the bill amount using the
following tariff.
If the type of the EB connection is domestic, calculate the amount to be paid as follows:
 First 100 units - Rs. 1 per unit
 101-200 units - Rs. 2.50 per unit
 201 -500 units - Rs. 4 per unit
 > 501 units - Rs. 6 per unit

If the type of the EB connection is commercial, calculate the amount to be paid as follows:
 First 100 units - Rs. 2 per unit
 101-200 units - Rs. 4.50 per unit
 201 -500 units - Rs. 6 per unit
 > 501 units - Rs. 7 per unit

2. Develop a java application to implement currency converter (Dollar to INR, EURO to INR, Yen
to INR and vice versa), distance converter (meter to KM, miles to KM and vice versa) , time
converter (hours to minutes, seconds and vice versa) using packages.

3. Develop a java application with Employee class with Emp_name, Emp_id, Address, Mail_id,
Mobile_no as members. Inherit the classes, Programmer, Assistant Professor, Associate
Professor and Professor from employee class. Add Basic Pay (BP) as the member of all the
inherited classes with 97% of BP as DA, 10 % of BP as HRA, 12% of BP as PF, 0.1% of BP for
staff club fund. Generate pay slips for the employees with their gross and net salary.

4. Design a Java interface for ADT Stack. Implement this interface using array. Provide
necessary exception handling in both the implementations.

46
5. Write a program to perform string operations using ArrayList. Write functions for the following

a. Append - add at end

b. Insert – add at particular index
c. Search
d. List all string starts with given letter
6. Write a Java Program to create an abstract class named Shape that contains two integers and
an empty method named print Area(). Provide three classes named Rectangle, Triangle and
Circle such that each one of the classes extends the class Shape. Each one of the classes
contains only the method print Area () that prints the area of the given shape.
7. Write a Java program to implement user defined exception handling.
8. Write a Java program that reads a file name from the user, displays information about whether
the file exists, whether the file is readable, or writable, the type of file and the length of the file
in bytes.
9. Write a java program that implements a multi-threaded application that has three threads. First
thread generates a random integer every 1 second and if the value is even, second thread
computes the square of the number and prints. If the value is odd, the third thread will print the
value of cube of the number.
10. Write a java program to find the maximum value from the given type of elements using a
generic function.
11. Design a calculator using event-driven programming paradigm of Java with the following
options.
a) Decimal manipulations
b) Scientific manipulations
12. Develop a mini project for any application using Java concepts.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
 Develop and implement Java programs for simple applications that make use of classes,
packages and interfaces.
 Develop and implement Java programs with arraylist, exception handling and
multithreading .
 Design applications using file processing, generic programming and event handling.

CS8382 DIGITAL SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the various basic logic gates
 To design and implement the various combinational circuits
 To design and implement combinational circuits using MSI devices.
 To design and implement sequential circuits
 To understand and code with HDL programming

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of Boolean Theorems using basic gates.
2. Design and implementation of combinational circuits using basic gates for arbitrary
47
 functions, code converters.
3. Design and implement Half/Full Adder and Subtractor.
4. Design and implement combinational circuits using MSI devices:
 4 – bit binary adder / subtractor
 Parity generator / checker
 Magnitude Comparator
 Application using multiplexers
5. Design and implement shift-registers.
6. Design and implement synchronous counters.
7. Design and implement asynchronous counters.
8. Coding combinational circuits using HDL.
9. Coding sequential circuits using HDL.
10. Design and implementation of a simple digital system (Mini Project).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Implement simplified combinational circuits using basic logic gates
 Implement combinational circuits using MSI devices
 Implement sequential circuits like registers and counters
 Simulate combinational and sequential circuits using HDL

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

LABORATORY REQUIREMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS HARDWARE:
1. Digital trainer kits - 30
2. Digital ICs required for the experiments in sufficient numbers

SOFTWARE:
1. HDL simulator.

L T P C
HS8381 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS/LISTENING&SPEAKING
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
The Course will enable learners to:
• Equip students with the English language skills required for the successful undertaking of
academic studies with primary emphasis on academic speaking and listening skills.
• Provide guidance and practice in basic general and classroom conversation and to engage in
specific academic speaking activities.
• improve general and academic listening skills
• Make effective presentations.

UNIT I
Listening as a key skill- its importance- speaking - give personal information - ask for personal
information - express ability - enquire about ability - ask for clarification Improving pronunciation -
pronunciation basics taking lecture notes - preparing to listen to a lecture - articulate a complete
idea as opposed to producing fragmented utterances.

UNIT II
Listen to a process information- give information, as part of a simple explanation - conversation
starters: small talk - stressing syllables and speaking clearly - intonation patterns - compare and
contrast information and ideas from multiple sources- converse with reasonable accuracy over a
wide range of everyday topics.

48
UNIT III
Lexical chunking for accuracy and fluency- factors influence fluency, deliver a five-minute informal
talk - greet - respond to greetings - describe health and symptoms - invite and offer - accept -
decline - take leave - listen for and follow the gist- listen for detail

UNIT IV
Being an active listener: giving verbal and non-verbal feedback - participating in a group
discussion - summarizing academic readings and lectures conversational speech listening to and
participating in conversations - persuade.

UNIT V
Formal and informal talk - listen to follow and respond to explanations, directions and instructions
in academic and business contexts - strategies for presentations and interactive communication -
group/pair presentations - negotiate disagreement in group work.
TOTAL :30PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
 Listen and respond appropriately.
 Participate in group discussions
 Make effective presentations
 Participate confidently and appropriately in conversations both formal and informal

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Brooks,Margret. Skills for Success. Listening and Speaking. Level 4 Oxford University Press,
Oxford: 2011.
2. Richards,C. Jack. & David Bholke. Speak Now Level 3. Oxford University Press, Oxford:
2010

REFERENCES:
1. Bhatnagar, Nitin and MamtaBhatnagar. Communicative English for Engineers and
Professionals. Pearson: New Delhi, 2010.
2. Hughes, Glyn and Josephine Moate. Practical English Classroom. Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2014.
3. Vargo, Mari. Speak Now Level 4. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2013.
4. Richards C. Jack. Person to Person (Starter). Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2006.
5. Ladousse, Gillian Porter. Role Play. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2014

MA8402 PROBABILITY AND QUEUING THEORY L T P C

4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications
such as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
 To understand the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random
variables and to introduce some standard distributions applicable to engineering which can
describe real life phenomenon.
 To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in IT fields.
 To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
 To understand the significance of advanced queueing models.
 To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop
probabilistic models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
49
UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Probability – Axioms of probability – Conditional probability – Baye’s theorem - Discrete and
continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Binomial, Poisson,
Geometric, Uniform, Exponential and Normal distributions.

UNIT II TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 12

Joint distributions – Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance – Correlation and linear
regression – Transformation of random variables – Central limit theorem (for independent and
identically distributed random variables).

UNIT III RANDOM PROCESSES 12

Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.

UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 12

Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models –
Little’s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms – Queues with impatient customers : Balking
and reneging.

UNIT V ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 12

Finite source models - M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special
cases – Series queues – Open Jackson networks.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Understand the fundamental knowledge of the concepts of probability and have knowledge
of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomenon.
 Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
 Apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines.
 Acquire skills in analyzing queueing models.
 Understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time in a
probabilistic manner

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gross, D., Shortle, J.F, Thompson, J.M and Harris. C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory",
Wiley Student 4th Edition, 2014.
2. Ibe, O.C., “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes", Elsevier, 1st Indian
Reprint, 2007.

REFERENCES :
1. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and
Random Processes", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi,
2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Yates, R.D. and Goodman. D. J., "Probability and Stochastic Processes", 2nd Edition, Wiley
India Pvt. Ltd., Bangalore, 2012.

50
 CS8491 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the basic structure and operations of a computer.
• To learn the arithmetic and logic unit and implementation of fixed-point and floating point
arithmetic unit.
• To learn the basics of pipelined execution.
• To understand parallelism and multi-core processors.
• To understand the memory hierarchies, cache memories and virtual memories.
• To learn the different ways of communication with I/O devices.

UNIT I BASIC STRUCTURE OF A COMPUTER SYSTEM 9

Functional Units – Basic Operational Concepts – Performance – Instructions: Language of
the Computer – Operations, Operands – Instruction representation – Logical operations –
decision making – MIPS Addressing.

UNIT II ARITHMETIC FOR COMPUTERS 9

Addition and Subtraction – Multiplication – Division – Floating Point Representation –
Floating Point Operations – Subword Parallelism

UNIT III PROCESSOR AND CONTROL UNIT 9

A Basic MIPS implementation – Building a Datapath – Control Implementation Scheme –
Pipelining – Pipelined datapath and control – Handling Data Hazards & Control Hazards –
Exceptions.

UNIT IV PARALLELISIM 9
Parallel processing challenges – Flynn’s classification – SISD, MIMD, SIMD, SPMD, and
Vector Architectures - Hardware multithreading – Multi-core processors and other Shared
Memory Multiprocessors - Introduction to Graphics Processing Units, Clusters, Warehouse
Scale Computers and other Message-Passing Multiprocessors.

UNIT V MEMORY & I/O SYSTEMS 9

Memory Hierarchy - memory technologies – cache memory – measuring and improving
cache performance – virtual memory, TLB’s – Accessing I/O Devices – Interrupts – Direct
Memory Access – Bus structure – Bus operation – Arbitration – Interface circuits - USB.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Understand the basics structure of computers, operations and instructions.
 Design arithmetic and logic unit.
 Understand pipelined execution and design control unit.
 Understand parallel processing architectures.
 Understand the various memory systems and I/O communication.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software Interface, Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 2014.
2. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky and Naraig Manjikian, Computer
Organization and Embedded Systems, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for
Performance, Eighth Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. John P. Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, Third Edition, Tata
51
 McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture – A Quantitative
Approachǁ, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2012.

CS8492 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES
 To learn the fundamentals of data models and to represent a database system using ER
diagrams.
 To study SQL and relational database design.
 To understand the internal storage structures using different file and indexing
techniques which will help in physical DB design.
 To understand the fundamental concepts of transaction processing- concurrency
control techniques and recovery procedures.
 To have an introductory knowledge about the Storage and Query processing
Techniques

UNIT I RELATIONAL DATABASES 10

Purpose of Database System – Views of data – Data Models – Database System Architecture –
Introduction to relational databases – Relational Model – Keys – Relational Algebra – SQL
fundamentals – Advanced SQL features – Embedded SQL– Dynamic SQL

UNIT II DATABASE DESIGN 8

Entity-Relationship model – E-R Diagrams – Enhanced-ER Model – ER-to-Relational Mapping –
Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – First, Second, Third Normal Forms,
Dependency Preservation – Boyce/Codd Normal Form – Multi-valued Dependencies and Fourth
Normal Form – Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form

UNIT III TRANSACTIONS 9

Transaction Concepts – ACID Properties – Schedules – Serializability – Concurrency Control –
Need for Concurrency – Locking Protocols – Two Phase Locking – Deadlock – Transaction
Recovery - Save Points – Isolation Levels – SQL Facilities for Concurrency and Recovery.

UNIT IV IMPLEMENTATION TECHNIQUES 9

RAID – File Organization – Organization of Records in Files – Indexing and Hashing –Ordered
Indices – B+ tree Index Files – B tree Index Files – Static Hashing – Dynamic Hashing – Query
Processing Overview – Algorithms for SELECT and JOIN operations – Query optimization using
Heuristics and Cost Estimation.

UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS 9

Distributed Databases: Architecture, Data Storage, Transaction Processing – Object-based
Databases: Object Database Concepts, Object-Relational features, ODMG Object Model, ODL,
OQL - XML Databases: XML Hierarchical Model, DTD, XML Schema, XQuery – Information
Retrieval: IR Concepts, Retrieval Models, Queries in IR systems.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Classify the modern and futuristic database applications based on size and complexity
 Map ER model to Relational model to perform database design effectively
 Write queries using normalization criteria and optimize queries
 Compare and contrast various indexing strategies in different database systems
 Appraise how advanced databases differ from traditional databases.
52
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, Sixth
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Sixth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. [Link], [Link], [Link], “An Introduction to Database Systems”, Eighth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, ―Database Management Systemsǁ, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill
College Publications, 2015.
3. [Link],"Database Management Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.

CS8451 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS LTPC

30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand and apply the algorithm analysis techniques.
 To critically analyze the efficiency of alternative algorithmic solutions for the same problem
 To understand different algorithm design techniques.
 To understand the limitations of Algorithmic power.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Notion of an Algorithm – Fundamentals of Algorithmic Problem Solving – Important Problem Types
– Fundamentals of the Analysis of Algorithmic Efficiency –Asymptotic Notations and their
properties. Analysis Framework – Empirical analysis - Mathematical analysis for Recursive and
Non-recursive algorithms - Visualization
UNIT II BRUTE FORCE AND DIVIDE-AND-CONQUER 9
Brute Force – Computing an – String Matching - Closest-Pair and Convex-Hull Problems -
Exhaustive Search - Travelling Salesman Problem - Knapsack Problem - Assignment problem.
Divide and Conquer Methodology – Binary Search – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap Sort -
Multiplication of Large Integers – Closest-Pair and Convex - Hull Problems.

UNIT III DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AND GREEDY TECHNIQUE 9

Dynamic programming – Principle of optimality - Coin changing problem, Computing a Binomial
Coefficient – Floyd’s algorithm – Multi stage graph - Optimal Binary Search Trees – Knapsack
Problem and Memory functions.
Greedy Technique – Container loading problem - Prim’s algorithm and Kruskal's Algorithm – 0/1
Knapsack problem, Optimal Merge pattern - Huffman Trees.
UNIT IV ITERATIVE IMPROVEMENT 9
The Simplex Method - The Maximum-Flow Problem – Maximum Matching in Bipartite Graphs,
Stable marriage Problem.

UNIT V COPING WITH THE LIMITATIONS OF ALGORITHM POWER 9

Lower - Bound Arguments - P, NP NP- Complete and NP Hard Problems. Backtracking – n-Queen
problem - Hamiltonian Circuit Problem – Subset Sum Problem. Branch and Bound – LIFO Search
and FIFO search - Assignment problem – Knapsack Problem – Travelling Salesman Problem -
Approximation Algorithms for NP-Hard Problems – Travelling Salesman problem – Knapsack
problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

53
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Design algorithms for various computing problems.
 Analyze the time and space complexity of algorithms.
 Critically analyze the different algorithm design techniques for a given problem.
 Modify existing algorithms to improve efficiency.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms”, Third Edition,
Pearson Education, 2012.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, Computer Algorithms/ C++, Second
Edition, Universities Press, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Thomas [Link], Charles [Link], Ronald L. Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction
to Algorithms”, Third Edition, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
2. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”,
Pearson Education, Reprint 2006.
3. Harsh Bhasin, “Algorithms Design and Analysis”, Oxford university press, 2016.
4. S. Sridhar, “Design and Analysis of Algorithms”, Oxford university press, 2014.
5. [Link]

CS8493 OPERATING SYSTEMS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts and functions of operating systems.
 To understand Processes and Threads
 To analyze Scheduling algorithms.
 To understand the concept of Deadlocks.
 To analyze various memory management schemes.
 To understand I/O management and File systems.
 To be familiar with the basics of Linux system and Mobile OS like iOS and Android.

UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 7

Computer System Overview-Basic Elements, Instruction Execution, Interrupts, Memory Hierarchy,
Cache Memory, Direct Memory Access, Multiprocessor and Multicore Organization. Operating
system overview-objectives and functions, Evolution of Operating System.- Computer System
Organization Operating System Structure and Operations- System Calls, System Programs, OS
Generation and System Boot.

UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 11

Processes - Process Concept, Process Scheduling, Operations on Processes, Inter-process
Communication; CPU Scheduling - Scheduling criteria, Scheduling algorithms, Multiple-processor
scheduling, Real time scheduling; Threads- Overview, Multithreading models, Threading issues;
Process Synchronization - The critical-section problem, Synchronization hardware, Mutex locks,
Semaphores, Classic problems of synchronization, Critical regions, Monitors; Deadlock - System
model, Deadlock characterization, Methods for handling deadlocks, Deadlock prevention,
Deadlock avoidance, Deadlock detection, Recovery from deadlock.

UNIT III STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9

Main Memory – Background, Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation, Paging, Segmentation,
Segmentation with paging, 32 and 64 bit architecture Examples; Virtual Memory – Background,

54
Demand Paging, Page Replacement, Allocation, Thrashing; Allocating Kernel Memory, OS
Examples.

UNIT IV FILE SYSTEMS AND I/O SYSTEMS 9

Mass Storage system – Overview of Mass Storage Structure, Disk Structure, Disk Scheduling and
Management, swap space management; File-System Interface - File concept, Access methods,
Directory Structure, Directory organization, File system mounting, File Sharing and Protection; File
System Implementation- File System Structure, Directory implementation, Allocation Methods,
Free Space Management, Efficiency and Performance, Recovery; I/O Systems – I/O Hardware,
Application I/O interface, Kernel I/O subsystem, Streams, Performance.

UNIT V CASE STUDY 9

Linux System - Design Principles, Kernel Modules, Process Management, Scheduling, Memory
Management, Input-Output Management, File System, Inter-process Communication; Mobile OS -
iOS and Android - Architecture and SDK Framework, Media Layer, Services Layer, Core OS
Layer, File System.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Analyze various scheduling algorithms.
 Understand deadlock, prevention and avoidance algorithms.
 Compare and contrast various memory management schemes.
 Understand the functionality of file systems.
 Perform administrative tasks on Linux Servers.
 Compare iOS and Android Operating Systems.

TEXT BOOK :
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”,
9th Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2012.

REFERENCES :
1. Ramaz Elmasri, A. Gil Carrick, David Levine, “Operating Systems – A Spiral Approach”,
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2010.
2. Achyut [Link], Atul Kahate, “Operating Systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.
3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
4. Gary Nutt, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Harvey M. Deitel, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
6. Daniel P Bovet and Marco Cesati, “Understanding the Linux kernel”, 3rd edition, O’Reilly,
2005.
7. Neil Smyth, “iPhone iOS 4 Development Essentials – Xcode”, Fourth Edition, Payload media,
2011.

CS8494 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the phases in a software project
 To understand fundamental concepts of requirements engineering and Analysis Modeling.
 To understand the various software design methodologies
 To learn various testing and maintenance measures

UNIT I SOFTWARE PROCESS AND AGILE DEVELOPMENT 9

Introduction to Software Engineering, Software Process, Perspective and Specialized Process
Models –Introduction to Agility-Agile process-Extreme programming-XP Process.

55
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ANALYSIS AND SPECIFICATION 9
Software Requirements: Functional and Non-Functional, User requirements, System requirements,
Software Requirements Document – Requirement Engineering Process: Feasibility Studies,
Requirements elicitation and analysis, requirements validation, requirements management-
Classical analysis: Structured system Analysis, Petri Nets- Data Dictionary.

UNIT III SOFTWARE DESIGN 9

Design process – Design Concepts-Design Model– Design Heuristic – Architectural Design -
Architectural styles, Architectural Design, Architectural Mapping using Data Flow- User Interface
Design: Interface analysis, Interface Design –Component level Design: Designing Class based
components, traditional Components.

UNIT IV TESTING AND MAINTENANCE 9

Software testing fundamentals-Internal and external views of Testing-white box testing - basis
path testing-control structure testing-black box testing- Regression Testing – Unit Testing –
Integration Testing – Validation Testing – System Testing And Debugging –Software
Implementation Techniques: Coding practices-Refactoring-Maintenance and Reengineering-BPR
model-Reengineering process model-Reverse and Forward Engineering.
9
UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Software Project Management: Estimation – LOC, FP Based Estimation, Make/Buy Decision
COCOMO I & II Model – Project Scheduling – Scheduling, Earned Value Analysis Planning –
Project Plan, Planning Process, RFP Risk Management – Identification, Projection - Risk
Management-Risk Identification-RMMM Plan-CASE TOOLS
TOTAL :45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Identify the key activities in managing a software project.
 Compare different process models.
 Concepts of requirements engineering and Analysis Modeling.
 Apply systematic procedure for software design and deployment.
 Compare and contrast the various testing and maintenance.
 Manage project schedule, estimate project cost and effort required.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Roger S. Pressman, “Software Engineering – A Practitioner‟s Approach”, Seventh Edition, Mc
Graw-Hill International Edition, 2010.
2. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. Rajib Mall, “Fundamentals of Software Engineering”, Third Edition, PHI Learning
PrivateLimited, 2009.
2. Pankaj Jalote, “Software Engineering, A Precise Approach”, Wiley India, 2010.
3. Kelkar S.A., “Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2007.
4. Stephen [Link], “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited,2007.
5. [Link]

CS8481 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
AIM:
The aim of this laboratory is to inculcate the abilities of applying the principles of the database
management systems. This course aims to prepare the students for projects where a proper
implementation of databases will be required.
56
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand data definitions and data manipulation commands
 To learn the use of nested and join queries
 To understand functions, procedures and procedural extensions of data bases
 To be familiar with the use of a front end tool
 To understand design and implementation of typical database applications

1. Data Definition Commands, Data Manipulation Commands for inserting, deleting, updating
and retrieving Tables and Transaction Control statements
2. Database Querying – Simple queries, Nested queries, Sub queries and Joins
3. Views, Sequences, Synonyms
4. Database Programming: Implicit and Explicit Cursors
5. Procedures and Functions
6. Triggers
7. Exception Handling
8. Database Design using ER modeling, normalization and Implementation for any application
9. Database Connectivity with Front End Tools
10. Case Study using real life database applications
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Use typical data definitions and manipulation commands.
 Design applications to test Nested and Join Queries
 Implement simple applications that use Views
 Implement applications that require a Front-end Tool
 Critically analyze the use of Tables, Views, Functions and Procedures

CS8461 OPERATING SYSTEMS LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
OBJECTIVES
 To learn Unix commands and shell programming
 To implement various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
 To implement Process Creation and Inter Process Communication.
 To implement Deadlock Avoidance and Deadlock Detection Algorithms
 To implement Page Replacement Algorithms
 To implement File Organization and File Allocation Strategies

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Basics of UNIX commands
2. Write programs using the following system calls of UNIX operating system
fork, exec, getpid, exit, wait, close, stat, opendir, readdir
3. Write C programs to simulate UNIX commands like cp, ls, grep, etc.
4. Shell Programming
5. Write C programs to implement the various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
6. Implementation of Semaphores
7. Implementation of Shared memory and IPC
8. Bankers Algorithm for Deadlock Avoidance
9. Implementation of Deadlock Detection Algorithm
10. Write C program to implement Threading & Synchronization Applications
11. Implementation of the following Memory Allocation Methods for fixed partition
a) First Fit b) Worst Fit c) Best Fit
12. Implementation of Paging Technique of Memory Management
13. Implementation of the following Page Replacement Algorithms
a) FIFO b) LRU c) LFU
57
14. Implementation of the various File Organization Techniques
15. Implementation of the following File Allocation Strategies
a) Sequential b) Indexed c) Linked

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
 Compare the performance of various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
 Implement Deadlock avoidance and Detection Algorithms
 Implement Semaphores
 Create processes and implement IPC
 Analyze the performance of the various Page Replacement Algorithms
 Implement File Organization and File Allocation Strategies

L T P C
HS8461 ADVANCED READING AND WRITING
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
• Strengthen the reading skills of students of engineering.
• Enhance their writing skills with specific reference to technical writing.
• Develop students’ critical thinking skills.
• Provide more opportunities to develop their project and proposal writing skills.

UNIT I
Reading - Strategies for effective reading-Use glosses and footnotes to aid reading
comprehension- Read and recognize different text types-Predicting content using photos and title
Writing-Plan before writing- Develop a paragraph: topic sentence, supporting sentences,
concluding sentence –Write a descriptive paragraph

UNIT II
Reading-Read for details-Use of graphic organizers to review and aid comprehension Writing-
State reasons and examples to support ideas in writing- Write a paragraph with reasons and
examples- Write an opinion paragraph

UNIT III
Reading- Understanding pronoun reference and use of connectors in a passage- speed reading
techniques-Writing- Elements of a good essay-Types of essays- descriptive-narrative- issue-
based-argumentative-analytical.

UNIT IV
Reading- Genre and Organization of Ideas- Writing- Email writing- visumes – Job application-
project writing-writing convincing proposals.

UNIT V
Reading- Critical reading and thinking- understanding how the text positions the reader- identify
Writing- Statement of Purpose- letter of recommendation- Vision statement

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
 Write different types of essays.
 Write winning job applications.

58
  Read and evaluate texts critically.
 Display critical thinking in various professional contexts.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gramer F. Margot and Colin S. Ward Reading and Writing (Level 3) Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2011
2. Debra Daise, CharlNorloff, and Paul Carne Reading and Writing (Level 4) Oxford
University Press: Oxford, 2011

REFERENCES:
1. Davis, Jason and Rhonda [Link] Academic Writing (Level 3) Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2006
2. E. Suresh Kumar and et al. Enriching Speaking and Writing Skills. Second Edition.
Orient Black swan: Hyderabad, 2012
3. Withrow, Jeans and et al. Inspired to Write. Readings and Tasks to develop writing
skills. Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, 2004
4. Goatly, Andrew. Critical Reading and Writing. Routledge: United States of America,
2000
5. Petelin, Roslyn and Marsh Durham. The Professional Writing Guide: Knowing Well
and Knowing Why. Business & Professional Publishing: Australia, 2004

MA8551 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY L T P C

4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve
related problems.
 To introduce and apply the concepts of rings, finite fields and polynomials.
 To understand the basic concepts in number theory
 To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
 To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.

UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 12

Groups : Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets -
Lagrange's theorem. Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n -
Ring homomorphism.

UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 12

Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of polynomials
over finite fields.

UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 12

Division algorithm – Base - b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite numbers
– GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.

UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 12

Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence’s – Linear Congruence’s - Applications: Divisibility
tests - Modular exponentiation-Chinese remainder theorem – 2 x 2 linear systems.

UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 12

Wilson’s theorem – Fermat’s little theorem – Euler’s theorem – Euler’s Phi functions – Tau and
Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

59
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Apply the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve related
problems.
 Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
 Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
 Demonstrate their mastery by solving non - trivial problems related to the concepts, and by
proving simple theorems about the, statements proven by the text.
 Apply integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", Pearson
Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Koshy, T., “Elementary Number Theory with Applications”, Elsevier Publications,
New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Lidl, R. and Pitz, G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2006.
2. Niven, I., Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., “An Introduction to Theory of Numbers”,
John Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, “Coding Theory – A first Course”, Cambridge Publications,
Cambridge, 2004.

CS8591 COMPUTER NETWORKS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the protocol layering and physical level communication.
• To analyze the performance of a network.
• To understand the various components required to build different networks.
• To learn the functions of network layer and the various routing protocols.
• To familiarize the functions and protocols of the Transport layer.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND PHYSICAL LAYER 9

Networks – Network Types – Protocol Layering – TCP/IP Protocol suite – OSI Model –
Physical Layer: Performance – Transmission media – Switching – Circuit-switched
Networks – Packet Switching.

UNIT II DATA-LINK LAYER & MEDIA ACCESS 9

Introduction – Link-Layer Addressing – DLC Services – Data-Link Layer Protocols – HDLC
– PPP - Media Access Control - Wired LANs: Ethernet - Wireless LANs – Introduction –
IEEE 802.11, Bluetooth – Connecting Devices.

UNIT III 9
NETWORK LAYER
Network Layer Services – Packet switching – Performance – IPV4 Addresses – Forwarding
of IP Packets - Network Layer Protocols: IP, ICMP v4 – Unicast Routing Algorithms –
Protocols – Multicasting Basics – IPV6 Addressing – IPV6 Protocol.

UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9

Introduction – Transport Layer Protocols – Services – Port Numbers – User Datagram
Protocol – Transmission Control Protocol – SCTP.

UNIT V APPLICATION LAYER 9

WWW and HTTP – FTP – Email –Telnet –SSH – DNS – SNMP.

60
 TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Understand the basic layers and its functions in computer networks.
 Evaluate the performance of a network.
 Understand the basics of how data flows from one node to another.
 Analyze and design routing algorithms.
 Design protocols for various functions in the network.
 Understand the working of various application layer protocols.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, Fifth Edition TMH,
2013.

REFERENCES
1. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, Computer Networks: A Systems Approach, Fifth
Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Inc., 2012.
2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, Tenth Edition, Pearson
Education, 2013.
3. Nader F. Mir, Computer and Communication Networks, Second Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2014.
4. Ying-Dar Lin, Ren-Hung Hwang and Fred Baker, Computer Networks: An Open
Source Approach, McGraw Hill Publisher, 2011.
5. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking, A Top-Down Approach
Featuring the Internet, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.

EC8691 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the Architecture of 8086 microprocessor.
 To learn the design aspects of I/O and Memory Interfacing circuits.
 To interface microprocessors with supporting chips.
 To study the Architecture of 8051 microcontroller.
 To design a microcontroller based system

UNIT I THE 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9

Introduction to 8086 – Microprocessor architecture – Addressing modes - Instruction set and
assembler directives – Assembly language programming – Modular Programming - Linking and
Relocation - Stacks - Procedures – Macros – Interrupts and interrupt service routines – Byte and
String Manipulation.

UNIT II 8086 SYSTEM BUS STRUCTURE 9

8086 signals – Basic configurations – System bus timing –System design using 8086 – I/O
programming – Introduction to Multiprogramming – System Bus Structure – Multiprocessor
configurations – Coprocessor, Closely coupled and loosely Coupled configurations – Introduction
to advanced processors.
UNIT III I/O INTERFACING 9
Memory Interfacing and I/O interfacing - Parallel communication interface – Serial communication
interface – D/A and A/D Interface - Timer – Keyboard /display controller – Interrupt controller –
DMA controller – Programming and applications Case studies: Traffic Light control, LED display ,
LCD display, Keyboard display interface and Alarm Controller.

UNIT IV MICROCONTROLLER 9
Architecture of 8051 – Special Function Registers(SFRs) - I/O Pins Ports and Circuits - Instruction
set - Addressing modes - Assembly language programming.
61
UNIT V INTERFACING MICROCONTROLLER 9
Programming 8051 Timers - Serial Port Programming - Interrupts Programming – LCD &
Keyboard Interfacing - ADC, DAC & Sensor Interfacing - External Memory Interface- Stepper
Motor and Waveform generation - Comparison of Microprocessor, Microcontroller, PIC and ARM
processors

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Understand and execute programs based on 8086 microprocessor.
 Design Memory Interfacing circuits.
 Design and interface I/O circuits.
 Design and implement 8051 microcontroller based systems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yu-Cheng Liu, Glenn [Link], “Microcomputer Systems: The 8086 / 8088 Family -
Architecture, Programming and Design”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
(UNIT I- III)
2. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin McKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C”, Second Edition, Pearson education, 2011.
(UNIT IV-V)

REFERENCES:
1. Doughlas [Link], “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and
Hardware”,TMH,2012
2. [Link],[Link],”Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals “3rd edition, Tata
McGrawHill,2012

CS8501 THEORY OF COMPUTATION LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the language hierarchy
 To construct automata for any given pattern and find its equivalent regular
expressions
 To design a context free grammar for any given language
 To understand Turing machines and their capability
 To understand undecidable problems and NP class problems

UNIT I AUTOMATA FUNDAMENTALS 9

Introduction to formal proof – Additional forms of Proof – Inductive Proofs –Finite Automata –
Deterministic Finite Automata – Non-deterministic Finite Automata – Finite Automata with Epsilon
Transitions

UNIT II REGULAR EXPRESSIONS AND LANGUAGES 9

Regular Expressions – FA and Regular Expressions – Proving Languages not to be regular –
Closure Properties of Regular Languages – Equivalence and Minimization of Automata.

UNIT III CONTEXT FREE GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGES 9

CFG – Parse Trees – Ambiguity in Grammars and Languages – Definition of the Pushdown
Automata – Languages of a Pushdown Automata – Equivalence of Pushdown Automata and CFG,
Deterministic Pushdown Automata.

62
UNIT IV PROPERTIES OF CONTEXT FREE LANGUAGES 9
Normal Forms for CFG – Pumping Lemma for CFL – Closure Properties of CFL – Turing Machines
– Programming Techniques for TM.

UNIT V UNDECIDABILITY 9
Non Recursive Enumerable (RE) Language – Undecidable Problem with RE – Undecidable
Problems about TM – Post’s Correspondence Problem, The Class P and NP.

TOTAL :45PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Construct automata, regular expression for any pattern.
 Write Context free grammar for any construct.
 Design Turing machines for any language.
 Propose computation solutions using Turing machines.
 Derive whether a problem is decidable or not.

TEXT BOOK:
1. [Link], [Link] and J.D Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and
Computations”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.

REFERENCES:
1. [Link] and [Link], “Elements of the theory of Computation”, Second Edition,
PHI, 2003.
2. [Link], “Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation”, Third Edition, TMH, 2003.
3. Micheal Sipser, “Introduction of the Theory and Computation”, Thomson Brokecole, 1997.

CS8592 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the fundamentals of object modeling
 To understand and differentiate Unified Process from other approaches.
 To design with static UML diagrams.
 To design with the UML dynamic and implementation diagrams.
 To improve the software design with design patterns.
 To test the software against its requirements specification

UNIT I UNIFIED PROCESS AND USE CASE DIAGRAMS 9

Introduction to OOAD with OO Basics - Unified Process – UML diagrams – Use Case –Case study
– the Next Gen POS system, Inception -Use case Modelling – Relating Use cases –
include, extend and generalization – When to use Use-cases

UNIT II STATIC UML DIAGRAMS 9

Class Diagram–– Elaboration – Domain Model – Finding conceptual classes and description
classes – Associations – Attributes – Domain model refinement – Finding conceptual class
Hierarchies – Aggregation and Composition - Relationship between sequence diagrams and use
cases – When to use Class Diagrams

UNIT III DYNAMIC AND IMPLEMENTATION UML DIAGRAMS 9

Dynamic Diagrams – UML interaction diagrams - System sequence diagram – Collaboration
diagram – When to use Communication Diagrams - State machine diagram and Modelling –When
to use State Diagrams - Activity diagram – When to use activity diagrams

63
Implementation Diagrams - UML package diagram - When to use package diagrams -
Component and Deployment Diagrams – When to use Component and Deployment diagrams

UNIT IV DESIGN PATTERNS 9

GRASP: Designing objects with responsibilities – Creator – Information expert – Low Coupling –
High Cohesion – Controller

Design Patterns – creational – factory method – structural – Bridge – Adapter – behavioural –

Strategy – observer –Applying GoF design patterns – Mapping design to code

UNIT V TESTING 9
Object Oriented Methodologies – Software Quality Assurance – Impact of object orientation on
Testing – Develop Test Cases and Test Plans
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
 Express software design with UML diagrams
 Design software applications using OO concepts.
 Identify various scenarios based on software requirements
 Transform UML based software design into pattern based design using design patterns
 Understand the various testing methodologies for OO software

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Craig Larman, “Applying UML and Patterns: An Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysis and
Design and Iterative Development”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
2. Ali Bahrami - Object Oriented Systems Development - McGraw Hill International Edition - 1999

REFERENCES:
1. Erich Gamma, a n d Richard Helm, Ralph Johnson, John Vlissides, “Design patterns: Elements
of Reusable Object-Oriented Software”, Addison-Wesley, 1995.
2. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Standard Object Modeling Language”,
Third edition, Addison Wesley, 2003.

EC8681 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY LT PC

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To Introduce ALP concepts, features and Coding methods
 Write ALP for arithmetic and logical operations in 8086 and 8051
 Differentiate Serial and Parallel Interface
 Interface different I/Os with Microprocessors
 Be familiar with MASM

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
8086 Programs using kits and MASM
1. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations
2. Move a data block without overlap
3. Code conversion, decimal arithmetic and Matrix operations.
4. Floating point operations, string manipulations, sorting and searching
5. Password checking, Print RAM size and system date
6. Counters and Time Delay

Peripherals and Interfacing Experiments

7. Traffic light controller
8. Stepper motor control
64
9. Digital clock
10. Key board and Display
11. Printer status
12. Serial interface and Parallel interface
13. A/D and D/A interface and Waveform Generation

8051 Experiments using kits and MASM

14. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations
15. Square and Cube program, Find 2’s complement of a number
16. Unpacked BCD to ASCII
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
 Write ALP Programmes for fixed and Floating Point and Arithmetic operations
 Interface different I/Os with processor
 Generate waveforms using Microprocessors
 Execute Programs in 8051
 Explain the difference between simulator and Emulator

LAB EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

HARDWARE:
8086 development kits - 30 nos
Interfacing Units - Each 10 nos
Microcontroller - 30 nos

SOFTWARE:
Intel Desktop Systems with MASM - 30 nos
8086 Assembler
8051 Cross Assembler

CS8582 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LABORATORY L T PC

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To capture the requirements specification for an intended software system
 To draw the UML diagrams for the given specification
 To map the design properly to code
 To test the software system thoroughly for all scenarios
 To improve the design by applying appropriate design patterns.

Draw standard UML diagrams using an UML modeling tool for a given case study and map design
to code and implement a 3 layered architecture. Test the developed code and validate whether the
SRS is satisfied.
1. Identify a software system that needs to be developed.
2. Document the Software Requirements Specification (SRS) for the identified system.
3. Identify use cases and develop the Use Case model.
4. Identify the conceptual classes and develop a Domain Model and also derive a Class
Diagram from that.
5. Using the identified scenarios, find the interaction between objects and represent them
using
UML Sequence and Collaboration Diagrams
6. Draw relevant State Chart and Activity Diagrams for the same system.
7. Implement the system as per the detailed design
8. Test the software system for all the scenarios identified as per the usecase diagram
9. Improve the reusability and maintainability of the software system by applying appropriate
65
 design patterns.
10. Implement the modified system and test it for various scenarios

SUGGESTED DOMAINS FOR MINI-PROJECT:

1. Passport automation system.
2. Book bank
3. Exam registration
4. Stock maintenance system.
5. Online course reservation system
6. Airline/Railway reservation system
7. Software personnel management system
8. Credit card processing
9. e-book management system
10. Recruitment system
11. Foreign trading system
12. Conference management system
13. BPO management system
14. Library management system
15. Student information system
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
 Perform OO analysis and design for a given problem specification.
 Identify and map basic software requirements in UML mapping.
 Improve the software quality using design patterns and to explain the rationale behind
applying specific design patterns
 Test the compliance of the software with the SRS.

HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Standard PC
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
1. Windows 7 or higher
2. ArgoUML that supports UML 1.4 and higher
3. Selenium, JUnit or Apache JMeter

CS8581 NETWORKS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn and use network commands.
 To learn socket programming.
 To implement and analyze various network protocols.
 To learn and use simulation tools.
 To use simulation tools to analyze the performance of various network protocols.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Learn to use commands like tcpdump, netstat, ifconfig, nslookup and traceroute. Capture
ping and traceroute PDUs using a network protocol analyzer and examine.
2. Write a HTTP web client program to download a web page using TCP sockets.
3. Applications using TCP sockets like:
 Echo client and echo server
 Chat
 File Transfer
66
4. Simulation of DNS using UDP sockets.
5. Write a code simulating ARP /RARP protocols.
6. Study of Network simulator (NS) and Simulation of Congestion Control Algorithms using
NS.
7. Study of TCP/UDP performance using Simulation tool.
8. Simulation of Distance Vector/ Link State Routing algorithm.
9. Performance evaluation of Routing protocols using Simulation tool.
10. Simulation of error correction code (like CRC).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Implement various protocols using TCP and UDP.
 Compare the performance of different transport layer protocols.
 Use simulation tools to analyze the performance of various network protocols.
 Analyze various routing algorithms.
 Implement error correction codes.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

LABORATORY REQUIREMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

HARDWARE:
1. Standalone desktops 30 Nos

SOFTWARE:
1. C / C++ / Java / Python / Equivalent Compiler 30
2. Network simulator like NS2/Glomosim/OPNET/ Packet Tracer / Equivalent

CS8651 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand different Internet Technologies.
 To learn java-specific web services architecture

UNIT I WEBSITE BASICS, HTML 5, CSS 3, WEB 2.0 9

Web Essentials: Clients, Servers and Communication – The Internet – Basic Internet
protocols – World wide web – HTTP Request Message – HTTP Response Message – Web
Clients – Web Servers – HTML5 – Tables – Lists – Image – HTML5 control elements –
Semantic elements – Drag and Drop – Audio – Video controls - CSS3 – Inline, embedded
and external style sheets – Rule cascading – Inheritance – Backgrounds – Border Images –
Colors – Shadows – Text – Transformations – Transitions – Animations.

UNIT II CLIENT SIDE PROGRAMMING 9

Java Script: An introduction to JavaScript–JavaScript DOM Model-Date and Objects,-
Regular Expressions- Exception Handling-Validation-Built-in objects-Event Handling-
DHTML with JavaScript- JSON introduction – Syntax – Function Files – Http Request –
SQL.

UNIT III SERVER SIDE PROGRAMMING 9

Servlets: Java Servlet Architecture- Servlet Life Cycle- Form GET and POST actions-
Session Handling- Understanding Cookies- Installing and Configuring Apache Tomcat Web
Server- DATABASE CONNECTIVITY: JDBC perspectives, JDBC program example - JSP:
Understanding Java Server Pages-JSP Standard Tag Library (JSTL)-Creating HTML forms
by embedding JSP code.
67
 UNIT IV PHP and XML 9
An introduction to PHP: PHP- Using PHP- Variables- Program control- Built-in functions-
Form Validation- Regular Expressions - File handling – Cookies - Connecting to Database.
XML: Basic XML- Document Type Definition- XML Schema DOM and Presenting XML, XML
Parsers and Validation, XSL and XSLT Transformation, News Feed (RSS and ATOM).

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO AJAX and WEB SERVICES 9

AJAX: Ajax Client Server Architecture-XML Http Request Object-Call Back Methods; Web
Services: Introduction- Java web services Basics – Creating, Publishing, Testing and
Describing a Web services (WSDL)-Consuming a web service, Database Driven web
service from an application –SOAP.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Construct a basic website using HTML and Cascading Style Sheets.
 Build dynamic web page with validation using Java Script objects and by applying
different event handling mechanisms.
 Develop server side programs using Servlets and JSP.
 Construct simple web pages in PHP and to represent data in XML format.
 Use AJAX and web services to develop interactive web applications

TEXT BOOK:
1. Deitel and Deitel and Nieto, “Internet and World Wide Web - How to Program”,
Prentice Hall, 5th Edition, 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. Stephen Wynkoop and John Burke “Running a Perfect Website”, QUE, 2nd
Edition,1999.
2. Chris Bates, Web Programming – Building Intranet Applications, 3rd Edition, Wiley
Publications, 2009.
3. Jeffrey C and Jackson, “Web Technologies A Computer Science Perspective”,
Pearson Education, 2011.
4. Gopalan N.P. and Akilandeswari J., “Web Technology”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
5. [Link], “Web Technologies”, Oxford University Press, 2011.

CS8691 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the various characteristics of Intelligent agents
 To learn the different search strategies in AI
 To learn to represent knowledge in solving AI problems
 To understand the different ways of designing software agents
 To know about the various applications of AI.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction–Definition - Future of Artificial Intelligence – Characteristics of Intelligent Agents–
Typical Intelligent Agents – Problem Solving Approach to Typical AI problems.

68
UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING METHODS 9
Problem solving Methods - Search Strategies- Uninformed - Informed - Heuristics - Local Search
Algorithms and Optimization Problems - Searching with Partial Observations - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems – Constraint Propagation - Backtracking Search - Game Playing - Optimal
Decisions in Games – Alpha - Beta Pruning - Stochastic Games

UNIT III KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 9

First Order Predicate Logic – Prolog Programming – Unification – Forward Chaining-Backward
Chaining – Resolution – Knowledge Representation - Ontological Engineering-Categories and
Objects – Events - Mental Events and Mental Objects - Reasoning Systems for Categories -
Reasoning with Default Information

UNIT IV SOFTWARE AGENTS 9

Architecture for Intelligent Agents – Agent communication – Negotiation and Bargaining –
Argumentation among Agents – Trust and Reputation in Multi-agent systems.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
AI applications – Language Models – Information Retrieval- Information Extraction – Natural
Language Processing - Machine Translation – Speech Recognition – Robot – Hardware –
Perception – Planning – Moving
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
 Represent a problem using first order and predicate logic
 Provide the apt agent strategy to solve a given problem
 Design software agents to solve a problem
 Design applications for NLP that use Artificial Intelligence.

TEXT BOOKS:
1 S. Russell and P. Norvig, "Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, Third
Edition, 2009.
2 I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence”, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. M. Tim Jones, “Artificial Intelligence: A Systems Approach(Computer Science)”, Jones
and Bartlett Publishers, Inc.; First Edition, 2008
2. Nils J. Nilsson, “The Quest for Artificial Intelligence”, Cambridge University Press,
2009.
3. William F. Clocksin and Christopher S. Mellish,” Programming in Prolog: Using the ISO
Standard”, Fifth Edition, Springer, 2003.
4. Gerhard Weiss, “Multi Agent Systems”, Second Edition, MIT Press, 2013.
5. David L. Poole and Alan K. Mackworth, “Artificial Intelligence: Foundations of
Computational Agents”, Cambridge University Press, 2010.

69
 CS8601 MOBILE COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of mobile computing.
 To learn the basics of mobile telecommunication system .
 To be familiar with the network layer protocols and Ad-Hoc networks.
 To know the basis of transport and application layer protocols.
 To gain knowledge about different mobile platforms and application development.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Mobile Computing – Applications of Mobile Computing- Generations of
Mobile Communication Technologies- Multiplexing – Spread spectrum -MAC Protocols –
SDMA- TDMA- FDMA- CDMA

UNIT II MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 9

Introduction to Cellular Systems - GSM – Services & Architecture – Protocols – Connection
Establishment – Frequency Allocation – Routing – Mobility Management – Security – GPRS-
UMTS – Architecture – Handover - Security

UNIT III MOBILE NETWORK LAYER 9

Mobile IP – DHCP – AdHoc– Proactive protocol-DSDV, Reactive Routing Protocols – DSR,
AODV , Hybrid routing –ZRP, Multicast Routing- ODMRP, Vehicular Ad Hoc networks
( VANET) –MANET Vs VANET – Security.

UNIT IV MOBILE TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYER 9

Mobile TCP– WAP – Architecture – WDP – WTLS – WTP –WSP – WAE – WTA Architecture
– WML

UNIT V MOBILE PLATFORMS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Mobile Device Operating Systems – Special Constraints & Requirements – Commercial
Mobile Operating Systems – Software Development Kit: iOS, Android, BlackBerry, Windows
Phone – MCommerce – Structure – Pros & Cons – Mobile Payment System – Security
Issues
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Explain the basics of mobile telecommunication systems
 Illustrate the generations of telecommunication systems in wireless networks
 Determine the functionality of MAC, network layer and Identify a routing protocol for a
given Ad hoc network
 Explain the functionality of Transport and Application layers
 Develop a mobile application using android/blackberry/ios/Windows SDK

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, PHI, Second Edition, 2003.
2. Prasant Kumar Pattnaik, Rajib Mall, “Fundamentals of Mobile Computing”, PHI
Learning [Link], New Delhi – 2012

REFERENCES
1. Dharma Prakash Agarval, Qing and An Zeng, "Introduction to Wireless and Mobile
systems",Thomson Asia Pvt Ltd, 2005.
2. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nicklons and Thomas Stober, “Principles of
Mobile Computing”, Springer, 2003.
3. [Link],“Mobile Cellular Telecommunications-Analog and Digital Systems”,
Second Edition,TataMcGraw Hill Edition ,2006.
4. [Link], “AdHoc Mobile Wireless Networks”, First Edition, Pearson Education, 2002.
70
 5. Android Developers : [Link]
6. Apple Developer : [Link]
7. Windows Phone DevCenter : [Link]
8. BlackBerry Developer : [Link]

CS8602 COMPILER DESIGN L T P C

3 0 2 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the various phases of compiler.
 To learn the various parsing techniques.
 To understand intermediate code generation and run-time environment.
 To learn to implement front-end of the compiler.
 To learn to implement code generator.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPILERS 9

Structure of a compiler – Lexical Analysis – Role of Lexical Analyzer – Input Buffering –
Specification of Tokens – Recognition of Tokens – Lex – Finite Automata – Regular Expressions
to Automata – Minimizing DFA.
UNIT II SYNTAX ANALYSIS 12
Role of Parser – Grammars – Error Handling – Context-free grammars – Writing a grammar –
Top Down Parsing - General Strategies Recursive Descent Parser Predictive Parser-LL(1)
Parser-Shift Reduce Parser-LR Parser-LR (0)Item Construction of SLR Parsing Table -
Introduction to LALR Parser - Error Handling and Recovery in Syntax Analyzer-YACC.

UNIT III INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION 8

Syntax Directed Definitions, Evaluation Orders for Syntax Directed Definitions, Intermediate
Languages: Syntax Tree, Three Address Code, Types and Declarations, Translation of
Expressions, Type Checking.

UNIT IV RUN-TIME ENVIRONMENT AND CODE GENERATION 8

Storage Organization, Stack Allocation Space, Access to Non-local Data on the Stack, Heap
Management - Issues in Code Generation - Design of a simple Code Generator.

UNIT V CODE OPTIMIZATION 8

Principal Sources of Optimization – Peep-hole optimization - DAG- Optimization of Basic Blocks-
Global Data Flow Analysis - Efficient Data Flow Algorithm.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Develop a lexical analyzer to recognize a few patterns in C. (Ex. identifiers, constants,
comments, operators etc.). Create a symbol table, while recognizing identifiers.
2. Implement a Lexical Analyzer using Lex Tool
3. Implement an Arithmetic Calculator using LEX and YACC
4. Generate three address code for a simple program using LEX and YACC.
5. Implement simple code optimization techniques (Constant folding, Strength reduction and
Algebraic transformation)
6. Implement back-end of the compiler for which the three address code is given as input and
the 8086 assembly language code is produced as output.
PRACTICALS 30 PERIODS
THEORY 45 PERIODS
TOTAL : 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Understand the different phases of compiler.
 Design a lexical analyzer for a sample language.
71
  Apply different parsing algorithms to develop the parsers for a given grammar.
 Understand syntax-directed translation and run-time environment.
 Learn to implement code optimization techniques and a simple code generator.
 Design and implement a scanner and a parser using LEX and YACC tools.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Alfred V. Aho, Monica S. Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Compilers: Principles,
Techniques and Toolsǁ, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.

REFERENCES
1. Randy Allen, Ken Kennedy, Optimizing Compilers for Modern Architectures: A
Dependence based Approach, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2002.
2. Steven S. Muchnick, Advanced Compiler Design and Implementationǁ, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers - Elsevier Science, India, Indian Reprint 2003.
3. Keith D Cooper and Linda Torczon, Engineering a Compilerǁ, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers Elsevier Science, 2004.
4. V. Raghavan, Principles of Compiler Designǁ, Tata McGraw Hill Education Publishers,
2010.
5. Allen I. Holub, Compiler Design in Cǁ, Prentice-Hall Software Series, 1993.

CS8603 DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS LT PC

3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the foundations of distributed systems.
 To learn issues related to clock Synchronization and the need for global state in distributed
systems.
 To learn distributed mutual exclusion and deadlock detection algorithms.
 To understand the significance of agreement, fault tolerance and recovery protocols in
Distributed Systems.
 To learn the characteristics of peer-to-peer and distributed shared memory systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: Definition –Relation to computer system components –Motivation –Relation to
parallel systems – Message-passing systems versus shared memory systems –Primitives for
distributed communication –Synchronous versus asynchronous executions –Design issues and
challenges. A model of distributed computations: A distributed program –A model of distributed
executions –Models of communication networks –Global state – Cuts –Past and future cones of
an event –Models of process communications. Logical Time: A framework for a system of logical
clocks –Scalar time –Vector time – Physical clock synchronization: NTP.

UNIT II MESSAGE ORDERING & SNAPSHOTS 9

Message ordering and group communication: Message ordering paradigms –Asynchronous
execution with synchronous communication –Synchronous program order on an asynchronous
system –Group communication – Causal order (CO) - Total order. Global state and snapshot
recording algorithms: Introduction –System model and definitions –Snapshot algorithms for
FIFO channels

UNIT III DISTRIBUTED MUTEX & DEADLOCK 9

Distributed mutual exclusion algorithms: Introduction – Preliminaries – Lamport’s algorithm –
Ricart-Agrawala algorithm – Maekawa’s algorithm – Suzuki–Kasami’s broadcast algorithm.
Deadlock detection in distributed systems: Introduction – System model – Preliminaries –
Models of deadlocks – Knapp’s classification – Algorithms for the single resource model, the
AND model and the OR model.
72
UNIT IV RECOVERY & CONSENSUS 9
Checkpointing and rollback recovery: Introduction – Background and definitions – Issues in
failure recovery – Checkpoint-based recovery – Log-based rollback recovery – Coordinated
checkpointing algorithm – Algorithm for asynchronous checkpointing and recovery. Consensus
and agreement algorithms: Problem definition – Overview of results – Agreement in a failure –
free system – Agreement in synchronous systems with failures.

UNIT V P2P & DISTRIBUTED SHARED MEMORY 9

Peer-to-peer computing and overlay graphs: Introduction – Data indexing and overlays – Chord
– Content addressable networks – Tapestry. Distributed shared memory: Abstraction and
advantages – Memory consistency models –Shared memory Mutual Exclusion.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
 Elucidate the foundations and issues of distributed systems
 Understand the various synchronization issues and global state for distributed systems.
 Understand the Mutual Exclusion and Deadlock detection algorithms in distributed systems
 Describe the agreement protocols and fault tolerance mechanisms in distributed systems.
 Describe the features of peer-to-peer and distributed shared memory systems

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kshemkalyani, Ajay D., and Mukesh Singhal. Distributed computing: principles, algorithms,
and systems. Cambridge University Press, 2011.
2. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore and Tim Kindberg, “Distributed Systems Concepts and
Design”, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep K Sinha, "Distributed Operating Systems: Concepts and Design", Prentice Hall of
India, 2007.
2. Mukesh Singhal and Niranjan G. Shivaratri. Advanced concepts in operating systems.
McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1994.
3. Tanenbaum A.S., Van Steen M., “Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms”,
Pearson Education, 2007.
4. Liu M.L., “Distributed Computing, Principles and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Nancy A Lynch, “Distributed Algorithms”, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, USA, 2003.

CS8661 INTERNET PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To be familiar with Web page design using HTML/XML and style sheets
 To be exposed to creation of user interfaces using Java frames and applets.
 To learn to create dynamic web pages using server side scripting.
 To learn to write Client Server applications.
 To be familiar with the PHP programming.
 To be exposed to creating applications with AJAX

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Create a web page with the following using HTML
a. To embed a map in a web page
b. To fix the hot spots in that map
c. Show all the related information when the hot spots are clicked.

73
2. Create a web page with the following.
a. Cascading style sheets.
b. Embedded style sheets.
c. Inline style sheets. Use our college information for the web pages.
3. Validate the Registration, user login, user profile and payment by credit card pages using
JavaScript.
4. Write programs in Java using Servlets:
i. To invoke servlets from HTML forms
ii. Session tracking using hidden form fields and Session tracking for a hit count
5. Write programs in Java to create three-tier applications using servlets for conducting on-
line examination for displaying student mark list. Assume that student information is
available in a database which has been stored in a database server.
6. Install TOMCAT web server. Convert the static web pages of programs into dynamic web
pages using servlets (or JSP) and cookies. Hint: Users information (user id, password,
credit card number) would be stored in [Link]. Each user should have a separate
Shopping Cart.
7. Redo the previous task using JSP by converting the static web pages into dynamic web
pages. Create a database with user information and books information. The books
catalogue should be dynamically loaded from the database.
8. Create and save an XML document at the server, which contains 10 users Information.
Write a Program, which takes user Id as an input and returns the User details by taking
the user information from the XML document

9. i. Validate the form using PHP regular expression.

ii. PHP stores a form data into database.
10. Write a web service for finding what people think by asking 500 people’s opinion for any
consumer product.
TOTAL: 60PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Construct Web pages using HTML/XML and style sheets.
 Build dynamic web pages with validation using Java Script objects and by applying
different event handling mechanisms.
 Develop dynamic web pages using server side scripting.
 Use PHP programming to develop web applications.
 Construct web applications using AJAX and web services.

SOFTWARE REQUIRED:
 Dream Weaver or Equivalent, MySQL or Equivalent, Apache Server, WAMP/XAMPP

CS8662 MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the components and structure of mobile application development frameworks
for Android and windows OS based mobiles.
 To understand how to work with various mobile application development frameworks.
 To learn the basic and important design concepts and issues of development of mobile
applications.
 To understand the capabilities and limitations of mobile devices.

74
 LISTOF EXPERIMENTS
1. Develop an application that uses GUI components, Font and Colours
2. Develop an application that uses Layout Managers and event listeners.
3. Write an application that draws basic graphical primitives on the screen.
4. Develop an application that makes use of databases.
5. Develop an application that makes use of Notification Manager
6. Implement an application that uses Multi-threading
7. Develop a native application that uses GPS location information
8. Implement an application that writes data to the SD card.
9. Implement an application that creates an alert upon receiving a message
10. Write a mobile application that makes use of RSS feed
11. Develop a mobile application to send an email.
12. Develop a Mobile application for simple needs (Mini Project)
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Develop mobile applications using GUI and Layouts.
 Develop mobile applications using Event Listener.
 Develop mobile applications using Databases.
 Develop mobile applications using RSS Feed, Internal/External Storage, SMS, Multi-
threading and GPS.
 Analyze and discover own mobile app for simple needs.

REFERENCES:
1. Build Your Own Security Lab, Michael Gregg, Wiley India

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS

Standalone desktops with Windows or Android or
iOS or Equivalent Mobile Application Development
Tools with appropriate emulators and debuggers - 30 Nos.

HS8581 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION L T P C

0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to:
 Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students
 Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
 Make them Employable Graduates
 Develop their confidence and help them attend interviews successfully.

UNIT I
Introduction to Soft Skills-- Hard skills & soft skills - employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs

UNIT II
Self-Introduction-organizing the material - Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing the topic –
answering questions – individual presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively – 5 minute
presentations

75
UNIT III
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group dynamics
- brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to improve GD skills

UNIT IV
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews

UNIT V
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress- networking
professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-developing a long-term
career plan-making career changes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Make effective presentations
• Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
• Attend job interviews and be successful in them.
• Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace

Recommended Software
1. Open Source Software
2. Win English

REFERENCES:
1. Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Blackswan:
Hyderabad, 2015
3. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. OrientBalckSwan: Hyderabad, 2016.
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.

MG8591 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions and
principles of management and to learn the application of the principles in an organization .

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers -
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations , system and
contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.

UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting
objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization
structure – types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority –

76
centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning,
Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management , Career planning
and management

UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective communication
–communication and IT.

UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling and have same
basic knowledge on international aspect of management

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 10th Edition,
2009.
2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, Pearson Education, 6th
Edition, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”
Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999

CS8792 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand Cryptography Theories, Algorithms and Systems.
 To understand necessary Approaches and Techniques to build protection
mechanisms in order to secure computer networks.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Security trends - Legal, Ethical and Professional Aspects of Security, Need for Security at
Multiple levels, Security Policies - Model of network security – Security attacks, services and
mechanisms – OSI security architecture – Classical encryption techniques: substitution
techniques, transposition techniques, steganography- Foundations of modern cryptography:
perfect security – information theory – product cryptosystem – cryptanalysis.

UNIT II SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9

MATHEMATICS OF SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Algebraic structures - Modular
arithmetic-Euclid‟s algorithm- Congruence and matrices - Groups, Rings, Fields- Finite
fields- SYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: SDES – Block cipher Principles of DES – Strength of
DES – Differential and linear cryptanalysis - Block cipher design principles – Block cipher
mode of operation – Evaluation criteria for AES – Advanced Encryption Standard - RC4 –
77
 Key distribution.

UNIT III PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9

MATHEMATICS OF ASYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Primes – Primality Testing –
Factorization – Euler’s totient function, Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorem - Chinese Remainder
Theorem – Exponentiation and logarithm - ASYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: RSA
cryptosystem – Key distribution – Key management – Diffie Hellman key exchange -
ElGamal cryptosystem – Elliptic curve arithmetic-Elliptic curve cryptography.

UNIT IV MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION AND INTEGRITY 9

Authentication requirement – Authentication function – MAC – Hash function – Security of
hash function and MAC – SHA –Digital signature and authentication protocols – DSS- Entity
Authentication: Biometrics, Passwords, Challenge Response protocols- Authentication
applications - Kerberos, X.509

UNIT V SECURITY PRACTICE AND SYSTEM SECURITY 9

Electronic Mail security – PGP, S/MIME – IP security – Web Security - SYSTEM
SECURITY: Intruders – Malicious software – viruses – Firewalls.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
 Understand the fundamentals of networks security, security architecture, threats and
vulnerabilities
 Apply the different cryptographic operations of symmetric cryptographic algorithms
 Apply the different cryptographic operations of public key cryptography
 Apply the various Authentication schemes to simulate different applications.
 Understand various Security practices and System security standards

TEXT BOOK:
1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice, PHI
3rd Edition, 2006.

REFERENCES:
1. C K Shyamala, N Harini and Dr. T R Padmanabhan: Cryptography and Network
Security, Wiley India [Link]
2. [Link], Cryptography and Network Security, Tata McGraw Hill 2007.
3. Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman, and Mike Speciner, Network Security: PRIVATE
Communication in a PUBLIC World, Prentice Hall, ISBN 0-13-046019-2

CS8791 CLOUD COMPUTING LT PC

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of cloud computing.
 To appreciate the evolution of cloud from the existing technologies.
 To have knowledge on the various issues in cloud computing.
 To be familiar with the lead players in cloud.
 To appreciate the emergence of cloud as the next generation computing paradigm.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Cloud Computing – Definition of Cloud – Evolution of Cloud Computing –
Underlying Principles of Parallel and Distributed Computing – Cloud Characteristics – Elasticity in
Cloud – On-demand Provisioning.

78
UNIT II CLOUD ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES 10
Service Oriented Architecture – REST and Systems of Systems – Web Services – Publish-
Subscribe Model – Basics of Virtualization – Types of Virtualization – Implementation Levels of
Virtualization – Virtualization Structures – Tools and Mechanisms – Virtualization of CPU –
Memory – I/O Devices –Virtualization Support and Disaster Recovery.

UNIT III CLOUD ARCHITECTURE, SERVICES AND STORAGE 8

Layered Cloud Architecture Design – NIST Cloud Computing Reference Architecture – Public,
Private and Hybrid Clouds - laaS – PaaS – SaaS – Architectural Design Challenges – Cloud
Storage – Storage-as-a-Service – Advantages of Cloud Storage – Cloud Storage Providers – S3.

UNIT IV RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND SECURITY IN CLOUD 10

Inter Cloud Resource Management – Resource Provisioning and Resource Provisioning Methods
– Global Exchange of Cloud Resources – Security Overview – Cloud Security Challenges –
Software-as-a-Service Security – Security Governance – Virtual Machine Security – IAM –
Security Standards.

UNIT V CLOUD TECHNOLOGIES AND ADVANCEMENTS 8

Hadoop – MapReduce – Virtual Box -- Google App Engine – Programming Environment for
Google App Engine –– Open Stack – Federation in the Cloud – Four Levels of Federation –
Federated Services and Applications – Future of Federation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Articulate the main concepts, key technologies, strengths and limitations of cloud
computing.
 Learn the key and enabling technologies that help in the development of cloud.
 Develop the ability to understand and use the architecture of compute and storage cloud,
service and delivery models.
 Explain the core issues of cloud computing such as resource management and security.
 Be able to install and use current cloud technologies.
 Evaluate and choose the appropriate technologies, algorithms and approaches for
implementation and use of cloud.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C. Fox, Jack G. Dongarra, "Distributed and Cloud Computing, From
Parallel Processing to the Internet of Things", Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012.
2. Rittinghouse, John W., and James F. Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation,
Management and Security”, CRC Press, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Rajkumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola, S. ThamaraiSelvi, “Mastering Cloud Computing”, Tata
Mcgraw Hill, 2013.
2. Toby Velte, Anthony Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, "Cloud Computing - A Practical Approach”, Tata
Mcgraw Hill, 2009.
3. George Reese, "Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the
Cloud: Transactional Systems for EC2 and Beyond (Theory in Practice)”, O'Reilly, 2009.

79
CS8711 CLOUD COMPUTING LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop web applications in cloud
 To learn the design and development process involved in creating a cloud based
application
 To learn to implement and use parallel programming using Hadoop

1. Install Virtualbox/VMware Workstation with different flavours of linux or windows OS on top

of windows7 or 8.
2. Install a C compiler in the virtual machine created using virtual box and execute Simple
Programs
3. Install Google App Engine. Create hello world app and other simple web applications using
python/java.
4. Use GAE launcher to launch the web applications.
5. Simulate a cloud scenario using CloudSim and run a scheduling algorithm that is not
present in CloudSim.
6. Find a procedure to transfer the files from one virtual machine to another virtual machine.
7. Find a procedure to launch virtual machine using trystack (Online Openstack Demo
Version)
8. Install Hadoop single node cluster and run simple applications like wordcount.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
 Configure various virtualization tools such as Virtual Box, VMware workstation.
 Design and deploy a web application in a PaaS environment.
 Learn how to simulate a cloud environment to implement new schedulers.
 Install and use a generic cloud environment that can be used as a private cloud.
 Manipulate large data sets in a parallel environment.

IT8761 SECURITY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn different cipher techniques
 To implement the algorithms DES, RSA,MD5,SHA-1
 To use network security tools and vulnerability assessment tools

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Perform encryption, decryption using the following substitution techniques
(i) Ceaser cipher, (ii) playfair cipher iii) Hill Cipher iv) Vigenere cipher
2. Perform encryption and decryption using following transposition techniques
i) Rail fence ii) row & Column Transformation
3. Apply DES algorithm for practical applications.
4. Apply AES algorithm for practical applications.
5. Implement RSA Algorithm using HTML and JavaScript
6. Implement the Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange algorithm for a given problem.
7. Calculate the message digest of a text using the SHA-1 algorithm.
8. Implement the SIGNATURE SCHEME - Digital Signature Standard.
9. Demonstrate intrusion detection system (ids) using any tool eg. Snort or any other s/w.

80
10. Automated Attack and Penetration Tools
Exploring N-Stalker, a Vulnerability Assessment Tool
11. Defeating Malware
i) Building Trojans ii) Rootkit Hunter
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Develop code for classical Encryption Techniques to solve the problems.
 Build cryptosystems by applying symmetric and public key encryption algorithms.
 Construct code for authentication algorithms.
 Develop a signature scheme using Digital signature standard.
 Demonstrate the network security system using open source tools

REFERENCES:
1. Build Your Own Security Lab, Michael Gregg, Wiley India

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS: SOFTWARE: C / C++ / Java or

equivalent compiler GnuPG, Snort, N-Stalker or Equivalent HARDWARE: Standalone desktops -
30 Nos. (or) Server supporting 30 terminals or more.

CS8811 PROJECT WORK L T P C

0 0 20 10
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and
literature review till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing
project reports and to face reviews and viva voce examination.

The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department under
the guidance of a faculty member and prepares a comprehensive project report after completing
the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a
minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the
Department. A project report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is
evaluated based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal
examiners constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS

OUTCOME:
 On Completion of the project work students will be in a position to take up any
challenging practical problems and find solution by formulating proper methodology.

CS8075 DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand data warehouse concepts, architecture, business analysis and tools
 To understand data pre-processing and data visualization techniques
 To study algorithms for finding hidden and interesting patterns in data
 To understand and apply various classification and clustering techniques using tools.

81
UNIT I DATA WAREHOUSING, BUSINESS ANALYSIS AND ON-LINE ANALYTICAL
PROCESSING (OLAP) 9
Basic Concepts - Data Warehousing Components – Building a Data Warehouse – Database
Architectures for Parallel Processing – Parallel DBMS Vendors - Multidimensional Data Model –
Data Warehouse Schemas for Decision Support, Concept Hierarchies -Characteristics of OLAP
Systems – Typical OLAP Operations, OLAP and OLTP.

UNIT II DATA MINING – INTRODUCTION 9

Introduction to Data Mining Systems – Knowledge Discovery Process – Data Mining Techniques
– Issues – applications- Data Objects and attribute types, Statistical description of data, Data
Preprocessing – Cleaning, Integration, Reduction, Transformation and discretization, Data
Visualization, Data similarity and dissimilarity measures.

UNIT III DATA MINING - FREQUENT PATTERN ANALYSIS 9

Mining Frequent Patterns, Associations and Correlations – Mining Methods- Pattern Evaluation
Method – Pattern Mining in Multilevel, Multi Dimensional Space – Constraint Based Frequent
Pattern Mining, Classification using Frequent Patterns

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING 9

Decision Tree Induction - Bayesian Classification – Rule Based Classification – Classification by
Back Propagation – Support Vector Machines –– Lazy Learners – Model Evaluation and
Selection-Techniques to improve Classification Accuracy.

Clustering Techniques – Cluster analysis-Partitioning Methods - Hierarchical Methods – Density

Based Methods - Grid Based Methods – Evaluation of clustering – Clustering high dimensional
data- Clustering with constraints, Outlier analysis-outlier detection methods.

UNIT V WEKA TOOL 9

Datasets – Introduction, Iris plants database, Breast cancer database, Auto imports database -
Introduction to WEKA, The Explorer – Getting started, Exploring the explorer, Learning algorithms,
Clustering algorithms, Association–rule learners.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Design a Data warehouse system and perform business analysis with OLAP tools.
 Apply suitable pre-processing and visualization techniques for data analysis
 Apply frequent pattern and association rule mining techniques for data analysis
 Apply appropriate classification and clustering techniques for data analysis

TEXT BOOK:
1. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Third Edition,
Elsevier, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Alex Berson and Stephen [Link], “Data Warehousing, Data Mining & OLAP”, Tata
McGraw – Hill Edition, 35th Reprint 2016.
2. K.P. Soman, Shyam Diwakar and V. Ajay, “Insight into Data Mining Theory and Practice”,
Eastern Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
3. Ian [Link] and Eibe Frank, “Data Mining: Practical Machine Learning Tools and
Techniques”, Elsevier, Second Edition.

82
IT8076 SOFTWARE TESTING LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the criteria for test cases.
 To learn the design of test cases.
 To understand test management and test automation techniques.
 To apply test metrics and measurements.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Testing as an Engineering Activity – Testing as a Process – Testing Maturity Model- Testing
axioms – Basic definitions – Software Testing Principles – The Tester’s Role in a Software
Development Organization – Origins of Defects – Cost of defects – Defect Classes – The Defect
Repository and Test Design –Defect Examples- Developer/Tester Support of Developing a Defect
Repository.

UNIT II TEST CASE DESIGN STRATEGIES 9

Test case Design Strategies – Using Black Box Approach to Test Case Design – Boundary Value
Analysis – Equivalence Class Partitioning – State based testing – Cause-effect graphing –
Compatibility testing – user documentation testing – domain testing - Random Testing –
Requirements based testing – Using White Box Approach to Test design – Test Adequacy Criteria
– static testing vs. structural testing – code functional testing – Coverage and Control Flow Graphs
– Covering Code Logic – Paths – code complexity testing – Additional White box testing
approaches- Evaluating Test Adequacy Criteria.

UNIT III LEVELS OF TESTING 9

The need for Levels of Testing – Unit Test – Unit Test Planning – Designing the Unit Tests – The
Test Harness – Running the Unit tests and Recording results – Integration tests – Designing
Integration Tests – Integration Test Planning – Scenario testing – Defect bash elimination System
Testing – Acceptance testing – Performance testing – Regression Testing – Internationalization
testing – Ad-hoc testing – Alpha, Beta Tests – Testing OO systems – Usability and Accessibility
testing – Configuration testing –Compatibility testing – Testing the documentation –
Website testing.

UNIT IV TEST MANAGEMENT 9

People and organizational issues in testing – Organization structures for testing teams –
testing services – Test Planning – Test Plan Components – Test Plan Attachments – Locating
Test Items – test management – test process – Reporting Test Results – Introducing the test
specialist – Skills needed by a test specialist – Building a Testing Group- The Structure of Testing
Group- .The Technical Training Program.

UNIT V TEST AUTOMATION 9

Software test automation – skills needed for automation – scope of automation – design and
architecture for automation – requirements for a test tool – challenges in automation – Test
metrics and measurements – project, progress and productivity metrics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
 Design test cases suitable for a software development for different domains.
 Identify suitable tests to be carried out.
 Prepare test planning based on the document.
 Document test plans and test cases designed.
 Use automatic testing tools.
 Develop and validate a test plan.

83
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Software Testing – Principles and Practices”,
Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Ron Patton, “Software Testing”, Second Edition, Sams Publishing, Pearson Education, 2007.
AU [Link]

REFERENCES:
1. Ilene Burnstein, “Practical Software Testing”, Springer International Edition, 2003.
2. Edward Kit,” Software Testing in the Real World – Improving the Process”, Pearson
Education, 1995.
3. Boris Beizer,” Software Testing Techniques” – 2nd Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New
York, 1990.
4. Aditya P. Mathur, “Foundations of Software Testing _ Fundamental Algorithms
and Techniques”, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education, 2008.

IT8072 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LTPC

300 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the architecture and programming of ARM processor.
 To become familiar with the embedded computing platform design and analysis.
 To get thorough knowledge in interfacing concepts
 To design an embedded system and to develop programs

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED COMPUTING AND ARM PROCESSORS 9

Complex systems and micro processors– Embedded system design process –Design example:
Model train controller- Instruction sets preliminaries - ARM Processor – CPU: programming input
and output- supervisor mode, exceptions and traps – Co-processors- Memory system
mechanisms – CPU performance- CPU power consumption.

UNIT II EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM DESIGN 9

The CPU Bus-Memory devices and systems–Designing with computing platforms – consumer
electronics architecture – platform-level performance analysis - Components for embedded
programs- Models of programs- Assembly, linking and loading – compilation techniques- Program
level performance analysis – Software performance optimization – Program level energy and
power analysis and optimization – Analysis and optimization of program size- Program validation
and testing.

UNIT III SENSOR INTERFACING WITH ARDUINO 9

Basics of hardware design and functions of basic passive components-sensors and actuators-
Arduino code - library file for sensor interfacing-construction of basic applications

UNIT IV EMBEDDED FIRMWARE 9

Reset Circuit, Brown-out Protection Circuit-Oscillator Unit - Real Time Clock-Watchdog Timer -
Embedded Firmware Design Approaches and Development Languages.

UNIT V EMBEDDED C PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction-Creating ‘hardware delays’ using Timer 0 and Timer 1-Reading switches-Adding
Structure to the code-Generating a minimum and maximum delay-Example: Creating a portable
hardware delay- Timeout mechanisms-Creating loop timeouts-Testing loop timeouts- hardware
timeouts-Testing a hardware timeout

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

84
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
 Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor.
 Explain the concepts of embedded systems
 Understand the Concepts of peripherals and interfacing of sensors.
 Capable of using the system design techniques to develop firmware
 Illustrate the code for constructing a system

TEXT BOOKS:
[Link] Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computing System
Design”, Third Edition “Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012. (unit I & II)
2 [Link] (Unit III)
3 .Michael J. Pont, “Embedded C”, 2 nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.(Unit IV & V)

REFERENCES:
[Link] K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill.2014
[Link] [Link], “Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing”, Third Edition
Cengage Learning, 2012
3 Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems-Architecture,programming and design”, 3 edition,TMH.2015
4. Lyla, “Embedded Systems”, Pearson , 2013
6. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education,2000.

CS8072 AGILE METHODOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide students with a theoretical as well as practical understanding of agile software
development practices and how small teams can apply them to create high-quality software.
 To provide a good understanding of software design and a set of software technologies and
APIs.
 To do a detailed examination and demonstration of Agile development and testing techniques.
 To understand the benefits and pitfalls of working in an Agile team.
 To understand Agile development and testing.

UNIT I AGILE METHODOLOGY 9

Theories for Agile Management – Agile Software Development – Traditional Model vs. Agile Model
- Classification of Agile Methods – Agile Manifesto and Principles – Agile Project Management –
Agile Team Interactions – Ethics in Agile Teams - Agility in Design, Testing – Agile
Documentations – Agile Drivers, Capabilities and Values

UNIT II AGILE PROCESSES 9

Lean Production - SCRUM, Crystal, Feature Driven Development- Adaptive Software
Development - Extreme Programming: Method Overview – Lifecycle – Work Products, Roles and
Practices.

UNIT III AGILITY AND KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT 9

Agile Information Systems – Agile Decision Making - Earl‘S Schools of KM – Institutional
Knowledge Evolution Cycle – Development, Acquisition, Refinement, Distribution, Deployment ,
Leveraging – KM in Software Engineering – Managing Software Knowledge – Challenges of
Migrating to Agile Methodologies – Agile Knowledge Sharing – Role of Story-Cards – Story-Card
Maturity Model (SMM).

85
UNIT IV AGILITY AND REQUIREMENTS ENGINEERING 9
Impact of Agile Processes in RE–Current Agile Practices – Variance – Overview of RE Using Agile
– Managing Unstable Requirements – Requirements Elicitation – Agile Requirements Abstraction
Model – Requirements Management in Agile Environment, Agile Requirements Prioritization –
Agile Requirements Modeling and Generation – Concurrency in Agile Requirements Generation.

UNIT V AGILITY AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 9

Agile Product Development – Agile Metrics – Feature Driven Development (FDD) – Financial and
Production Metrics in FDD – Agile Approach to Quality Assurance - Test Driven Development –
Agile Approach in Global Software Development.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Realize the importance of interacting with business stakeholders in determining the
requirements for a software system
 Perform iterative software development processes: how to plan them, how to execute
them.
 Point out the impact of social aspects on software development success.
 Develop techniques and tools for improving team collaboration and software quality.
 Perform Software process improvement as an ongoing task for development teams.
 Show how agile approaches can be scaled up to the enterprise level.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. David J. Anderson and Eli Schragenheim, “Agile Management for Software Engineering:
Applying the Theory of Constraints for Business Results”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. Hazza and Dubinsky, “Agile Software Engineering, Series: Undergraduate Topics in
Computer Science”, Springer, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Craig Larman, “Agile and Iterative Development: A Manager‘s Guide”, Addison-Wesley,
2004.
2. Kevin C. Desouza, “Agile Information Systems: Conceptualization, Construction, and
Management”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2007.

CS8077 GRAPH THEORY AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand fundamentals of graph theory.
 To study proof techniques related to various concepts in graphs.
 To explore modern applications of graph theory.
UNIT I 9
Introduction - Graph Terminologies - Types of Graphs - Sub Graph- Multi Graph - Regular
Graph - Isomorphism - Isomorphic Graphs - Sub-graph - Euler graph - Hamiltonian Graph -
Related Theorems.

UNIT II 9
Trees -Properties- Distance and Centres - Types - Rooted Tree-- Tree Enumeration-
Labeled Tree - Unlabeled Tree - Spanning Tree - Fundamental Circuits- Cut Sets -
Properties - Fundamental Circuit and Cut-set- Connectivity- Separability -Related
Theorems.

86
 UNIT III 9
Network Flows - Planar Graph - Representation - Detection - Dual Graph - Geometric and
Combinatorial Dual - Related Theorems - Digraph - Properties - Euler Digraph.

UNIT IV 9
Matrix Representation - Adjacency matrix- Incidence matrix- Circuit matrix - Cut-set matrix -
Path Matrix- Properties - Related Theorems - Correlations. Graph Coloring - Chromatic
Polynomial - Chromatic Partitioning - Matching - Covering - Related Theorems.

UNIT V 9
Graph Algorithms- Connectedness and Components- Spanning Tree- Fundamental
Circuits- Cut Vertices- Directed Circuits- Shortest Path - Applications overview.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
 Understand the basic concepts of graphs, and different types of graphs
 Understand the properties, theorems and be able to prove theorems.
 Apply suitable graph model and algorithm for solving applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Narsingh Deo, "Graph Theory with Application to Engineering and Computer
Science", Prentice-Hall of India [Link], 2003.
2. [Link] , "Graph Theory Applications", Springer ,2016.

REFERENCES:
1. Bondy, J. A. and Murty, U.S.R., "Graph Theory with Applications", North Holland
Publication,2008.
2. West, D. B., “Introduction to Graph Theory”, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. John Clark, Derek Allan Holton, “A First Look at Graph Theory”, World Scientific
Publishing Company, 1991.
4. Diestel, R, "Graph Theory", Springer,3rd Edition,2006.
5. Kenneth [Link], "Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications", Mc Graw Hill ,
2007.

L T P C
IT8071 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of discrete time signals, systems and their classifications.
 To analyze the discrete time signals in both time and frequency domain.
 To design lowpass digital IIR filters according to predefined specifications based on analog
filter theory and analog-to-digital filter transformation.
 To design Linear phase digital FIR filters using fourier method, window technique
 To realize the concept and usage of DSP in various engineering fields.

UNIT I DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to DSP – Basic elements of DSP– Sampling of Continuous time signals–Representation,
Operation and Classification of Discrete Time Signal–Classification of Discrete Time Systems–
Discrete Convolution: Linear and Circular–Correlation.

UNIT II ANALYSIS OF LTI DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Analysis of LTI Discrete Time Systems using DFT–Properties of DFT–Inverse DFT– Analysis of LTI
Discrete Time Systems using FFT Algorithms– Inverse DFT using FFT Algorithm.

87
UNIT III INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9
Frequency response of Analog and Digital IIR filters–Realization of IIR filter–Design of analog low
pass filter–Analog to Digital filter Transformation using Bilinear Transformation and Impulse Invariant
method–Design of digital IIR filters (LPF, HPF, BPF, and BRF) using various transformation
techniques.

UNIT IV FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9

Linear Phase FIR filter–Phase delay–Group delay–Realization of FIR filter–Design of Causal and
Non-causal FIR filters (LPF, HPF, BPF and BRF) using Window method (Rectangular, Hamming
window, Hanning window) –Frequency Sampling Technique.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF DSP 9

Multirate Signal Processing: Decimation, Interpolation, Spectrum of the sampled signal –Processing
of Audio and Radar signal.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Perform mathematical operations on signals.
 Understand the sampling theorem and perform sampling on continuous-time signals to get
discrete time signal by applying advanced knowledge of the sampling theory.
 Transform the time domain signal into frequency domain signal and vice-versa.
 Apply the relevant theoretical knowledge to design the digital IIR/FIR filters for the given
analog specifications.

TEXT BOOK:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris [Link], “Digital Signal Processing – Principles, Algorithms &
Applications”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2007.

REFERENCES
1. Richard G. Lyons, “Understanding Digital Signal Processing”. Second Edition, Pearson
Education.
2. [Link], R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, “Discrete-Time Signal Processing”, 8th Indian
Reprint, Pearson, 2004.
3. Emmanuel [Link], & [Link], “Digital Signal Processing”, Second Edition,
Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.
4. William D. Stanley, “Digital Signal Processing”, Second Edition, Reston Publications.

GE8075 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from
WTO to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological
Research, Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.

UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10

Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents, Geographical
Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad

88
UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10
International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act
of India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.

UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9

Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair Competition
and IP Laws – Case Studies.

UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7

Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012
2. S. V. Satakar, “Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess Publications, New Delhi,
2002

REFERENCES:
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, “Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents and
Trade Secrets”, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli,”Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge Economy”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual Property,
Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.

CS8091 BIG DATA ANALYTICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the fundamental concepts of big data and analytics.
 To explore tools and practices for working with big data
 To learn about stream computing.
 To know about the research that requires the integration of large amounts of data.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA 9

Evolution of Big data - Best Practices for Big data Analytics - Big data characteristics - Validating
- The Promotion of the Value of Big Data - Big Data Use Cases- Characteristics of Big Data
Applications - Perception and Quantification of Value -Understanding Big Data Storage - A
General Overview of High-Performance Architecture - HDFS - MapReduce and YARN - Map
Reduce Programming Model

UNIT II CLUSTERING AND CLASSIFICATION 9

Advanced Analytical Theory and Methods: Overview of Clustering - K-means - Use Cases -
Overview of the Method - Determining the Number of Clusters - Diagnostics - Reasons to
Choose and Cautions .- Classification: Decision Trees - Overview of a Decision Tree - The
General Algorithm - Decision Tree Algorithms - Evaluating a Decision Tree - Decision Trees in
R - Naïve Bayes - Bayes’ Theorem - Naïve Bayes Classifier.

89
UNIT III ASSOCIATION AND RECOMMENDATION SYSTEM 9
Advanced Analytical Theory and Methods: Association Rules - Overview - Apriori Algorithm -
Evaluation of Candidate Rules - Applications of Association Rules - Finding Association& finding
similarity - Recommendation System: Collaborative Recommendation- Content Based
Recommendation - Knowledge Based Recommendation- Hybrid Recommendation Approaches.
UNIT IV STREAM MEMORY 9
Introduction to Streams Concepts – Stream Data Model and Architecture - Stream Computing,
Sampling Data in a Stream – Filtering Streams – Counting Distinct Elements in a Stream –
Estimating moments – Counting oneness in a Window – Decaying Window – Real time Analytics
Platform(RTAP) applications - Case Studies - Real Time Sentiment Analysis, Stock Market
Predictions. Using Graph Analytics for Big Data: Graph Analytics

UNIT V NOSQL DATA MANAGEMENT FOR BIG DATA AND VISUALIZATION 9

NoSQL Databases : Schema-less Models”: Increasing Flexibility for Data Manipulation-Key Value
Stores- Document Stores - Tabular Stores - Object Data Stores - Graph Databases Hive -
Sharding –- Hbase – Analyzing big data with twitter - Big data for E-Commerce Big data for blogs
- Review of Basic Data Analytic Methods using R.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Work with big data tools and its analysis techniques
 Analyze data by utilizing clustering and classification algorithms
 Learn and apply different mining algorithms and recommendation systems for large
volumes of data
 Perform analytics on data streams
 Learn NoSQL databases and management.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anand Rajaraman and Jeffrey David Ullman, "Mining of Massive Datasets", Cambridge
University Press, 2012.
2. David Loshin, "Big Data Analytics: From Strategic Planning to Enterprise Integration with
Tools, Techniques, NoSQL, and Graph", Morgan Kaufmann/El sevier Publishers, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. EMC Education Services, "Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing,
Visualizing and Presenting Data", Wiley publishers, 2015.
2. Bart Baesens, "Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its
Applications", Wiley Publishers, 2015.
3. Dietmar Jannach and Markus Zanker, "Recommender Systems: An Introduction",
Cambridge University Press, 2010.
4. Kim H. Pries and Robert Dunnigan, "Big Data Analytics: A Practical Guide for Managers "
CRC Press, 2015.
5. Jimmy Lin and Chris Dyer, "Data-Intensive Text Processing with MapReduce", Synthesis
Lectures on Human Language Technologies, Vol. 3, No. 1, Pages 1-177, Morgan Claypool
publishers, 2010.

90
CS8082 MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the need for machine learning for various problem solving
 To study the various supervised, semi-supervised and unsupervised learning algorithms in
machine learning
 To understand the latest trends in machine learning
 To design appropriate machine learning algorithms for problem solving

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Learning Problems – Perspectives and Issues – Concept Learning – Version Spaces and
Candidate Eliminations – Inductive bias – Decision Tree learning – Representation – Algorithm –
Heuristic Space Search.

UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS AND GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Neural Network Representation – Problems – Perceptrons – Multilayer Networks and Back
Propagation Algorithms – Advanced Topics – Genetic Algorithms – Hypothesis Space Search –
Genetic Programming – Models of Evaluation and Learning.

UNIT III BAYESIAN AND COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING 9

Bayes Theorem – Concept Learning – Maximum Likelihood – Minimum Description Length
Principle – Bayes Optimal Classifier – Gibbs Algorithm – Naïve Bayes Classifier – Bayesian
Belief Network – EM Algorithm – Probability Learning – Sample Complexity – Finite and Infinite
Hypothesis Spaces – Mistake Bound Model.

UNIT IV INSTANT BASED LEARNING 9

K- Nearest Neighbour Learning – Locally weighted Regression – Radial Basis
Functions – Case Based Learning.

UNIT V ADVANCED LEARNING 9

Learning Sets of Rules – Sequential Covering Algorithm – Learning Rule Set – First Order
Rules – Sets of First Order Rules – Induction on Inverted Deduction – Inverting Resolution –
Analytical Learning – Perfect Domain Theories – Explanation Base Learning – FOCL
Algorithm – Reinforcement Learning – Task – Q-Learning – Temporal Difference Learning

TOTAL :45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
 Differentiate between supervised, unsupervised, semi-supervised machine learning
approaches
 Discuss the decision tree algorithm and indentity and overcome the problem of
overfitting
 Discuss and apply the back propagation algorithm and genetic algorithms to various
problems
 Apply the Bayesian concepts to machine learning
 Analyse and suggest appropriate machine learning approaches for various types of
problems

TEXT BOOK:
1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw-Hill E du c at i on ( In d i a ) P r i v ate
L i m i t e d, 20 13 .
REFERENCES:
1. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive Computation and
Machine Learning)”, The MIT Press 2004.
2. Stephen Marsland, “Machine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective”, CRC Press, 2009.
91
 CS8092 COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA L T P C
3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
 To develop an understanding and awareness how issues such as content, information
architecture, motion, sound, design, and technology merge to form effective and
compelling interactive experiences for a wide range of audiences and end users.
 To become familiar with various software programs used in the creation and
implementation of multi- media
 To appreciate the importance of technical ability and creativity within design practice.
 To gain knowledge about graphics hardware devices and software used.
 To understand the two-dimensional graphics and their transformations.
 To understand the three-dimensional graphics and their transformations.
 To appreciate illumination and color models
 To become familiar with understand clipping techniques
 To become familiar with Blender Graphics

UNIT I ILLUMINATION AND COLOR MODELS 9

Light sources - basic illumination models – halftone patterns and dithering techniques; Properties
of light - Standard primaries and chromaticity diagram; Intuitive colour concepts - RGB colour
model - YIQ colour model - CMY colour model - HSV colour model - HLS colour model; Colour
selection. Output primitives – points and lines, line drawing algorithms, loading the frame buffer,
line function; circle and ellipse generating algorithms; Pixel addressing and object geometry, filled
area primitives.
UNIT II TWO-DIMENSIONAL GRAPHICS 9
Two dimensional geometric transformations – Matrix representations and homogeneous
coordinates, composite transformations; Two dimensional viewing – viewing pipeline, viewing
coordinate reference frame; window-to-viewport coordinate transformation, Two dimensional
viewing functions; clipping operations – point, line, and polygon clipping algorithms.

UNIT III THREE-DIMENSIONAL GRAPHICS 9

Three dimensional concepts; Three dimensional object representations – Polygon surfaces-
Polygon tables- Plane equations - Polygon meshes; Curved Lines and surfaces, Quadratic
surfaces; Blobby objects; Spline representations – Bezier curves and surfaces -B-Spline curves
and surfaces. TRANSFORMATION AND VIEWING: Three dimensional geometric and modeling
transformations – Translation, Rotation, Scaling, composite transformations; Three dimensional
viewing – viewing pipeline, viewing coordinates, Projections, Clipping; Visible surface detection
methods.
UNIT IV MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM DESIGN & MULTIMEDIA FILE HANDLING 9
Multimedia basics − Multimedia applications − Multimedia system architecture − Evolving
technologies for multimedia − Defining objects for multimedia systems − Multimedia data interface
standards − Multimedia databases. Compression and decompression − Data and file format
standards − Multimedia I/O technologies − Digital voice and audio − Video image and animation −
Full motion video − Storage and retrieval technologies.
UNIT V HYPERMEDIA 9
Multimedia authoring and user interface - Hypermedia messaging -Mobile messaging −
Hypermedia message component − Creating hypermedia message − Integrated multimedia
message standards − Integrated document management − Distributed multimedia [Link]
STUDY: BLENDER GRAPHICS Blender Fundamentals – Drawing Basic Shapes – Modelling –
Shading & Textures
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
92
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Design two dimensional graphics.
 Apply two dimensional transformations.
 Design three dimensional graphics.
 Apply three dimensional transformations.
 Apply Illumination and color models.
 Apply clipping techniques to graphics.
 Understood Different types of Multimedia File Format
 Design Basic 3d Scenes using Blender

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker M, “Computer Graphics", Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2007 [
UNIT I – III ]
2. Andleigh, P. K and Kiran Thakrar, “Multimedia Systems and Design”, PHI, 2003. [ UNIT
IV,V ]

REFERENCES:
1. Judith Jeffcoate, “Multimedia in practice: Technology and Applications”, PHI, 1998.
2. Foley, Vandam, Feiner and Hughes, “Computer Graphics: Principles and
Practice”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Jeffrey McConnell, “Computer Graphics: Theory into Practice”, Jones and Bartlett
Publishers,2006.
4. Hill F S Jr., "Computer Graphics", Maxwell Macmillan , 1990.

5. Peter Shirley, Michael Ashikhmin, Michael Gleicher, Stephen R Marschner, Erik Reinhard,
KelvinSung, and AK Peters, “Fundamentals of Computer Graphics”, CRC Press, 2010.
6. William M. Newman and Robert [Link], “Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics”,
Mc Graw Hill 1978.
[Link]

IT8075 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the Software Project Planning and Evaluation techniques.
 To plan and manage projects at each stage of the software development life cycle (SDLC).
 To learn about the activity planning and risk management principles.
 To manage software projects and control software deliverables.
 To develop skills to manage the various phases involved in project management and people
management.
 To deliver successful software projects that support organization’s strategic goals.

UNIT I PROJECT EVALUATION AND PROJECT PLANNING 9

Importance of Software Project Management – Activities - Methodologies – Categorization of
Software Projects – Setting objectives – Management Principles – Management Control – Project
portfolio Management – Cost-benefit evaluation technology – Risk evaluation – Strategic program
Management – Stepwise Project Planning.

93
UNIT II PROJECT LIFE CYCLE AND EFFORT ESTIMATION 9
Software process and Process Models – Choice of Process models - Rapid Application development
– Agile methods – Dynamic System Development Method – Extreme Programming– Managing
interactive processes – Basics of Software estimation – Effort and Cost estimation techniques –
COSMIC Full function points - COCOMO II - a Parametric Productivity Model.

UNIT III ACTIVITY PLANNING AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Objectives of Activity planning – Project schedules – Activities – Sequencing and scheduling –
Network Planning models – Formulating Network Model – Forward Pass & Backward Pass
techniques – Critical path (CRM) method – Risk identification – Assessment – Risk Planning –Risk
Management – – PERT technique – Monte Carlo simulation – Resource Allocation – Creation of
critical paths – Cost schedules.

UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL 9

Framework for Management and control – Collection of data – Visualizing progress – Cost monitoring
– Earned Value Analysis – Prioritizing Monitoring – Project tracking – Change control – Software
Configuration Management – Managing contracts – Contract Management.

UNIT V STAFFING IN SOFTWARE PROJECTS 9

Managing people – Organizational behavior – Best methods of staff selection – Motivation – The
Oldham – Hackman job characteristic model – Stress – Health and Safety – Ethical and Professional
concerns – Working in teams – Decision making – Organizational structures – Dispersed and Virtual
teams – Communications genres – Communication plans – Leadership.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Understand Project Management principles while developing software.
 Gain extensive knowledge about the basic project management concepts, framework and the
process models.
 Obtain adequate knowledge about software process models and software effort estimation
techniques.
 Estimate the risks involved in various project activities.
 Define the checkpoints, project reporting structure, project progress and tracking mechanisms
using project management principles.
 Learn staff selection process and the issues related to people management

TEXT BOOK:
1. Bob Hughes, Mike Cotterell and Rajib Mall: Software Project Management – Fifth Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Robert K. Wysocki “Effective Software Project Management” – Wiley Publication, 2011.
2. Walker Royce: “Software Project Management”- Addison-Wesley, 1998.
3. Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Managing Global Software Projects” – McGraw Hill Education
(India), Fourteenth Reprint 2013.

94
 CS8081 INTERNET OF THINGS LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand Smart Objects and IoT Architectures
 To learn about various IOT-related protocols
 To build simple IoT Systems using Arduino and Raspberry Pi.
 To understand data analytics and cloud in the context of IoT
 To develop IoT infrastructure for popular applications

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF IoT 9

Evolution of Internet of Things - Enabling Technologies – IoT Architectures: oneM2M, IoT World
Forum (IoTWF) and Alternative IoT models – Simplified IoT Architecture and Core IoT Functional
Stack -– Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT – Functional blocks of an IoT ecosystem – Sensors,
Actuators, Smart Objects and Connecting Smart Objects

UNIT II IoT PROTOCOLS 9

IoT Access Technologies: Physical and MAC layers, topology and Security of IEEE 802.15.4,
802.15.4g, 802.15.4e, 1901.2a, 802.11ah and LoRaWAN – Network Layer: IP versions,
Constrained Nodes and Constrained Networks – Optimizing IP for IoT: From 6LoWPAN to 6Lo,
Routing over Low Power and Lossy Networks – Application Transport Methods: Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition – Application Layer Protocols: CoAP and MQTT
UNIT III DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Design Methodology - Embedded computing logic - Microcontroller, System on Chips - IoT system
building blocks - Arduino - Board details, IDE programming - Raspberry Pi - Interfaces and
Raspberry Pi with Python Programming.

UNIT IV DATA ANALYTICS AND SUPPORTING SERVICES 9

Structured Vs Unstructured Data and Data in Motion Vs Data in Rest – Role of Machine Learning
– No SQL Databases – Hadoop Ecosystem – Apache Kafka, Apache Spark – Edge Streaming
Analytics and Network Analytics – Xively Cloud for IoT, Python Web Application Framework –
Django – AWS for IoT – System Management with NETCONF-YANG

UNIT V CASE STUDIES/INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Cisco IoT system - IBM Watson IoT platform – Manufacturing - Converged Plantwide Ethernet
Model (CPwE) – Power Utility Industry – GridBlocks Reference Model - Smart and Connected
Cities: Layered architecture, Smart Lighting, Smart Parking Architecture and Smart Traffic Control
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
 Explain the concept of IoT.
 Analyze various protocols for IoT.
 Design a PoC of an IoT system using Rasperry Pi/Arduino
 Apply data analytics and use cloud offerings related to IoT.
 Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario

TEXTBOOK:
1. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Rob Barton and Jerome Henry, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols and Use Cases for Internet of Things,
Cisco Press, 2017

95
REFERENCES:
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities
Press, 2015
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key applications
and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012 (for Unit 2).
3. Jan Ho¨ ller, Vlasios Tsiatsis , Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis , Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand.
David Boyle, "From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things - Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence", Elsevier, 2014.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the Internet of
Things”, Springer, 2011.
5. Michael Margolis, Arduino Cookbook, Recipes to Begin, Expand, and Enhance Your Projects,
2nd Edition, O'Reilly Media, 2011.
[Link]
[Link]

IT8074 SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn fundamentals of XML
 To provide an overview of Service Oriented Architecture and Web services and their
importance
 To learn web services standards and technologies
 To learn service oriented analysis and design for developing SOA based applications

UNIT I XML 9
XML document structure – Well-formed and valid documents – DTD – XML Schema – Parsing
XML using DOM, SAX – XPath - XML Transformation and XSL – Xquery

UNIT II SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE (SOA) BASICS 9

Characteristics of SOA, Benefits of SOA , Comparing SOA with Client-Server and Distributed
architectures –-- Principles of Service Orientation – Service layers

UNIT III WEB SERVICES (WS) AND STANDARDS 8

Web Services Platform – Service descriptions – WSDL – Messaging with SOAP – Service
discovery – UDDI – Service-Level Interaction Patterns – Orchestration and Choreography

UNIT IV WEB SERVICES EXTENSIONS 8

WS-Addressing - WS-ReliableMessaging - WS-Policy – WS-Coordination – WS -Transactions -
WS-Security - Examples

UNIT V SERVICE ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 11

SOA delivery strategies – Service oriented analysis – Service Modelling – Service oriented design
– Standards and composition guidelines -- Service design – Business process design – Case
Study
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:
 Understand XML technologies
 Understand service orientation, benefits of SOA
 Understand web services and WS standards
 Use web services extensions to develop solutions
 Understand and apply service modeling, service oriented analysis and design for
application development
96
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas Erl, “ Service Oriented Architecture: Concepts, Technology, and Design”, Pearson
Education, 2005
2. Sandeep Chatterjee and James Webber, “Developing Enterprise Web Services: An
Architect's Guide”, Prentice Hall, 2004

REFERENCES:
1. James McGovern, Sameer Tyagi, Michael E Stevens, Sunil Mathew, “Java Web Services
Architecture”, Elsevier, 2003.
2. Ron Schmelzer et al. “ XML and Web Services”, Pearson Education, 2002.
3. Frank [Link], “XML, Web Services and the Data Revolution”, Pearson Education,
2002

GE8077 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran
and Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction,
Customer complaints, Customer retention.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee
involvement - Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier
partnership - Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.

UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts,
Methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason
to bench mark, Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss
function - TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration- ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO
14001—Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services processes.

97
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale [Link], Carol [Link],Glen H. Besterfield,Mary [Link],Hemant Urdhwareshe
and Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2006.
4. ISO9001-2015 standards

CS8083 MULTI-CORE ARCHITECTURES AND PROGRAMMING LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the need for multi-core processors, and their architecture.
 To understand the challenges in parallel and multi-threaded programming.
 To learn about the various parallel programming paradigms,
 To develop multicore programs and design parallel solutions.

UNIT I MULTI-CORE PROCESSORS 9

Single core to Multi-core architectures – SIMD and MIMD systems – Interconnection networks -
Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures – Cache coherence - Performance
Issues – Parallel program design.

UNIT II PARALLEL PROGRAM CHALLENGES 9

Performance – Scalability – Synchronization and data sharing – Data races – Synchronization
primitives (mutexes, locks, semaphores, barriers) – deadlocks and livelocks – communication
between threads (condition variables, signals, message queues and pipes).

UNIT III SHARED MEMORY PROGRAMMING WITH OpenMP 9

OpenMP Execution Model – Memory Model – OpenMP Directives – Work-sharing Constructs -
Library functions – Handling Data and Functional Parallelism – Handling Loops - Performance
Considerations.

UNIT IV DISTRIBUTED MEMORY PROGRAMMING WITH MPI 9

MPI program execution – MPI constructs – libraries – MPI send and receive – Point-to-point and
Collective communication – MPI derived datatypes – Performance evaluation

UNIT V PARALLEL PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT 9

Case studies - n-Body solvers – Tree Search – OpenMP and MPI implementations and
comparison.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Describe multicore architectures and identify their characteristics and challenges.
 Identify the issues in programming Parallel Processors.
 Write programs using OpenMP and MPI.
 Design parallel programming solutions to common problems.
 Compare and contrast programming for serial processors and programming for parallel
processors.
98
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter S. Pacheco, “An Introduction to Parallel Programming”, Morgan-Kauffman/Elsevier, 2011.
2. Darryl Gove, “Multicore Application Programming for Windows, Linux, and Oracle Solaris”,
Pearson, 2011 (unit 2)

REFERENCES:
1. Michael J Quinn, “Parallel programming in C with MPI and OpenMP”, Tata McGraw Hill,2003.
2. Victor Alessandrini, Shared Memory Application Programming, 1st Edition, Concepts and
Strategies in Multicore Application Programming, Morgan Kaufmann, 2015.
3. Yan Solihin, Fundamentals of Parallel Multicore Architecture, CRC Press, 2015.

CS8079 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION LTPC

30 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the foundations of Human Computer Interaction.
 To become familiar with the design technologies for individuals and persons with
disabilities.
 To be aware of mobile HCI.
 To learn the guidelines for user interface.

UNIT I FOUNDATIONS OF HCI 9

The Human: I/O channels – Memory – Reasoning and problem solving; The Computer: Devices
– Memory – processing and networks; Interaction: Models – frameworks – Ergonomics – styles –
elements – interactivity- Paradigms. - Case Studies

UNIT II DESIGN & SOFTWARE PROCESS 9

Interactive Design: Basics – process – scenarios – navigation – screen design – Iteration and
prototyping. HCI in software process: Software life cycle – usability engineering – Prototyping in
practice – design rationale. Design rules: principles, standards, guidelines, rules. Evaluation
Techniques – Universal Design

UNIT III MODELS AND THEORIES 9

HCI Models: Cognitive models: Socio-Organizational issues and stakeholder requirements –
Communication and collaboration models-Hypertext, Multimedia and WWW.

UNIT IV MOBILE HCI 9

Mobile Ecosystem: Platforms, Application frameworks- Types of Mobile Applications: Widgets,
Applications, Games- Mobile Information Architecture, Mobile 2.0, Mobile Design: Elements of
Mobile Design, Tools. - Case Studies

UNIT V WEB INTERFACE DESIGN 9

Designing Web Interfaces – Drag & Drop, Direct Selection, Contextual Tools, Overlays, Inlays
and Virtual Pages, Process Flow - Case Studies
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Design effective dialog for HCI
 Design effective HCI for individuals and persons with disabilities.
 Assess the importance of user feedback.
 Explain the HCI implications for designing multimedia/ ecommerce/ e-learning Web sites.
 Develop meaningful user interface.

99
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, Gregory Abowd, Russell Beale, “Human Computer Interaction”, 3rd
Edition, Pearson Education, 2004 (UNIT I, II & III)
2. Brian Fling, “Mobile Design and Development”, First Edition, O’Reilly Media Inc., 2009 (UNIT –
IV)
3. Bill Scott and Theresa Neil, “Designing Web Interfaces”, First Edition, O’Reilly, 2009. (UNIT-V)

CS8073 C# AND .NET PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn basic programming in C# and the object oriented programming concepts.
 To update and enhance skills in writing Windows applications, [Link] and ASP
.NET.
 To study the advanced concepts in data connectivity, WPF, WCF and WWF with
C# and .NET 4.5.
 To implement mobile applications using .Net compact framework
 To understand the working of base class libraries, their operations and
manipulation of data using XML.

UNIT I C# LANGUAGE BASICS 9

.Net Architecture - Core C# - Variables - Data Types - Flow control - Objects and
Types- Classes and Structs - Inheritance- Generics – Arrays and Tuples - Operators
and Casts - Indexers

UNIT II C# ADVANCED FEATURES 9

Delegates - Lambdas - Lambda Expressions - Events - Event Publisher - Event
Listener - Strings and Regular Expressions - Generics - Collections - Memory
Management and Pointers - Errors and Exceptions - Reflection

UNIT III BASE CLASS LIBRARIES AND DATA MANIPULATION 9

Diagnostics -Tasks, Threads and Synchronization - .Net Security - Localization -
Manipulating XML- SAX and DOM - Manipulating files and the Registry- Transactions -
[Link]- Peer-to-Peer Networking - PNRP - Building P2P Applications - Windows
Presentation Foundation (WPF).

UNIT IV WINDOW BASED APPLICATIONS, WCF AND WWF 9

Window based applications - Core [Link]- [Link] Web forms -Windows
Communication Foundation (WCF)- Introduction to Web Services - .Net Remoting -
Windows Service - Windows Workflow Foundation (WWF) - Activities – Workflows

UNIT V .NET FRAMEWORK AND COMPACT FRAMEWORK 9

Assemblies - Shared assemblies - Custom Hosting with CLR Objects - Appdomains -
Core XAML - Bubbling and Tunneling Events- Reading and Writing XAML - .Net
Compact Framework - Compact Edition Data Stores – Errors, Testing and Debugging –
Optimizing performance – Packaging and Deployment – Networking and Mobile
Devices
TOTAL :45 PERIODS

100
 OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Write various applications using C# Language in the .NET Framework.
 Develop distributed applications using .NET Framework.
 Create mobile applications using .NET compact Framework.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Christian Nagel, Bill Evjen, Jay Glynn, Karli Watson, Morgan Skinner . ―Professional
C# 2012 and .NET 4.5ǁ, Wiley, 2012
2. Harsh Bhasin, ―Programming in C#ǁ, Oxford University Press, 2014.

REFERENCES
1. Ian Gariffiths, Mathew Adams, Jesse Liberty, ―Programming C# 4.0ǁ, O‘Reilly,
Fourth Edition, 2010.
2. Andrew Troelsen, Pro C# 5.0 and the .NET 4.5 Framework, Apress publication,
2012.
3. Andy Wigley, Daniel Moth, Peter Foot, ―Mobile Development Handbookǁ, Microsoft
Press, 2011.

CS8088 WIRELESS ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about the issues and challenges in the design of wireless ad hoc networks.
 To understand the working of MAC and Routing Protocols for ad hoc and sensor networks
 To learn about the Transport Layer protocols and their QoS for ad hoc and sensor
networks.
 To understand various security issues in ad hoc and sensor networks and the
corresponding solutions.

UNIT I MAC & ROUTING IN AD HOC NETWORKS 9

Introduction – Issues and challenges in ad hoc networks – MAC Layer Protocols for wireless
ad hoc networks – Contention-Based MAC protocols – MAC Protocols Using Directional
Antennas – Multiple-Channel MAC Protocols – Power-Aware MAC Protocols – Routing in Ad
hoc Networks – Design Issues – Proactive, Reactive and Hybrid Routing Protocols

UNIT II TRANSPORT & QOS IN AD HOC NETWORKS 9

TCP‟s challenges and Design Issues in Ad Hoc Networks – Transport protocols for ad hoc
networks – Issues and Challenges in providing QoS – MAC Layer QoS solutions – Network
Layer QoS solutions – QoS Model

UNIT III MAC & ROUTING IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 9

Introduction – Applications – Challenges – Sensor network architecture – MAC Protocols for
wireless sensor networks – Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts – Contention-
Based protocols – Schedule-Based protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 Zigbee – Topology Control –
Routing Protocols

UNIT IV TRANSPORT & QOS IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 9

Data-Centric and Contention-Based Networking – Transport Layer and QoS in Wireless
Sensor Networks – Congestion Control in network processing – Operating systems for
wireless sensor networks – Examples

101
 UNIT V SECURITY IN AD HOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS 9
Security Attacks – Key Distribution and Management – Intrusion Detection – Software based
Anti-tamper techniques – Water marking techniques – Defense against routing attacks -
Secure Ad hoc routing protocols – Broadcast authentication WSN protocols – TESLA – Biba –
Sensor Network Security Protocols – SPINS

TOTAL :45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Identify different issues in wireless ad hoc and sensor networks .
 To analyze protocols developed for ad hoc and sensor networks .
 To identify and understand security issues in ad hoc and sensor
networks.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link] Ram Murthy and [Link], “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks – Architectures and 2.
Protocols”, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Holger Karl, Andreas Willing, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005.

REFERENCES
1. Subir Kumar Sarkar, T G Basavaraju, C Puttamadappa, “Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks”,
Auerbach Publications, 2008.
2. Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal, “Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks: Theory
and Applications (2nd Edition)”, World Scientific Publishing, 2011.
3. Waltenegus Dargie, Christian Poellabauer, “Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Networks
Theory and Practice”, John Wiley and Sons, 2010
4. Xiang-Yang Li , “Wireless Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks: Theory and Applications”, 1227
th edition, Cambridge university Press,2008.

CS8071 ADVANCED TOPICS ON DATABASES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the modeling and design of databases.
 To acquire knowledge on parallel and distributed databases and their applications.
 To study the usage and applications of Object Oriented and Intelligent databases.
 To understand the usage of advanced data models.
 To learn emerging databases such as XML, Cloud and Big Data.
 To acquire inquisitive attitude towards research topics in databases.

UNIT I PARALLEL AND DISTRIBUTED DATABASES 9

Database System Architectures: Centralized and Client-Server Architectures – Server System
Architectures – Parallel Systems- Distributed Systems – Parallel Databases: I/O Parallelism – Inter
and Intra Query Parallelism – Inter and Intra operation Parallelism – Design of Parallel Systems-
Distributed Database Concepts - Distributed Data Storage – Distributed Transactions – Commit
Protocols – Concurrency Control – Distributed Query Processing – Case Studies

UNIT II OBJECT AND OBJECT RELATIONAL DATABASES 9

Concepts for Object Databases: Object Identity – Object structure – Type Constructors –
Encapsulation of Operations – Methods – Persistence – Type and Class Hierarchies – Inheritance
– Complex Objects – Object Database Standards, Languages and Design: ODMG Model – ODL –
102
OQL – Object Relational and Extended – Relational Systems: Object Relational features in
SQL/Oracle – Case Studies.

UNIT III INTELLIGENT DATABASES 9

Active Databases: Syntax and Semantics (Starburst, Oracle, DB2)- Taxonomy- Applications-
Design Principles for Active Rules- Temporal Databases: Overview of Temporal Databases-
TSQL2- Deductive Databases: Logic of Query Languages – Datalog- Recursive Rules-Syntax and
Semantics of Datalog Languages- Implementation of Rules and Recursion- Recursive Queries in
SQL- Spatial Databases- Spatial Data Types- Spatial Relationships- Spatial Data Structures-
Spatial Access Methods- Spatial DB Implementation.

UNIT IV ADVANCED DATA MODELS 9

Mobile Databases: Location and Handoff Management - Effect of Mobility on Data Management -
Location Dependent Data Distribution - Mobile Transaction Models -Concurrency Control -
Transaction Commit Protocols- Multimedia Databases- Information Retrieval- Data Warehousing-
Data Mining- Text Mining.

UNIT V EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES 9

XML Databases: XML-Related Technologies-XML Schema- XML Query Languages- Storing XML
in Databases-XML and SQL- Native XML Databases- Web Databases- Geographic Information
Systems- Biological Data Management- Cloud Based Databases: Data Storage Systems on the
Cloud- Cloud Storage Architectures-Cloud Data Models- Query Languages- Introduction to Big
Data-Storage-Analysis.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able,
 To develop in-depth understanding of relational databases and skills to optimize database
performance in practice.
 To understand and critique on each type of databases.
 To design faster algorithms in solving practical database problems.
 To implement intelligent databases and various data models.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Sixth Edition ,
Pearson, 2011.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.

REFERENCES:
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, Sixth
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2011.

2. [Link], [Link], [Link], “An Introduction to Database Systems”, Eighth

Edition, Pearson Education, 2006.

3. Carlo Zaniolo, Stefano Ceri, Christos Faloutsos, Richard [Link], [Link],

Roberto Zicari, “Advanced Database Systems”, Morgan Kaufmann publishers,2006.

GE8072 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C

DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of

103
 products and services
 To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
 To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive
at requirements for new product development and convert them in to design
specification
 To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and
arrive at the optimum system specification and characteristics
 To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-
Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to
Product Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and
Services - Types of Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies
- Product Life Cycle – Product Development Planning and Management.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering -
traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling -
Introduction to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System
Design - Interface Design.

UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –
Mechanical, Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design
of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component
design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation

UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
- Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal

UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Define, formulate and analyze a problem
 Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
 Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
 Work independently as well as in teams
104
  Manage a project from start to finish

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013

GE8074 HUMAN RIGHTS LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE :
 To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.

UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights – Natural,
Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural Rights;
collective / Solidarity Rights.

UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.

UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.

UNIT IV 9
Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.

UNIT V 9
Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabled
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National
and State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO’s, Media, Educational
Institutions, Social Movements.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.

REFERENCES:
1. Kapoor S.K., “Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws”, Central Law Agency,
Allahabad, 2014.
2. Chandra U., “Human Rights”, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
3. Upendra Baxi, The Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
105
GE8071 DISASTER MANAGEMENT LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
 To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability,
 disasters, disaster prevention and risk reduction
 To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
 To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
 To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
 disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc - Classification, Causes, Impacts including social,
economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in terms of
caste, class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters,
pandemics, complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don’ts during various types of
Disasters.

UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9

Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community
based DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community,
Panchayati Raj
Institutions/Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stake-holders- Institutional
Processess and Framework at State and Central Level- State Disaster Management
Authority(SDMA) – Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate Agencies.

UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as
dams, embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario and
Scenarios in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate technology
and local resources.

UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9

Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation,
Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and
Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmes
and legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk
Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment.

UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD

WORKS 9
Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to
 Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and society
 Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as mitigation.
 Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarious in the Indian context, Disaster
damage assessment and management.

106
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
2. Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt.
Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
3. Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk Management, NIDM,
New Delhi, 2011
4. Kapur Anu Vulnerable India: A Geographical Study of Disasters, IIAS and Sage Publishers,
New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy,2009.

EC8093 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To become familiar with digital image fundamentals
 To get exposed to simple image enhancement techniques in Spatial and Frequency domain.
 To learn concepts of degradation function and restoration techniques.
 To study the image segmentation and representation techniques.
 To become familiar with image compression and recognition methods

UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9

Steps in Digital Image Processing – Components – Elements of Visual Perception – Image
Sensing and Acquisition – Image Sampling and Quantization – Relationships between pixels -
Color image fundamentals - RGB, HSI models, Two-dimensional mathematical preliminaries, 2D
transforms - DFT, DCT.

UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9

Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations – Histogram processing – Basics of Spatial Filtering–
Smoothing and Sharpening Spatial Filtering, Frequency Domain: Introduction to Fourier
Transform– Smoothing and Sharpening frequency domain filters – Ideal, Butterworth and
Gaussian filters, Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement.

UNIT III IMAGE RESTORATION 9

Image Restoration - degradation model, Properties, Noise models – Mean Filters – Order
Statistics – Adaptive filters – Band reject Filters – Band pass Filters – Notch Filters – Optimum
Notch Filtering – Inverse Filtering – Wiener filtering

UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION 9

Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough transform – Thresholding - Region based segmentation –
Region growing – Region splitting and merging – Morphological processing- erosion and dilation,
Segmentation by morphological watersheds – basic concepts – Dam construction – Watershed
segmentation algorithm.

UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION AND RECOGNITION 9

Need for data compression, Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Shift codes, Arithmetic coding, JPEG
standard, MPEG. Boundary representation, Boundary description, Fourier Descriptor, Regional
Descriptors – Topological feature, Texture - Patterns and Pattern classes - Recognition based on
matching.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS

107
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
 Know and understand the basics and fundamentals of digital image processing, such as
digitization, sampling, quantization, and 2D-transforms.
 Operate on images using the techniques of smoothing, sharpening and enhancement.
 Understand the restoration concepts and filtering techniques.
 Learn the basics of segmentation, features extraction, compression and recognition
methods for color models.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, ‘Digital Image Processing’, Pearson, Third Edition,
2010.
2. Anil K. Jain, ‘Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing’, Pearson, 2002.

REFERENCES:
1. Kenneth R. Castleman, ‘Digital Image Processing’, Pearson, 2006.
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven Eddins, ‘Digital Image Processing using
MATLAB’, Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
3. D,E. Dudgeon and RM. Mersereau, ‘Multidimensional Digital Signal Processing’, Prentice
Hall Professional Technical Reference, 1990.
4. William K. Pratt, ‘Digital Image Processing’, John Wiley, New York, 2002
5. Milan Sonka et al ‘Image processing, analysis and machine vision’, Brookes/Cole, Vikas
Publishing House, 2nd edition, 1999

CS8085 SOCIAL NETWORK ANALYSIS LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of semantic web and related applications.
 To learn knowledge representation using ontology.
 To understand human behaviour in social web and related communities.
 To learn visualization of social networks.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Semantic Web: Limitations of current Web - Development of Semantic Web -
Emergence of the Social Web - Social Network analysis: Development of Social Network Analysis
- Key concepts and measures in network analysis - Electronic sources for network analysis:
Electronic discussion networks, Blogs and online communities - Web-based networks -
Applications of Social Network Analysis.

UNIT II MODELLING, AGGREGATING AND KNOWLEDGE

REPRESENTATION 9
Ontology and their role in the Semantic Web: Ontology-based knowledge Representation -
Ontology languages for the Semantic Web: Resource Description Framework - Web Ontology
Language - Modelling and aggregating social network data: State-of-the-art in network data
representation - Ontological representation of social individuals - Ontological representation of
social relationships - Aggregating and reasoning with social network data - Advanced
representations.

UNIT III EXTRACTION AND MINING COMMUNITIES IN WEB SOCIAL

NETWORKS 9
Extracting evolution of Web Community from a Series of Web Archive - Detecting communities in
social networks - Definition of community - Evaluating communities - Methods for community
detection and mining - Applications of community mining algorithms - Tools for detecting

108
communities social network infrastructures and communities - Decentralized online social
networks - Multi-Relational characterization of dynamic social network communities.

UNIT IV PREDICTING HUMAN BEHAVIOUR AND PRIVACY ISSUES 9

Understanding and predicting human behaviour for social communities - User data management -
Inference and Distribution - Enabling new human experiences - Reality mining - Context -
Awareness - Privacy in online social networks - Trust in online environment - Trust models based
on subjective logic - Trust network analysis - Trust transitivity analysis - Combining trust and
reputation - Trust derivation based on trust comparisons - Attack spectrum and countermeasures.

UNIT V VISUALIZATION AND APPLICATIONS OF SOCIAL NETWORKS 9

Graph theory - Centrality - Clustering - Node-Edge Diagrams - Matrix representation - Visualizing
online social networks, Visualizing social networks with matrix-based representations - Matrix and
Node-Link Diagrams - Hybrid representations - Applications - Cover networks - Community
welfare - Collaboration networks - Co-Citation networks.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to:
 Develop semantic web related applications.
 Represent knowledge using ontology.
 Predict human behaviour in social web and related communities.
 Visualize social networks.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter Mika, “Social Networks and the Semantic Web”, First Edition, Springer 2007.
2. Borko Furht, “Handbook of Social Network Technologies and Applications”, 1st Edition,
Springer, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. Guandong Xu ,Yanchun Zhang and Lin Li, “Web Mining and Social Networking – Techniques
and applications”, First Edition, Springer, 2011.
2. Dion Goh and Schubert Foo, “Social information Retrieval Systems: Emerging Technologies
and Applications for Searching the Web Effectively”, IGI Global Snippet, 2008.
3. Max Chevalier, Christine Julien and Chantal Soulé-Dupuy, “Collaborative and Social
Information Retrieval and Access: Techniques for Improved user Modelling”, IGI Global
Snippet, 2009.
4. John G. Breslin, Alexander Passant and Stefan Decker, “The Social Semantic Web”, Springer,
2009.

IT8073 INFORMATION SECURITY L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of Information Security
 To know the legal, ethical and professional issues in Information Security
 To know the aspects of risk management
 To become aware of various standards in this area
 To know the technological aspects of Information Security

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
History, What is Information Security?, Critical Characteristics of Information, NSTISSC
Security Model, Components of an Information System, Securing the Components, Balancing
Security and Access, The SDLC, The Security SDLC

109
UNIT II SECURITY INVESTIGATION 9
Need for Security, Business Needs, Threats, Attacks, Legal, Ethical and Professional Issues -
An Overview of Computer Security - Access Control Matrix, Policy-Security policies,
Confidentiality policies, Integrity policies and Hybrid policies

UNIT III SECURITY ANALYSIS 9

Risk Management: Identifying and Assessing Risk, Assessing and Controlling Risk -
Systems: Access Control Mechanisms, Information Flow and Confinement Problem

UNIT IV LOGICAL DESIGN 9

Blueprint for Security, Information Security Policy, Standards and Practices, ISO 17799/BS
7799, NIST Models, VISA International Security Model, Design of Security Architecture,
Planning for Continuity

UNIT V PHYSICAL DESIGN 9

Security Technology, IDS, Scanning and Analysis Tools, Cryptography, Access Control
Devices, Physical Security, Security and Personnel
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
 Discuss the basics of information security
 Illustrate the legal, ethical and professional issues in information security
 Demonstrate the aspects of risk management.
 Become aware of various standards in the Information Security System
 Design and implementation of Security Techniques.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Michael E Whitman and Herbert J Mattord, “Principles of Information Security”, Vikas
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2003

REFERENCES
1. Micki Krause, Harold F. Tipton, “ Handbook of Information Security Management”,
Vol 1-3 CRCPress LLC, 2004.
2. Stuart McClure, Joel Scrambray, George Kurtz, “Hacking Exposed”, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 2003
3. Matt Bishop, “ Computer Security Art and Science”, Pearson/PHI, 2002.

CS8087 SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamentals of software defined networks.
 To understand the separation of the data plane and the control plane.
 To study about the SDN Programming.
 To study about the various applications of SDN

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
History of Software Defined Networking (SDN) – Modern Data Center – Traditional Switch
Architecture – Why SDN – Evolution of SDN – How SDN Works – Centralized and
Distributed Control and Date Planes

UNIT II OPEN FLOW & SDN CONTROLLERS 9

Open Flow Specification – Drawbacks of Open SDN, SDN via APIs, SDN via Hypervisor-
110
Based Overlays – SDN via Opening up the Device – SDN Controllers – General Concepts

UNIT III DATA CENTERS 9

Multitenant and Virtualized Multitenant Data Center – SDN Solutions for the Data Center
Network – VLANs – EVPN – VxLAN – NVGRE

UNIT IV SDN PROGRAMMING 9

Programming SDNs: Northbound Application Programming Interface, Current Languages
and Tools, Composition of SDNs – Network Functions Virtualization (NFV) and Software
Defined Networks: Concepts, Implementation and Applications

UNIT V SDN 9
Juniper SDN Framework – IETF SDN Framework – Open Daylight Controller – Floodlight
Controller – Bandwidth Calendaring – Data Center Orchestration
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Analyze the evolution of software defined networks
 Express the various components of SDN and their uses
 Explain the use of SDN in the current networking scenario
 Design and develop various applications of SDN

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paul Goransson and Chuck Black, ―Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive
Approach, First Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2014.
2. Thomas D. Nadeau, Ken Gray, ―SDN: Software Defined Networks, O'Reilly
Media, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Siamak Azodolmolky, ―Software Defined Networking with Open Flow, Packet
Publishing, 2013.
2. Vivek Tiwari, ―SDN and Open Flow for Beginnersǁ, Amazon Digital Services, Inc.,
2013.
3. Fei Hu, Editor, ―Network Innovation through Open Flow and SDN: Principles and
Design, CRC Press, 2014.

CS8074 CYBER FORENSICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn computer forensics
 To become familiar with forensics tools
 To learn to analyze and validate forensics data

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER FORENSICS 9

Introduction to Traditional Computer Crime, Traditional problems associated with Computer
Crime. Introduction to Identity Theft & Identity Fraud. Types of CF techniques - Incident and
incident response methodology - Forensic duplication and investigation. Preparation for IR:
Creating response tool kit and IR team. - Forensics Technology and Systems -
Understanding Computer Investigation – Data Acquisition.

UNIT II EVIDENCE COLLECTION AND FORENSICS TOOLS 9

Processing Crime and Incident Scenes – Working with Windows and DOS Systems.
Current Computer Forensics Tools: Software/ Hardware Tools.
111
UNIT III ANALYSIS AND VALIDATION 9
Validating Forensics Data – Data Hiding Techniques – Performing Remote Acquisition –
Network Forensics – Email Investigations – Cell Phone and Mobile Devices Forensics

UNIT IV ETHICAL HACKING 9

Introduction to Ethical Hacking - Footprinting and Reconnaissance - Scanning Networks -
Enumeration - System Hacking - Malware Threats - Sniffing

UNIT V ETHICAL HACKING IN WEB 9

Social Engineering - Denial of Service - Session Hijacking - Hacking Web servers - Hacking
Web Applications – SQL Injection - Hacking Wireless Networks - Hacking Mobile Platforms.

TOTAL 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
 Understand the basics of computer forensics
 Apply a number of different computer forensic tools to a given scenario
 Analyze and validate forensics data
 Identify the vulnerabilities in a given network infrastructure
 Implement real-world hacking techniques to test system security

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bill Nelson, Amelia Phillips, Frank Enfinger, Christopher Steuart, “Computer

Forensics and Investigations”, Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2016.
2. CEH official Certfied Ethical Hacking Review Guide, Wiley India Edition, 2015.

REFERENCES
1. John [Link], “Computer Forensics”, Cengage Learning, 2005
2. [Link], “Computer Forensics and Cyber Crime”: An Introduction”, 3rd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2013.
3. AnkitFadia “ Ethical Hacking” Second Edition, Macmillan India Ltd, 2006
4. Kenneth [Link] “Insider Computer Fraud” Auerbach Publications Taylor &amp;
Francis Group–2008.

CS8086 SOFT COMPUTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basic concepts of Soft Computing
 To become familiar with various techniques like neural networks, genetic algorithms
and fuzzy systems.
 To apply soft computing techniques to solve problems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING 9

Introduction-Artificial Intelligence-Artificial Neural Networks-Fuzzy Systems-Genetic
Algorithm and Evolutionary Programming-Swarm Intelligent Systems-Classification of
ANNs-McCulloch and Pitts Neuron Model-Learning Rules: Hebbian and Delta- Perceptron
Network-Adaline Network-Madaline Network.

UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Back propagation Neural Networks - Kohonen Neural Network -Learning Vector
Quantization -Hamming Neural Network - Hopfield Neural Network- Bi-directional
112
 Associative Memory -Adaptive Resonance Theory Neural Networks- Support Vector
Machines - Spike Neuron Models.

UNIT III FUZZY SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical Sets and Fuzzy Sets - Classical Relations and Fuzzy
Relations -Membership Functions -Defuzzification - Fuzzy Arithmetic and Fuzzy Measures -
Fuzzy Rule Base and Approximate Reasoning - Introduction to Fuzzy Decision Making.

UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Basic Concepts- Working Principles -Encoding- Fitness Function - Reproduction -
Inheritance Operators - Cross Over - Inversion and Deletion -Mutation Operator - Bit-wise
Operators -Convergence of Genetic Algorithm.
UNIT V HYBRID SYSTEMS 9
Hybrid Systems -Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic -GA Based Weight
Determination - LR-Type Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy Neuron - Fuzzy BP Architecture -
Learning in Fuzzy BP- Inference by Fuzzy BP - Fuzzy ArtMap: A Brief Introduction - Soft
Computing Tools - GA in Fuzzy Logic Controller Design - Fuzzy Logic Controller

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
 Apply suitable soft computing techniques for various applications.
 Integrate various soft computing techniques for complex problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link], [Link], "Soft Computing with MATLAB Programming", Oxford
University Press, 2015.
2. [Link] , [Link], "Principles of Soft Computing", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
2nd Edition, 2011.
3. [Link], [Link] Pai, "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic
Algorithm, Synthesis and Applications ", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft
Computing”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2002.
2. Kwang [Link], “First course on Fuzzy Theory and Applications”, Springer, 2005.
3. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, “Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic-Theory and Applications”,
Prentice Hall, 1996.
4. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms,
Applications, and Programming Techniques”, Addison Wesley, 2003.

GE8076 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values,
to instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.

UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10

Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for professional excellence and stress management.

113
UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.

UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9

Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics –
A Balanced Outlook on Law.

UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9

Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest –
Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
– Discrimination.

UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8

Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to apply ethics in society, discuss
the ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the
society.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2003.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics –
Concepts and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
Engineers”, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal
Integrity and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, ‘ Value Education’, Vethathiri publications, Erode, 2011.

Web sources:
1. [Link]
2. [Link]
3. [Link]
4. [Link]

114
CS8080 INFORMATION RETRIEVAL TECHNIQUES LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of Information Retrieval.
 To understand machine learning techniques for text classification and clustering.
 To understand various search engine system operations.
 To learn different techniques of recommender system.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Information Retrieval – Early Developments – The IR Problem – The User‘s Task – Information
versus Data Retrieval - The IR System – The Software Architecture of the IR System – The
Retrieval and Ranking Processes - The Web – The e-Publishing Era – How the web changed
Search – Practical Issues on the Web – How People Search – Search Interfaces Today –
Visualization in Search Interfaces.

UNIT II MODELING AND RETRIEVAL EVALUATION 9

Basic IR Models - Boolean Model - TF-IDF (Term Frequency/Inverse Document Frequency)
Weighting - Vector Model – Probabilistic Model – Latent Semantic Indexing Model – Neural
Network Model – Retrieval Evaluation – Retrieval Metrics – Precision and Recall – Reference
Collection – User-based Evaluation – Relevance Feedback and Query Expansion – Explicit
Relevance Feedback.

UNIT III TEXT CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING 9

A Characterization of Text Classification – Unsupervised Algorithms: Clustering – Naïve Text
Classification – Supervised Algorithms – Decision Tree – k-NN Classifier – SVM Classifier –
Feature Selection or Dimensionality Reduction – Evaluation metrics – Accuracy and Error –
Organizing the classes – Indexing and Searching – Inverted Indexes – Sequential Searching –
Multi-dimensional Indexing.

UNIT IV WEB RETRIEVAL AND WEB CRAWLING 9

The Web – Search Engine Architectures – Cluster based Architecture – Distributed Architectures
– Search Engine Ranking – Link based Ranking – Simple Ranking Functions – Learning to Rank –
Evaluations -- Search Engine Ranking – Search Engine User Interaction – Browsing – Applications
of a Web Crawler – Taxonomy – Architecture and Implementation – Scheduling Algorithms –
Evaluation.

UNIT V RECOMMENDER SYSTEM 9

Recommender Systems Functions – Data and Knowledge Sources – Recommendation
Techniques – Basics of Content-based Recommender Systems – High Level Architecture –
Advantages and Drawbacks of Content-based Filtering – Collaborative Filtering – Matrix
factorization models – Neighborhood models.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Use an open source search engine framework and explore its capabilities
 Apply appropriate method of classification or clustering.
 Design and implement innovative features in a search engine.
 Design and implement a recommender system.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ricardo Baeza-Yates and Berthier Ribeiro-Neto, ―Modern Information Retrieval: The Concepts
and Technology behind Search, Second Edition, ACM Press Books, 2011.
2. Ricci, F, Rokach, L. Shapira, [Link], “Recommender Systems Handbook”, First Edition, 2011.

115
REFERENCES:
1. C. Manning, P. Raghavan, and H. Schütze, ―Introduction to Information Retrieval, Cambridge
University Press, 2008.
2. Stefan Buettcher, Charles L. A. Clarke and Gordon V. Cormack, ―Information Retrieval:
Implementing and Evaluating Search Engines, The MIT Press, 2010.

CS8078 GREEN COMPUTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamentals of Green Computing.
 To analyze the Green computing Grid Framework.
 To understand the issues related with Green compliance.
 To study and develop various case studies.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS 9
Green IT Fundamentals: Business, IT, and the Environment – Green computing: carbon
foot print, scoop on power – Green IT Strategies: Drivers, Dimensions, and Goals –
Environmentally Responsible Business: Policies, Practices, and Metrics.

UNIT II GREEN ASSETS AND MODELING 9

Green Assets: Buildings, Data Centers, Networks, and Devices – Green Business
Process Management: Modeling, Optimization, and Collaboration – Green Enterprise
Architecture – Environmental Intelligence – Green Supply Chains – Green Information
Systems: Design and Development Models.

UNIT III GRID FRAMEWORK 9

Virtualization of IT systems – Role of electric utilities, Telecommuting, teleconferencing
and teleporting – Materials recycling – Best ways for Green PC – Green Data center –
Green Grid framework.

UNIT IV GREEN COMPLIANCE 9

Socio-cultural aspects of Green IT – Green Enterprise Transformation Roadmap –
Green Compliance: Protocols, Standards, and Audits – Emergent Carbon Issues:
Technologies and Future.

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

The Environmentally Responsible Business Strategies (ERBS) – Case Study Scenarios
for Trial Runs – Case Studies – Applying Green IT Strategies and Applications to a
Home, Hospital, Packaging Industry and Telecom Sector.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Acquire knowledge to adopt green computing practices to minimize negative
impacts on the environment.
 Enhance the skill in energy saving practices in their use of hardware.
 Evaluate technology tools that can reduce paper waste and carbon footprint by the
stakeholders.
 Understand the ways to minimize equipment disposal requirements .

116
 TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhuvan Unhelkar, “Green IT Strategies and Applications-Using Environmental
Intelligence”, CRC Press, June 2014.
2. Woody Leonhard, Katherine Murray, “Green Home computing for dummies”,
August 2012.

REFERENCES:

1. Alin Gales, Michael Schaefer, Mike Ebbers, “Green Data Center: steps for the
Journey”, Shroff/IBM rebook, 2011.
2. John Lamb, “The Greening of IT”, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Jason Harris, “Green Computing and Green IT- Best Practices on regulations &
industry”, [Link], 2008
4. Carl speshocky, “Empowering Green Initiatives with IT”, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
5. Wu Chun Feng (editor), “Green computing: Large Scale energy efficiency”, CRC
Press

CS8076 GPU ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of GPU architectures
 To write programs for massively parallel processors
 To understand the issues in mapping algorithms for GPUs
 To introduce different GPU programming models
UNIT I GPU ARCHITECTURE 12
Evolution of GPU architectures - Understanding Parallelism with GPU –Typical GPU Architecture -
CUDA Hardware Overview - Threads, Blocks, Grids, Warps, Scheduling - Memory Handling with
CUDA: Shared Memory, Global Memory, Constant Memory and Texture Memory.

UNIT II CUDA PROGRAMMING 8

Using CUDA - Multi GPU - Multi GPU Solutions - Optimizing CUDA Applications: Problem
Decomposition, Memory Considerations, Transfers, Thread Usage, Resource Contentions.

UNIT III PROGRAMMING ISSUES 8

Common Problems: CUDA Error Handling, Parallel Programming Issues, Synchronization,
Algorithmic Issues, Finding and Avoiding Errors.

UNIT IV OPENCL BASICS 8

OpenCL Standard – Kernels – Host Device Interaction – Execution Environment – Memory
Model – Basic OpenCL Examples.

UNIT V ALGORITHMS ON GPU 9

Parallel Patterns: Convolution, Prefix Sum, Sparse Matrix - Matrix Multiplication - Programming
Heterogeneous Cluster.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
 Describe GPU Architecture
 Write programs using CUDA, identify issues and debug them
 Implement efficient algorithms in GPUs for common application kernels, such as matrix
multiplication
 Write simple programs using OpenCL
 Identify efficient parallel programming patterns to solve problems
117
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shane Cook, CUDA Programming: ―A Developer's Guide to Parallel Computing with GPUs
(Applications of GPU Computing), First Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012.
2. David R. Kaeli, Perhaad Mistry, Dana Schaa, Dong Ping Zhang, “Heterogeneous computing
with OpenCL”, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kauffman, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Nicholas Wilt, ―CUDA Handbook: A Comprehensive Guide to GPU Programming, Addison -
Wesley, 2013.
2. Jason Sanders, Edward Kandrot, ―CUDA by Example: An Introduction to General Purpose
GPU Programmingǁ, Addison - Wesley, 2010.
3. David B. Kirk, Wen-mei W. Hwu, Programming Massively Parallel Processors - A Hands-on
Approach, Third Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2016.
4. [Link]
5. [Link]

CS8084 NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING LTPC

3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamentals of natural language processing
 To understand the use of CFG and PCFG in NLP
 To understand the role of semantics of sentences and pragmatics
 To apply the NLP techniques to IR applications

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Origins and challenges of NLP – Language Modeling: Grammar-based LM, Statistical LM -
Regular Expressions, Finite-State Automata – English Morphology, Transducers for lexicon
and rules, Tokenization, Detecting and Correcting Spelling Errors, Minimum Edit Distance

UNIT II WORD LEVEL ANALYSIS 9

Unsmoothed N-grams, Evaluating N-grams, Smoothing, Interpolation and Backoff – Word
Classes, Part-of-Speech Tagging, Rule-based, Stochastic and Transformation-based
tagging, Issues in PoS tagging – Hidden Markov and Maximum Entropy models.

UNIT III SYNTACTIC ANALYSIS 9

Context-Free Grammars, Grammar rules for English, Treebanks, Normal Forms for
grammar – Dependency Grammar – Syntactic Parsing, Ambiguity, Dynamic Programming
parsing – Shallow parsing – Probabilistic CFG, Probabilistic CYK, Probabilistic Lexicalized
CFGs - Feature structures, Unification of feature structures.

UNIT IV SEMANTICS AND PRAGMATICS 10

Requirements for representation, First-Order Logic, Description Logics – Syntax-Driven
Semantic analysis, Semantic attachments – Word Senses, Relations between Senses,
Thematic Roles, selectional restrictions – Word Sense Disambiguation, WSD using
Supervised, Dictionary & Thesaurus, Bootstrapping methods – Word Similarity using
Thesaurus and Distributional methods.

UNIT V DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND LEXICAL RESOURCES 8

Discourse segmentation, Coherence – Reference Phenomena, Anaphora Resolution using
Hobbs and Centering Algorithm – Coreference Resolution – Resources: Porter Stemmer,
Lemmatizer, Penn Treebank, Brill's Tagger, WordNet, PropBank, FrameNet, Brown Corpus,
British National Corpus (BNC).
TOTAL :45 PERIODS

118
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 To tag a given text with basic Language features
 To design an innovative application using NLP components
 To implement a rule based system to tackle morphology/syntax of a language
 To design a tag set to be used for statistical processing for real-time applications
 To compare and contrast the use of different statistical approaches for different
types of NLP applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Daniel Jurafsky, James H. Martin―Speech and Language Processing: An
Introduction to Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics and
Speech, Pearson Publication, 2014.
2. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein and Edward Loper, ―Natural Language Processing with
Pythonǁ, First Edition, O‘Reilly Media, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Breck Baldwin, ―Language Processing with Java and LingPipe Cookbook, Atlantic
Publisher, 2015.
2. Richard M Reese, ―Natural Language Processing with Javaǁ, O‘Reilly Media, 2015.
3. Nitin Indurkhya and Fred J. Damerau, ―Handbook of Natural Language Processing,
Second Edition, Chapman and Hall/CRC Press, 2010.
4. Tanveer Siddiqui, U.S. Tiwary, “Natural Language Processing and Information
Retrieval”, Oxford University Press, 2008.

CS8001 PARALLEL ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand different parallel architectures and models of computation.
To introduce the various classes of parallel algorithms.
To study parallel algorithms for basic problems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for Parallel Processing - Data and Temporal Parallelism - Models of Computation -
RAM and PRAM Model – Shared Memory and Message Passing Models- Processor
Organisations - PRAM Algorithm – Analysis of PRAM Algorithms- Parallel Programming
Languages.

UNIT II PRAM ALGORITHMS 9

Parallel Algorithms for Reduction – Prefix Sum – List Ranking –Preorder Tree Traversal –
Searching -Sorting - Merging Two Sorted Lists – Matrix Multiplication - Graph Coloring -
Graph Searching.

UNIT III SIMD ALGORITHMS -I 9

2D Mesh SIMD Model - Parallel Algorithms for Reduction - Prefix Computation - Selection -
Odd-Even Merge Sorting - Matrix Multiplication

119
 UNIT IV SIMD ALGORITHMS -II 9
Hypercube SIMD Model - Parallel Algorithms for Selection- Odd-Even Merge Sort- Bitonic
Sort- Matrix Multiplication Shuffle Exchange SIMD Model - Parallel Algorithms for Reduction
-Bitonic Merge Sort - Matrix Multiplication - Minimum Cost Spanning Tree

UNIT V MIMD ALGORITHMS 9

UMA Multiprocessor Model -Parallel Summing on Multiprocessor- Matrix Multiplication on
Multiprocessors and Multicomputer - Parallel Quick Sort - Mapping Data to Processors.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
 Develop parallel algorithms for standard problems and applications.
 Analyse efficiency of different parallel algorithms.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Michael J. Quinn, "Parallel Computing : Theory & Practice", Tata McGraw Hill
Edition, Second edition, 2017.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, "Fundamentals of
Computer Algorithms", University press, Second edition , 2011.
3. V Rajaraman, C Siva Ram Murthy, " Parallel computers- Architecture and
Programming ", PHI learning, 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. Ananth Grame, George Karpis, Vipin Kumar and Anshul Gupta, "Introduction to
Parallel Computing", 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2003.
2. M Sasikumar, Dinesh Shikhare and P Ravi Prakash , " Introduction to Parallel
Processing", PHI learning , 2013.
3. [Link], "The Design and Analysis of Parallel Algorithms", PHI, 1989.

IT8077 L T P C
SPEECH PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the fundamentals of the speech processing
 Explore the various speech models
 Gather knowledge about the phonetics and pronunciation processing
 Perform wavelet analysis of speech
 To understand the concepts of speech recognition

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - knowledge in speech and language processing - ambiguity - models and algorithms
- language - thought - understanding - regular expression and automata - words & transducers –
N grams

UNIT II SPEECH MODELLING 9

Word classes and part of speech tagging – hidden markov model – computing likelihood: the
forward algorithm – training hidden markov model – maximum entropy model – transformation-
based tagging – evaluation and error analysis – issues in part of speech tagging – noisy channel
model for spelling

UNIT III SPEECH PRONUNCIATION AND SIGNAL PROCESSING 9

Phonetics - speech sounds and phonetic transcription - articulatory phonetics - phonological
categories and pronunciation variation - acoustic phonetics and signals - phonetic resources -
articulatory and gestural phonology
120
UNIT IV SPEECH IDENTIFICATION 9
Speech synthesis - text normalization - phonetic analysis - prosodic analysis – diphone waveform
synthesis - unit selection waveform synthesis - evaluation

UNIT V SPEECH RECOGNITION 9

Automatic speech recognition - architecture - applying hidden markov model - feature extraction:
mfcc vectors - computing acoustic likelihoods - search and decoding - embedded training -
multipass decoding: n-best lists and lattices- a* (‘stack’) decoding - context-dependent acoustic
models: triphones - discriminative training - speech recognition by humans
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
On Successful completion of the course ,Students will be able to
 Create new algorithms with speech processing
 Derive new speech models
 Perform various language phonetic analysis
 Create a new speech identification system
 Generate a new speech recognition system

TEXT BOOK:
1. Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin, “ Speech and Language Processing: An Introduction to
Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics and Speech Recognition”, Person
education,2013.

REFERENCES
1. Kai-Fu Lee, “Automatic Speech Recognition”, The Springer International Series in Engineering
and Computer Science, 1999.
2. Himanshu Chaurasiya, “Soft Computing Implementation of Automatic Speech Recognition”,
LAP Lambert Academic Publishing, 2010.
3. Claudio Becchetti, Klucio Prina Ricotti, “Speech Recognition: Theory and C++
implementation”,Wiley publications 2008.
4. Ikrami Eldirawy , Wesam Ashour, “Visual Speech Recognition”, Wiley publications , 2011

GE8073 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE LT PC

3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and application

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and
Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-
ultra-thinfilms-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties:
Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to
properties and motivation for study (qualitative only).

UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9

Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Milling,
Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.

121
UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-
growth, laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships applications-
Nanometal oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nanoclays-
functionalization and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
applications.

UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9

X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques,
Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques-
AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines,
Targetted drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro
Mechanical Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial inhibition,
Nanoparticles for sunbarrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
 Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
 Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial

TEXT BOOKS :
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties
and Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale Charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd edition,
Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.

REFERENCES:
1. G Timp, “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia,“The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure,
Theory, Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.

122